(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Community Texts | Project Gutenberg | Children's Library | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Additional Collections
Search: Advanced Search
Anonymous User (login or join us)
Upload
See other formats

Full text of "Arkansas Elevator Code"

ARKANSAS 

ELEVATOR SAFETY 

RULES AND REGULATIONS 




Arkansas Department of Labor 

Elevator Safety Division 

10421 West Markham 

Little Rock, Arkansas 72205-2190 



Mike Beebe 

Governor 



James L. Salkeld 

Director of Labor 



010.05 Administrative Regulations of the Elevator Safety Board 
for the Elevator Safety Division of the Arkansas Department of 

Labor 







CONTENTS 




Rule Number 


Title 


Page Number 


010.05-001 


Statement of Organization 






and Operations 


7 


010.05-002 


Information for Public Guidance 


7 


010.05-003 


General Organization 


8 


010.05-004 


Purpose and Scope 


9 


010.05-005 


Definitions 


10 


010.05-006 


Rule-Making 


12 


010.05-007 


Emer; 


gency Rule-Making 


18 


010.05-008 


Declaratory Orders 


18 


010.05-009 


Adjudicative Hearings 


20 




A. 


Scope of This Rule 


20 




B. 


Presiding Officer 


20 




C. 


Appearances 


20 




D. 


Consolidation 


21 




E. 


Notice to Interested Parties 


21 




F. 


Service of Papers 


21 




G. 


Initiation and Notice of Hearing 


21 




H. 


Motions 


22 




I. 


Answer 


22 




J. 


Discovery 


22 




K. 


Continuances 


23 




L. 


Hearing Procedures 


23 



M. 


Order of Proceedings 


24 


N. 


Evidence 


24 


O. 


Default 


26 


P. 


Subpoenas 


26 


Q. 


Recording the Proceedings 


26 


R. 


Factors to be Considered in 






Imposing Sanctions or Fines 


26 


S. 


Final Order 


27 


010.05-010 Licensing 


28 


A. 


General 


28 


B. 


Requirement to Keep 






Current Addresses on File 


28 


C. 


Review of Application 


28 


D. 


Denial of License 


28 


E. 


Suspension, Revocation, 






Annulment or Withdrawal 


29 


F. 


Emergency Action 


29 


G. 


Voluntary Surrender of License 


30 


H. 


Duty of a Sanctioned Licensee 


30 


I. 


Reinstatement After Suspension 


31 


J. 


Re-Licensure for Revoked or 






Surrendered License 


32 


K. 


Inspectors 


32 


L. 


Elevator Contractors 


34 


M. 


Elevator Mechanics 


34 


N. 


License Renewal, Generally 


36 


O. 


Reciprocity 


36 


P. 


Verified Work Experience 


36 


Q. 


Continuing Education 


37 


R. 


Grandfather Provision 


37 


S. 


Prohibitions and Requirements 


38 


010.05-011 New Construction and Installation 


39 


A. 


Minimum Standards 


39 


B. 


Installation Permit 


40 


C. 


Inspection and Testing 


41 


D. 


Initial Operating Permit 


41 


E. 


Fees 


42 


010.05-012 Alterations 


42 





A. 


Minimum Standards 


42 




B. 


Alteration Permit 


42 




C. 


Inspection and Testing 


43 




D. 


Operating permit 


43 




E. 


Fees 


44 


010.05-013 


Existing Elevators 


44 




A. 


Minimum Standards 


44 




B. 


Operation 


45 


010.05-014 


Periodic Inspections and Testing 


45 




A. 


Minimum Standards 


46 




B. 


Periodic Inspections 


46 




C. 


Tests 


47 




D. 


Inspection Reports 


47 




E. 


Fees 


47 


010.05-015 


Operating Permits 


48 




A. 


Permit Required 


48 




B. 


Display 


48 




C. 


Permit Information 


48 




D. 


Denial of Operating Permit 


49 




E. 


Revocation of an 








Operating Permit 


50 




F. 


Fees 


52 




G. 


Requirement to Keep Current 








Address on File 


53 




H. 


Requirement to Report Accidents 53 


010.05-016 


Variances 


53 


010.05-017 


Civil Fines and Other Enforcement 


55 


010.05-018 


Accessibility to the Disabled 


57 


010.05-019 


Other 


Appeals 


58 


010.05-020 


Repea 


ler, Effective Date and History 


58 



111 



010.05 Administrative Regulations of the Elevator Safety Board 
for the Elevator Safety Division of the Arkansas Department of 
Labor 



010.05-001 Statement of Organization and Operations 

The Arkansas Department of Labor is an agency of state government 
created by Act 161 of 1937, Ark. Code Ann. § 11-2-101 et seq. The 
Elevator Safety Board was created by Act 189 of 1963, Ark. Code 
Ann. § 20-24-105, and given regulatory authority over the construc- 
tion, alteration, repair, maintenance, operation, and inspection of ele- 
vators, escalators, moving sidewalks, dumbwaiters, and wheelchair 
lifts, and the power to oversee the licensure of elevator inspectors, 
elevator mechanics, and elevator contractors. The Arkansas Depart- 
ment of Labor is charged with enforcement of the state's laws regard- 
ing elevator safety, as well as the regulations promulgated by the Ele- 
vator Safety Board, Ark. Code Ann. § 20-24-104. Ultimate authority 
for the operation of the agency is in the Director of the Department of 
Labor. For administrative purposes, the Director has created the Ele- 
vator Safety Division which is responsible for administering and en- 
forcing state law and the regulations of the Elevator Safety Board. 
The individual charged with the day-to-day operations of the Elevator 
Safety Division is referred to as Chief Elevator Inspector, who is se- 
lected by the Director and is directly supervised by the Code Enforce- 
ment Administrator. From time to time, the board promulgates rules. 



010.05-002 Information for Public Guidance 

The mailing address and telephone number for the Elevator Safety 
Division is: 

Elevator Safety Division 
Arkansas Department of Labor 
10421 West Markham Street 
Little Rock, AR 72205 
(501)682-4538 

The Department of Labor makes available a list of persons holding 
certain responsibilities for handling FOIA requests, licensing ques- 



tions, and complaints against licensees so that the public may obtain 
information about the agency or make submissions or requests. The 
names, mailing addresses, telephone numbers, and electronic ad- 
dresses can be obtained from the agency's office or Web site. 

The agency has a list of official forms used by the agency and a list of 
all formal, written statements of policy and written interpretative 
memoranda, and orders, decisions and opinions resulting from adjudi- 
cations, which may be obtained from the agency's office or Web site. 
The Department of Labor Web site is: 
http://www.arkansas.gov/labor/. The Elevator Safety Division's Web 
site is: http ://www. arkansas. gov/labor/divisions/elevator_p 1 .html . 
Copies of all forms used by the agency, written statements of policy 
and written interpretive memoranda, and all orders issued by the 
agency may be obtained from the agency's office. 



010.05-003 General Organization 

A. The Elevator Safety Division is generally divided into an 
office staff and a field staff. The field staff is composed of Elevator 
Inspectors. 

B. The Elevator Safety Board consists of five (5) members, one 
(1) of whom is the Director of the Department of Labor, who serves 
as Chairman. A quorum for the transaction of business is a majority 
of the members. 

C. All public meetings, including meetings of the Elevator 
Safety Board will be conducted pursuant to Robert's Rules of Order 
and in conformity with the Arkansas Freedom of Information Act. 
Regular meetings will be held every other month. Special meetings 
may be held on the call of the Chairman. 

D. The board or the agency may create standing and ad hoc 
committees. The Chairman will select members of committees. A 
quorum for the transaction of committee business is a majority of the 
number of voting members of the committee. 

E. The Chief Elevator Inspector will prepare the agenda for 
regular and special meetings. The agenda will be distributed to board 
members and agency staff and made available to the public in ad- 
vance of the meeting. The agenda should state with specificity the 



items that will be considered at a meeting, hearing, or workshop. The 
agenda should include the following topics as applicable: 

1 . The call to order; 

2. Review of minutes; 

3. Old business; 

4. New business; 

5. Other business; 

6. Adjudicatory hearings; 

7. Rule-making hearings; and 

8. Public comment. 

The order of the agenda items is intended to be flexible and may be 
adjusted to meet the needs of the agency. Additionally, the agenda may 
be amended by appropriate motion. 



010.05-004 Purpose and Scope 

A. Purpose 

1. The purpose of these regulations is to establish: 

a. minimum safety standards for the mainte- 

nance, inspection, tests, and operation of all elevators and escalators 
and other conveyances; 

b. minimum safety standards for the construc- 
tion of new elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators and other conveyances; 

c. minimum safety standards for the alteration 
of existing elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators and other conveyances; 

d. minimum safety standards for existing eleva- 
tors, escalators, dumbwaiters and other conveyances; 

e. rules prescribing fees; 

f rules for the application and granting of vari- 

ances and exceptions; 

g. minimum standards for licensing and quali- 

fying elevator inspectors, elevator contractors, and elevator mechanics; 



and 

h. rules for the effective administration and 

enforcement of the Elevator Safety Law, Ark. Code Ann. § 20-24-101 
et seq. 

2. These regulations are intended to protect the general 

public, invitees, guests, employees, and all persons who could be rea- 
sonably expected to use an elevator, escalator, dumbwaiter or other 
conveyance. 

B. Scope and Application 

1. These regulations apply to all elevators, escalators, 
dumbwaiters and other conveyances in the State of Arkansas, except 
as specifically exempted herein. 

2. These regulations do not apply to: 

a. a conveyor, chain or bucket hoist, con- 
struction hoist or similar devices used for the primary purpose of ele- 
vating or lowering materials and is not used for elevating or lowering 
workers or other riders, including those workers loading and unload- 
ing; 

b. tiering, piling, feeding, or similar machines 
or devices giving service within only one (1) story. 

3. Conveyances installed in private single-family 
dwellings are exempt from the testing and inspection requirements of 
Ark. Code Ann. § 20-24-112 and the permitting requirements of Ark. 
Code Ann. §§ 20-24-1 15 and -1 16. 



010.05-005 Definitions 

As used in these regulations, unless the context otherwise 
requires: 

A. "Alteration" means any change made to an existing eleva- 

tor, dumbwaiter, escalator or other conveyance, or to its hoistway, 
enclosure, or doors other than the repair or replacement of damaged, 
worn, or broken parts necessary for normal operation. The changing 



10 



of the speed governor shall be considered an alteration; 

B. "Authorized representative" means the building department 

of cities, towns, or other governmental subdivisions designated by the 
Department of Labor to enforce certain provisions of Ark. Code Ann. § 
20-24-101 etseq.; 

C. "Board" means the Arkansas Elevator Safety Board; 

D. "Conveyance" means an elevator, dumbwaiter, escalator, 
moving sidewalk, automatic people mover, platform lift or stairway 
chair lift; 

E. "Director" means the Director of the Department of Labor; 

F. "Department" means the Department of Labor; 

G. "Dormant elevator, dumbwaiter, or escalator" means an 
elevator or dumbwaiter whose cables have been removed, whose car 
and counterweight rest at the bottom of the shaftway, and whose shaft- 
way doors are permanently boarded up or barricaded on the inside or an 
escalator whose main power feed lines have been disconnected; 

H. "Dumbwaiter" means a hoisting and lowering mechanism, 

driven by mechanical power, equipped with a car which moves in 
guides in a substantially vertical direction, the floor area of which does 
not exceed nine (9) square feet, whose total compartment height does 
not exceed four feet (4'), the capacity of which does not exceed five 
hundred pounds (500 lbs.), and which is used exclusively for carrying 
freight; 

I. "Elevator" means a hoisting and lowering mechanism 

equipped with a car or platform which moves in guides in a substan- 
tially vertical direction; 

1. The term "elevator" shall not include a, conveyor 
chain bucket hoist, construction hoist, or similar devices used for the 
primary purpose of elevating or lowering materials, nor shall it include 
tiering, piling, feeding, or similar machines or devices giving service 
within only one (1) story; 

2. The term "power elevator" shall mean those driven by 
the application of energy other than hand or gravity; 



11 



3. "Hand elevators" shall mean those driven by manual 
power; 

4. The term "elevator" shall include vertical wheelchair 
lifts, inclined wheelchair lifts, and inclined stairway chairlifts installed 
in any location, including a private, single-family dwelling for use by 
individuals with physical disabilities; 

J. "Escalator" means a power-driven, inclined, continuous stair- 

way or runway used for raising or lowering passengers; 

K. "Freight elevator" means an elevator used for carrying 

freight and on which only the operator and the persons necessary for 
loading and unloading are permitted to ride; and 

L. "Passenger elevator" means an elevator that is used to carry 

persons other than the operator and persons necessary for loading and 
unloading. 



010.05-006 Rule-Making 

A. Authority 

The board has been authorized by the Legislature to promul- 
gate rules. Ark. Code Ann. § 20-24- 106(b). The board follows the 
procedural requirements of the Arkansas Administrative Procedure Act, 
in particular Ark. Code Ann. § 25-15-203 and § 25-15-204. Addition- 
ally, the agency is required to abide by the provisions of Ark. Code 
Ann. §10-3-309. 

B. Initiation of Rule-Making 

The process of adopting a new rule or amending or repealing 
an existing rule (hereinafter referred to "rule-making") may be initiated 
by request of the board that the staff submit proposed drafts. Addition- 
ally, staff of the agency may request permission of to initiate rule- 
making. Third persons outside the agency may petition for the issu- 
ance, amendment, or repeal of any rule. 

C. Petition to Initiate Rule-Making 



12 



Third parties may initiate rule-making to adopt, amend, or 
repeal a rule by filing a petition with the agency to initiate rule-making. 
The petition must contain the name, address, and telephone number of 
the petitioner, the specific rule or action requested, the reasons for the 
rule or action requested, and facts showing that the petitioner is regu- 
lated by the agency or has a substantial interest in the rule or action 
requested. 

The petition to initiate rule-making shall be filed with the Di- 
rector of the Department of Labor. 

Within thirty (30) days after submission of the petition, the 
board will either deny the petition, stating its reasons in writing, or will 
initiate rule-making. A special meeting will be called if necessary to 
meet this time frame. 

D. Pre-Filing with the Bureau of Legislative Research 

Thirty (30) days before the public-comment period ends, the 
agency will file with the Bureau of Legislative Research the text of the 
proposed rule or amendment as well as a financial impact statement and 
a Bureau of Legislative Research questionnaire as provided by Ark. 
Code Ann. § 10-3-309. 

E. Public Input 

1. Before finalizing language of a proposed new rule or 

an amendment to, or repeal of, an existing rule, the board will receive 
public input through written comments and/or oral submissions. The 
agency will designate in its public notice the format and timing of pub- 
lic comment. 

2. Any public hearing will provide affected persons and 

other members of the public a reasonable opportunity for presentation 
of evidence, arguments, and oral statements within reasonable condi- 
tions and limitations imposed by the agency to avoid duplication, irrele- 
vant comments, unnecessary delay, or disruption of the proceedings. 

3. The Director or his designee may preside at the public 

hearing. The agency must ensure that the agency personnel responsible 
for preparing the proposed rule or amendment are available, and will 
notify third parties initiating rule changes to be available to explain the 
proposal and to respond to questions or comments regarding the pro- 



13 



posed rule. 

4. The agency will preserve the comments made at the 
public hearing by a tape recording. 

5. Any person may submit written statements within the 
specified period of time. All timely, written statements will be consid- 
ered by the board and be made a part of the rule-making record. 

F. Notice of Rule-Making 

The agency will give notice of proposed rule-making to be 
published pursuant to Ark. Code Ann. § 25-15-204. The notice will set 
any written comment period and will specify the time, date, and place 
of any public hearing. 

G. The Decision to Adopt a Rule 

1. The board will not finalize language of the rule or 
decide whether to adopt a rule until the period for public comment has 
expired. 

2. Before acting on a proposed rule, the board will con- 
sider all of the written submissions and/or oral submissions received in 
the rule-making proceeding or any memorandum summarizing such 
oral submissions, and any regulatory analysis or fiscal impact statement 
issued in the rule-making proceedings. 

3. The board may use its own experience, specialized 
knowledge, and judgment in the adoption of a rule or consider the ex- 
perience, specialized knowledge and judgment of agency staff. 

H. Variance Between Adopted Rule and Published Notice of 

Proposed Rule 

1. The board may not adopt a rule that differs from the 

rule proposed in the published notice of the intended rule-making on 
which the rule is based unless: 

a. The final rule is in character with the origi- 

nal scheme and was a logical outgrowth of 
the notice and comments stemming from the 
proposed rule, or 



14 



b. The notice fairly apprised interested per- 

sons of the subject and the issues that 
would be considered so that those persons 
had an opportunity to comment. 

2. In determining whether the final rule is in character 

with the original scheme and was a logical outgrowth of the notice 
and comments, and that the notice of intended rule-making provided 
fair warning that the outcome of that rule-making proceeding could be 
the rule in question; the board must consider the following factors: 

a. The extent to which persons who will be 
affected by the rule should have under- 
stood that the rule-making proceeding on 
which it is based could affect their inter- 
ests; and 

b. The extent to which the subject matter of 
the rule or issues determined by the rule 
are different from the subject matter or 
issues contained in the notice of intended 
rule-making; and 

c. The extent to which the effects of the rule 
differ from the effects of the proposed rule 
contained in the notice of intended rule- 
making. 

I. Concise Statement of Reasons 

1 . When requested by an interested person, either prior 
to the adoption of a rule or within thirty (30) days after its adoption, 
the agency shall issue a concise statement of the principal reasons for 
and against the adoption of the rule. Requests for such a statement 
must be in writing and be delivered to the Director of the Department 
of Labor. The request should indicate whether the statement is sought 
for all or only a specified part of a rule. A request will be considered 
to have been submitted on the date on which it is received by the 
agency. 

2. The concise statement of reasons must contain: 



15 



a. The board's reasons for adopting the rule; 

b. An indication of any change between the text 
of the proposed rule and the text of the rule as finally adopted, with 
explanations for any such change; and 

c. The principal reasons urged in the rule- 
making procedure for and against the rule, and the board's reasons for 
overruling the arguments made against the rule. 

J. Contents 

The agency shall cause the board's rules to be published and 
made available to interested persons. The publication must include: 

1. The text of the rule; and 

2. A note containing the following: 

a. The date(s) the board adopted or amended 
the rule; 

b. The effective date(s) of the rule; 

c. Any findings required by any provisions of 
law as a prerequisite to adoption for effectiveness of 
the rule; and 

d. Citation to the entire specific statutory or 
other authority authorizing the adoption of the rule; 

3. The publication of the rule(s) must state the date of 
publication. 

K. Format 

The published rules of the board will be organized substan- 
tially in the following format: 

1 . Statement of Organization and Operations 

2. Information for Public Guidance 

3. General Organization 

4. Purpose and Scope 



16 



5. 


Definitions 


6. 


Rule-making 


7. 


Emergency Rule-making 


8. 


Declaratory Orders 


9. 


Adjudicative Hearings 


10. 


Licensing 


11. 


Et seq. Substantive rules and other rules of Agency 



L. Incorporation by Reference 

By reference in a rule, the board may incorporate all or any 
part of a code, standard, rule, or other matter if the board finds that 
copying the matter in the board's rule would be unduly cumbersome, 
expensive, or otherwise inexpedient. The reference in the rule must 
fully and precisely identify the incorporated matter by title, citation, 
date, and edition, if any; briefly indicate the precise subject and general 
contents of the incorporated matter; and state that the rule does not in- 
clude any later amendments or editions of the incorporated matter. The 
board may incorporate such a matter by reference in a proposed or 
adopted rule only if the agency makes copies of the incorporated matter 
readily available to the public. The rules must state how and where 
copies of the incorporated matter may be obtained at cost from the 
agency, and how and where copies may be obtained from an agency of 
the United States, this state, another state, or the organization, associa- 
tion, or persons originally issuing that matter. The agency must retain 
permanently a copy of any materials incorporated by reference in a rule 
of the board. 

M. Filing 

1. After the board formally adopts a new rule or amends 
a current rule or repeals an existing rule, and after the rule change has 
been reviewed by the Legislative Counsel, the agency staff will file 
final copies of the rule with the Secretary of State, the Arkansas State 
Library, and the Bureau of Legislative Research, or as otherwise pro- 
vided by Ark. Code Ann. § 25-15-204(d). 

2. Proof of filing a copy of the rule, amendment, or re- 
peal with the Secretary of State, the Arkansas State Library, and the 
Bureau of Legislative Research will be kept in a file maintained by the 
Legal Division of the Arkansas Department of Labor. 

3. Notice of the rule change will be posted on the 



17 



agency Web page. 

010.05-007 Emergency Rule-Making 

A. Request for Emergency Rule-Making 

The proponent of a rule may request the board to adopt an 
emergency rule. In addition to the text of the proposed rule or amend- 
ment to an existing rule and any other information required by Rule 
010.05-006(C), the proponent will provide a written statement setting 
out the facts or circumstances that would support a finding of imminent 
peril to the public health, safety, or welfare. 

B. Finding of an Emergency 

Upon receipt of the written statement requesting an emer- 
gency rule-making and documents or other evidence submitted in sup- 
port of the assertion that an emergency exists, the board will make an 
independent judgment as to whether the circumstances and facts consti- 
tute an imminent peril to the public health, safety, or welfare requiring 
adoption of the rule upon fewer than 30 days notice. If the board deter- 
mines that the circumstances warrant emergency rule-making, it will 
make a written determination that sets out the reasons for it's finding 
that an emergency exists. Upon making this finding, the board may 
proceed to adopt the rule without any prior notice or hearing, or it may 
determine to provide an abbreviated notice and hearing. 

C. Effective Date of Emergency Rule 

The emergency rule will be effective immediately upon filing, 
or at a stated time less than ten (10) days thereafter, if the agency finds 
that this effective date is necessary because of imminent peril to the 
public health, safety, or welfare. The agency will file with the rule the 
board's written findings justifying the determination that emergency 
rule-making is appropriate and, if applicable, the basis for the effective 
date of the emergency rule being less than ten (10) days after the filing 
of the rule pursuant to Ark. Code Ann. § 25-15-204(e). The agency will 
take appropriate measures to make emergency rules known to persons 
who may be affected by them. 



010.05-008 Declaratory Orders 



18 



A. Purpose and Use of Declaratory Orders 

A declaratory order is a means of resolving a controversy or 
answering questions or doubts concerning the applicability of statutory 
provisions, rules, or orders over which the agency has authority. A peti- 
tion for declaratory order may be used only to resolve questions or 
doubts as to how the statutes, rules, or orders may apply to the peti- 
tioner's particular circumstances. A declaratory order is not the appro- 
priate means for determining the conduct of another person or for ob- 
taining a policy statement of general applicability from an agency. A 
petition or declaratory order must describe the potential impact of stat- 
utes, rules, or orders upon the petitioner's interests. 

B. The Petition 

The process to obtain a declaratory order is begun by filing 
with the Director of the Department of Labor a petition that provides 
the following information: 

1. The caption shall read: Petition for Declaratory Order 
Before Arkansas Department of Labor. 

2. The name, address, telephone number, and facsimile 
number of the petitioner. 

3. The name, address, telephone number, and facsimile 
number of the attorney of the petitioner. 

4. The statutory provision(s), board rule(s), or agency or 
board order(s) on which the declaratory order is sought. 

5. A description of how the statutes, rules, or orders may 
substantially affect the petitioner and the petitioner's particular set of 
circumstances, and the question or issue on which petitioner seeks a 
declaratory order. 

6. The signature of the petitioner or petitioner's attor- 
ney. 

7. The date. 

8. Request for a hearing, if desired. 



19 



C. Agency Disposition 

1. The agency may hold a hearing to consider a peti- 
tion for declaratory statement. If a hearing is held, it shall be con- 
ducted in accordance with Ark. Code Ann. §§ 25-15-208 and 25-15- 
213, and the agency's rules for adjudicatory hearings. 

2. The agency may rely on the statements of fact set 
out in the petition without taking any position with regard to the valid- 
ity of the facts. Within ninety (90) days of the filing of the petition, 
the agency will render a final order denying the petition or issuing a 
declaratory order. 



010.005-009 Adjudicative Hearings 

A. Scope of This Rule 

This Rule, 010.005-009, applies in all administrative adjudi- 
cations conducted by the Board of Elevator Safety or the Elevator 
Safety Division of the Arkansas Department of Labor. This proce- 
dure is developed to provide a process by which the board or agency 
formulates orders (for example, an order revoking a license to prac- 
tice, or imposing civil penalties). 

B. Presiding Officer 

The Director of the Department of Labor, who is Chairman 
of the board, shall preside at a hearing before the board or may desig- 
nate one or more members of the board or one or more examiners, 
referees, or hearing officers to preside at a hearing. The Director of 
the Department of Labor shall designate one or more examiners, refe- 
rees, or hearing officers to preside at a hearing before the Department 
of Labor. 

C. Appearances 

1 . Any party appearing has the right, at his or her own 
expense, to be represented by counsel. 

2. The respondent may appear on his or her own be- 
half. 



20 



3. Any attorney representing a party to an adjudicatory 
proceeding must file notice of appearance as soon as 
possible. 

4. Service on counsel of record is the equivalent of ser- 
vice on the party represented. 

5. On written motion served on the party represented 
and all other parties of record, the presiding officer 
may grant counsel of record leave to withdraw for 
good cause shown. 

D. Consolidation 

If there are separate matters that involve similar issues of law or fact, 
or identical parties, the matters may be consolidated if it appears that 
consolidation would promote the just, speedy, and inexpensive resolu- 
tion of the proceedings, and would not unduly prejudice the rights of a 
party. 

E. Notice to Interested Parties 

If it appears that the determination of the rights of parties in a proceed- 
ing will necessarily involve a determination of the substantial interests 
of persons who are not parties, the presiding officer may enter an order 
requiring that an absent person be notified of the proceeding and be 
given an opportunity to be joined as a party of record. 

F. Service of Papers 

Unless the presiding officer otherwise orders, every pleading and every 
other paper filed for the proceeding, except applications for witness 
subpoenas and the subpoenas, shall be served on each party or the 
party's representative at the last address of record. 

G. Initiation and Notice of Hearing 

1 . An administrative adjudication is initiated by the issu- 
ance by the agency of a notice of hearing. 

2. The notice of hearing will be sent to the respondent 
by U.S. mail, return receipt requested, delivery restricted to the named 



21 



recipient or his agent, as well as by regular U. S. mail. Notice shall be 
sufficient when it is so mailed to the respondent's latest address on file 
with the agency. 

3. Notice will be mailed at least twenty (20) days before 
the scheduled hearing. 

4. The notice will include: 

a. a statement of the time, place, and nature of the 
hearing; 

b. a statement of the legal authority and jurisdiction 
under which the hearing is to be held; and 

c. a short and plain statement of the matters of fact 
and law asserted. 

H. Motions 

All requests for relief will be by motion. Motions must be in 
writing or made on the record during a hearing. A motion must fully 
state the action requested and the grounds relied upon. The original 
written motion will be filed with the agency. When time allows, the 
other parties may, within seven (7) days of the service of the written 
motion, file a response in opposition. The presiding officer may con- 
duct such proceedings and enter such orders as are deemed necessary to 
address issues raised by the motion. However, a presiding officer, other 
than the Director, will not enter a dispositive order unless expressly 
authorized in writing to do so. 

I. Answer 

A respondent may file an answer. 

J. Discovery 

1. Upon written request, the agency will provide the 

information designated in Ark. Code Ann. § 25-15-208(a)(3). 

2. Such requests should be received by the agency at 

least ten (10) days before the scheduled hearing. 



22 



K. Continuances 

1. The presiding officer may grant a continuance of 
hearing for good cause shown. Requests for continuances will be 
made in writing. The request must state the grounds to be considered 
and be made as soon as practicable and, except in cases of emergen- 
cies, no later than five (5) days prior to the date noticed for the hear- 
ing. In determining whether to grant a continuance, the presiding 
officer may consider: 

a. Prior continuances; 

b. The interests of all parties; 

c. The likelihood of informal settlements; 

d. The existence of an emergency; 

e. Any objection; 

f Any applicable time requirement; 

g. The existence of a conflict of the schedules 

of counsel, parties, or witnesses; 

h. The time limits of the request; and 

i. Other relevant factors. 

2. The presiding officer may require documentation of 
any grounds for continuance. 

L. Hearing Procedures 

1. The presiding officer presides at the hearing and 
may rule on motions, require briefs, and issue such orders as will en- 
sure the orderly conduct of the proceedings; provided, however, any 
presiding officer other than the Director shall not enter a dispositive 
order or proposed decision unless expressly authorized in writing to 
do so. 

2. All objections must be made in a timely manner and 
stated on the record. 



23 



3. Parties have the right to participate or to be represented 
by counsel in all hearings or pre-hearing conferences related to their case. 

4. Subject to terms and conditions prescribed by the Admin- 
istrative Procedure Act, parties have the right to introduce evidence on is- 
sues of material fact, cross-examine witnesses as necessary for a full an 
true disclosure of the facts, present evidence in rebuttal, and, upon request 
by the agency, may submit briefs and engage in oral argument. 

5. The presiding officer is charged with maintaining the 
decorum of the hearing and may refuse to admit, or may expel, anyone 
whose conduct is disorderly. 

M. Order of Proceedings 

The presiding officer will conduct the hearing in the following 
manner: 

1. The presiding officer will give an opening statement, 
briefly describing the nature of the proceedings. 

2. The parties are to be given the opportunity to present 
opening statements. 

3. The parties will be allowed to present their cases in the 
sequence determined by the presiding officer. 

4. Each witness must be sworn or affirmed by the presiding 
officer, or the court reporter, and be subject to examination and cross- 
examination as well as questioning by the board and the agency. The pre- 
siding officer may limit questioning in a manner consistent with the law. 

5. When all parties and witnesses have been heard, parties 
may be given the opportunity to present final arguments. 

N. Evidence 

1. The presiding officer shall rule on the admissibility of 

evidence and may, when appropriate, take official notice of facts in accor- 
dance with all applicable requirements of law. 

2. Stipulation of facts is encouraged. The agency may make 



24 



a decision based on stipulated facts. 

3. Evidence in the proceeding must be confined to the 
issues set forth in the hearing notice, unless the parties waive their right 
to such notice or the presiding officer determines that good cause justi- 
fies expansion of the issues. If the presiding officer decides to admit 
evidence outside the scope of the notice, over the objection of a party 
who did not have actual notice of those issues, that party, upon timely 
request, will receive a continuance sufficient to prepare for the addi- 
tional issue and to permit amendment of pleadings. 

4. A party seeking admission of an exhibit must provide 
seven (7) copies of each exhibit at a hearing before the Elevator Safety 
Board and three (3) copies of any exhibit in a hearing before the Eleva- 
tor Safety Division. The presiding officer must provide the opposing 
parties with an opportunity to examine the exhibit prior to the ruling on 
its admissibility. All exhibits admitted into evidence must be appropri- 
ately marked and be made part of the record. 

5. Any party may object to specific evidence or may 
request limits on the scope of the examination or cross-examination. A 
brief statement of the grounds upon which it is based shall accompany 
such an objection. The objection, the ruling on the objection, and the 
reasons for the ruling will be noted in the record. The presiding officer 
may rule on the objection at the time it is made or may reserve the rul- 
ing until the written decision. 

6. Whenever evidence is ruled inadmissible, the party 
offering that evidence may submit an offer of proof on the record. The 
party making the offer of proof for excluded oral testimony will briefly 
summarize the testimony or, with permission of the presiding officer, 
present the testimony. If the excluded evidence consists of a document 
or exhibit, it shall be marked as part of an offer of proof and inserted in 
the record. 

7. Irrelevant, immaterial, and unduly repetitive evidence 
will be excluded. Any other oral or documentary evidence, not privi- 
leged, may be received if it is of a type commonly relied upon by rea- 
sonably prudent men and women in the conduct of their affairs. 

8. Reasonable inferences. The finder of fact may base 
its findings of fact upon reasonable inferences derived from other evi- 
dence received. 



25 



O. Default 

If a party fails to appear or participate in an administrative 
adjudication after proper service of notice, the agency or board may 
proceed with the hearing and render a decision in the absence of the 
party. 

P. Subpoenas 

1. At the request of any party, the Director of the De- 
partment of Labor shall issue subpoenas for the attendance of witnesses 
at the hearing. The requesting party shall specify whether the witness is 
also requested to bring documents and reasonably identify said docu- 
ments. 

2. A subpoena may be served by any person specified by 
law to serve process or by any person who is not a party and who is 
eighteen (18) years of age or older. Delivering a copy to the person 
named in the subpoena shall make service. Proof of service may be 
made by affidavit of the person making service. The party seeking the 
subpoena shall have the burden of obtaining service of the process and 
shall be charged with the responsibility of tendering appropriate mile- 
age fees and witness fees pursuant to Rule 45, Arkansas Rules of Civil 
Procedure. The witness must be served at least two days prior to the 
hearing. For good cause, the agency may authorize the subpoena to be 
served less than two days before the hearing. 

3. Any motion to quash or limit the subpoena shall be 

filed with the agency and shall state the grounds relied upon. 

Q. Recording the Proceedings 

The responsibility to record the testimony heard at a hearing is 
borne by the agency. Upon the filing of a petition for judicial review, 
the agency will provide a transcript of testimony taken before the board. 
If the board is successful upon appeal, the agency may request that the 
court assess the costs against the opposing party. 

R. Factors to be Considered in Imposing Sanctions or Fines 

In addition to any other considerations permitted by Ark. 
Code Ann. §§ 20-24-101 et seq., if applicable, the agency in imposing 



26 



any sanction or fine may consider the following: 

1. The nature and degree of the misconduct for which 
the sanction is being sought. 

2. The seriousness and circumstances surrounding this 
misconduct. 

3. The loss or damage to clients or others. 

4. The assurance of future compliance. 

5. The profit to the wrongdoer. 

6. The avoidance of repetition. 

7. Whether the conduct was deliberate, intentional, or 
negligent. 

8. The deterrent effect on others. 

9. The conduct of the individual during the course of the 
disciplinary proceeding. 

10. Any prior enforcement or disciplinary actions or sanc- 
tions, including warnings. 

11. Matters offered in mitigation or extenuation, except 
that a claim of disability or impairment resulting from 
the use of alcohol or drugs may not be considered 
unless the individual demonstrates that he or she is 
successfully pursuing in good faith a program of re- 
covery. 

S. Final Order 

The agency will serve on the respondent a written order that reflects 
the action taken by the board. The order will include a recitation of 
facts found based on testimony and other evidence presented and rea- 
sonable inferences derived from the evidence pertinent to the issues of 
the case. It will also state conclusions of law and directives or other 
disposition entered against or in favor of the respondent. 



27 



The order will be served personally or by mail on the respondent. If 
counsel represents respondent, service of the order on respondent's 
counsel shall be deemed service on the respondent. 



010.05-010 Licensing 

A. General 

1 . All action of the Elevator Safety Board or the Eleva- 
tor Safety Division regarding licensure shall be governed by Ark. Code 
Ann. §§ 20-24-101 et seq. and these Rules and, when applicable, Ark. 
Code Ann. §§ 25-15-208 to -213. 

2. The Elevator Safety Board is responsible for licensure 
of elevator inspectors, Ark. Code Ann. § 20-24- 108(a); elevator me- 
chanics, Ark. Code Ann. § 20-24-108(b); and elevator contractors, Ark. 
Code Ann. §20-24- 108(c). 

B. Requirement to Keep Current Addresses on File 

All persons holding a license issued by the agency are required to pro- 
vide the agency with information so that the agency can remain in con- 
tact and provide notice of complaints and/or hearings. The licensee 
holder is required to provide written notice to the board of any change 
in business and/or residence address within 10 working days of the 
change. Service of notices of hearing sent by mail will be addressed to 
latest address on file with the agency. 

C. Review of Application 

The application and supporting documentation will be reviewed by 
staff of the Elevator Safety Division. The division will inform the ap- 
plicant in writing if it determines that the application is incomplete, and 
will specify why the application is incomplete. When a completed ap- 
plication, a supplemental application, or the requested information is 
returned, the division will reinitiate action on the application for license. 
If all requirements are met, the applicant will be licensed. 

D. Denial of License 

1. If a preliminary determination is made that the appli- 

cation should be denied, the division will inform the applicant of the 



28 



opportunity for a hearing on the application. 

2. The grounds or basis for the proposed denial of a li- 

cense will be set forth in writing by the agency. The applicant may 
appeal the agency's determination to the Elevator Safety Board by mak- 
ing a written request to the Board for a hearing within thirty (30) days 
of the notice of denial. Any hearing on the denial of a license will be 
conducted in accordance with Ark. Code Ann. §§ 25-15-208 and -213, 
and unless otherwise provided by law, the applicant has the burden of 
establishing entitlement to the license. 

E. Suspension, Revocation, Annulment or Withdrawal 

1. Prior to the entry of a final order to suspend, revoke, 
annul, or withdraw a license, or to impose other sanctions upon a licen- 
see, the division will serve the licensee a notice of hearing in the man- 
ner set out in Ark. Code Ann. § 25-15-208 and Rule 010.05-009 herein. 

2. The agency has the burden of proving the alleged 
facts and violations of law stated in the notice. 

F. Emergency Action 

1. If the board finds that the public health, safety, or 
welfare imperatively requires emergency action and incorporates that 
finding in its order, the board can summarily suspend, limit, or restrict a 
license. The notice requirement in Rule 010.05-009(G) does not apply 
and must not be construed to prevent a hearing at the earliest time prac- 
ticable. 

2. Emergency Order: 

An emergency adjudicative order must contain find- 
ings that the public health, safety, and welfare imperatively require 
emergency action to be taken by the board. The written order must 
include notification of the date on which board proceedings are sched- 
uled for completion. 

Written Notice. The written emergency adjudicative 
order will be immediately delivered to persons who are required to 
comply with the order. One or more of the following procedures will 
be used: 



29 



a. Personal delivery; 

b. Certified mail, return receipt requested, to 
the last address on file with the agency; 

c. First class mail to the last address on file 
with the agency; 

d. Fax. Fax may be used as the sole method of 
delivery if the person required to comply with the order has filed a writ- 
ten request that agency orders be sent by fax and has provided a fax 
number for that purpose. 

e. Oral notice. Unless the written emergency 
order is served by personal delivery on the same day that the order is- 
sues, the agency shall make reasonable immediate efforts to contact by 
telephone the persons who are required to comply with the order. 

3. Unless otherwise provided by law, within ten (10) 

days after emergency action taken pursuant to paragraph Fl of this 
Rule, the division must initiate a formal suspension or revocation pro- 
ceeding. 

G. Voluntary Surrender of License 

The licensee, in lieu of formal disciplinary proceedings, may 
offer to surrender his or her license, subject to the board's determination 
to accept the proffered surrender, rather than conducting a formal disci- 
plinary proceeding. 

H. Duty of a Sanctioned Licensee 

In every case in which a license is revoked, suspended, or 
surrendered, the licensee shall, within thirty (30) days of the revocation, 
suspension, or surrender, do the following: 

1 . Return his or her license and any license pocket cards 
to the division's office; 

2. Notify all of his or her clients and employer in writing 
that his or her license has been revoked, suspended, or surrendered; 

3. Notify all clients and employer to make arrangements 



30 



for other services, calling attention to any urgency in seeking the substi- 
tution of another licensee; 

4. Deliver to all clients or employer any papers or prop- 

erty to which they are entitled, or notify the client or employer of a suit- 
able time and place where the papers and other property may be ob- 
tained, calling attention to any urgency for obtaining the papers or other 
property; 

5. Refund any part of the fees paid in advance that have 
not been earned; 

6. Keep and maintain a record of the steps taken to ac- 
complish the foregoing; 

7. File with the division a list of all other state, federal, 
and administrative jurisdictions by which he or she is licensed. Upon 
such filing, the agency will notify those entitled of the revocation, sus- 
pension, or surrender; and 

8. The licensee shall, within thirty (30) days of revoca- 
tion, suspension, or surrender of the license, file an affidavit with the 
agency that he or she has fully complied with the provisions of the or- 
der and completely performed the foregoing or provide a full explana- 
tion of the reasons for his or her non-compliance. Such affidavit shall 
also set forth the address where communications may thereafter be di- 
rected to the respondent. 

I. Reinstatement After Suspension 

1. An order suspending a license may provide that a 
person desiring reinstatement may file with the Director of the Depart- 
ment of Labor a verified petition requesting reinstatement. 

2. The petition for reinstatement must set out the follow- 
ing: 

a. That the individual has fully and promptly 
complied with the requirements of Rule 010.05-0 10(H) of these rules 
pertaining to the duty of a sanctioned professional; 

b. That the individual has refrained from prac- 
ticing in this occupation or business during the period of suspension; 



31 



c. That the individual's license fee is current or 
has been tendered to the agency; and 

d. That the individual has fully complied with 
any requirements imposed as conditions for reinstatement. 

3. Any knowing misstatement of fact may constitute 
grounds for denial or revocation of reinstatement. 

4. Failure to comply with the provisions of sections H7 
and H8 of this Rule precludes consideration for reinstatement. 

5. No individual will be reinstated unless the board ap- 
proves reinstatement by majority vote. 

J. Re-Licensure for Revoked or Surrendered License 

1. No individual who has had his or her license revoked 
or who has surrendered his or her license will be licensed, except on 
petition made to the board. The application for re-licensure is not al- 
lowed until at least two (2) years after the revocation or surrender of 
license took effect. 

2. The applicant bears the burden of proof that he is re- 
habilitated following the revocation or surrender of his license, that he 
can engage in the conduct authorized by the license without undue risk 
to the public health, safety, and welfare, and that he is otherwise quali- 
fied for the license pursuant to Ark. Code Ann. § 20-24-101 et seq. 

3. The board may impose any appropriate conditions or 
limitations on a license to protect the public health, safety, and welfare. 

4. The board may require that the person seeking re- 
licensure take the licensing examination. 

K. Inspectors 

1. Qualifications. An applicant for an elevator inspec- 

tor's license shall complete an application approved by the board and 
shall have: 

a. at least four (4) years verified experience in 



32 



designing, installing, maintaining, or inspecting conveyances; 

b. successfully passed the written examination 
for elevator inspectors administered by an accredited ASME testing 
facility and evidenced by certification of the applicant as a Qualified 
Elevator Inspector. This is commonly referred to as being QEI certi- 
fied; 

c. no financial interest in any business or op- 
eration which manufactures, installs, repairs, modifies or services con- 
veyances and have submitted a financial disclosure statement on a form 
approved by the division. This qualification does not prohibit employ- 
ees of insurance companies insuring conveyances in Arkansas from 
obtaining a license as an elevator inspector; 

d. submitted proof of insurance by an insurance 
company authorized to do business in Arkansas of general liability cov- 
erage for at least one million dollars ($1,000,000) for injury or death of 
a person and five hundred thousand dollars ($500,000) for property 
damage; and 

e. tendered a license fee in the amount of one 
hundred dollars ($100.00). 

2. License Renewal. An application for renewal shall be 

submitted no later than January 3 1 of each calendar year, regardless of 
the date of issue or renewal and shall be submitted with: 

a. a license fee in the amount of one hundred 
dollars ($100.00); 

b. proof of insurance as required by this Rule, 
010.05-010(K)(1); 

c. an annual financial disclosure statement on a 
form approved by the division; and 

d. proof of completion of eight (8) contact 
hours or continuing education hours every two (2) years in a course of 
training or instruction approved by the board as required by Rule 
010.05-010(Q). 

3. Elevator inspectors in the employ of the Department 



33 



of Labor are exempt from payment of licensing fees and fees for re- 
newal of license. 

L. Elevator Contractors 

1. Qualifications. An applicant for an elevator contrac- 
tor's license shall complete an application approved by the board and 
shall have: 

a. a permanent office located in the State of 
Arkansas with an individual designated by the contractor to receive 
notices on behalf of the contractor or be currently registered with the 
Secretary of State with a designated agent for service of process who is 
also authorized to receive notices on behalf of the contractor; 

b. submitted verification of employment of a 
licensed elevator mechanic; 

c. submitted proof of insurance by an insurance 
company authorized to do business in Arkansas of general liability cov- 
erage for at least one million dollars ($1,000,000) for injury or death of 
a person and five hundred thousand dollars ($500,000) for property 
damage; and 

d. tendered a license fee in the amount of two 
hundred and fifty dollars ($250). 

2. License Renewal. An application for renewal shall be 
submitted no later than January 3 1 of each calendar year, regardless of 
the date of issue or renewal and shall be submitted with: 

a. a license fee in the amount of two hundred 
and fifty dollars ($250); and 

b. proof of insurance as required by this Rule, 
010.05-010(L)(1). 

M. Elevator Mechanics 

1. Qualifications. An applicant for an elevator me- 

chanic's license shall complete an application approved by the board 
and shall have: 



34 



a. at least three (3) years verified work experi- 
ence in constructing, maintaining, servicing, or repairing conveyances; 

b. successfully passed a written examination 
approved for elevator mechanics by the board; and 

c. tendered a license fee in the amount of sev- 
enty-five dollars ($75) annually. 

2. Restricted License. A restricted class of elevator me- 

chanic's license shall be known as an "Accessibility Technician". Such 
class of license shall be restricted to performing work involving vertical 
platform lifts, wheelchairs lifts, and inclined stairway chairlifts, includ- 
ing those for private residences, which are covered by the provisions of 
ASME A18.1 2005. An applicant for such a restricted license shall 
complete an application approved by the board and shall have: 

a. at least three (3) years verified work experi- 
ence in constructing, maintaining, servicing, or repairing those convey- 
ances covered by ASME A18.1 2005; 

b. successfully passed a written examination 
approved for a restricted license by the board; and 

c. tendered a license fee in the amount of sev- 
enty-five dollars ($75) annually. 

3. License Renewal. An application for renewal shall be 
submitted no later than January 3 1 of the year of expiration, regardless 
off the date of issue or renewal and shall be submitted with: 

a. a license fee in the amount of one hundred 
and fifty dollars ($150) for two years; and 

b. proof of completion of eight (8) contact 
hours or continuing education hours every two (2) years in a course of 
training or instruction approved by the board as required by Rule 
010.05-010(Q). 

4. Emergency Licensing and Temporary Licensing. 

a. Whenever an emergency exists or there is a 

strike or lock-out and the board determines that there are not enough 



35 



licensed elevator mechanics to perform the work necessary to provide for 
the safety of life, limb, and property and to protect the public welfare, the 
board may waive the examination requirements of these Rules and the pro- 
visions or Ark. Code Ann. § 20-24-108, and issue an emergency elevator 
mechanic's license that may be valid for no longer than thirty (30) days. 

b. Whenever the department determines that there 
are not enough licensed elevator mechanics available to perform work nec- 
essary for the completion of a project for which the division has issued an 
installation permit pursuant to Rule 010.05-011 or 010.05-012 and Ark. 
Code Ann. § 20-25-1 15(d), the department may waive the requirements of 
these Rules and the provisions of Ark. Code Ann. § 20-24-108, and issue a 
temporary elevator mechanics license that may be valid for no longer than 
thirty (30) days. The denial of such a temporary license may be appealed 
to the board. 

c. The board may renew an emergency or tempo- 
rary license if the circumstances justifying its original issuance continue. 

d. The fee for an emergency or temporary license 
shall be seventy- five dollars ($75.00) annually for a license valid in only 
thirty (30) day increments. 

N. License Renewal, Generally 

1 . A license may be renewed within six (6) months after the 
date of expiration by paying the renewal fee and a late fee of twenty dollars 
($20), provided the licensee is otherwise qualified for renewal. If a license 
is not renewed within six (6) months after the date of expiration, the licen- 
see shall be required to take an new examination. 

2. A license will not be issued or renewed if there is an un- 
paid fine or fee due the agency. Further, failure to pay any fine or fee may 
result in license suspension or revocation. 

O. Reciprocity 

The board may license a person as an elevator inspector, elevator 
mechanic, or elevator contractor without examination if he or she holds an 
equivalent license for a state or city that has a standard of examination sub- 
stantially equal to that provided for in these Rules and Ark. Code Ann. § 
20-24-108. 

P. Verified Work Experience 



36 



1. Work experience required for licensure shall be docu- 
mented by notarized letters or affidavits from past or present employers, 
official letters or certifications from other government licensing authori- 
ties detailing the duration and character of the work, or equivalent evi- 
dence that verifies work experience. The name, address, and telephone 
number of anyone verifying work experience shall be provided on the 
verification document. 

2. For purposes of determining experience qualification, 
the board shall not consider the following: 

a. any experience obtained in violation of Ark. 
Code Ann. §20-24-108; or 

b. any experience obtained in violation of any 
federal, state or local licensing or registration requirements. 

Q. Continuing Education 

1. Licensed inspectors and licensed elevator mechanics 
must complete eight (8) contact hours or continuing education hours 
every two calendar year beginning January, 2007. For any license re- 
newed in January 2009 or thereafter, the applicant must submit proof of 
having completed this requirement. 

2. A certificate of completion provided to the course 
participant is sufficient for any course pre-approved by the Elevator 
Safety Board. If the course has not been approved by the Board, the 
licensee will not be given credit unless or until the Board has approved 
the course. 

3. A course of training or education may be approved by 
the board by the submission of an Application for Continuing Education 
Approval; an overview of the course material; and a professional re- 
sume of the trainer. 

4. A list of approved courses will be posted on the 

agency's website or made available upon request to the Elevator Safety 
Division. 

R. Grandfather Provision 



37 



1. An applicant for an elevator mechanic's license who 
submits an application before August 12, 2006, may be licensed without 
examination if the applicant meets all other requirements for licensure. 

2. A grandfather applicant who has not obtained a li- 
cense or paid the required license fee by January 1, 2007, shall be re- 
quired to take an examination. 

3. The grounds or basis for the proposed denial of a li- 

cense will be set forth in writing by the agency. The applicant may 
appeal the agency's determination to the Elevator Safety Board by mak- 
ing a written request to the Board for a hearing within thirty (30) days 
of the notice of denial. Any hearing on the denial of a license will be 
conducted in accordance with Ark. Code Ann. §§ 25-15-208 and -213, 
and unless otherwise provided by law, the applicant has the burden of 
establishing entitlement to the license. 

S. Prohibitions and Requirements 

1. No elevator inspector shall inspect an elevator, esca- 
lator, or dumbwaiter if the inspector, or any member of his immediate 
family, has a financial interest in the building in which the elevator, 
escalator, or dumbwaiter is located, or in any business which occupies 
the building in which the elevator, escalator, or dumbwaiter is located. 

2. No elevator inspector or any member of his immedi- 
ate family shall have or maintain a financial interest in any business 
which manufactures, installs, alters, or services elevators, escalators, or 
dumbwaiters. 

3. No elevator inspector shall recommend or refer one of 
his clients or customers to a specific business, firm, or corporation 
which manufactures, installs, repairs, alters, or services elevators, esca- 
lators, or dumbwaiters. 

4. Financial Disclosure. On or before the last day of 
January of each year, all licensed elevator inspectors shall file with the 
department a financial disclosure statement on forms provided by the 
department and approved by the board. Such forms shall include, but 
not be limited to, the following: 

a. the name and address of any corporation, 

firm, or enterprise in which the person has a direct financial interest of a 



38 



value in excess of one thousand dollars ($1,000.00). Policies of insur- 
ance issued to himself or his spouse are not to be considered a finan- 
cial interest; 

b. a list of every office or directorship held by 
himself or his spouse, in any corporation, firm, or enterprise subject to 
jurisdiction of the board; 

c. a list showing the name and address of any 
person, corporation, firm, or enterprise from which the person re- 
ceived compensation in excess of one thousand five hundred dollars 
($1,500) during the preceding year; and 

d. a list showing the name and address of any 
person, corporation, firm, or enterprise from which the persons re- 
ceived compensation in excess of twelve thousand five hundred dol- 
lars ($12,500) during the preceding year. 

5. An elevator contractor shall perform all scheduled 
maintenance and required safety tests in a timely manner as notified 
by the Elevator Safety Division. 

6. No elevator contractor shall employ helpers or ap- 
prentices not licensed as elevator mechanics to erect, construct, alter, 
replace, repair, maintain, remove, or dismantle any conveyance unless 
such helper or apprentice is working under the direct supervision of a 
licensed elevator mechanic, except in a ratio of 1 helper or apprentice 
to every one licensed elevator mechanic; or, in the event of a crew of 
5 or more workers, a ratio of 3 helpers or apprentices to every two 
licensed elevator mechanics. Notwithstanding the provisions of this 
Rule, an industrial employer utilizing its own employees for repair or 
alteration work on industrial property owned or leased by the em- 
ployer, may utilize a ratio of 4 helpers or apprentices to every one 
licensed elevator mechanic. 



010.05-011 New Construction and Installation 

A. Minimum Standards 

1 . All new elevators, escalators, and dumbwaiters shall 

be constructed and installed in conformity with the standards in The 
American Society of Mechanical Engineers Safety Code for Elevators 



39 



and Escalators, ASME A17.1 - 2004 and 2005 Supplement and 
2005 Addenda. These standards are hereby adopted by reference 
and incorporated herein. 

2. The minimum standards for the construction and 
installation of vertical platform lifts, inclined wheelchair lifts, in- 
clined stairway chairlifts and residential elevators shall be ASME 
A18.1 2005, which is hereby adopted by reference and incorporated 
herein. 

3. This Rule does not include any later amendments 
or editions of the standards incorporated by reference. 

4. Copies of these standards incorporated by refer- 
ence can be viewed in the offices of the division or can be obtained 
by contacting the following: 

American Society of Mechanical Engineers 
22 Law Drive 
P.O. Box 2300 
Fairfield, NJ 07007-2300 
1-800-843-2763. 
www.asme.org 

B. Installation Permit 

1 . Prior to the installation or construction of any ele- 
vator, escalator^ or dumbwaiter or other conveyance, an installation 
permit shall be obtained from the department. The installation per- 
mit shall be posted at the job site in a conspicuous location near the 
location of the conveyance prior to work beginning on the installa- 
tion. 

2. Application for an installation permit shall be 
made on a form furnished by the department and shall be submitted 
by the installing contractor. The application shall require the sub- 
mission of detailed plans and specifications. 

3. Upon receipt of an application for installation, the 
required plans and specifications, and the required fee for an instal- 
lation permit, the department shall review the application for com- 
pliance with the provisions of Ark. Code Ann. § 20-24-101 et seq. 
and these regulations. The department shall issue an installation 



40 



permit or shall notify the applicant in writing of the reasons the installa- 
tion permit is denied. 

4. Any applicant who has been denied an installation 

permit by the department may appeal that denial to the Elevator Safety 
Board, provided a written request to appeal is received by the depart- 
ment within thirty (30) days of the notice of the denial. 

C. Inspection and Testing 

1 . Prior to the operation of any new conveyance or the 
issuance of the operating permit, such installation shall be inspected and 
tested in conformity with these regulations by a licensed elevator in- 
spector in the employ of the department or its authorized representative. 

2. An inspection report shall be filed with the depart- 
ment by the inspector making the inspection within thirty (30) days 
after completion of the inspection. The inspection report shall be on a 
form furnished and approved by the department. It shall indicate 
whether the conveyance was installed in accordance with the plans and 
specifications approved by the department and meets the requirements 
of Ark. Code Ann. § 20-24-101 et seq. and these regulations. 

D. Initial Operating Permit 

1 . The owner or operator of a conveyance shall obtain 
an initial operating permit within seven (7) days after the required date 
for filing the inspection report required by Ark. Code Ann. § 20-24- 
1 13(a) and Rule 010.05-01 1(C)(2) herein. 

2. No operating permit shall be issued until all required 
fees have been paid. 

3. If the inspection report required by Ark. Code Ann. § 
20-24-113 and Rule 010.05-01 1(C)(2) herein indicates that there is a 
failure to comply with the plans and specifications approved by the de- 
partment, Ark. Code Ann. § 20-24-101 et seq., or these regulations, the 
operating permit shall be denied. The department shall notify the owner 
or operator in writing of the reasons for the denial of an operating per- 
mit. 

4. Any owner or operator who has been denied an oper- 
ating permit by the department may appeal that denial to the Elevator 



41 



Safety Board, provided a written request to appeal is received by the 
department within thirty (30) days of the notice of the denial. 

E. Fees 

1. Installation permits. 

a. The following fees shall be paid to the de- 

partment for installation permits: 

Elevator $ 150.00 

Escalator or moving walk 200.00 
Dumbwaiter 100.00 

Wheelchair lift 100.00 

Workmen's hoist 200.00 

2. A fee of one hundred dollars ($100) shall be paid for 
installation permits for all other types of conveyances. 

3. A final inspection fee and the fee for the initial oper- 
ating permit are included in the installation permit fee. If a scheduled 
final inspection is canceled without due notice to the department or if 
the elevator is not complete in the judgment of the inspector, an addi- 
tional fee of one hundred dollars ($100.00) shall be charged to the ele- 
vator contractor for an additional final inspection. 

4. The fee for the operating permit is established by 
Rule010.05-015(F). 

010.05-012 Alterations 

A. Minimum Standards 

All alterations and major repairs to conveyances shall be 
made in conformity with the same standards as established by Rule 
010.05-01 1(A). 

B. Alteration Permit 

1. Prior to the alteration or major repair of any convey- 

ance, an alteration permit shall be obtained from the department. 



42 



2. Application for an alteration permit shall be made on 
a form furnished by the department and shall be submitted by the in- 
stalling contractor. The application shall require the submission of de- 
tailed plans and specifications. 

3. Upon receipt of an application for alteration or major 
repair, the required plan and specifications, and the required fee for an 
alteration permit, the department shall review the application for com- 
pliance with the provisions of Ark. Code Ann. § 20-24-101 et seq. and 
these regulations. The department shall issue an alteration permit or 
shall notify the applicant in writing of the reasons the alteration permit 
is denied. 

4. Any applicant who has been denied a permit for al- 

teration or major repair by the department may appeal that denial to the 
Elevator Safety Board, provided written request to appeal is received by 
the department within thirty (30) days of the notice of the denial. 

C. Inspection and Testing 

1 . Prior to the operation of any conveyance which has 

undergone an alteration or major repair and prior to the issuance of a 
new operating permit pursuant to Rule 010.05-012(D), such conveyance 
shall be inspected and required safety tests witnessed by a licensed ele- 
vator inspector in the employ of the department or its authorized repre- 
sentative. 

2. An inspection report shall be filed with the depart- 

ment by the inspector making the inspection within thirty (30) days 
after completion of the inspection. The inspection report shall be on a 
form furnished and approved by the department. It shall indicate 
whether the conveyance was altered or repaired in accordance with the 
plans and specifications approved by the department and meets the re- 
quirements of Ark. Code Ann. § 20-24-101 et seq. and these regula- 
tions. 

3. The department shall mail a copy of the inspection 

report to the installing contractor and the owner. 

D. Operating Permit 

1. The owner or operator of a conveyance which has 

undergone an alteration or major repair shall obtain a new operating 



43 



permit within seven (7) days after the required date for filing the inspec- 
tion required by Ark. Code Ann. § 20-24-1 13(a) and Rule 010.05- 
012(C) herein. 

2. No operating permit shall be issued until all the re- 
quired fees have been paid. 

3. If the inspection report required by Ark. Code Ann. § 
20-24-113 and Rule 010.05-012(C) herein indicates that there is a fail- 
ure to comply with the plans and specifications approved by the depart- 
ment, Ark. Code Ann. § 20-24-101 et seq., or these regulations, the 
operating permit shall be denied. The department shall notify the owner 
or operator in writing of the reasons for the denial of an operating per- 
mit. 

4. Any owner or operator who has been denied an oper- 

ating permit by the department may appeal that denial to the Elevator 
Safety Board, provided a written request to appeal is received by the 
department within thirty (30) days of the notice of the denial. 

E. Fees 

1. The fee for an alteration permit shall be one hundred 
dollars ($100.00). 

2. A final inspection fee is included in the alteration 
permit fee. If a scheduled final inspection is canceled without due no- 
tice to the department or if the elevator is not complete in the judgment 
of the inspector, an additional fee one hundred dollars ($100.00) shall 
be charged to the elevator contractor for an additional final inspection. 

3. The fee for the operating permit is established by 
Rule 010.05-015(F) herein. 



010.05-013 Existing Elevators 

A. Minimum Standards 

1 . All conveyances shall be maintained by the owner or 

lessee in a condition that conforms to the standards established by the 
board which were in effect on the date of installation or the provisions 
of ASME A17. 3-2005, whichever are more stringent. 



44 



2. Notwithstanding the provisions of ASME A17.3- 
2005, the owner or operator of any elevator without Phase I and Phase 
II fire service shall have a period of five (5) years from the effective 
date of these regulations or until alteration to install Phase I and Phase 
II fire service, whichever occurs first. 

3. Notwithstanding the provisions of ASME A17.3- 
2005, Part 4.3.3 applicable to hydraulic elevators, the owner or opera- 
tor of any hydraulic elevator with a flat-bottom jack shall be required to 
replace or retrofit to comply with A17.3, Part 4.3.3, within five (5) 
years from the effective date of these regulations or alteration, which- 
ever occurs first. 

4. This Rule does not include any later amendments or 
editions of the standards incorporated by reference. 

5. Copies of these standards incorporated by reference 
can be viewed in the offices of the division or can be obtained by con- 
tacting the following: 

American Society of Mechanical Engineers 
22 Law Drive 
P.O. Box 2300 
Fairfield, NJ 07007-2300 
1-800-843-2763 
www.asme.org 

B. Operation 

1. Any conveyance which is out of operation or without 

an operating permit for twelve (12) months or more shall have a safety 
test or leak down test and a pressure test performed in the presence of a 
licensed elevator inspector in the employ of the department or its au- 
thorized representative before a new operating permit can be issued or 
before such can operate. Additionally, such conveyance shall conform 
to the standards established by Rule 010.05-011 or have a variance is- 
sued pursuant to Rule 010.05-016 before an operating permit can be 
issued or before it can operate. 



010.05.014 Periodic Inspections and Testing 



45 



A. Minimum Standards 

1. All inspections and testing required by Ark. Code 
Ann. § 20-24-101 et seq. or these regulations shall be made in accor- 
dance with the standards established by these regulations and the 
American Society of Mechanical Engineers Guide for Inspection of 
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks, ASME A17.2 -2001, which is 
hereby adopted and incorporated herein. 

2. This Rule does not include any later amendments or 
editions of the standards incorporated by reference. 

3. Copies of these standards incorporated by reference 
can be viewed in the offices of the division or can be obtained by con- 
tacting the following: 

American Society of Mechanical Engineers 
22 Law Drive 
P.O. Box 2300 
Fairfield, NJ 07007-2300 
1-800-843-2763 
www.asme.org 

B. Periodic Inspections 

1. a. The owner or lessee of every power passen- 
ger elevator and escalator shall have it inspected periodically every 
sixth (6th) calendar month following the month in which the initial in- 
spection was made. 

b. The owner or lessee of every power freight 

elevator and of every dumbwaiter and elevator driven by manual power 
shall have it inspected periodically every twelfth (12th) calendar month 
following the month in which the initial inspection was made. 

2. Any inspection required by Ark. Code Ann. § 20-24- 
112(a)(3) or this Rule 010.05-0 14(B)(1): 

a. may be made during the month following the 
calendar month during which such inspection is due; and 

b. shall be made only by elevator inspectors 
licensed in accordance with the provisions of Ark. Code Ann. § 20-24- 



46 



108 and 20-24-109 and Rule 010.05-010. 

3. In addition to required inspections, the department or 

its authorized representative may designate a licensed inspector in its 
employ to make such additional inspections as may be required to en- 
force the provisions of this chapter and these rules and regulations. 

C. Tests 

1. All tests shall be made in accordance with the appli- 
cable ASME Code as adopted herein. 

2. Elevator inspectors shall not be required to perform 
any tests. 

3. Tests required by these rules and regulations shall be 

made by a licensed elevator mechanic in the presence of a licensed ele- 
vator inspector in the employ of the department or its authorized repre- 
sentative. 

D. Inspection Reports 

1. A report of every required inspection shall be filed 
with the department or its authorized representative by the inspector 
making the inspection, on a form approved by the department or its 
authorized representative, within thirty (30) days after the inspection or 
test has been completed. 

2. In the event the inspection report required by this 
Rule 010.05-014(D)(1) and Ark. Code Ann. § 20-24-113 is not filed 
within thirty (30) days after the final date when the conveyance should 
have been inspected, the department shall designate a licensed inspector 
in its employ to make the inspection and report required. 

E. Fees 

1. For each inspection and report made at the direction 

of the department, the owner, lessee, or insurance company responsible 
for the report of inspection shall pay to the department a fee of one hun- 
dred dollars ($100.00). The fee shall be paid directly to the department 
and shall be the only fee or charges for which such owner, lessee, or 
insurance company shall be liable for the inspection required by Ark. 
Code Ann. §20-24- 112(a). 



47 



2. For witnessing the performance of all safety tests re- 

quired by Ark. Code Ann. § 20-24-101 et seq. or these regulations, the 
owner, lessee, or insurance company responsible for the test shall pay to 
the department a fee of seventy- five dollars ($75.00). 



010.05-015 Operating Permit 

A. Permit Required 

1. No conveyance shall operate unless the owner or les- 
see has obtained an operating permit from the department. Operation of 
a conveyance without a valid operating permit shall be grounds for: 

a. an immediate order, or red-tag to discon- 
tinue use, and 

b. a fine pursuant to Ark. Code Ann. § 20-24- 
103 and Rule 010.05-017. 

2. An operating permit shall be issued for a period of 
one (1) year and the expiration date shall appear on its face. 

B. Display 

The permit shall be posted conspicuously in the car of the 
elevator or lift and on or near the dumbwaiter or escalator. 

C. Permit Information 

1. The operating permit shall reflect on its face the fol- 

lowing: 

a. the state number, or AS number, assigned by 
the department to that conveyance; 

b. the type of equipment for which it is issued; 

c. in the case of elevators, whether passenger 
or freight; 

d. the owner or lessee to whom the permit is 



48 



issued; 

e. the location of the conveyance; 

f. the contract load and rated speed; and 

g. the expiration date. 

2. In addition to other requirements, the operating per- 

mit for vertical wheelchair lifts, inclined wheelchair lifts, and inclined 
stairway chair lifts shall state the following: 

LIMITED USE ONLY - 
NOT FOR GENERAL PUBLIC USE 

D. Denial of an Operating Permit 

1. No operating permit shall be issued if the fees re- 
quired by Ark. Code Ann. § 20-24-116 and Rule 010.05-015(F) herein 
have not been paid. 

2. The department may deny an operating permit for 
cause, which shall include the failure to comply with the provisions of 
Ark. Code Ann. § 20-24-101 et seq.; these rules and regulations; or the 
detailed plans and specifications approved by the department at the time 
of installation. In determining whether there exists cause to deny an 
operating permit, the department may rely on an inspection report filed 
by a licensed elevator inspector. 

3. The department shall notify the owner or lessee in 
writing of the reasons the operating permit is denied; the changes neces- 
sary for compliance; and their right to appeal to the Elevator Safety 
Board. 

4. Any owner or lessee who has been denied an operat- 
ing permit by the department may appeal that denial to the Elevator 
Safety Board, provided a written request to appeal is received by the 
department within thirty (30) days of the notice of the denial. 

5. The Elevator Safety Board may require, as a condi- 
tion of maintaining his/her license, the presence of any elevator inspec- 
tor upon whose report the denial of an operating permit was based at 
any hearing on such denial. 



49 



E. Revocation of an Operating Permit 

1. The department may immediately revoke an operating 
permit if it determines there is a failure to comply with the provisions of 
Ark. Code Ann. § 20-24-101 et seq.; these rules and regulations; or the 
detailed plans and specifications approved by the department at the time 
of installation and such elevator, escalator or dumbwaiter is in an unsafe 
condition, so that its continued operation may be dangerous to the pub- 
lic safety. In making such a determination the department may rely on 
an inspection report filed by a licensed elevator inspector. 

2. In order to immediately revoke an operating permit, 
the department shall place a red tag or warning notice on or in the con- 
veyance notifying the owner or lessee and the public that its use has 
been ordered to be discontinued. Such warning shall read as follows: 

WARNING ORDER 

The Arkansas Department of Labor has 
determined that this elevator or conveyance is in 
an unsafe condition, so that its continued opera- 
tion would be dangerous. The Department of 
Labor has ordered that the use of this elevator or 
conveyance be discontinued until it has been 
made safe in conformity with Arkansas Law and 
the rules and regulations of the Arkansas Eleva- 
tor Safety Board. 

Continued operation of this elevator 
or conveyance or removal of this notice may 
result in criminal and/or civil penalties. 

This action is taken pursuant to the 
authority granted by Ark. Code Ann. §§ 11-2- 
117(C) and 20-24-1 16. 

The specific conditions the Depart- 
ment of Labor has found which render this ele- 
vator unsafe are as follows: 

This tag shall only be removed by au- 
thority of the Chief Elevator Inspector. 



50 



Director of Labor 
State of Arkansas 

By: 
Dated: 

Arkansas Department of Labor 
10421 West Markham Street 
Little Rock, Arkansas 72205 

3. The department's representative shall provide imme- 

diate written notice to the owner or lessee or agent of either present at 
the location of the conveyance, which notice shall include the follow- 
ing: 

a. a copy of the red tag or warning; 

b. the reason for revocation of the operating per- 



mit; 



c. the changes necessary for compliance; and 



d. the date, time, and place of a hearing on the 

revocation before a hearing officer designated by the director to hear 
such matters. 

4. In the event the owner or lessee or agent of either is 
not present at the location of the conveyance, the department shall mail 
the notice required by this Rule 010.05-015(3) to the owner or lessee 
within twenty-four (24) hours to the address on file with the division. 

5. The department shall hold a hearing on the immediate 
revocation of an operating permit within five (5) days of placing the red 
tag or warning on the conveyance. The department may extend the 
time for holding such a hearing upon the request, in advance, of the 
owner or lessee. The decision of the hearing officer shall constitute the 
final action of the department. 

6. Any owner or lessee may appeal the department's 

final action on the immediate revocation of an operating permit to the 
Elevator Safety Board, provided a written request to appeal is received 
by the department within thirty (30) days of the department's final ac- 



51 



tion. 

7. a. The department may request the Elevator 

Safety Board to revoke an operating permit if the department deter- 
mines there is a failure to comply with the provisions of Ark. Code 
Ann. § 20-24-101 et seq.; these rules and regulations; or the detailed 
plans and specifications approved by the department at the time of in- 
stallation. In determining whether there exists cause to seek revocation 
of an operating permit, the department may rely on an inspection report 
filed by a licensed elevator inspector. 

b. The department shall notify the owner or 
lessee in writing that it has requested the revocation of the owner or 
lessee's operating permit; the reasons the department is seeking the 
revocation; the changes the department contends are necessary for com- 
pliance; and the date, time and place of a hearing before the Elevator 
Safety Board. 

c. If, after hearing, the board determines that 
there has been a failure to comply as alleged by the department, it shall 
revoke the operating permit of the owner or lessee. 

F. Fees 

1. The annual fee to be charged for an operating permit 
is established by Ark. Code Ann. § 20-24-1 16, which provides: 

a. Dumbwaiters $30.00 annual 

b. Elevators and wheelchair lifts. . . . $50.00 annual 

c. Escalators and moving walks $85.00 annual 

2. A twenty percent (20%) penalty may be assessed 
when the fee is past due by thirty (30) days. 

3. a. The fee for a temporary operating permit on 
a new installation shall be one hundred dollars ($100.00) and shall be 
good for a period of thirty (30) days. It may be renewed for additional 
period of thirty (30) days for a fee of fifty dollars ($50.00). Retesting is 
required to renew after an initial sixty (60) days. 

b. The fee for a temporary operating permit for 



52 



a workman's hoist shall be fifty dollars ($50.00) and shall be good for a 
period of ninety (90) days. 

G. Requirement to Keep Current Addresses on File 

All owners or operators holding an operating permit issued by 
the agency are required to provide the agency with information so that 
the agency can remain in contact and provide notice of complaints 
and/or hearings. The permit holder is required to provide written notice 
to the division of any change in business and/or residence address 
within 10 working days of the change. Service of notices of hearing 
sent by mail will be addressed to latest address on file with the agency. 

H. Requirement to Report Accidents 

1. Any mechanical, structural or electrical defects di- 
rectly affecting rider safety for which a conveyance is closed for use for 
a period of time more than eight (8) hours, must be reported in writing 
by the owner or operator to the Department of Labor within twenty- four 
(24) hours. 

2. The owner or operator shall immediately cease to 
operate any conveyance involved in a fatality or serious physical injury, 
except to the extent necessary to protect life, limb and property. Such 
accident shall be reported in writing by the owner or operator within 
twenty- four (24) hours to the Department of Labor. For the purposes of 
this requirement, the term "serious physical injury" shall mean any sig- 
nificant injury that requires immediate medical examination or treat- 
ment by a licensed physician. 

3. Unless authorized in writing by the department, no 
conveyance may be operated, altered, repaired, or tampered with, ex- 
cept to protect life, limb and property, following an accident involving a 
serious injury or death until the department has completed an investiga- 
tion concerning the accident. 



010.05-016 Variances 

A. Generally 

Ark. Code Ann. § 20-24- 106(d) authorizes the board in any 
particular case to grant exceptions and variances which shall only be 



53 



granted where it is clearly evident that they are necessary in order to 
prevent undue hardship or where the existing conditions prevent com- 
pliance with the literal requirements of the rules and regulations. In no 
case shall any exception or variation be granted unless, in the opinion of 
the board, reasonable safety will be secured thereby. 

B. Application and Approval 

1. An application for a variance shall be complete and 
shall be submitted by the owner or a licensed elevator contractor on 
behalf of the owner to the department on a form approved by the de- 
partment. The application shall be accompanied by the following: 

a. detailed plans and specifications as required 
by Rule 010.05-011 or 010.05.012 herein; 

b. a fee of one hundred dollars ($100.00); and 

c. citation to the specific standard(s) from 
which a variance is sought. 

2. Failure to submit the items required by Rules 010.05- 
016 (B)(1) above shall result in summary dismissal of the variance re- 
quest or application. 

3. The department shall review the application for vari- 
ance and its attachments. The department may conduct an on-site in- 
spection. The department shall prepare a staff report and recommenda- 
tion which shall include a copy of any inspection report and copies or 
citations to any applicable ASME Code standards. 

4. The department shall notify the applicant for the vari- 
ance of the date, time, and place of the hearing before the board on the 
application for a variance. Such notice shall include a copy of the de- 
partment's staff report and recommendation. 

5. After hearing, the board shall grant or deny the vari- 
ance. The board may grant a variance conditioned upon the provision 
of alternate means of providing for public safety, or may grant a vari- 
ance for a limited time only. 

6. If the board grants a variance, an order shall be issued 
by the board. Such an order shall reflect the following: 



54 



a. the name of the petitioner; 

b. the state number, or AS number, assigned by 
the department if it is an existing conveyance; 

c. the type of equipment for which it is issued; 

d. the owner or lessee on whose behalf the vari- 
ance is sought; 

e. the location of the elevator, escalator, or 
dumbwaiter or other conveyance; and 

f any conditions imposed by the board. 

C. The owner or lessee shall maintain the variance order at the 
location of the conveyance and make it accessible to any licensed eleva- 
tor inspector. 

D. Specific Petitions 

1. The board will not grant a variance to permit the op- 
eration of an elevator for use by individuals with physical disabilities or 
any other use except in compliance with the provisions of Part V, Lim- 
ited-Use/Limited-Application Elevators, ASME A17. 1-2004 and 2005 
Supplement and 2005 Addenda or A18.1 2005. 

2. The board will not grant a variance to permit the op- 
eration of a residential elevator in a non-residential application. 

3. The board recognizes that installation of a convey- 
ance is expensive. Therefore, cost-savings alone is not evidence of an 
undue hardship. 



010.05-017 Civil Fines and Other Enforcement 

A. Civil fines, Generally. 

1. Ark. Code Ann. § 20-24-103 provides that any per- 

son, owner, lessee, partnership, association, corporation or inspector 
who violates any provision of Ark. Code Ann. § 20-24-101 through 20- 



55 



24-120 shall be subject to a civil fine of not less than five hundred dol- 
lars ($500) and not more than one thousand dollars ($1000) for each 
offense. 

2. Each day during which a violation continues shall be 

a separate offense. 

B. Assessment of Fines 

1. The Elevator Safety Division will notify the person, 
owner, lessee, partnership, association, corporation, inspector, licensee, 
or permitee of any assessment of a civil fine or penalty. Notice shall be 
provided in the same manner as a notice of hearing provided for in Ark. 
Code Ann. § 25-15-208 and Rule 010.05-009 herein. 

2. The notice of a fine or penalty assessment shall in- 
clude the following information: 

a. the nature of the violation(s); 

b. the date(s) of the violation(s); 

c. the amount of the civil penalty or fine; 

d. a statement that the civil fine or penalty will 
be final unless it is appealed to the Elevator Safety Board by making a 
written request to the Board for a hearing within thirty (30) days of the 
notice of assessment. Any hearing before the Board will be conducted 
in accordance with Ark. Code Ann. §§ 25-15-208 and -213 and Rule 
010.05-009 herein. 

3. In determining the amount of the fine or penalty, the 
division or the Board may consider those factors listed in Rule 010.05- 
009(R) herein. 

4. The division has the burden of proving the alleged 
facts and violations of law stated in the notice. 

5. No fine shall be assessed later than two (2) years from 

the date of the occurrence of the violation, unless such violation is con- 
tinuing in nature. 

C. Payment of Fine 



56 



1. If a fine or penalty is not been paid with sixty (60) 
days of the final administrative determination, the Director of the De- 
partment of Labor may file a civil action in a court of competent juris- 
diction to recover the fine or penalty. 

2. No license or permit may be renewed by any licensee 
or permitee with an unpaid fine or penalty. Further, failure to pay a fine 
or penalty shall be cause for revocation of any license or permit. 

D. Injunction 

In addition to other enforcement action, the Director is author- 
ized to petition a court of competent jurisdiction to enjoin or restrain 
violations of Ark. Code Ann. § 20-24-101 etseq. 



010.05-018 Accessibility to the Disabled 

A. 1. In addition to the standards imposed by Rules 010.05- 
011; 010.05-012; and 010.05.013 herein, the board hereby adopts and 
incorporates herein the American National Standards Institute Standard 
for Buildings and Facilities - Providing Accessibility and Usability for 
Physically Handicapped People, ANSI Al 17. 1, 2003. 

2. This Rule does not include any later amendments or 

editions of the standards incorporated by reference. 

3. Copies of these standards incorporated by reference 

can be viewed in the offices of the division or can be obtained by con- 
tacting the following: 

American National Standards Institute 
25 West 43 rd Street 
New York, NY 10036 
www.ansi.org 

B. Braille tags. In all publicly owned buildings containing pas- 
senger elevators, braille tags shall be affixed on or immediately adja- 
cent to all elevator pushbuttons, levers, or switches in order that blind 
persons may operate the elevators properly without assistance from 
sighted persons. "Publicly owned buildings" includes those buildings 
which are owned or operated by a municipal, county, or state govern- 



57 



ment. This requirement does not apply to elevator pushbuttons located 
outside the elevator car and used to call the elevator for travel "up" or 
"down". 



010.05-019 Other Appeals 

As provided in Ark. Code Ann. § 20-24-1 19: 

(a) Any person aggrieved by an order or act of the De- 

partment of Labor or its authorized representative under this chapter 
may, within fifteen (15) days after notice thereof, appeal from the 
order or act to the board which shall, within thirty (30) days thereaf- 
ter, hold a hearing of which at least fifteen (15) days written notice 
shall be given to all interested parties. 

(b) The Elevator Safety Board shall, within 
thirty (30) days after the hearing, issue an appropriate order modify- 
ing, approving, or disapproving the order or act. 

(c) A copy of the order by the board shall be 
served upon all interested parties. 

(d) Within thirty (30) days after any order or 
act of the board, any person aggrieved thereby may file a petition in 
the chancery court of the county in which the aggrieved person re- 
sides, for a review thereof. 

(e) The court shall summarily hear the petition 
and may make appropriate order or decree. 



010.05-020 Repealer, Effective Date and History 

A. All previous rules and regulations of the Elevator Safety Board 
are hereby repealed. 

B. The effective date of these rules and regulations is the 1st day 
of September 1,2006. 

C. History. 

1. The Elevator Safety Board first promulgated regula- 



58 



tions effective August 27, 1963. These regulations were amended ef- 
fective May 8, 1964; May 4, 1965; July 1, 1968; April 1, 1969; May 19, 
1969; September 19, 1969; and July 1, 1975. 

2. All previous rules and regulations of the Elevator 
Safety Board were repealed and new rules and regulations were adopted 
effective February 1, 1994. 

3. All previous rules and regulations of the Elevator 
Safety Board were repealed and new rules and regulations were 
adopted effective September 1, 2006. 



59 



60 



ASMEA17.1S-2005 



> 

2 
m 

> 

• 

is* 

o 
o 



Supplement to 

ASMEA17.1-2004 

Safety Code for 
Elevators and Escalators 



AN AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



Supplement to 

ASME A17.1-2004 

Safety Code for 
Elevators and Escalators 



AN AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD 



Date of Issuance: August 12, 2005 



This Supplement was approved by the American National Standards Institute on March 23, 2005. It 
was issued on August 12, 2005 and is effective as of February 12, 2006. 



ASME is the registered trademark of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. 

This code or standard was developed under procedures accredited as meeting the criteria for American National 
Standards. The Standards Committee that approved the code or standard was balanced to assure that individuals from 
competent and concerned interests have had an opportunity to participate. The proposed manual was made available 
for public review and comment that provides an opportunity for additional public input from industry, academia, 
regulatory agencies, and the public-at-large. 

ASME does not "approve," "rate," or "endorse" any item, construction, proprietary device, or activity. 

ASME does not take any position with respect to the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any 
items mentioned in this document, and does not undertake to insure anyone utilizing a standard agai'ist liability for 
infringement of any applicable letters patent, nor assume any such liability. Users are expressly advised tha J c determination 
of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, is entirely their own responsibility. 

Participation by federal agency representative(s) or person(s) affiliated with industry is not to be interpreted as 
government or industry endorsement of this code or standard. 

ASME accepts responsibility for only those interpretations of this document issued in accordance with the established 
ASME procedures and policies, which precludes the issuance of interpretations by individuals. 



No part of this document may be reproduced in any form, 

in an electronic retrieval system or otherwise, 

without the prior written permission of the publisher. 



The American Society of Mechanical Engineers 
Three Park Avenue, New York, NY 10016-5990 



Copyright © 2005 by 

THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS fifr" 

All rights reserved ^B^ 

Printed in U.S.A. 



CONTENTS 



• 



Application of This Supplement — vi 

Part 1 General 1 

1.1 Scope 1 

1.3 Definitions 1 

Part 2 Electric Elevators 2 

2.1 Construction of Hoistways and Hoistway Enclosures 2 

2.2 Pits 4 

2.3 Location and Guarding of Counterweights 5 

2.4 Vertical Clearances and Runbys for Cars and Counterweights 7 

2.5 Horizontal Car and Counterweight Clearances 9 

2.6 Protection of Space Below Hoistways 9 

2.7 Machinery Spaces, Machine Rooms, Control Spaces, and Control 

Rooms 10 

2.8 Equipment in Hoistways, Machinery Spaces, Machine Rooms, 

Control Spaces, and Control Rooms 17 

2.9 Machinery and Sheave Beams, Supports, and Foundations 19 

2.10 Guarding of Equipment and Standard Railing 21 

2.11 Protection of Hoistway Openings 21 

2.12 Hoistway Door Locking Devices and Electric Contacts, and Hoistway 

Access Switches 29 

2.13 Power Operation of Hoistway Doors and Car Doors 33 

2.14 Car Enclosures, Car Doors and Gates, and Car illumination 36 

2.15 Car Frames and Platforms 44 

2.16 Capacity and Loading 47 

2.17 Car and Counterweight Safeties 51 

2.18 Speed Governors 55 

2.19 Ascending Car Overspeed and Unintended Car Movement 

Protection 58 

2.20 Suspension Ropes and Their Connections 60 

2.21 Counterweights 66 

2.22 Buffers and Bumpers 67 

2.23 Car and Counterweight Guide Rails, Guide-Rail Supports, and 

Fastenings 70 

2.24 Driving Machines and Sheaves 79 

2.25 Terminal Stopping Devices 81 

2.26 Operating Devices and Control Equipment 83 

2.27 Emergency Operation and Signaling Devices 90 

2.28 Layout Drawings 101 

2.29 Identification 101 

Part 3 Hydraulic Elevators 102 

3.1 Construction of Hoistways and Hoistway Enclosures 102 

3.2 Pits 102 

3.3 Location and Guarding of Counterweights 102 

3.4 Bottom and Top Clearances and Runbys for Cars and 

Counterweights 102 

3.5 Horizontal Car and Counterweight Clearances 104 

3.6 Protection of Spaces Below Hoistway 104 

3.7 Machinery Spaces, Machine Rooms, Control Spaces, and Control 

Rooms 104 



3.8 Electrical Equipment, Wiring, Pipes, and Ducts in Hoistway, 

Machinery Spaces, Machine Rooms, Control Spaces, and Control 

Rooms 105 

3.9 Machinery and Sheave Beams, Supports, and Foundations 105 

3.10 Guarding of Exposed Auxiliary Equipment 105 

3.11 Protection of Hoistway Landing Openings 105 

3.12 Hoistway Door Locking Devices, Car Door or Gate Electric Contacts, 

and Hoistway Access Switches 105 

3.13 Power Operation, Power Opening, and Power Closing of Hoistway Doors 

and Car Doors or Gates 105 

3.14 Car Enclosures, Car Doors and Gates, and Car IQumination 105 

3.15 Car Frames and Platforms 105 

3.16 Capacity and Loading 106 

3.17 Car and Counterweight Safeties and Plunger Gripper 106 

3.18 Hydraulic Jacks 108 

3.19 Valves, Pressure Piping, and Fittings 110 

3.20 Ropes and Rope Connections 113 

3.21 Counterweights 113 

3.22 Buffers and Bumpers 113 

3.23 Guide Rails, Guide-Rail Supports, and Fastenings 114 

3.24 Hydraulic Machines and Tanks 114 

3.25 Terminal Stopping Devices 114 

3.26 Operating Devices and Control Equipment 115 

3.27 Emergency Operation and Signaling Devices 117 

3.28 Layout Data 118 

3.29 Identification 118 

Part 8 General Requirements 119 

8.1 Security 119 

8.6 Maintenance, Repair, and Replacement 119 

Figures 

2.16.1.1 Inside Net Platform Areas for Passenger Elevators 48 

2.20.9.4 Tapered Rope Sockets 63 

2.20.9.5 Wedge Rope Sockets 63 

2.23.3 Elevator Guide Rails 70 

2.23.4.1-1 Maximum Weight of a Car With Rated Load or of Counterweight With 

Safety Device for a Pair of Guide Rails as Specified 

in 2.23.4.1 72 

2.23.4.1-2 Minimum Moment of Inertia About x-x Axis for a Single Guide Rail 

With Its Reinforcement 73 

2.27.3.1.6(h) Visual Signal 94 

2.27.3.3.7 Panel Layout 96 

2.27.7.1 Phase I Emergency Recall Operation Instructions 98 

2.27.7.2 Phase II Emergency In-Car Operation 99 

2.27.9 Elevator Corridor Call Station Pictograph 100 

Tables 

2.4.2.2 Minimum Bottom Runby for Counterweight Elevators With Spring 

Buffers or Solid Bumpers and Rheostatic Control or Single-Speed 

AC Control 7 

2.15.10.1 Maximum Allowable Stresses in Car Frame and Platform Members 

and Connections, for Steels Specified in 2.15.6.2.1 and 2.15.6.2.2 46 

2.16.1.1 Maximum Inside Net Platform Areas for the Various Rated Loads 48 

2.17.3 Maximum and Minimum Stopping Distances for Type B Car Safeties 

With Rated Load and Type B Counterweight Safeties 53 

2.18.2.1 Maximum Car Speeds at Which Speed Governor Trips and Governor 

Overspeed Switch Operates 56 



IV 



2.18.7.4 Multiplier for Determining Governor Sheave Pitch Diameter 58 

2.20.3 Minimum Factors of Safety for Suspension Wire Ropes 61 

2.20.9.4.5 Relation of Rope Diameter to Diameter of the Small Socket Hole 63 

2.22.3.1 Minimum Spring Buffer Stroke 68 

2.22.4.1 Minimum Oil Buffer Strokes 69 

2.23.3 T-Section Guide-Rail Dimensions 71 

2.23.4.2 Load Multiplying Factor for Duplex Safeties 76 

2.23.4.3.1 Guide Rails for Counterweight Without Safeties 77 

2.23.4.3.3 Intermediate Tie Brackets 77 

2.23.7.2.1 Minimum Thickness of Fishplates and Minimum Diameter of 

Fastening Bolts 78 

2.23.10.2 Minimum Size of Rail-Fastening Bolts 79 

2.26.12.1 Symbol Identification 91 

Nonmandatory Appendices 

Q Explanatory Figures for the Definitions of Elevator Machinery Space, 

Machine Room, Control Space, Control Room, Remote Machine 

Room, or Remote Control Room 121 

R Inspection Operation and Hoistway Access Switch Operation 

Hierarchy 124 



APPLICATION OF THIS SUPPLEMENT 

(This is a special Supplement to the ASME A17.1-2004 Code.) 



The advancement of technologies used in the design and construction of elevator equipment 
has enabled the installation of the equipment in other than traditional locations such as machine 
rooms. The ASME A17 Standards Committee opened a technical revision in 1997 to fully address 
the safety issues regarding such installations and subsequently formed an Ad Hoc Committee 
to formulate the proposal. The Ad Hoc Committee, which was bi-national with nearly equal 
membership from both the United States and Canada, developed the requirements necessary to 
address the safety aspects of the installation of equipment whether it is located in traditional 
machine rooms, control rooms, or in machinery spaces and control spaces inside and outside the 
hoistway. Over a period of 6 years the revisions were refined by the Ad-Hoc Committee and the 
A17 Standards Committee through the ASME/ANSI consensus process. 

The revisions contained in this Supplement went through numerous ballots to all of the members 
of the A17 Standards Committee (Hoistway, Electrical, Mechanical Design, Hydraulic, and Emer- 
gency Operations committees) as well as the National Interest Review Group, the Regulatory 
Advisory Council, and the CSA B44 Technical Committee in order to achieve consensus by all. 

This Supplement to the ASME A17.1-2004 Code is the result of that work. 

The revisions contained in this Supplement do not apply to all equipment covered by A17.1 
Code at this time. The revisions in this Supplement apply to new installations of electric elevators 
and hydraulic elevators within the Scope of ASME A17.1-2004. This Supplement has been harmo- 
nized with ASME A17.1a-2005 and replaces the requirements of Parts 2 and 3 in its entirety, and 
modifies the definitions of Part 1 as well as the requirements of Part 8 as shown in the Supplement. 

This Supplement does not apply to equipment covered by the Scopes of Parts 4, 5, 6, and 7 of 
ASME Al 7. 1-2004 including A17.1a-2005, and all references within these Parts are to the require- 
ments in ASME A17.1-2004 including A17.1a-2005, not to the requirements in this Supplement. 

The requirements are being released as a special Supplement to the ASME Al 7. 1-2004 Code 
at the request of industry and the A17 Standards Committee. 



SECTION 1.1-SECTION 1.3 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



SUPPLEMENT TO ASME A17.1-2004 SAFETY CODE FOR 
ELEVATORS AND ESCALATORS 

Parti 
General 



SECTION 1.1 
SCOPE 

See A17.1-2004 including A17.1a-2005 for any addi- 
tional requirements that apply. 



SECTION 1.3 
DEFINITIONS 

control room, elevator, dumbwaiter, material lift: an 

enclosed control space outside the hoistway, intended 
for full bodily entry, which contains the motor controller. 
The room could also contain electrical and /or mechani- 
cal equipment used directly in connection with the eleva- 
tor, dumbwaiter, or material lift but not the electric 
driving machine or the hydraulic machine. (See Appen- 
dix Q.) 

control space, elevator, dumbwaiter, material lift: a 

space inside or outside the hoistway, intended to be 
accessed with or without full bodily entry, which con- 
tains the motor controller. This space could also contain 
electrical and/or mechanical equipment used directly 
in connection with the elevator, dumbwaiter, or material 
lift but not the electric driving machine or the hydraulic 
machine. (See Appendix Q.) 

NOTE: See 2.7.6.3.2 for an exception regarding the location of a 
motor controller. 



machine room and control room, remote, elevator, 
dumbwaiter, material lift: a machine room or control 
room that is not attached to the outside perimeter or 
surface of the walls, ceiling, or floor of the hoistway. 
(See Appendix Q.) 

machine room, elevator, dumbwaiter, material lift: an 

enclosed machinery space outside the hoistway, 
intended for full bodily entry, which contains the electric 
driving machine or the hydraulic machine. The room 
could also contain electrical and /or mechanical equip- 
ment used directly in connection with the elevator, 
dumbwaiter, or material lift. (See Appendix Q.) 

machinery space, elevator, dumbwaiter, material lift: 

a space inside or outside the hoistway, intended to be 
accessed with or without full bodily entry, which con- 
tains elevator, dumbwaiter, or material lift mechanical 
equipment, and could also contain electrical equipment 
used directly in connection with the elevator, dumb- 
waiter, or material lift. This space could also contain the 
electric driving machine or the hydraulic machine. (See 
Appendix Q.) 

machinery space and control space, remote, elevator, 
dumbwaiter, material lift: a machinery space or control 
space that is not within the hoistway, machine room, or 
control room, and that is not attached to the outside 
perimeter or surface of the walls, ceiling, or floor of the 
hoistway. (See Appendix Q.) 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



SCOPE-2.1.1.3 



Part 2 
Electric Elevators 



SCOPE 

Part 2 applies to electric elevators installed at an angle 
greater than 70 deg from the horizontal. It applies to 
other equipment only as referenced in the applicable 
Part. 

NOTE: See also Part 8 for additional requirements that apply to 
electric elevators. 



SECTION 2.1 

CONSTRUCTION OF HOISTWAYS AND HOISTWAY 

ENCLOSURES 

2.1.1 Hoistway Enclosures 

Hoistway enclosures shall conform to 2.1.1.1, 2.1.1.2, 
or 2.1.1.3. 

2.1.1.1 Fire-Resistive Construction 

2.1.1.1.1 Where fire-resistive construction is 
required, hoistways shall be enclosed in conformance 
with the requirements of the building code (see 1.3). 

2.1.1.1.2 Partitions between hoistways and 

(a) machinery spaces outside the hoistway 

(b) machine rooms 

(c) control spaces outside the hoistway 

(d) control rooms 

having fire-resistive enclosures shall be of noncombusti- 
ble solid or openwork construction that meets the 
requirements of 2.1.1.2.2(d)(1), (2), and (3). Partitions of 
solid construction shall be permitted to have openings 
essential for ropes, drums, sheaves, and other elevator 
equipment. 

Openwork construction shall reject a ball 25 mm (1 in.) 
in diameter, except where there are openings essential 
for ropes, drums, sheaves, and other elevator equipment. 

2.1.1.1.3 Hoistway enclosure openings shall be 
protected with entrances or access doors having a fire- 
protection rating conforming to the requirements of the 
building code. 

2.1.1.2 Non-Fire-Resistive Construction 

2.1.1.2.1 Where fire-resistive construction is not 
required by the building code, hoistway construction 
shall conform to 2.1.1.2.2 or 2.1.1.3. 

2.1.1.2.2 The hoistway shall be fully enclosed con- 
forming to 2.1.1.2.2(a), (b), (c), and (d); or 2.1.1.2.2(a), 
(b), and (e). 



(a) Enclosures and doors shall be imperforated to a 
height of 2 000 mm (79 in.) above each floor or landing 
and above the treads of adjacent stairways. The enclo- 
sure shall be imperforated, adjacent to, and for 150 mm 
(6 in.) on either side of any moving equipment that is 
within 100 mm (4 in.) of the enclosure. 

(b) Partitions between hoistways and 

(1) machinery spaces outside the hoistway 

(2) machine rooms 

(3) control spaces outside the hoistway 

(4) control rooms 

shall be of solid or openwork construction that meets 
the requirements of 2.1.1.2.2(d)(1), (2), and (3). Partitions 
of solid construction shall be permitted to have openings 
essential for ropes, drums, sheaves, and other elevator 
equipment. Openwork construction shall reject a ball 
25 mm (1 in.) in diameter, except where there are open- 
ings for ropes, drums, sheaves, and other elevator 
equipment. 

(c) Openwork enclosures, where used above the 
2 000 mm (79 in.) level, shall reject a ball 25 mm (1 in.) 
in diameter. 

(d) Openwork enclosures shall be 

(1) at least 2.2 mm (0.087 in.) thick wire, if of steel 
wire grille 

(2) at least 2.2 mm (0.087 in.) thick, if of 
expanded metal 

(3) so supported and braced as to deflect not over 
15 mm (0.6 in.) when subjected to a force of 450 N 
(100 lbf ) applied horizontally at any point 

(e) Enclosures shall be permitted to be glass, provided 
it is laminated glass conforming to ANSI Z97.1, 16 CFR 
Part 1201, or CAN/CGSB-12.1, whichever is applicable 
(see Part 9). Markings as specified in the applicable stan- 
dard shall be on each separate piece of glass and shall 
remain visible after installation. 

2.1.1.2.3 Entrances shall be in conformance with 
2.11, except 2.11.14, 2.11.15, 2.11.16, and 2.11.18. 

2.1.1.3 Partially Enclosed Hoistways. For elevators 
that are not fully enclosed, protection at least 2 400 mm 
(94.5 in.) high shall be provided on the hoistway sides 
that are located 1 500 mm (59 in.) or less from elevator 
equipment to areas accessible to other than elevator per- 
sonnel. Such protection shall comply with 2.1.1.2. 



2.1.1.4-2.1.5 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.1.1.4 Multiple Hoistways. The number of elevators 
permissible in a hoistway shall be in conformance with 
the building code. 

2.1.1.5 Strength of Enclosure. The hoistway enclo- 
sure adjacent to a landing opening shall be of sufficient 
strength to maintain, in true lateral alignment, the 
hoistway entrances. Operating mechanisms and locking 
devices shall be supported by the building wall, if load- 
bearing, or by other building structure. Adequate con- 
sideration shall be given to pressure exerted on hoistway 
enclosures as a result of windage and elevator operation. 

2.1.2 Construction at Top and Bottom of the 
Hoistway 

2.1.2.1 Construction at Top of the Hoistway. The top 

of the hoistway shall be enclosed as required by the 
building code. 

2.1.2.2 Construction at Bottom of Hoistway. Pits 
extending to the ground shall have noncombustible 
floors, and shall be designed to prevent entry of ground 
water into the pit. The pit floor of any hoistway not 
extending to the ground shall be of construction having 
a fire-resistance rating at least equal to that required for 
the hoistway enclosure. (See also 2.2 and 2.6.) 

2.1.2.3 Strength of Pit Floor. The pit equipment, 
beams, floor, and their supports shall be designed and 
constructed to meet the applicable building code 
requirements and to withstand the following loads, 
without permanent deformation, in the manner in which 
they occur: 

(a) the impact load due to car or counterweight buffer 
engagement at 125% of the rated speed or 125% of the 
striking speed where reduced stroke buffers are used 
(see 8.2.3) 

(b) the part of the load transmitted due to the applica- 
tion of the car safety, or where applicable, the counter- 
weight safety 

(c) compensation up-pull load where compensation 
tie-down is applied (see 2.17.17) 

(d) the loads imposed by a driving machine where 
applicable (see 2.9) 

(e) any other elevator-related loads that are transmit- 
ted to the pit floor 

2.1.3 Floor Over Hoistways 

2.1.3.1 General Requirements 

2.1.3.1.1 A metal or concrete floor shall be pro- 
vided at the top of the hoistway 

(a) where a machine room or control room is located 
above the hoistway 

(b) below overhead sheaves and other equipment that 
are located over the hoistway and means of access con- 
forming to 2.7.6.3.3 are not provided 



(c) below governors that are located over the hoistway 
and means of access conforming to 2.7.6.3.4 are not pro- 
vided 

2.1 .3.1 .2 Floors are not required below secondary 
and deflecting sheaves of traction-type machines located 
over the hoistway. 

2.1.3.2 Strength of Floor. Overhead floors shall be 
capable of sustaining a concentrated load of 1 000 N 
(225 lb) on any 2 000 mm 2 (3 in. 2 ) area, and in addition, 
where it constitutes the floor of the main or secondary 
level machinery space, it shall be designed for a live 
load of not less than 6 kPa (125 lb /ft 2 ) in all open areas. 

Where the elevator driving machine is to be supported 
solely by the machine room floor slab, the floor slab 
shall be designed in accordance with 2.9.4 and 2.9.5. 

2.1.3.3 Construction of Floors. Floors shall be of con- 
crete or metal construction with or without perforations. 
Metal floors shall conform to the following: 

(a) If of bar-type grating, the openings between bars 
shall reject a ball 20 mm (0.8 in.) in diameter. 

(b) If of perforated sheet metal or of fabricated open- 
work construction, the openings shall reject a ball 25 mm 
(1 in.) in diameter. 

2.1.3.4 Area to Be Covered by Floor. Where a floor 
over a hoistway is required by 2.1.3.1, the floor shall 
extend over the entire area of the hoistway where the 
cross-sectional area is 10 m 2 (108 ft 2 ) or less. Where the 
cross-sectional area is greater, the floor shall extend not 
less than 600 mm (24 in.) beyond the general contour 
of the machine or sheaves or other equipment, and to 
the entrance to the machinery space at or above the level 
of that floor. Where the floor does not cover the entire 
horizontal area of the hoistway, the open or exposed 
sides shall be provided with a standard railing conform- 
ing to 2.10.2. 

2.1.4 Control of Smoke and Hot Gases 

When required by the building code, hoistways shall 
be provided with means to prevent the accumulation of 
smoke and hot gases. 

Where air pressurization of the hoistway is utilized 
as a means of smoke and hot gas control, the air shall 
not be introduced into the hoistway in such a manner 
as to cause erratic operation by impingement of traveling 
cables, selector tapes, governor ropes, compensating 
ropes, and other components sensitive to excessive 
movement or deflection. 

2.1.5 Windows and Skylights 

In jurisdictions not enforcing the NBCC, windows in 
the walls of hoistway enclosures are prohibited. 

Windows and skylights and their frames and sashes 
in machine rooms and control rooms shall conform to 
the requirements of the building code (see 1.3). 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.1.6-2.2A2 



2.1.6 Projections, Recesses, and Setbacks in 
Hoistway Enclosures 

Hoistway enclosures shall have flush surfaces on the 
hoistway side, subject to the requirements of 2.1.6.1 and 
2.1.6.2. 

2.1.6.1 On sides for loading and unloading, landing 
sills, hoistway doors, door tracks, and hangers shall be 
permitted to project inside the hoistway enclosure. Sills 
shall be guarded as required by 2.11.10.1. 

2.1 .6.2 On sides not used for loading and unloading 

(a) recesses, except those necessary for installation of 
elevator equipment, shall not be permitted 

(b) beams, floor slabs, or other building construction 
making an angle less than 75 deg with the horizontal 
shall not project more than 100 mm (4 in.) inside the 
hoistway enclosure unless the top surface of the projec- 
tion is beveled at an angle not less than 75 deg with the 
horizontal 

(c) separator beams between adjacent elevators are 
not required to have bevels 

(d) where setbacks exceeding 100 mm (4 in.) occur in 
the enclosure wall, the top of the setback shall be beveled 
at an angle of not less than 75 deg with the horizontal 

(e) bevels are not required if the projections and set- 
backs are covered with material conforming to the fol- 
lowing: 

(1) it shall be equal to or stronger than 1.110 mm 
(0.0437 in.) wire 

(2) it shall have openings not exceeding 25 mm 
(lin.) 

(3) it shall be supported and braced such that it 
will not deflect more than 25 mm (1 in.) when subjected 
to a force of 4.79 kPa (100 lbf/fr 2 ) applied horizontally 
at any point 

SECTION 2.2 
PITS 

2.2.1 General 

A pit shall be provided for every elevator. 

2.2.2 Design and Construction of Pits 

2.2.2.1 The construction of the pit walls, the pit floor, 
and any pit access doors (see 2.2.4) shall conform to 
2.1.1 and 2.1.2. 

2.2.2.2 The floor of the pit shall be approximately 
level, except that 

(a) trenches or depressions shall be permitted for the 
installation of buffers, compensating sheaves and 
frames, and vertically sliding biparting hoistway doors, 
where structural conditions make such trenches or 
depressions necessary 



(b) in existing buildings, where new elevators are 
installed or existing elevators are altered, existing foun- 
dation footings extending above the general level of the 
pit floor shall be permitted to remain in place, provided 
that the maximum encroachment of such footings does 
not exceed 15% of the cubic content of the pit, and further 
provided that it is impracticable to remove the footing 

2.2.2.3 Permanent provisions shall be made to pre- 
vent accumulation of ground water in the pit (see 
2.1.2.2). 

2.2.2.4 Drains and sump pumps, where provided, 
shall comply with the applicable plumbing code, and 
they shall be provided with a positive means to prevent 
water, gases, and odors from entering the hoistway. 

2.2.2.5 In elevators provided with Firefighters' 
Emergency Operation, a drain or sump pump shall be 
provided. 

2.2.2.6 Sumps and sump pumps in pits, where pro- 
vided, shall be covered. The cover shall be secured and 
level with the pit floor. 

2.2.2.7 In jurisdictions enforcing the NBCC sump 
pumps and their control equipment shall not be installed 
in any elevator pit. 

2.2.3 Guards Between Adjacent Pits 

2.2.3.1 Where there is a difference in level between 
the floors of adjacent pits, a metal guard, imperforated, 
or perforated with openings that will reject a ball 50 mm 
(2 in.) in diameter, shall be installed for separating such 
pits. Guards shall extend not less than 2 000 mm (79 in.) 
above the level of the higher pit floor and a self-closing 
access door shall be permitted. 

2.2.3.2 Where the difference in level is 600 mm 
(24 in.) or less, a standard railing conforming to 2.10.2 
shall be permitted to be installed in lieu of the guard. 

2.2.4 Access to Pits 

Safe and convenient access shall be provided to all 
pits, and shall conform to 2.2.4.1 through 2.2.4.4. 

2.2.4.1 Access shall be by means of the lowest 
hoistway door or by means of a separate pit access door. 

2.2.4.2 There shall be installed in the pit of each 
elevator, where the pit extends more than 900 mm (35 in.) 
below the sill of the pit access door, a fixed vertical 
ladder of noncombustible material, located within reach 
of the access door. The ladder shall extend not less than 
1 200 mm (48 in.) above the sill of the access door. The 
rungs, cleats, or steps shall be a minimum of 400 mm 
(16 in.) wide. When unavoidable obstructions are 
encountered, the width shall be permitted to be 
decreased to less than 400 mm (16 in.). The reduced 
width shall be as wide as the available space permits, 



2.2A2-2.3.1 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



but not less than 225 mm (9 in.). The rungs, cleats, or 
steps shall be spaced 300 mm (12 in.) on center. A clear 
distance of not less than 180 mm (7 in.) from the center- 
line of the rungs, cleats, or steps to the nearest permanent 
object in back of the ladder shall be provided. When 
unavoidable obstructions are encountered, the distance 
shall be permitted to be reduced to 115 mm (4.5 in.). 
Siderails, if provided, shall have a clear distance of not 
less than 115 mm (4.5 in.) from their centerline to the 
nearest permanent object. The nearest point of the ladder 
shall be within 1 000 mm (39 in.), measured horizontally 
from the means to unlock the egress door from the pit. 
Pit access by a ladder shall not be permitted when 
the pit floor is more than 3 000 mm (120 in.) below the 
sill of the access door, except where there is no building 
floor below the bottom terminal landing, this height 
shall be permitted to be greater but not more than 
4 200 mm (165 in.). 

2.2.4.3 Pits shall be accessible only to elevator per- 
sonnel. 

2.2.4.4 Separate pit door, when provided, shall be 
subject to the following requirements: 

(a) If the door swings into the pit, it shall be located 
so that it does not interfere with moving equipment. 

(b) If the door swings out, and the lowest structural 
or mechanical part, equipment, or device installed 
beneath the car platform, except guide shoes or rollers 
or safety jaw assemblies, projects below the top of the 
separate pit access door opening when the car is level 
with the bottom terminal landing 

(1) an electric contact conforming to 2.26.2.26 shall 
be provided to prevent operation of the elevator when 
the door is open 

(2) the door shall be provided with a vision panel(s) 
that is glazed with clear wired glass not less than 6 mm 
(0.25 in.) thick, will reject a ball 150 mm (6 in.) in diame- 
ter, and have an area of not more than 0.03 m 2 (47 in. 2 ) 

(c) The door shall provide a minimum opening of 
750 mm (29.5 in.) in width and 1 825 mm (72 in.) in 
height. 

(d) The door shall be equipped with a barrier con- 
forming to 2.11.1.2(i), where the door sill is located more 
than 300 mm (12 in.) above the pit floor. 

(e) The door shall be self-closing and provided with 
a spring-type lock arranged to permit the door to be 
opened from inside of the pit without a key. Such doors 
shall be kept closed and locked. The key shall be of 
Group 1 Security (see 8.1). 

2.2.5 Illumination of Pits 

A permanent lighting fixture shall be provided and 
shall conform to 2.2.5.1 through 2.2.5.3. 

2.2.5.1 The lighting shall provide an illumination of 
not less than 100 lx (10 fc) at the pit floor and at a pit 
platform, when provided. 



2.2.5.2 The light bulb(s) shall be externally guarded 
to prevent contact and accidental breakage. 

2.2.5.3 The light switch shall be so located as to be 
accessible from the pit access door. 

2.2.6 Stop Switch in Pits 

An enclosed stop switch(es), meeting the require- 
ments of 2.26.2.7 and 2.2.6.1 through 2.2.6.3, shall be 
installed in the pit of each elevator. 

2.2.6.1 The stop switch shall be so located as to be 
accessible from the pit access door. Where access to the 
pits of elevators in a multiple hoistway is by means of 
a single access door, the stop switch for each elevator 
shall be located adjacent to the nearest point of access 
to its pit from the access door. 

2.2.6.2 In elevators where access to the pit is through 
the lowest landing hoistway door, a stop switch shall 
be located approximately 450 mm (18 in.) above the 
floor level of the landing, within reach from this access 
floor and adjacent to the pit ladder, if provided. When 
the pit exceeds 1 700 mm (67 in.) in depth, an additional 
stop switch is required adjacent to the pit ladder and 
approximately 1 200 mm (47 in.) above the pit floor. 

2.2.6.3 Where more than one switch is provided, 
they shall be wired in series. 

2.2.7 Minimum Pit Depths Required 

The pit depth shall be not less than is required for the 
installation of the buffers, compensating sheaves, if any, 
and all other elevator equipment located therein and to 
provide the rninimum bottom car clearance and runby 
required by 2.4.1. 

2.2.8 Access to Underside of Car 

Where the distance from the pit floor to the underside 
of the plank channels or slings exceeds 2 100 mm (83 in.), 
with the car at the lowest landing, a means shall be 
permanently installed or permanently stored in the pit 
to provide access to the equipment on the underside of 
the car. 



SECTION 2.3 
LOCATION AND GUARDING OF COUNTERWEIGHTS 

2.3.1 Location of Counterweights 

Counterweights shall be located in the hoistway of 
the elevator that they serve, or in a remote hoistway 
subject to the limitations and requirements of 2.3.3. 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.3.2-2.3.4.2 



2.3.2 Counterweight Guards 

2.3.2.1 Metal guards shall be installed in the pit 
and/or a machine room or control room located under- 
neath the hoistway on all open sides of the counter- 
weight runway, except that 

(a) the guard, or portion thereof, is not required on 
the side facing the car where there is no space greater 
than 500 mm (20 in.) between compensating ropes 
(chains), or between compensating ropes (chains) and 
counterweight rails, or between compensating ropes 
(chains) and guards 

(b) where pit-mounted buffers are used, the guard is 
not required where the bottom of the counterweight 
resting on its compressed buffer is 2 130 mm (84 in.) or 
more above the pit floor, or above the machine or control 
room floor if located underneath the hoistway 

2.3.2.2 Guards shall 

(a) extend from the lowest part of the counterweight 
assembly when the counterweight is resting on the fully 
compressed buffer to a point not less than 2 100 mm 
(83 in.) and not more than 2 450 mm (96 in.) above the 
pit floor 

(b) be the full width of the area being guarded 

(c) not prevent determination of the counterweight 
runby 

(d) be fastened to a metal frame reinforced and braced 
to be at least equal in strength and stiffness to 2 mm 
(0.074 in.) thick sheet steel 

(e) if perforated, reject a ball 25 mm (1 in.) in diameter 

2.3.2.3 Guarding of Counterweights in a Multiple-Ele- 
vator Hoistway. Where a counterweight is located 
between elevators, the counterweight runway shall be 
guarded on the side next to the adjacent elevator. The 
guard shall be of noncombustible material. The guard, 
if of openwork material, shall reject a ball 25 mm (1 in.) 
in diameter and be made from material equal to or 
stronger than 1.110 mm (0.0437 in.) diameter wire. The 
guard shall be so supported that when subjected to a 
force of 450 N (100 lbf) applied over an area of 100 mm 
x 100 mm (4 in. X 4 in.) at any location, the deflection 
shall not reduce the clearance between the guard and 
the counterweight below 25 mm (1 in.). 

2.3.3 Remote Counterweight Hoistways 

Where elevators are not provided with either compen- 
sating means or counterweight safeties, the counter- 
weights shall be permitted to be located in a remote 
hoistway conforming to 2.3.3.1 through 2.3.3.6. 

2.3.3.1 The hoistway shall be fully enclosed and shall 
be fire resistive, conforming to 2.1.1.1 if it penetrates 
separate fire-resistive areas of the structure. 

2.3.3.2 Construction at the top and bottom of the 
hoistway shall conform to 2.1.2. 



2.3.3.3 Permanent means shall be provided for 
inspection, repair, and maintenance of the counter- 
weight, deflecting and secondary sheaves, hoistway, 
ropes, counterweight guide rails, and counterweight 
buffers or bumpers. Entry doors into the separate coun- 
terweight hoistway shall be provided at top, bottom, 
and center of counterweight hoistway, but in no case 
shall the entry doors be more than 11 m (36 ft) from sill to 
sill. Doors shall be located and of such width to provide 
unobstructed access to the space between the counter- 
weight guides. The height of the door shall be at least 
1 975 mm (78 in.). Doors shall conform to 2.11.1.2(b) 
through (e), inclusive. An enclosed stop switch, meeting 
the requirements of 2.26.2.5(a), (b), and (c), a permanent 
electric light switch, duplex receptacle, and light shall 
be provided in the hoistway immediately inside the 
entry door. 

2.3.3.4 Ropes and sheaves leading to the separate 
counterweight hoistways shall be protected against 
unauthorized access. 

2.3.3.5 Not more than four counterweights shall be 
located in a single separate counterweight hoistway. 
Multiple counterweights located in a single hoistway 
shall be separated by means of an imperforated metal 
guard at the top, bottom, and center of the hoistway. 
Guards shall extend a minimum of 2 450 mm (96 in.) in 
length opposite the entry door. Doors and all other 
means described in 2.3.3.3 shall be provided for each 
counterweight. 

2.3.3.6 There shall be a clearance of not less than 
600 mm (24 in.) between the weight in the counterweight 
frame and the wall containing the entry door. 

2.3.4 Counterweight Runway Enclosures 

Where a counterweight is located in the same 
hoistway as the car, the runway for the counterweight 
shall be permitted to be separated from the runway for 
the car, provided it conforms to 2.3.4.1 and 2.3.4.2. 

2.3.4.1 The partition shall be noncombustible. 
Unperforated metal partitions shall be equal to or 
stronger than 1.2 mm (0.047 in.) thick sheet steel. Open- 
work partitions shall be either wire grille at least 2.2 mm 
(0.087 in.) in diameter or expanded metal at least 2.2 mm 
(0.087 in.) in thickness. 

2.3.4.2 The counterweight runway shall be permit- 
ted to be fully enclosed for the full height, provided that 
the partitions are removable in sections weighing not 
more than 25 kg (55 lb), which permit inspection and 
maintenance of the entire counterweight assembly and 
the inspection of the counterweight guide rails and 
guide-rail brackets. 



SECTION 2.4-2.4.5 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



SECTION 2.4 

VERTICAL CLEARANCES AND RUNBYS FOR CARS 

AND COUNTERWEIGHTS 

2.4.1 Bottom Car Clearances 

2.4.1.1 When the car rests on its fully compressed 
buffers or bumpers, there shall be a vertical clearance 
of not less than 600 mm (24 in.) between the pit floorand 
the lowest structural or mechanical part, equipment, 
or device installed beneath the car platform, except as 
specified in 2.4.1.2. 

2.4.1.2 The 600 mm (24 in.) clearance does not 
apply to 

(a) any equipment on the car within 300 mm (12 in.) 
horizontally from any side of the car platform 

(b) any equipment located on or traveling with the 
car located within 300 mm (12 in.) horizontally from 
either side of the car frame centerline parallel to the 
plane of the guide rails 

(c) any equipment mounted in or on the pit floor 
located within 300 mm (12 in.) horizontally from either 
side of the car frame centerline parallel to the guide rail 

2.4.1.3 In no case shall the available refuge space be 
less than either of the following: 

(a) a horizontal area of 600 mm x 1 200 mm (24 in. 
x 48 in.) with a height of 600 mm (24 in) 

(b) a horizontal area of 450 mm x 900 mm (18 in. x 
35 in.) with a height of 1 070 mm (42 in.) 

2.4.1.4 Trenches and depressions or foundation 
encroachments permitted by 2.2.2.2 shall not be consid- 
ered in determining these clearances. 

2.4.1.5 When the car is resting on its fully com- 
pressed buffers or bumpers, no part of the car, or any 
equipment attached thereto or equipment traveling with 
the car, shall strike any part of the pit or any equipment 
mounted therein. 

2.4.1.6 In any area in the pit, outside the refuge 
space, where the vertical clearance is less than 600 mm 
(24 in.), that area shall be clearly marked on the pit floor. 
Markings shall not be required in the area under the 
platform guard and guiding means if that is the only 
area in the pit where the vertical clearance is less than 
600 mm (24 in.). The marking shall consist of alternating 
100 mm (4 in.) diagonal red and white stripes. In addi- 
tion, a sign with the words "DANGER LOW CLEAR- 
ANCE" shall be prominently posted on the hoistway 
enclosure and be visible from within the pit and the 
entrance to the pit. The sign shall conform to ANSI 
Z535.2 or CAN/CSA-Z321, whichever is applicable (see 
Part 9). The sign shall be of such material and construc- 
tion that the letters and figures stamped, etched, cast, 
or otherwise applied to the face shall remain perma- 
nently and readily legible. 



Table 2.4.2.2 Minimum Bottom Runby for 
Counterweight Elevators With Spring Buffers or 
Solid Bumpers and Rheostatic Control or Single- 
Speed AC Control 



Rated Speed, 
m/s (ft/min) 



Runby, 
mm (in.) 



Not over 0.13 (not over 25) 75 (3) 

Over 0.13 to 0.25 (over 25 to 50) 150 (6) 

Over 0.25 to 0.50 (over 50 to 100) 225 (9) 

Over 0.50 to 1.0 (over 100 to 200) 300 (12) 



2.4.2 Minimum Bottom Runby for Counterweighted 
Elevators 

The bottom runby of cars and counterweights shall 
be not less than the requirements stated in 2.4.2.1 and 
2.4.2.2. 

2.4.2.1 Where oil buffers are used, the bottom runby 
shall be not less than 150 mm (6 in.), except that 

(a) where practical difficulties prevent a sufficient pit 
depth or where a top clearance cannot be provided to 
obtain the runby specified, it shall be permitted to be 
reduced 

(b) where spring-return-type oil buffers are used, the 
runby shall be permitted to be eliminated so that the 
buffers are compressed by amounts not exceeding those 
permitted by 2.22.4.8, when the car floor is level with 
the terminal landings 

2.4.2.2 Where spring buffers or solid bumpers are 
used, the bottom runby shall be not less than 150 mm 
(6 in.), except for rheostatic and single-speed AC control, 
not less than shown in Table 2.4.2.2. 

2.4.3 Minimum Bottom Runby for 
Uncounterweighted Elevators 

The bottom runby of uncounterweighted elevators 
shall be not less than 

(a) 75 mm (3 in.) where the rated speed does not 
exceed 0.15 m/s (30 ft/min) 

(b) 150 mm (6 in.) where the rated speed exceeds 
0.15 m/s (30 ft/min) 

2.4.4 Maximum Bottom Runby 

In no case shall the maximum bottom runby exceed 

(a) 600 mm (24 in.) for cars 

(b) 900 mm (35 in.) for counterweights 

2.4.5 Counterweight Runby Data Plate 

A data plate permanently and securely attached shall 
be provided in the pit, in the vicinity of the counter- 
weight buffer, indicating the maximum designed coun- 
terweight runby. The data plate shall conform to 2.16.3.3, 
except that the letters shall be not less than 25 mm (1 in.) 
in height. 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.4.6-2.4.10.1 



2.4.6 Top Car Clearances for Counterweighted 
Elevators 

2.4.6.1 General Requirements. The top car clearance 
shall be not less than the sum of either of the following: 

(a) the dimensions specified in 2.4.6.2(a) through (d) 

(b) the dimensions specified in 2.4.6.2(a), (b), (c), 
and (e) 

2.4.6.2 Components of the Top Car Clearances. The 

following shall be considered when calculating the mini- 
mum top car clearances: 

(a) the designed maximum bottom counterweight 
runby [see 2.4.4(b)] 

(b) the stroke of the counterweight buffer, determined 
as follows: 

(1) for full-stroke buffers, the stroke of the buffer 
used, or the remaining stroke when the buffer is com- 
pressed with the car at the top terminal landing (see 
2.4.2 and 2.22.4.8); or 

(2) for reduced-stroke oil buffers (see 2.22.4.1.2), the 
full stroke required by 2.22.4.1.1. 

(c) 600 mm (24 in.) or the distance that any sheave or 
any other equipment mounted in or on the car crosshead 
projects above the top of the car crosshead, whichever 
is greater, but in no case shall there be less than 150 mm 
(6 in.) clearance above the equipment, exclusive of guide- 
shoe assemblies or gate posts for vertically sliding gates, 
mounted on the car top or in or on the car crosshead 
when the car has reached its maximum upward 
movement. 

NOTE: See also 2.4.12, requirements for refuge space on top of 
car enclosure. 

(d) V 2 the gravity stopping distance, based on: 

(1) 115% of the rated speed where oil buffers are 
used, or 115% of the reduced striking speed when emer- 
gency terminal speed-limiting devices meeting the 
requirements of 2.25.4 are used and no compensating 
rope tie-down device in conformance with 2.17.17 is 
provided (see 8.2.5 for gravity stopping distances); or 

(2) the governor tripping speed where spring buff- 
ers are used. 

(e) the distance to which the compensating rope tie- 
down device, if provided (see 2.17.17) limits the jump 
of the car when the counterweight strikes the buffers at 
speeds specified in 2.4.6.2(d). 

2.4.7 Top Car Clearance for Uncounterweighted 
Elevators 

The top car clearance shall be not less than the greater 
of the following: 

(a) 750 mm (29.5 in.); or 

(b) 150 mm (6 in.), plus the amount that any equip- 
ment mounted on the car crosshead, or above the car 
top when no crosshead is provided, projects vertically 
above the crosshead or top. 



NOTE (2.4.7): See also 2.4.12, requirements for refuge space on 
top of car enclosure. 

2.4.8 Vertical Clearances With Underslung Car 
Frames 

Where an underslung car frame is used, the clearances 
between the overhead car rope dead-end hitch or over- 
head car sheave and the portions of the car structure 
vertically below them, when the car floor is level with the 
top terminal landing, shall be not less than the following: 

(a) where no counterweight is used, 230 mm (9 in.) 

(b) where a counterweight is used, the sum of the 
following items: 

(1) the bottom counterweight runby (see 2.4.2) 

(2) the stroke of the counterweight buffer used, or 
the remaining stroke when the buffer is compressed with 
the car at the top terminal landing (see 2.4.2 and 2.22.4.8) 

(3) 150 mm (6 in.) 

(4) V 2 the gravity stopping distance based on 115% 
of the rated speed where oil buffers are used, or 115% 
of the reduced striking speed when emergency terminal 
speed-limiting devices meeting the requirements of 
2.25.4 are used and no provision is made to prevent the 
jump of the car at counterweight buffer engagement, or 
on governor tripping speed where spring buffers are 
used (see 8.2.5 for gravity stopping distances) 

NOTE [2.4.8(b)(4)]: See also 2.4.12, requirements for refuge space 
on top of car enclosure. 

2.4.9 Top Counterweight Clearances 

The top counterweight clearance shall be not less than 
the sum of the following items: 

(a) the bottom car runby (see 2.4.2) 

(b) the stroke of the car buffer used, or the remaining 
stroke when the buffer is compressed with the car at 
the bottom terminal landing (see 2.4.2 and 2.22.4.8) 

(c) 150 mm (6 in.) 

(d) V 2 the gravity stopping distance based on 

(1) 115% of the rated speed where oil buffers are 
used, or 115% of the reduced striking speed when emer- 
gency terminal speed-limiting devices meeting the 
requirements of 2.25.4 are used and no provision is made 
to prevent the jump of the counterweight at car buffer 
engagement; or 

(2) the governor tripping speed where spring buff- 
ers are used (see 8.2.5 for gravity stopping distances). 

2.4.10 Overhead Clearances Where Overhead Beams 
Are Not Over Car Crosshead 

Where overhead beams or other overhead hoistway 
construction, except sheaves, are located vertically over 
the car, but not over the crosshead, the requirements of 
2.4.10.1 and 2.4.10.2 shall be met. 

2.4.10.1 The clearance from the car top to such 
beams or construction, when the car is level with the 



• 



o 



2.4.10.1-SECTION 2.6 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



top landing, shall be not less than the amount specified 
in 2.4.6 and 2.4.7. 

2.4.10.2 Such beams or construction shall be located 
not less than 600 mm (24 in.) horizontally from the 
crosshead. 

2.4.11 Equipment on Top of Car Not Permitted to 
Strike Overhead Structure 

When the car crosshead, or car top where no crosshead 
is provided, is at a distance equal to that specified in 
2.4.6.2(c) from the nearest obstruction above it, no equip- 
ment on top of the car shall strike any part of the over- 
head structure or the equipment located in the hoistway. 

2.4.12 Refuge Space on Top of Car Enclosure 

2.4.12.1 An unobstructed horizontal area of not less 
than 0.5 m 2 (5.4 ft 2 ) shall be provided on top of the car 
enclosure for refuge space. It shall measure not less than 
600 mm (24 in.) on any side. This area shall be permitted 
to include the space utilized for the top emergency exit 
[see 2.14.1.5.1(f)]. The minimum vertical distance in the 
refuge area between the top of the car enclosure and the 
overhead structure or other obstruction shall be not less 
than 1 100 mm (43 in.) when the car has reached its 
maximum upward movement. 

2.4.12.2 In any area outside the refuge space where 
the vertical clearance between the top of the car enclo- 
sure and the overhead structure or other obstructions is 
less than specified in 2.4.12.1, the top of the car enclosure 
shall be clearly marked. The marking shall consist of 
alternating 100 mm (4 in.) diagonal red and white 
stripes. In addition, a sign with the words "DANGER 
LOW CLEARANCE" shall be prominently posted on 
the crosshead and be visible from the entrance. The 
sign shall conform to ANSI Z535.2 or CAN/CSA-Z321, 
whichever is applicable (see Part 9). The sign shall be 
of such material and construction that the letters and 
figures stamped, etched, cast, or otherwise applied to 
the face shall remain permanently and readily legible. 

SECTION 2.5 

HORIZONTAL CAR AND COUNTERWEIGHT 

CLEARANCES 

2.5.1 Clearances Between Cars, Counterweights, and 
Hoistway Enclosures 

2.5.1.1 Between Car and Hoistway Enclosures. The 

clearance between the car and the hoistway enclosure 
shall be not less than 20 mm (0.8 in.), except on the sides 
used for loading and unloading. 

2.5.1.2 Between Car and Counterweight and Counter- 
weight Guard. The clearance between the car and the 
counterweight shall be not less than 25 mm (1 in.). The 
clearance between the car and the counterweight guard, 



counterweight and the counterweight guard, and 
between the counterweight and the hoistway enclosure 
shall be not less than 20 mm (0.8 in.). 

2.5.1.3 Between Cars in Multiple Hoistways. The run- 
ning clearance between the cars and any equipment 
attached thereto, of elevators operating in a multiple 
hoistway, shall be not less than 50 mm (2 in.). 

2.5.1.4 Between Car and Landing Sills. The clearance 
between the car platform sill and the hoistway edge of 
any landing sill, or the hoistway side of any vertically 
sliding counterweighted or counterbalanced hoistway 
door, or of any vertically sliding counterbalanced bipart- 
ing hoistway door, shall be not less than 

(a) where car side guides are used 

(1) 13 mm (0.5 in.) for all elevators except freight 
elevators 

(2) 20 mm (0.8 in.) for freight elevators 

(b) where car corner guides are used, 20 mm (0.8 in.) 
The maximum clearance shall be not more than 32 mm 

(1.25 in.). 

2.5.1.5 Clearance Between Loading Side of Car Plat- 
forms and Hoistway Enclosures 

2.5.1.5.1 The clearance between the edge of the 
car platform sill and the hoistway enclosure or fascia 
plate for the full width of the clear hoistway door open- 
ing shall be not more than 

(a) 190 mm (7.5 in.) for vertically sliding doors 

(b) 125 mm (5 in.) for other doors 

2.5.1.5.2 This clearance shall be maintained until 
the car is resting on its fully compressed buffer. 

2.5.1.5.3 The clearance is not limited on passenger 
elevators, provided that 

(a) a car door interlock conforming to 2.14.4.2 is pro- 
vided to prevent a door from being opened unless the 
car is within the unlocking zone 

(b) the strength of the door complies with 2.11.11.2, 
2.11.11.4, 2.11.11.6, 2.11.11.7, and 2.11.11.8 

2.5.1.6 Clearance Between Car Platform Apron and Pit 
Enclosure. Where the lowest landing sill projects into 
the hoistway, the clearance between the car platform 
apron and the pit enclosure or fascia plate shall be not 
more than 32 mm (1.25 in.). This clearance shall be main- 
tained until the car is resting on its fully compressed 
buffer. 

2.5.1.7 Measurement of Clearances. The clearances 
specified in 2.5.1 shall be measured with no load on the 
car platform. 

SECTION 2.6 
PROTECTION OF SPACE BELOW HOISTWAYS 

Where a hoistway does not extend to the lowest floor 
of the building and there is space below the hoistway 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



SECTION 2.6-2.7.2.4 



that is accessible, requirements of 2.6.1 and 2.6.2 shall 
be complied with. 

2.6.1 Where the Space Is Underneath the 
Counterweight and/or Its Guides 

Where the space is underneath the counterweight 
and /or its guides 

(a) the counterweight shall be provided with a coun- 
terweight safety conforming to 2.17.4 

(b) spring buffers, if used, shall conform to 2.22, 
except that they shall not be fully compressed when 
struck by the counterweight at the following speeds (see 
2.1.2.3): 

(1) at governor tripping speed where the counter- 
weight safety is governor operated, or 

(2) 125% of the rated speed where the counter- 
weight safety is not governor operated 

2.6.2 Where the Space Is Underneath the Car and/or 
Its Guides 

Where the space is underneath the car and /or its 
guides and if spring buffers are used, they shall be so 
designed and installed that they will not be fully com- 
pressed solid or to a fixed stop when struck by the car 
with its rated load at the governor tripping speed (see 
2.1.2.3). 



SECTION 2.7 

MACHINERY SPACES, MACHINE ROOMS, CONTROL 

SPACES, AND CONTROL ROOMS 

A machinery space outside the hoistway containing 
an electric driving machine and a motor controller shall 
be a machine room. 

2.7.1 Enclosure of Rooms and Spaces 

Machinery space and control space enclosures located 
outside the hoistway and machine room and control 
room enclosures shall conform to the requirements of 
2.7.1.1 or 2.7.1.2, and shall also conform to 2.7.1.3, as 
applicable. 

2.7.1.1 Fire-Resistive Construction. Where the build- 
ing code requires fire-resistive construction, the con- 
struction shall conform to the requirements of 2.7.1.1.1 
and 2.7.1.1.2. 

2.7.1.1.1 Spaces containing machines, motor con- 
trollers, sheaves, and other machinery shall be separated 
from the remainder of the building by a fire-resistive 
enclosure conforming to the requirements of the build- 
ing code. 

2.7.1.1.2 Openings in room and space enclosures 
shall be protected with access doors having a fire protec- 
tion rating conforming to the requirements of the build- 
ing code. 



NOTES (2.7.1.1): 

(1) See 2.1.3 for floors of machine rooms and control rooms over 
the hoistway. 

(2) See 2.8.1 for separating elevator machinery from building 
machinery. 

(3) See 2.1.1.1.2 for partitions between machine rooms and 
hoistways. 

2.7.1.2 Non-Fire-Resistive Construction. Where the 
building code does not require fire-resistive construc- 
tion, the construction shall conform to the requirements 
of 2.7.1.2.1 and 2.7.1.2.2. 

2.7.1.2.1 Enclosure of the rooms or spaces shall 
comply with the following: 

(a) Machine rooms and control rooms shall be 
enclosed with noncombustible material to a height of 
not less than 2 000 mm (79 in.). 

(b) Machinery spaces shall be enclosed with noncom- 
bustible material to a height of not less than 2 000 mm 
(79 in.), or to the height of the machinery space if it is 
less than 2 000 mm (79 in.). 

(c) Control spaces shall be enclosed with noncombus- 
tible material to a height of not less than 2 000 mm 
(79 in.). 

2.7.1.2.2 The room and space enclosure, if of open- 
work material, shall reject a ball 50 mm (2 in.) in 
diameter. 

2.7.1.3 Floors 

2.7.1.3.1 Difference in Floor Levels. Differences in 
levels of floors shall be avoided where practicable. 
Where there is a difference in level exceeding 400 mm 
(16 in.), a standard railing conforming to 2.10.2 shall be 
provided (see also 2.7.3.3.1 and 2.7.3.3.2). 

2.7.1.3.2 Where machine beams are provided, the 
floor shall be located above or level with the top of the 
machine beams. 

2.7.2 Maintenance Path and Clearance 

2.7.2.1 Maintenance Path in Machine Rooms and Con- 
trol Rooms. A clear path of not less than 450 mm (18 in.) 
shall be provided to all components that require mainte- 
nance. 

2.7.2.2 Maintenance Path in Machinery Spaces and 
Control Spaces. All components requiring maintenance 
in machinery spaces and control spaces shall have safe 
and convenient access. 

2.7.2.3 Maintenance Clearance in Machine Rooms and 
Control Rooms. A clearance of not less than 450 mm 
(18 in.) shall be provided in the direction required for 
maintenance access. 

2.7.2.4 Maintenance Clearance in Machinery Spaces 
and Control Spaces 



• 



10 



2.7.2.4.1-2.7.3.4.2 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.7.2.4.1 Where a space is intended to be accessed 
with full bodily entry, then the requirements of 2.7.2.3 
shall apply. 

2.7.2.4.2 Where a space is not intended to be 
accessed with full bodily entry then all components 
requiring maintenance shall have safe and convenient 
access. 

NOTE (2.7.2): For electrical clearance requirements, see NFPA 70 
or CSA C22.1, whichever is applicable (see Part 9). 

2.7.3 Access to Machinery Spaces, Machine Rooms, 
Control Spaces, and Control Rooms 

2.7.3.1 General Requirements 

2.7.3.1.1 A permanent and unobstructed means 
of access shall be provided to 

(a) machine rooms and control rooms 

(b) machinery spaces and control spaces outside the 
hoistway 

(c) machinery spaces and control spaces inside the 
hoistway that do not have a means of access to the space 
as specified in 2.7.3.1.2. 

2.7.3.1.2 Access to machinery spaces and control 
spaces inside the hoistway 

(a) from the pit shall comply with 2.2.4 and 2.7.5.2.4 

(b) from the car top shall comply with 2.12.6 and 2.12.7 

(c) from a platform shall comply with 2.7.5.3.5 

(d) from inside the car shall comply with 2.7.5.1.4 

2.7.3.2 Passage Across Roofs. The requirements of 
2.7.3.2.1 and 2.7.3.2.2 shall be conformed to where pas- 
sage over roofs is necessary to reach the means of access 
to machinery spaces, machine rooms, control spaces, 
and control rooms. 

2.7.3.2.1 A stairway with a swinging door and 
platform at the top level, conforming to 2.7.3.3, shall be 
provided from the top floor of the building to the roof 
level. Hatch covers, as a means of access to roofs, shall 
not be permitted. 

2.7.3.2.2 Where the passage is over a roof having 
a slope exceeding 15 deg from the horizontal, or over a 
roof where there is no parapet or guard rail at least 
1 070 mm (42 in.) high around the roof or passageway, 
a permanent, unobstructed and substantial walkway not 
less than 600 mm (24 in.) wide, equipped on the side 
sloping away from the walk with a railing conforming 
to 2.10.2.1, 2.10.2.2, and 2.10.2.3, shall be provided from 
the building exit door at the roof level to the means of 
access. 

2.7.3.3 Means of Access. The means of access to the 
following shall conform to 2.7.3.3.1 through 2.7.3.3.5: 

(a) machine rooms, control rooms, and machinery 
spaces and control spaces outside the hoistway, and 
machinery spaces and control spaces inside the hoistway 



that do not have a means of access to the space as speci- 
fied in 2.7.3.1.2 

(b) between different floor levels in machine rooms, 
in control rooms and in machinery spaces or control 
spaces outside the hoistway 

(c) from within machine rooms or control rooms to 
machinery spaces and control spaces ■ 

2.7.3.3.1 A permanent, fixed, noncombustible lad- 
der or stair shall be provided where the floor of the 
room or the space above or below the floor or roof from 
which the means of access leads, or where the distance 
between floor levels in the room or space, is more than 
200 mm (8 in.). 

2.7.3.3.2 A permanent, noncombustible stair shall 
be provided where the floor of the room or the space 
above or below the floor or roof from which the means 
of access leads, or where the distance between floor 
levels in the room or space, is 900 mm (35 in.) or more. 
Vertical ladders with handgrips shall be permitted to 
be used in lieu of stairs for access to overhead machinery 
spaces, except those containing controllers and motor 
generators. 

2.7.3.3.3 Permanent, fixed, noncombustible lad- 
ders shall conform to ANSI A14.3. 

2.7.3.3.4 Permanent, noncombustible stairs shall 
have a maximum angle of 60 deg from the horizontal, 
and shall be equipped with a noncombustible railing 
conforming to 2.10.2.1, 2.10.2.2, and 2.10.2.3. 

2.7.3.3.5 A permanent, noncombustible platform 
or floor shall be provided at the top of the stairs with 
noncombustible railings conforming to 2.10.2.1, 2.10.2.2, 
and 2.10.2.3 on each open side. In jurisdictions not 
enforcing the NBCC, the size of the platform shall be 
sufficient to permit the full swing of the door plus 
600 mm (24 in.) from the top of the riser to the swing 
line of the door. The floor of the platform shall be at the 
level of not more than 200 mm (8 in.) below the level 
of the access-door sill. Where the door swings inward, 
the width of the platform shall be not less than 750 mm 
(29.5 in.), and the length not less than the width of 
the door. 

2.7.3.4 Access Doors and Openings 

2.7.3.4.1 Access doors shall be 

(a) self-closing and self-locking 

(b) provided with a spring-type lock arranged to per- 
mit the doors to be opened from the inside without a key 

(c) kept closed and locked 

2.7.3.4.2 Access doors to machine rooms and con- 
trol rooms shall be provided. They shall be of a minimum 
width of 750 mm (29.5 in.) and a minimum height of 
2 030 mm (80 in.). Keys to unlock the access doors shall 
be Group 2 Security (see 8.1). 



11 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.7.3.4.3-2.7.5.1 



2.7.3.4.3 Access doors for spaces specified in 
2.7.4.2, 2.7.4.3, and 2.7.4.4 other than those for machine 
rooms or control rooms shall be a minimum width and 
height of 750 mm (29.5 in.). Keys to unlock the access 
doors shall be Group 2 Security (see 8.1). 

2.7.3.4.4 Access doors for control spaces outside 
the hoistway shall be a minimum width and height of 
750 mm (29.5 in.). Keys to unlock the access doors shall 
be Group 2 Security (see 8.1). 

2.7.3.4.5 Doors are not required at openings in 
machine room or control room floors for access to 
machinery spaces, provided the access opening is pro- 
vided on all four sides with a standard railing conform- 
ing to 2.10.2, one side of which is arranged to slide or 
swing to provide access to the ladder or stairs leading 
to the space. Trap doors, where provided, shall have a 
standard railing conforming to 2.10.2 or guard wings 
on all open nonaccess sides. 

2.7.3.4.6 Access openings in elevator hoistway 
enclosures where full bodily entry is not necessary for 
maintenance and inspection of components shall be 

(a) located to permit the required maintenance and 
inspection. 

(b) of maximum width of 600 mm (24 in.) and a maxi- 
mum height of 600 mm (24 in.). These dimensions shall 
be permitted to be increased, provided that any resultant 
opening through the access opening into the hoistway 
shall reject a 300 mm (12 in.) diameter ball. 

(c) provided with doors that shall be kept closed and 
locked. Keys to unlock the access doors to the elevator 
hoistways shall be of Group 1 Security (see 8.1). 

2.7.3.5 Stop Switch for Machinery Spaces or Control 
Spaces. A stop switch conforming to 2.26.2.24, or a dis- 
connecting means where required by NFPA 70 or CSA 
C22.1, whichever is applicable (see Part 9), accessible 
and visible from the point of access to machinery spaces 
or control spaces shall be provided for each elevator. 
Where access to machinery spaces is from the pit, from 
the top of the car, or from inside the car, the stop switch 
in the pit, the stop switch on top of the car, or, where 
provided, the emergency stop switch in the car, respec- 
tively, meet these requirements. 

2.7.4 Headroom in Machinery Spaces, Machine 
Rooms, Control Spaces, and Control Rooms 

2.7.4.1 Elevator machine rooms, control rooms, and 
machinery spaces containing an elevator driving 
machine not located in the hoistway shall have a clear 
headroom of not less than 2 130 mm (84 in.). (See also 
2.7.4.5.) 

2.7.4.2 Where a floor or platform is provided at the 
top of the hoistway (see 2.1.3), machinery spaces above 
such a floor or platform shall have a clear headroom of 
not less than the following: 



(a) spaces containing motor-generators, 2 130 mm 
(84 in.) 

(b) spaces containing only overhead, secondary, or 
deflecting sheaves, 1 070 mm (42 in.) 

(c) spaces containing overhead, secondary, or 
deflecting sheaves, and governors, signal machines, or 
other equipment, 1 350 mm (53 in.) 

2.7.4.3 Where floors are provided under overhead, 
secondary, or deflecting sheaves [see 2.7.4.2(b) and (c)] 
the machine and supporting beams shall be permitted 
to encroach on the required headroom, provided there 
is a clearance of not less than 900 mm (35 in.) high and 
minimum width of 750 mm (29.5 in.) in the path of 
access to sheaves, governors, signal machines, or other 
equipment. 

2.7.4.4 Where a machinery space is located outside 
but not above the hoistway, the headroom of the area 
from which any work is performed on the equipment 
located inside such space shall be not less than 2 000 mm 
(78 in.), except 

(a) spaces containing motor-generators, the head- 
room shall be not less than 2 130 mm (84 in.) 

(b) spaces containing only overhead, secondary, or 
deflecting sheaves, the headroom shall be not less than 
1 070 mm (42 in.) 

(c) spaces containing overhead, secondary, or 
deflecting sheaves, and governors, signal machines, or 
other equipment, the headroom shall be not less than 
1 350 mm (53 in.) 

(d) as permitted in 2.7.4.3 

2.7.4.5 When working from inside the car, or from 
the top of the car in accordance with 2.7.5.1, or from the 
pit in accordance with 2.7.5.2, the headroom when the 
means required by 2.7.5.1 or 2.7.5.2 are engaged shall 

(a) comply with the height of working space require- 
ments of NFPA 70 or CSA C22.1, whichever is applicable 
(see Part 9) 

(b) in no case be less than 1 350 mm (53 in.) 

2.7.4.6 Control spaces outside the hoistway intended 
for full bodily entry shall have a clear headroom of not 
less than 2 000 mm (78 in.) or the height of the equip- 
ment, whichever is the greater. 

NOTE: For control spaces outside the hoistway not intended for 
full bodily entry, see NFPA 70 or CSA C22.1, whichever is applicable 
(see Part 9). 

2.7.5 Working Areas Inside the Hoistway and in the 
Pit 

2.7.5.1 Working Areas in the Car or on the Car Top. 

The requirements of 2.7.5.1.1 through 2.7.5.1.4 shall be 
complied with if maintenance or inspections of the ele- 
vator driving machine brake, emergency brake, elevator 
motion controller, or motor controller are to be carried 
out from inside the car or from the car top. 



12 



2.7.5.1.1-2.7.5.2.1 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.7.5.1 .1 If maintenance or inspection of the eleva- 
tor driving machine brake or an emergency brake, or of 
elevator motion controllers or motor controllers from 
inside the car or from the car top could result in unex- 
pected vertical car movement, a means to prevent this 
movement shall be provided. 

2.7.5.1.2 The means shall 

(a) be independent of the elevator driving machine 
brake, emergency brake, motion controller, and motor 
controller 

(b) support not less than the unbalanced weight of 
the system with no load and up to rated load (see also 
2.16.8) in the car and all suspension ropes in place. The 
rninimum factor of safety shall be not less than 3.5, and 
the materials used shall not have an elongation of less 
than 15% in a length of 50 mm (2 in.) when tested in 
accordance with ASTM E8. 

(c) when in the engaged position, actuate an electrical 
device conforming to 2.26.2.34, which shall cause the 
power to be removed from the elevator driving machine 
motor and brake 

(d) not cause stresses and deflections that exceed the 
applicable requirements for the structure(s) to which 
the means transmits load based on 100% of the static 
unbalanced weight of the system (see also 2.16.8) 

(e) have a sign in conformance with the requirements 
of ANSI Z535.2 or CAN/CSA-Z321, whichever is appli- 
cable, which shall be prominently posted in the work 
area stating: "WARNING! Engage ' ' before main- 
taining or inspecting brake, emergency brake, or control- 
ler. Follow manufacturers instructions for use of 

' "' (see 8.6.10.6). Unless the means has been 

designed to support not less than the unsuspended car 
with rated load (see also 2.16.8), it shall also contain the 
following wording: "Elevator suspension means must 
be in place during use." 

NOTE: Substitute name of actual means for " " in the above 

signage. 

if) be so designed as to prevent accidental disen- 
gagement 

(g) when engaged, not require electrical power or the 
completion or maintenance of an electrical circuit to 
remain engaged. 

2.7.5.1.3 When the means required in 2.7.5.1.1 is 
engaged, egress from the working area shall be provided 
(see also 2.7.3.4.3). 

The use of the car top emergency exit for egress and 
re-entry is permitted subject to the following: 

(a) all edges of the exit opening are smooth and free 
of burrs 

(b) means shall be provided to descend safely to the 
floor of the car, and subsequently ascend safely to the 
car top 

(c) the means required in 2.7.5.1.1 shall not be 
arranged to be engaged at a position that would permit 



a vertical gap between the bottom of the vertical face 
of the platform guard and the elevator landing sill. 

2.7.5.1.4 If provided, equipment access panels in 
the car for access to equipment outside the car shall 
comply with 2.14.2.2(g)(1), (2), and (5) and shall be pro- 
vided with 

(a) a key-operated lock capable of being locked 
without a key 

(b) an electrical switch that shall cause the power to 
be removed from the driving machine motor and brake 
when the access panel is open (see 2.26.2.35) 

(c) a key that shall be Group 1 Security (see 8.1) 
The access panels shall be kept closed and locked, 

shall not be self-closing, and shall be self-locking. 

2.7.5.2 Working Areas in the Pit. The requirements 
of 2.7.5.2.1 through 2.7.5.2.4 shall be complied with if 
maintenance or inspections of the elevator driving 
machine brake or an emergency brake or of elevator 
motion controllers or motor controllers is to be carried 
out from the pit. 

2.7.5.2.1 A means in compliance with 2.7.5.1.1, 
2.7.5.1.2, and 2.7.4.5 shall be provided; or a mechanical 
device shall be provided to stop vertical car movement 
to create a vertical clearance as required by 2.7.4.5 
between the floor of the working area and the lowest 
part of the car, and between the floor of the working area 
and the counterweight where a counterweight guard in 
conformance with 2.3.2 is not provided. 

(a) The mechanical device shall be able to stop vertical 
car movement at up to and including 115% of rated 
speed with rated load. The retardation shall not exceed 
that required by 2.22.3 or 2.22.4, as applicable. 

(b) The mechanical device shall be permitted to be 
moved into the active position manually or automati- 
cally. 

(c) When the mechanical device is in the active posi- 
tion, it shall operate an electrical contact, which when 
in the open position, shall permit the car to move only 
on inspection operation [see 2.26.1.4.1 and 2.26.9.3(d)]. 
The electrical contact shall be positively opened mechan- 
ically and its opening shall not depend solely on springs. 

(d) A sign in conformance with the requirements of 
ANSI Z535.2 or CAN/CSA-Z321, whichever is applica- 
ble, shall be prominently posted in the work area stating: 

"WARNING! Position ' ' before mamtaining or 

inspecting brake, emergency brake, or controller. Follow 

manufacturers instructions for use of ' '" (see 

8.6.10.6). 

" in the above 



NOTE: Substitute name of actual device for " _ 
signage. 

(e) The mechanical device shall be designed to pre- 
vent accidental movement from the active position. 

(/) The mechanical device shall not require electrical 
power or the completion or maintenance of an electrical 



13 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.7.5.2.1-2.7.5.5 



circuit to be maintained in the active position. 

2.7.5.2.2 Pit inspection operation, in compliance 
with 2.26.1.4, shall be permitted to be provided in the 
pit (see 2.26.1.4.4). 

2.7.5.2.3 When the means required in 2.7.5.2.1 is 
in the active position, safe and convenient egress from 
the working area shall be provided (see also 2.7.3.4.3). 

(a) Where the egress is through the landing door 

(1) the landing door shall be openable from the 
hoistway side 

(2) the means shall be arranged to provide vertical 
clearance of not less than 1 220 mm (48 in.) between the 
bottom edge of the platform guard and the elevator 
landing 

(b) Where the egress is through a separate pit access 
door, the door opening shall not be blocked by the car. 

2.7.5.2.4 Where maintenance or inspections of the 
elevator driving machine brake or an emergency brake 
or of elevator motion controllers or motor controllers is 
to be carried out from the pit, and the distance from the 
pit floor to this equipment is more than 2 100 mm (83 in.), 
a means shall be permanently installed or permanently 
stored in the pit to provide access to the equipment. 

2.7.5.3 Working Platforms. A platform located in the 
car, on the car, or in the hoistway shall be permitted for 
access to and maintenance and inspection of equipment 
in machinery spaces or control spaces in the hoistway 
and shall comply with 2.7.5.3.1 through 2.7.5.3.6 (see 
also 8.6.10.8). 

2.7.5.3.1 A working platform shall be perma- 
nently installed, and it shall be permitted to be retract- 
able. Retractable platforms, that are in the line of 
movement of the car or counterweight when in the 
operating position, shall operate a working platform 
electrical device(s) (see 2.26.2.36) that shall cause the 
power to be removed from the elevator driving machine 
motor and brake unless the platform is in its fully 
retracted position. 

2.7.5.3.2 A working platfrom shall be able to sup- 
port in any position at least 2 000 N (450 lb), with a load 
concentration of at least 1 000 N (225 lb) over an area 
of 40 000 mm 2 (64 in. 2 ) with a factor of safety of not less 
than 5. If the platform is to be used for handling heavy 
equipment, the dimensions and the strength of the plat- 
form shall be considered accordingly. 

2.7.5.3.3 A working platform shall be provided 
with a standard railing conforming to 2.10.2 on the open 
or exposed sides where the perpendicular distance 
between the edges of the platform and the adjacent 
hoistway enclosure exceeds 300 mm (12 in.) horizontal 
clearance, and the difference in level between the plat- 
form and the surrounding surface exceeds 400 mm 
(16 in.). 



2.7.5.3.4 Where a car or counterweight passes 
within 300 mm (12 in.) horizontally from a working 
platform, a means of protection against shearing hazards 
shall be provided to a height as measured from the 
platform standing surface of not less than 2 130 mm 
(84 in.), or not less than the maximum upward move- 
ment of the car or counterweight. The means shall be 
at least equal in strength and stiffness to 2 mm (0.074 in.) 
thick sheet steel. If perforated, it shall reject a ball 25 mm 
(1 in.) in diameter. 

2.7.5.3.5 Where the access to a working platform 
that is in the line of movement of the car or counter- 
weight is not through the elevator landing doors, but 
through an access panel or door in the hoistway, it shall 
be equipped with a device conforming to the require- 
ments of 2.11.1.2(e) to prevent operation of the machine 
unless the access panel or door is closed and locked. 

2.7.5.3.6 Working platform inspection operation, 
in compliance with 2.26.1.4, shall be permitted to be 
provided at the location of a working platform. [See 
2.7.5.5(b) for additional requirements when the working 
platform is in the line of movement of the car.] 

2.7.5.4 Working Platforms in the Line of Movement 
of the Car or Counterweight. Working platforms in the 
line of movement of the car or counterweight shall be 
permitted 

(a) where retractable stops are provided and the car is 

(1) below the platform, the travel of the elevator 
shall be limited by a retractable stop(s) in such a manner 
that the car shall be stopped below the platform at least 
the distance required for car top refuge space (see 
2.4.12.1) 

(2) above the platform the travel of the elevator 
shall be limited by a retractable stop(s) in such a manner 
that the car shall be stopped above the platform at least 
the distance required in 2.7.4.5; or 

(b) where the elevator is provided with a device con- 
forming to 2.7.5.1.1 and 2.7.5.1.2. 

2.7.5.5 Retractable Stops. Retractable stops, where 
provided, shall 

(a) be equipped with a retractable stop electrical 
device(s) (see 2.26.2.37), that shall cause the power to 
be removed from the elevator driving machine motor 
and brake, unless the stops are completely in the 
retracted position. 

(b) be permitted to be equipped with an electrical 
device(s) that permits operation of the car only on 
inspection operation when the platform is in the 
operating position and the stops are in the fully extended 
position. When provided with such an electrical device 
and the stop(s) is in the extended position, an additional 
stopping device conforming to 2.25.3.1 and 2.25.3.3 
through 2.25.3.5 shall cause the car to stop before it 
strikes the movable stop(s). This additional stopping 



14 



2.7.5.5-2.7.6.4.1 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



device shall be rendered ineffective when the stop(s) is 
in the retracted position. Any electrical device(s) used 
to render the additional stopping device ineffective shall 
be in conformance with 2.26.4.3, 2.26.9.3(a), and 2.26.9.4. 

(c) be operable from outside the hoistway or from the 
platform. 

(d) be able to stop the car traveling at 115% of rated 
speed with rated load. The retardation shall not exceed 
that required by 2.22.3 or 2.22.4, as applicable. 

(e) be so designed as to prevent accidental disen- 
gagement. 

2.7.6 Location of Machinery Spaces, Machine 

Rooms, Control Spaces, Control Rooms, and 
Equipment 

2.7.6.1 Location of Machine Rooms and Control 
Rooms. Elevator machine rooms and control rooms, 
where provided, shall not be located in the hoistway. 

2.7.6.2 Location of Machinery Spaces and Control 
Spaces. Machinery spaces and control spaces shall be 
permitted to be located inside or outside the hoistway. 

NOTE: Inside the hoistway includes, but is not limited to, on or 
in the car, on the counterweight, or in the pit. 

2.7.6.3 Location of Equipment. The location of equip- 
ment used directly in connection with the elevator shall 
conform to the requirements of 2.7.6.3.1 through 
2.7.6.3.4. 

2.7.6.3.1 The electric driving machine shall be 
located in a machinery space or machine room. 

2.7.6.3.2 The motor controller shall be located in 
a machinery space, machine room, control space, or con- 
trol room. 

A motor controller shall be permitted to be located 
outside the specified spaces, provided it is enclosed in 
a locked cabinet. The locked cabinet shall be 

(a) readily accessible for maintenance and inspection 
at all times. 

(b) provided with cabinet door(s) or panel(s) that are 
not self-closing, that are self-locking, and which shall 
be kept closed and locked. Keys shall be Group 1 Secu- 
rity (see 8.1). 

(c) lit by permanently installed electric lighting with a 
lighting intensity of at least 200 lx (19 fc) at the floor level. 

id) located in a space that is provided with natural 
or mechanical means to keep the ambient air tempera- 
ture and humidity in the range specified by the elevator 
equipment manufacturer to ensure safe and normal 
operation of the elevator. The temperature and humidity 
range shall be permanently posted on the cabinet. 

NOTE (2.7.6.3.2): For electrical clearance requirements, see NFPA 
70 or CSA C22.1, whichever is applicable (see Part 9). 

2.7.6.3.3 Where sheaves and other equipment 
(except governors) are located overhead inside the 



hoistway, they shall be provided with a means of access 
from outside the hoistway conforming to the require- 
ments of 2.7.3.3, unless they can be inspected and ser- 
viced from the top of the car. 

2.7.6.3.4 Where a governor is located inside the 
hoistway, means of access conforming to the require- 
ments of 2.7.3.3 and 2.7.3.4 for inspection and servicing 
the governor shall be provided from outside the 
hoistway. The access opening shall not be required where 

(a) the governor can be inspected and serviced from 
the top of the car or adjacent car, and the governor can 
be tripped from testing from the adjacent car or outside 
the hoistway; and means are furnished to prevent move- 
ment of the car when servicing the governor. A sign 
with the words "SECURE CAR AGAINST MOVEMENT 
BEFORE SERVICING THE GOVERNOR" shall be prom- 
inently posted and be visible from the governor. The 
sign shall conform to ANSI Z535.2 or CAN/CSA-Z321, 
whichever is applicable. The sign shall be of such mate- 
rial and construction that the letters and figures 
stamped, etched, cast, or otherwise applied to the face 
shall remain permanently and readily legible. 

(b) for elevators in a single hoistway, the governor 
can be reset automatically when the car is moved in the 
up direction or the governor can be reset from outside 
the hoistway. 

2.7.6.4 Means Necessary for Tests. Where an elevator 
driving machine brake or an emergency brake, or an 
elevator motion controller or motor controller is located 
in the hoistway or pit, means necessary for tests that 
require movement of the car or release of the driving 
machine brake or emergency brake, shall be provided 
and arranged so that they can be operated from outside 
the hoistway and shall conform to 2.7.6.4.1 through 
2.7.6.4.3. These means are also permitted to be used by 
elevator personnel for passenger rescue. 

2.7.6.4.1 Where direct observation of the elevator 
drive sheave or ropes is not possible from the location 
of the means necessary for tests which require movement 
of the car or release of the driving machine brake or 
emergency brake, display devices or the equivalent shall 
be provided. They shall be visible from the location of 
the means and shall convey the following information 
about the elevator simultaneously 

(a) the direction of movement 

(b) the reaching of a position within the door 
unlocking zone 

(c) an indication of the speed 

The display devices or the equivalent shall remain 
operable during a failure of the normal building power 
supply. The power source shall be capable of providing 
for the operation of the display devices or the equivalent 
for at least 4 h. Where batteries are used, a monitoring 



15 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.7.6.4.1-2.7.7 



system shall be provided. In the event that during nor- 
mal operation of the car, the monitoring indicates insuffi- 
cient power to operate the display devices or the 
equivalent, the car shall not be permitted to restart after 
a normal stop at a landing. 

2.7.6.4.2 The means necessary for tests shall be 
permitted to be located within an inspection and test 
panel conforming to the requirements of 2.7.6.5.2. 

2.7.6.4.3 A means to move the car from outside 
the hoistway shall be provided and it shall conform to 
the following: 

(a) it shall not be dependent on the availability of 
normal power. 

(b) it shall be accessible for operation by elevator per- 
sonnel only with a key that is Group 1 Security (see 8.1). 

(c) it shall allow the car to move only with continuous 
effort. 

(d) if the car is moved manually, the effort required 
to move the car in the direction of load imbalance shall 
not exceed 400 N (90 lbf ). If the means used is removable, 
it shall be stored outside the hoistway and access to the 
means shall be with a key that is Group 1 Security. It 
shall be suitably marked to indicate the machine for 
which it is intended. 

(e) Where the manual effort required to move the car 
exceeds 400 N (90 lbf), a means of electrical operation 
shall be provided to allow the car to be moved. This 
means of electrical operation shall require constant pres- 
sure operating devices to move the car, and when acti- 
vated, operation of the car by all other operating means 
shall be prevented. A failure of a single constant pressure 
operating device shall not permit the elevator to move 
or continue to move. Where batteries are used for this 
electrical operation, a monitoring system shall be pro- 
vided. In the event, that during normal operation of the 
car, the monitoring system indicates insufficient power 
to move the car, the car shall not be permitted to restart 
after a normal stop at a landing. 

2.7.6.5 Inspection and Test Panel 

2.7.6.5.1 The inspection and test panel shall be 
required where any of the following are not accessible 
from outside the hoistway: 

(a) The "CAR DOOR BYPASS" and "HOISTWAY 
DOOR BYPASS" switches required by 2.26.1.5; or 

(b) the devices necessary for the manual reset of the 
detection means for ascending car overspeed protection 
[see 2.19.1.2(a)(4)], and protection against unintended 
car movement [see 2.19.2.2(a)(4)], or 

(c) the circuits of the following devices: 

(1) the car-safety mechanism switch (see 2.26.2.9) 

(2) the car buffer switch, where provided (see 
2.26.2.22) 

(3) the top and bottom final terminal stopping 
devices (see 2.26.2.11) 



(4) the car and counterweight governor switches, 
where provided (see 2.26.2.10) 

2.7.6.5.2 The inspection and test panel, where pro- 
vided shall 

(a) be readily accessible for maintenance and inspec- 
tion at all times. 

(b) have the required devices located behind a locked 
door or panel that does not open into the hoistway, 
which is not self-closing, which is self-locking, and 
which shall be kept closed and locked. Keys shall be of 
Group 1 Security (see 8.1). 

(c) be provided with a stop switch, conforming to 
2.26.2.24. 

(d) be lit by permanently installed electric lighting 
with a lighting intensity of at least 200 lx (19 fc) at 
the floor level. A switch placed inside or close to the 
enclosure shall control lighting of the enclosure. 

(e) include the display devices as required by 2.7.6.4.1 . 
(/) include the "CAR DOOR BYPASS" and 

"HOISTWAY DOOR BYPASS" switches where required 
by 2.26.1.5. 

(g) include the devices necessary for the manual reset 
of the detection means for ascending car overspeed pro- 
tection [see 2.19.1.2(a)(4)], and protection against Unin- 
tended Car Movement [see 2.19.2.2(a)(4)] where these 
devices are not accessible from outside the hoistway. 

(h) where the circuits of the devices in 2.7.6.5.1(c)(1) 
through (4) are not accessible from outside the hoistway, 
include landing inspection operation in conformance 
with 2.26.1.4.4, and which shall be permitted to render 
ineffective the following electrical protective devices, 
individually or as a group or groups, in conformance 
with the requirements of 2.26.9.3(a) and 2.26.9.4: 

(1) the car-safety mechanism switch (see 2.26.2.9) 

(2) the car buffer switch, where provided (see 
2.26.2.22) 

(3) the top and bottom final terminal stopping 
devices (see 2.26.2.11) 

(4) the car and counterweight governor switches, 
where provided (see 2.26.2.10) 

NOTE (2.7.6.5): For electrical clearance requirements, see NFPA 
70 or CSA C22.1, whichever is applicable (see Part 9). See also 
2.8.3.3.2. 

2.7.6.6 Equipment Exposure to Weather. Machines, 
control equipment, sheaves, and other machinery shall 
not be exposed to the weather unless they are suitable 
for the application. 

2.7.7 Machine Rooms and Control Rooms 
Underneath the Hoistway 

When a machine room or control room is located 
underneath the hoistway, it shall conform to 2.7.7.1 
through 2.7.7.5. 



16 



2.7.7.1-2.8.2.2 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.7.7.1 The machine or control room shall have a 
solid ceiling (pit floor, at the normal pit depth) of con- 
crete or steel above the machine room or control room, 
with a minimum 2 130 mm (84 in.) clearance above the 
machine room or control room floor. 

2.7.7.2 The ceiling of the machine or control room 
shall be capable of sustaining a concentrated load of 
1 000 N (225 lbf ) on any 2 000 mm 2 (3 in. 2 ) area, and it 
shall be designed for a live load of 6 kPa (125 lbf/ft 2 ) 
and loads imposed by rails and/or buffers, if applicable. 

2.7.7.3 The car and counterweight guide rails and 
buffer supports shall be permitted to extend into the 
machine room and be supported by the machine room 
floor. If the counterweight buffer or buffer support 
extends to the machine room or control room floor, a 
counterweight safety is not required unless the space 
below the machine room is not permanently secured 
against access. If a counterweight buffer is supported 
at the machine room ceiling (pit floor), a counterweight 
safety is required. (See 2.6.1 for additional requirements.) 

2.7.7.4 The solid ceiling (pit floor at normal pit 
depth) shall be permitted to be slotted for the penetra- 
tion of equipment (suspension ropes, selector drives, 
electrical conduit, rails, buffers, etc.). Passage and guards 
shall be provided in conformance with 2.3.2 and 2.10.1 
for both the machine or control room and pit. A counter- 
weight guard shall be installed at the pit floor as well 
as the machine or control room floor if the counterweight 
extends into the machine or control room and 2.3.2.1(a) 
does not apply. The guard in the machine or control 
room shall extend to the ceiling. 

2.7.7.5 Compensating ropes or chains and traveling 
cables shall not extend into the machine room located 
underneath the hoistway. 

2.7.8 Remote Machine Rooms and Control Rooms 

Elevators that are provided with remote machine 
rooms and/or control rooms shall conform to 2.7.8.1 
through 2.7.8.4. 

2.7.8.1 Ropes and sheaves leading to the remote 
machine room that penetrate separate fire-resistive areas 
of the structure shall be fully enclosed, and the enclo- 
sures shall conform to 2.1.1.1. 

2.7.8.2 Rope and sheave enclosures leading to the 
remote machine room shall be protected against unau- 
thorized access. 

2.7.8.3 Permanent means of access shall be provided 
to the enclosures for inspection, repair, and maintenance 
of hoist ropes passing over sheaves that are not located 
in the hoistway or remote machine rooms. Access doors 
to these enclosures shall be provided at each sheave 
location, conforming to 2.7.3.4. Access openings shall be 
provided for inspection and maintenance of hoist ropes 



passing over sheaves and shall conform to 2.7.3.4. A 
stop switch meeting the requirements of 2.26.2.23, a per- 
manent electric duplex receptacle, a light switch, and 
light shall be provided in the enclosures immediately 
inside the access doors and openings. 

2.7.8.4 A permanent means of communication 
between the elevator car and remote machine room and 
or control room shall be provided. 

2.7.9 Lighting, Temperature, and Humidity in 

Machinery Spaces, Machine Rooms, Control 
Spaces, and Control Rooms 

2.7.9.1 Lighting. Permanently installed electric light- 
ing shall be provided in all machinery spaces, machine 
rooms, control spaces, and control rooms. The illumina- 
tion shall be not less than 200 lx (19 fc) at the floor 
level, at the standing surface of a working platform (see 
2.7.5.3), or at the level of the standing surface when the 
car is in the blocked position (see 2.7.5.1). The lighting 
control switch shall be located within easy reach of the 
access to such rooms or spaces. Where practicable, the 
light control switch shall be located on the lock-jamb 
side of the access door. 

2.7.9.2 Temperature and Humidity. Machinery spaces, 
machine rooms, control spaces, and control rooms shall 
be provided with natural or mechanical means to keep 
the ambient air temperature and humidity in the range 
specified by the elevator equipment manufacturer to 
ensure safe and normal operation of the elevator. The 
temperature and humidity range, shall be permanently 
posted in the machine room, control room, control space, 
or where specified by the equipment manufacturer, in 
the machinery space. 

SECTION 2.8 

EQUIPMENT IN HODSTWAYS, MACHINERY SPACES, 

MACHINE ROOMS, CONTROL SPACES, AND 

CONTROL ROOMS 

2.8.1 Equipment Allowed 

Only machinery and equipment used directly in con- 
nection with the elevator shall be permitted in elevator 
hoistways, machinery spaces, machine rooms, control 
spaces, and control rooms. 

2.8.2 Electrical Equipment and Wiring 

2.8.2.1 Installation of electrical equipment and wir- 
ing shall conform to NFPA 70 or CSA-C22.1, whichever 
is applicable (see Part 9). 

2.8.2.2 Only such electrical wiring, raceways, and 
cables used directly in connection with the elevator, 
including wiring for signals, for communication with 
the car, for lighting, heating, air conditioning, and venti- 
lating the car, for fire detecting systems, for pit sump 



17 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.8.2.2-2.8.5 



pumps, and for heating and lighting the hoist way and/ 
or the machinery space, machine room, control space, 
or control room shall be permitted to be installed inside 
the hoistway, machinery space, machine room, control 
space, or control room. 

2.8.2.3 Bonding conductors from the Hghtnrng pro- 
tection system grounding down conductor to long verti- 
cal metal bodies in the hoistway such as elevator rails 
and vertical wireways shall be permitted to be installed 
in the hoistway as required by NFPA 780, or CAN/CSA- 
B72, whichever is applicable (see Part 9). The lightning 
protection system grounding down conductor shall not 
be permitted in the hoistway, and the elevator rails shall 
not be used as the lightning protection system ground- 
ing down conductor. Bonding conductors installed in 
the hoistway shall not interfere with the operation of 
the elevator. 

2.8.3 Pipes, Ducts, Tanks, and Sprinklers 

2.8.3.1 Steam and hot- water pipes shall be permitted 
to be installed in hoistways, machinery spaces, machine 
rooms, control spaces, and control rooms for the purpose 
of heating these areas only, subject to 2.8.3.1.1 through 
2.8.3.1.3. 

2.8.3.1.1 Heating pipes shall convey only low- 
pressure steam [100 kPa (15 psi) or less] or hot water 
[100°C (212°F) or less]. 

2.8.3.1.2 All risers and return pipes shall be 
located outside the hoistway. When the machinery 
space, machine room, control space, or control room is 
located above the roof of the building, heating pipes for 
the machinery space, machine room, control space, or 
control room shall be permitted to be located in the 
hoistway between the top floor and the machinery space, 
machine room, control space, or control room. 

2.8.3.1.3 Traps and shutoff valves shall be pro- 
vided in accessible locations outside the hoistway. 

2.8.3.2 Ducts shall be permitted to be installed in 
the hoistway, machinery space, machine room, control 
space, or control room for the purpose of heating, cool- 
ing, ventilating, and venting these areas only and shall 
not encroach upon the required clearances. 

2.8.3.3 Sprinkler systems coitforming to NFPA 13 
or the NBCC, whichever is applicable (see Part 9), shall 
be permitted to be installed in the hoistway, machinery 
space, machine room, control space, or control room 
subject to 2.8.3.3.1 through 2.8.3.3.4. 

2.8.3.3.1 All risers and returns shall be located 
outside these spaces. Branch lines in the hoistway shall 
supply sprinklers at not more than one floor level. When 
the machinery space, machine room, control space, or 
control room is located above the roof of the building, 
risers, return pipes, and branch lines for these sprinklers 



shall be permitted to be located in the hoistway between 
the top floor and the machinery space, machine room, 
control space, or control room. 

2.8.3.3.2 In jurisdictions not enforcing the NBCC, 
where elevator equipment is located or its enclosure is 
configured such that application of water from sprin- 
klers could cause unsafe elevator operation, means shall 
be provided to automatically disconnect the main line 
power supply to the affected elevator upon or prior to 
the application of water. 

(a) This means shall be independent of the elevator 
control and shall not be self-resetting. 

(b) Heat detectors and sprinkler flow switches used to 
initiate main line elevator power shutdown shall comply 
with the requirements of NFPA 72. 

(c) The activation of sprinklers outside of such loca- 
tions shall not disconnect the main line elevator power 
supply. See also 2.27.3.3.6. 

2.8.3.3.3 Smoke detectors shall not be used to 
activate sprinklers in these spaces or to disconnect the 
main line power supply. 

2.8.3.3.4 In jurisdictions not enforcing the NBCC, 
when sprinklers are installed in the hoistway, all electri- 
cal equipment, except earthquake protective devices 
conforming to 8.4.10.1.2(d), located less than 1 220 mm 
(48 in.) above the pit floor, shall be 

(a) weatherproof (NEMA4) 

(b) wiring shall be identified for use in wet locations 
in accordance with the requirements in NFPA 70 

2.8.3.4 Other pipes or ducts conveying gases, 
vapors, or liquid and not used in connection with the 
operation of the elevator shall not be installed in any 
hoistway, machinery space, machine room, control 
space, or control room. Where a machinery space, 
machine room, control space, control room, or hoistway 
extend above the roof of a building, pipes shall be per- 
mitted from roof drains to the closest point where they 
can be diverted out of this space. Pipes shall be covered 
to prevent leakage or condensate from entering the 
machinery space, machine room, control space, control 
room, or hoistway. 

2.8.3.5 Where permitted and provided, pipes, 
drains, and tanks, or similar equipment that contains 
liquids, shall not be located directly above the elevator 
equipment and shall not encroach upon the required 
clearances in the hoistway, machinery space, machine 
room, control space, or control room. 

2.8.4 Electrical Heaters 

Listed/certified electrical heaters shall be permitted. 

2.8.5 Air Conditioning 

Air conditioning equipment is permitted to be 
installed in machinery spaces, machine rooms, control 



18 



2.8.5-2.9.3.1.1 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



spaces, or control rooms for the purpose of cooling these 
areas only, subject to 2.8.5.1 through 2.8.5.5. 

2.8.5.1 Air conditioning equipment shall not be 
located directly above elevator equipment. 

2.8.5.2 The clear headroom below suspended air 
conditioning equipment shall conform to 2.7.4. 

2.8.5.3 Means shall be provided to collect and drain 
condensation water from these spaces. Condensation 
drains shall not be located directly above elevator equip- 
ment. Drains connected directly to sewers shall not be 
installed. 

2.8.5.4 Safe and convenient access within the eleva- 
tor machinery space, machine room, control space, or 
control room shall be provided to the air-conditioning 
equipment for servicing and maintaining. 

NOTE: See also 2.7.3.1. 

2.8.5.5 There shall be no exposed gears, sprockets, 
belts, pulleys, or chains. 

NOTES (2.8.5): 

(1) See 2.8.3.2 for requirements for duct work. 

(2) These requirements do not pertain to air-conditioning equip- 
ment used to cool selective elevator equipment. 

2.8.6 Miscellaneous Equipment 

Enclosed moving, rotating, hanging machinery, 
equipment, stationary decorative lighting, stationary 
signage or other stationary special effects devices, 
securely attached to either one or more of the car, coun- 
terweight, or hoistway shall be permitted, provided that 
the elevator, including the equipment and devices, con- 
forms to 2.4, 2.5, 2.8.1, 2.14.2.1.1, 2.15.7, 8.2.2.1, and 
8.2.9.1. Any unenclosed moving, rotating, or hanging 
machinery or equipment, attached to the exterior of the 
car or counterweight, interior of the hoistway, exterior 
of the car, or any other elevator equipment in the 
hoistway is prohibited unless it is used in conjunction 
with the designed use of the elevator. 

SECTION 2.9 

MACHINERY AND SHEAVE BEAMS, SUPPORTS, AND 

FOUNDATIONS 

2.9.1 Supports Required 

Machines, machinery, sheaves, and hitches shall be 
supported by overhead beams, structural floors, struc- 
tural walls, or guide rails. 

2.9.1.1 Machines, machinery, and sheaves shall be 
so supported and maintained in place as to prevent 
any part from becoming loose or displaced under the 
conditions imposed in service. 

2.9.1.2 Supporting beams, if used, shall be of steel 
or reinforced concrete. 



2.9.13 Beams are not required under machine(s), 
sheave(s), and machinery or control equipment that is 
supported on floors, provided such floors are designed 
and installed to support the load imposed thereon, or 
where supported by guide rails or structural walls 
designed to meet the requirements of 2.9.3.3. 

2.9.2 Loads on Machinery and Sheave Beams, 

Floors, or Foundations and Their Supports 

2.9.2.1 Overhead Beams, Floors, and Their Supports. 
Overhead beams, floors, and their supports shall be 
designed for not less than the sum of the following 
loads: 

(a) the load resting on the beams and supports, which 
shall include the complete weight of the machine, 
sheaves, controller, governor, and any other equipment, 
together with that portion, if any, of the machinery space, 
machine room, control space, or control room floor sup- 
ported thereon 

(b) two times the sum of the tensions in all wire ropes 
supported by the beams, floors, and their supports with 
rated load in the car 

NOTE [2.9.2.1(b)]: These tensions are doubled to take care of accel- 
erations and decelerations. 

2.9.2.2 Foundations, Beams, and Floors for Machinery 
and Sheaves Not Located Directly Over the Hoistway. 

The supports for machines and sheaves located below 
or at the sides of the hoistway shall meet the require- 
ments of 2.9.2.2.1 through 2.9.2.2.4. 

2.9.2.2.1 The foundation shall support the total 
weight of the machine, sheaves, and other equipment, 
and the floor, if any. 

2.9.2.2.2 The sheave beams and the foundation 
bolts shall withstand two times the vertical force compo- 
nent acting thereon as a result of the tension in all the 
suspension ropes, less the weight of the machine or 
sheaves. 

2.9.2.23 The sheave beams and the foundation 
bolts shall withstand two times the horizontal force com- 
ponent, if any, acting thereon as a result of the tension 
in all the suspension ropes. 

2.9.2.2.4 The foundation shall withstand two 
times the overturning moment, if any, acting thereon as 
a result of the tension in all the suspension ropes. 

2.93 Securing of Machinery and Equipment to 
Beams, Foundations, Guide Rails, Structural 
Walls, or Floors 

2.93.1 Overhead Beams and Floors 

2.93.1.1 Where overhead beams and floors are 
used to support machinery or equipment, the machinery 
or equipment shall be secured to and supported on or 



19 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.9.3.1.1-2.9.4.1 



from the top of overhead beams or floors, except for the 
following equipment: 

(a) secondary or deflecting sheaves of traction ele- 
vators 

(b) devices and their accessories for limiting or 
retarding car speed 

2.9.3.1.2 Securing bolts or fastenings are not 
required where sound isolation in compression is used 
between bases of machinery or equipment and support- 
ing beams or floors. 

2.9.3.2 Beams or Foundations Supporting Machinery 
and Sheaves Not Located Directly Over the Hoistway 

2.9.3.2.1 Machines and sheaves located below or 
at one side of a hoistway shall be anchored to beams, 
foundations, or floors with bolts, conforming to ASTM 
A 307, of sufficient size and number to withstand the 
applicable load conditions specified in 2.9.2.2. Based on 
these initial loads, total tension in anchor bolts shall not 
exceed 85 MPa (12,000 psi) of net section, and the total 
shear shall not exceed 60 MPa (9,000 psi) of actual area 
in the shear plane. (See also 2.9.3.5.) 

2.9.3.2.2 Where bolts are used through greater 
than 5 deg sloping flanges of structural shapes, the bolt 
heads shall be of the tipped or beveled head type or 
shall be fitted with beveled steel washers, and nuts on 
greater than 5 deg sloping flanges shall seat on beveled 
steel washers. 

2.9.3.3 Securing of Machines, Sheaves, Equipment, 
and Hitches to Guide Rails or Structural Walls 

2.9.3.3.1 Machines, sheaves, equipment, and 
hitches shall be permitted to be secured to and sup- 
ported by the guide rails or structural walls, provided 
that the tension in the hoisting ropes and the weight of 
the equipment will not develop direct tensions in the 
bolts or rivets. 

2.9.3.3.2 Securing bolts or fastenings are not 
required where sound isolation in compression is used 
between bases of machinery or equipment and their 
supports. 

2.9.3.3.3 Bolts used to secure equipment to the 
guide rails or structural walls shall conform to ASTM 
A 307, and be of sufficient size and number to withstand 
the applicable load conditions specified in 2.9.2.2. Based 
on these initial loads, total tension in support bolts shall 
not exceed 85 MPa (12,000 psi) of net section, and the 
total shear in bolts and rivets shall not exceed 60 MPa 
(9,000 psi) of actual area in the shear plane. The require- 
ments of 2.9.3.2.2 for bolts and 2.9.3.4.3 and 2.9.3.4.4 for 
hitch plates shall also apply. The stresses in welds due 
to tensions in the hoisting ropes shall not exceed 55 MPa 
(8,000 psi) on the throat area of the welds. (See also 
2.9.3.5.) 



2.9.3.3.4 Guide rails used to support machines, 
equipment, sheaves, and hitches shall meet the require- 
ments of 2.23.4. 

2.9.3.4 Overhead Hoisting Rope Hitches 

2.9.3.4.1 Where hoisting ropes are secured to the 
structure above a hoistway, the hitch plates and hitch- 
plate blocking beams, where used, shall be secured to 
and mounted on top of overhead beams, machine beams, 
or on top of auxiliary beams connected to the webs of 
overhead beams. 

2.9.3.4.2 Hitch plates, blocking, or auxiliary 
beams shall be secured by bolts conforming to ASTM 
A 307, rivets conforming to ASTM A 502, or welding 
conforming to 8.8, and shall be so located that the tension 
in the hoisting ropes will not develop direct tensions in 
the bolts or rivets. Where bolts and rivets are subjected 
to shearing stresses due to tension in the hoisting ropes, 
the total shear shall not exceed 60 MPa (9,000 psi) of 
actual area in the shear plane. The stresses in welds due 
to tensions in the hoisting ropes shall not exceed 55 MPa 
(8,000 psi) on the throat area of the welds. (See also 
2.9.3.5.) 

2.9.3.4.3 The hitch plate supporting structure 
shall be; designed to withstand two times the sum of 
the tensions in all hoisting ropes attached to the hitch 
plates. (See also 2.15.13.) 

2.9.3.4.4 Total stresses in hitch plates and hitch- 
plate shapes shall not exceed 85 MPa (12,000 psi). 

2.9.3.5 Bolts Made of Steel. Bolts made of steel used 
to comply with the requirements of 2.9.3.2.1, 2.9.3.3.3, 
and 2.9.3.4.2 having a greater strength than specified 
by ASTM A 307 shall be permitted, provided that the 
maximum allowable stresses increased proportionally 
based on the ratio of the ultimate strengths. Elongation 
shall conform to the requirements of the corresponding 
ASTM specification. 

2.9.3.6 Cast Metals in Tension or Bending. Cast met- 
als having an elongation of less than 20% in a length of 
50 mm (2 in.), when measured in accordance with ASTM 
E 8, which are subject to tension or bending, shall not 
be used to support machinery or equipment from the 
underside of overhead beams or floors. 

2.9.4 Allowable Stresses for Machinery and Sheave 
Beams or Floors, Their Supports, and Any 
Support Members That Transmit Load to the 
Guide Rails or Structural Walls 

2.9.4.1 The unit stresses for all machinery and 
sheave beams and floors and their supports, based on 
the loads computed as specified in 2.9.2 or 2.9.6, which- 
ever is greater, shall not exceed 80% of those permitted 
for static loads by the following standards: 

(a) Structural Steel. A1SC Book No. S326 or CAN/ 
CSA-S16.1, whichever is applicable (see Part 9). 



20 



2.9.4.1-2.11.1.2 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



(b) Reinforced Concrete. ANS1/AC1 318 or CAN3- 
A23.3, whichever is applicable (see Part 9). 

2.9.4.2 Where stresses due to loads, other than eleva- 
tor loads supported on the beams or floor, exceed those 
due to the elevator loads, 100% of the permitted stresses 
are permitted. 

2.9.4.3 Cast Metals in Tension or Bending. Cast met- 
als having an elongation of less than 20% in a length of 
50 mm (2 in.), when measured in accordance with ASTM 
E 8, which are subject to tension or bending, shall not 
be used to support machinery or equipment from guide 
rails or structural walls. 

2.9.5 Allowable Deflections of Machinery and 
Sheave Beams, Their Supports, and Any 
Support Members Loaded in Bending Which 
Transmit Load to Guide Rails or Structural 
Walls 

The allowable deflections of machinery and sheave 
beams, their immediate supports, and any support 
members loaded in bending which transmit load to 
guide rails or structural walls under static load shall not 
exceed l / U66 of the span. 

2.9.6 Allowable Stresses Due to Emergency Braking 

Machinery and sheave beams, supports, any support 
members which transmit load to guide rails or structural 
walls and any fastenings subject to forces due to the 
application of the emergency brake (see 2.19.4) shall be 
designed to withstand the maximum forces developed 
during the retardation phase of the emergency braking 
so that the resulting stresses due to the emergency brak- 
ing and all other loading acting simultaneously, if appli- 
cable, shall not exceed those specified in 2.9.4. 

SECTION 2.10 

GUARDING OF EQUIPMENT AND STANDARD 

RAILING 

2.10.1 Guarding of Equipment 

In machinery spaces, machine rooms, control spaces, 
and control rooms, the following shall be guarded to 
protect against accidental contact: 

(a) driving machine sheaves and ropes whose vertical 
projection upon a horizontal plane extends beyond the 
base of the machine, unless the driving machine sheave 
is so located as to minimize the possibility of contact 

(b) sheaves 

(c) exposed gears, sprockets, tape or rope sheaves, or 
drums of selectors, floor controllers, or signal machines, 
and their driving ropes, chains, or tapes 

(d) keys, keyways, and screws in projecting shafts 
Handwinding wheels and flywheels that are not 

guarded shall have yellow markings. 



2.10.2 Standard Railing 

A standard railing shall be substantially constructed 
of metal and shall consist of a top rail, intermediate rail 
or equivalent structural member or solid panel, and toe- 
board. 

2.10.2.1 Top Rail. The top rail shall have a smooth 
surface, and the upper surface shall be located at a verti- 
cal height of 1 070 mm (42 in.) from the working surface. 

2.10.2.2 intermediate Rail, Member, or Panel. The 

intermediate rail or equivalent structural member or 
solid panel shall be located approximately centered 
between the top rail and the working surface. 

2.10.2.3 Toe-Board. The toe-board shall be securely 
fastened and have a height not less than 100 mm (4 in.) 
above the working surface. 

2.10.2.4 Strength of Standard Railing. A standard 
railing shall be capable of resisting anywhere along its 
length the following forces when applied separately, 
without deflecting more than 75 mm (3 in.) and without 
permanent deformation: 

(a) a force of at least 890 N (200 lbf ) applied in any 
lateral or downward vertical direction, at any point 
along the top rail. 

(b) a force of at least 666 N (150 lbf) applied in any 
lateral or downward vertical direction at any point along 
the center of the intermediate rail, member, or panel. If 
the standard railing is a solid panel extending from the 
top rail to the toe-board, the application of the force 
specified in 2.10.2.4(a) shall be considered to meet the 
requirements of 2.10.2.4(b). 

(c) a force of 225 N (50 lbf) applied in a lateral direc- 
tion to the toe-board. 



SECTION 2.11 
PROTECTION OF HOISTWAY OPENINGS 

2.11.1 Entrances and Emergency Doors Required 

2.11.1.1 Hoistway Landing Entrances. All elevator 
hoistway landing openings shall be provided with 
entrances that shall guard the full height and width of 
the openings. Entrances shall be at least 2 030 mm (80 in.) 
in height and 800 mm (31.5 in.) in width. 

2.11.1.2 Emergency Doors in Blind Hoistways. Where 
an elevator is installed in a single blind hoistway, there 
shall be installed in the blind portion of the hoistway 
an emergency door at every third floor, but not more 
than 11 m (36 ft) from sill to sill, conforming to the 
following: 

(a) The clear opening shall be at least 700 mm (28 in.) 
wide and 2 030 mm (80 in.) high. 

(b) It shall be easily accessible and free from fixed 
obstructions. 



21 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.11.1.2-2.11.4.1 



(c) It shall be either of the horizontally sliding or 
swinging single-section type, irrespective of the type of 
door installed at other landings. 

(d) It shall be self-closing and self-locking and shall 
be marked, in letters not less than 50 mm (2 in.) high, 
"DANGER, ELEVATOR HOISTWAY." 

(e) It shall be provided with an electromechanical 
device that will prevent the operation of the driving 
machine unless the door is closed and locked (see 
2.26.2.25). 

(f) It shall be unlocked from the landing side only 
through the use of a cylinder-type lock, having not less 
than five pins or five discs. The cylinder lock shall 

(1) not be unlocked by any key that will open any 
other lock or device used for any purpose in the building 

(2) be so designed that the key shall be removable 
only in the locked position 

(g) It shall be openable from the hoistway side with- 
out the use of a key. 

(h) The key shall be of Group 1 Security (see 8.1). This 
key shall also be made available to emergency personnel 
during an emergency. 

(i) A hinged self-closing barrier independent of the 
door shall be installed horizontally across the entrance 
on the hoistway side at a height of 1 070 mm (42 in.). 
The barrier shall not open into the hoistway. 

2.11.1.3 Telephone as Alternative to Emergency 
Doors. Where an elevator is installed in a single blind 
hoistway, and there are no landings from which to gain 
access through an emergency door, a means of two-way 
conversation conforming to 2.27.1.1 shall be provided. 

NOTE: Examples are pulp mills, grain elevators, dams, or similar 
locations. 

2.11.1.4 Access Openings for Cleaning of Car and 
Hoistway Enclosures. Nonremovable sliding or swing 
panels or doors in the hoistway conforming to 
2.11.1.2(d), (f), (g), and (i) shall be permitted for access 
to car or hoistway transparent enclosures for cleaning 
purposes. An electromechanical device shall be pro- 
vided that will prevent the operation of the driving 
machine unless the access panels or doors are closed 
and locked (see 2.26.2.32). Key shall be Group 2 Security 
(see 8.1). 

2.11.2 Types of Entrances 

2.11.2.1 Passenger Elevators. For passenger eleva- 
tors, entrances shall be one of the following types: 

(a) horizontally sliding; 

(b) horizontally swinging, single-section; 

(c) combination horizontally sliding and swinging; or 

(d) hand- or power-operated vertically sliding that 
slide up to open. 



2.11.2.2 Freight Elevators. For freight elevators, 
entrances shall be one of the following types: 

(a) horizontally sliding 

(b) swinging, single-section 

(c) combination horizontally sliding and swinging 

(d) center-opening, two-section horizontally swing- 
ing, subject to restrictions of 2.11.2.3 

(e) vertically sliding biparting counterbalanced (see 
2.16.4) 

(/) vertically sliding counterweighted, single or 
multisection 

2.11.2.3 Limitations of Use of Center-Opening Swing- 
ing Entrances. Center-opening swinging entrances shall 
be permitted only 

(a) for freight elevators which can be operated only 
from the car; or 

(b) for freight elevators not accessible to the general 
public that can be operated from outside the hoistway, 
and that are located in factories, warehouses, garages, 
and similar industrial buildings. 

2.11.3 Closing of Hoistway Doors 

2.11.3.1 Horizontally sliding or single-section 
swinging doors of automatic-operation elevators shall 
be provided with door closers arranged to close an open 
door automatically if the car, for any reason, leaves the 
landing zone. 

2.11.3.2 Horizontally sliding doors shall be closed 
when the car is at a landing, except when 

(a) the car is operated by a designated attendant in 
the car; 

(b) loading or unloading; 

(c) the elevator conforms to 2.27.3.2.1 and 2.27.3.2.3 
through 2.27.3.2.6, Phase I Emergency Recall Operation 
by fire alarm initiating device; or 

(d) the car is at the recall level when Phase I is in 
effect [see 2.27.3.1.6(a)]. 

2.1 1.3.3 On center-opening doors, if there is an inter- 
lock on only one panel, the door closer required by 
2.11.3.1 shall be provided on the leading panel that oper- 
ates in the opposite direction (see 2.11.11.7). 

2.11.4 Location of Horizontally Sliding or Swinging 
Hoistway Doors 

Horizontally sliding or swinging doors shall be so 
located that the distance from the hoistway face of the 
doors to the edge of the hoistway landing sill, measured 
from the face of the door section nearest to the car, shall 
be not more than the requirements specified in 2.11.4.1 
and 2.11.4.2. 

2.1 1 .4.1 For elevators that can be operated only from 
the car, 100 mm (4 in.), except that where new elevators 
are installed in existing multiple hoistways or where 
alterations involving replacement of the doors are made 



22 



2.11.4.1-2.11.7.1.7 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



to existing elevators in multiple hoistways, and the loca- 
tion of the door openings is such that the 100 mm (4 in.) 
dimension specified cannot be maintained, the distance 
specified is permitted to be increased to not more than 
125 mm (5 in.) where horizontally sliding doors are used. 

2.11 .4.2 For elevators with automatic or continuous- 
pressure operation, 19 mm (0.75 in.) for swinging doors 
and 57 mm (2.25 in.) for sliding doors, except that 

(a) freight elevators not accessible to the general pub- 
lic, and which are located in factories, warehouses, gar- 
ages, and similar industrial buildings are permitted to 
have single-section or center-opening two-section hori- 
zontally swinging doors conforming to 2.11.4.1; or 

(b) for swinging doors used on elevators with auto- 
matic and continuous-pressure operation, the distance 
shall be permitted to be increased from 19 mm to 57 mm 
(0.75 in. to 2.25 in.) if such doors are emergency doors 
conforming to 2.11.1. (See also 2.14.4.5.) 

2.11.5 Projection of Entrances and Other Equipment 
Beyond the Landing Sills 

Entrances and equipment shall not project into an 
elevator hoistway beyond the line of the landing sill, 
except for 

(a) equipment required for interlocking, indicator and 
signal devices, and door operating devices 

(b) vertical slide entrances 

2.11.6 Opening of Hoistway Doors 

2.11.6.1 When the car is within the unlocking zone, 
the hoistway doors shall be openable by hand from 
within the car without the use of tools. 

2.1 1.6.2 Means shall not be provided for locking out 
of service the doors at 

(a) the top terminal landing 

(b) the bottom terminal landing 

(c) the designated and alternate landings for elevators 
equipped with Phase I Emergency Recall Operation, 
when Phase I is effective 

(d) no landing for elevators equipped with Phase II 
Emergency In-Car Operation when Phase II is effective 

2.11.6.3 Egress from the interior of the car to any 
elevator landing by means of the car and hoistway doors 
shall be unrestricted once the car and hoistway doors 
are open. 

2.11 .6.4 Handles or other means provided for opera- 
tion of manually operated doors shall be so located that 
it is not necessary to reach the back of any panel, jamb, 
or sash to operate them. 

2.11.7 Glass in Hoistway Doors 

Glass in hoistway doors shall conform to 2.11.7.1 and 
2.11.7.2. 



2.11.7.1 Vision Panels. Manually operated or self- 
closing hoistway doors of the vertically or horizontally 
sliding type, for elevators with automatic or continuous- 
pressure operation, shall be provided with a vision 
panel. Vision panels shall not be required at landings 
of automatic operation elevators where a hall position 
indicator is provided. In multisection doors, the vision 
panel is required in one section only, but is permitted 
to be placed in all sections. All horizontally swinging 
elevator doors shall be provided with vision panels. 
Vision panels are permitted for any type of hoistway 
door. 

Where required or used, vision panels shall conform 
to 2.11.7.1.1 through 2.11.7.1.7. 

2.11.7.1.1 The area of any single vision panel shall 
be not less than 0.015 m 2 (24 in. 2 ), and the total area of 
one or more vision panels in any hoistway door shall 
be not more than 0.055 m 2 (85 in. 2 ). 

2.11.7.1.2 Each clear panel opening shall reject a 
ball 150 mm (6 in.) in diameter. 

2.11.7.1.3 Muntins used between panel sections 
shall be of noncombustible material and of substantial 
construction. 

2.11.7.1.4 Panel opening shall be glazed with 
either of the following: 

(a) clear wire glass not less than 6 mm (0.25 in.) 

(b) other transparent glazing material not less than 
6 mm (0.25 in.) thick that meets the impact safety stan- 
dard 16 CFR Part 1201 or CAN/CGSB-12.1, CAN/ 
CGSB-12.11, or CAN/CGSB-12.12, whichever is applica- 
ble (see Part 9) 

2.11.7.1.5 The center of the panel shall be located 
not less than 1 300 mm (51 in.) and not more than 
1 700 mm (67 in.) above the landing, except that for 
vertically sliding biparting counterbalanced doors, it 
shall be located to conform to the dimensions specified 
insofar as the door design will permit. 

2.11.7.1.6 Vision panels in power-operated doors 
shall be substantially flush with the surface of the land- 
ing side of the door. 

2.11 .7.1 .7 Vision panels shall be protected by pro- 
tective grilles made of steel not less than 1.4 mm 
(0.055 in.) thick, in accordance with the following specifi- 
cations: 

(a) Grilles shall be sized to fit within or over the vision 
panel frame and completely cover the vision panel open- 
ing in the hoistway door. 

(b) Grilles shall be secured by means that deter 
removal by common tools. 

(c) Grilles shall contain openings that shall be not 
larger than 19 mm x 19 mm (0.75 in. x 0.75 in.) in 
diameter. Such openings shall be spaced at 25 mm (1 in.) 
center-to-center. 



23 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.11.7.1.7-2.11.11.3.1 



(d) Grille edges shall be free of burrs and beveled. 

(e) Grilles shall be installed on the hoistway side of 
the door. 

2.11.7.2 Glass Doors. Where provided, glass 
hoistway doors shall conform to 2.11.7.2.1 through 
2.11.7.2.5. 

2.11.7.2.1 The glass shall be laminated glass con- 
forming to 16 CFR Part 1201 or CAN/CGSB-12.1. Mark- 
ings as specified in the applicable standard shall be on 
each separate piece of glass and shall remain visible 
after installation. 

2.11.7.2.2 The glass shall be not less than 60% of 
the total visible door panel surface area as seen from 
the landing side of the doors. Door lap shall not be used 
in calculating glass size. 

2.11.7.2.3 In power-operated doors, the glass 
panel shall be substantially flush with the surface of the 
landing side of the door. 

2.11.7.2.4 A nonglass edge shall be provided on 
the leading edge of the door panel. 

2.11.7.2.5 The glass door shall conform to 
2.11.11.5.7 for horizontally sliding type entrances, 
2.11.12.4 for vertically sliding type entrances, or 2.11.13.3 
for swinging entrances. 

2.11.8 Weights for Closing or Balancing Doors 

Hoistway door weights, where used for closing or 
balancing doors, shall be guided or restrained to prevent 
them from coming out of their runway. The bottom of 
the guides or other restraining means shall be so con- 
structed as to retain the weights if the weight suspension 
means breaks. 

2.11.9 Hoistway Door Locking Devices and Power 
Operation 

2.11.9.1 Locking Devices. Doors shall be provided 
with door locking devices conforming to 2.12. 

2.11.9.2 Power Operation. Where hoistway doors are 
power operated or are opened or closed by power, their 
operation shall conform to 2.13. 

2.11.10 Landing-Sill Guards, Landing-Sill 
Illumination, Hinged Landing Sills, and 
Tracks on Landings 

2.11.10.1 Landing-Sill Guards 

2.11.10.1.1 Landing sills shall be guarded on the 
underside with guard plates of smooth metal not less 
than 1.4 mm (0.055 in.) thick, extending the full width of 
the car sill exposed to the landing entrance, and securely 
fastened in place. Landing sill guards are not required 
for 

(a) vertically sliding biparting counterbalanced doors 



(b) vertically sliding counterweighted doors that slide 
down to open 

(c) elevators where the landing sills do not project 
into the hoistway 

2.11.10.1.2 Where a car leveling device is pro- 
vided and the hoistway edge of the sill is either flush 
with or projects into the hoistway, the guard shall have 
a straight vertical face extending below the sill not less 
than the depth of the leveling zone plus 75 mm (3 in.). 
Where the sill projects inward from the hoistway enclo- 
sure, the bottom of the guard shall also be beveled at 
an angle of not less than 60 deg and not more than 75 deg 
from the horizontal, or the guard shall be extended from 
the hoistway edge of the landing sill to the top of door 
hanger pocket of the entrance next below. 

2.11.10.1.3 Where no car leveling device is pro- 
vided and the sill projects inward from the general line 
of the hoistway, the guard shall be either beveled at an 
angle of not less than 60 deg and not more than 75 deg 
from the horizontal, or have a straight vertical face 
extending from the hoistway edge of the landing sill to 
the top of door hanger pocket of the entrance below. 

2.11.10.2 Illumination at Landing Sills. The building 
corridors shall be so lighted that the illumination at the 
landing sills, when an elevator is in service, shall be not 
less than 100 lx (10 fc). 

2.11.10.3 Hinged Hoistway Landing Sills. Hinged 
hoistway landing sills provided in connection with verti- 
cally sliding, biparting, counterbalanced doors of freight 
elevators shall be hinged on the landing side so that 
they can be lowered only when the landing doors are 
in the fully opened position. 

2.11.11 Entrances, Horizontal Slide Type 

2.11.11.1 Landing Sills. Landing sills shall 

(a) be of metal and of sufficient strength to support 
the loads to be carried by the sills when loading and 
unloading the car, and be secured in place 

(b) be substantially flush with the floor surface of the 
elevator landings 

(c) be so designed and maintained as to provide a 
secure foothold over the entire width of the door opening 

2.11.11.2 Hangers, Tracks, and Track Supports. 

Hangers, tracks, and their supports and fastenings for 
doors shall be constructed to withstand, without dam- 
age or appreciable deflection, an imposed static load 
equal to four times the weight of each panel as applied 
successively downward and upward at the vertical cen- 
terline of the panel. (See 2.11.11.5.7 and 2.11.11.5.8.) 

2.11.11.3 Entrance Frames 

2.11.11.3.1 Where used, entrance frames shall be 
anchored to the sills and to the building structure or the 
track supports. The head of the entrance frame shall not 



24 



2.11.11.3.1-2.11.11.8 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



be used to support the weight of the wall over the frame. 

2.11.11.3.2 Where decorative material is applied 
to listed /certified frames, it shall conform to the require- 
ments of the certifying organization. 

2.11.11.4 Hangers. Hangers shall conform to 
2.11.11.4.1 and 2.11.11.4.2. 

2.11.11.4.1 Means shall be provided to prevent 
the hangers from jumping the track. 

2.11.11 .4.2 Stops shall be provided in the entrance 
assembly to prevent hangers from overrunning the end 
of the track. 

2.11.11.5 Panels. Panels shall conform to 2.11.11.5.1 
through 2.11.11.5.8. 

2.11.11.5.1 The panels shall overlap the top and 
sides of the opening, and each other, in the case of 
multispeed entrances, by not less than 13 mm (0.5 in.). 

Where entrances without frames are used, the overlap 
shall extend the thickness of the facing used to finish 
the opening plus 13 mm (0.5 in.) or more. 

2.11.11.5.2 The clearance shall not exceed 10 mm 
(0.375 in.) between 

(a) the panel and the frame 

(b) the panel and the wall, where entrances without 
frames are used in masonry or concrete 

(c) related panels of multispeed entrances 

(d) the panel and the sill measured vertically 

2.11.11.5.3 The leading panel edge of side-open- 
ing entrances shall not close into pockets in the strike 
jamb and shall be smooth and free of sharp projections. 

2.11.11.5.4 The meeting panel edges of center- 
opening entrances shall be smooth and free of sharp 
projection. 

The meeting panel edges of center-opening entrances 
shall be protected with not less than one resilient male 
member extending the full height of the panel. The resil- 
ient members shall be permitted to interlock by not more 
than 10 mm (0.375 in.). 

When in the closed position, the distance between the 
metal parts of the meeting panels shall not exceed 13 mm 
(0.5 in.). 

2.11.11.5.5 No areas shall be depressed or raised 
more than 3 mm (0.125 in.) from the adjacent area and 
edges shall be beveled at not more than 30 deg to the 
panel surface. 

2.11.11.5.6 Where decorative material is applied 
to listed /certified panels, it shall conform to the require- 
ments of the certifying organization. 

2.11.11.5.7 The entrance assembly shall be capa- 
ble of withstanding a force of 2 500 N (560 lbf ) applied 
on the landing side at right angles to and approximately 
at the center of a panel. This force shall be distributed 



over an area of approximately 100 mm X 100 mm (4 in. 
x 4 in.). There shall be no appreciable permanent dis- 
placement or deformation of any parts of the entrance 
assembly resulting from this test. 

2.11.11.5.8 Means shall be provided to prevent 
opening of locked doors more than 20 mm (0.8 in.) per 
panel at the farthest point from the interlock when a 
force of 135 N (30 lbf) is applied in the opening direction 
at the leading edge of the door at the farthest point from 
the interlock. 

2.11.11.6 Bottom Guides. Bottom guides shall con- 
form to the following: 

(a) The bottom of each panel shall be guided by one 
or more members. 

(b) Guide members shall be securely fastened. 

(c) The guide members and any reinforcements or 
guards shall engage the corresponding member by not 
less than 6 mm (0.25 in.). (See 2.11.11.5.7.) 

2.11.11.7 Multipanel Entrances. Panels of multipanel 
doors shall conform to either 2.11.11.7.1 or 2.11.11.7.2. 
Multiple-speed and center-opening multiple-speed 
doors shall also conform to 2.11.11.7.3. 

2.11.11 .7.1 Panels shall be interconnected directly 
or through their hangers so as to assure simultaneous 
movement of all panels. The factor of safety of the inter- 
connecting means shall not be less than 10 for cast iron 
or 5 for other materials. 

2.11.11.7.2 Panels shall be equipped with 
hoistway door interlocks on each driven panel and pro- 
vided with a door closer(s) installed to comply with 
2.11.3.1. All panels shall move simultaneously when the 
car is at the landing. 

2.11.11.7.3 Multiple speed and center-opening 
multiple-speed panels shall be provided with secondary 
mechanical interconnecting means to ensure that indi- 
vidual panels of multiple panel doors moving in the 
same direction cannot become separated from the panel 
that is locked by the interlock in the event that the normal 
interconnecting means fails. 

2.11.11.7.4 Where cable and pulleys are used to 
connect panels of multisection sliding doors, each pulley 
shall be equipped with a guard to prevent the cable 
from leaving the pulley. 

2.11.11.8 Hoistway Door Safety Retainers. The top 

and bottom of horizontally sliding doors shall be pro- 
vided with a means of retaining the closed door panel 
in position if the primary guiding means fail, and pre- 
venting displacement of the door panel top and bottom 
by more than 20 mm (0.8 in.) when the door panel is 
subjected to a force of 5 000 N (1,125 lbf) in the direction 
of the hoistway applied at right angles to the panel over 
an area of 300 mm x 300 mm (12 in. x 12 in.) at the 
approximate center of the panel. 



25 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.11.11.8-2.11.12.4.6 



The retaining means shall also withstand, without 
detachment or permanent deformation, a force of 
1 000 N (225 lbf ) applied upward at any point along 
the width of the door panel and, while this force is 
maintained, an additional force of 1 100 N (250 lbf) 
applied at right angles to the door at the center of the 
panel. This force shall be distributed over an area of 
300 mm x 300 mm (12 in. x 12 in.). 

The retaining means shall not be subjected to wear 
or stress during normal door operation or maintenance. 

2.11.11.9 Beams, Walls, Floors, and Supports. The 

building structural supports of the entrance, such as 
building beams, walls, and floors, shall be designed to 
withstand the horizontal forces stipulated in 2.11.11.8. 

2.11.11.10 Hoistway Door to Sill Clearance. The hori- 
zontal distance from the hoistway side of the leading 
edge of the hoistway door, or sight guard, if provided, 
to the edge of the landing sill, shall not exceed 13 mm 
(0.5 in.). The vertical clearance between the sight guard, 
if provided, and the landing sill shall not exceed 13 mm 
(0.5 in.). 

2.11.12 Entrances, Vertical Slide Type 

2.11.12.1 Landing Sills 

2.11.12.1.1 Landing sills shall be of metal and of 
sufficient strength to support the loads to be carried by 
the sills when loading and unloading the car, and be 
secured in place (see 2.16.2.2 for classes of loading); the 
load on the sill during loading and unloading shall be 
considered to be the same as that on the platform mem- 
bers specified in 8.2.2.6. 

2.11.12.1.2 Landing sills shall be secured to the 
building structure in substantially the same plane as the 
elevator landing floor. 

2.11.12.2 Entrance Frames. Where used, frames shall 
conform to 2.11.12.2.1 through 2.11.12.2.4. 

2.11.12.2.1 Entrance frames shall be anchored to 
the sills and to the building structure or track supports. 

2.1 1.12.2.2 The weight of the wall above the frame 
shall be supported by either of the following: 

(a) lintel 

(b) the head of the frames when designed to support 
the load 

2.11.12.2.3 In gypsum board (dry wall) construc- 
tion, the frame side jambs shall be extended and securely 
fastened to the building structure above the frame. 

2.11.12.2.4 Where decorative material is applied 
to listed /certified frames, it shall conform to the require- 
ments of the certifying organization. 

2.11.12.3 Rails. The panel guide rails shall be 
securely fastened to the building structure and the 



entrance frame, at intervals, throughout their entire 
length. 

Rails and their supports shall withstand the forces 
specified in 2.11.12.4.6. Where truckable sills are pro- 
vided as specified in 2.11.12.4.2, the rails shall withstand 
any reactions that could be transmitted to the rails as a 
result of loading and unloading operations. 

2.11.12.4 Panels. Panels shall conform to 2.11.12.4.1 
through 2.11.12.4.8. 

2.1 1 .1 2.4.1 The panels shall be constructed of non- 
combustible material, or of a structural core made of 
combustible material if covered with not less than 
0.45 mm (0.0175 in.) sheet metal. 

2.11.12.4.2 The lower panel of biparting entrances 
and the top of the panel of vertical slide entrances that 
slide down to open shall be provided with a truckable sill 
designed for the loads specified in 2.11.12.1.1. Provisions 
shall be made to transmit the panel sill load to the build- 
ing structure. 

2.11.12.4.3 Panels of biparting counterbalanced 
entrances shall conform to the following: 

(a) They shall be provided with means to stop the 
closing panels when the distance between the closing 
rigid members of the panel is not less than 20 mm (0.8 in.) 
and not more than 50 mm (2 in.). 

(b) A fire-resistive, nonshearing, and noncrushing 
member of either the meeting or overlapping type shall 
be provided on the upper panel to close the distance 
between the rigid door sections when in contact with the 
stops. This member shall allow a minimum compressible 
clearance of 20 mm (0.8 in.). 

(c) Rigid members that overlap the meeting edge, and 
center-latching devices, are prohibited. 

2.11.12.4.4 The panels, with their attachments for 
doors that slide up to open, shall overlap the sides and 
top of the entrance opening by at least 50 mm (2 in.) 
when in the closed position. Other vertically sliding 
panels and their attachments shall overlap their entrance 
openings and sills by at least 50 mm (2 in.) when in the 
closed position. The overlap shall extend at least 50 mm 
(2 in.) beyond the thickness of any facing used to finish 
the opening. 

2.1 1.12.4.5 The clearance between a panel and the 
frame lintel, between a panel and the sill, and between 
related panels of multispeed entrances, shall not exceed 
25 mm (1 in.). 

2.11.12.4.6 Panels, rails, and door guides shall 
conform to the strength requirements of 2.11.11.5.7. 
Hangers, guides, and guide shoes shall not be perma- 
nently displaced or deformed by more than 20 mm 
(0.8 in.) when their panel is subjected to a force of 5 000 N 
(1,125 lbf) in the direction of the hoistway applied at 
right angles to the panel over an area of 300 mm x 
300 mm (12 in. x 12 in.) at the approximate center of 
the panel. 



26 



2.11.12.4.7-2.11.13.3.7 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



• 



2.11. 12.4.7 Means shall be provided to close the 
opening between the upper panel of pass-type entrances 
and the entrance frame lintel. The sum of the clearance 
between the panel, the device used to close the opening, 
and the entrance lintel shall not exceed 25 mm (1 in.). 

2.11.12.4.8 Means shall be provided to prevent 
the opening of locked doors more than 25 mm (1 in.) 
per panel at the farthest point from the interlock when 
a force of 135 N (30 lbf ) is applied in the opening direc- 
tion at the leading edge of the door at the farthest point 
from the interlock. 

2.11.12.5 Guides. Panel guides shall conform to 
2.11.12.5.1 through 2.11.12.5.3. 

2.11.12.5.1 Each panel shall be equipped with not 
less than four guide members or with continuous guides. 

2.11.12.5.2 Guide members shall be securely fas- 
tened to the panels. 

2.11.12.53 Guide members shall be designed to 
withstand the forces specified in 2.11.12.4.6. 

2.11.12.6 Counterweighting or Counterbalancing. 

Single or multisection vertically sliding panels shall be 
so counterweighted, and vertically sliding biparting 
panels shall be so counterbalanced, that they will not 
open or close by gravity. 

Fastenings shall be provided to prevent the fall of a 
counterweight, and the detachment or dislodgment of 
counterweight parts or of balancing weights. Suspension 
means and their connections, for vertically sliding 
biparting counterbalanced doors and for the counter- 
weights of vertically sliding counterweighted doors, 
shall have a factor of safety of not less than 5. 

2.11.12.7 Sill Guards. Where the panel sill or other 
structural member projects more than 13 mm (0.5 in.) 
into the hoistway or beyond the panel surface below it, 
the projection shall be provided with a metal guard not 
less than 1.4 mm (0.055 in.) thick and beveled at an angle 
of not less than 50 deg and not more than 75 deg from 
the horizontal. 

2.11.12.8 Pull Straps. Manually operated vertically 
sliding biparting entrances shall be provided with pull 
straps on the inside and outside of the door. 

The length of the pull straps shall conform to 
2.11.12.8.1 and 2.11.12.8.2. 

2.11.12.8.1 The bottom of the strap shall be not 
more than 2 000 mm (79 in.) above the landing when 
the panel is in the fully opened position. 

2.11.12.8.2 The length of the strap shall not be 
extended by means of ropes or other materials. 

2.11.13 Entrances, Swinging Type 

2.11.13.1 Landing Sills. Landing sills shall 
(a) be of metal and of sufficient strength to support 
the loads to be carried by the sills when loading and 



unloading the car, and be secured in place 

(b) be substantially flush with the floor surface of the 
elevator landings 

(c) be so designed and maintained as to provide a 
secure foothold over the entire width of the door opening 

2.11.13.2 Entrance Frames. Frames shall conform to 
2.11.13.2.1 and 2.11.13.2.2. 

2.11.13.2.1 They shall be designed to support in 
place the panels with their hinges or pivots, closer if 
attached to the frame and interlock. They shall with- 
stand the forces referred to in 2.11.13.3.5, and the forces 
resulting from the normal opening of the door or normal 
attempts to open it when locked in the closed position. 

2.11.13.2.2 Where decorative material is applied 
to listed /certified panels, it shall conform to the require- 
ments of the certifying organization. 

2.11.13.3 Panels. Panels shall conform to 2.11.13.3.1 
through 2.11.13.3.7. 

2.11.13.3.1 The panels shall overlap the part of 
the frame against which they close by not less than 
13 mm (0.5 in.). 

2.1 1.13.3.2 The clearance between a panel and its 
sill shall not exceed 10 mm (0.375 in.). 

2.1 1 .13.3.3 Handles or knobs on the hoistway side 
of door panels are not permitted. Unlatching devices 
that do not project beyond the face of the door panel 
on the hoistway side shall be permitted. 

2.11.13.3.4 Where decorative material is applied 
to listed /certified panels, it shall conform to the require- 
ments of the certifying organization. 

2.11.13.3.5 Panels and their assembled accesso- 
ries shall 

(a) be capable of withstanding a force on the handle 
of not less than 450 N (100 lbf) in the opening direction 
of a closed and locked door. There shall be no permanent 
displacement or deformation of the handle or the door 
panel resulting from this force. 

(b) conform to 2.11.11.5.7. 

(c) not be permanently displaced or deformed by 
more than 20 mm (0.75 in.) when the panel is subjected 
to a force of 5 000 N (1,125 lbf) in the direction of the 
hoistway, applied at right angles to the panel over an 
area of 300 mm x 300 mm (12 in. x 12 in.) at the approxi- 
mate center of the panel. 

2.11.13.3.6 Center-opening horizontally swinging 
doors shall have one door section provided with an 
overlapping astragal on its vertical edge, except where 
each door section is provided with a landing door inter- 
lock [see 2.12.2.4.4(c)]. 

2.11.13.3.7 Center-opening horizontally swinging 
doors shall have door stops provided at the top entrances 



27 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.11.13.3.7-2.11.16 



that will stop each door panel when closed and that will 
meet the requirements specified in 2.11.13.3.5. 

2.11.13.4 Hinges. Hinges of the mortise and surface 
type shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 80, Table 

2-4.3.1. 

2.11.13.5 Entrances With Combination Horizontally 
Sliding and Swinging Panels. Where both the sliding 
and swinging panels are not equipped with hoistway 
door interlocks or locks and contacts conforming to 2.12, 
the horizontally sliding and swinging panels forming a 
part of the entrance shall be so interconnected that 

(a) the swinging panel can be opened only when the 
sliding panel is in the open position 

(b) both panels swing as a unit 

2.11.14 Fire Tests 

2.11.14.1 In jurisdictions enforcing the NBCC 

(a) the fire protection rating of entrances and doors 
shall be determined in accordance with the requirements 
specified in the NBCC (CAN4-S104) 

(b) where required, the hoistway door interlock mech- 
anism and associated wiring shall remain operational 
for a period of 1 h when subjected to the standard fire 
exposure test described in CAN4-S104 

NOTE (2.1114.1): Requirements 2.11.14.2 through 2.11.18 do not 
apply in jurisdictions enforcing the NBCC. 

2.11.14.2 In jurisdictions not enforcing the NBCC, 

2.11.15 through 2.11.18, and 2.11.14.2.1 through 
2.11.14.2.3 apply where fire-resistive construction is 
required by 2.1.1.1.3. 

2.11.14.2.1 Entrances shall be subjected to the 
type tests specified in 8.3.4. 

2.1 1 .14.2.2 The following basic types of entrances 
shall be tested: 

(a) Horizontally Sliding Type. Test a side-sliding and a 
center-opening assembly. 

(b) Swinging Type. Test a single swinging assembly. 

(c) Vertically Sliding Type. Test a biparting assembly. 

2.11.14.2.3 When an entrance assembly has been 
tested for one type of wall construction, i.e., masonry 
or drywall, only the frame-to-wall interface shall be 
acceptable to the certifying organization for other types 
of construction. 

2.11.15 Marking 

2.11.15.1 Labeling of Tested Assembly. In jurisdic- 
tions not enforcing the NBCC, 2.11.15.1.1 and 2.11.15.1.2 
apply where fire-resistive construction is required by 
2.1.1.1.3. 

2.11.15.1.1 Each entrance shall be labeled. Each 
label shall be permanently attached to the equipment 
and shall be readily visible after installation. The follow- 
ing data shall be on the label: 

(a) certifying organization's name or identifying 
symbol 



(b) the name, trademark, or file number by which 
the organization that manufactured the product can be 
identified 

(c) statement of compliance with 8.3.4 

2.11.15.1.2 Labels shall be provided for each 
entrance as follows: 

(a) One label shall be provided for the door panels. 

(b) One label shall be provided for the frame, except 
that no label is required where frames are installed in 
masonry or concrete and the panel overlaps the wall in 
conformance with 2.11.11.5.1 and 2.11.11.5.2, or 
2.11.12.4.4. 

(c) One label shall be provided for the transom panel. 
One label shall be permitted to be provided for the 
frame and transom, provided that the label states that 
it includes both the frame and the transom. 

(d) Where entrance hardware components have not all 
been tested in complete assembly, individually labeled 
hardware components that are designed to be compati- 
ble with the entrance assembly shall be provided. A 
single label shall be permitted to be provided for the 
entrance hardware where the entrance hardware compo- 
nents are equivalent to those tested in a complete 
assembly. 

(e) A single label shall be permitted to be provided 
for the entire entrance assembly where components are 
equivalent to those tested as a complete assembly. 

2.11.15.2 Other Assemblies. In jurisdictions not 
enforcing the NBCC, the following shall apply. Other 
assemblies of the three basic types (see 2.11.14) shall 
qualify for labeling or listing/certification: 

(a) when composed of panel(s), frame, and hardware 
of the same type as tested and not exceeding the overall 
height and width of any panel and frame of the largest 
size tested; or 

(b) when such panel(s), frame, and hardware are mod- 
ified, and test or technical data demonstrates that the 
modifications will meet the performance requirements 
of the test procedure in 8.3.3. 

All other elements of the assembly shall conform to 
all other applicable requirements of this Code. 

2.11.15.3 Entrances Larger Than Tested Assemblies. 

In jurisdictions not enforcing the NBCC, the following 
shall apply. When the entrance is too large for the regu- 
larly available test facilities, the certifying organization 
shall be permitted to issue oversize certificates or over- 
size labels, or such entrances shall be permitted to be 
used subject to approval by the authority having juris- 
diction. 

2.11.16 Factory Inspections 

In jurisdictions not enforcing the NBCC, the following 
shall apply. The manufacturing facilities for the produc- 
tion of entrances or components thereof shall be 
inspected by the certifying organization at random at 



28 



2.11.16-2.12.2.3 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



least quarterly, or if they are not manufactured on a 
continuous basis, at the time they are being produced, 
to assure that production methods are such that 
entrances or components thereof similar to those tested 
are being produced. 

2.11.17 Transoms and Fixed Side Panels 

In jurisdictions not enforcing the NBCC, the following 
shall apply. Transoms and fixed side panels shall be 
permitted to close openings above and beside the hori- 
zontally sliding or horizontally swinging type entrances, 
provided that 

(a) the opening closed by the transom and fixed side 
panel does not exceed in width or height the dimensions 
of the entrance in which it is installed 

(b) the transom panels and fixed side panels are 

(1) constructed in a manner equivalent to the con- 
struction of the entrance panels 

(2) secured 

2.11.18 Installation Instructions 

In jurisdictions not enforcing the NBCC, the following 
shall apply: 

(a) Instructions detailing the application and installa- 
tion of door listed/certified panels and entrance hard- 
ware shall be provided. 

(b) Where frames are used, instructions detailing the 
listed /certified frame-to-wall interface shall be pro- 
vided. 

2.11.19 Gasketing of Hoistway Entrances 

Where gasketing material is applied to fire-resistive 
entrances, it shall conform to 2.11.19.1 through 2.11.19.4. 

2.11.19.1 The gasketing material shall be subjected 
to the tests specified in UL 10B, NFPA 252, or CAN4- 
S104, whichever is applicable (see Part 9). 

2.11.19.2 The gasketing material shall withstand the 
maximum elevated temperature tests as defined by UL 
1784 standard without deterioration. 

2.1 1 .1 9.3 Each section of the gasketing material shall 
be labeled. Each label shall bear the name of the manu- 
facturer and a statement indicating conformance with 
2.11.19.1 and 2.11.19.2. The label shall be visible after 
installation 

2.11.19.4 Labeled gasketing material shall conform 
to 2.11.16 or the NBCC, whichever is applicable. 

NOTES (2.11.19): 

(1) See also 2.1.1.5, 2.11.3, and 2.13.4 for additional requirements to 
be considered when gasketing material is applied to a hoistway 
entrance. 

(2) These requirements do not evaluate the air and/or smoke leak- 
age performance of the gasketing material. 



SECTION 2.12 

HOISTWAY DOOR LOCKING DEVICES AND ELECTRIC 

CONTACTS, AND HOISTWAY ACCESS SWITCHES 

2.12.1 General 

2.12.1.1 When the car is stopped within the 
unlocking zone, the hoistway doors shall be unlocked, 
or locked but openable from the landing side either 
manually or by power. 

2.12.1.2 When the car is outside the unlocking zone, 
the hoistway doors shall be openable from the landing 
side only by a hoistway door unlocking device (see 
2.12.6, 2.12.7, and Nonmandatory Appendix B). 

2.12.13 For security purposes, hoistway doors shall 
be permitted to be locked out of service, subject to the 
requirements of 2.11.6. 

2.12.1.4 Passenger elevator hoistway doors shall be 
equipped with interlocks conforming to 2.12.2. 

2.12.1.5 Freight elevator hoistway doors shall be 
equipped with interlocks conforming to 2.12.2 or combi- 
nation mechanical locks and electric contacts conform- 
ing to, and where permitted by, 2.12.3. 

2.12.2 Interlocks 

2.12.2.1 General. Each entrance at a landing to an 
elevator used for passengers or freight and not conform- 
ing to 2.12.3.1 shall be equipped with one or more inter- 
locks meeting the design requirements of 2.12.2.4. 

2.12.2.2 Closed Position of Hoistway Doors. 
Hoistway doors shall be considered to be in the closed 
position under the following conditions. These dimen- 
sions apply to the doors in their normal operating condi- 
tion (see 2.14.4.11): 

(a) for horizontally sliding or swinging doors, when 
the leading edge of the door is within 10 mm (0.375 in.) 
of the nearest face of the jamb or when the panels of 
center-opening doors are within 10 mm (0.375 in.) of 
contact with each other 

(b) for vertically sliding counterweighted doors, 
when the leading edge of the door is within 10 mm 
(0.375 in.) of the sill for doors which slide up to open, 
or 10 mm (0.375 in.) of the lintel for doors that slide 
down to open 

(c) for vertically sliding biparting counterbalanced 
doors, when the astragal on the upper panel is within 
19 mm (0.75 in.) of the lower panel 

2.12.2.3 Operation of the Driving Machine With a 
Hoistway Door Unlocked or Not in the Closed Position 

Operation of the driving machine when a hoistway door 
is unlocked or not in the closed position (see 2.12.2.2) 
shall be permitted under one of the following conditions: 
(a) by a car leveling or truck zoning device (see 
2.26.1.6) 



29 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.12.2.3-2.12.3.1 



(b) when a hoistway access switch is operated (see 
2.12.7) 

(c) when a bypass switch is activated (see 2.26.1.5) 

2.12.2.4 General Design Requirements. Interlocks 
shall conform to 2.12.2.4.1 through 2.12.2.4.7. 

2.12.2.4.1 Interlock contacts shall be positively 
opened by the locking member or by a member con- 
nected to and mechanically operated by the locking 
member, and the contacts shall be maintained in the 
open position by the action of gravity, or by a restrained 
compression spring, or by both, or by means of the 
opening member (see 2.26.2.14). Contacts shall be open 
when the hoistway door interlock is unlocked. If the 
contacts are maintained in the open position by other 
than the locking member, the interlock shall be located 
such that the contacts cannot be closed by hand from 
the car or landing when the doors are open. 

The electrical contact bridging means shall withstand 
a separating force of 200 N (45 lbf ) in any direction from 
the locking member. 

2.12.2.4.2 The locking member of the interlock 
shall hold the door in the locked position by means of 
gravity, or by a restrained compression spring, or by 
both, or by means of a positive linkage. 

2.12.2.4.3 The interlock shall lock the door in the 
closed position with a minimum engagement of 7 mm 
(0.28 in.) of the locking members before the interlock 
contacts are closed and before the driving machine can 
be operated, except as permitted in 2.12.2.3. 

Devices that permit operation of the driving machine 
by the normal operating device when the door is closed 
but before it is locked are not interlocks and are not 
permitted where interlocks are required by this Code. 

2.12.2.4.4 Interlocks, used with multisection 
doors, shall conform to the following requirements: 

(a) They shall lock all sections of the door, but shall 
be permitted to be applied to only one section of the 
door, provided the device used to interconnect the door 
sections is so arranged that locking one section will 
prevent the opening of all sections. 

(b) Where used with vertically sliding biparting coun- 
terbalanced doors, they shall be so arranged that the 
interlock contacts are mechanically held in the open 
position by the door or devices attached thereto, unless 
the door is in the closed position. 

(c) Where used with center-opening horizontally 
swinging doors, either 

(1) both door panels shall be equipped with inter- 
locks; or 

(2) where the door panels are so arranged that one 
panel can be opened only after the other panel has been 
opened, the interlock is not required on the section that 
opens last, if that door panel is provided with a door 
electric contact conforming to 2.14.4.2.3, 2.14.4.2.5, and 



2.26.2.15, except that terms "door or gate" and "car door 
or gate" shall be replaced with the "hoistway door" or 
"hoistway door section" and the term "accessible from 
inside the car panel" with the term "accessible from the 
landing side when the hoistway doors are closed." 

(d) Where used with combination horizontally sliding 
and swinging doors, either 

(1) the sliding and swinging panels shall both be 
equipped with interlocks; or 

(2) where the sliding and swinging panels are inter- 
connected in conformity with the requirements of 
2.11.13.5, the interlock is not required on the swinging 
panel, provided that the interlock on the sliding panel is 
so designed and installed that the car cannot be operated 
unless the sliding and swinging panels are both locked 
in the closed position, as defined in 2.12.2.2. 

(e) Where a door closer, used with a combination slid- 
ing and swinging door, is arranged to be disconnected 
to allow the sliding panel to swing, it shall be so designed 
and installed that it shall not make the interlock contact 
when disconnected and released. 

2.12.2.4.5 Interlock systems employing a single 
master switch for more than one door are prohibited. 

2.12.2.4.6 The locking member shall not disen- 
gage when the door is subjected to a repetitive force of 
450 N (100 lbf) in the direction of opening and at a right 
angle. 

2.12.2.4.7 Mercury tube switches shall not be 
used. 

2.12.2.5 Interlock Retiring Cam Device. Retiring cams 
used to actuate an interlock shall exert a force at least 
double the average force required to operate the inter- 
lock and shall have a movement at least 13 mm (0.5 in.) 
more than the average movement required to operate 
the interlock. 

An interlock retiring cam device shall be permanently 
marked by the manufacturer with its rated horizontal 
force and rated horizontal movement. 

The rated horizontal force shall be the static force 
exerted by a retiring cam device in the horizontal direc- 
tion when extended a distance equal to 75% of its rated 
horizontal movement. The rated horizontal movement 
shall be the horizontal distance traveled by the retiring 
cam device from the fully retired position to the fully 
extended position. 

2.12.2.6 Location. Interlocks shall be so located that 
they are not accessible from the landing side when the 
hoistway doors are closed. 

2.12.3 Hoistway Door Combination Mechanical Locks 
and Electric Contacts 

2.12.3.1 Where Permitted. Hoistway door combina- 
tion mechanical locks and electric contacts shall be per- 
mitted only on freight elevators equipped with manually 



30 



2.12.3.1-2.12A3 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



operated vertically sliding doors and only at the follow- 
ing landings: 

(a) the top terminal landing and the landing whose 
sill is located not more than 1 225 mm (48 in.) below 
the top terminal landing sill, provided that the elevator 
travel does not exceed 4 570 mm (15 ft) 

(b) any landing whose sill is within 1 525 mm (60 in.) 
of the pit floor, regardless of the elevator travel 

2.12.3.2 Closed Position of Hoistway Doors, 
Hoistway doors shall be considered to be in the closed 
position under the following conditions. These dimen- 
sions apply to the doors in their normal operating condi- 
tion (see also 2.14.4.11): 

(a) for vertically sliding counterweighted doors, 
when the leading edge of the door is within 10 mm 
(0.375 in.) of the sill for doors that slide up to open, or 
10 mm (0.375 in.) of the lintel for doors that slide down 
to open 

(b) for vertically sliding biparting counterbalanced 
doors, when the astragal on the upper panel is within 
19 mm (0.75 in.) of the lower panel 

"LI 233 Operation of the Driving Machine With a 
Hoistway Door Not in the Closed Position. Operation of 
the driving machine when a hoistway door is not in 
the closed position shall be permitted under one of the 
following conditions: 

(a) by a car leveling or truck zoning device (see 
2.12.2.2 and 2.26.1.6) 

(b) when a hoistway access switch is operated (see 
2.12.7) 

(c) when bypass switch is activated (see 2.26.1.5) 

2.12.3.4 General Design Requirements. Combination 
mechanical locks and electric contacts shall conform to 
2.12.3.4.1 through 2.12.3.4.6. 

2.1 2.3.4.1 They shall be so designed that the lock- 
ing member and the electric contact are mounted on 
and attached to a common base, in such a manner that 
there is a fixed relation between the location of the con- 
tact and the location of the locking member. 

They shall be so installed and adjusted that the electric 
contact cannot close until the door is in the closed posi- 
tion as specified in 2.12.3.2, and so that the locking mem- 
ber is in a position to lock the door when or before the 
contact closes. In order to prevent motion of the door 
from opening the electric contact while the door is locked 
in the closed position, multiple-locking points shall, 
where necessary, be provided on the locking mechanism. 

2.12.3.4.2 The electric contact shall be positively 
opened by the locking bar of the mechanical lock or by 
a lever or other device attached to and operated by the 
door, and the electric contact shall be maintained in the 
open position by the action of gravity or by a restrained 
compression spring, or by both, or by positive mechani- 
cal means. (See 2.26.2.14.) 



2. 1 2.3.4.3 The mechanical lock shall hold the door 
in the locked position by means of gravity or by a 
restrained compression spring, or by both. 

2.12.3.4.4 Combination mechanical locks and 
electric contacts used with vertical-slide multiple-panel 
doors shall conform to the following requirements: 

(a) They shall lock all panels of the door, but shall be 
permitted to be applied to only one section of the door, 
provided the device used to interconnect the door sec- 
tions is so arranged that locking one panel will prevent 
the opening of all panels. 

(b) Where used with vertically sliding biparting coun- 
terbalanced doors, the electric contact shall be so 
arranged that it is mechanically held in the open position 
by the door or a device attached thereto, unless the door 
is in the closed position. 

2.12.3.4.5 The locking member shall not disen- 
gage when the door is subjected to a repetitive force of 
450 N (100 lbf) in the direction of opening and at a right 
angle. 

2.12.3.4.6 Mercury tube switches shall not be 
used. 

2.12.3.5 Location. Combination mechanical locks 
and electric contacts shall be so located that they are 
not accessible from the landing side when the hoistway 
doors are closed. 

2.12.4 Listing/Certification Door Locking Devices and 
Door or Gate Electric Contacts 

2.12.4.1 Type Tests. Each type and make of hoistway 
door interlock, hoistway door combination mechanical 
lock and electric contact, and door or gate electric con- 
tact, shall conform to the type tests specified in 8.3.3, 
unless tested prior to 

(a) August 1, 1996, and shall have been subjected to 
the tests specified in A17.1a-1994, Section 1101; or 

(b) March 23, 2002 in jurisdictions enforcing CSA B44 
and shall have been subjected to the tests specified in 
CSA B44S1-97, Clause 11.5. 

The tests shall be done by or under the supervision 
of a certifying organization. 

2.12.4.2 Listing/Certification. Each type and make of 
hoistway door interlock, hoistway door combination 
mechanical lock and electric contact, and door or gate 
electric contact shall conform to the general require- 
ments for tests and certification specified in 8.3.1. 

2.12.4.3 Identification Marking, Each listed /certified 
device shall be labeled. It shall be permanently attached 
to the device, and shall be so located as to be readily 
visible when the device is installed in its operating 
position. 



31 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.12.4.3-2.12.7.3.1 



The labels shall include the following data: 

(a) the name, trademark, or certifying organization 
file number by which the organization that manufac- 
tured the product can be identified 

(b) the certifying organization name or identifying 
symbol 

(c) statement of compliance with ASME A17.1 or 
CSAB44 

(d) a distinctive type, model, or style letter or number 

(e) rated voltage and current, and whether AC or DC 
(/) rated test force and rated test movement when the 

device is of a type released by an interlock retiring cam 
(see 8.3.3.4.7) 

(g) date (month and year) devices subjected to type 
test specified in 2.12.4.1 

(h) if the device has only been type tested and listed/ 
certified for use on a private residence elevator, the label 
shall indicate the restricted use 

2.12.5 Restricted Opening of Hoistway or Car Doors 

Hoistway and car doors of passenger elevators shall 
conform to 2.12.5.1 through 2.12.5.3. 

2.12.5.1 When a car is outside the unlocking zone, 
the hoistway doors or car doors shall be so arranged 
that the hoistway doors or car doors cannot be opened 
more than 100 mm (4 in.) from inside the car. 

2.12.5.2 When the car doors are so arranged that 
they cannot be opened when the car is outside the 
unlocking zone, the car doors shall be openable from 
outside the car without the use of a special tool(s). 

2.12.5.3 The doors shall be openable from within 
the car (see 2.14.5.7) when the car is within the 
unlocking zone. 

NOTE (2.12.5): See also 2.12.1 and Nonmandatory Appendix B, 
Unlocking Zone. 

2.12.6 Hoistway Door Unlocking Devices 

2.12.6.1 General. Except in jurisdictions that limit the 
use of hoistway door unlocking devices, they shall be 
provided for use by elevator and emergency personnel 
for each elevator at every landing where there is an 
entrance. 

2.12.6.2 Location and Design. Hoistway door 
unlocking devices shall conform to 2.12.6.2.1 through 
2.12.6.2.5. 

2.12.6.2.1 The device shall unlock and permit the 
opening of a hoistway door from a landing irrespective 
of the position of the car. 

2.1 2.6.2.2 The device shall be designed to prevent 
unlocking the door with common tools. 

2.12.6.2.3 Where a hoistway unlocking device 
consists of an arrangement whereby a releasing chain, 



permanently attached to a door locking mechanism, is 
kept under a locked panel adjacent to the landing door, 
such a panel shall be self-closing and self-locking and 
shall not have identifying markings on its face. 

2.12.6.2.4 The operating means for unlocking the 
door shall be Group 1 Security (see 8.1). The operating 
means shall also be made available to emergency person- 
nel during an emergency. 

2.12.6.2.5 The unlocking device keyway and 
locked panel (see 2.12.6.2.3), if provided, shall be located 
at a height not greater than 2 100 mm (83 in.) above the 
landing. 

2.12.7 Hoistway Access Switches 

2.12.7.1 General 

2.12.7.1.1 Hoistway access switches shall be pro- 
vided when the rated speed is greater than 0.75 m/s 
(150 ft/min) at 

(a) the lowest landing for access to the pit, when a 
separate pit access door is not provided 

(b) the top landing for access to the top of the car 

2.12.7.1.2 For elevators with a speed of 0.75 m/s 
(150 ft/min) or less, hoistway access switches shall be 
provided at the top landing when the distance from the 
top of the car to the landing sill exceeds 900 mm (35 in.) 
when the car platform is level with the landing immedi- 
ately below the top landing. 

2.12.7.2 Location and Design. Hoistway access 
switches shall conform to 2.12.7.2.1 through 2.12.7.2.3. 

2.12.7.2.1 The switch shall be installed adjacent 
to the hoistway entrance at the landing with which it is 
identified. 

2.12.7.2.2 The switch shall be of the continuous- 
pressure spring-return type, and shall be operated by a 
cylinder-type lock having not less than a five-pin or five- 
disk combination, with the key removable only when 
the switch is in the "OFF" position. The key shall be 
Group 1 Security (see 8.1). 

2.12.7.2.3 The electric contacts in the switch shall 
be positively opened mechanically; their openings shall 
not be solely dependent on springs. 

2.12.7.3 Operating Requirements. The operation of 
the switch shall permit movement of the car with the 
hoistway door at this landing unlocked or not in the 
closed position, and with the car door or gate not in the 
closed position, subject to the requirements of 2.12.7.3.1 
through 2.12.7.3.8. 

2.12.7.3.1 The operation of the switch shall not 
render ineffective the hoistway-door interlock or electric 
contact at any other landing, nor shall the car move if 
any other hoistway door is unlocked. 



32 



2.12.7.3.2-2.13.3.2 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.12.7.3.2 The car cannot be operated at a speed 
greater than 0.75 m/s (150 ft/min). 

2.12.7.3.3 For automatic and continuous-pressure 
operation elevators, provided that 

(a) car and landing operating devices are first made 
inoperative by means within the car. This means shall 
enable the hoistway access switches and shall be key 
operated or behind a locked cover. The key shall be 
Group 1 Security (see 8.1). 

(b) power operation of the hoistway door and/or car 
door or gate is inoperative. 

2.12.7.3.4 Automatic operation by a car-leveling 
device is inoperative. 

2.12.7.3.5 Both top-of-car inspection operation 
(see 2.26.1.4.2) and in-car inspection operation (see 
2.26.1.4.3) are not in effect. 

2.12.7.3.6 The movement of the car initiated and 
maintained by the access switch at the lowest landing, 
if this landing is the normal means of access to the pit, 
shall be limited in the up direction to the point where 
the bottom of the platform guard is even with hoistway 
entrance header. 

2.12.7.3.7 The movement of the car initiated and 
maintained by the upper access switch shall be limited 
in the down direction to a travel not greater than the 
height of the car crosshead above the car platform, and 
limited in the up direction to the distance the platform 
guard extends below the car platform. 

2.12.7.3.8 The access switch shall only control the 
movement of the car within the zone specified in 
2.12.7.3.6 or 2.12.7.3.7. Control circuits related to, or oper- 
ated by, the hoistway access switches shall comply with 
2.26.9.3(c), (d), and (e) and 2.26.9.4. 

SECTION 2.13 

POWER OPERATION OF HOISTWAY DOORS AND 

CAR DOORS 

2.13.1 Types of Doors and Gates Permitted 

Where both a hoistway door and a car door or gate 
are opened and /or closed by power, the hoistway door 
and the car door or gate shall both be either of the 
horizontally sliding type or vertically sliding type. 

2.13.2 Power Opening 

2.13.2.1 Power Opening of Car Doors or Gates. Power 
opening of a car door or gate shall be subject to the 
requirements of 2.13.2.1.1 and 2.13.2.1.2. 

2.13.2.1.1 Power opening shall occur only at the 
landing where the car is stopping, or is leveling, or at 
rest, and shall start only when the car is within the 
landing zone where an automatic car-leveling device is 



provided, except that on elevators with static control, 
power shall not be applied to open car doors until the 
car is within 300 mm (12 in.) of the landing. 

2.13.2.1.2 Collapsible car gates shall not be power 
opened to a distance exceeding one-third of the clear 
gate opening, and in no case more than 250 mm (10 in.). 

2.13.2.2 Power Opening of Hoistway Doors. Power 
opening of a hoistway door shall conform to 2.13.2.2.1 
through 2.13.2.2.3. 

2.13.2.2.1 Power opening shall occur only at the 
landing where the car is stopping, leveling, or at rest, 
and shall start only when the car is within the landing 
zone where an automatic car leveling device is provided, 
except that on elevators with static control, opening shall 
not start until the car is within 300 mm (12 in.) of the 
landing. 

2.13.2.2.2 Power opening shall be permitted to be 
initiated automatically through control circuits, pro- 
vided that the car is being automatically stopped or 
leveled, and that, when stopping under normal 
operating conditions, the car shall be at rest or substan- 
tially level with the landing before the hoistway door 
is fully opened. 

2.13.2.2.3 Sequence opening of vertically sliding 
hoistway doors and adjacent car doors or gates shall 
comply with 2.13.6. 

2.13.3 Power Closing 

2.13.3.1 Power Closing or Automatic Self-Closing of 
Car Doors or Gates Where Used With Manually Operated 
or Self-Closing Hoistway Doors 

2.13.3.1.1 Where a car door or gate of an auto- 
matic or continuous-pressure operation passenger ele- 
vator is closed by power, or is of the automatically 
released self-closing type, and faces a manually operated 
or self-closing hoistway door, the closing of the car door 
or gate shall not be initiated unless the hoistway door 
is in the closed position, and the closing mechanism 
shall be so designed that the force necessary to prevent 
closing of a horizontally sliding car door or gate from 
rest is not more than 135 N (30 lbf). 

2.13.3.1.2 Requirement 2.13.3.1.1 does not apply 
where a car door or gate is closed by power through 
continuous pressure of a door closing switch, or of the 
car operating device, and where the release of the closing 
switch or operating device will cause the car door or 
gate to stop or to stop and reopen. 

2.13.3.2 Power Closing of Hoistway Doors and Car 
Doors or Gates by Continuous-Pressure Means. Horizon- 
tally or vertically sliding hoistway doors with manually 
closed, or power-operated, or power-closed car doors 



33 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.13.3.2-2.13.4.2.1 



or gates shall be permitted to be closed by continuous- 
pressure means, subject to the requirements of 2.13.3.2.1 
through 2.13.3.2.5. 

2.13.3.2.1 The release of the closing means shall 
cause the hoistway door, and a power-operated or 
power-closed car door or gate, to stop or to stop and 
reopen. 

2.13.3.2.2 The operation of the closing means at 
any landing shall not close the hoistway door at any 
other landing, nor the car door or gate when the elevator 
car is at any other landing. 

2.13.3.2.3 Any closing means at a landing shall 
close only that hoistway door and the car door or gate 
at the side where such means is located. 

2.13.3.2.4 For elevators having more than one 
hoistway opening at any landing level, a separate closing 
means shall be provided in the car for each car door or 
gate and its adjacent hoistway door, except that a sepa- 
rate closing means need not be furnished for a horizon- 
tally sliding hoistway door and adjacent car door or gate 
that conform to 2.13.4. 

2.13.3.2.5 For sequence closing of vertically slid- 
ing hoistway doors and adjacent car doors or gates, see 
2.13.6. 

2.13.3.3 Power Closing of Horizontally Sliding 
Hoistway Doors and Horizontally Sliding Car Doors or 
Gates by Momentary Pressure or by Automatic Means. 

Power closing by momentary pressure or by automatic 
means shall be permitted only for automatic or continu- 
ous-pressure operation elevators. The closing of the 
doors shall be subject to the requirements of 2.13.3.3.1 
and 2.13.3.3.2. 

2.13.3.3.1 The closing of the doors shall conform 
to 2.13.4. 

2.13.3.3.2 A momentary pressure switch or button 
shall be provided in the car, the operation of which shall 
cause the doors to stop or to stop and reopen. The switch 
or button shall be identified as required by 2.26.12. 

2.13.3.4 Power Closing of Vertically Sliding Hoistway 
Doors and Vertically Sliding Car Doors or Gates by 
Momentary Pressure or by Automatic Means. Power clos- 
ing by momentary pressure or by automatic means shall 
be permitted only for automatic or continuous-pressure 
operation elevators. 

Vertically sliding hoistway doors used with vertically 
sliding power-operated car doors or gates closed by 
momentary pressure or automatic means, shall conform 
to the requirements of 2.13.3.4.1 through 2.13.3.4.5. 

2.13.3.4.1 A warning bell or other audible signal 
shall be provided on the car, which shall start to sound 
at least 5 s prior to the time the car door or gate starts 
to close and shall continue to sound until the hoistway 



door is substantially closed. When the doors are closed 
by a closing switch in the car, the 5 s time interval shall 
be permitted to be omitted. 

2.13.3.4.2 Sequence closing of the hoistway door 
and adjacent car door or gate shall be provided and 
shall conform to 2.13.6. Sequence closing is not required 
when a biparting vertically sliding hoistway door faces 
a biparting vertically sliding car door or gate. 

2.13.3.4.3 The car door or gate shall be equipped 
with a reopening device conforming to 2.13.5. 

2.1 3.3.4.4 A momentary pressure switch or button 
shall be provided in the car and at each landing, which, 
when operated, shall cause the car door or gate and the 
hoistway door at the landing to stop or to stop and 
reopen. 

2.13.3.4.5 The average closing speed shall not 
exceed 0.3 m/s (1 ft/s) for a vertically sliding counter- 
weighted hoistway door or for each panel of a biparting 
counterbalanced hoistway door or car gate, and shall 
not exceed 0.6 m/s (2 ft/s) for a vertically sliding coun- 
terweighted car door or gate. 

2.13.4 Closing Limitations for Power-Operated 
Horizontally Sliding Hoistway Doors and 
Horizontally Sliding Car Doors or Gates 

2.13.4.1 Where Required. Where a power-operated 
horizontally sliding hoistway door or car door /gate or 
both is closed by momentary pressure or by automatic 
means (see 2.13.3.3), or is closed simultaneously with 
another door or car door/gate or both from one continu- 
ous-pressure means (see 2.13.3.2.3 and 2.13.3.2.4), the 
closing mechanism shall be designed and installed to 
conform to 2.13.4.2 and the reopening device shall be 
designed and installed to conform to 2.13.5. 

2.13.4.2 Closing Mechanism 

2.13.4.2.1 Kinetic Energy 

(a) Where the hoistway door and the car door /gate 
are closed in such a manner that stopping either one 
manually will stop both, the kinetic energy of the closing 
door system shall be based upon the sum of the hoistway 
and the car door weights, as well as all parts rigidly 
connected thereto, including the rotational inertia effects 
of the door operator and the connecting transmission 
to the door panels. 

(b) Where a reopening device conforming to 2.13.5 
is used, the closing door system shall conform to the 
following requirements: 

(1) The kinetic energy computed for the actual clos- 
ing speed at any point in the Code zone distance denned 
by 2.13.4.2.2 shall not exceed 23 J (17 ft-lbf). 

(2) The kinetic energy computed for the average 
closing speed as determined in accordance with 
2.13.4.2.2 shall not exceed 10 J (7.37 ft-lbf). 



34 



2.13.4.2.1-2.13.6.2.2 



ASME A17.1S-2Q05 



(c) Where a reopening device is not used, or has been 
rendered inoperative (see 2.13.5), the closing door sys- 
tem shall conform to the following requirements: 

(1) The kinetic energy computed for the actual clos- 
ing speed at any point in the Code zone distance defined 
by 2.13.4.2.2 shall not exceed 8 J (6 ft-lbf). 

(2) The kinetic energy computed for the average 
closing speed within the Code zone distance (see 
2.13.4.2.2), or in any exposed opening width, including 
the last increment of door travel, shall not exceed 3.5 } 
(2.5 ft-lbf). 

2.13.4.2.2 Door Travel in the Code Zone Distance 

(a) For all side sliding doors using single or multiple 
speed panels, the Code zone distance shall be taken as 
the horizontal distance from a point 50 mm (2 in.) away 
from the open jamb to a point 50 mm (2 in.) away from 
the opposite jamb. 

(b) For all center-opening sliding doors using single 
or multiple speed panels, the Code zone distance shall 
be taken as the horizontal distance from a point 25 mm 
(1 in.) away from the open jamb to a point 25 mm (1 in.) 
from the center meeting point of the doors. 

(c) The average closing speed shall be determined by 
measuring the time required for the leading edge of the 
door to travel the Code zone distance. 

2.13.4.2.3 Door Force. The force necessary to pre- 
vent closing of the hoistway door (or the car door or 
gate if power operated) from rest shall not exceed 135 N 
(30 lbf) (see 2.13.3.1). This force shall be measured on 
the leading edge of the door with the door at any point 
between one third and two thirds of its travel. 

2.13.4.2.4 Data Plate. A data plate conforming to 
2.16.3.3 shall be attached to the power door operator or 
to the car crosshead and shall contain the following 
information: 

(a) minirnum door closing time in seconds for the 
doors to travel the Code zone distance as specified in 
2.13.4.2.2 corresponding to the kinetic energy limits 
specified in 2.13.4.2.1(b)(2) 

(b) minimum door closing time in seconds for the 
doors to travel the Code zone distance as specified in 
2.13.4.2.2 corresponding to the kinetic energy limits 
specified in 2.13.4.2.1(c)(2), if applicable [see 
2.27.3.1.6(e)] 

(c) where heavier hoistway doors are used at certain 
floors, the minimum door closing time in seconds corres- 
ponding to the kinetic energy limits specified in 
2.13.4.2.1(b)(2) and 2.13.4.2.1(c)(2), if applicable, for the 
corresponding floors shall be included on the data plate 

2.13.5 Reopening Device for Power-Operated Car 
Doors or Gates 

2.13.5.1 Where required by 2.13.3.4 or 2.13.4, a 
power-operated car door shall be provided with a 
reopening device that will function to stop and reopen 



a car door and the adjacent landing door sufficiently to 
permit passenger transfer in the event that the car door 
or gate is obstructed while closing. If the closing kinetic 
energy is reduced to 3.5 J (2.5 ft-lb) or less, the reopening 
device shall be permitted to be rendered inoperative. 
The reopening device used shall be effective for substan- 
tially the full vertical opening of the door (see 2.13.4.2). 

2.13.5.2 For center-opening doors, the reopening 
device shall be so designed and installed that the 
obstruction of either door panel when closing will cause 
the reopening device to function. 

2.13.5.3 For vertically sliding doors or gates, 
reopening devices shall respond to any obstruction 
within the width of the opening to a point 125 mm (5 in.) 
maximum from each side of the opening. 

2.13.5.4 Where Phase I Emergency Recall Operation 
by a fire alarm initiating device (see 2.27.3.2.3) is not 
provided, door reopening devices that can be affected 
by smoke or flame shall be rendered inoperative after 
the doors have been held open for 20 s. Door closing 
for power-operated doors shall conform to 2.13.5. 

2.13.6 Sequence Operation for Power-Operated 
Hoistway Doors With Car Doors or Gates 

2.13.6.1 Where Required 

2.13.6.1.1 Sequence opening and closing shall be 
provided between hoistway doors and car doors or gates 
on passenger elevators and freight elevators permitted 
to carry passengers (see 2.16.4) when the elevator is 
equipped with power-operated vertically sliding slide- 
up-to-open type car doors or gates and 

(a) power-operated vertically sliding biparting coun- 
terbalanced hoistway doors; or 

(b) power-operated vertically sliding counter- 
weighted hoistway doors that slide down to open. 

2.13.6.1.2 Sequence opening and/or closing shall 
be permitted for vertically sliding power-operated 
hoistway doors and car doors or gates that are closed 
by continuous pressure means. 

2.13.6.2 Operating Requirements. The sequence 
operation of a hoistway door and adjacent power-oper- 
ated vertically sliding car door or gate shall conform to 
2.13.6.2.1 and 2.13.6.2.2. 

2.13.6.2.1 In opening, the hoistway door shall be 
opened at least two-thirds of its travel before the car 
door or gate can start to open. 

2.13.6.2.2 In closing, the car door or gate shall be 
closed at least two-thirds of its travel before the hoistway 
door can start to close. 



35 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



SECTION 2.14-2.14.1.5.1 



SECTION 2.14 

CAR ENCLOSURES, CAR DOORS AND GATES, AND 

CAR ILLUMINATION 

2.14.1 Passenger and Freight Enclosures, General 

2.14.1.1 Enclosure Required. Elevators shall be 
equipped with a car enclosure. 

2.14.1.2 Securing of Enclosures 

2.14.1.2.1 The enclosure shall be securely fastened 
to the car platform and so supported that it cannot loosen 
or become displaced in ordinary service, on the applica- 
tion of the car safety, on buffer engagement, or the appli- 
cation of the emergency brake (see 2.19). 

2.14.1.2.2 The car enclosure shall be so con- 
structed that removable portions cannot be dismantled 
from within the car. 

2.14.1.2.3 Enclosure linings, decorative panels, 
light fixtures, suspended ceilings, and other apparatus 
or equipment attached within the car enclosure shall be 
securely fastened and so supported that they will not 
loosen or become displaced in ordinary service, on car 
safety application, or on buffer engagement. 

2.14.1.2.4 Panels attached to the car enclosure for 
decorative or other purposes shall either 

(a) not be unfastened from inside the car by the use 
of common tools; or 

(b) be permitted to be removed from inside the car 
when perforations, exceeding that which would reject 
a ball 13 mm (0.5 in.) in diameter, in the enclosure used 
for panel hanging or support have permanent means to 
prevent straight through passage beyond the running 
clearance. 

2.14.1.3 Strength and Deflection of Enclosure Walls. 

The enclosure walls shall be designed and installed to 
withstand a force of 330 N (75 lbf ) applied horizontally 
at any point on the walls of the enclosure without perma- 
nent deformation and so that the deflection will not 
reduce the running clearance below the minimum speci- 
fied in 2.5.1, nor cause the deflection to exceed 25 mm 
(1 in.). 

2.14.1.4 Number of Compartments in Passenger and 
Freight Elevator Cars. Cars shall not have more than two 
compartments. Where elevators have two compart- 
ments, one shall be located above the other, and the 
elevator shall conform to 2.14.1.4.1 through 2.14.1.4.6. 

2.14.1.4.1 The elevator shall be used exclusively 
for passengers or exclusively for freight at any one time. 
If freight is to be carried in only one compartment, means 
shall be provided to lock the other compartment out of 
service. 

2.14.1.4.2 Each compartment shall conform to the 
requirements of this Section, except that a trap door in 



the floor of the upper compartment shall provide access 
to the top emergency exit for the lower compartment. 

2.1 4.1 .4.3 Where either or both compartments are 
intended for passenger service, the minimum rated load 
for each compartment shall conform to 2.16.1. 

Where one compartment is intended for freight use, 
its minimum rated load shall conform to 2.16.1 or shall 
be based on the freight loads to be handled, if greater 
than the minimum rated load required by 2.16.1. 

Where both compartments are used exclusively for 
freight, the rninimum rated load of each compartment 
shall conform to 2.16.2. 

The rated load of the elevator shall be the sum of the 
rated loads of the individual compartments. 

2.14.1.4.4 An emergency stop switch, where 
required by 2.26.2.5, shall be provided in each compart- 
ment, and these emergency stop switches shall be so 
connected that the car cannot run unless both are in the 
run position. 

2.14.1.4.5 An in-car stop switch, where required 
by 2.26.2.21, shall be provided in each compartment, 
and these switches shall be so connected that the car 
cannot run unless both are in the run position. 

2.14.1.4.6 All hoistway doors shall be closed and 
locked and the car doors for each compartment closed 
before the car can be operated. 

2.14.1.5 Top Emergency Exits. An emergency exit 
with a cover shall be provided in the top of all elevator 
cars, except cars in partially enclosed hoistways (see 
2.14.1.5.2). 

2.14.1.5.1 Top emergency exits shall conform to 
the following requirements: 

(a) The top emergency exit opening shall have an area 
of not less than 0.26 m 2 (400 in. 2 ) and shall measure not 
less than 400 mm (16 in.) on any side. 

(b) The top emergency exit and suspended ceiling 
opening, if any, shall be so located as to provide a clear 
passageway, unobstructed by fixed equipment located 
in or on top of the car. Equipment is permitted directly 
above the exit opening, provided that 

(1) it is not less than 1 070 mm (42 in.) above the 
top of the car; or 

(2) the exit is located to allow unobstructed passage 
of a parallelpiped volume measuring 300 mm x 500 mm 
by 1 500 mm (12 in. x 20 in. x 59 in.) at an angle not 
less than 60 deg from the horizontal (see Nonmandatory 
Appendix C). 

(c) The top emergency exit cover shall open outward. 
It shall be hinged or securely attached with a chain when 
in both the open and closed positions. If a chain is used, 
it shall be not more than 300 mm (12 in.) in length and 
have a factor of safety of not less than 5. The exit cover 
shall only be openable from the top of the car, where it 
shall be openable without the use of special tools. The 



36 



2.14.1.5.1-2.14.1.8.2 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



exit cover of the lower compartment of a multideck 
elevator shall be openable from both compartments. On 
elevators with two compartments, if the emergency exit 
of the lower compartment does not open directly into 
the upper compartment, a guarded passageway shall be 
provided between the lower compartment roof and the 
upper compartment floor. 

(d) The movable portion (exit panel) of the suspended 
ceiling that is below the top exit opening shall be 
restrained from falling. It shall be permitted to be hinged 
upward or downward, provided that the exit permits a 
clear opening with the top exit opening. 

(1) A minimum clear headroom of 2 030 mm (80 in.) 
above the car floor shall be maintained when down- 
ward-swinging suspended ceiling exit panels are used. 

(2) Upward-opening suspended ceiling exit panels 
shall be restrained from closing when in use and shall 
not diminish the clear opening area of the corresponding 
top exit opening. 

(3) The movable portion and the fixed portion of 
a suspended ceiling shall not contain lamps that could 
be shattered by the rescue operation using the top emer- 
gency exit. The movable portion of the suspended ceiling 
shall be permitted to contain light fixtures connected to 
the stationary portion of the suspended ceiling wiring 
by means of a plug and socket or by flexible armored 
wiring. Flexible wiring shall not be used to support or 
restrain the exit opening in the suspended ceiling in the 
open position. 

(e) Where elevators installed in enclosed hoistways 
are provided with special car top treatments such as 
domed or shrouded canopies, the exit shall be made 
accessible, including the car top refuge space as specified 
in 2.4.12. 

(f) Immediately adjacent to the top emergency exit 
there shall be a space available for standing when the 
emergency exit cover is open. This space shall be permit- 
ted to include a portion of the refuge area (see 2.4.12). 
All exit covers shall be provided with a car top emer- 
gency exit electrical device (see 2.26.2.18) that will pre- 
vent operation of the elevator car if the exit cover is 
open more than 50 mm (2 in.), and the device shall be 
so designed that it 

(1) is positively opened 

(2) cannot be closed accidentally when the cover is 
removed 

(3) must be manually reset from the top of the car 
and only after the cover is within 50 mm (2 in.) of the 
fully closed position 

(4) shall be protected against mechanical damage 

2.14.1.5.2 On elevators in partially enclosed 
hoistways, means shall be provided to facilitate emer- 
gency evacuation of passengers. Such means shall not 
require a top emergency exit. A top emergency exit shall 
be permitted. 



2.14.1.6 Car Enclosure Tops. Tops of car enclosures 
shall be so designed and installed as to be capable of 
sustaining a load of 135 kg (300 lb) on any area 600 mm 
x 600 mm (24 in. x 24 in.), or 45 kg (100 lb) applied to any 
point, without permanent deformation. The resulting 
deflection under these loads shall be limited to prevent 
damage to any equipment, devices, or lighting assem- 
blies fastened to or adjacent to the car enclosure top. 

2.14.1.7 Railing and Equipment on Top of Cars 

2.14.1.7.1 A standard railing conforming to 2.10.2 
shall be provided on the outside perimeter of the car 
top on all sides where the perpendicular distance 
between the edges of the car top and the adjacent 
hoistway enclosure exceeds 300 mm (12 in.) horizontal 
clearance. The forces specified in 2.10.2.4 shall not deflect 
the railing beyond the perimeter of the car top. 

The top of car enclosure, or other surface specified 
by the elevator installer, shall be the working surface 
referred to in 2.10.2. 

2.14.1.7.2 A working platform or equipment that 
is not required for the operation of the elevator or its 
appliances, except where specifically provided herein, 
shall not be located above the top of an elevator car. 

2.14.1.73 Devices that detect unauthorized access 
to the top of the car shall be permitted. These devices 
shall only be permitted to initiate an alarm. Audible 
alarms shall not exceed 90 dBA measured 1 m from the 
source. 

2.14.1.8 Glass an Elevator Cars 

2.14.1.8.1 Where enclosures include panels of 
glass, or transparent or translucent plastic, the panels 
shall 

(a) be constructed of laminated glass that complies 
with the requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201, Sections 
1201.1 and 1201.2; or be constructed of laminated glass, 
safety glass, or safety plastic that comply with CAN/ 
CGSB-12.1, CAN/CGSB-12.11, or CAN/CGSB-12.12; 
whichever is applicable (see Part 9) 

(b) be provided with a handrail or framing designed 
to guard the opening should the panel become detached, 
where wall panels are wider than 300 mm (12 in.) 

(c) be mounted in the structure so that the assembly 
shall withstand the required elevator tests without dam- 
age (see 2.14.1.2) 

2.14.1.8.2 Glass used for lining walls or ceilings 
shall conform to 2.14.1.8.1(a) and (c), except that tem- 
pered glass shall be permitted, provided that 

(a) it conforms to ANSI Z97.1, 16 CFR Part 1201, Sec- 
tions 1201.1 and 1201.2, or CAN/CGSB-12.1; whichever 
is applicable (see Part 9) 

(b) the glass is not subjected to further treatment such 
as sandblasting, etching, heat treatment, painting, etc., 
that could alter the original properties of the glass 



37 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.14.1.8.2-2.14.2.2 



(c) the glass is bonded to a nonpolymeric coating, 
sheeting, or film backing having a physical integrity to 
hold the fragments when the glass breaks 

(d) the glass is tested and conforms to the acceptance 
criteria for laminated glass as specified in ANSI Z97.1, 
or 16 CFR Part 1201, Section 1201.4, or CAN/CGSB- 
12.11, whichever is applicable (see Part 9) 

2.14.1.8.3 In jurisdictions enforcing the NBCC, 
type 3C film reinforced silvered mirror glass that con- 
forms to CAN/CGSB-12.5 shall be permitted for lining 
walls or ceilings. 

2.14.1.8.4 Markings as specified in the applicable 
glazing standard shall be on each separate piece, and 
shall remain visible after installation. 

2.14.1.9 Equipment Inside Cars 

2.14.1.9.1 Apparatus or equipment not used in 
connection with the function or use of the elevator shall 
not be installed inside of any elevator car, except as 
follows: 

(a) Support rails (handrails) are permitted. 

(b) Fastening devices for padded protective linings 
are permitted. 

(c) Lift hooks, conveyor tracks, and support beams 
for freight handling, mounted in the ceiling of passenger 
elevator, shall clear the car floor to a height of 2 450 mm 
(96 in.) (see 2.16.9). 

(d) Picture frames, graphic display boards, plaques, 
and other similar visual displays shall be mounted to 
withstand the required elevator tests without damage. 
All edges shall be beveled or rounded. The material 
shall conform to 2.14.1.2 and 2.14.2.1. When attached to 
the car wall less than 2 130 mm (84 in.) above the floor, 
projections from the car wall, excluding support rails, 
shall not be greater than 38 mm (1.5 in.). 

(e) Conveyor tracks shall be permitted in freight ele- 
vators cars. 

(/) Heating equipment, ventilating fans, and air-con- 
ditioning equipment, if used, shall be securely fastened 
in place and located above the car ceiling or outside the 
enclosure. 

2.14.1.9.2 Passenger car floors shall have no pro- 
jections or depressions greater than 6 mm (0.25 in.). 

2.14.1.10 Side Emergency Exits. Side emergency exits 
are prohibited. 

2.14.2 Passenger-Car Enclosures 

2.14.2.1 Material for Car Enclosures, Enclosure Lin- 
ings, and Floor Coverings. All materials exposed to the 
car interior and the hoistway shall be metal, glass, or 
shall conform to 2.14.2.1.1 through 2.14.2.1.6. 

2.14.2.1.1 Materials in their end-use configura- 
tion, other than those covered by 2.14.2.1.2 through 
2.14.2.1.6 shall conform to the following requirements, 



based on the tests conducted in accordance with the 
requirements of ASTM E 84, UL 723, NFPA 252 or CAN / 
ULC-S102.2, whichever is applicable: 

(a) flame spread rating of to 75 

(b) smoke development of to 450 

2.14.2.1.2 In jursidictions enforcing the NBCC 
materials in their end-use configuration, where the ele- 
vator is designed as a firefighters' elevator, shall have 

(a) a flame spread rating for walls and ceiling of to 
25 with smoke development of to 100 based on the 
test conducted in accordance with the requirements of 
CAN/ULC-S102 

(b) a flame spread rating for floor surfaces of to 300 
with smoke development of to 300, based on the test 
conducted in accordance with the requirements of 
CAN/ULC-S102.2 

2.14.2.1.3 Napped, tufted, woven, looped, and 
similar materials in their end-use configuration on car 
enclosure walls shall conform to 8.3.7 or the NBCC and 
National Fire Code of Canada, whichever is applicable. 
The enclosure walls to which this material is attached 
shall conform to 2.14.2.1.1. 

2.14.2.1.4 Padded protective linings, for tempo- 
rary use in passenger cars during the handling of freight, 
shall be of materials conforming to either 2.14.2.1.1 or 
2.14.2.1.3, whichever is applicable. The protective lining 
shall clear the floor by not less than 100 mm (4 in.). 

2.14.2.1.5 Floor covering, underlayment, and its 
adhesive shall have a critical radiant flux of not less than 
0.45 W/cm 2 , as measured by ASTM E 648 or conform 
to the requirements of the NBCC and ULC standard 
CAN/ULC-S102.2, whichever is applicable. 

2.14.2.1.6 Handrails, operating devices, ventilat- 
ing devices, signal fixtures, audio and visual communi- 
cation devices, and their housings are not required to 
conform to 2.14.2.1.1 through 2.14.2.1.4. 

2.14.2.2 Openings Prohibited. Openings or hinged or 
removable panels in an enclosure are prohibited, other 
than as required for the following: 

(a) signal, operating, and communication equipment 

(b) entrances 

(c) vision panels 

(d) top emergency exit 

(e) ventilation 

(f) access panels for cleaning of glass on observation 
elevators (see 2.14.2.6) 

(g) equipment access panels for maintenance and 
inspection of equipment shall conform to the following 
requirements (see also 2.7.5.1.4): 

(1) be of hinged type. 

(2) open only into the car. 

(3) be provided with a lock so arranged that the 
door shall be openable from inside the car only by a 



38 



2.14.2.2-2.14.3.1 



ASMEA17.1S-2005 



specially shaped removable key. Locks shall be so 
designed that they cannot be opened from the inside by 
the use of ordinary tools or instruments. Keys shall be 
Group 1 Security (see 8.1). 

(4) be provided with electric contacts that conform 
to 2.14.4.2.3(b) through (e) and 2.26.2.35, and are located 
so as to be inaccessible from the inside of the car. When 
opened, the contact shall cause power to be removed 
from the driving-machine motor and brake. 

(5) be of the same material and construction as 
required for the enclosure. 



2.24.2.3.1 Natural ventilation openings conform- 
ing to the following shall be provided in car enclosures: 

(a) Openings exposed to the inside of the car shall not 
be located in the portion of the enclosure walls extending 
from a point 300 mm (12 in.) above the floor to a point 
1 825 mm (72 in.) above the floor. 

(b) Openings less than 300 mm (12 in.) above the floor 
shall reject a ball 25 mm (1 in.) in diameter and be 
guarded to prevent straight-through passage. 

(c) Openings above the 1 825 mm (72 in.) level shall 
reject a ball 50 mm (2 in.) in diameter and be guarded 
to prevent straight-through passage. 

(d) Openings in the car ceiling shall be protected and 
shall conform to 2.14.1.6. 

(e) The total area of natural ventilation openings shall 
be not less than 3.5% of the inside car floor area divided 
equally between the bottom and top of the car enclosure. 

(f) The total unrestricted opening in or around the 
car doors or gates shall be permitted to be included as 
part of the total natural ventilation required. 

(g) The unrestricted opening provided by forced ven- 
tilation systems shall be permitted to be part of the 
natural ventilation area on the part of the car in which 
it is located. 

2.14.2.3.2 Ventilating fans or blowers, if used, 
shall be located above the car ceiling or outside the 
enclosure and shall be securely fastened in place. 

2.14.23.3 Forced ventilation conforming to the 
following shall be provided on observation elevators 
with glass walls exposed to direct sunlight: 

(a) There shall be a minimum air handling capacity 
to provide one air change per minute based on net inside 
car volume. 

(b) An auxiliary power source capable of providing 
the minimum air handling capacity for a continuous 
period of at least 1 h shall be provided on each eleva- 
tor car. 

NOTE (2.14.2.3.3): Special consideration should be given to eleva- 
tors such as observation and parking garage elevators, when they 
are exposed to the elements. In extreme cases, emergency power 
may be required for this purpose. 



2.14.2.4 Headroom in Elevator Cars. A minimum clear 
headroom of 2 025 mm (80 in.) above the car floor shall 
be provided. 

2.14.2.5 Vision Parcels. Vision panels are not 
required, but where used, shall 

(a) be of a total area of not more than 0.1 m 2 (155 in. 2 ) 
and contain no single glass panel having a width 
exceeding 150 mm (6 in.). 

(b) be provided with wire-glass panels or laminated- 
glass panels conforming to 16 CFR Part 1201 or CAN/ 
CGSB-12.11, whichever is applicable (see Part 9). Mark- 
ings as specified in the applicable standard shall be on 
each separate piece of laminated glass, and shall remain 
visible after installation. 

(c) be located in the car door or in the front return 
panel of the car enclosure. 

(d) have the inside face of a car door vision panel, 
grille, or cover located substantially flush with the inside 
surface of the car door. 

(e) have fasteners that are located on the hoistway 
side. It shall not be possible to remove the fasteners with 
common tools. 

2.14.2.6 Access Panels. Nonremovable sliding or 
swing panels shall be permitted for access to the car or 
hoistway transparent enclosures for cleaning purposes. 
Such panels or doors shall 

(a) if hinged, open only into the car 

(b) be provided with cylinder-type locks, having not 
less than a hve-pin or a five-disc combination, or a lock 
that provides equivalent security, arranged so that they 
can be unlocked with a key from the car side, and the 
key shall be Group 2 Security (see 8.1) 

(c) be openable by hand from the hoistway side 

(d) be self-locking 

(e) be provided with a device arranged so that the 
panel must be in the closed and locked position (see 
2.26.2.31) before the elevator can operate 

(/) have a bottom edge a minimum of 1 070 mm 
(42 in.) from the floor in cases where the adjacent 
hoistway wall is more than 140 mm (5.5 in.) from the 
car enclosure or where there is no adjacent hoistway wall 

2.14.3 Freight-Car Enclosure 

2.14.3.1 Enclosure Material. Enclosures shall be of 
metal without perforations to a height of not less than 
1 825 mm (72 in.) above the floor. 

Above the 1 825 mm (72 in.) level, the walls and top 
of the enclosure shall be metal with or without perfora- 
tions, except that portion of the enclosure wall in front 
of and extending 150 mm (6 in.) on each side of the 
counterweight, which shall be without perforations. 

Perforated portions of enclosures shall reject a ball 
25 mm (1 in.) in diameter. 

Freight elevators that are permitted to carry passen- 
gers (see 2.16.4) shall conform to 2.14.2.2. 



39 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.14.3.2-2.14A5.2 



2.14.3.2 Openings in Car Tops. Hinged or removable 
panels shall not be provided in car tops, except those 
required for emergency exit, and for equipment access 
(see 2.7.5.1.4). 

2.14.3.3 Ventilation. If ventilating grilles or louvers 
are provided in the enclosure below the 1 825 mm (72 in.) 
level, they shall be located not more than 300 mm (12 in.) 
above the floor and shall reject a ball 50 mm (2 in.) in 
diameter. 

2.14.4 Passenger and Freight Car Doors and Gates, 
General Requirements 

2.14.4.1 Where Required. A door shall be provided 
at each entrance to a passenger car and a door or gate 
shall be provided at each entrance to a freight car. 

2.14.4.2 Door and Gate Electric Contacts and Door 
Interlocks 

2.14.4.2.1 Each car door or gate shall be provided 
with a door or gate electric contact conforming to 
2.26.2.15, 2.14.4.2.3, and 2.14.4.2.5, or a car-door interlock 
conforming to 2.26.2.28, 2.14.4.2.4, and 2.14.4.2.5. 



for 



2.14.4.2.2 A car door interlock shall be required 



(a) car doors of elevators where the clearance between 
the loading side of the car platform and hoistway enclo- 
sure exceeds the maximum specified in 2.5.1.5 

(b) car doors of elevators that face an unenclosed por- 
tion of the hoistway during the travel of the car 

2.14.4.2.3 Car door and gate electric contacts shall 

(a) prevent operation of the driving machine when 
the car door or gate is not in the closed position, except 
under one of the following conditions: 

(1) when a hoistway access switch is operated (see 
2.12.7) 

(2) when a car-leveling or truck-zoning device is 
operated (see 2.26.1.6) 

(3) when a bypass switch is activated (see 2.26.1.5) 

(b) be positively opened by a lever or other device 
attached to and operated by the door or gate 

(c) be maintained in the open position by the action 
of gravity or by a restrained compression spring, or by 
both, or by positive mechanical means 

(d) be so designed or located that they shall not be 
accessible from within the car 

(e) not utilize mercury tube switches 

2.14.4.2.4 Car door interlocks shall 

(a) prevent operation of the driving machine when 
the car door is not in the closed and locked position, 
except 

(1) when the car is within the unlocking zone for 
that entrance 

(2) under the conditions specified in 2.14.4.2.3(a) 



(b) prevent opening of the car door from within the 
car, except when the car is in the unlocking zone for 
that entrance 

(c) hold the car door in the locked position by means 
of gravity or by a restrained compression spring, or by 
both, or by means of a positive linkage 

(d) be so located that they are not accessible from 
within the car when the car doors are closed 

(e) be designed in accordance with 2.12.2.4 

2.14.4.2.5 Each type and make of car door electric 
contact, car gate electric contact, and car door inter- 
lock shall 

(a) be type tested in conformance with 2.12.4.1 

(b) be listed/certified in conformance with 2.12.4.2 

(c) be marked in conformance with 2.12.4.3 

2.14.4.3 Type and Material for Doors. Doors shall be 
of the horizontally or vertically sliding type and of mate- 
rial conforming to 2.14.2.1. 

2.14.4.4 Type of Gates. Gates, where permitted, shall 
be of the horizontally sliding or vertically sliding type, 
conforming to 2.14.4.7, 2.14.5, and 2.14.6. 

2.14.4.5 Location 

2.14.4.5.1 Doors or gates for automatic or continu- 
ous-pressure operation elevators, except freight eleva- 
tors equipped with horizontally swinging doors and 
not accessible to the general public, located in factories, 
warehouses, garages, and similar buildings, shall be so 
located that the distance from the face of the car door 
or gate to the face of the hoistway door shall be not 
more than the following: 

(a) where a swinging-type hoistway door and a car 
gate are used, 100 mm (4 in.) 

(b) where a swinging-type hoistway door and a car 
door are used, 140 mm (5.5 in.) 

(c) where a sliding-type hoistway door and a car door 
or gate are used, 140 mm (5.5 in.) 

(d) on freight elevators that are equipped with hori- 
zontally swinging doors and that are not accessible to 
the general public (i.e., located in factories, warehouses, 
garages, and similar buildings), the distance specified 
in 2.14.4.5.1(a), (b), and (c) shall be not more than 165 mm 
(6.5 in.) 

2.14.4.5.2 The distances specified shall be mea- 
sured as follows: 

(a) where a multisection car door and multisection 
hoistway door are used, or where one of these doors is 
multisection and the other is single section, between the 
sections of the car door and the hoistway door nearest 
to each other 

(b) where a multisection car door and a swinging- 
type hoistway door are used, between the hoistway door 
and the section of the car door farthest from it 



40 



2.14.4.5.2-2.14.5.6.1 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



(c) where a car gate is used, between the car gate and 
that section of the hoistway door nearest to the car gate 

2.14.4.6 Strength of Doors, Gates, and Their Guides, 
Guide Shoes, Tracks, and Hangers. Doors and gates and 
their guides, guide shoes, tracks, and hangers shall be 
so designed, constructed, and installed that when the 
fully closed door or gate is subjected to a force of 335 N 
(75 lbf), applied on an area 300 mm (12 in.) square at 
right angles to and approximately at the center of the 
door or gate, it will not deflect beyond the line of the 
car sill. 

When subjected to a force of 1 100 N (250 lbf) similarly 
applied, doors and vertically sliding gates shall not 
break or be permanently deformed and shall not be 
displaced from their guides or tracks. 

Where multisection doors or gates are used, each 
panel shall withstand the forces specified. 

2.14.4.7 Vertically Sliding Doors and Gates. Vertically 
sliding doors or gates shall conform to 2.14.4.7.1 through 
2.14.4.7.5. 

2.14.4.7.1 They shall be of the balanced counter- 
weighted type or the biparting counterbalanced type. 

2.14.4.7.2 Gates shall be constructed of wood or 
metal, and shall be of a design that will reject a ball 
50 mm (2 in.) in diameter, except that if multisection 
vertical lift gates are used, the panel shall be designed 
to reject a ball 10 mm (0.375 in.) in diameter. 

2.14.4.7.3 Doors shall be constructed of material 
conforming to 2.14.2.1. 

2.14.4.7.4 Doors or gates shall guard the full 
width of the car entrance openings, and their height 
shall conform to 2.14.5.4 or 2.14.6.2.3. 

2.14.4.7.5 Balanced counterweighted doors or 
gates shall be either single or multiple section, and shall 
slide either up or down to open, conforming to 2.14.5.3 
and 2.14.6.2. 

2.14.4.8 Weights for Closing or Balancing Doors m 

Gates. Weights used to close or balance doors or gates 
shall be located outside the car enclosure and shall be 
guided or restrained to prevent them from coming out 
of their runway. 

The bottom of the guides or other restraining means 
shall be so constructed as to retain the weights if the 
weight suspension means breaks. 

Weights that extend beyond the hoistway side of the 
car door or gate guide rail shall be guarded to prevent 
accidental contact. 

2.14.4.9 Factor of Safety for Suspension Members. 

Suspension members of vertically sliding car doors or 
gates, and of weights used with car doors or gates, shall 
have a factor of safety of not less than 5. At least two 
independent suspension means shall be provided so that 



the failure of one suspension means shall not permit the 
car doors or gates to fall; or a safety device shall be 
provided to prevent the doors or gates from falling, if 
the suspension means fails. 

2.14.4.10 Power-Operated and Power-Opened or 
Power-Closed Doors or Gates. The operation of power- 
operated and power-opened or power-closed doors or 
gates shall conform to 2.13. 

2.14.4.11 Closed Position of Car Doors or Gates. Car 
doors or gates shall be considered to be in the closed 
position under the following conditions: 

(a) for horizontally sliding doors or gates, when the 
clear open space between the leading edge of the door 
or gate and the nearest face of the jamb does not exceed 
50 mm (2 in.) except where car doors are provided with 
a car door interlock(s), 10 mm (0.375 in.) 

(b) for vertically sliding counterweighted doors or 
gates, when the clear open space between the leading 
edge of the door or gate and the car platform sill does 
not exceed 50 mm (2 in.) 

(c) for horizontally sliding center-opening doors, or 
vertically sliding biparting counterbalanced doors, 
when the door panels are within 50 mm (2 in.) of contact 
with each other, except where horizontally sliding cen- 
ter-opening car doors are provided with a car door inter- 
lock^), 10 mm (0.375 in.) 

2.14.5 Passenger Car Doors 

2.14.5.1 Number of Entrances Permitted. There shall 
be not more than two entrances to the car, except in 
existing buildings where structural conditions make 
additional entrances necessary. 

2.14.5.2 Type Required. Horizontally or vertically 
sliding doors subject to the restrictions of 2.14.5.3 shall 
be provided at each car entrance. 

2.14.5.3 Vertically Sliding Doors. Vertically sliding 
doors shall be 

(a) of the balanced counterweighted type that slide 
in the up direction to open 

(b) power operated where facing a power-operated 
vertically sliding counterbalanced or a vertically sliding- 
down-to-open hoistway door 

2.14.5.4 Dimensions of Doors. Doors, when in the 
fully closed position, shall protect the full width and 
height of the car entrance opening. 

2.14.5.5 Openings in Doors. There shall be no open- 
ings in doors, except where vision panels are used. 

2.14.5.6 Door Panels 

2.14.5.6.1 Door panels shall have a flush surface 
on the side exposed to the car interior. The panels shall 
have no area or molding depressed or raised more than 
3 mm (0.125 in.) and areas raised or depressed shall be 
beveled at not more than 30 deg to the panel surface. 



41 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.14.5.6.2-2.14.6.3.2 



2.14.5.6.2 Panels shall overlap the top and sides 
of the car entrance opening by not less than 13 mm 
(0.5 in.) when in the closed position. 

2.14.5.6.3 The vertical clearance between a panel 
and the sill, or in the case of a vertically sliding door 
the vertical clearance between the leading edge and the 
sill, shall not exceed 10 mm (0.375 in.) when in the fully 
closed position. 

2.14.5.6.4 The horizontal clearance shall not 
exceed 13 mm (0.5 in.) for horizontally sliding panels 
and 25 mm (1 in.) for vertically sliding panels between 

(a) the car side of a panel and the related car 
entrance jamb 

(b) related panels of multispeed entrances 

(c) the car side of the panel and the related car 
head jamb 

2.14.5.6.5 The leading edges of doors shall be free 
of sharp projections. 

2.14.5.6.6 The meeting panel edges of center- 
opening entrances shall be protected with not less than 
one resilient male member extending the full height 
of the panel. The meeting edges shall be permitted to 
interlock by not more than 10 mm (0.375 in.). When in 
the closed position, the distance between the metal parts 
of the meeting panels shall not exceed 13 mm (0.5 in.). 

2.14.5.6.7 The clearance between the leading edge 
of the trailing panel of multiple-speed panels and the 
jamb shall not exceed 

(a) 13 mm (0.5 in.) for horizontal slide 

(b) 25 mm (1 in.) for vertical slide 

2.14.5.7 Manual Opening of Car Doors. Car doors 
shall be so arranged that when the car is stopped within 
the unlocking zone (see 2.12.5.3) and power to the door 
operator is cut off, they and the mechanically related 
hoistway door, if any, shall be movable by hand from 
inside the car. The force required at the edge of sliding 
doors to move them shall not exceed 330 N (75 lbf). 

2.14.5.8 Glass in Car Doors 

2.14.5.8.1 Vision panels, where provided, shall 
conform to 2.14.2.5. 

2.14.5.8.2 Glass doors, where provided, shall con- 
form to the following requirements: 

(a) The glass shall be laminated glass conforming to 
the requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201, or be laminated 
glass, safety glass, or safety plastic conforming to the 
requirements of CAN/CGSB-12.1, whichever is applica- 
ble (see Part 9). Markings as specified shall be on each 
separate piece, and shall remain visible after installation. 

(b) The glass shall be not less than 60% of the total 
visible door panel surface area as seen from the car side 
of the doors. Door lap shall not be used in calculating 
glass size. 



(c) In power-operated doors, the glass panel shall be 
substantially flush with the surface of the car side of 
the door. 

(d) The glass shall conform to the applicable strength 
requirements of 2.14.4.6. 

(e) The glass shall be so mounted that it, and its 
mounting structure, will withstand the required elevator 
tests without becoming damaged or dislodged. 

(/) A nonglass edge shall be provided on the leading 
edge of the door panel. 

2.14.6 Freight Elevator Car Doors and Gates 

2.14.6.1 Type of Gates 

2.14.6.1.1 For elevators designed for Class A load- 
ing (see 2. 16.2.2), car gates shall be either of the vertically 
sliding type (see 2.14.6.2) or the horizontally sliding col- 
lapsible type (see 2.14.6.3). 

2.14.6.1.2 For elevators designed for Class B or 
Class C loading (see 2.16.2.2), car gates shall be of the 
vertically sliding type (see 2.14.6.2). 

2.14.6.2 Vertically Sliding Doors and Gates 

2.14.6.2.1 On elevators used exclusively for 
freight, car doors and gates shall be either of the balanced 
counterweighted type that slide up or down to open, 
or of the biparting counterbalanced type. They shall be 
manually operated or power operated. 

2.14.6.2.2 Where used on freight elevators permit- 
ted to carry passengers (see 2.16.4), car doors shall con- 
form to 2.14.5. 

2.14.6.2.3 Car doors and gates shall protect the 
full width of the car entrance opening, and their height 
shall be determined as follows: 

(a) car doors and gates shall extend from a point not 
more than 25 mm (1 in.) above the car floor to a point 
not less than 1 825 mm (72 in.) above the car floor 

(b) where a vertically sliding car gate with a door 
reopening device is provided, the 25 mm (1 in.) maxi- 
mum dimension specified shall be measured from the 
car floor to the bottom of the leading member 

2.14.6.2.4 The horizontal clearance between the 
car side of a panel and the related car entrance jamb or 
between related panels of multispeed doors or gates 
shall not exceed 25 mm (1 in.). 

2.14.6.3 Collapsible-Type Gates 

2.14.6.3.1 Collapsible-type gates shall protect the 
full width of the car entrance opening, and they shall 
extend from the car floor to a height of not less than 
1 825 mm (72 in.) when fully closed. 

2.14.6.3.2 When in the fully closed (extended) 
position, the opening between vertical members shall 
not be more than 115 mm (4.5 in.). 



42 



2.14.6.3.3-2.14:7.4 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.14.6.3.3 Every vertical member shall be 
restricted from moving perpendicular to the direction 
of travel more than 13 mm (0.5 in.). 

2.14.63.4 They shall not be power opened, except 
as permitted by 2.13.2.1.2. 

2.14.6.3.5 When in the fully opened (collapsed) 
position, collapsible gates shall be permitted to be 
arranged to swing inward. 

2.14.6.3.6 Handles of manually operated collaps- 
ible gates nearest the car operating device on elevators 
operated from the car only shall be so located that the 
nearest handle is not more than 1 225 mm (48 in.) from 
the car operating device when the gate is closed 
(extended position), and not more than 1 225 mm (48 in.) 
above the car floor. Gate handles shall be provided with 
finger guards. 

2.14.7 illumination of Cars and Lighting Fixtures 

2.14.7.1 Illumination and Outlets Required. Cars shall 
be provided with an electric light or lights conforming 
to 2.14.7.1.1 through 2.14.7.1.4. 

2.14.7.1.1 Not less than two lamps shall be pro- 
vided. 

2.14.7.1.2 The rninimum illumination at the car 
threshold, with the door closed, shall be not less than 

(a) 50 lx (5 fc) for passenger elevators 

(b) 25 lx (2.5 fc) for freight elevators 

2.14.7.1.3 Each elevator shall be provided with 
auxiliary lighting having its power source located on 
the car. It shall conform to the following: 

(a) The intensity of auxiliary lighting illumination 
shall be not less than 2 lx (0.2 fc), measured approxi- 
mately 1 225 mm (48 in.) above the car floor and 300 mm 
(12 in.) centered horizontally in front of a car operating 
panel containing any of the following: 

(1) car operating device(s) 

(2) door open button 

(3) rear or side door open button 

(4) door close button 

(5) rear or side door close button 

(6) "HELP" button and operating instructions, or 

(7) "ALARM" switch 

(b) IUumination is not required in front of additional 
car operating panels where the devices listed in 
2.14.7.1.3(a) are duplicated. 

(c) Auxiliary lights shall be automatically turned on 
in all elevators in service after normal car lighting 
power fails. 

(d) The power system shall be capable of maintaining 
the light intensity specified in 2.14.7.1.3(a) for a period 
of at least 4 h. 

(e) Not less than two lamps of approximately equal 
wattage shall be used. 



(/) Battery-operated units, where provided, shall 

(1) comply with CSA C22.2 No. 141 (see Section 4) 

(2) have a 4 h rating minimum 

(3) be permanently connected to the car light 
branch circuit 

(4) have an output rating that includes the auxiliary 
lights and if connected, the emergency signaling device 
(see 2.27.1.1.3) 

2.14.7.1.4 Each elevator shall be provided with 
an electric light and convenience outlet fixture on the 
car top. 

2.14.7.2 Light Control Switches 

2.14.7.2.1 Light control switches for in-car light- 
ing shall be permitted. When provided, they shall 

(a) be located in or adjacent to the operating device 
in the car. 

(b) in elevators having automatic operation, be of the 
key-operated type or located in a fixture with a locked 
cover. The key shall be Group 2 Security (see 8.1). 

2.14.7.2.2 Automatic operation of the car lights 
shall be permitted. When provided, the operating circuit 
shall be arranged to turn off the lights only when the 
following conditions exist for not less than 5 min: 

(a) the car is at a floor 

(b) the doors are closed 

(c) there is no demand for service 

(d) the car is on automatic operation 
Momentary interruption of any of the above condi- 
tions shall cause the car lights to turn on. 

2.14.7.3 Car Lighting Devices 

2.14.7.3.1 Glass used for lighting fixtures shall 
conform to 2.14.1.8. 

2.14.7.3.2 Suspended glass used in lighting fix- 
tures shall be supported by a metal frame secured at 
not less than three points. 

2.14.7.3.3 Fastening devices shall not be remov- 
able from the fixture. 

2.14.7.3.4 Glass shall not be drilled for 
attachment. 

2.14.7.3.5 Light troughs supporting wiring race- 
ways and other auxiliary lighting equipment, where 
used, shall be of metal, except where lined with noncom- 
bustible materials. 

2.14.7.3.6 Materials for light diffusion or trans- 
mission shall be of metal, glass, or materials conforming 
to 2.14.2.1.1 and shall not come in contact with light 
bulbs and tubes. 

2.14.7.4 Protection of Light Bulbs and Tubes. Light 
bulbs and tubes within the car shall 

(a) be equipped with guards, be recessed, or be 
mounted above a drop ceiling to prevent accidental 



43 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.14.7.4-2.15.6.3 



breakage. Cars that operate with the drop ceiling 
removed shall have a permanent separate guard for the 
light bulb or tube. 

(b) be so mounted in the structure that the structure 
and the bulb or tube will withstand the required elevator 
tests without being damaged or becoming dislodged. 

SECTION 2.15 
CAR FRAMES AND PLATFORMS 

2.15.1 Car Frames Required 

Every elevator shall have a car frame (see 1.3). 

2.15.2 Guiding Members 

Car frames shall be guided on each guide rail by upper 
and lower guiding members attached to the frame. 

Retention means shall be provided to prevent the car 
from being displaced by more than 13 mm (0.5 in.) from 
its normal running position should any part of the guid- 
ing means fail, excluding the guiding member base and 
its attachment to the frame. The retention means shall 
be permitted to be integral with the base. 

2.15.3 Design of Car Frames and Guiding Members 

The frame and its guiding members shall be designed 
to withstand the forces resulting under the loading con- 
ditions for which the elevator is designed and installed 
(see 2.16). 

2.15.4 Underslung or Sub-Post Frames 

The vertical distance between the centerlines of the 
top and bottom guide shoes of an elevator car having 
a sub-post car frame or having an underslung car frame 
located entirely below the car platform shall be not less 
than 40% of the distance between guide rails. 

2.15.5 Car Platforms 

2.15.5.1 Every elevator car shall have a platform 
consisting of a nonperforated floor attached to a plat- 
form frame supported by the car frame, and extending 
over the entire area within the car enclosure. 

2.15.5.2 The platform frame members and the floor 
shall be designed to withstand the forces developed 
under the loading conditions for which the elevator is 
designed and installed. 

2.15.5.3 Platform frames are not required where 
laminated platforms are provided. 

2.15.5.4 Laminated platforms shall be permitted to 
be used for passenger elevators having a rated load of 
2 300 kg (5,000 lb) or less. 

2.15.5.5 The deflection at any point of a laminated 
platform, when uniformly loaded to rated capacity, shall 
not exceed 1 /%q of the span. The stresses in the steel 
facing shall not exceed one-fifth of its ultimate strength, 



and the stresses in the plywood core shall not exceed 60% 
of the allowable stresses in Section 3.14 of the American 
Plywood Association Plywood Design Specification or 
CSA 086.1, as applicable (see Part 9). 

2.15.6 Materials for Car Frames and Platform Frames 

2.15.6.1 Materials Permitted. Materials used in the 
construction of car frames and platforms shall conform 
to 2.15.6.1.1 through 2.15.6.1.4. 

2.15.6.1.1 Car frames and outside members of 
platform frames shall be made of steel or other metals. 

2.15.6.1.2 Platform stringers of freight elevators 
designed for Class B or Class C loading shall be of steel 
or other metals. 

2.15.6.1.3 Platform stringers of passenger eleva- 
tors and of freight elevators designed for Class A loading 
shall be made of steel or other metals, or of wood. 

2.15.6.1.4 Cast iron shall not be used for any part 
subject to tension, torsion, or bending, except for guiding 
supports and guide shoes. 

2.15.6.2 Requirements for Steel. Steel used in the 
construction of car frames and platforms shall conform 
to 2.15.6.2.1 through 2.15.6.2.3. 

2.15.6.2.1 Car-Frame and Platform-Frame Members. 
Steel shall be rolled, formed, forged, or cast, conforming 
to the requirements of the following specifications: 

(a) Rolled and Formed Steel. ASTM A 36 or ASTM A 
283 Grade D or CAN/CSA-G40.21. 

(b) Forged Steel. ASTM A 668 Class B. 

(c) Cast Steel. ASTM A 27 Grade 60/30. 

2.15.6.2.2 Rivets, Bolts, and Rods. Steel used for 
rivets, bolts, and rods shall conform to the following 
specifications: 

(a) ASTM A 502, Rivets 

(b) ASTM A 307, Bolts and Rods 

2.15.6.2.3 Steels of Other Strength. Steels of 
greater or lesser strength than those specified by 
2.15.6.2.1 shall be permitted to be used, provided they 
have an elongation of not less than 20% in a length of 
50 mm (2 in.) when tested in accordance with ASTM 
E8, and provided that the stresses and deflections con- 
form to 2.15.10 and 2.15.11, respectively. 

Rivets, bolts, and rods made of steel having greater 
strength than specified by ASTM A 307 and ASTM A 
502 shall be permitted to be used and the maximum 
allowable stresses increased proportionally, based on the 
ratio of the ultimate strengths. Elongation shall conform 
to the requirements of the corresponding ASTM specifi- 
cations. 

2.15.6.3 Requirements for Metals Other Than Steel. 
Metals other than steel shall be permitted to be used in 
the construction of car frames and platforms, provided 



44 



2.15.6.3-2.15.10.2 



ASMEA17.1S-2005 



the metal used has the essential properties to meet all 
the requirements for the purpose in accordance with 
good engineering practice, and provided the stresses 
and deflections conform to 2.15.10 and 2.15.11, respec- 
tively. 

2.15.6.4 Requirements for Wood Used for Platform 
Floors and Stringers. Wood used for platform stringers 
and platform floors and sub-floors shall be of structural 
quality lumber or exterior-type plywood conforming to 
the requirements of the following: 

(a) ASTM D 245, Structural Grades of Lumber 

(b) ASTM D 198, Static Tests of Structural Timbers 

(c) ANSI Voluntary Product Standard PS 1-74 or CSA 
0151, Softwood Plywood, Construction and Industrial 

2.15.7 Car Frame and Platform Connections 

2.15.7.1 Internal Connections. Connections between 
members of car frames and platforms shall be riveted, 
bolted, or welded, and shall conform to 2.15.7.3. 

2.1 5.7.2 Connection Between Car Frame and Platform. 

The attachment of the platform to the car frame shall 
be done in accordance with good engineering practice 
and shall develop the required strength to transmit the 
forces safely from the platform to the car frame in accor- 
dance with 2.15.10. Bolts, nuts, and welding, where used, 
shall conform to 2.15.7.3. 

2.15.7.3 Bolts, Nuts, and Welding 

2.1 5.7.3.1 Bolts, where used through greater than 
5 deg sloping flanges of structural members, shall have 
bolt heads of the tipped-head type or shall be fitted with 
bevelled washers. 

2.1 5.7.3.2 Nuts used on greater than 5 deg sloping 
flanges of structural members shall sit on beveled 
washers. 

2.15.7.3.3 All welding shall conform to 8.8. 

2.15.8 Protection of Platforms Against Fire 

All platform materials exposed to the hoistway shall 
be either of the following: 

(a) metal 

(b) other materials that, in their end-use configura- 
tion, conform to the following requirements, based on 
the tests conducted in accordance with the requirements 
of ASTM E 84, UL 723, NFPA 255, or CAN/ULC-S102.2, 
whichever is applicable (see Part 9): 

(1) flame spread rating of to 75 

(2) smoke development of to 450 

2.15.9 Platform Guards (Aprons) 

The entrance side of the platform of passenger and 
freight elevators shall be provided with smooth metal 
guard plates of not less than 1.5 mm (0.059 in.) thick 
steel, or material of equivalent strength and stiffness, 



adequately reinforced and braced to the car platform 
and conforming to 2.15.9.1 through 2.15.9.4. 

2.15.9.1 The guard plate shall extend not less than 
the full width of the widest hoistway-door opening. 

2.1 5.9.2 The guard plate shall have a straight vertical 
face, extending below the floor surface of the platform, 
conforming to one of the following: 

(a) where the elevator is required to conform to 
2.19.2.2(b) the depth of the truck zone, where provided, 
plus 75 mm (3 in.), but in no case less than 1 220 mm 
(48 in.) 

(b) where the elevator is not required to conform to 
2.19.2.2(b) the depth of the leveling zone or truck zone, 
where provided, plus 75 mm (3 in.); but in no case less 
than 525 mm (21 in.) 

2.1 5.9.3 The lower portion of the guard shall be bent 
back at an angle of not less than 60 deg nor more than 
75 deg from the horizontal. 

2.15.9.4 The guard plate shall be securely braced 
and fastened in place to withstand a constant force of 
not less than 650 N (145 lbf) applied at right angles to 
and at any position on its face without deflecting more 
than 6 mm (0.25 in.), and without permanent defor- 
mation. 

Where the car entrance on the truck loading side is 
provided with a collapsible-type gate and the height of 
the hoistway door opening is greater than the distance 
from the car floor to the car top, a head guard extending 
the full width of the door opening shall be provided on 
the car to close the space between the car top and the 
soffit of the hoistway-door opening when the car plat- 
form is level with the floor at the truck loading landing 
entrance. 

2.15.10 Maximum Allowable Stresses in Car Frame 
and Platform Members and Connections 

2.15.10.1 The stresses in car frame and platform 
members and their connections, based on the static load 
imposed upon them, shall not exceed the following: 

(a) for steels meeting the requirements of 2.15.6.2.1 
and 2.15.6.2.2, as listed in Table 2.15.10.1 

(b) for steels of greater or lesser strength, as permitted 
by 2.15.6.2.3, the allowable stresses listed in Table 
2.15.10.1 are to be adjusted proportionally, based on the 
ratio of the ultimate strengths 

(c) for metals other than steel, as permitted by 
2.15.6.3, the allowable stresses listed in Table 2.15.10.1 
are to be adjusted proportionally, based on the ratio of 
the ultimate strengths 

2.15.10.2 Car frame members, brackets, and their 
connections subject to forces due to the application of 
the emergency brake (see 2.19.4) shall be designed to 
withstand the maximum forces developed during the 
retardation phase of the emergency braking so that the 



45 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.15.10.2-2.15.13 



Table 2.15.10.1 Maximum Allowable Stresses in Car Frame and Platform Members and 
Connections, for Steels Specified in 2.15.6.2.1 and 2.15.6.2.2 







Maximum Stress, 




Member Type 


Stress Type 


MPa (psi) 


Area Basis 


Car crosshead 


Bending 


95 (14,000) 


Gross section 


Car frame plank (normal loading) 


Bending 


95 (14,000) 


Gross section 


Car frame plank (buffer reaction) 


Bending 


190 (27,500) 


Gross section 


Car frame uprights (stiles) 


Bending plus tension 


115 (17,000) 


Gross section 






140 (20,200) 


Net section 


Hoisting rope hitch plate and 


Bending plus tension 


75 (11,000) 


Net section 


shapes 








Platform framing 


Bending 


95 (14,000) 


Gross section 


Platform stringers 


Bending 


115 (17,000) 


Gross section 


Threaded brace rods and other 


Tension 


60 (9,000) 


Net section 


tension members except bolts 








Bolts 


Tension 


55 (8,000) 


Net section 


Bolts in clearance holes 


Shear 


55 (8,000) 


Actual area in shear plane 




Bearing 


120 (17,500) 


Gross section 


Rivets or tight body-fit bolts 


Shear 


75 (11,000) 


Actual area in shear plane 




Bearing 


140 (20,000) 


Gross section 


Any framing member normal loading 


Compression 


Note (1) 


Gross section 



NOTE: 

(1) The maximum allowable compressive stress in any member at normal loading shall not exceed 80% of those permitted 
for static loads by the AISC #S326 or CSA S16.1. 



resulting stresses due to the emergency braking and all 
other loading acting simultaneously, if applicable, shall 
not exceed 190 MPa (27,500 psi). 

2.15.11 Maximum Allowable Deflections of Car 
Frame and Platform Members 

The deflections of car frame and platform members 
based on the static load imposed upon them shall be 
not more than the following: 

(a) for crosshead, plank, and platform frame mem- 
bers, V 960 of the span 

(b) for uprights (stiles), as determined by 8.2.2.5.3 

2.15.12 Car Frames With Sheaves 

Where a hoisting rope sheave is mounted on the car 
frame, the construction shall conform to 2.15.12.1 
through 2.15.12.3. 

2.1 5.1 2.1 Where multiple sheaves mounted on sepa- 
rate sheave shafts are used, provision shall be made to 
take the compressive forces, developed by tension in 
the hoisting ropes between the sheaves, on a strut or 
struts between the sheave shaft supports, or by provid- 
ing additional compressive strength in the car frame or 
car-frame members supporting sheave shafts. 

2.15.12.2 Where the sheave shaft extends through 
the web of a car-frame member, the reduction in area of 
the member shall not reduce the strength of the member 



below that required. Where necessary, reinforcing plates 
shall be welded or riveted to the member to provide the 
required strength. The bearing pressure shall in no case 
be more than that permitted in Table 2.15.10.1 for bolts 
in clearance holes. 

2.15.123 Where the sheave is attached to the car 
crosshead by means of a single threaded rod or specially 
designed member or members in tension, the require- 
ments of 2.15.12.3.1 and 2.15.12.3.2 shall be conformed to. 

2.15.12.3.1 The single rod, member, or members 
shall have a factor of safety 50% higher than the factor 
of safety required for the suspension wire ropes, but in 
no case shall have a factor of safety of less than 15. 

2.15.12.3.2 The means for fastening the single- 
threaded rod, member, or members to the car frame 
shall conform to 2.15.13. 

2.15.13 Suspension-Rope Hitch Plates or Shapes 

Where cars are suspended by hoisting ropes attached 
to the car frame or to the overhead supporting beams 
by means of rope shackles, the shackles shall be attached 
to steel hitch plates or to structural or formed steel 
shapes. 

Such plates or shapes shall be secured to the underside 
or to the webs of the car-frame member with bolts, rivets, 
or welds so located that the tensions in the hoisting 



46 



2.15.13-2.16.2.2.3 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



ropes will not develop direct tension in the bolts or 
rivets. 

The stresses shall not exceed those permitted by 
2.9.3.3. 

2.15.14 Calculation of Stresses in Car-Frame and 
Platform-Frame Members 

The calculation of the stresses and deflection in the 
car-frame plank and uprights and platform frames shall 
be based on the formulas and data in 8.2.2. 

2.15.15 Platform Side Braces 

Where side bracing and similar members are attached 
to car-frame uprights, the reduction in area of the upright 
shall not reduce the strength of the upright below that 
required by 2.15. 

2.15.16 Hinged Platform Sills 

Hinged platform sills, where used, shall conform to 
2.15.16.1 through 2.15.16.3. 

2.15.16.1 Hinged platform sills shall be provided 
with electric contacts conforming to 2.12.5, which will 
prevent operation of the elevator by the normal 
operating device unless the hinged sill is within 50 mm 
(2 in.) of its fully retracted position, provided that when 
in this position, the sill does not reduce the clearance 
specified in 2.5.1.4. 

2.1 5.16.2 The elevator shall be permitted to be oper- 
ated by the leveling device in the leveling zone with the 
sill in any position. 



2.15.16.3 

2.11.11.1. 



The strength of the sills shall conform to 



2.15.17 Fastening of Compensation Means 

Fastenings to the car of the suspension ropes' compen- 
sation means shall conform to 2.21.4. 



SECTION 2.16 
CAPACITY AND LOADING 

2.16.1 Minimum Rated Load for Passenger Elevators 

2.16.1.1 Minimum Load Permitted. The rated load in 
kg (lb) for passenger elevators shall be based on the 
inside net platform area, and shall be not less than shown 
by Fig. 8.2.1.2 (see Nonmandatory Appendix D and 
2.26.11). 

The inside net platform area shall be determined at 
a point 1 000 mm (39 in.) above the floor and inside of 
any panels or wall surfaces, but exclusive of any hand- 
rails and space for doors as shown in Fig. 2.16.1.1. To 
allow for variations in car designs, an increase in the 
maximum inside net area not exceeding 5% shall be 
permitted for the various rated loads. See Table 2.16.1.1. 



2.16.1.2 Use of Partitions for Reducing Inside Net 
Platform Area. Where partitions are installed in elevator 
cars for the purpose of restricting the platform net area 
for passenger use, they shall be permanently bolted, 
riveted, or welded in place. Gates, doors, or handrails 
shall not be used for this purpose. Partitions shall be so 
installed as to provide for approximately symmetrical 
loading. 

2.16.1.3 Carrying of Freight on Passenger Elevators. 

When freight is to be carried on a passenger elevator, 
the requirements of 2.16.1.3.1 and 2.16.1.3.2 shall be con- 
formed to. 

2.16.1.3.1 The nunimum rated load shall conform 
to 2.16.1 or 2.16.2, whichever is greater. 

2.16.1.3.2 The elevator shall be designed for appli- 
cable class of freight elevator loading. 

2.16.2 Minimum Rated Load for Freight Elevators 

2.16.2.1 Minimum Load Permitted. The minimum 
rated load for freight elevators in pounds shall be based 
on the weight and class of the load to be handled, but 
shall in no case be less than the minimum specified in 
2.16.2.2 for each class of loading based on the inside net 
platform area. 

2.16.2.2 Classes of Loading and Design Require- 
ments. Freight elevators shall be designed for one of the 
following classes of loading. 

2.16.2.2.1 Class A: General Freight Loading. Where 
the load is distributed, the weight of any single piece 
of freight or of any single hand truck and its load is not 
more than 25% of the rated load of the elevator, and the 
load is handled on and off the car platform manually 
or by means of hand trucks. 

For this class of loading, the rated load shall be based 
on not less than 240 kg/m 2 (49 lb/ft 2 ) of inside net 
platform area. 

2.16.2.2.2 Class B: Motor Vehicle Loading. Where 
the elevator is used solely to carry automobile trucks or 
passenger automobiles up to the rated capacity of the 
elevator. 

For this class of loading, the rated load shall be based 
on not less than 145 kg/m 2 (30 lb/ft 2 ) of inside net 
platform area. 

2.16.2.2.3 Class C. There are three types of Class 
C loadings: 

(a) Class CI: Industrial Truck Loading. Where the static 
load during loading and unloading does not exceed the 
rated load. 

(b) Class C2: Industrial Truck Loading. Where the static 
load during loading and unloading is permitted to 
exceed the rated load. 



47 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



Inside net platform 
area =Ax B 



Inside net platform 
area =Ax B 



-< ■ -■ 



Fig. 2.16.1.1 Inside Net Platform Areas for Passenger Elevators 



Table 2.16.1.1 Maximum Inside Net Platform Areas for the Various 

Rated Loads 



SI Units 




Imperial Units 




Inside Net 




Inside Net 


Rated Load, 


Platform Area, 


Rated Load, 


Platform Area, 


kg 


m 


lb 


ft 2 


230 


0.65 


500 


7.0 


270 


0.77 


600 


8.3 


320 


0.89 


700 


9.6 


450 


1.23 


1,000 


13.3 


550 


1.45 


1,200 


15.6 


700 


1.76 


1,500 


18.9 


800 


2.05 


1,800 


22.1 


900 


2.25 


2,000 


24.2 


1 150 


2.70 


2,500 


29.1 


1 350 


3.13 


3,000 


33.7 


1 600 


3.53 


3,500 


38.0 


1 800 


3.92 


4,000 


42.2 


2 000 


4.29 


4,500 


46.2 


2 250 


4.65 


5,000 


50.0 


2 700 


5.36 


6,000 


57.7 


3 200 


6.07 


7,000 


65.3 


3 600 


6.77 


8,000 


72.9 


4 100 


7.48 


9,000 


80.5 


4 500 


8.18 


10,000 


88.0 


5 400 


9.57 


12,000 


103.0 


7 000 


11.62 


15,000 


125.1 


8 000 


13.65 


18,000 


146.9 


9 000 


14.98 


20,000 


161.2 


11 500 


18.25 


25,000 


196.5 


13 500 


21.46 


30,000 


231.0 



GENERAL NOTE: To allow for variations in cab designs, an increase in the maximum inside net platform 
area not exceeding 5% shall be permitted for the various rated loads. 



48 



2.16.2.2.3-2.16A5 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



(c) Class C3: Other Loading With Heavy Concentrations. 
Where the static load during loading and unloading 
does not exceed the rated load. 

2.16.2.2.4 Class C loadings in 2.16.2.2.3 apply 
where the weight of the concentrated load including a 
powered industrial or hand truck, if used, is more than 
25% the rated load and where the load to be carried 
does not exceed the rated load. (For concentrated loads 
exceeding the rated load, see 2.16.6.) 
The following are additional requirements: 

(a) For Class CI, Class C2, and Class C3 loadings, the 
rated load of the elevator shall be not less than the load 
(including any truck) to be carried, and shall in no case 
be less than 240 kg/m 2 (49 lb/ft 2 ) of inside net plat- 
form area. 

The elevator shall be provided with a two-way auto- 
matic leveling device (see 1.3). 

(b) For Class CI and Class C2 loadings, the following 
additional requirements shall apply: 

(1) For elevators with rated loads of 9 000 kg 
(20,000 lb) or less, the car platform shall be designed for 
a loaded truck of weight equal to the rated load or 
for the actual weight of the loaded truck to be used, 
whichever is greater. 

(2) For elevators with rated loads exceeding 
9 000 kg (20,000 lb), the car platform shall be designed 
for a loaded truck weighing 9 000 kg (20,000 lb), or for 
the actual weight of the loaded truck to be used, which- 
ever is greater. 

(c) For Class C2 loading, the following requirements 
shall apply: 

(1) The maximum load on the car platform during 
loading or unloading shall not exceed 150% of rated 
load. 

(2) For any load in excess of rated load on elevators 
with a rated load of 9 000 kg (20,000 lb) or less, the 
driving-machine motor, brake, and traction relation shall 
be adequate to sustain and level the full 150% of 
rated load. 

(3) For any load in excess of the rated load on eleva- 
tors with a rated load exceeding 9 000 kg (20,000 lb), the 
driving machine motor, brake, and traction relation shall 
be adequate to sustain and level the rated load plus 
either 4 500 kg (10,000 lb), or the weight of the unloaded 
truck to be used, whichever is greater. 

NOTES (2.16.2): 

(1) When the entire rated load is loaded or unloaded in increments 
by an industrial truck, the load imposed on the car platform, 
while the last increment is being loaded or the first increment 
unloaded, will exceed the rated load by part of the weight of 
the empty industrial truck. 

(2) Requirement 2.16.2 does not prohibit the carrying of an indus- 
trial truck on a freight elevator of Class C2 or Class C3 loading, 
provided that the total weight on the elevator does not exceed 
the rated load of the elevator, and the elevator is designed to 
meet the requirements of 8.2.2 and 8.2.9, as appropriate, for 
the load involved. 



2.16.3 Capacity and Data Plates 

2.16.3.1 Plates Required and Locations. Every eleva- 
tor shall be provided with a capacity plate and a data 
plate permanently and securely attached. 

The capacity plate shall be located in a conspicuous 
position inside the car. 

The data plate shall be located on the car crosshead, 
or inside the car for underslung elevators having no 
crosshead. 

2.16.3.2 Information Required ©n Plates 

2.16.3.2.1 Capacity plates shall indicate the rated 
load of the elevator in kilograms or pounds or both (see 
Nonmandatory Appendix D), and, in addition, this plate 
or a separate plate shall indicate 

(a) the capacity lifting one-piece loads where the ele- 
vator conforms to 2.16.7 

(b) for freight elevators designed for Class C2 loading, 
the maximum load the elevator is designed to support 
while being loaded or unloaded [see 2.16.2.2.4(c)] 

2.16.3.2.2 Data plates shall indicate 

(a) the weight of the complete car, including the car 
safety and all auxiliary equipment attached to the car 

(b) the rated load and speed 

(c) the wire rope data required by 2.20.2.1 

(d) the name or trademark of the manufacturer and 
year manufactured 

(e) rail lubrication instructions (see 2.17.16) 

2.16.3.3 Material and Marking of Plates. Plates shall 
be of such material and construction that the letters and 
figures stamped, etched, cast, or otherwise applied to 
the faces shall remain permanently and readily legible. 

The height of the letters and figures shall be not 
less than 

(a) 6 mm (0.25 in.) for passenger elevator capacity 
plates 

(b) 25 mm (1 in.) for freight elevator capacity plates 

(c) 3 mm (0.125 in.) for data plates 

2.16.4 Carrying of Passengers on Freight Elevators 

Freight elevators conforming to 2.16.4.1 through 
2.16.4.9 shall be permitted to carry passengers. 

2.16.4.1 The elevator shall not be accessible to the 
general public. 

2.16.4.2 The rated load shall not be less than that 
required by 2.16.1. 

2.16.4.3 The elevator shall conform to 2.16.8. 

2.16.4.4 Hoistway entrances shall conform to 
2.12.1.1 and 2.11.2.1, or shall be power-operated doors 
conforming to 2.11.2.2(e). 

2.16.4.5 Car doors shall be provided, and shall con- 
form to 2.14.5. 



49 



ASMEA17.1S-2005 



2.16.4.6-2.16.7.5 



2.16.4.6 Openings in car enclosures shall conform 
to 2.14.2.2. 

2.16.4.7 Hoistway doors and/or car doors shall con- 
form to 2.12.5. 

2.16.4.8 The factors of safety for suspension wire 
ropes shall conform to Table 2.20.3 for passenger ele- 
vators. 

2.16.4.9 Power-operated vertically sliding doors 
shall be power closed conforming to the following: 

(a) requirements 2.13.3.2 or 2.13.3.4. 

(b) shall be provided with a reopening device con- 
forming to 2.13.5. The reopening device shall detect 
obstruction in the path of closing door travel without 
the necessity of physical contact. This can be provided 
by mounting the protection device(s) on the car door 
itself or on the car or door jamb. 

(c) vertically sliding hoistway and car doors shall con- 
form to 2.13.6. 

(d) supporting chains, cables, or ropes shall not be 
exposed to the car interior. 

(e) when closed by automatic means, shall be pro- 
vided with a visual warning to function over the same 
period as the audible signal in 2.13.3.4.1. 

2.16.5 Signs Required in Freight Elevator Cars 

2.16.5.1 Signs Required. Signs, in addition to the 
capacity and data plates required by 2.16.3.1, shall be 
provided inside the car and shall be located in a conspic- 
uous position and permanently and securely fastened to 
the car enclosure, subject to the requirements of 2.16.5.1.1 
through 2.16.5.1.3. 

2.16.5.1.1 For every freight elevator, the sign shall 
specify the type of loading (see 2.16.2.2) for which the 
elevator is designed and installed, with one of the fol- 
lowing markings. 

(a) "CLASS A LOADING. ELEVATOR TO BE 
LOADED OR UNLOADED MANUALLY OR BY 
MEANS OF HAND TRUCKS ONLY. NO SINGLE PIECE 
OF FREIGHT OR SINGLE HAND TRUCK AND ITS 
LOAD SHALL EXCEED KG ( LB)." 

(b) "CLASS B LOADING. THIS ELEVATOR 
DESIGNED TO TRANSPORT MOTOR VEHICLES 
HAVING A MAXIMUM GROSS WEIGHT NOT TO 
EXCEED KG ( LB)." 

(c) "CLASS CI LOADING. THIS ELEVATOR 
DESIGNED TO TRANSPORT LOADED INDUSTRIAL 
TRUCK. MAXIMUM COMBINED WEIGHT OF 
INDUSTRIAL TRUCK AND LOAD NOT TO 
EXCEED KG ( LB)." 

(d) "CLASS C2 LOADING. THIS ELEVATOR 
DESIGNED FOR LOADING AND UNLOADING BY 
INDUSTRIAL TRUCK. MAXIMUM LOADING AND 
UNLOADING WEIGHT WHILE PARKED NOT TO 
EXCEED KG ( LB). MAXIMUM WEIGHT 



TRANSPORTED NOT TO EXCEED KG ( 

LB)." 

(e) "CLASS C3 LOADING. THIS ELEVATOR 
DESIGNED TO TRANSPORT CONCENTRATED 
LOADS NOT TO EXCEED KG ( LB)." 

2.16.5.1.2 For elevators not permitted to carry 
passengers, the sign shall read: "THIS IS NOT A PAS- 
SENGER ELEVATOR. NO PERSONS OTHER THAN 
THE OPERATOR AND FREIGHT HANDLERS ARE 
PERMITTED TO RIDE ON THIS ELEVATOR." 

2.16.5.1.3 For freight elevators permitted to carry 
passengers (see 2.16.4), a sign reading "PASSENGERS 
ARE PERMITTED TO RIDE THIS ELEVATOR." 

2.16.5.2 Material and Marking of Signs. The material 
and marking of all signs shall conform to 2.16.3.3, except 
that the letters shall be not less than 13 mm (0.5 in.) high. 

2.16.6 Overloading of Freight Elevators 

Freight elevators shall not be loaded in excess of their 
rated load as specified on the capacity plate required 
by 2.16.3, except for 

(a) static loads on elevators loaded and unloaded by 
industrial trucks as noted on capacity or separate plate 
[see 2.16.2.2.3 and 2.16.3.2.1(b)] 

(b) elevators designed and installed to conform to 

2.16.7 to carry one-piece loads exceeding their rated load 

2.16.7 Carrying of One-Piece Loads Exceeding the 
Rated Load 

Passenger and freight elevators shall be permitted to 
be used, where necessary, to carry one-piece loads 
greater than their rated load, provided they are 
designed, installed, and operated to conform to 2.16.7.1 
through 2.16.7.11. 

2.16.7.1 A locking device shall be provided that 
will hold the car at any landing, independently of the 
hoisting ropes, while the car is being loaded or 
unloaded. 

2.16.7.2 The locking device shall be so designed that 
it cannot be unlocked until the entire weight of the car 
and load is suspended on the ropes. 

2.16.7.3 A removable wrench or other device shall 
be provided to operate the locking device. 

2.16.7.4 The locking device shall be so designed that 
the locking bars will be automatically withdrawn should 
they come into contact with the landing locks when the 
car is operated in the up direction. 

2.16.7.5 A special capacity plate shall be provided 
inside the elevator car and located in a conspicuous 
place that shall bear the words "CAPACITY LIFTING 
ONE-PIECE LOADS" in letters, followed by figures giv- 
ing the special capacity in kilograms (pounds) for lifting 



50 



2.16.7.5-2.17.1 



ASMEA17.1S-2005 



one-piece loads for which the machine is designed. For 
material and size of letters, see 2.16.3.3. 

2.16.7.6 The car frame, car platform, sheaves, shafts, 
ropes, and locking devices shall be designed for the 
specified "Capacity Lifting One-Piece Loads," pro- 
vided that 

(a) in the design of the car frame, platform, sheaves, 
shafts, and ropes, the allowable stress is permitted to 
be 20% higher than those permitted for normal loading 

(b) the factor of safety for the locking device is not 
less than 5 

2.16.7.7 The car safeties shall be designed to stop 
and hold the specified "Capacity Lifting One-Piece 
Loads" with the ropes intact. The safety is not required 
to conform to the safety stopping distances specified in 
Table 2.17.3 if applied while the elevator is carrying a 
one-piece load exceeding the rated load. 

2.16.7.8 Where there is an occupied space, or an 
unoccupied space not secured against unauthorized 
access (see 2.6), under the hoistway, the requirements of 

2.16.7.8.1 through 2.16.7.8.4 shall be conformed to. 

2.16.7.8.1 The machine shall be designed to oper- 
ate the "Capacity Lifting One-Piece Loads" at slow 
speed. 

2.16.7.8.2 The car safety shall be designed to stop 
and hold the car with this load, independently of the 
hoisting ropes. 

2.16.7.8.3 The counterweight safety, where 
required by 2.6, shall be designed to stop and hold the 
entire weight of the counterweight, independently of 
the ropes. 

2.16.7.8.4 Under the conditions described in 

2.16.7.8.2 and 2.16.7.8.3, the car and counterweight safe- 
ties are not required to conform to the safety stopping 
distances specified in Table 2.17.3 when the elevator is 
carrying a one-piece load exceeding the rated load and 
the counterweight is provided with additional weight 
as required by 2.16.7.9. 

2.16.7.9 For traction machines, where it is necessary 
to secure adequate traction, an additional counterweight 
shall be added during the period of use with one-piece 
loads so that the total overbalance is at least equal to 
45% of the "Capacity Lifting One-Piece Loads." 

2.16.7.10 A special operating device of the car 
switch or continuous-pressure type shall be provided 
in a machine room, control space located outside the 
hoistway, or control room to operate the elevator. 

Means shall be provided to visually observe the driv- 
ing machine when this special operating device is oper- 
ated. When this device is operative, all other operating 
devices shall be inoperative (see 2.26.1.3). 



2.16.7.11 The "Capacity Lifting One-Piece Loads" 
of any passenger traction elevator shall not exceed 1.33 
times the rated load of the elevator. 

2.16.8 Additional Requirements for Passenger 
Overload in the Down Direction 

Passenger elevators and freight elevators permitted 
by 2.16.4 to carry passengers shall be designed and 
installed to safely lower, stop, and hold the car with an 
additional load up to 25% in excess of the rated load. 

The elevator is not required to attain rated load per- 
formance under the passenger overload conditions spec- 
ified but shall conform to 

(a) requirement 2.17.2, except that 125% of the rated 
load shall be used in place of the rated load. 

(b) requirement 2.17.3, except that 125% of the rated 
load shall be used in the first paragraph in place of the 
rated load. Second paragraph of 2.17.3, except that 125% 
of the rated load shall be used in place of the rated 
load, and the rated load performance including safety 
stopping distance is not required. 

(c) requirement 2.24.2.3, except that 125% of rated 
load shall be used in place of the rated load. 

(d) requirement 2.24.8, except that 125% of the rated 
load shall be used in place of the rated load. 

(e) requirement 2.25.2.1, except that 125% of the rated 
load shall be used in place of the rated load. 

(f) requirement 2.26.9.8, except that 125% of the rated 
load shall be used in place of the rated load. 

(g) requirement 2.26.10, except that 125% of the rated 
load shall be used in place of the rated load. 

(h) requirement 2.19.2.2(b), except that 125% of the 
rated load shall be used in place of the rated load. 

(i) requirement 2.27.2.1, except that 125% of rated load 
shall be used in place of rated load. 

(j) requirement 2.7.5.1.2(b), except that 125% of rated 
load shall be used in place of rated load. 

2.16.9 Special Loading Means 

Where special means (lift hooks, conveyor tracks, and 
support beams) that exert loads upon the car frame or 
platform, or both, are used to carry loads other than as 
described in 2.16.2.2, the effects of their loading on the 
car frame and platform shall be considered in accordance 
with 8.2.2.1 and 8.2.9.1. The allowable stresses and 
deflections shall be as specified in 2.15.10 and 2.15.11. 
The connections shall conform to 2.15.7. 

SECTION 2.17 
CAR AND COUNTERWEIGHT SAFETIES 

2.17.1 Where Required and Location 

The car of every elevator suspended by wire ropes 
shall be provided with one or more car safety devices 
of one of the types identified in 2.17.5. The safeties shall 
be attached to the car frame, and one safety shall be 
located within or below the car frame. 



51 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.17.1-2.17.8.1 



All car safeties shall be mounted on a single car frame 
and shall operate only on one pair of guide rails between 
which the frame is located. 

2.17.2 Duplex Safeties 

Where duplex (two) safeties are provided, the lower 
safety device shall be capable of developing not less 
than one-half of the force required to stop the entire car 
with rated load (see 2.16.8). Duplexed safety devices 
shall be arranged so as to function approximately simul- 
taneously. 

Type A or Type C safety devices (see 2.17.5) shall not 
be used in multiple (duplexed). 

2.17.3 Function and Stopping Distance of Safeties 

The safety device, or the combined safety devices, 
where furnished, shall be capable of stopping and sus- 
taining the entire car with its rated load from governor 
tripping speed (see also 2.16.8). 

Type B safeties shall stop the car with its rated load 
from governor tripping speed within the range of the 
maximum and minimum stopping distances as deter- 
mined by the formulas in 8.2.6. Table 2.17.3 and Fig. 
8.2.6 show the maximum and minimum stopping dis- 
tances for various governor tripping speeds, when tested 
in conformance with 8.10 and 8.11. 

2.17.4 Counterweight Safeties 

Counterweight safeties, where furnished [see 2.6 and 
2.19.3.2(a)(1)], shall conform to the requirements for car 
safeties, except as specified in 2.17.7 and 2.18.1. 

2.17.5 Identification and Classification of Types of 
Safeties 

Car safety devices (safeties) are identified and classi- 
fied on the basis of performance characteristics after the 
safety begins to apply pressure on the guide rails. On 
this basis, there are three types of safeties. 

2.17.5.1 Type A Safeties. Safeties that develop a rap- 
idly increasing pressure on the guide rails during the 
stopping interval, the stopping distance being very short 
due to the inherent design of the safety. The operating 
force is derived entirely from the mass and the motion 
of the car or the counterweight being stopped. These 
safeties apply pressure on the guide rails through eccen- 
trics, rollers, or similar devices, without any flexible 
medium purposely introduced to limit the retarding 
force and increase the stopping distance. 

2.17.5.2 Type B Safeties. Safeties that apply limited 
pressure on the guide rails during the stopping interval, 
and which provide stopping distances that are related 
to the mass being stopped and the speed at which appli- 
cation of the safety is initiated. Retarding forces are 
reasonably uniform after the safety is fully applied. Safe- 
ties that require or do not require continuous tension in 



the governor rope to operate the safety during the entire 
stopping interval shall be permitted. Minimum and 
maximum distances are specified on the basis of gover- 
nor tripping speed (see 2.17.3). 

2.17.5.3 Type C Safeties (Type A With Oil Buffers). 

Safeties that develop retarding forces during the com- 
pression stroke of one or more oil buffers interposed 
between the lower members of the car frame and a 
governor-operated Type A auxiliary safety plank 
applied on the guide rails. The stopping distance is equal 
to the effective stroke of the buffers. 

2.17.6 Reserved for Future Use 

2.17.7 Governor-Actuated Safeties and Car Safety 
Mechanism Switches Required 

2.1 7.7.1 Counterweight safeties, where provided for 
rated speeds over 0.75 m/s (150 ft/min), and car safeties, 
shall be actuated by separate speed governors. 

Counterweight safeties for rated speeds of not over 
0.75 m/s (150 ft/min) shall be permitted to be operated 
as a result of the breaking or slackening of the suspension 
ropes and shall be permitted to be of the inertia or other 
approved type without governors. 

Where counterweight safeties are furnished to provide 
ascending car overspeed protection in accordance with 
2.19.1.1, they shall be actuated by a counterweight speed 
governor (see 2.17.4). 

2.17.7.2 Every car safety shall be provided with a 
switch, operated by the car safety mechanism (see 
2.26.2.9). 

A switch operated by the safety mechanism is not 
required on counterweight safeties. 

2.1 7.7.3 The car safety mechanism switch shall oper- 
ate before or at the time of application of the safety. 

2.1 7.7.4 Switches operated by the car safety mecha- 
nism shall be of a type that cannot be reset until the car 
safety mechanism has been returned to the unapplied 
position. 

2.17.8 Limits of Use of Various Types of Safeties 

2.17.8.1 Type A (Instantaneous) Safeties. Type A 
safeties shall be permitted on elevators having a rated 
speed of not more than 0.75 m/s (150 ft/min). 

When overspeed occurs, with the hoisting rope intact, 
such safeties shall be actuated by the governor. 

On the parting of the hoisting ropes (free fall), Type 
A governor-operated safeties shall apply without appre- 
ciable delay, and their application shall be independent 
of the speed action of the governor and of the location 
of the break in the hoisting ropes (inertia application), 
and shall be permitted to be accomplished by the use 
of a governor and governor rigging having a sufficiently 
high value of inertia to apply the safety on free fall 
independently of the speed action of the governor (see 
8.10 for inertia-application test of car safety). 



52 



2.17.8.2-2.17.8.2.7 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



Table 2.17.3 Maximum and Minimum Stopping Distances for 
Type B Car Safeties With Rated Load and Type B Counterweight Safeties 





SI Units 








Imperial Units 






Rated 


Maximum 
Governor 


Stopping Distances, 


Rated 


Maximum 
Governor 


Stopping Distances, 


Speed, 
m/s 


Trip Speed, 
m/s 


mm 




Speed, 
ft/min 


Trip Speed, 
ft/min 


in. 




Min. 


Max. 


Min. 


Max. 


0-0.63 


0.90 


25 


380 


0-125 


175 


1 


15 


0.75 


1.05 


50 


415 


150 


210 


2 


16 


0.87 


1.25 


75 


485 


175 


250 


3 


19 


1.00 


1.40 


100 


540 


200 


280 


4 


22 


1.12 


1.55 


125 


605 


225 


308 


5 


24 


1.25 


1.70 


150 


675 


250 


337 


6 


27 


1.50 


2.00 


200 


840 


300 


395 


8 


33 


1.75 


2.30 


250 


1025 


350 


452 


10 


40 


2.00 


2.55 


330 


1 200 


400 


510 


13 


48 


2.25 


2.90 


430 


1480 


450 


568 


17 


58 


2.50 


3.15 


505 


1 700 


500 


625 


20 


68 


3.00 


3.70 


710 


2 250 


600 


740 


28 


91 


3.50 


4.30 


940 


2 950 


700 


855 


38 


128 


4.00 


4.85 


1 200 


3 680 


800 


970 


49 


150 


4.50 


5.50 


1 540 


4 660 


900 


1,085 


61 


183 


5.00 


6.00 


1835 


5 500 


1,000 


1,200 


75 


222 


5.50 


6.60 


2 220 


6 600 


1,100 


1,320 


90 


268 


6.00 


7.20 


2 640 


7 800 


1,200 


1,440 


107 


316 


6.50 


7.80 


3 100 


9 110 


1,300 


1,560 


126 


371 


7.00 


8.40 


3 595 


10 530 


1,400 


1,680 


146 


427 


7.50 


9.00 


4 125 


12 050 


1,500 


1,800 


168 


490 


8.00 


9.60 


4 695 


13 670 


1,600 


1,920 


191 


555 


8.50 


10.20 


5 300 


15 400 


1,700 


2,040 


215 


628 


9.00 


10.80 


5 940 


17 240 


1,800 


2,160 


241 


700 


9.50 


11.40 


6 620 


19 180 


1,900 


2,280 


269 


779 


10.00 


12.00 


7 335 


21 220 


2,000 


2,400 


299 


862 



2.17.8.2 Type C (Combination Instantaneous and Oil- 
Buffer Safety). Type C safeties shall be permitted subject 
to the requirements of 2.17.8.2.1 through 2.17.8.2.8. 

2.17.8.2.1 The rated speed shall be not more than 
2.5 m/s (500 ft/min). 

2.17.8.2.2 The oil buffers shall conform to all 
requirements specified in 2.22 for oil buffers, except that 
the stroke shall be based on governor tripping speed 
and on an average retardation not exceeding 9.81 m/s 2 
(32.2 ft/s 2 ). 

2.17.8.2.3 After the buffer stroke, as defined in 
2.17.8.2.2, has been completed, provision shall be made 
for an additional travel of the plunger or piston of not 
less than 10% of the buffer stroke, to prevent excessive 
impact on the buffer parts and the auxiliary safety plank. 

2.1 7.8.2.4 Where the distance between guide rails 
exceeds 2 450 mm (96 in.), the safety shall be provided 
with two oil buffers of substantially identical calibration, 



and the buffers shall be so located as to develop mini- 
mum stresses in the auxiliary safety plank during safety 
operation. 

Buffers shall be located in line with and symmetrically 
between the guide rails. 

2.17.8.2.5 The auxiliary safety plank shall be so 
supported and guided below the car frame that the 
clearances specified in 2.17.10 for the safety parts are 
maintained during normal operation. 

The auxiliary safety plank shall be so designed that 
the maximum stresses in the plank shall not exceed those 
specified for similar car-frame members in 2.15. 

2.1 7.8.2.6 The rail-gripping device of the auxiliary 
safety plank shall be so arranged and connected as to 
prevent the plank from being out of level more than 
13 mm (0.5 in.) in the length of the plank when the 
safety is operated to stop the car. 

2.17.8.2.7 An electric switch shall be provided 
and so arranged and connected that the elevator cannot 



53 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.17.8.2.7-2.17.13 



be operated by means of the normal operating device 
if any buffer is compressed more than 10% of its stroke 
(see 2.26.2.13). 

2.17.8.2.8 Means shall be provided to prevent 
operation of the elevator by means of the normal 
operating device if the oil level in buffer is below the 
rninimum level (see 2.26.2.13). 

2.17.9 Application and Release of Safeties 

2.17.9.1 Means of Application. Safeties shall be 
applied mechanically. Electric, hydraulic, or pneumatic 
devices shall not be used to apply the safeties required 
by 2.17, nor to hold such safeties in the retracted 
position. 

2.17.9.2 Level of Car on Safety Application. The appli- 
cation of a Type A or Type B safety to stop the car, with 
its rated load centered on each quarter of the platform 
symmetrically with relation to the centerlines of the plat- 
form, shall not cause the platform to be out of level 
more than 30 mm/m (0.36 in. /ft) in any direction. (See 
2.17.8.2.6 for Type C safeties.) 

2.17.9.3 Release. When car safeties are applied, no 
decrease in tension in the governor rope or motion of 
the car in the down direction shall release the safeties, 
but such safeties shall be permitted to be released by 
the motion of the car in the up direction. 

2.17.9.4 Force Providing Stopping Action to Be Com- 
pressive. Safeties shall be so designed that, on their 
application, the forces that provide the stopping action 
shall be compressive forces on each side of the guide- 
rail section. 

2.17.10 Minimum Permissible Clearance Between 
Rail-Gripping Faces of Safety Parts 

In the normally retracted position of the safety, the 
distance between the rail-gripping faces of the safety 
parts shall be not less than the thickness of the guide 
rail plus 3.5 mm (0.14 in.), and the clearance on any side 
between the gripping face and the guide rail shall be 
not less than 1.5 mm (0.06 in.), as measured on the side 
of the rail toward which the car frame is pressed with 
sufficient force to take up all clearances in the guide- 
shoe assembly. Safety jaws, while in the retracted posi- 
tion, shall be so restrained as to prevent a reduction of 
this minimum clearance. 

2.17.11 Maximum Permissible Movement of 
Governor Rope to Operate the Safety 
Mechanism 

For all Type B safeties, the movement of the governor 
rope, relative to the car or the counterweight, respec- 
tively, required to operate the safety mechanism from 
its fully retracted position to a position where the safety 
jaws begin to exert pressure against the guide rails, shall 



not exceed the following values based on rated speed: 

(a) for car safeties 

(1) 1 m/s (200 ft/min) or less, 1 070 mm (42 in.) 

(2) 1.01 m/s (201 ft/min) to 1.9 m/s (375 ft/min), 
915 mm (36 in.) 

(3) over 1.9 m/s (375 ft/min), 756 mm (30 in.) 

(b) for counterweight safeties, all speeds, 1 070 mm 
(42 in.) 

Drum-operated car and counterweight safeties, 
requiring continual unwinding of the safety drum rope 
to fully apply the safety, shall be so designed that not 
less than three turns of the safety rope will remain on 
the drum after the overspeed test of the safety has been 
made with rated load in the car. 

2.17.12 Minimum Factors of Safety and Stresses of 
Safety Parts and Rope Connections 

2.17.12.1 Parts of safeties, except springs, safety- 
rope drums, leading sheaves, and their supporting 
brackets and safety-jaw gibs, shall have a factor of safety 
of not less than 3.5, and the materials used shall have 
an elongation of not less than 15% in a length of 50 mm 
(2 in.) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 8. Forged, 
cast, or welded parts shall be stress relieved. 

2.17.12.2 Springs are permitted in the operation of 
car or counterweight safeties. Where used, and where 
partially loaded prior to safety operation, the loading 
on the spring shall not produce a fibre stress exceeding 
one-half the elastic limit of the material. During opera- 
tion of the safety, the fibre stress shall not exceed 85% 
of the elastic limit of the material. Helical springs, where 
used, shall be in compression. 

2.17.12.3 Safety-rope drums, leading sheaves, and 
their supporting brackets and safety-jaw gibs, are per- 
mitted to be made of cast iron and other metals provided 
such parts have a factor of safety of not less than 10. 

2.1 7.1 2.4 Rope used as a connection from the safety 
to the governor rope, including rope wound on the 
safety-rope drum, shall be not less than 9.5 mm (0.375 in.) 
in diameter, shall be made of metal, and shall be corro- 
sion resistant. The factor of safety of the rope shall be 
not less than 5. Tiller-rope construction shall not be used. 

2.17.12.5 The factors of safety shall be based upon 
the maximum stresses developed in the parts during 
the operation of the safety when stopping rated load 
from governor tripping speed. 

2.17.12.6 Safety-rope leading sheave brackets and 
other safety operating parts shall not be attached to or 
supported by wood platform members. 

2.17.13 Corrosion-Resistant Bearings in Safeties and 
Safety Operating Mechanisms 

Bearings in safeties and in the safety-operating mecha- 
nisms shall be of corrosion-resistant construction, with 



54 



2.17.13-2.18.4.2 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



one or both members of the bearing made of, or electro- 
plated with, a corrosion-resistant material. 

2.17.14 Marking Plates for Safeties 

A metal plate shall be securely attached to each safety 
so as to be readily visible, and shall be marked in a 
legible and permanent manner with letters and figures 
not less than 6 mm (0.25 in.) in height indicating: 

(a) the type of safety, based on 2.17.5 

(b) the maximum tripping speed in m/s (ft/min) for 
which the safety is permitted 

(c) the maximum weight in kg (lb), which the safety 
is designed and installed to stop and sustain 

(d) the force in N (lbf ) required to activate the safety 
or rope releasing carrier, if provided 

(e) the manufacturer's name or trademark 

2.1 7.1 5 Governor-Rope Releasing Carriers 

Where a governor-rope releasing carrier is used to 
prevent actuation of the safety by the inertial forces of 
the governor-rope system, or used for any other pur- 
pose, the governor-rope releasing carrier on the car (or 
on the counterweight) shall be set to require a tension 
in the governor rope, to pull the rope from the carrier, 
of not more than 60% of the pull-through tension devel- 
oped by the governor. The means to regulate the gover- 
nor-rope pull-out force shall be mechanical and shall be 
sealed. The carrier shall be designed so that the pull- 
out tension cannot be adjusted to exceed the amount 
specified without breaking the seal. 

2.17e 16 Rail Lubricants and Lubrication Plate 

Rail lubricants or coatings that will reduce the holding 
power of the safety, or prevent its functioning as required 
in 2.17.3, shall not be used (see 8.7 for maintenance 
requirements). 

A metal plate as required by 2.16.3.2 shall be securely 
attached to the car crosshead in an easily visible location, 
and, where lubricants are to be used, shall carry the 
notation, "CONSULT MANUFACTURER OF THE 
SAFETY FOR THE CHARACTERISTICS OF THE RAIL 
LUBRICANT TO BE USED." If lubricants are not to be 
used, the plate shall so state. 

If lubricants other than those recommended by the 
manufacturer are used, a safety test shall be made to 
demonstrate that the safety will function as required by 
2.17.3. 



SECTION 2.18 
SPEED GOVERNORS 

2.18.1 Speed Governors Required and Location 

2.18.1.1 Counterweight safeties, where provided 
with rated speeds over 0.75 m/s (150 ft/min), and car 
safeties shall be actuated by separate speed governors. 



Where counterweight safeties are furnished to provide 
ascending car overspeed protection in accordance with 
2.19.1.1, they shall be actuated by a counterweight speed 
governor (see 2.17.4.) 

2.18.1.2 The governor shall be located where it can- 
not be struck by the car or the counterweight in case of 
overtravel, and where there is adequate space for full 
movement of governor parts. 

2.18.2 Tripping Speeds for Speed Governors 

2.18.2.1 Car Speed Governors. Speed governors for 
car safeties shall be set to trip at car speeds as follows: 

(a) at not less than 115% of the rated speed. 

(b) at not more than the tripping speed listed opposite 
the applicable rated speed in Table 2.18.2.1. Maximum 
tripping speeds for intermediate rated speeds shall be 
determined from Fig. 8.2.5. For rated speeds exceeding 
10 m/s (2,000 ft/min), the maximum tripping speeds 
shall not exceed 120% of the rated speed. 

2.18.2.2 Counterweight Speed Governors. Speed gov- 
ernors, where provided for counterweight safeties, shall 
be set to trip at an overspeed greater than that at which 
the car speed governor is to trip, but not more than 10% 
higher. 

2.18.3 Sealing and Painting of Speed Governors 

2.18.3.1 Speed governors shall have their means of 
speed adjustment sealed after test. If speed governors 
are painted after sealing, all bearing and rubbing sur- 
faces shall be kept free or freed of paint and a hand 
test made to determine that all parts operate freely as 
intended. 

2.18.3.2 Where the rope retarding means provides 
for adjustment of the rope pull-through force (tension), 
means shall be provided to seal the means of adjustment 
of the rope tension. 

2.18.3.3 Seals shall be of a type that will prevent 
readjustment of the sealed governor adjustments with- 
out breaking the seal. Provision shall be made to enable 
affixing seals after tests. 

2.18.4 Speed-Governor Overspeed Switclh 

2.18.4.1 Where Required and Function 

2.18.4.1.1 A switch shall be provided on every 
car and counterweight speed governor (see 2.26.2.10). 

2.18.4.1.2 The switches required in 2.18.4.1.1 shall 
be operated by the overspeed action of the governor, 
except that the counterweight governor switch shall be 
permitted to be operated upon activation of the counter- 
weight governor-rope retarding means (see 2.18.6.1). 

2.18.4.2 Setting of Car Speed-Governor Overspeed 

Switches. The setting of the car speed-governor 



55 



ASME A17.1S- 


-2005 








2.18.4.2-2.18.4.2.5 


Table 2.18.2.1 Maximum Car Speeds at Which Speed Governor Trips and Governor Overspeed 






Switch Operates 








SI Units 






Imperial Units 








Maximum Car Speed 






Maximum Car Speed 






at Which Governor 






at Which Governor 




Maximum 


Overspeed Switch 




Maximum 


Overspeed Switch 


Rated 


Car Governor 


Operates, Down, 


Rated 


Car Governor 


Operates, Down, 


Speed, 


Trip Speed, 


m/s 


Speed, 


Trip Speed, 


ft/min 


m/s 


m/s 


[Note (1)] 


ft/min 


ft/min 


[Note (1)] 


0-0.63 


0.90 


0.81 


0-125 


175 


175 


0.75 


1.05 


0.95 


150 


210 


210 


0.87 


1.25 


1.13 


175 


250 


225 


1.00 


1.40 


1.26 


200 


280 


252 


1.12 


1.55 


1.40 


225 


308 


277 


1.25 


1.70 


1.53 


250 


337 


303 


1.50 


2.00 


1.80 


300 


395 


355 


1.75 


2.30 


2.07 


350 


452 


407 


2.00 


2.55 


2.30 


400 


510 


459 


2.25 


2.90 


2.61 


450 


568 


512 


2.50 


3.15 


2.84 


500 


625 


563 


3.00 


3.70 


3.52 


600 


740 


703 


3.50 


4.30 


4.09 


700 


855 


812 


4.00 


4.85 


4.61 


800 


970 


921 


4.50 


5.50 


5.23 


900 


1,085 


1,031 


5.00 


6.00 


5.70 


1,000 


1,200 


1,140 


5.50 


6.60 


6.27 


1,100 


1,320 


1,254 


6.00 


7.20 


6.84 


1,200 


1,440 


1,368 


6.50 


7.80 


7.41 


1,300 


1,560 


1,482 


7.00 


8.40 


7.98 


1,400 


1,680 


1,596 


7.50 


9.00 


8.55 


1,500 


1,800 


1,710 


8.00 


9.60 


9.12 


1,600 


1,920 


1,824 


8.50 


10.20 


9.69 


1,700 


2,040 


1,938 


9.00 


10.80 


10.26 


1,800 


2,160 


2,052 


9.50 


11.40 


10.83 


1,900 


2,280 


2,166 


10.00 


12.00 


11.40 


2,000 


2,400 


2,280 


NOTE: 












(1) See 2.18.4.2.5. 











overspeed switch shall conform to 2.18.4.2.1 through 
2.18.4.2.6. 

2.18.4.2.1 For rated speeds more than 0.75 m/s 
(150 ft/min), up to and including 2.5 m/s (500 ft/min), 
the car speed-governor overspeed switch shall open in 
the down direction of the elevator at not more than 90% 
of the speed at which the governor is set to trip in the 
down direction. 

2.18.4.2.2 For rated speeds more than 2.5 m/s 
(500 ft/min), the car speed-governor overspeed switch 
shall open in the down direction of the elevator at not 
more than 95% of the speed at which the governor is 
set to trip in the down direction. 

2.18.4.2.3 For elevators with static control, the 
car speed-governor overspeed switch shall open in the 



down direction of the elevator at not more than 90% of 
the speed at which the governor is set to trip in the 
down direction. 

2.18.4.2.4 The switch, when set as specified in 
either 2.18.4.2.1, 2.18.4.2.2, or 2.18.4.2.3, shall open in the 
up direction at not more than 100% of the speed at which 
the governor is set to trip in the down direction. 

2.18.4.2.5 The speed-governor overspeed switch 
shall be permitted to open in the down direction of the 
elevator at not more than 100% of the speed at which 
the governor is set to trip in the down direction, subject 
to the following requirements: 

(a) A speed-reducing switch of the manually reset 
type is provided on the governor, which will reduce the 
speed of the elevator in case of overspeed, and which 



56 



2.18.4.2.5-2.18.7.3 



A17.1S-2005 



shall be set to open as specified in 2.18.4.2.1, 2.18.4.2.2, 
or 2.18.4.2.3. 

(b) Subsequent to the first stop of the car following 
the opening of the speed-reducing switch, the car shall 
remain inoperative until the switch is manually reset. 

2.18.4.3 Setting off (the Co urate roe 5 gin ft (governor 
Switch, Where the counterweight governor switch is 
operated by the overspeed action (see 2.18.2.2), the 
switch shall be set to open when the counterweight is 
descending at a speed greater than the elevator rated 
speed, but not more than the speed at which the counter- 
weight governor is set to trip. 

2.18.4.4 Type ©f Speed-Governor Overspeed Switches 
and Speed-Reducing Switches, Switches used to perform 
the function specified shall be positively opened. 
Overspeed and speed-reducing switches permitted by 
2.18.4.2.5 and operated by the speed governor shall 
remain in the open position until manually reset. 

NOTE: Manual reset includes means such as a finger, hand or 
cable-actuated lever, cam, etc., or some form of electromechanical 
actuation from the location of elevator controllers located outside 
the hoistway or the enclosure as specified in 2.7.6.5. 



>P@S 



2.18.5.1 Material and Factor off Safety. Governor 
ropes shall be of iron, steel, monel metal, phosphor 
bronze, or stainless steel. They shall be of a regular-lay 
construction and not less than 9.5 mm (0.375 in.) in 
diameter. The factor of safety of governor ropes shall be 
not less than 5. Tiller-rope construction shall not be used. 

2.18.5.2 Speed-Goveraor-iope Clearance. During 
normal operation of the elevator, the governor rope shall 
run free and clear of the governor jaws, rope guards, or 
other stationary parts. 

2.18.5.3 Governor-Rope Tag. A metal data tag shall 
be securely attached to the governor rope fastening. This 
data tag shall bear the following wire-rope data: 

(a) the diameter (mm or in.) 

(b) the manufacturer's rated breaking strength 

(c) the grade of material used 

(d) the year and month the rope was installed 

(e) whether nonpreformed or preformed 
(/) construction classification 

(g) name of the person or organization who installed 
the rope 

(h) name or trademark by which the manufacturer of 
the rope can be identified 

A new tag shall be installed at each rope renewal. The 
material and marking of the rope data tag shall conform 
to 2.16.3.3, except that the height of the letters and figures 
shall be not less than 1.5 mm (0.06 in.). 



2.1,8o6 Design of Governor-Rope Retarding Means for 

Type B Safeties 

Type B car and counterweight safeties shall be acti- 
vated by a speed governor with a governor-rope 
retarding means conforming to 2.18.6.1 through 2.18.6.5. 

2.18.6.1 Upon activation at the tripping speeds 
given by 2.18.2, the means shall retard the rope with a 
force that is at least 67% greater than the force required to 
activate the safety or to trip the governor-rope releasing 
carrier, where used (see 2.17.15). 

2.18.6.2 The means shall be set to allow the governor 
rope to slip through the speed governor at a rope tension 
(the governor pull-through tension) higher than 
required to activate the safety or to trip the releasing 
carrier as specified in 2.17.15. The maximum tension in 
the rope shall not exceed one-fifth of the rated ultimate 
strength of the rope. 

2.18.63 The means shall be designed to prevent 
appreciable damage to, or deformation of, the governor 
rope resulting from its application (stopping action). 

2.18.6.4 The means shall provide a continuous ten- 
sion in the governor rope as required to operate the 
safety during the entire stopping interval in accordance 
with 2.17.5.2. 

2.18.6.5 The governor shall be arranged to be manu- 
ally tripped or activated to facilitate the tests specified 
in 8.10 and 8.11. 

NOTE: Manually tripped or activated includes means such as but 
not limited to a finger, hand or cable-actuated lever, cam, etc., or 
some form of electromechanical actuation. 

2.18.7 Design off Speed-Governor Sheaves and 

Traction Between Speed-Governor Rope and 
Sheave 

2.18.7.1 The arc of contact between the governor 
rope and the governor sheave shall, in conjunction with 
a governor-rope tension device, provide sufficient trac- 
tion to cause proper functioning of the governor. 

2.18.7.2 Where the rope force imparted to the gover- 
nor rope (see 2.18.6.1) necessary to activate the safety, 
or to trip the releasing carrier, if used, is dependent 
upon the tension in the governor rope prior to governor 
tripping, a switch or switches mechanically opened by 
the governor tension sheave before the sheave reaches 
its upper or lower limit of travel shall be provided. This 
switch shall be of the manually reset type and shall 
conform to 2.26.4.3. Subsequent to the first stop of the 
car following the opening of the switch, the car shall 
remain inoperative until the switch is manually reset. 

2.18.73 Governor sheave grooves shall have 
machine-finished surfaces. Governor tension sheaves 
shall have machine-finished grooves for rated car speeds 
of more than 0.75 m/s (150 ft/min). Machined governor 



57 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.18.7.3-2.19.2.1 



Table 2.18.7.4 Multiplier for Determining 
Governor Sheave Pitch Diameter 



Rated Speed, 






m/s (ft/min) 


Number of Strands 


Multiplier 


1.00 or less (200 or less) 


6 


42 


1.00 or less (200 or less) 


8 


30 


Over 1.00 (over 200) 


6 


46 


Over 1.00 (over 200) 


8 


32 



sheave grooves shall have a groove diameter of not more 
than 1.15 times the diameter of the governor rope. 

2.18.7.4 The pitch diameter of governor sheaves and 
governor tension sheaves shall be not less than the prod- 
uct of the diameter of the rope and the applicable multi- 
plier listed in Table 2.18.7.4, based on the rated speed 
and the number of strands in the rope. 

2.18.8 Factors of Safety in Load-Bearing Parts of 
Speed Governor 

2.18.8.1 Material, except cast iron, used in load- 
bearing parts of speed governors shall have a factor of 
safety of not less than 3.5, and the materials used shall 
have an elongation of not less than 15% in a length of 
50 mm (2 in.) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 
8. Forged, cast, or welded parts shall be stress relieved. 
Cast iron shall have a factor of safety of not less than 10. 

2.18.8.2 The factors of safety shall be based upon 
the maximum stresses developed in the parts during 
normal or governor tripping operation. 

2.18.9 Speed-Governor Marking Plate 

A metal plate shall be securely attached to each speed 
governor and shall be marked in a legible and permanent 
manner with letters and figures not less than 6 mm 
(0.25 in.) in height indicating the following: 

(a) the speed in m/s (ft/min) at which the governor 
is set and sealed to trip the governor-rope retarding 
means 

(b) the size, material, and construction of the governor 
rope on which the governor-rope retarding means were 
designed to operate 

(c) the governor pull-through tension (force) in N (lbf ) 
(see 2.18.6.2) 

(d) manufacturer's name or trademark 

(e) statement "DO NOT LUBRICATE GOVERNOR 
ROPE" 

SECTION 2.19 

ASCENDING CAR OVERSPEED AND UNINTENDED 

CAR MOVEMENT PROTECTION 

2.19.1 Ascending Car Overspeed Protection 

2.19.1.1 Purpose. Ascending car overspeed protec- 
tion shall be provided to prevent the car from striking 



the hoistway overhead structure as a result of a failure in 

(a) the electric driving-machine motor, brake, cou- 
pling, shaft, or gearing 

(b) the control system 

(c) any other component upon which the speed of the 
car depends, except the suspension ropes and the drive 
sheave of the traction machine 

2.19.1.2 Where Required and Function. All electric 
traction elevators, except those whose empty car weight 
exceeds the total weight of the suspension ropes and 
counterweight, shall be provided with a device to pre- 
vent an ascending elevator from striking the hoistway 
overhead structure. This device (see 2.26.2.29) shall 

(a) detect an ascending car overspeed condition at a 
speed not greater than 10% higher than the speed at 
which the car governor is set to trip (see 2.18.2.1). 

(1) If the overspeed detection means requires elec- 
trical power for its functioning 

(a) a loss of electrical power to the ascending car 
overspeed detection and control means shall cause the 
immediate activation of the emergency brake as required 
in 2.19.1.2(b) 

(b) the occurrence of a single ground, or the fail- 
ure of any mechanically operated switch that does not 
meet the requirements of 2.26.4.3, any single magneti- 
cally operated switch, contactor, or relay, or any single 
solid-state device, or a software system failure, shall not 
render the detection means inoperative 

(2) The failure of any single mechanically operated 
switch that does not meet the requirements of 2.26.4.3 
shall not render the detection means inoperative. 

(3) When a fault specified in 2.19.1.2(a)(1)(b) or 
2.19.1.2(a)(2) is detected, the car shall stop at or before 
the next landing for which a demand was registered, 
and shall not be permitted to restart. 

(4) Once actuated by overspeed, the overspeed 
detection means shall remain actuated until manually 
reset, and the car shall not start or run unless the detec- 
tion means is reset. 

(b) decelerate the car when loaded with any load up 
to its rated load [see 2.16.8(h)] by applying an emergency 
brake conforming to 2.19.3. The car shall not start or 
run unless the emergency brake is reset. 

2.19.2 Protection Against Unintended Car Movement 

2.19.2.1 Purpose. Protection shall be provided with 
a device to prevent unintended car movement away 
from the landing with the hoistway door not in the 
locked position and the car door not in the closed posi- 
tion, as a result of failure in 

(a) the electric driving-machine motor, brake, cou- 
pling, shaft, or gearing 

(b) the control system 

(c) any other component upon which the speed of the 
car depends, except the suspension ropes and the drive 
sheave of the traction machine 



58 



2.19.2.2-2.19.3.2 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.19.2.2 Where Required and Function. All electric 
traction elevators shall be provided with a device (see 
2.26.2.30) that shall 

(a) detect unintended car movement away from the 
landing with the hoistway door not in the locked posi- 
tion and the car door not in the closed position. 

NOTE: Freight elevators provided with combination mechanical 
locks and contacts on the hoistway door shall detect the closed 
position of the hoistway door and the closed position of the car 
door. 

(1) If the detection means requires electrical power 
for its functioning 

(a) a loss of electrical power to the unintended 
movement detection and control means shall cause the 
immediate activation of the emergency brake as required 
in 2.19.2.2(b) 

(b) the occurrence of a single ground, or the fail- 
ure of any mechanically operated switch that does not 
meet the requirements of 2.26.4.3, any single magneti- 
cally operated switch, contactor, or relay, or any single 
solid-state device, or software system failure, shall not 
render the detection means inoperative 

(2) The failure of any single mechanically operated 
switch that does not meet the requirements of 2.26.4.3, 
shall not render the detection means inoperative. 

(3) When a fault specified in 2.19.2.2(a)(1)(b) or 
2.19.2.2(a)(2) is detected, the car shall stop at or before 
the next landing for which a demand was registered, 
and shall not be permitted to restart. 

(4) Once actuated by unintended movement, the 
detection means shall remain actuated until manually 
reset, and the car shall not start or run unless the detec- 
tion means is reset. 

(b) upon detection of unintended car movement, stop 
and hold the car, with any load up to rated load [see 
also 2.16.8(h)], by applying an emergency brake con- 
forming to 2.19.3, with the car movement limited in both 
directions, to a maximum of 1 220 mm (48 in.). The 
car shall not start or run unless the emergency brake 
provided for the unintended movement protection is 
reset. 

2.19.3 Emergency Brake (See Nonmandattory 
Appendix F) 

2.19.3.1 Where Required 

2.19.3.1.1 When required by 2.19.1 for protection 
against ascending car overspeed, an emergency brake 
(see 1.3) conforming to 2.19.3.2 shall be provided. 

2.19.3.1.2 When required by 2.19.2 for protection 
against unintended car movement, an emergency brake 
(see 1.3) conforming to 2.19.3.2 shall be provided. 

2.19.3.1.3 A single device shall be permitted to 
meet the requirements of both 2.19.3.1.1 and 2.19.3.1.2, 
or separate devices shall be provided. 



2.19.3.2 Requirements. The emergency brake is per- 
mitted to consist of one or more devices and shall 

(a) function to decelerate the car by acting on one or 
more of the following (see also 2.19.4): 

(1) counterweight [e.g., counterweight safety (see 
2.17.4 and 2.17.7)]. 

(2) car. 

(3) suspension or compensation rope system. 

(4) drive sheave of a traction machine. 

(5) brake drum or braking surface of the driving- 
machine brake, provided that the driving-machine brake 
surface is integral (cast or welded) with or directly 
attached to the driving-machine sheave. Attachments, 
where used, shall conform to 2.24.3 and 2.24.4.1. Weld- 
ing, where used, shall conform to 8.8. 

(b) be independent of the driving-machine brake. 

(c) not be used to provide, or assist in providing, the 
normal stopping of the car. When the emergency brake 
is activated during normal elevator stops, it shall only 
be applied to and released from a stationary braking 
surface. 

(d) not require the application of electrical power for 
its activation, nor be rendered inoperative by the failure 
of any power supply. 

(e) not on its own cause the car average retardation 
to exceed 9.8 m/s 2 (32.2 ft/s 2 ) during the stopping or 
slowdown phase during ascending car overspeed. 

(f) be designed so that the factors of safety based on 
the maximum stresses developed in the parts subject to 
load during the operation of the emergency brake shall 
comply with the following: 

(1) Where an emergency brake is activated only 
when protecting against either an ascending car 
overspeed condition or unintended car movement with 
the car and hoistway doors open, the minimum factors 
of safety, when applied during the retardation phase of 
emergency braking, shall be not less than those specified 
in 2.17.12.1. 

(2) Where an emergency brake is activated during 
normal stops of the elevator, the ntiriimum factors of 
safety, when applied during the retardation phase of 
emergency braking, shall be not less than those specified 
in 2.24.3.1 and 2.24.3.2. 

(3) Where an emergency brake acts on the suspen- 
sion or compensation rope system 

(a) the factor of safety with respect to the break- 
ing strength of the ropes shall be not less than 5 at any 
time during the retardation phase 

(b) it shall be designed to prevent appreciable 
damage or deformation to the ropes resulting from its 
activation 

(g) be arranged to be tested in accordance with the 
requirements specified in 8.10.2. 

(h) if the design of the emergency brake is such that 
field adjustment or servicing is required and the emer- 
gency brake acts on the brake drum or braking surface 



59 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.19.3.2-2.20.4 



of the driving-machine brake, it shall be provided with 
a sign stating "EMERGENCY BRAKE." The sign shall 
be located on the emergency brake at a location visible 
from the area likely to require service. The sign shall be 
of such material and construction that the letters shall 
remain permanently and readily legible. The height of 
the letters shall be not less than 6 mm (0.25 in.). 

2.19.3.3 Marking Plate Requirements. The emer- 
gency brake shall be provided with a marking plate 
indicating the range of total masses (car with attach- 
ments and its load) for which it is permitted to be used, 
the range of speeds at which it is set to operate, and the 
criteria such as rail lubrication requirements that are 
critical to the performance. 

2.19.4 Emergency Brake Supports 

All components and structural members, including 
their fastenings, subjected to forces due to the applica- 
tion of the emergency brake shall be designed to with- 
stand the maximum forces developed during the 
retardation phase of the emergency braking so that the 
resulting stresses shall not exceed those permitted for 
the applicable type of equipment as follows: 

(a) machinery and sheave beams (see 2.9.6) 

(b) guide rails and their supports (see 2.23.5.3) 

(c) counterweight frames (see 2.21.2.3.3) 

(d) car frames (see 2.15.10.2) 

(e) machines, sheaves, and bedplates (see 2.24.3.2) 



SECTION 2.20 
SUSPENSION ROPES AND THEIR CONNECTIONS 

2.20.1 Suspension Means 

Elevator cars shall be suspended by steel wire ropes 
attached to the car frame or passing around sheaves 
attached to the car frame specified in 2.15.1. Ropes that 
have previously been installed and used on another 
installation shall not be reused. 

Only iron (low-carbon steel) or steel wire ropes, hav- 
ing the commercial classification "Elevator Wire Rope," 
or wire rope specifically constructed for elevator use, 
shall be used for the suspension of elevator cars and for 
the suspension of counterweights. The wire material 
for ropes shall be manufactured by the open-hearth or 
electric furnace process or their equivalent. 

2.20.2 Wire Rope Data 

2.20.2.1 On Crosshead Data Plate. The crosshead 
data plate required by 2.16.3 shall bear the following 
wire-rope data: 

(a) the number of ropes 

(b) the diameter in millimeters (mm) or inches (in.) 

(c) the manufacturer's rated breaking strength per 
rope in kilo Newton (kN) or pounds (lb) 



2.20.2.2 On Rope Data Tag. A metal data tag shall 
be securely attached to one of the wire-rope fastenings. 
This data tag shall bear the following wire-rope data: 

(a) the diameter in millimeters (mm) or inches (in.) 

(b) the manufacturer's rated breaking strength 

(c) the grade of material used 

(d) the month and year the ropes were installed 

(e) the month and year the ropes were first shortened 
(/) whether the ropes were nonpreformed or pre- 
formed 

(g) construction classification 

(h) name of the person or organization who installed 
the ropes 

(i) name or trademark of the manufacturer of the 
ropes 

(j) lubrication information 

A new tag shall be installed at each rope renewal. 

The material and marking of the rope data tag shall 
conform to 2.16.3.3, except that the height of the letters 
and figures shall be not less than 1.5 mm (0.06 in.). 

2.20.3 Factor of Safety 

The factor of safety of the suspension wire ropes shall 
be not less than shown in Table 2.20.3. Figure 8.2.7 gives 
the minimum factor of safety for intermediate rope 
speeds. The factor of safety shall be based on the actual 
rope speed corresponding to the rated speed of the car. 

The factor of safety shall be calculated by the following 
formula: 

S xN 

/ - vv 

where 

N = number of runs of rope under load. For 2:1 

roping, N shall be two times the number of 

ropes used, etc. 
S = manufacturer's rated breaking strength of 

one rope 
W = maximum static load imposed on all car ropes 

with the car and its rated load at any position 

in the hoistway 

2.20.4 Minimum Number and Diameter of 
Suspension Ropes 

The minimum number of hoisting ropes used shall 
be three for traction elevators and two for drum-type 
elevators. 

Where a car counterweight is used, the number of 
counterweight ropes used shall be not less than two. 

The term "diameter," where used in reference to ropes, 
shall refer to the nominal diameter as given by the rope 
manufacturer. 

The minimum diameter of hoisting and counter- 
weight ropes shall be 9.5 mm (0.375 in.). Outer wires of 
the ropes shall be not less than 0.56 mm (0.024 in.) in 
diameter. 



60 



2.20.5-2.20.9.3.2 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



Table 2.20.3 Minimum Factors of Safety for 
Suspension Wire Ropes 



Rope Speed, 
m/s (ft/min) 



Minimum Factor of Safety 



Passenger 



Freight 



7.00- 



0.25 (50) 


0.37 (75) 


0.50 (100) 


0.62 (125) 


0.75 (150) 


0.87 (175) 


1.00 (200) 


1.12 (225) 


1.25 (250) 


1.50 (300) 


1.75 (350) 


2.00 (400) 


2.25 (450) 


2.50 (500) 


2.75 (550) 


3.00 (600) 


3.25 (650) 


3.50 (700) 


3.75 (750) 


4.00 (800) 


4.25 (850) 


4.50 (900) 


4.75 (950) 


5.00 (1,000) 


5.25 (1,050) 


5.50 (1,100) 


5.75 (1,150) 


6.00 (1,200) 


6.25 (1,250) 


6.50 (1,300) 


6.75 (1,350) 


10.00 (1,400-2,000) 



7.60 
7.75 
7.97 
8.10 
8.25 
8.40 

8.60 
8.75 
8.90 
9.20 
9.50 

9.75 
10.00 
10.25 
10.45 

10.70 
10.85 
11.00 
11.15 

11.25 
11.35 
11.45 
11.50 

11.55 
11.65 
11.70 
11.75 

11.80 
11.80 
11.85 
11.85 

11.90 



6.65 
6.85 
7.00 
7.15 
7.30 
7.45 

7.65 
7.75 
7.90 
8.20 
8.45 

8.70 
8.90 
9.15 
9.30 

9.50 
9.65 
9.80 
9.90 

10.00 
10.10 
10.15 
10.20 

10.30 
10.35 
10.40 
10.45 

10.50 
10.50 
10.55 
10.55 

10.55 



2.20.5 Suspension-Rope Equalizers 

2.20.5.1 Suspension-rope equalizers, where pro- 
vided, shall be of the individual compression spring 
type or shall meet the requirements of 2.20.5.3. Springs 
in tension shall not be used to attach suspension ropes. 

2.20.5.2 Single-bar-type equalizers shall be permit- 
ted only for winding drum machines with two ropes, 
to attach the ropes to the dead-end hitch plate, provided 
it meets the requirements of 2.20.5.3. 

2.20.5.3 Equalizers other than the individual com- 
pression spring type shall be permitted, provided that 
their strength is established through tensile engineering 
tests. Such tests shall show the ultimate strength of the 
equalizers and its fastenings in its several parts and 



assembly to be not less than 10% in excess of the strength 
of the suspension ropes as required by 2.20.3. 

2.20.6 Securing of Suspension Wire Ropes to 
Winding Drums 

Suspension wire ropes of winding-drum machines 
shall have the drum ends of the ropes secured on the 
inside of the drum by clamps. 

Where the ropes extend beyond their clamps or sock- 
ets, means shall be provided to prevent the rope ends 
from coming out of the inside of the drum and to prevent 
interference with other parts of the machine. 

2.20.7 Spare Rope Turns on Winding Drums 

Suspension wire ropes of winding drum machines 
shall have not less than one turn of the rope on the drum 
when the car is resting on the fully compressed buffers. 

2.20.8 Reserved 

2.20.9 Suspension-Rope Fastening 

2.20.9.1 Type of Rope Fastenings. The car and coun- 
terweight ends of suspension wire ropes, or the station- 
ary hitch-ends where multiple roping is used, shall be 
fastened in such a manner that all portions of the rope, 
except the portion inside the rope sockets, shall be 
readily visible. 

Fastening shall be 

(a) by individual tapered rope sockets (see 2.20.9.4) 
or other types of rope fastenings that have undergone 
adequate tensile engineering tests, provided that 

(1) such fastenings conform to 2.20.9.2 and 2.20.9.3; 

(2) the rope socketing is such as to develop at least 
80% of the ultimate breaking strength of the strongest 
rope to be used in such fastenings; or 

(b) by individual wedge rope sockets (see 2.20.9.5); 
and 

(c) U-bolt-type rope clamps or similar devices shall 
not be used for suspension rope fastenings. 

2.20.9.2 Adjustable Shackle Rods. The car ends, or 
the car or counterweight dead ends where multiple rop- 
ing is used, of all suspension wire ropes of traction-type 
elevators shall be provided with shackle rods of a design 
that will permit individual adjustment of the rope 
lengths. Similar shackle rods shall be provided on the 
car or counterweight ends of compensating ropes. 

2.20.9.3 General Design Requirements. Wire-rope 
fastenings shall conform to 2.20.9.3.1 through 2.20.9.3.8. 

2.20.9.3.1 The portion of the rope fastening that 
holds the wire rope (rope socket) and the shackle rod 
shall be in one piece (unit construction), or separate. 

2.20.9.3.2 The rope socket shall be either cast or 
forged steel, provided that where the rope socket and 
the shackle rod are in one piece (unit construction), the 
entire fastening shall be of forged steel. 



61 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.20.9.3.3-2.20.9.5.5 



2.20.9.3.3 Where the shackle rod and rope socket 
are not in one piece, the shackle rod shall be of forged 
or rolled steel. 

2.20.9.3.4 Cast or forged steel rope sockets, 
shackle rods, and their connections shall be made of 
unwelded steel, having an elongation of not less than 
20% in a gauge length of 50 mm (2 in.), when measured 
in accordance with ASTM E 8, and conforming to ASTM 
A 668, Class B for forged steel, and ASTM A 27, Grade 
60/30 for cast steel, and shall be stress relieved. Steels 
of greater strength shall be permitted, provided they 
have an elongation of not less than 20% in a length of 
50 mm (2 in.). 

2.20.9.3.5 Where the shackle rod is separate from 
the rope socket, the fastening between the two parts 
shall be positive, and such as to prevent their separation 
under all conditions of operation of the elevator. 

Where the connection of the two parts is threaded, 
the thread design, tolerance, and manufacture shall con- 
form to the requirements of ASME B1.13M, M-6H/6g, 
coarse or fine threads (ASME Bl.l, UNC or UNF Class 
2 A and Class 2B threads). The length of the thread 
engagement of the rod in the socket shall be not less 
than 1.5 times the root diameter of the thread on the rod, 
and a cotter pin or equivalent means shall in addition be 
provided to restrict the turning to the rod in the socket 
and prevent unscrewing of the connection in normal 
operation. 

Eye bolts used as connections with clevis-type sockets 
shall be of forged steel conforming to ASTM A 668, 
Class B (heat treated), without welds. 

2.20.9.3.6 Rope sockets shall be of such strength 
that the rope will break before the socket is materially 
deformed. 

2.20.9.3.7 The shackle rod, eye bolt, or other 
means used to connect the rope socket to the car or 
counter weight shall have a strength at least equal to 
the manufacturer's rated breaking strength of the rope. 

2.20.9.3.8 Rope fastenings incorporating antifric- 
tion devices that will permit free spinning of the rope 
shall not be used. 

2.20.9.4 Tapered Rope Sockets. Tapered rope sockets 
shall be of a design as shown in Fig. 2.20.9.4, and shall 
conform to 2.20.9.2 and 2.20.9.3, and 2.20.9.4.1 through 
2.20.9.4.5. 

2.20.9.4.1 The axial length L of the tapered portion 
of the socket shall be not less than 4.75 times the diameter 
of the wire rope used. 

2.20.9.4.2 The axial length, V, of the open portion 
of the rope socket shall be not less than 4 times the 
diameter of the wire rope used. 

2.20.9.4.3 The length of the straight bore, L", at 
the small end of the socket shall be not more than 13 mm 



(0.5 in.) nor less than 3 mm (0.125 in.), and its outer 
edge shall be rounded and free from cutting edges. 

2.20.9.4.4 The diameter, d, of the hole at the large 
end of the tapered portion of the socket shall be not less 
than 2.25 times nor more than 3 times the diameter of 
the wire rope used. 

2.20.9.4.5 The diameter, d' , of the hole at the end 
of the tapered portion of the socket shall be not more 
than shown in Table 2.20.9.4.5. 

2.20.9.5 Wedge Rope Sockets. Wedge socket assem- 
blies shall be of a design as shown in Fig. 2.20.9.5, and 
shall conform to 2.20.9.2 and 2.20.9.3, and 2.20.9.5.1 
through 2.20.9.5.6. 

2.20.9.5.1 A test specimen consisting of the 
strongest elevator wire rope for a given diameter and 
wedge socket assembly shall be subjected to a destruc- 
tive tensile engineering test. The rope socketing shall 
develop at least 80% of the ultimate breaking strength 
of the strongest rope to be used in such a fastening 
without the rope slipping through the assembly. 

2.20.9.5.2 Wedge socket assemblies shall be of 
such a strength that when tested as in 2.20.9.5.1, the 
rope shall break before the socket or wedge is materially 
deformed. 

2.20.9.5.3 Suppliers of wedge sockets shall submit 
certification showing that the sockets, with visible per- 
manent manufacturer's identification, have successfully 
passed the tests described in 2.20.9.5.1 and 2.20.9.5.2 at 
a testing laboratory. 

2.20.9.5.4 When the rope has been seated in the 
wedge socket by the load on the rope, the wedge shall 
be visible, and at least two wire-rope retaining clips 
shall be provided to attach the termination side to the 
load-carrying side of the rope (see Fig. 2.20.9.5). The 
first clip shall be placed a maximum of 4 times the rope 
diameter above the socket, and the second clip shall be 
located within 8 times the rope diameter above the first 
clip. The purpose of the two clips is to retain the wedge 
and prevent the rope from slipping in the socket should 
the load on the rope be removed for any reason. The 
clips shall be designed and installed so that they do not 
distort or damage the rope in any manner. 

2.20.9.5.5 Markings on the wedge socket assem- 
bly components shall be as follows: 

(a) Each socket shall be permanently and legibly 
marked or color-coded to identify the corresponding 
wedge, or wedges, and rope size to be used in the assem- 
bly. The markings shall be visible after installation. 

(b) Each wedge shall be permanently and legibly 
marked or color coded to identify the corresponding 
socket, or sockets, and rope size, within which it is to 
be inserted to form an assembly. The markings shall be 
visible after installation. 



62 



ASME A17.1S-2005 




See Noted) 



NOTE: 

(1) Rope socket and shackle rod may be in one piece, as shown 

(unit construction) or the socket and rod may be separate (see 2.20.9.3). 

Fig. 2.20.9.4 Tapered Rope Sockets 



Table 2.20.9.4.5 Relation of Rope Diameter to Diameter of the Small Socket Hole 



Nominal Rope 
Diameter, mm 



Maximum Diameter 
of Hole, d ', mm 



Nominal Rope 
Diameter, in. 



Maximum Diameter of Hole, 
d', in. 



2.5 larger than nominal rope diameter 

3 larger than nominal rope diameter 

4 larger than nominal rope diameter 

5 larger than nominal rope diameter 



10 to 12 inclusive 
13 to 19 inclusive 
22 to 29 inclusive 
32 to 40 inclusive 



3 /s to 7 / 16 

V 2 to % 

7 /s to lV 8 

1 X A to lV 2 



nclusive 
nclusive 
nclusive 
nclusive 



V32 larger than nominal rope diameter 

V 8 larger than nominal rope diameter 

V32 larger than nominal rope diameter 

Vis \srger than nominal rope diameter 



8 times rope 
diameter max 




4 times rope 
diameter max 



Load-carrying rope 
must be vertically 
in line with 
shackle rod 



y— Wire rope retaining 
/ clips (nonload carrying) 
X [see 2.20.9.5.4] 



Wedge 

Wedge socket 

Antirotation 
pin 

Shackle rod [Noted)] 



NOTE: 

(1) Rope socket and shackle rod may be 
in one piece, as shown (unit construction) 
or the socket and rod may be separate 
(see 2.20.9.3). 

Fig. 2.20.9.5 Wedge Rope Sockets 



63 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.20.9.5.6-2.20.9.7.2 



2.20.9.5.6 Load-carrying rope shall be in line with 
shackle rod, and the sockets shall be permitted to be 
staggered in the direction of travel of the elevator and 
counterweight, where used. 

2.20.9.6 Rope Socket Embedment Medium. Only bab- 
bitt metal or thermosetting resin compositions intended 
for elevator wire rope socketing shall be used to secure 
ropes in tapered sockets. The embedment material shall 
conform to 2.20.9.6.1 through 2.20.9.6.3. 

2.20.9.6.1 Babbitt Metal. Babbitt metal shall con- 
tain at least 9% of antimony and shall be clean and free 
from dross. 

2.20.9.6.2 Thermosetting Resin Composition 

(a) Physical Properties. The thermoset resin composi- 
tion shall have the following properties: 

(1) Uncured (Liquid) Material 

(a) Viscosity of Resin-Catalyst Mixture. The viscos- 
ity of the resin-catalyst mixture shall be sufficiently low 
to permit rapid, complete saturation of the rope rosette 
in order to prevent entrapment of air. 

(b) Flash Point. All components shall have a mini- 
mum flash point of 27°C (80°F). 

(c) Shelf Life. All components shall have a mini- 
mum of 1 year shelf life at 21°C (70°F). 

(d) Pot Life and Cure Time. After mixing, the resin- 
catalyst mixture shall be pourable for a minimum of 
8 min at 21°C (70°F) and shall cure within 1 h after 
hardening. Heating of the resin mixture in the socket to 
accelerate curing shall follow the resin manufacturer's 
instructions. 

(2) Cured Resin 

(a) Socket Performance. Resin, when cured, shall 
develop sufficient holding strength to solvent-washed 
wire in wire-rope sockets to develop 80% of the ultimate 
strength of all types of elevator wire rope. No slippage of 
wire is permissible when testing resin-filled rope socket 
assemblies in tension; however, after testing, some seat- 
ing of the resin cone shall be permitted to be apparent 
and is acceptable. Resin terminations shall also be capa- 
ble of withstanding tensile shock loading. 

(b) Shrinkage. The volumetric shrinkage of fully 
cured resin shall not exceed 2%. The use of an inert filler 
in the resin is permissible. 

(c) Curing. The resin-catalyst mixture shall be 
capable of curing either at ambient [16°C to 38°C (60°F 
to 100°F)] or elevated temperatures. At temperatures 
below 16°C (60°F), an elevated temperature cure shall 
be used. 

(b) Materials Required. The thermoset resin composi- 
tion intended for elevator wire rope socketing shall be 
supplied in two parts consisting of preweighed resin and 
preweighed catalyst, each packaged separately within a 
kit. Each kit containing the thermoset resin composition 
shall consist of the following: 

(1) preweighed thermoset resin 



(2) preweighed catalyst 

(3) necessary materials for mixing and pouring 

(4) detachable label on resin container 
(c) Marking 

(1) Resin Container. The label on the resin container 
shall show the following information: 

(a) product name 

(b) part designation (e.g., "Part A" or "Resin") 

(c) manufacturer's name or trademark and 
address 

(d) mixing instructions 

(e) ICC information 

(/) safety warnings and cautions 
(g) packaging date 
(h) flash point 
(i) shelf life 
(j) storage instructions 
(k) curing instructions 
(/) net weight 

(m) a statement certifying that the product con- 
forms to 2.20.9.6.2 of ASME A17.1 or CSA B44 

2.20.9.6.3 Catalyst Container. The label on the cata- 
lyst container shall show the following information: 

(a) product name 

(b) part designation (e.g., "Part B," "Catalyst," or 
"Hardener") 

(c) manufacturer's name or trademark and address; 

(d) safety warnings and cautions 

(e) flash point 

(/) storage instructions 
(g) net weight 

2.20.9.7 Method of Securing Wire Ropes in Tapered 
Sockets. Where the tapered type of socket is used, the 
method and procedure to be followed in making up the 
fastening shall conform to the following as applicable. 

2.20.9.7.1 Handling. The rope to be socketed shall 
be carefully handled to prevent twisting, untwisting, or 
kinking. 

2.20.9.7.2 Seizing of Rope Ends. The rope ends to 
be socketed shall be seized before cutting with seizing 
in accordance with the following: 

(a) The seizing shall be done with annealed iron wire, 
provided that other methods of seizing be permitted, 
which give the same protection from loss of rope lay. 
Where iron wire is used for seizing, the length of each 
seizing shall be not less than the diameter of the rope. 

(b) For nonpreformed rope, three seizings shall be 
made at each side of the cut in the rope. The first seizing 
shall be close to the cut end of the rope, and the second 
seizing shall be spaced back from the first the length of 
the end of the rope to be turned in. The third seizing 
shall be at a distance from the second equal to the length 
of the tapered portion of the socket. 



64 



2.20.9.7.2-2.20.9.8 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



(c) For preformed rope, one seizing shall be made at 
each side of the cut in the rope. The seizing shall be at 
a distance from the end of the rope equal to the length 
of the tapered portion of the socket plus the length of 
the portion of the rope to be turned in. 

2.20.9.73 Spreading of Rope Strands. After the 
rope has been seized, it shall be inserted into the socket 
through the hole in the small end, a sufficient distance 
for manipulation, and where nonpreformed rope is 
used, the first two seizings shall be removed. The rope 
strands shall then be spread apart, and where rope with 
fibre core is used, the fibre core shall be cut away as 
close as possible to the remaining seizing. 

2.20.9.7.4 Removal of Grease or OIL Thorough 
cleaning of the outer wires of the strand surface and the 
inside of the rope socket is required for good adhesion. 
Brush or dip in clean solvents is recommended. 

2.20.9.7.5 Turning in of Rope Strands. The exposed 
rope strands shall then be bent, turned in, and bunched 
closely together, each strand being turned back the same 
distance. The portion turned in (rope rosette) shall have 
a length of not less than 2.5 times the diameter of the 
rope, and such that, when the rope is pulled as far as 
possible into the socket, the bend of the turned-in strands 
shall be slightly overflush with the mouth of the tapered 
socket (large end) and will be visible when the socket 
has been completed (see 2.20.9.7.9). Where rope with 
steel core is used, the steel core shall be cut off even 
with tops of the looped strands. 

2.20.9.7.6 Insertion of Bent-Sn Rope Strands in 
Socket. The rope end shall be pulled as far as possible 
into the socket, so that the remaining seizing projects 
outside the hole at the small end of the socket. 

2.20.9.7.7 Position of Socket Preparatory to Pouring 
Embedment Medium. The socket shall be held in a verti- 
cal position with the large end up, and the rope held in 
a position truly axial with the socket. Tape or waste shall 
be permitted to be wound around the rope at the small 
end of the socket to prevent the embedment medium 
from seeping through, but shall be removed after com- 
pletion of the socket. 

2.20.9.7.8 Preparation of Embedment Medium 

(a) Babbitt Metal 

(1) Heating of Babbitt. The babbitt shall be heated 
to a fluidity just sufficient to char a piece of soft wood 
such as white pine without igniting it. Care shall be 
taken not to overheat the babbitt sufficiently to damage 
the rope. 

(2) Heating of Socket Basket and Pouring of Babbitt. 
The rope socket basket shall be heated by a blowtorch 
flame sufficiently to prevent chilling of the babbitt and 
to ensure that the babbitt, when poured, will completely 
fill the basket, including all the spaces between the rope 
strands. Following this the molten babbitt shall be 



poured slowly and evenly into the basket until it is 
filled to a point level with the top of the opening in the 
large end. 
(b) Thermosetting Resin Composition 

(1) The manufacturer's directions shall be strictly 
followed in handling, mixing, pouring, and curing the 
resin material. 

(2) New containers of resin and catalyst shall be 
utilized for each set of rope sockets. The entire quantity 
of resin and catalyst shall be mixed when the containers 
are opened. 

(3) Resin sockets shall not be poured at a tempera- 
ture below 16°C (60°F) without first warming the socket 
and the resin composition to 21 °C to 32°C (70°F to 90°F). 
The socket shall be permitted to be warmed using the 
electrical resistance heating devices intended for curing 
resin sockets. 

(4) Curing of resin sockets shall be accomplished 
by heating at elevated temperature following the manu- 
facturer's suggested schedule and directions. Cure time 
shall not exceed 30 min. Electrical resistance heating 
devices designed to fit around the sockets, or other 
means of providing controlled, evenly distributed heat, 
shall be used to provide the elevated temperature for 
curing. Open flames or exposed electrical resistance 
heating elements shall not be used. 

(5) Upon completion of the socketing, the label 
from the container of resin shall be attached to one of 
the rope sockets for inspection purposes and shall be 
suitably protected. 

2.20.9.7.9 inspection of Sockets After Completion. 

A visual inspection of the completed sockets shall be 
made after they have cooled and the tape or waste has 
been removed from the small end of the sockets. The 
visual inspection shall verify that 

(a) the embedment medium is visible at the small end 
of the socket 

(b) the bends of all of the individual rope strands (see 
2.20.9.7.5) are approximately the same height above the 
embedment medium and visible within the range of not 
less than one-half the diameter of the rope strand above 
the embedment medium and that there is not more than 
1.5 mm (0.06 in.) clearance between the embedment 
medium and the underside of the bend in the rope strand 

(c) no loss of rope lay has occurred where the wire 
rope enters the socket 

2.20.9.7.10 Lubrication of Wire Rope After Socket 
Attachment. After the resin has cured, the wire ropes 
shall be lubricated at the base of the socket (small end) 
to replace the lubricant that was removed during the 
cleaning operation required under 2.20.9.7.4. 

2.20.9.8 Antirotation Devices. Following the comple- 
tion of the rope socketing and any adjustments of indi- 
vidual shackle rods as provided for in 2.20.9.2, means 



65 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.20.9.8-2.21.2.3.1 



shall be provided to prevent the rotation of the suspen- 
sion ropes without restricting their movement horizon- 
tally or vertically. 

2.20.10 Auxiliary Rope Fastening Devices 

Auxiliary rope fastening devices, designed to support 
elevator cars or counterweights if any regular rope fas- 
tening fails, shall be permitted to be provided, subject 
to the requirements of 2.20.10.1 through 2.20.10.9. 

2.20.10.1 They shall be approved on the basis of 
adequate tensile and fatigue engineering tests. 

2.20.10.2 The device and its fastenings, in its several 
parts and assembly, shall have a strength at least equal 
to that of the manufacturer's breaking strength of the 
rope to which it is to be attached. 

2.20.10.3 Steel parts used in the device shall be 
cast or forged with an elongation of not less than 20%, 
conforming to ASTM A 668, Class B, for forgings and 
ASTM A 27, Grade 60/30 for cast steel, and shall be 
stress relieved. 

2.20.10.4 The device shall be so designed and 
installed that 

(a) it will not become operative unless there is a failure 
of the normal rope fastening 

(b) it will function in a rope movement of not over 
38 mm (1.5 in.) 

(c) it will not interfere with the vertical or rotational 
movements of the rope during normal service 

2.20.1 0.5 Means shall be provided to cause the elec- 
tric power to be removed from the driving-machine 
motor and brake when any auxiliary fastening device 
operates. Such means shall 

(a) have all electrical parts enclosed 

(b) be of the manually reset type that can be reset 
only when the wire rope or ropes have been resocketed 
and the auxiliary rope fastening device has been restored 
to its normal running position 

2.20.10.6 The method used to attach the device to 
the rope shall be such as to prevent injury to, or apprecia- 
ble deformation of, the rope. 

2.20.10.7 The installation of the device shall not 
reduce the required overhead clearances. 

2.20.10.8 The car-frame supports for the fastening 
members of the device shall conform to 2.15.13, or where 
existing conditions will not permit compliance with this 
requirement, other means of fastening shall be permitted 
to be used subject to the approval of the enforcing 
authority. 

2.20.10.9 Each device shall be permanently marked 
with the name or trademark of the manufacturer by 
means of metal tags or plates with the following data 



of the wire rope for which they are designated to be used: 

(a) diameter of the rope in millimeters (mm) or 
inches (in.) 

(b) manufacturer 's rated breaking strength of the rope 

(c) construction classification of the wire rope 

The material and marking of the tags or plates shall 
conform to 2.16.3.3, except that the height of the letters 
and figures shall be not less than 1.5 mm (0.06 in.). 

SECTION 2.21 
COUNTERWEIGHTS 

2.21.1 General Requirements 

2.21.1.1 Frames. Weight sections of a counterweight 
shall be mounted in structural or formed metal frames 
so designed as to retain them securely in place (see 
2.21.2.6). 

2.21.1.2 Retention of Weight Sections. Means shall 
be provided to retain weight sections in place in the 
event of buffer engagement or safety application or if 
they become broken. 

Where tie rods are used, a minimum of two shall be 
provided, which shall pass through all weight sections. 
Tie-rods shall be provided with a lock nut and cotter 
pin at each end. 

2.21.1.3 Guiding Members. Counterweight frames 
shall be guided on each guide rail by upper and lower 
guiding members attached to the frame. 

Retention means shall be provided to prevent the 
counterweight from being displaced by more than 
13 mm (0.5 in.) from its normal running position should 
any part of the guiding means fail, excluding the guiding 
member base and its attachment to the frame. The reten- 
tion means shall be permitted to be integral with the 
base. 

2.21.1.4 Independent Car Counterweights. Where an 
independent car counterweight is provided, it shall run 
in separate guide rails and shall not be of sufficient 
weight to cause undue slackening of the hoisting ropes 
during acceleration or retardation of the elevator car. 

2.21.2 Design Requirements for Frames and Rods 

2.21.2.1 Material. Frames and rods shall be made of 
steel or other metals conforming to 2.15.6.2 and 2.15.6.3, 
provided that where steels of greater strength than those 
specified, or where metals other than steel are used, 
the factor of safety used in the design shall conform to 
2.21.2.3. 

2.21.2.2 Frame Connections. Connections between 
frame members shall conform to 2.15.7. 

2.21.2.3 Factor of Safety 

2.21.2.3.1 The frame members and their connec- 
tions shall be designed with a factor of safety of not less 



66 



2.21.2.3.1-2.22.3.1 



ASMEA17.1S-2005 



than 5 with the elevator at rest and the counterweight 
at the top of its travel. 

2.21.2.3.2 The counterweight frame shall be 
designed with a factor of safety of not less than 2.5 at 
buffer engagement or safety application. 

2.21 .2.3.3 The frame members, brackets, and their 
connections subject to forces due to the application of 
the emergency brake (see 2.19.4) shall be designed to 
withstand the maximum forces developed during the 
retardation phase of the emergency braking so that the 
resulting stresses due to the emergency braking and all 
other loading acting simultaneously, if applicable, shall 
not exceed 190 MPa (27,500 psi). 

2.21.2.4 Sheaves. Where a hoisting sheave or 
sheaves are mounted in the frame, the requirements of 
2.15.12 shall apply (see also 2.24.2 and 2.24.3 for require- 
ments for sheaves). 

2.21.2.5 Suspension Rope Hitch m Shapes. Where 
counterweights are suspended by ropes attached 
directly to the frames by means of rope fastenings, the 
rope attachments shall conform to 2.15.13. 

2.21.2.6 Securing of Weights in Frames. The weights 
shall be so mounted and secured in the frames as to 
prevent shifting of the weights by an amount that will 
reduce the running clearances to less than those specified 
in 2.5.1.2. 

2.21.3 Cars Counterbalancing One Another 

An elevator car shall not be used to counterbalance 
another elevator car. 

2.21.4 Compensation Means 

Compensation means, such as compensating ropes or 
chains or other mechanical means and their attachments 
(except for safety hooks, where used) to tie the counter- 
weight and car together, shall be capable of withstand- 
ing, with a factor of safety of 5, any forces to which the 
means is subjected with the elevator at rest. 

The maximum suspended weight of compensation 
means with car or counterweight at the top of its travel 
and one-half total weight of tension sheave assembly, 
where used, shall be included. 

The factor of safety for compensation means shall 
be based on the proof load, breaking strength, or test 
reports. 

2.21.4.1 Connections. The connections between the 
car or counterweight and the compensation means, shall 
be bolted or welded and shall conform to 2.15.7.3. 

2.21.4.1.1 Cast iron, where used, shall have a fac- 
tor of safety of not less than 10, based on maximum 
stress developed. 

2.21.4.1.2 When compensation ropes are used 
with a tension sheave, one end of each rope shall be 



provided with a means to individually adjust rope 
length. 

2.21.4.2 Tie-Down Compensation Means. For rated 
speeds greater than 3.5 m/s (700 ft/min), a tie-down 
compensation means device shall be provided and fas- 
tened to the building structure to limit the jump of the 
car or counterweight as a result of car or counterweight 
buffer engagement or safety application. 

The device components, compensation means, con- 
nection, building structural members, and fastenings, 
shall be capable of withstanding with a factor of safety 
of not less than 2.5 the maximum forces to which they 
are subjected due to car or counterweight buffer engage- 
ment or safety application. 



SECTION 2.22 
BUFFERS AND BUMPERS 

2.22.1 Type and Location 

2.22.1.1 Type of Buffers. Buffers of the spring, oil, or 
equivalent type shall be installed under the cars and 
counterweights of passenger and freight elevators sub- 
ject to the requirements of 2.22.1.1.1 through 2.22.1.1.3. 

2.22.1.1.1 Spring buffers or their equivalent shall 
be permitted to be used where the rated speed is not 
in excess of 1 m/s (200 ft/min). 

2.22.1.1.2 Oil buffers or their equivalent shall be 
used where the rated speed is in excess of 1 m/s 
(200 ft/min). 

2.22.1.1.3 Where Type C safeties are used (see 
2.17.8.2), car buffers are not required if solid bumpers 
are installed. 

2.22.1.2 Location. Buffers or bumpers shall be 
located so as to retard the car and counterweight without 
exceeding allowable design stresses in the car frame and 
counterweight frame. 

2.22.2 Solid Bumpers 

Solid bumpers, where permitted, shall be made of 
wood or other suitably resilient material of sufficient 
strength to withstand without failure the impact of the 
car with rated load, or the counterweight, descending 
at governor tripping speed. 

The material used shall be of a type that will resist 
deterioration or be so treated as to resist deterioration. 

2.22.3 Spring Buffers 

2.22.3.1 Stroke. The stroke of the buffer spring, as 
marked on its marking plate, shall be equal to or greater 
than the value specified in Table 2.22.3.1. 



67 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.22.3.2-2.22.4.6 



Table 2.22.3.1 Minimum Spring Buffer Stroke 



Rated Car Speed, 
m/s (ft/min) 



Minimum Stroke, 
mm (in.) 



0.5 or less (100 or less) 
0.51 to 0.75 (101 to 150) 
0.76 to 1.00 (151 to 200) 



38 (1.5) 

63 (2.5) 

100 (4.0) 



2.22.3.2 Load Rating 

2.22.3.2.1 Buffers for cars and counterweights 
shall be capable of supporting, without being com- 
pressed solid or to a fixed stop, a static load having a 
minimum of 2 times the total weight of 

(a) the car and its rated load for car buffers 

(b) the counterweight for counterweight buffers 

2.22.3.2.2 Buffers for cars and counterweights 
shall be compressed solid or to a fixed stop with a static 
load of three times the weight of 

(a) the car and its rated load for car buffers 

(b) the counterweight for counterweight buffers 

2.22.3.2.3 Where the space below the hoistway is 
not permanently secured against access, the load rating 
specified in 2.22.3.2.1 shall be increased to meet the 
requirements of 2.6.1(b) and 2.6.2. 

2.22.3.3 Marking Plates. Each spring buffer shall be 
provided with a marking plate showing its load rating 
and stroke and the number of springs. Where the springs 
are removable, each spring shall be identified, and the 
assembly marking plate shall indicate this identification. 
Markings shall be made in a permanent and legible 
manner. 

2.22.4 Oil Buffers 

2.22.4.1 Stroke. The minimum stroke of oil buffers 
shall be based on the requirements of 2.22.4.1.1 or 
2.22.4.1.2. 

2.22.4.1.1 The stroke shall be such that the car or 
the counterweight, on striking the buffer at 115% of the 
rated speed, shall be brought to rest with an average 
retardation of not more than 9.81 m/s 2 (32.2 ft/s 2 ). 

2.22.4.1.2 Where terminal speed reducing device 
is installed that conforms to 2.25.4.1, and that will limit 
the speed at which the car or counterweight can strike 
its buffer, the buffer stroke shall be based on at least 
115% of such reduced striking speed and on an average 
retardation not exceeding 9.81 m/s 2 (32.2 ft/s 2 ). In no 
case shall the stroke used be less than 50% of the stroke 
required by 2.22.4.1.1 for rated speeds under 4 m/s 
(800 ft/min), nor less than 33V 3 %, or 450 mm (18 in.), 
whichever is greater, for rated speeds of 4 m/s 
(800 ft/min) or more. 



NOTE (2.22.4.1): Figure 8.2.4 indicates the minimum buffer strokes 
for various initial velocities. Table 2.22.4.1 indicates the minirnum 
buffer strokes for the most usual rated speeds. See formula in 8.2.4 
for calculation of buffer strokes differing from or exceeding those 
listed in Table 2.22.4.1. 

2.22.4.2 Retardation. Oil buffers shall develop an 
average retardation not in excess of 9.81 m/s 2 (32.2 ft/s 2 ), 
and shall develop no peak retardation greater than 
24.5 m/s 2 (80.5 ft/s 2 ), having a duration exceeding 0.04 s 
with any load in the car, from rated load to a rninimum 
load of 70 kg (154 lb), when the buffers are struck with 
an initial speed of not more than 

(a) 115% of the rated speed for buffers conforming to 
2.22.4.1.1 

(b) 115% of the predetermined reduced speed for buff- 
ers conforming to 2.22.4.1.2 

2.22.4.3 Factor of Safety for Oil-Buffer Parts. The fac- 
tor of safety of parts of oil buffers, based on the yield 
point for compression members and on the ultimate 
strength and elongation for other parts, at gravity retar- 
dation with the maximum load for which the buffer is 
designed, when tested in accordance with ASTM E8 
using a 50 mm (2 in.) gauge length, shall be not less than 

(a) 3 for materials having an elongation 20% or more 

(b) 3.5 for materials having an elongation from 15% 
to 20% 

(c) 4 for materials having an elongation from 10% 
to 15% 

(d) 5 for materials having an elongation less than 10% 

(e) 10 for cast iron parts 

2.22.4.4 Slenderness Ratio for Members Under Com- 
pression as Columns. The slenderness ratio (L/R) for 
members of oil buffers under compression as columns 
shall be not more than 80. 

The slenderness ratio (L/R) specified applies only to 
those main buffer members that are subject to the impact 
of the fully loaded car when striking the buffer. 

2.22.4.5 Plunger Return Requirements. Oil buffers 
shall be so designed that 

(a) the buffer plunger of gravity-return and spring- 
return-type oil buffers, when the buffer is filled with oil 
shall, when released after full compression, return to its 
fully extended position within 90 s 

(b) the plunger of a spring-return-type oil buffer with 
a 20 kg (44 lb) weight resting on it shall, when released 
after being depressed 50 mm (2 in.), return to the fully 
extended position within 30 s 

(c) gas spring-return oil buffers shall be provided with 
a switch corrforming to 2.26.2.22 which shall be actuated 
if the plunger is not within 13 mm (0.5 in.) of the fully 
extended position 

2.22.4.6 Means for Determining Oil Level. Oil buffers 
shall be provided with means for determining that the 
oil level is within the maximum and minimum allowable 
limits. Glass sight gauges shall not be used. 



68 



2.22.4.7-2.22.4.10.2 



ASME A17.1S-2005 







Table 2,22.4.1 


Minimum Oil Buffer Strokes 








SI Units 






imperial Units 






115% of 


Minimum 


i 


115% of 


Minimum 


Rated Speed, 


Rated Speed, 


Stroke, 


Rated Speed, 


Rated Speed, 


Stroke, 


m/s 


m/s 


mm 


ft/min 


ft/min 


in. 


1.00 


1.15 


65 


200 


230 


2.75 


1.12 


1.29 


85 


225 


269 


3.50 


1.25 


1.44 


105 


250 


288 


4.25 


1.50 


1.73 


155 


300 


345 


6.25 


1.75 


2.01 


205 


350 


402 


8.25 


2.00 


2.30 


270 


400 


460 


11.00 


2.25 


2.59 


340 


450 


517 


13.75 


2.50 


2.88 


425 


500 


575 


17.00 


3.00 


3.45 


605 


600 


690 


24.75 


3.50 


4.03 


825 


700 


805 


33.25 


4.00 


4.60 


1080 


800 


920 


43.75 


4.50 


5.18 


1 365 


900 


1,035 


55.50 


5.00 


5.75 


1685 


1,000 


1,150 


68.50 


5.50 


6.32 


2 040 


1,100 


1,265 


83.00 


6.00 


6.90 


2 425 


1,200 


1,380 


98.50 


6.50 


7.48 


2 845 


1,300 


1,495 


115.50 


7.00 


8.05 


3 300 


1,400 


1,610 


134.50 


7.50 


8.63 


3 790 


1,500 


1,725 


154.00 


8.00 


9.20 


4 310 


1,600 


1,840 


175.25 


8.50 


9.78 


4 870 


1,700 


1,955 


197.75 


9.00 


10.35 


5 460 


1,800 


2,070 


221.75 


9.50 


10.93 


6 080 


1,900 


2,105 


247.00 


10.00 


11.50 


6 740 


2,000 


2,300 


273.75 



2.22.4.7 Type Tests and Certification for Oil Buffers 

2.22.4.7.1 Each type of oil buffer shall be subjected 
to the type tests as specified in 8.3.2 and to the certifica- 
tion process as specified in 8.3.1. 

2.22.4.7.2 A type test on an oil buffer shall be 
permitted to be acceptable for similarly designed buff- 
ers, provided that the longest stroke of the type is sub- 
jected to the type test; and the load range of the buffer 
is within the maximum and niinimum range for the oil 
portings of the given buffer. 

2.22.4.7.3 Oil buffers tested in accordance with 
the test requirements of prior editions of ASME A17.1 
or CSA B44 shall be acceptable without being retested, 
provided the buffer has been listed/certified to a previ- 
ous edition of the Code or on submittal by the person or 
organization installing the buffers of the test certificate 
stating that the buffer, when tested, met the specified 
test requirements of that edition of the Code. 

2.22.4.8 Compression of Buffers When Car Is Level 
With Terminal Landings. Car and counterweight oil buff- 
ers of the mechanical spring-return type shall be permit- 
ted to be compressed not to exceed 25% of their stroke 



when the car is level with the terminal landings (see 
2.4.2.1). 

2.22.4.9 Buffer Oil Requirements. Oils used in oil 
buffers shall have a pour point of -18°C (0°F), or lower, 
as defined in ASTM D 97, and a viscosity index of 75, 
or higher, as defined in ASTM D 2270. 

2.22.4.10 Load Ratings of Oil Buffers. The minimum 
and maximum load ratings of car and counterweight 
oil buffers, as indicated on the buffer marking plate, 
shall conform to 2.22.4.10.1 through 2.22.4.10.3. 

2.22.4.10.1 The minimum load rating shall be not 
greater than 

(a) for car oil buffers, the total weight of the car as 
marked on the car crosshead data plate plus 70 kg 
(150 lb) 

(b) for counterweight oil buffers, the weight of the 
counterweight used 

2.22.4.10.2 The maximum load rating shall be not 
less than 

(a) for car oil buffers, the total weight of the car as 
marked on the crosshead data plate plus the rated load 



69 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.22.4.10.2-2.23.4 



(b) for counterweight oil buffers, the weight of the 
counterweight used 

2.22.4.10.3 When compensating rope tie-down is 
present, the increase in load shall be taken into account 
(see 2.17.17). 

2.22.4.11 Buffer Marking Plate. Every installed oil 
buffer shall have permanently attached thereto a metal 
plate, marked by the manufacturer in a legible and per- 
manent manner, indicating 

(a) the maximum and minimum loads and the maxi- 
mum striking speeds for which the buffer has been rated 
for use in conformance with the requirements in 2.22 

(b) the permissible range in viscosity of the buffer oil 
to be used, stated in Saybolt Seconds Universal at 38°C 
(100°F) 

(c) the viscosity index number of the oil to be used 

(d) the pour point in degrees Celsius (Fahrenheit) of 
the oil to be used 

(e) the stroke of the buffer in mm (in.) 

(f) the composition of the gas, if used 

(g) the name, trademark, or file number by which 
the organization that manufactured the product can be 
identified 

(h) the certification marking in accordance with 
8.3.1.3 

SECTION 2.23 
CAR AND COUNTERWEIGHT GUIDE RAILS, GUIDE- 
RAIL SUPPORTS, AND FASTENINGS 

2.23.1 Guide Rails Required 

Elevator cars and counterweights shall be provided 
with guide rails. 

2.23.2 Material 

Guide rails, guide-rail brackets, rail clips, fishplates, 
and their fastenings shall be either 

(a) of steel or other metals conforming to 2.23; or 

(b) where steel presents an accident hazard, as in 
chemical or explosive plants, guide rails shall be permit- 
ted to be of selected wood or other suitable nonmetallic 
materials, provided the rated speed of the car does not 
exceed 0.75 m/s (150 ft/min). 

2.23.2.1 Requirements for Steel, Where Used 

(a) Rails, brackets, fishplates, and rail clips shall be 
made of open-hearth steel, or its equivalent, having a 
tensile strength of not less than 380 MPa (55,000 psi) 
and having an elongation of not less than 22% in a length 
of 50 mm (2 in.) when measured in accordance with 
ASTM E 8. 

(b) Bolts shall conform to ASTM A 307. 

(c) Rivets shall conform to ASTM A 502. 

(d) Maximum permissible stresses and deflections 
shall conform to 2.23.5. 




T Section Rail 



Fig. 2.23.3 Elevator Guide Rails 



2.23.2.2 Requirements for Metals Other Than Steel. 

Metals other than steel shall be permitted to be used, 
provided the factor of safety is not less than, and the 
deflections are not more than, the values specified in 
this section, and provided that cast iron is not used. 

2.23.3 Rail Section 

Guide rails shall be either 

(a) T-section, conforming to the nominal weights and 
dimensions shown in Fig. 2.23.3 and Table 2.23.3; or 

(b) other shapes, subject to the following require- 
ments: 

(1) They shall have a section modulus and moment 
of inertia equal to or greater than that of the section 
shown in Fig. 2.23.3 for a given loading condition. 

(2) They shall have a sectional area sufficient to 
withstand the compressive forces resulting from the 
application of the car or counterweight safety device, 
if used. 

2.23.4 Maximum Load on Rails in Relation to the 
Bracket Spacing 

The maximum load on guide rails in relation to the 
bracket spacing shall conform to 2.23.4.1 through 
2.23.4.3. In addition to the loads specified therein any 
static and dynamic loads imposed by the support of 
machines, sheaves, and hitches, if any, on one or more 
guide rails shall be taken into account in deterrnining 
rail size and bracket spacing. 

The combination of all vertical loads on any single 
guide rail shall not exceed one-half of the values speci- 
fied in Fig. 2.23.4.1-1 in relation to the bracket spacing. 
This load requirement is not intended to limit design, 
and more detailed design and calculation methods shall 
be permitted to be used, provided that the moments 
and vertical loads induced into the rail system are taken 
into account in the calculations. 



70 



2.23.4-2.23.4.3.2 



ASJWE A17.1S-2005 









Table 2.23.3 


T-Seclion Guide-Rail Dimensions 












SI Units 












Imperial 


Units 






Nominal 




Nominal Dimensions, 




Nominal 




Nominal Dimensions, 




Mass, 






mm 






Weight, 
lb/ft 






in. 






kg/m 


A 


B 


C 





E 


A 


8 


C 


D 


f 


8.5 


68.3 


82.6 


9.1 


25.4 


6.0 


s 3 A 


2 n /i« 


37* 


23 / 

/64 


1 


15 / 

/6A 


9.5 


49.2 


69.9 


15.9 


25.4 


7.9 


6V 4 


l 15 /i6 


2 3 /< 


y 8 


1 


Vl6 


12.0 


61.9 


88.9 


15.9 


31.8 


7.9 


8 


2 7 / 16 


37 


y 8 


17 


Vl6 


16.5 


88.9 


114.3 


15.9 


38.1 


7.9 


11 


3V 2 


47 


Vs 


17 


V 16 


18.0 


88.9 


127.0 


15.9 


44.5 


7.9 


12 


37 2 


5 


5 / 8 


I 3 /, 


Vl6 


22.5 


88.9 


127.0 


15.9 


50.0 


12.7 


15 


3V 2 


5 


Vs 


i 3 7 32 


7 


27.5 


108.0 


139.7 


19.1 


50.0 


12.7 


187 2 


4 1 /* 


57 


V* 


i 3 7 32 


7 


33.5 


101.6 


139.7 


28.6 


50.8 


14.3 


22V 2 


4 


57 


iVi 


2 


y / 16 


44.5 


127.0 


139.7 


31.8 


57.2 


17.5 


30 


5 


57 


iVa 


27 


n / 16 



EXAMPLES (2.23.4): 

(1) SI Units. For 2 750 kg total weight of car plus load and a 2 150 kg 
counterweight, both roped 2:1; 90 kg suspension weight, 70 kg 
compensation weight, 20 kg traveling cable weight, and a 
machine weight of 360 kg; and with the machine supported 
in the overhead by one guide rail; the impacted reaction on 
that guide rail due to the machine loading is 2 750 kg + 2 150 kg 
+ 90 kg + 70 kg + 20 kg + 360 kg = 5 440 kg. The equivalent 
static loading per pair of guide rails is 5 440 kg and given a 
22.5 kg/m rail, there is a maximum bracket spacing of 
4 050 mm. 

(2) Imperial Units. For 6,000 lb total weight of car plus load and a 
4,700 lb counterweight, both roped 2:1; 200 lb suspension 
weight; 150 lb compensation weight; 45 lb traveling cable 
weight, and a machine weight of 800 lb; and with the machine 
supported in the overhead by one guide rail; the impacted 
reaction on that guide rail due to the machine loading is 6,000 lb 
+ 4,700 lb + 200 lb + 150 lb +45 lb + 800 lb = 11,895 lb. The 
equivalent static loading per pair of guide rails is 11,895 lb 
and given a 15 lb rail, there is a maximum bracket spacing of 
13 ft 3 in. 

2.23.4.1 With Single Car or Counterweight Safety. 

Where a single car or counterweight safety is used, the 
maximum suspended weight of the car and its rated 
load, or the maximum suspended weight of the counter- 
weight, including the weight of any compensation 
means and of any traveling cables suspended therefrom 
per pair of guide rails, shall not exceed the maximum 
specified in Fig. 2.23.4.1-1 for the size of the rail and the 
bracket spacing used, except that the bracket spacing 
shall be permitted to exceed the values specified in Fig. 
2.23.4.1-1, provided that 

(a) the guide rail is reinforced or a rail of larger size 
is used 

(b) the moment of inertia of a single reinforced rail 
or of a single larger size T-section about the x-x axis 
parallel to the base of the rail is not less than that required 
by Fig. 2.23.4.1-1 for the given weight of car plus load, 
or the counterweight with safety device, at the bracket 
spacing used 



(c) where the bracket spacings exceed those shown 
on Figs. 2.23.4.1-1 and 2.23.4.1-2, the rail system 

(1) conforms to 2.23.5 

(2) is designed to limit the deflection during the 
application of the safety with a fully loaded car to not 
more than 6 mm (0.25 in.) per rail 

EXAMPLES [2.23.4.1(c)]: 

(1) SI Units. For 5 500 kg total weight of car plus load and a bracket 
spacing of 4 875 mm, there is required 

(a) 27.5 kg/m rail without reinforcement; or 

(b) 22.5 kg/m rail with reinforcement having a combined 
moment of inertia of 3.3 mm x 10 6 mm 4 . 

(2) Imperial Units. For 12,000 lb total weight of car plus load and 
a bracket spacing of 16 ft in., there is a required 

(a) 18.5 lb rail without reinforcement; or 

(b) 15 lb rail with reinforcement having a combined moment 
of inertia of 8 in. 4 

2.23.4.2 With Two (Duplex) Car or Counterweight 
Safeties. Where the car or counterweight is provided 
with two safety devices, the loads specified in Fig. 
2.23.4.1-1 shall be permitted to be increased by the fac- 
tors specified in Table 2.23.4.2. 

2.23.4.3 Counterweight With No Safety 

2.23.4.3.1 Guide rails for counterweights not pro- 
vided with a safety device shall be fastened to the build- 
ing structure at intervals specified in Table 2.23.4.3.1, 
except as specified in 2.23.4.3.2, and the weight of the 
counterweight for each size of guide rail shall not exceed 
that specified in Table 2.23.4.3.1. 

2.23.4.3.2 The bracket spacing specified shall be 
permitted to be increased by an amount determined by 
Figs. 2.23.4.1-1 and 2.23.4.1-2, subject to the following 
requirements: 

(a) where guide rails are reinforced or a larger rail 
section is used having a moment of inertia, about an 
axis parallel to the base [x-x axis in Fig. 2.23.4.1-2], at 



71 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



> 

H— 

CD 
(/) 

C 

o 



24000(52,863) 

23000(50,661) 

22000(48,458) 

21000(46,256) 

20000(44,053) 

19000(41,850) 

18000(39,648) 

17 000(37,445) 

16000(35,242) 

15000(33,040) 

14000(30,837) 

13000(28,634) 

12000(26,432) 

11000(24,229) 

10000(22,026) 

9000(19,824) 

8000(17,621) 

7 000(15,419) 

6000(13,216) 

5000(11,013) 

4000(8,811) 

3000(6,608) 

2000(4,405) 

1 000 (2,203) 




I I I I I I I I I 












1 


! 










i 










_i* 


1.5 kg {30 lb) 


ra 


I 














i 
























-H 




™_| L—E\ 
















i 
























| i 


i i r 
















i 






























! 

_JL_ 


j 














i 






























II 


| 
















j 














i 




















_L 




















\ 


i 


_L ■ 


j 




















I 




















I 




S t~ 


i 










-j 




•4- 




_ 










-j 










._ 


i 


1 


I ! 






_ 


_ 












1 




1 




j 




-4- 


_ 


._i_ 




..... 




_ 




















Si 


_j_. 


-] 


_ 


























1 












f [ 






























j 






^ 




i 
























I 






j 


















j 
























_ 




~f\ 






















i 














s 
























| 


... 














j 














l 


lS^ 














j 












| 
















i 


















^L, 


I 












i 

_i— J 














j 


i 










^ 


c 


<g(; 


9 ft 


k\L« 


;i 
























1 j — 


__j — ! 










sJJ^ 






i 




















i 












j I 




i 


i i 
























i 










Ji_|_i 


i 


i i 




L_L 






ui^ 


s *n 












! 








TTm 


[~T~ 


! i 












i 


^N 


~-j~j~- 




— j™, 








_Lj_LLi 


j 


, j_ _i__ 


























i 












I ! 


i 


I i 










i 










IT 
















j j 


i 

_1_ 


j | 






















! 


I 


"^vL 










i ; 


8.5 












i 










1 


I 








?7 o Ky : \ 


t))jre 


II 










i 












— 




1 


I i 






till 




I 










i 
















TT 






' M ■ 


j 


I 






















s^^*^^ 


is* 






1 1 r i 


j 


i 






















1 i l 1 


_22i5kg|(- 


5 lb 


rail 







44 


_j_ 


— 












_J_. 


4-f 


"ff 


i 


- 








! f 




i 














1 ! 

i I 

! 1 


1 




r [■"-] j 


f i r i 




i I" 




— i 

i 










"T8}lcqflt 2 ' 


1 1 j 

Ibpnai 


i 




| [__ 




I J 












! ! 


^^^ 


1 


ii; 


i 




! i 
















1 lT^ 


1 




i I T\ 


i i i i 




! I 




\ 










^•^^i^ 




1 




j 




-ie 


5 


kg (11 h lh» 


n 


j| 




i | 




\ 








^^^^Z^ 


I 










I l 






f I 




i 












! | 




1 




~12 


kc 


(fcl 


! j 
b)|ra|il 






i I 




T 












r-j j ^ 


\ I 


i 




I f 




i 












_l | ! 


1 I 


1 




! 1 




i i 


! 




^■^■i^ 




■"H" 










f f i 


! i 






! ! 

! L j 




s 




j 






I 




!_ 








^ 


! 


i ! 


i 




i r 


I i 




i 






| 




, j- 


1814 






^ 


H1943 1 




1 1 


; ] [ 




! 




I [ 




I 


LTjOOAV 


i 


| | 


; n 1 11 1 


■■ 'j 




I I 






















i ' 









14515(31,971) 



9980(21,982) 



8165(17,985) 



5443(11,989) 

4062(8,991) 
3630(7,996) 



1 

(3.3) 



2 

(6.6) 



3 
(9.8) 



4 
(13) 



Bracket Spacing, m (ft) 

Fig. 2.23.4.1-1 Maximum Weight of a Car With Rated Load or of Counterweight With Safety Device for a 

Pair of Guide Rails as Specified in 2.23.4.1 



72 



ASA/IE Al 7. 1S-2005 



tt 



.a 








J2 


3000(6,608) 


(0 




o 


2000(4,405) 


Q. 




a> 
a. 
+-• 


1 000 (2,203) 


1 




TO 

|2 






/ = 0.583 
(1.40) 



yv* 







1 
1 






<i 








2495 
157500) 





1 


<$ # 


— --■ 


---- 


-- 


. 










































i 
i 


















i 

i 









0.5 

(1.2) 



1 
(2.4) 



1.5 
(3.6) 



2 

(4.8) 



Moment of Inertia, mm 4 x 10 6 (12 kg Rail) 
Moment of Inertia, in. 4 (8 lb Rail) 



6000(13,216) 
5000(11,013) 
4000(8,811) 
3000(6,608) 
2 000(4,405) 
1 000 (2,203) 





/=1.79 
(4.29) 




1 
(2.4) 



2 

(4.8) 



3 
(7.2) 



4 
(9.6) 



Moment of Inertia, mm 4 x 10 6 (16.5 kg Rail) 
Moment of Inertia, in. 4 (11 lb Rail) 

Fig. 2.23.4.1-2 Minimum Moment of Inertia About x-x Axis for a Single Guide Rail With Its 

Reinforcement 



73 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



¥ 






<r 
o 



-C 



6000(12,216) 

5000(11,013) |- 

4000(8,811) 

3000(6,608) 

2000(4,405) 

1 000 (2,203) 







(2.4) 



(4.8) 



(7.2) 



(9.6) 



(12) 



Moment of Inertia, mm 4 x 10 6 (18 kg Rail) 
Moment of Inertia, in. 4 (12 lb Rail) 



7 000(15,421) — 



6000(13,216) 
5000(11,013) 
4000(8,811) 
3000(6,608) 
2 000 (4,405) 
1 000 (2,203) 








1 


2 


3 


4 


5 


6 


7 


8 


(2.4) 


(4.8) 


(7.2) 


(9.6) 


(12.0) 


(14.4) 


(16.8) 


(19.2) 



Moment of Inertia, mm 4 x 10 6 (22.5 kg Rail) 
Moment of Inertia, in. (15 lb Rail) 



Fig. 2.23.4.1-2 Minimum Moment of Inertia About x-x Axis for a Single Guide Rail With Its 

Reinforcement (Cont'd) 



74 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



/ = 4.025 
(9.66) 



& 


10000(22,026) 


OJ 


9000(19,824) 


_W 


8000(17,621) 


co 
DC 


7 000(15,421) 


O 

L- 


6000(13,216) 


0_ 


5000(11,013) 




4000(8,811) 


TO 


3000(6,608) 


CD 


2000(4,405) 


|2 


1 000 (2,203) 








;4_9 525 _ f 

- (20,980) 




2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 

(4.8) (7.2) (9.6) (12.0) (14.4) (16.8) (19.2) (21.6) (24.0) (26.4) (28.8) (31.2) 



Moment of Inertia, mm 4 x 10 6 (27.5 kg Rail) 
Moment of Inertia, in. 4 (18.5 lb Rail) 



/=4.65 
(11.16) 



JO 


14000(30,837) 
12 000(26,432) 


cc 

4- 

o 


10000(22,026) 


co 
Q. 


8000(17,621) 


CD 
Q_ 


6000(13,216) 


.c 


4000(8,811) 


CO 


2 000 (4,405) 


£ 







2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 
(4.8) (7.2) (9.6) (12.0)(14.4) (16.8)(19.2)(21.6)(24.0)(26.4)(28.8) (31.2) 



Moment of Inertia, mm 4 x 10 6 (33.5 kg Rail) 
Moment of Inertia, in. 4 (22.5 lb Rail) 

Fig. 2.23.4.1-2 Minimum Moment of Inertia About x-x Axis for a Single Guide Rail With Its 

Reinforcement (Cont'd) 



75 



ASME A17.1S-2005 







/=10.0 
(24.0) 



24000(52,863) 

22 000 (48,458) 

20 000(44,053) 

18000(39,648) 

16000(35,242) 

14000(30,837) 

12 000(26,432) 

10 000(22,026) 

8000(17,621) 

6000(13,216) 

4000(8,811) 

2000(4,405) 






3.5 m (11.5 ft) spacing 
4.0 m (13 ft) spacing 

4.5 m (15 ft) spacing 



9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 

(21.6) (24.0) (26.4) (28.8) (31.2) (33.6) (38.4) (36.0) (40.8) (43.2) (45.6) (48.0) (56.4) 



Moment of Inertia, mm 4 x 10 6 (44.5 kg Rail) 
Moment of Inertia, in. 4 (30 lb Rail) 

Fig. 2.23.4.1-2 Minimum Moment of Inertia About x-x Axis for a Single Guide Rail With Its 

Reinforcement (Cont'd) 



Table 2.23.4.2 Load Multiplying Factor for Duplex 
Safeties 



Vertical Distance 




Between Safeties, 


Multiply Load in 


mm (in.) 


Fig. 2.23.4.1-1 by 


5 400 (212 or more) 


2.00 


4 600 (182) 


1.83 


3 700 (146) 


1.67 


2 700 (106) 


1.50 



76 



2.23.4.3.2-2.23.7.1 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



Table 2.23.4.3.1 





SI Units 






Imperial Units 






Nominal 


Maximum Bracket 




Nominal 


Maximum Bracket 


Mass of 


Mass of 


Spacing Without 


Weight of 


Weight of 


Spacing Without 


Counterweight, 


Guide Rail, 


Reinforcement, 


Counterweight, 


Guide 


Reinforcement, 


kg 


kg/m 


mm 


lb 


Rail, lb/ft 


ft 


3 000 


9.5 


3 000 


6,600 


6 1 /, 


10 


4 000 


8.5 


4 400 


8,800 


5% 


14.5 


7 000 


12.0 


4 900 


15,000 


8 


16 


12 000 


16.5 


4 900 


27,000 


11 


16 


13 000 


18.0 


4 900 


29,000 


12 


16 


18 000 


22.5 


4 900 


40,000 


15 


16 


25 000 


27.5 


4 900 


56,000 


18 1 /, 


16 


36 000 


33.5 


4 900 


80,000 


22V 2 


16 


60 000 


44.5 


4 900 


133,000 


30 


16 



Table 2.23.4.33 Intermedial® Tie iiractos 



Nominal Distance Between 
Fastenings to Building Structure, mm (in.) 

For 8.5 kg (6V4 lb) Rail For All Other Rails 



Number of 
Intermediate 
Tie Brackets 



0-3 300 (0-130) 

3 301-3 800 (130-150) 

3 801-4 400 (150-173) 



0-3 700 (0-146) 

3 701-4 300 (147-169) 1 

4 301-4 900 (170-193) 2 



least equal to that of the rail sections shown in Table 
2.23.3, based on the weight of the counterweight 

(b) where intermediate tie brackets, approximately 
equally spaced, are provided between the guide rails at 
intervals oi not over 2 130 mm (84 in.) 

2.23.4.3.3 Intermediate tie brackets, approxi- 
mately equally spaced, shall be provided between the 
guide rails at intervals as specified in Table 2.23.4.3.3. 
Intermediate tie brackets are not required to be fastened 
to the building structure. 

2.23.5 Stresses and Deflections 
2.23.5.1 Guide Rails 

2.23.5.1.1 For steels conforming to 2.23.2.1, the 
stresses in a guide rail, or in the rail and its reinforcement 
shall not exceed 105 MPa (15,000 psi), based upon the 
class of loading, and the deflection shall not exceed 6 mm 
(0.25 in.). The loads used to determine the guide rail 
stress and deflection shall include vertical and moment 
loads transferred into the rail, which are imposed by 
equipment supported by the guide rail, combined with 
the horizontal forces imposed on the rail during loading, 
unloading, or running, calculated without impact (see 
2.16.2.2 and 8.2.2.6). 

2.23.5.1.2 Where steels of greater strength than 
those specified in 2.23.2.1 are used, the stresses specified 
may be increased proportionately, based on the ratio of 
the ultimate strengths. 



2.23.5.2 fBtraick@£s Fastenings, and Supports. The 
guide-rail brackets, their fastenings, and supports, such 
as building beams and walls, shall be capable of resisting 
the horizontal forces imposed by the class of loading 
(see 2.16.2.2 and 8.2.2.6) with a total deflection at the 
point of support not in excess of 3 mm (0.125 in.). 



afbl® 3£r®ss@s Poe to Emergency Brak- 
ing. Guide rails, brackets, supports, and their fastenings 
subject to forces due to the application of the emergency 
brake (see 2.19.4) shall be designed to withstand the 
maximum forces developed during the retardation 
phase of the emergency braking so that the resulting 
stresses due to the emergency braking and all other 
loading acting simultaneously, if applicable, shall not 
exceed 190 MPa (27,500 psi). 



Guide-rail surfaces used for guiding a car or counter- 
weight shall be sufficiently smooth and true to operate 
properly with the guiding members. Those surfaces that 
the car or counterweight safeties engage shall be smooth 
and true within the tolerances required to ensure proper 
safety application without excessive retardation or 
excessive out-of -level platform conditions resulting (see 
2.17.3, 2.17.9.2, and 2.17.16). 



2.23. 7. a Type and Strength of Hail Joints. Metal 
guide-rail sections shall be joined together as specified 



77 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.23.7.1-2.23.9.2.2 



Table 2.23.7.2.1 Minimum Thickness of Fishplates and Minimum Diameter of Fastening Bolts 





SI Units 






Imperial Units 




Nominal Mass 


Minimum Thickness 


Minimum Diameter 


Nominal Weight 


Minimum Thickness 


Minimum Diameter 


of Guide Rail, 


of Fish Plates, 


of Bolts, 


of Guide Rail, 


of Fish Plates, 


of Bolts, 


kg/m 


mm 


mm 


lb/ft 


in. 


in. 


8.5 


9.5 


M12 


5 3 A 


V 8 


y 2 


9.5 


9.5 


M12 


6V4 


% 


y 2 


12.0 


14.0 


M12 


8 


9 Ae 


y 2 


16.5 


17.0 


M16 


11 


A 6 


5 / 8 


18.0 


17.0 


M16 


12 


A 6 


Vs 


22.5 


17.0 


M16 


15 


A 6 


Vb 


27.5 


20.0 


M20 


I8V2 


13 / 
he 


% 


33.5 


20.0 


M20 


22V 2 


13 / 
/16 


% 


44.5 


23.0 


M20 


30 


15 / 

A 6 


3 A 



in 2.23.7.2. The jointed rail sections shall withstand the 
forces specified in 2.23.5.1 without exceeding the stress 
and deflection limitations. 

2.23.7.2 Design and Construction of Rail Joints 

2.23.7.2.1 The joints of metal guide rails with T- 
section profiles as specified in 2.23.3(a) shall conform to 
the following requirements: 

(a) The ends of the rails shall be accurately machined 
with a tongue and matching groove centrally located in 
the web. 

(b) The backs of the rail flanges shall be accurately 
machined, in relation to the rail guiding surfaces, to a 
uniform distance front to back of the rails to form a flat 
surface for the fishplates. 

(c) The ends of each rail shall be bolted to the fish- 
plates with not fewer than four bolts that conform to 
Table 2.23.7.2.1. 

(d) The width of the fishplate shall be not less than 
the width of the back of the rail. 

(e) The thickness of the fishplates and the diameter 
of the bolts for each size of guide rail shall be not less 
than specified in Table 2.23.7.2.1. 

(f) The diameter of bolt holes shall not exceed the 
diameter of the bolts by more than 2 mm (0.08 in.) for 
guide rails nor 3 mm (0.125 in.) for fishplates. 

2.23.7.2.2 Joints of different design and construc- 
tion shall be permitted to be used, provided they are 
equivalent in strength and will adequately maintain the 
accuracy of the rail alignment. 

2.23.8 Overall Length of Guide Rails 

The car and counterweight guide rails shall extend at 
the top and bottom to prevent the guiding members (see 
2.15.2 and 2.21.1.3) from disengaging from the guide 
rails in the event that either the car or counterweight 
reaches its extreme limit of travel. 



2.23.9 Guide-Rail Brackets and Building Supports 

2.23.9.1 Design and Strength of Brackets and Sup- 
ports 

2.23.9.1.1 The building construction forming the 
supports for the guide rails and the guide-rail brackets 
shall be designed to 

(a) safely withstand the application of the car or coun- 
terweight safety when stopping the car and its rated 
load or the counterweight 

(b) withstand the forces specified in 2.23.5.2 within 
the deflection limits specified 

2.23.9.1.2 Walls of bricks, terra-cotta, hollow 
blocks, and similar materials shall not be used for attach- 
ment of guide-rail brackets unless adequately rein- 
forced. 

2.23.9.1 .3 Where necessary, the building construc- 
tion shall be reinforced to provide adequate support for 
the guide rails. 

2.23.9.2 Bracket Fastenings 

2.23.9.2.1 Guide-rail brackets shall be secured to 
their supporting structure by one of the following 
means: 

(a) by bolts or rivets 

(b) by using clip fastenings to mount brackets to the 
building structure, provided that 

(1) the friction force of such clips has a minimum 
factor of safety of 10 

(2) an additional means, having a safety factor of 
not less than 5, of resisting horizontal shear is incorpo- 
rated 

(c) by welding conforming to 8.8 

2.23.9.2.2 Fastening bolts and bolt holes in brack- 
ets and their supporting beams shall conform to 2.23.10. 



78 



2.23.9.3-2.24.3.1.1 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



Table 2.23.10.2 



Minimum Size of Rail-Fastening 
Bolts 



2.24.2 Sheaves and Drums 



SI Units 



Imperial Units 



Nominal 

Mass of 

Guide Rail, 

kg/m 



Minimum 

Diameter of 

Rail Bolts, 

mm 



Nominal 

Weight of 

Guide Rail, 

lb/ft 



Minimum 

Diameter of 

Rail Bolts, 

in. 



8.5 
9.5 
12.0 

16.5 
18.0 
22.5 

27.5 
33.5 
44.5 



M12 
M12 
M12 

M16 
M16 
M16 

M16 
M20 
A/120 



6Va 
8 

11 
12 
15 

18V 2 

22V 2 

30 



y 2 
y 2 

X A 

Vs 
Vs 

Vs 

Vs 

V* 



2.23.93 Slotted guide-rail brackets having single- 
bolt fastenings shall be provided with an additional 
means to prevent lateral movement of the rail bracket. 
Such means shall have a factor of safety of not less than 5. 

2.23.10 Fastening of Guide Rails to Rail Brackets 

2.23.10.1 Type of Fastenings. Guide rails shall be 
secured to their brackets by clips, welds, or bolts. 

Bolts used for fastening shall be of such strength as 
to withstand the forces specified in 2.23.5.2 and 2.23.9.1. 
Welding, where used, shall conform to 8.8. 

2.23.10.2 Size of Bolts for Fastening. The size of bolts 
used for fastening the guide rails or rail clips to the 
brackets shall be not less than specified in Table 2.23.10.2. 

2.23.10.3 Bolt Holes for Fastenings. The diameter of 
holes or the width of slots for fastening bolts shall not 
exceed the diameter of the bolt by more than 2 mm 
(0.08 in.). 



SECTION 2.24 
DRMNG MACHINES AND SHEAVES 

2.24.1 Type of Driving Machines 

All driving machines shall be of the traction type, 
except that winding-drum machines shall be permitted 
for freight elevators, subject to the following: 

(a) They shall not be provided with counterweights. 

(b) The rated speed of the elevator shall not exceed 
0.25 m/s (50 ft/min). 

(c) The travel of the elevator car shall not exceed 
12.5 m (40 ft). 

NOTE (2.24.1): See 4.1 for rack-and-pinion machines and 4.2 for 
screw machines. 



2.24.2.1 Material and Grooving. Sheaves and drums 
used with suspension and compensating ropes shall be 
of metal and provided with finished grooves for ropes 
or shall be permitted to be lined with nonmetallic groove 
material. 



2.24.2.2 Minimnjm Pitch Diameter. Sheaves and 
drums used with suspension and compensating ropes 
shall have a pitch diameter of not less than 

(a) 40 times the diameter of the rope where used with 
suspension ropes 

(b) 32 times the diameter of the ropes where used 
with compensating ropes 

2.24.2.3 Traction 

2.24.2.3.1 Where the grooves are used to transmit 
power, sufficient traction shall be provided between the 
rope and groove, and in the event of nonmetallic lining 
failure, between the rope and the remaining sheave 
groove, to safely stop and hold the car with rated load 
[see 2.16.8(c)] from rated speed in the down direction. 

2.24.2.3.2 If either the car or the counterweight 
bottoms on its buffers or becomes otherwise immovable 

(a) the ropes shall slip in the drive sheave grooves 
and not allow the car or counterweight to be raised; or 

(b) the driving system shall stall and not allow the 
car or counterweight to be raised. 

2.24.2.4 Minim™ Sheave and Drum Diameter. Drive 
sheaves and drums shall be permanently and legibly 
marked to state the minimuin sheave or drum diameter, 
measured at the bottom of the groove, that is required 
to maintain structural integrity (see 2.24.3). 

2.24.3 Factor of Safety for Driving Machines and 
Sheaves 

The factor of safety to be used in the design of driving 
machines, and in the design of sheaves used with sus- 
pension and compensating ropes, shall be not less than 

(a) 8 for metals having an elongation of at least 14% 
in a gauge length of 50 mm (2 in.) when tested in accor- 
dance with ASTM E 8 

(b) 10 for cast iron, or for metals having an elongation 
of less than 14% in a gauge length of 50 mm (2 in.) when 
tested in accordance with ASTM E 8 

The load to be used in detemiining the factor of safety 
shall be the resultant of the maximum tensions in the 
ropes leading from the sheave or drum with the elevator 
at rest and with the rated load in the car. 



2.24.3.1 Factors of Safety Based 
Reversing Stresses 



\l 



2.24.3.1.1 Driving-machine components sub- 
jected to alternating or reversing stresses shall have a 
factor of safety of not less than 1.5. 



79 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.24.3.1.2-2.24.8.6 



2.24.3.1.2 This factor of safety shall be the ratio 
of the endurance limit of the components (see 1.3) to 
the actual alternating or reversing stress to which the 
components can be subjected under any normal 
operating condition. The endurance limit shall be based 
on 10 7 cycles of stress reversals. The actual stress shall 
include all designed or anticipated load conditions and 
stress risers, such as sharp corners, shock loading, sur- 
face finish, key ways, material variations, alignment tol- 
erances, etc. 

2.24.3.2 Factors of Safety at Emergency Braking. 

Driving-machine components including bedplate, 
where used, subject to forces due to the application of 
the emergency brake (see 2.19.4) shall be designed to 
withstand the maximum forces developed during the 
retardation phase of the emergency braking so that the 
factor of safety resulting from the emergency braking 
and all other loading acting simultaneously, if applica- 
ble, shall be not less than those specified in 2.24.3(a) and 
2.24.3(b). 

2.24.4 Fasteners Transmitting Load 

2.24.4.1 Fasteners and Rigid Connections. Set screws 
or threaded portions located in the shear plane of bolts 
and screws shall not be used to transmit load. 

Means shall be provided to ensure that there is no 
relative motion between rigidly joined components 
transmitting load. 

The factors of safety to be used in the design of fasten- 
ers transmitting load in driving machines and sheaves 
shall be not less than those specified in 2.24.3. 

2.24.4.2 Flexible Connections. Where flexible cou- 
plings are used to transmit load, means shall be provided 
to prevent disengagement of the coupling components 
in the event of the failure of or excessive motion in the 
flexible connection. 

2.24.5 Shaft Fillets and Keys 

A fillet shall be provided at any point of change in the 
diameter of driving-machine shafts and sheave shafts to 
prevent excessive stress concentrations in the shafts (see 
2.24.3.1). 

Shafts that support drums, sheaves, gears, couplings, 
and other members, and that transmit torque, shall be 
provided with tight-fitting keys. 

2.24.6 Cast-Iron Worms and Worm Gears 

Worms and worm gears made of cast iron shall not 
be used in elevator driving machines. 

2.24.7 Friction Gearing and Clutches 

Friction gearing or a clutch mechanism shall not be 
used to connect a driving-machine drum or sheave to 
the main driving mechanism. 



2.24.8 Braking System and Driving-Machine Brakes 
(See Nonmandatory Appendix F, Table Fl) 

2.24.8.1 General Requirements. The elevator shall be 
provided with a braking system conforming to 2.24.8.2. 

2.24.8.2 Braking System 

2.24.8.2.1 The braking system shall consist of a 
driving machine brake and in addition shall be permit- 
ted to include other braking means, such as electrically 
assisted braking. 

2.24.8.2.2 The braking system shall be capable of 
decelerating the car from its rated speed when it is 
carrying its rated load (see 2.16.8) in the down direction, 
or empty car in the up direction from the speed at which 
the governor overspeed switch is set. Any deceleration 
not exceeding 9.8 m/s 2 (32.2 ft/s 2 ) is acceptable, pro- 
vided that all factors such as, but not limited to, system 
heat dissipation and allowable buffer striking speeds 
are considered. The loss of main line power shall not 
reduce the braking system capacity below the require- 
ments stated here. 

2.24.8.3 Driving-Machine Brake. The driving- 
machine shall be equipped with a friction brake applied 
by a spring or springs, or by gravity, and released electro- 
mechanically or electrohydraulically (see 1.3) in confor- 
mance with 2.26.8. The driving-machine brake, on its 
own, shall be capable of 

(a) holding the car at rest with its rated load (see 
2.16.8 and 2.26.8). 

(b) holding the empty car at rest. 

(c) decelerating the empty car traveling in the up 
direction from the speed at which the governor 
overspeed switch is set. Any deceleration not exceeding 
9.8 m/s 2 (32.2 ft/s 2 ) is acceptable provided that all fac- 
tors such as, but not limited to, system heat dissipation 
and allowable buffer striking speeds are considered. 

2.24.8.4 Means for Manual Release. Means shall be 
permitted for manual release of the driving-machine 
brake. The means shall permit car movement in a grad- 
ual, controllable manner. Provision shall be made to 
prevent unintended actuation of the device. The manual 
release device shall be designed to be hand applied only 
with continuous effort. The brake shall reapply at its 
fully adjusted capacity in the absence of the hand- 
applied effort. Devices required in accordance with 2.19 
are permitted to be temporarily disabled when the man- 
ual release device is in use. 

2.24.8.5 Marking Plates for Brakes. The brake setting 
and method of measurement shall be permanently and 
legibly marked on the driving machine. 

2.24.8.6 Driving-Machine Brake Design. The driving- 
machine brake design shall ensure contact of the friction 
material on the braking surface consistent with good 
engineering practice. Means shall be provided to protect 



80 



2.24.8.6-2.25.2.3 



A17.1S-2005 



the braking surfaces from contamination caused by any 
driving-machine fluid leak. 



2o24o9»l Seift atrad Chain Drives. Indirect driving 
machines, utilizing V-belt drives, tooth drive belts, or 
drive chains, shall include not less than three belts or 
chains operating together in parallel as a set. Belt and 
chain drive sets shall be preloaded and matched for 
length in sets. 



2.24.9.2.JL Belt sets shall be selected on the basis 
of the manufacturer's rated breaking strength and a fac- 
tor of safety of 10. Chain and sprocket sets shall be 
selected on the basis of recommendations set forth in the 
Supplementary Information section of ASME B29.1M, 
using a service factor of 2. Offset links in chain are not 
permitted. 

2o24o9..2o2 Sprockets in a chain drive set and also 
a driven set shall be assembled onto a common hub, 
with teeth cut in-line after assembly to assure equal load 
distribution on all chains. Tooth sheaves for a belt drive 
shall be constructed in a manner to assure equal load 
distribution on each belt in the set. 

2.24.9.2.B Load determination for both the belt 
and chain sets shall be based on the maximum static 
loading on the elevator car, which is the full load in the 
car at rest and at a position in the hoistway that creates 
the greatest load, including either the car or counter- 
weight resting on its buffer. 

2„24o9.2o4 Chain drives and belt drives shall be 
guarded to protect against accidental contact and to 
prevent foreign objects from interfering with the drives. 



2.24.9.3 MoBiitoriing amdl Brake LocaftitDini. Each belt or 
chain shall be continuously monitored by a broken belt 
or chain device, which shall function to stop the car at 
the next available landing and prevent it from running, 
in the event that any belt or chain in the set breaks or 
becomes excessively slack. The driving-machine brake 
shall be located on the traction sheave or drum assembly 
side of the driving machine so as to be fully effective 
in the event that the entire belt set or chain set should 
break. 

2.24.10 Measus for Bmspedta off Gears 

Each gear case of geared machines shall have access 
to permit inspection of the contact surfaces of the gears. 
Such access need not provide a direct view of all gears, 
but shall be located and sized adequately to allow access 
by fibre optic or similar visual inspection instrumen- 
tation. 



TEMiM, STOffliS EMCES 

'2.25.2, (Sesnxairal ^equireiniixsiiilts 

2.2 5. 1 o i Normal terminal stopping devices required 
by 2.25.2, emergency terminal stopping devices required 
by 2.25.4.2, and emergency terminal speed-limiting 
devices required by 2.25.4.1 shall be permitted to use 
mechanically operated, magnetically operated, optical, 
or solid-state devices for determining car position and 
speed. 

2.25.1 o2 Final terminal stopping devices required by 
2.25.3 shall use only mechanically operated switches for 
determining car position. 

2.25.1.3 Terminal stopping devices that are located 
on the car or in the hoistway shall be of the enclosed type 
and securely mounted in such a manner that horizontal 
movement of the car shall not affect the operation of 
the device. 



2.25.2.1 Wlheire Keqyoiredl aoidl FondtnocD. Normal ter- 
minal stopping devices shall conform to 2.25.2.1.1 
through 2.25.2.1.3. 

2.25.2.1.1 Normal terminal stopping devices shall 
be provided and arranged to slow down and stop the 
car automatically, at or near the top and bottom terminal 
landings, with any load up to and including rated load 
in the car and from any speed attained in normal opera- 
tion (see 2.16.8). 

2.25.2.1.2 Such devices shall function indepen- 
dently of the operation of the normal stopping means 
and of the final terminal stopping device, except that 
on elevators with a rated speed of 0.75 m/s (150 ft/min) 
or less, the normal terminal stopping device shall be 
permitted to be used as the normal stopping means. 

2.25.2.13 The device shall be so designed and 
installed that it will continue to function until the final 
terminal stopping device operates. 



F Stopping Devices. Normal termi- 
nal stopping devices shall be located as specified in 
2.25.2.2.1 and 2.25.2.2.2. 

2.25.2.2.1 Stopping devices for traction machines 
shall be located on the car, in the hoistway, a machinery 
space, machine room, control space, or control room, 
and shall be operated by the movement of the car. 

2.25.2.2.2 Stopping devices for winding drum 
machines shall be located on the car or in the hoistway, 
and shall be operated by the movement of the car. 

2.25.23 Ssudir@£% Operated Normal Terminal Stop- 
ping Devices. Stopping devices that are not located on 



81 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.25.2.3-2.25.4.1 



the car or in the hoistway shall conform to 2.25.2.3.1 
through 2.25.2.3.3. 

2.25.2.3.1 The stopping device shall be mounted 
on and operated by a stopping means mechanically con- 
nected to and driven by the car. 

Stopping means depending on friction or traction 
shall not be used. 

2.25.2.3.2 Tapes, chains, ropes, or similar devices 
mechanically connecting the stopping device to the car 
and used as a driving means shall be provided with a 
device that will cause the electric power to be removed 
from the elevator driving-machine motor and brake if 
the driving means fails (see 2.26.2.6). 

2.25.2.3.3 If mechanically operated switches are 
used, only one set of floor-stopping contacts is necessary 
for each terminal landing on floor controllers or other 
similar devices used to stop the car automatically at the 
landings (such as automatic operation, signal operation, 
etc.), provided these contacts and the means for 
operating them conform to 2.25.2.3.1 and 2.25.2.3.2. 
These contacts shall be permitted to serve also as the 
normal terminal stopping devices. 

2.25.3 Final Terminal Stopping Devices 

2.25.3.1 General Requirements. Final terminal stop- 
ping devices shall conform to 2.25.1 and the following: 

(a) They shall be mechanically operated. 

(b) Operating cams shall be of metal. 

(c) The switch contacts shall be directly opened 
mechanically. 

2.25.3.2 Where Required and Function. Final terminal 
stopping devices shall be provided and arranged to 
cause the electric power to be removed automatically 
from the elevator driving-machine motor and brake after 
the car has passed a terminal landing. 

The device shall be set to function as close to the 
terminal landing as practicable, but so that under normal 
operating conditions it will not function when the car 
is stopped by the normal terminal stopping device. 

Where spring buffers are provided, the device shall 
function before the buffer is engaged. 

The device shall be so designed and installed that it 
will continue to function 

(a) at the top terminal landing, until the car has trav- 
eled above this landing a distance equal to the counter- 
weight runby plus 1.5 times the buffer stroke, but in no 
case less than 0.6 m (2 ft) 

(b) at the bottom terminal landing, until the car rests 
on its fully compressed buffer 

The operation of final terminal stopping devices shall 
prevent movement of the car by the normal operating 
devices in both directions of travel. 

2.25.3.3 Location. Final terminal stopping devices 
shall be located as specified in 2.25.3.3.1 and 2.25.3.3.2. 



2.25.3.3.1 Traction machine elevators shall have 
final terminal stopping switches located in the hoistway 
and operated by cams attached to the car. 

2.25.3.3.2 Winding drum machine elevators shall 
have two sets of final terminal stopping switches, one 
located on and operated by the driving machine, and 
the other located in the hoistway and operated by cams 
attached to the car (see 2.25.3.5). 

2.25.3.4 Controller Switches Controlled by Final Ter- 
minal Stopping Device. The normal and final terminal 
stopping devices shall not control the same controller 
switches unless two or more separate and independent 
switches are provided, two of which shall be closed to 
complete the driving-machine motor and brake circuit 
in either direction of travel. 

Where a two- or three-phase AC driving-machine 
motor is used, these switches shall be of the multipole 
type. 

The control shall be so designed and installed that a 
single ground or short circuit may permit either, but not 
prevent both, the normal or final stopping device circuits 
from stopping the car. 

2.25.3.5 Additional Requirements for Winding Drum 
Machines. Final terminal stopping devices for winding- 
drum machines shall conform to 2.25.3.5.1 through 
2.25,3.5.3. 

2.25.3.5.1 Stopping switches, located on and oper- 
ated by the driving machine, shall not be driven by 
chains, ropes, or belts. 

2.25.3.5.2 Where a two- or three-phase AC driv- 
ing-machine motor is used, the mainline circuit to the 
driving-machine motor and the circuit of the driving- 
machine brake coil shall be directly opened either by 
the contacts of the machine stop switch or by stopping 
switches mounted in the hoistway and operated by a 
cam attached to the car. The opening of these contacts 
shall occur before or coincident with the opening of the 
final terminal stopping switch required by 2.25.3.2. 

2.25.3.5.3 Driving machines equipped with a 
direct-current brake and having a DC mainline control 
switch in the driving-machine motor circuit controlled 
by a final terminal stopping switch located in the 
hoistway and operated by a cam attached to the car 
need not conform to 2.25.3.5.2. This does not eliminate 
the need for a machine-operated switch. 

2.25.4 Emergency Terminal Stopping Means 

2.25.4.1 Emergency Terminal Speed Limiting Device. 

Emergency terminal speed-limiting devices shall be 
installed on all elevators where reduced stroke buffers 
are used (see 2.22.4.1.2 and 2.26.2.12), and shall conform 
to 2.25.4.1.1 through 2.25.4.1.9. 



82 



2.25.4.1.1-2.26.1A1 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.25.4.1.1 The operation of the emergency termi- 
nal speed-limiting devices shall be entirely independent 
of the operation of the normal terminal stopping device. 
The emergency terminal speed-limiting device shall 
automatically reduce the car and counterweight speed 
by removing power from the driving-machine motor 
and brake, such that the rated buffer striking speed is 
not exceeded if the normal terminal stopping device 
fails to slow down the car at the terminal as intended. 

2.25.4.1.2 The car speed sensing device shall be 
independent of the normal speed control system. 

2.25.4.1 .3 The emergency terminal speed-limiting 
device shall provide a retardation not in excess of 9.81 
m/s 2 (32.2 ft/s 2 ). 

2.25.4.1 .4 The emergency terminal speed-limiting 
devices shall not apply the car safety. 

2.25.4.1.5 The emergency terminal speed-limiting 
devices shall be so designed and installed that a single 
short circuit caused by a combination of grounds, or by 
other conditions, shall not render the device ineffective. 

2.25.4.1.6 The emergency terminal speed-limiting 
devices shall be located on the car, in the hoistway, or 
a machinery space, machine room, control space, or con- 
trol room, and shall be operated by the movement of 
the car. 

2.25.4.1 J Mechanically operated switches, where 
located on the car or in the hoistway, shall conform to 

2.25.3.1. 

2.25.4.1.8 Where the operation of emergency ter- 
mmal-speed-limiting devices is dependent on car posi- 
tion relative to the terminal landings 

(a) friction or traction drives shall not be used 

(b) if tape, chain, or rope is used for connection to 
the car, a switch shall be provided to remove electrical 
power from the driving-machine motor and brake 
should this connection fail (see 2.26.2.6) 

2.25.4.1.9 Where magnetically operated, optical, 
or solid-state devices are used for position sensing, a 
single short circuit caused by a combination of grounds 
or by other conditions, or the failure of any single mag- 
netically operated, optical, or solid-state device shall not 

(a) render the emergency terminal speed-limiting 
device inoperative 

(b) permit the car to restart after a normal stop 

2.25.4.2 Emergency Terminal Stopping Device. Eleva- 
tors with static control and rated speeds over 1 m/s 
(200 ft/min) shall be provided with an emergency termi- 
nal stopping device that will cause power to be removed 
from the driving-machine motor and brake should the 
normal stopping means and the normal terminal stop- 
ping device fail to cause the car to slow down at the 
terminal as intended. 



The emergency terminal stopping device shall func- 
tion independently of the normal terminal stopping 
device and the normal speed control system. 

Elevators with static generator-field control that use 
the normal terminal stopping device to limit the genera- 
tor-field current directly, or elevators that have an emer- 
gency terminal speed-limiting device that complies with 
2.25.4.1, are not required to have an emergency terminal 
stopping device. 

SECTION 2.26 
OPERATING DEVICES AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT 

2.26.1 Operation and Operating Devices 

2.26.1.1 Types of Operating Devices. All operating 
devices shall be of the enclosed electric type. 

Rope or rod operating devices actuated directly by 
hand, or rope operating devices actuated by wheels, 
levers, or cranks, shall not be used. 

2.26.1.2 For Car-Switch Operation Elevators. Handles 
of lever-type operating devices of car-switch operation 
elevators shall be so arranged that they will return to 
the stop position and latch there automatically when 
the hand of the operator is removed. 

2.26.1.3 Additional Operating Devices for Elevators 
Equipped to Carry One-Piece Loads Greater Than the 
Rated Load. Elevators equipped to carry one-piece loads 
greater than their rated load shall be provided with an 
additional operating device of the continuous-pressure 
type to operate the elevator at a speed not exceeding 
0.75 m/s (150 ft/min) under such conditions. The nor- 
mal operating devices shall be inoperative during such 
operation (see 2.16.7.10). 

2.26.1.4 Inspection Operation. See Appendix R, Table 
R-l. 

2.26.1.4.1 General Requirements 

(a) Operating Devices 

(1) Operating devices for inspection operation shall 
be provided 

(a) on the top of the car 

(b) at the inspection and test panel when required 
by 2.7.6.5.2(h) 

(2) Operating devices for inspection operation shall 
also be permitted 

(a) in the car 

(b) in a machinery space outside the hoistway 

(c) in a machine room 

(d) in a control space outside the hoistway 

(e) in a control room 

(f) in the pit in accordance with 2.7.5.2.2 

(g) at a working platform in accordance with 
2.7.5.3.6 



83 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.26.1.4.1-2.26.1.4.4 



(b) A switch for transferring control of the elevator 
to the operating devices for inspection operation shall 
be provided, which shall 

(1) be manually operated 

(2) be labeled "INSPECTION" 

(3) have two positions, labeled "INSPECTION" or 
"INSP" and "NORMAL" or "NORM" 

(4) when in the "INSPECTION" position 

(a) enable inspection operation by means of the 
inspection operating devices 

(b) except as provided, in 2.26.1.4.2(f), cause the 
movement of the car to be solely under the control of 
the inspection operating devices through a contact that 
shall be positively opened mechanically and whose 
opening shall not depend solely on springs 

(c) disable automatic power door opening and 
closing and car leveling, except as provided in 
2.26.1.4.2(f) 

(5) when in the "NORMAL" position, disable 
inspection operation by means of the inspection 
operating devices 

(c) Inspection operating devices shall 

(1) be of the continuous-pressure type 

(2) be labeled "UP" and "DOWN," respectively 

(d) Inspection operation shall conform to the fol- 
lowing: 

(1) the speed of the car shall not exceed 0.75 m/s 
(150 ft/min) 

(2) be subject to the electrical protective devices 
required by 2.26.2, except as permitted by 2.26.1.5 

(3) fully closed doors shall be permitted to be held 
in the closed position with power applied 

(e) Inspection operation shall be used only by elevator 
personnel. 

2.26.1.4.2 Top-off-Car Bnspection Operation. Top-of- 
car inspection operation shall conform to 2.26.1.4.1 and 
the following: 

(a) A stop switch (see 2.26.2.8) shall be permanently 
located on the car top and readily accessible to a person, 
while standing at the hoistway entrance normally used 
for access to the car top. 

(b) The transfer switch [see 2.26.1.4.1(b)] shall be 
located on the car top and shall be so designed as to 
prevent accidental transfer from the "INSPECTION" to 
"NORMAL" position. 

(c) A separate device of the continuous-pressure type 
labeled "ENABLE" shall be provided adjacent to the 
inspection operating devices. 

(d) The inspection operating devices shall become 
effective only when the "ENABLE" device is activated. 

(e) The inspection operating devices [see 
2.26.1.4.1(c)], shall be permitted to be of the portable 
type, provided that 

(1) the "ENABLE" device [see 2.26.1.4.2(c)], and a 
stop switch, in addition to the stop switch required in 



2.26.1.4.2(a) are included in the portable unit 

(2) the flexible cord is permanently attached so that 
the portable unit cannot be detached from the car top 

(/) Separate additional devices of the continuous- 
pressure type shall be permitted to be provided on the 
car top to make power door opening and closing and 
automatic car leveling operative from the top of the car 
for testing purposes. 

(g) When on top-of-car inspection operation, a sepa- 
rate additional device shall be permitted to render inef- 
fective the top final terminal-stopping device, and the 
buffer switch for gas spring return counterweight oil 
buffers, in conformance with the requirements of 
2.26.4.3, 2.26.9.3(a), and 2.26.9.4, and it shall allow the 
car to be moved to a position in conformance with the 
requirements of 2.7.4.5 and 2.7.5.1.3(c). 

2.26.1.4.3 In-Car Inspection Operation. When in- 
car inspection operation is provided, it shall conform to 
2.26.1.4.1, and the transfer switch [see 2.26.1.4.1(b)] 

(a) shall be located in the car. 

(b) shall be key-operated or placed behind a locked 
cover. Keys to operate or access the switch shall be Group 
1 Security (see 8.1). 

(c) shall be rendered ineffective if top-of-car inspec- 
tion operation is activated. 

(d) when in the "INSPECTION" position, shall not 
enable hoistway access switch(es). A third switch posi- 
tion shall be permitted to enable the hoistway access 
switches [see 2.12.7.3.3(a)]. 

2.26.1 A A Machinery Space Outside the Hoistway, 
Machine Room, Control Space Outside the Hoistway, Con- 
trol Room, Pit, Landing, and Working Platform Bnspection 
Operations. Where inspection operation in a machinery 
space outside the hoistway, machine room, control space 
outside the hoistway, control room, pit, or at an inspec- 
tion and test panel, or a working platform is provided, 
it shall conform to 2.26.1.4.1 and the following: 

(a) The transfer switch [see 2.26.1.4.1(b)] shall be 

(1) located in the pit, where provided in accordance 
with 2.7.5.2.2 (Pit Inspection Operation) 

(2) located in the inspection and test panel as 
required by 2.7.6.5.2(h) (Landing Inspection Operation) 

(3) located in the machinery space outside the 
hoistway, machine room, control space outside the 
hoistway, or control room, as applicable 

(4) located at a working platform where required 
by 2.7.5.3.6 (Working Platform Inspection Operation) 

(5) rendered ineffective if top-of-car inspection 
operation, in-car inspection operation, or hoistway 
access operation is activated, or when a car door or 
hoistway door bypass switch is in the "BYPASS" 
position 

(b) Only one mode of the inspection operation as 
described in 2.26.1.4.4(a)(1) through (4) shall be permit- 
ted to be operative at any time. If more than one inspec- 
tion operation transfer switch, as permitted in 



84 



2.26.1.4.4-2.26.1.6.7 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.26.1.4.4(a)(1) through (4), is in the "INSPECTION" 
position, the controls shall prevent operation of the car 
from any location as described in 2.26.1.4.4(a)(1) 
through (4). 

(c) Pit inspection operation where provided shall also 
conform to 2.26.1.4.2(c) and (d). When the pit transfer 
switch is in the "INSPECTION" position, the controls 
shall prevent operation of the car when any inspection 
transfer switch, other than that in the pit, is in the 
"INSPECTION" position, or when hoistway access oper- 
ation is enabled. 

(d) Where inspection operation from a working plat- 
form is provided and the working platform transfer 
switch is in the "INSPECTION" position, the controls 
shall prevent operation of the car when any other inspec- 
tion transfer switch, other than that at the working plat- 
form, is in the "INSPECTION" position, or when 
hoistway access operation is enabled. 

2.26.1.5 Inspection Operation With Open Door Cir- 
cuits. A single set of switches marked "CAR DOOR 
BYPASS" and "HOISTWAY DOOR BYPASS" shall be 
provided in the elevator controller enclosure containing 
the car door and gate electric contact circuits and 
hoistway door interlock and hoistway door electric con- 
tact circuits (see 2.26.2.14 and 2.26.2.15); except where 
the switches are not accessible from outside the 
hoistway, they shall be located in the inspection and test 
panel (see 2.7.6.5). The switches shall prepare the control 
system so that, only when top-of-car or in-car inspection 
operation is activated, the car shall be permitted to be 
moved with open door contacts. The switches shall con- 
form to 2.26.1.5.1 through 2.26.1.5.8. 

2.26.1.5.1 They shall have contacts that are posi- 
tively opened mechanically, when switching to either 
"BYPASS" or "OFF" positions, and their opening shall 
not be solely dependent on springs. 

2.26.1 .5.2 The positions of the "BYPASS" switches 
shall be clearly marked "BYPASS" and "OFF." 

2.26.1.5.3 The related circuits shall comply with 
2.26.9.3 and 2.26.9.4. 

2.26.1 .5.4 When either or both of the switches are 
in the "BYPASS" position, all means of operation shall be 
made inoperative except top-of-car and in-car inspection 
operation [see also 2.26.1.4.4(c) and (d)]. 

2.26.1.5.5 When the "CAR-DOOR BYPASS" 
switch is in the "BYPASS" position, it shall permit top- 
of-car and in-car inspection operation with open car 
door (or gate) contacts. 

2.26.1.5.6 When the "HOISTWAY DOOR 
BYPASS" switch is in the "BYPASS" position, it shall 
permit top-of-car and in-car inspection operation with 
open hoistway door interlocks or contacts. 



2.26.1.5.7 Each of the "BYPASS" switches shall 
be permitted to be replaced by a set of switches used 
to bypass individual groups of door contacts. Each 
switch in this set shall be marked to identify the specific 
door contacts bypassed. 

2.26.1.5.8 A warning sign shall be mounted adja- 
cent to the "BYPASS" switches stating, "Jumpers shall 
not be used to bypass hoistway door or car door electric 
contacts." 

2.26.1.6 Operation in Leveling or Truck Zone. Opera- 
tion of an elevator in a leveling or truck zone at any 
landing by a car leveling or truck zoning device, when 
the hoistway doors, or the car doors or gates, or any 
combination thereof, are not in the closed position, is 
permissible, subject to the requirements of 2.26.1.6.1 
through 2.26.1.6.7. 

2.26.1.6.1 Operating devices of manually oper- 
ated car leveling devices or truck zoning devices shall 
be of the continuous-pressure type and located in the car. 

2.26.1.6.2 Car platform guards, conforming to 
2.15.9, shall be provided. Where a car leveling device is 
used, landing sill guards, conforrning to 2.11.12.7, shall 
also be provided. 

2.26.1.63 The leveling zone at any landing shall 
not extend more than 450 mm (18 in.) above and below 
any landing where an automatic leveling device is used, 
and not more than 250 mm (10 in.) above and below 
any landing where a manually operated leveling device 
is used. 

2.26.1.6.4 The truck zone at any landing shall not 
extend more than 1 700 mm (67 in.) above the landing. 

2.26.1.6.5 Where a truck or leveling zone for one 
hoistway entrance extends into the door interlocking 
zone for a second entrance, the truck zoning or leveling 
operation shall be inoperative unless the hoistway door 
at the second entrance is in the closed position. 

Where a truck or leveling zone for one hoistway 
entrance extends into the leveling zone for a second 
entrance, the leveling operation for the second entrance 
shall be inoperative while the hoistway door at the first 
entrance is open. 

2.26.1.6.6 A leveling or truck-zoning device shall 
not move the car at a speed exceeding 0.75 m/s 
(150 ft/min). 

For elevators with static control, an independent 
means shall be provided to limit the leveling speed to 
a maximum of 0.75 m/s (150 ft/min) with the doors 
open, should the normal means to control this speed 
(mechanical, electrical, or solid state devices) fail to 
do so. 

2.26.1.6.7 For elevators with static control, an 
inner landing zone extending not more than 75 mm 



85 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.26.1.6.7-2.26.2.18 



(3 in.) above and 75 mm (3 in.) below the landing shall 
be provided. A car shall not move if it stops outside of 
the inner landing zone unless the doors are fully closed. 

2.26.2 Electrical Protective Devices 

When an electrical protective device is activated 
(operated, opened), it shall cause the electric power to 
be removed from the elevator driving machine motor 
and brake. [See also 2.26.3, 2.26.4.3, 2.26.4.4, 2.26.7, 
2.26.8.3(c), 2.26.9.3, and 2.26.9.4]. Electrical protective 
devices shall be provided as specified in 2.26.2.1 through 
2.26.2.37. 

2.26.2.1 Slack-Rope Switch. Winding drum machines 
shall be provided with a slack-rope device equipped 
with a slack-rope switch of the enclosed manually reset 
type. This switch shall operate whenever the ropes 
are slack. 

2.26.2.2 Motor-Generator Running Switch. Where 
generator-field control is used, means shall be provided 
to prevent the application of power to the elevator driv- 
ing machine motor and brake unless the motor generator 
set connections are properly switched for the ninning 
condition of the elevator. It is not required that the elec- 
trical connections between the elevator driving machine 
motor and the generator be opened in order to remove 
power from the elevator motor. 

2.26.2.3 Compensating-Rope Sheave Switch. Com- 
pensating-rope sheaves shall be provided with a com- 
pensating-rope sheave switch or switches mechanically 
opened by the compensating-rope sheave before the 
sheave reaches its upper or lower limit of travel. 

2.26.2.4 Motor Field Sensing Means. Where direct 
current is supplied to an armature and shunt field of an 
elevator driving-machine motor, a motor field current 
sensing means shall be provided, which shall cause the 
electric power to be removed from the driving-machine 
motor armature, and brake unless current is flowing in 
the shunt field of the motor, except for static control 
elevators provided with a device to detect an overspeed 
condition prior to, and independent of, the operation of 
the governor overspeed switch. This device shall cause 
power to be removed from the elevator driving-machine 
motor armature and machine brake. 

2.26.2.5 Emergency Stop Switch. An emergency stop 
switch shall not be provided on passenger elevators. On 
all freight elevators, an emergency stop switch shall be 
provided in the car, and located in or adjacent to each 
car operating panel. 

When open ("STOP" position), this switch shall cause 
the electric power to be removed from the elevator driv- 
ing-machine motor and brake. 

Emergency stop switches shall 

(a) be of the manually opened and closed type 

(b) have red operating handles or buttons 



(c) be conspicuously and permanently marked 
"STOP," and shall indicate the "STOP" and "RUN" posi- 
tions 

(d) while opened, cause the audible device to sound 
(see 2.27.1.2) 

NOTE (2.26.2.5): See 2.26.2.21 for in-car stop switch requirements 
for passenger elevators. 

2.26.2.6 Broken Rope, Tape, or Chain Switches. The 

switch or switches that shall be opened by a failure of 
a rope, tape, or chain, shall be provided when required 
by 2.25.2.3.2 or 2.25.4.1.8(b). 

2.26.2.7 Stop Switch in Pit. A stop switch conforming 
to 2.26.2.5(a), (b), (c) shall be provided in the pit of every 
elevator (see 2.2.6). 

2.26.2.8 Stop Switch on Top of Car. A stop switch 
conforming to 2.26.2.5(a), (b), and (c) shall be provided 
on the top of every elevator car. 

2.26.2.9 Car Safety Mechanism Switch. A switch, con- 
forming to 2.17.7 shall be required where a car safety is 
provided. 

2.26.2.10 Speed-Governor Overspeed Switch. A 

speed-governor overspeed switch shall be provided 
when required by 2.18.4.1 and shall conform to 2.18.4.1.2, 
2.18.4.2, and 2.18.4.3. 

2.26.2.11 Final Terminal Stopping Devices. Final ter- 
minal stopping devices, conforming to 2.25.3, shall be 
provided for every electric elevator. 

2.26.2.12 Emergency Terminal Speed Limiting 
Devices. Where reduced-stroke oil buffers are provided, 
as permitted by 2.22.4.1.2, emergency terminal speed- 
limiting devices conforming to 2.25.4.1 shall be pro- 
vided. 

2.26.2.13 Buffer Switches for Oil Buffers Used With 
Type C Car Safeties. Oil level and compression switches 
conforming to 2.17.8.2.7 and 2.17.8.2.8 shall be provided 
for all oil buffers used with Type C safeties (see 2.17.5.3). 

2.26.2.14 Hoistway Door Interlocks and Hoistway 
Door Electric Contacts. Hoistway door interlocks or 
hoistway door electric contacts conforming to 2.12 shall 
be provided for all elevators. 

2.26.2.15 Car Door and Gate Electric Contacts. Car 

door or gate electric contacts, conforming to 2.14.4.2, 
shall be provided for all elevators; except when car door 
interlock, conforming to 2.26.2.28 is provided. 

2.26.2.16 Emergency Terminal Stopping Devices. 

Emergency terminal stopping devices conforming to 
2.25.4.2 shall be provided for all elevators where static 
control is used, unless exempted by 2.25.4.2. 

2.26.2.18 Car Top Emergency Exit Electrical Device. 

An electrical device conforming to 2.14.1.5.1(f) shall be 
provided on the car top emergency exit cover. 



86 



2.26.2.19-2.26.4.2 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.26.2.19 Motor-Generator Overspeed Protection. 

Means shall be provided to cause the electric power to 
be removed automatically from the elevator driving- 
machine motor and brake should a motor-generator set, 
driven by a DC motor, overspeed excessively. 

2.26.2.20 Electric Contacts for Hinged Car Platform 

Sills. Hinged car platform sills, where provided, shall 
be equipped with electric contacts conforming to 2.15.16. 

2.26.2.21 Sn-Car Stop Switch. On passenger elevators, 
a stop switch, either key operated or behind a locked 
cover, shall be provided in the car and located in or 
adjacent to the car operating panel. The key shall be 
Group 1 Security (see 8.1). 

The switch shall be clearly and permanently marked 
"STOP" and shaU indicate the "STOP" and "RUN" posi- 
tions. 

When opened ("STOP" position), this switch shall 
cause the electric power to be removed from the elevator 
driving-machine motor and brake. 

2.26.2.22 Buffer Switches for Gas Spring-Return Oil 

Buffers. Buffer switches conforming to 2.22.4.5(c) shall 
be provided. 

2.26.2.23 Stop Switch in Remote Machine and Control 
Rooms. A stop switch conforming to 2.26.2.5(a), (b), and 
(c) shall be provided in remote machine and control 
rooms where required by 2.7.8. 

2.26.2.24 Stop Switch for Machinery Spaces and Con- 
trol Spaces. A stop switch conforming to 2.26.2.5(a), (b), 
and (c) shall be provided where required by 2.7.3.5. 

2.26.2.25 Blind Hoistway Emergency Door Locking 
Device. A locking device conforming to 2.11.1.2(e) shall 
be provided on every emergency door in a blind 
hoistway. 

2.26.2.26 Pit Access Door Electric Contact. An electric 
contact shall be provided on each pit access door where 
required by 2.2.4.4. 

2.26.2.27 Stop Switch in Remote Counterweight 
Hoistways. A stop switch conforming to 2.26.2.5(a), (b), 
and (c) shall be provided in the remote counterweight 
hoistway where required by 2.3.3.3. 

2.26.2.28 Car Door Interlock. An interlock conform- 
ing to 2.14.4.2 shall be provided where required by 
2.14.4.2.1. 

2.26.2.29 Ascending Car Overspeed Protection 
Device. An overspeed device shall be provided when 
required by 2.19.1 and shall meet the requirements of 
2.19.1.2(a). 

2.26.2.30 Unintended Car Movement Device. An 

unintended car movement device shall be provided 
when required by 2.19.2 and shall meet the requirements 
of 2.19.2.2(a). Where generator-field control is used, this 



electrical protective device shall also cause the power 
to be removed from the drive motor of the motor-genera- 
tor set. 

2.26.2.31 Car Access Panel Locking Device. A locking 
device conforming to 2.14.2.6 shall be provided where 
required by 2.14.2.6(e). 

2.26.2.32 Hoistway Access Opening Locking Device. 

Access openings in the hoistway shall be provided with 
a locking device where required by 2.11.1.4. 

2.26.2.33 Firefighter's Stop Switch. A firefighter's 
stop switch that conforms to the requirements of 
2.26.2.5(a), (b), and (c) shall be provided where required 
by 2.27.3.3.1(m). 

2.26.2.34 Unexpected Car Movement Device. An 

unexpected car movement device shall be provided 
where required by 2.7.5.1.2(c). This requirement shall be 
permitted to be satisfied by another device specified in 
2.26.2, provided that the means required by 2.7.5.1.1 
actuates the electrical device. 

2.26.2.35 Equipment Access Panel Electrical Device. 

An electric contact on equipment access panels in the 
car shall be provided where required by 2.7.5.1.4 or 
2.14.2.2(g). 

2.26.2.36 Working Platform Electrical Device. An elec- 
tric contact conforming to 2.14.4.2.3(b), (c), and (e) shall 
be provided where required by 2.7.5.3.1. 

2.26.2.37 Retractable Stop Electrical Device. An elec- 
tric contact conforming to 2.14.4.2.3(b), (c), and (e) shall 
be provided where required by 2.7.5.5(a). 

2.26.3 Contactors and Relays for Use in Critical 
Operating Circuits 

Where electromechanical contactors or relays are pro- 
vided to fulfill the requirements of 2.26.8.2, and 2.26.9.3 
through 2.26.9.7, they shall be considered to be used in 
critical operating circuits. If contact(s) on these electro- 
mechanical contactors or relays are used for monitoring 
purposes, they shall be prevented from changing state 
if the contact(s) utilized in a critical operating circuit 
fail to open in the intended manner. The ability of the 
monitoring contact(s) to perform this function shall not 
be solely dependent upon springs. 

2.26.4 Electrical Equipment and Wiring 

2.26.4.1 All electrical equipment and wiring shall 
conform to NFPA 70 or CSA C22.1, whichever is applica- 
ble (see Part 9). 

2.26.4.2 Drive-machine controllers, logic controllers, 
and operating devices accessory thereto for starting, 
stopping, regulating, controlling, or protecting electric 
motors, generators, or other equipment shall be listed/ 
certified and labeled/marked to the requirements of 
CAN/CSA-B44.1/ASME A17.5. 



87 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.26.4.3-2.26.9.3 



2.26.43 The devices covered by 2.26.2 shall have 
contacts that are positively opened mechanically; their 
opening shall not be solely dependent on springs. Excep- 
tions are devices described by 2.26.2.4, 2.26.2.19, 
2.26.2.29, and 2.26.2.30; and 2.26.2.12 and 2.26.2.16 where 
magnetically operated, optical, or static-type switches 
are used. 

2.26.4.4 Control equipment shall be tested in accor- 
dance with the testing requirements of EN 12016 by 
exposing it to interference levels at the test values speci- 
fied for "safety circuits." The interference shall not cause 
any of the conditions described in 2.26.9.3(a) through (e) 
and shall not cause the car to move while on inspection 
operation. 

If enclosure doors or suppression equipment must 
remain installed to meet the above requirements, warn- 
ing signs to that effect shall be posted on the control 
equipment. 

2.26.4.5 In jurisdictions enforcing CSA C22.1, power 
supply line disconnecting means, shall not be opened 
automatically by a fire alarm system. 



2.26.5 System to 
Operation of the Elevator With Faulty Door 
Contact Circuits 

Means shall be provided to monitor the position of 
power-operated car doors that are mechanically coupled 
with the landing doors while the car is in the landing 
zone, in order 

(a) to prevent the operation of the car if the car door 
is not closed (see 2.14.4.11), regardless whether the por- 
tion of the circuits incorporating the car door contact or 
the interlock contact of the landing door coupled with 
car door, or both, are closed or open, except as permitted 
in 2.12.7, 2.26.1.5, and 2.26.1.6 

(b) to prevent, except as permitted in 2.26.1.5, the 
power closing of the doors if the car door is fully open 
and any of the following conditions exist: 

(1) the car door contact is closed or the portion of 
the circuit, incorporating this contact is bypassed 

(2) the interlock contact of the landing door that is 
coupled to the opened car door is closed or the portion 
of the circuit, incorporating this contact is bypassed 

(3) the car door contact and the interlock contact 
of the door that is coupled to the opened car door are 
closed, or the portions of the circuits incorporating these 
contacts are bypassed 

2.26.6 Phase Protection ©f Motors 

Elevators having a polyphase AC power supply shall 
be provided with means to prevent the starting of the 
elevator drive motor or door motor if a reversal of phase 
rotation, or phase failure of the incoming polyphase AC 
power, will cause the elevator car or elevator door(s) to 
operate in the wrong direction. 



2.26.7 installation of Capacitors or Other Devices to 
Make Electrical Protective Devices ineffective 

The installation of capacitors or other devices, the 
operation or failure of which will cause an unsafe opera- 
tion of the elevator, is prohibited. 

No permanent device that will make any required 
electrical protective device ineffective shall be installed 
except as provided in 2.7.6.5.2(h), 2.12.7.1, 2.26.1.4.2(g), 
2.26.1.5, 2.26.1.6, and 2.27.3.1.6(c) (see 8.6.1.6.1). 

2.26.8 Release and Application of Driving-Machine 

Brakes 

2.26.8.1 Driving-machine brakes shall not be electri- 
cally released until power has been applied to the driv- 
ing machine motor except as permitted by 2.7.6.4.3. 

2.26.8.2 Two devices shall be provided to indepen- 
dently remove power from the brake. If the brake circuit 
is ungrounded, all power feed lines to the brake shall 
be opened. 

2.26.83 The brake shall apply automatically when 

(a) the operating device of a car switch or continuous- 
pressure operation elevator is in the stop position; 

(b) a normal stopping means functions 

(c) any electrical protective device is activated 

(d) there is a loss of power to the driving machine 
brake 

2.26.8.4 The application of the brake shall be permit- 
ted to occur on or before the completion of the slowdown 
and leveling operations, under conditions described in 
2.26.8.3(a) and (b). 

2.26.8.5 The brake shall not be permanently con- 
nected across the armature or field of a direct-current 
elevator driving-machine motor. 

2.26.9 Control and Operating Circuits 

The design and installation of the control and 
operating circuits shall conform to 2.26.9.1 through 
2.26.9.8. 

2.26.9.1 If springs are used to actuate switches, con- 
tactors, or relays to break the circuit to stop an elevator 
at the terminal landings, they shall be of the compres- 
sion type. 

2.26.9.2 The completion or maintenance of an elec- 
tric circuit shall not be used to interrupt the power to the 
elevator driving-machine motor or brake at the terminal 
landings, nor to stop the car when any of the electrical 
protective devices (see 2.26.2) operate. Requirement 
2.26.9.2 does not apply to dynamic braking, nor to speed 
control switches. 

2.26.9.3 The occurrence of a single ground or the 
failure of any single magnetically operated switch, con- 
tactor, or relay, or any single device that limits the level- 
ing or truck zone, or any single solid state device; or a 
software system failure, shall not 



2.26.9.3-2.26.9.8 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



(a) render any electrical protective device ineffective 
(see 2.26.2) 

(b) permit the car to move beyond the leveling or 
truck zone if any hoistway door interlock is unlocked 
or if any hoistway door or car door or gate electric 
contact is not in the closed position (see 2.26.1.6) 

(c) permit speeds in excess of those specified in 
2.12.7.3.2, 2.26.1.4.1(d)(1), 2.26.1.5.10(b), and 2.26.1.6.6 

(d) permit the car to revert to normal operation when 
the electrical contact required by 2.7.5.2.1(b)(3) is in the 
open position, or the electrical device as permitted in 
2.7.5.5(b) is activated, or on hoistway access switch oper- 
ation (see 2.12.7.3), or on inspection operation (see 
2.26.1.4), or on bypass operation (see 2.26.1.5) 

(e) continue to make ineffective any hoistway-door 
interlock or car door or gate electric contact when either 
a hoistway access switch (see 2.12.7.3) or a "BYPASS" 
switch (see 2.26.1.5) is turned to the "OFF" position. 

2.26.9.4 Redundant devices used to satisfy 2.26.9.3 
in the determination of the occurrence of a single 
ground, or the failure of any single magnetically oper- 
ated switch, contactor or relay, or of any single solid 
state device, or any single device that limits the leveling 
or truck zone, or a software system failure, shall be 
checked prior to each start of the elevator from a landing, 
when on automatic operation. When a single ground or 
failure, as specified in 2.26.9.3, occurs, the car shall not 
be permitted to restart. Implementation of redundancy 
by a software system is permitted, provided that the 
removal of power from the driving-machine motor and 
brake shall not be solely dependent on software-con- 
trolled means. 

2.26.9.5 Except for elevators employing alternating- 
current hoist motors driven from a direct-current source 
through a static inverter (see 2.26.9.6), elevators with 
driving motors employing static control without motor- 
generator sets shall conform to 2.26.9.5.1 through 
2.26.9.5.6. 

2.26.9.5.1 Two devices shall be provided to 
remove power independently from the driving-machine 
motor. At least one device shall be an electromechanical 
contactor. 

2.26.9.5.2 The contactor shall be arranged to open 
each time the car stops. 

2.26.9.5.3 The contactor shall cause the driving- 
machine brake circuit to open. 

2.26.9.5.4 An additional contactor shall be pro- 
vided to also open the driving-machine brake circuit. 
This contactor is not required to have contacts in the 
driving-machine motor circuit. 

2.26.9.5.5 The electrical protective devices 
required by 2.26.2 shall control the solid state device 



and both contactors, except that leveling shall be permit- 
ted to take place with power opening of doors and gates 
in conformance with 2.13.2.1.1 and 2.13.2.2.1. 

2.26.9.5.6 After each elevator stop, the car shall 
not respond to a signal to start unless both contactors 
are in the de-energized position. 

2.26.9.6 Elevators employing alternating-current 
driving motors driven from a direct-current power 
source through a static inverter shall conform to 
2.26.9.6.1 through 2.26.9.6.6. 

2.26.9.6.1 Two separate means shall be provided 
to independently inhibit the flow of alternating-current 
through the solid state devices that connect the direct- 
current power source to the alternating-current driving 
motor. At least one of the means shall be an electrome- 
chanical relay. 

2.26.9.6.2 The relay shall be arranged to open each 
time the car stops. 

2.26.9.6.3 The relay shall cause the driving- 
machine brake circuit to open. 

2.26.9.6.4 An additional contactor shall be pro- 
vided to also open the driving-machine brake circuit. 
This contactor is not required to have contacts in the 
driving machine motor circuit. 

2.26.9.6.5 The electrical protective devices 
required by 2.26.2 shall control both the means that 
inhibit the flow of alternating current through the solid 
state devices and the contactors in the brake circuit, 
except that leveling shall be permitted to take place with 
power opening of the doors and gates as restricted by 
2.13.2.1.1 and 2.13.2.2.1. 

2.26.9.6.6 After each elevator stop, the car shall 
not respond to a signal to start unless the relay that 
inhibits the flow of alternating current through the solid- 
state devices, as well as the contactors in the brake cir- 
cuit, are in the de-energized position. 

2.26.9.7 Where generator-field control is used, 
means shall be provided to prevent the generator from 
building up and applying sufficient current to the eleva- 
tor driving-machine motor to move the car when the 
elevator motor control switches are in the "OFF" posi- 
tion. The means used shall not interfere with mainte- 
nance of an effective dynamic-braking circuit during 
stopping and standstill conditions. 

2.26.9.8 The control circuits shall be so designed 
and installed that the car speed in the down direction 
with rated load in the car, under normal operating condi- 
tions with the power supply on or off, shall not exceed 
governor tripping speed, or 125% of rated speed, which- 
ever is the lesser (see also 2.16.8). 



89 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.26.10-2.27.1.1.4 



2.26.10 Absorption of Regenerated Power 

When a power source is used that, in itself, is incapable 
of absorbing the energy generated by an overhauling 
load, means for absorbing sufficient energy to prevent 
the elevator from attaining governor tripping speed or 
a speed in excess of 125% of rated speed, whichever is 
less, shall be provided on the load side of each elevator 
power supply line disconnecting means (see 2.16.8). 

2.26.11 Car Platform to Hoistway Door Sills Vertical 
Distance 

Where ANSI/ICC A117.1 or ADAAG is not applica- 
ble, the vertical distance between the car platform sill 
and the hoistway door sill on passenger elevators shall 
be in accordance with the following: 

(a) it shall not exceed 13 mm (0.5 in.) on initial stop 
at a landing 

(b) the car shall relevel if the vertical distance exceeds 
25 mm (1 in.) while loading or unloading 

2.26.12 Symbols 

2.26.12.1 Where reference is made requiring word- 
ing to designate a specific function, the symbols as 
shown in Table 2.26.12.1 shall be substituted for, or used 
in conjunction with, the required wording. 

2.26.12.2 The emergency stop switch shall have the 
"STOP" and "RUN" positions conspicuously and per- 
manently marked as required by 2.26.2.5(c). 

2.26.12.3 Where Braille is provided it shall conform 
to the requirements in Table 2.26.12.1. 

NOTE (2.26.12): See also ANSI/ICC A117.1, ADAAG, and B44 
Appendix E. 

2.26.12.4 Identify "HELP" button [see 2.27.1.1.3(b)] 
and visual indication [see 2.27.1.1.3(c)] with the phone 
symbol. 



SECTION 2.27 
EMERGENCY OPERATION AND SIGNALING DEVICES 

NOTE (2.27): Additional requirements may be found in the build- 
ing code. 

2.27.1 Car Emergency Signaling Devices 
2.27.1.1 Emergency Communications 

2.27.1.1.1 A two-way communications means 
between the car and a location in the building, that is 
readily accessible to authorized and emergency person- 
nel shall be provided. 

2.27.1.1.2 When the two-way communications 
location in the building is not staffed 24 h a day, by 
authorized personnel who can take appropriate action, 



the means of two-way communications shall automati- 
cally be directed within 30 s to an additional on- or off- 
site location, staffed by authorized personnel, where an 
appropriate response can be taken. 

2.27.1.1.3 The two-way communication means 
within the car shall comply with the following require- 
ments: 

(a) In jurisdictions enforcing NBCC, Appendix E of 
CAN/CSA B44, or in jurisdictions not enforcing NBCC, 
ICC/ANSI A117.1. 

(b) A push button to actuate the two-way communica- 
tion means shall be provided in or adjacent to a car 
operating panel. The push button shall be visible and 
permanently identified as "HELP." The identification 
shall be on or adjacent to the "HELP" button. When 
the push button is actuated, the emergency two-way 
communication means shall initiate a call for help and 
establish two-way communications. 

(c) A visual indication on the same panel as the 
"HELP" push button shall be provided, which is acti- 
vated by authorized personnel, to acknowledge that 
two-way communications link has been established. The 
visual indication shall be extinguished when the two- 
way communication link is terminated. 

(d) The two-way communication means shall provide 
on demand to authorized personnel, information that 
identifies the building location and elevator number and 
that assistance is required. 

(e) After the call acknowledgement signals are sent 
[2.27.1.1.3(c)], the two-way voice communications shall 
be available between the car and authorized personnel. 

(f) The two-way communications, once established, 
shall be disconnected only when authorized personnel 
outside the car terminate the call. 

(g) The two-way communication means shall not use 
a handset in the car. 

(h) The two-way communications shall not be trans- 
mitted to an automated answering system. The call for 
help shall be answered by authorized personnel. 

(i) Operating instructions shall be incorporated with 
or adjacent to the "HELP" button. 

2.27.1.1.4 Where the elevator travel is 18 m (60 ft) 
or more, a two-way voice communication means within 
the building shall be provided and comply with the 
following requirements: 

(a) The means shall enable emergency personnel 
within the building to establish two-way voice commu- 
nications to each car individually. Two-way voice com- 
munication shall be established without any intentional 
delay and shall not require intervention by a person 
within the car. The means shall override communica- 
tions to outside of the building. 

(b) Two-way voice communications, once established, 
shall be disconnected only when emergency personnel 
outside the car terminates the call. 



90 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



Table 2.26.12.1 Symbol Identification 



Function 


Tactile Symbol 


Braille Message 
Where Provided 


Proportions 

(Open Circles Indicate Unused Dots Within 

Each Braille Cell) 


Door Open 


<!► 


• •• 

• • • 

• • • 

OP" EN" 


±2. 


-«-2.0mm r— 
-HH— - — ' 


3.0 mm typical 
between elements 


A 






t : 




16.0 mm 




■ 1 WJ||||W r ] 


t 






-- -- _- 




oi 


o« «o «o i . _ 

•o«o o* t — 4.8 mm 


Rear/Side 
Door Open 


<> 


• •• 

• • • 

• • • 

REAR/SIDE OP"EN" 
















Wfr 


■ 


M 


!•!== 


r 


?::::: 


•0 •• oo 

0« »0 «0 

•o *o o» 


Door Close 


►l< 


•• • • • • 

• • • • 

• • • 

CLOSE 






tti# 


m 


III 


Hi 


%%■■% 


ttffiffl 


•• oo «o o* «0 
oo «o 0* »0 0* 
oo ao »o «o oo 


Rear/Side 
Door Close 


M 


•• • • • • 

• • • • 

• • • 

REAR/SIDE CLOSE 








: II :: 


:: II : 


:H|: 


'■\it- 


= ±±i= 


•-i$t- 






: ti :: 


■■±±- 


-¥ + -- 


"±±Z 


•• «o «o o* «o 

oo »0 0* «0 00 

oo «o «o «o oo 


Main 


• 


• •• 

• 

• • 

MA" IN" 






















::::*:: 


::!?::: 






::::pi'.:\:::: 






•• *o oo 
oo oo o* 
•o oo »o 


Alarm 


± 


• • • •• 

• • 

• • • 

AL"AR"M 










;:::::: 






























•o «0 
oo »0 
oo «o 


o» •• 

0* oo 
•o eo 


Phone 


C 


• •• • 

• •• • • 

• • 

PH"ONE" 








:::xi 




ml 


ttHtti 


■ 


i:::::: 










•• *o 
•o •• 
oo oo 


oo «o 
o« o* 
oo eo 


Emergency 
Stop 


© 


• • •• 

• • 
• • • 

"ST" OP 




::x;:: 




"M'a 


i!!!:H 


m 


■ 


o* • 
oo 

90 • 


o •• 

• «0 
«0 



91 



ASMEA17.1S-2005 



2.27.1.1.4-2.27.3 



(c) Once the two-way voice communication has been 
established, the visual indication [see 2.27.1.1.3(c)] 
within the car shall illuminate. The visual indication 
shall be extinguished when the two-way communication 
is terminated. 

(d) Operating instructions shall be incorporated with 
or adjacent to the two-way voice communication outside 
the car. Instructions shall conform to 2.27.7.3. 

2.27.1.1.5 If the emergency communication 
means is normally connected to the building's main 
power supply, it shall automatically transfer to an alter- 
nate source(s) of power when the normal power supply 
fails. The alternate source(s) of power (standby, emer- 
gency, etc.) shall be capable of providing power for illu- 
mination of the visual indication [see 2.27.1.1.3(c)] 
within the car, and the means of emergency communica- 
tions for at least 4 h; and the audible signaling device 
(see 2.27.1.2) for at least 1 h. 

2.27.1.2 Emergency Stop Switch Audible Signal. 

When an emergency stop switch (2.26.2.5) is provided, 
an audible signaling device shall be provided. The audi- 
ble signaling device shall 

(a) have a rated sound pressure rating of not less than 
80 dBA nor greater than 90 dBA at 3 m (10 ft) 

(b) respond without delay after the switch has been 
activated 

(c) be located inside the building and audible inside 
the car and outside the hoistway 

(d) for elevators with a travel greater than 30 m 
(100 ft), be duplicated as follows: 

(1) one device shall be mounted on the car 

(2) a second device shall be placed at the desig- 
nated level 

2.27.2 Emergency or Standby Power System 

Where an emergency or standby power system is pro- 
vided to operate an elevator in the event of normal 
power supply failure, the requirements of 2.27.2.1 
through 2.27.2.5 shall be complied with. 

2.27.2.1 The emergency or standby power system 
shall be capable of operating the elevator(s) with rated 
load (see 2.16.8), at least one at a time, unless otherwise 
required by the building code. 

2.27.2.2 The transfer between the normal and the 
emergency or standby power system shall be automatic. 

2.27.2.3 An illuminated signal marked "ELEVATOR 
EMERGENCY POWER" shall be provided in the eleva- 
tor lobby at the designated level to indicate that the 
normal power supply has failed and the emergency or 
standby power is in effect. 

2.27.2.4 Where the emergency or standby power 
system is not capable of operating all elevators simulta- 
neously, requirements of 2.27.2.4.1 through 2.27.2.4.5 
shall be conformed to. 



2.27.2.4.1 A selector switch(es) marked "ELEVA- 
TOR EMERGENCY POWER" in red lettering a mini- 
mum of 5 mm (0.25 in.) in height, which is key-operated 
or under a locked cover (see 2.27.8), shall be provided 
to permit the selection of the elevator(s) to operate on 
the emergency or standby power system. The key shall 
be Group 3 Security (see 8.1). 

2.27.2.4.2 The selector switch(es) positions shall 
be marked to correspond with the elevator identification 
number (see 2.29) and a position marked "AUTO." 

2.27.2.4.3 The selector switch(es) shall be located 
at the designated level in view of all elevator entrances, 
or if located elsewhere means shall be provided adjacent 
to the selector switch(es) to indicate that the elevator is 
at the designated level with the doors in the normally 
open position. 

2.27.2.4.4 When the selector switch is in the 
"AUTO" position, automatic power selection shall be 
provided, which will return each elevator that is not on 
designated attendant operation, inspection operation or 
Phase II In-Car Emergency Operation, one or more at a 
time, to the recall level. Failure of the selected car to 
move shall cause power to be transferred to another car. 

2.27.2.4.5 The selector switch(es) positions corres- 
ponding to the elevator identification numbers (see 
2.29.1) shall override the automatic power selection. 
Operation of the selector switch(es) shall not cause 
power to be removed from any elevator until the elevator 
is stopped. 

NOTE (2.27.2.4): The selector switch(es) should normally be placed 
in the "AUTO" position. 

2.27.2.5 When the emergency or standby power sys- 
tem is designed to operate only one elevator at a time, 
the energy absorption means (if required) shall be per- 
mitted to be located on the supply side of the elevator 
power disconnecting means, provided all other require- 
ments of 2.26.10 are conformed to when operating any 
of the elevators the power might serve. Other building 
loads, such as power and lights that can be supplied by 
the emergency or standby power system, shall not be 
considered as a means of absorbing the regenerated 
energy for the purposes of conforming to 2.26.10, unless 
such loads are normally powered by the emergency or 
standby power system. 

2.27.3 Firefighters' Emergency Operation: Automatic 
Elevators 

Firefighters' Emergency Operation shall apply to all 
automatic elevators except 

(a) where the hoistway or a portion thereof is not 
required to be fire-resistive construction (see 2.1.1.1), the 
travel does not exceed 2 000 mm (80 in.), and the 
hoistway does not penetrate a floor 



92 



2.27.3-2.27.3.1.6 



ASMEA17.1S-2005 



(b) in jurisdictions enforcing the NBCC where the 
NBCC does not require Firefighters' Emergency Oper- 
ation 

Where Firefighters' Emergency Operation is provided 
voluntarily these requirements shall also apply. 

2.27.3.1 Phase I Emergency Recall Operation 

2.27.3.1.1 A three-position key-operated switch 
shall be 

(a) provided only at the designated level for each 
single elevator or for each group of elevators. 

(b) labeled "FIRE RECALL" and its positions marked 
"RESET," "OFF," and "ON" (in that order), with the 
"OFF" position as the center position. The "FIRE 
RECALL" letters shall be a rrtinimum of 5 mm (0.25 in.) 
high in red or a color contrasting with a red background. 

(c) located in the lobby within sight of the elevator or 
all elevators in that group and shall be readily accessible. 

2.27.3.1.2 An additional key-operated "FIRE 
RECALL" switch, with two positions, marked "OFF" 
and "ON" (in that order), shall be permitted only at the 
building fire control station. 

2.27.3.1.3 The switch(es) shall be rotated clock- 
wise to go from the "RESET" (designated level switch 
only), to "OFF" to "ON" positions. Keys shall be remov- 
able only in the "OFF" and "ON" positions. 

2.27.3.1.4 Only the "FIRE RECALL" switch(es) or 
fire alarm initiating device located at floors that are 
served by the elevator, or in the hoistway, or in an eleva- 
tor machine room, or a control space, or a control room 
(see 2.27.3.2) shall initiate Phase I Emergency Recall 
Operation. 

2.27.3.1.5 All "FIRE RECALL" switches shaU be 
provided with an illuminated visual signal to indicate 
when Phase I Emergency Recall Operation is in effect. 

2.27.3.1.6 When a "FIRE RECALL" switch is in 
the "ON" position all cars controlled by the switch shall 
operate as follows: 

(a) A car traveling towards the designated level shall 
continue nonstop to the designated level and power- 
operated doors shall open and remain open. 

On cars with two entrances, if both entrances can be 
opened at the designated level, only the doors serving 
the lobby where the "FIRE RECALL" switch is located 
shall open and remain open. 

(b) A car traveling away from the designated level 
shall reverse at or before the next available landing with- 
out opening its doors and proceed to designated level. 

(c) A stopped car shall have the in-car stop switch 
(see 2.26.2.21) and the emergency stop switch in the car 
(see 2.26.2.5) when provided, rendered inoperative as 
soon as the car moves away from the landing. A moving 
car shall have the in-car stop switch and the emergency 



stop switch in the car when provided, rendered inopera- 
tive without delay. Once the emergency stop switch in 
the car and the in-car stop switch have been rendered 
inoperative, they shall remain inoperative while the car 
is on Phase I Emergency Recall Operation. All other stop 
switches required by 2.26.2 shall remain operative. 

(d) A car standing at a landing other than the desig- 
nated level, with the doors open and the in-car stop 
switch and the emergency stop switch in the car when 
provided, in the run position, shall conform to the fol- 
lowing: 

(1) Elevators having automatic power-operated 
horizontally sliding doors shall close the doors without 
delay and proceed to the designated level. 

(2) Elevators having power-operated vertically 
sliding doors provided with automatic or momentary 
pressure closing operation per 2.13.3.4 shall have the 
closing sequence initiated without delay in accordance 
with 2.13.3.4.1, 2.13.3.4.2, 2.13.3.4.3, and 2.13.3.4.5, and 
the car shall proceed to the designated level. 

(3) Elevators having power-operated doors pro- 
vided with continuous pressure closing operation (see 
2.13.3.2), or elevators having manual doors, shall be pro- 
vided with a visual and audible signal system [see 
2.27.3.1.6(h)] to alert an operator to close the doors and 
shall, when the doors are closed, proceed to the desig- 
nated level. Sequence operation, if provided, shall 
remain effective. 

(e) Door reopening devices for power-operated doors 
that are sensitive to smoke or flame shall be rendered 
inoperative without delay. Door reopening devices not 
sensitive to smoke or flame (e.g., mechanically actuated 
devices) are permitted to remain operative. Door closing 
for power-operated doors shall conform to 2.13.5. 

(f) All car and corridor call buttons shall be rendered 
inoperative. All call-registered lights and directional lan- 
terns shall be extinguished and remain inoperative. Car 
position indicators, where provided, shall remain opera- 
tive. Where provided, landing position indicators shall 
be extinguished and remain inoperative, except at the 
designated level and the building fire control station, 
where they shall remain operative. 

(g) Where provided on elevators with vertically slid- 
ing doors, corridor door open and door close buttons 
shall remain operative. 

(h) An illuminated visual and audible signal system 
shall be activated. The visual signal shall be one of the 
symbols shown in Fig. 2.27.3.1.6(h) and located on the 
car-operating panel. The entire circular or square area 
or the outline of the hat, or the outline of the area shown 
in Fig. 2.27.3.1.6(h) shall be illuminated. The visual sig- 
nal shall remain activated until the car is restored to 
automatic operation. When the door is open, the audible 
signal shall remain active until the door is closed. When 
the door is closed, the audible signal shall remain active 



93 



ASMEA17.1S-2005 



2.27.3.1.6-2.27.3.2.3 




25 mm 
(1 in.) 
min. 




GENERAL NOTE: Grid is for scaling purposes only. 

Fig. 2.27.3.1.6(h) Visual Signal 



for a rrtinimum of 5 s. The audible signal shall not be 
active when the car is at the recall level. 

(i) A car stopped at a landing shall have the in-car 
door open button rendered inoperative as soon as the 
car moves away from the landing. The in-car door close 
button shall remain inoperative when a car stops to 
reverse direction. Once the in-car door open button has 
been rendered inoperative, it shall remain inoperative 
until the car has returned to the designated level. 

(j) Where an additional "FIRE RECALL" switch is 
provided, both "FIRE RECALL" switches shall be in the 
"ON" position to recall the elevator to the designated 
level if the elevator was recalled to the alternate level 
(see 2.27.3.2.4). 

(k) To remove the elevator(s) from Phase I Emergency 
Recall Operation, the "FIRE RECALL" switch shall be 
rotated first to the "RESET," and then to the "OFF" 
position, provided that 

(1) the additional two-position "FIRE RECALL" 
switch, where provided, is in the "OFF" position 

(2) no fire alarm initiating device is activated (see 
2.27.3.2). 

(/) Means used to remove elevators from normal oper- 
ation, other than as specified in this Code, shall not 
prevent Phase I Emergency Recall Operation. 

(m) No device, which measures load, shall prevent 
operation of the elevator at or below the capacity and 
loading required in 2.16. 

2.27.3.2 Phase I Emergency Recall Operation by Fire 
Alarm Initiating Devices 

2.27.3.2.1 In jurisdictions not enforcing the 
NBCC, fire alarm initiating devices used to initiate Phase 
I Emergency Recall Operation shall be installed in con- 
formance with the requirements of NFPA 72, and shall 
be located 

(a) at each floor served by the elevator 

(b) in the associated elevator machine room, control 
space, or control room 



(c) in the elevator hoistway, when sprinklers are 
located in those hoistways 

2.27.3.2.2 In jurisdictions enforcing the NBCC, 
automatic Emergency Recall Operation shall be permit- 
ted when the following devices, complying with the 
requirements in the NBCC, initiate the operation: 

(a) smoke detectors installed in each elevator lobby, 
or the building fire alarm system 

(b) smoke detectors installed in the elevator lobby at 
the designated level, if that floor area is not sprinklered 
throughout 

(c) smoke detectors installed in the machine room, 
control space, or control room, if such areas are provided 
with sprinklers 

2.27.3.2.3 Phase I Emergency Recall Operation to 
the designated level shall conform to the following: 

(a) The activation of a fire alarm initiating device 
specified in 2.27.3.2.1 or 2.27.3.2.2(a) at any floor, other 
than at the designated level, shall cause all elevators 
that serve that floor, and any associated elevator of a 
group automatic operation, to be returned nonstop to 
the designated level. 

(b) The activation of a fire alarm initiating device 
specified in 2.27.3.2.1(b) or 2.27.3.2.2(c) shall cause all 
elevators having any equipment located in that machine 
room, control space, or control room, and any associated 
elevators of a group automatic operation, to be returned 
nonstop to the designated level. If the machine room, 
control space, or control room is located at the desig- 
nated level, the elevator(s) shall be returned nonstop to 
the alternate level. 

(c) The activation of a fire alarm initiating device spec- 
ified in 2.27.3.2.1(c) shall cause all elevators having any 
equipment in that hoistway, and any associated elevators 
of a group automatic operation, to be returned nonstop 
to the designated level, except that initiating device(s) 
installed at or below the lowest landing of recall shall 



94 



2.27.3.2.3-2.27.3.3.1 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



cause the car to be sent to the upper recall level. 

(d) The Phase I Emergency Recall Operation to the 
designated level shall conform to 2.27.3.1.6(a) through 
(m). 

2.27.3.2.4 Phase I Emergency Recall Operation to 
an alternate level (see 1.3) shall conform to the following: 

(a) the activation of a fire alarm initiating device spec- 
ified in 2.27.3.2.1(a) or 2.27.3.2.2(b) that is located at the 
designated level, shall cause all elevators serving that 
level to be recalled to an alternate level, unless Phase I 
Emergency Recall is in effect 

(b) the requirements of 2.27.3.1.6(f), (j), and (m) 

(c) the requirements of 2.27.3.1.6(a), (b), (c), (d), (e), 
(g), (h), (i), (k), and (1), except that all references to the 
"designated level" shall be replaced with "alternate 
level" 

2.27.3.2.5 The recall level shall be determined by 
the first activated fire alarm initiating device for that 
group (see 2.27.3.2.1 or 2.27.3.2.2). 

If the car(s) is recalled to the designated level by the 
"FIRE RECALL" switch(es) [see also 2.27.3.1. 6(j)], the 
recall level shall remain the designated level. 

2.27.3.2.6 When a fire alarm initiating device in 
the machine room, control space, control room, or 
hoistway initiates Phase I Emergency Recall Operation, 
as required by 2.27.3.2.3 or 2.27.3.2.4, the visual signal 
[see 2.27.3.1.6(h) and Fig. 2.27.3.1.6(h)] shall illuminate 
intermittently only in a car(s) with equipment in that 
machine room, control space, control room, or hoistway. 
When activated, a heat detector [2.27.3.2.1(d)] in the 
machine room, control space, or control room shall cause 
the visual signal [see 2.27.3.1.6(h) and Fig. 2.27.3.1.6(h)] 
to illuminate intermittently only in a car(s) with equip- 
ment in that machine room, control space, or control 
room. 

2.27.3.3 Phase II Emergency In-Car Operation. A 

three-position ("OFF," "HOLD," and "ON," in that 
order) key-operated switch shall be labeled "FIRE 
OPERATION"; provided in an operating panel in each 
car; and shall be readily accessible. The label "FIRE 
OPERATION" lettering shall be a minimum of 5 mm 
(0.25 in.) high in red or a color contrasting with a red 
background. It shall become effective only when Phase 
I Emergency Recall Operation is in effect and the car 
has been returned to the recall level. The switch shall 
be rotated clockwise to go from "OFF" to "HOLD" to 
"ON." 

The key shall only be removable in the "OFF" and 
"HOLD" position. The "OFF," "HOLD," and "ON" posi- 
tions shall not change the mode of operation within 
Phase II Emergency In-Car Operation until the car is at 
a landing with the doors in the normal open position, 
except as required by 2.27.3.3.4. 



2.27.3.3.1 When the "FIRE OPERATION" switch 
is in the "ON" position, the elevator shall be on Phase 
II Emergency In-Car Operation, for use by emergency 
personnel only, and the elevator shall operate as follows: 

(a) The elevator shall be operable only by a person 
in the car. 

(b) The car shall not respond to landing calls. Direc- 
tional lanterns, where provided, shall remain inopera- 
tive. Car position indicators, where provided, shall 
remain operative. Landing position indicators, where 
provided, shall remain inoperative, except at the desig- 
nated level and the building fire control station, where 
they shall remain operative. 

(c) Door open and close buttons shall be provided 
for power-operated doors and located as required by 
2.27.3.3.7. The door open and door close buttons shall 
be labeled "OPEN" and "CLOSE." 

(d) The opening of power-operated doors shall be 
controlled only by a continuous pressure door open but- 
ton. If the button is released prior to the doors reaching 
the normal open position, the doors shall automatically 
reclose. Requirements 2.13.3.3, 2.13.3.4, 2.13.4.2.1(b)(2), 
and 2.13.4.2.1(c) do not apply. 

On cars with multiple entrances, if more than one 
entrance can be opened at the same landing, separate 
door open buttons shall be provided for each entrance. 

(e) Open power-operated doors shall be closed only 
by continuous pressure on the door close button. If the 
button is released prior to the doors reaching the fully 
closed position, horizontally sliding doors shall auto- 
matically reopen, and vertically sliding doors shall auto- 
matically stop or stop and reopen. 

On cars with multiple entrances, if more than one 
entrance can be opened at the same landing, a separate 
door close button shall be provided for each entrance. 

(f) Opening and closing of power-operated car doors 
or gates that are opposite manual swing or manual slide 
hoistway doors shall conform to 2.27.3.3.1(d) and (e). 

(g) All door reopening devices, except the door open 
button, shall be rendered inoperative. Full speed closing 
shall be permitted. 

Landing door opening and closing buttons, where 
provided, shall be rendered inoperative. 

(h) Every car shall be provided with a button labeled 
"CALL CANCEL," located as required in 2.27.3.3.7, 
which shall be effective during Phase II Emergency In- 
Car Operation. When activated, all registered calls shall 
be canceled and a traveling car shall stop at or before 
the next available landing. 

(i) Floor selection buttons shall be provided in the car 
to permit travel to all landings served by the car, and 
they shall be operative at all times, except as in 2.27.3.3.2. 
Means to prevent the operation of the floor selection 
buttons or door-operating buttons shall be rendered 
inoperative. 



95 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.27.3.3.1-2.27.3.3.7 



(j) A traveling car shall stop at the next available land- 
ing for which a car call was registered. When a car stops 
at a landing, all registered car calls shall be canceled. 

(k) Means used to remove elevators from normal 
operation, other than as specified in this Code, shall not 
prevent Phase II Emergency In-Car Operation. 

(7) No device, which measures load, shall prevent 
operation of the elevator at or below the capacity and 
loading required in 2.16. 

(m) Every car shall be provided with a switch, con- 
forming to the requirements of 2.26.2.33 and located as 
required in 2.27.3.3.7. When the switch is in the "STOP" 
position, all registered calls shall be canceled and power 
shall be removed from the elevator driving-machine 
motor and brake. When the switch is moved to the 
"RUN" position from the "STOP" position, the car shall 
not move, except for leveling, until a call is entered. 

2.27.3.3.2 When the car is at a landing, with the 
doors open, and the "FIRE OPERATION" switch is in 
the "HOLD" position, the car shall remain at the landing 
with the doors open. The door close buttons shall be 
inoperative, and car calls shall not be registered. 

2.27.3.3.3 When the car is at a landing other than 
the recall level, with the doors in the normal open posi- 
tion, and, the "FIRE OPERATION" switch is in the 
"OFF" position, power-operated doors shall operate as 
follows: 

(a) Horizontal sliding doors shall close automatically. 
All door reopening devices shall remain inoperative. 
Door open buttons shall remain operative. Full-speed 
closing is permitted. If the "FIRE OPERATION" switch 
is turned to the "ON" or "HOLD" position prior to the 
completion of door closing, the doors shall reopen. 

(b) Elevators having vertically sliding doors shall 
have corridor "DOOR OPEN" and "DOOR CLOSE" but- 
tons rendered operative. All door reopening devices 
shall remain inoperative. Door closing shall be in accor- 
dance with 2.27.3.3.1(e). Full-speed closing is permitted. 
If the "FIRE OPERATION" switch is turned to the "ON" 
or "HOLD" position prior to the completion of door 
closing, the doors shall reopen. 

2.27.3.3.4 When the car is stopped with the doors 
in the closed position, or in motion, and the "FIRE OPER- 
ATION" switch is in the "OFF" position, the elevator 
remains on Phase II Emergency In-Car Operation and 
shall return to the designated level in conformance with 
2.27.3.1.6(a) through (m). 

2.27.3.3.5 Elevators shall be removed from Phase 
II Emergency In-Car Operation only when the "FIRE 
OPERATION" switch is in the "OFF" position and the 
car is at the designated level and the doors are in the 
normal open position. 

2.27.3.3.6 The occurrence of an accidental ground 
or short circuit in elevator electrical equipment located 



Additional 
visual signal 




Call 
cancel 
button 



Door 
open 
button 



Door 
open 
button 
(rear), 
when 
required 



Fire operation 
key switch 



Stop 
switch 



Door 
close 
button 



Door 
close 
button 
(rear), 
when 
required 



GENERAL NOTES: 

(a) Switches and buttons show only the location not the labeling. 

(b) When manually operated doors are provided, door open and 
close buttons and instructions for their use are not required. 

(c) Not to scale. 

Fig. 2.27.3.3.7 Panel Layout 



on the landing side of the hoistway enclosure and in 
associated wiring, as a result of exposure to water, shall 
not disable Phase II Emergency In-Car Operation once 
it has been activated. 

2.27.3.3.7 The "FIRE OPERATION" switch 
(2.27.3.3), the "CALL CANCEL" button [2.27.3.3.1(h)], 
the "STOP" switch [2.27.3.3.1(m)], the door open but- 
ton(s), the door close button(s), the additional visual 
signal (2.27.3.3.8), and the operating instructions shown 
in Fig. 2.27.7.2 shall be grouped together at the top of 
a main car operating panel behind a locked cover. 

The firefighters' operation panel cover shall be open- 
able by the same key that operates the "FIRE OPERA- 
TION" switch. The cover shall be permitted to open 
automatically when the car is on Phase I Emergency 
Recall Operation and at the recall level. When the key 
is in the "FIRE OPERATION" switch, the cover shall 
not be capable of being closed. When closed, the cover 
shall be self-locking. 

Where rear doors are provided, buttons for both the 
front and rear doors shall be provided in the firefighters' 
operation panel. The door open and door close buttons 
for the rear entrance shall be labeled "OPEN REAR" 
and "CLOSE REAR." 

All buttons and switches shall be readily accessible, 
located not more than 1 800 mm (72 in.) above the floor 
and shall be arranged as shown in Fig. 2.27.3.3.7. 
Requirement 2.26.12 does not apply to these buttons and 
switches. The front of the cover shall contain the words 



96 



2.27. 3.3.7-2.27 A.2 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



"FIREFIGHTERS' OPERATION" in red letters at least 
10 mm (0.4 in.) high. 

2.27.3.3.8 An additional visual signal shall be pro- 
vided and located as required by 2.27.3.3.7. The addi- 
tional visual signal shall be one of the symbols shown 
in Fig. 2.27.3.1.6(h). The entire circular or square area 
shown in Fig. 2.27.3.1.6(h) shall be illuminated. This 
additional visual signal shall be activated whenever the 
visual signal in 2.27.3.1.6(h) is activated. 

2.27.3.4 Interruption of Power. Upon the resumption 
of power (normal, emergency, or standby), the car shall 
be permitted to move to reestablish absolute car posi- 
tion. Restoration of electrical power following a power 
interruption shall not cause any elevator to be removed 
from Phase I Emergency Recall Operation or Phase II 
Emergency In-Car Operation. 

2.27.3.5 Multicompartment Elevators. Multicompart- 
ment elevators shall also conform to 2.27.3.5.1 and 

2.27.3.5.2. 

2.27.3.5.1 The "FIRE RECALL" switch (2.27.3.1) 
shall be located at the designated level served by the 
upper compartment. 

2.27.3.5.2 The "FIRE OPERATION" switch (see 
2.27.3.3) shall be located in the upper compartment. The 
elevator shall be provided with a means for placing 
the lower compartment out of service, located in that 
compartment or adjacent to the entrance at the lower 
lobby landing. 

2.27.4 Firefighters' Emergency Operation: 
Nonautomatic Elevators 

Firefighters' Emergency Operation shall apply to all 
nonautomatic elevators, except as follows: 

(a) where the hoistway or a portion thereof is not 
required to be fire-resistive construction (see 2.1.1.1), the 
travel does not exceed 2 000 mm (80 in.), and the 
hoistway does not penetrate a floor 

(b) in jurisdictions enforcing the NBCC where the 
NBCC does not require Firefighters' Emergency Oper- 
ation 

(c) where Firefighters' Emergency Operation is pro- 
vided voluntarily these requirements shall also apply 

2.27.4.1 Phase I Emergency Recall Operation. A 

three-position key-operated switch shall be provided at 
the designated level for each single elevator or for each 
group of elevators. The three-position switch shall be 
labeled "FIRE RECALL" and its positions marked 
"RESET," "OFF," and "ON" (in that order), with the 
"OFF" position as the center position. The "FIRE 
RECALL" letters shall be a minimum of 5 mm (0.25 in.) 
high in red or a color contrasting with a red background. 
The three-position switch shall be located in the lobby 
within sight of the elevator or all elevators in that group 
and shall be readily accessible. 



An additional "FIRE RECALL" switch with two-posi- 
tions, "OFF" and "ON" (in that order), shall be permitted 
only at the building fire control station. 

The switch(es) shall be rotated clockwise to go from 
the "RESET" (designated level switch only), to the 
"OFF" and to the "ON" positions. 

All keys shall be removable only in the "OFF" and 
"ON" positions. 

Only the "FIRE RECALL" switch(es) or fire alarm 
initiating devices located at floors that are served by the 
elevator, in the hoistway, or in an elevator machine room, 
or a control space, or a control room (see 2.27.3.2) shall 
initiate Phase I Emergency Recall Operation. 

All "FIRE RECALL" switches shall be provided with 
an illuminated visual signal to indicate when Phase I 
Emergency Recall Operation is in effect. 

When all switches are in the "OFF" position, normal 
elevator service shall be in effect and the fire alarm 
initiating devices required by 2.27.4.2 shall be operative. 

When a "FIRE RECALL" switch is in the "ON" posi- 
tion, a visual and audible signal shall be provided to 
alert the attendant to return nonstop to the designated 
or alternate level. The visual signal shall read "FIRE 

RECALL — RETURN TO " [insert level to which 

the car should be returned (the designated or alternate 
level)]. The signal system shall be activated when Phase 
I Emergency Recall Operation is in effect. 

Where an additional "FIRE RECALL" switch is pro- 
vided, both "FIRE RECALL" switches must be in the 
"ON" position to recall the elevator to the designated 
level if the elevator was recalled to the alternate level. 

Where an additional "FIRE RECALL" switch is pro- 
vided, it shall not affect the visual signal if the designated 
level fire alarm initiating device (see 2.27.3.2.4) has been 
activated. 

To extinguish the audible and visual signals, the "FIRE 
RECALL" switch shall be rotated first to the "RESET" 
and then to the "OFF" position, provided that: 

(a) the additional two-position "FIRE RECALL" 
switch, where provided, is in the "OFF" position 

(b) no fire alarm initiating device is activated (see also 
2.27.3.2.4) 

No device, which measures load, shall prevent opera- 
tion of the elevator at or below the capacity and loading 
required in 2.16. 

2.27.4.2 Phase I Emergency Recall Operation by Fire 
Alarm Initiating Devices. Fire alarm initiating devices 
shall be installed at each floor served by the elevator, 
and in the associated machine room, control space, or 
control room, and elevator hoistway, in compliance with 
the requirements in NFPA 72 or NBCC, whichever is 
applicable (see Part 9). In jurisdictions enforcing the 
NBCC, compliance with 2.27.4.2 is not required where 
the NBCC specifies manual Emergency Recall opera- 
tions only. 



97 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



2.27 .4. 2-2.27. 7. 2 



FIREFIGHTERS' OPERATION 

To recall elevators 
Insert fire key and turn to "ON" 



Fig. 2.27.7.1 Phase I Emergency Recall Operation 
Instructions 



Phase I Emergency Recall Operation, conforming to 
2.27.4.1, shall be initiated when any Phase I Emergency 
Recall Operation fire alarm initiating device at the eleva- 
tor lobbies, machine room, control space, control room, 
or hoistway is activated. 

Phase I Emergency Recall Operation, when initiated 
by a Phase I Emergency Recall Operation fire alarm 
initiating device, shall be maintained until canceled by 
moving the "FIRE RECALL" switch to the "RESET" 
position. 

When a fire alarm initiating device in the machine 
room, control space, control room, or hoistway initiates 
Phase I Emergency Recall Operation as required by 
2.27.3.2.3 or 2.27.3.2.4, the visual signal [see 2.27.3.1.6(h) 
and Fig. 2.27.3.1.6(h)] shall illuminate intermittently 
only in a car(s) with equipment in that machine room, 
control space, control room, or hoistway. When acti- 
vated, a heat detector [2.27.3.2.1(d)] in the machine room, 
control space, or control room shall cause the visual 
signal [see 2.27.3.1.6(h) and Fig. 2.27.3.1.6(h)] to illumi- 
nate intermittently only in a car(s) with equipment in 
that machine room, control room, control space, or con- 
trol room. 

2.27.5 Firefighters' Emergency Operation: Automatic 
Elevators With Designated-Attendant 
Operation 

2.27.5.1 When designated-attendant operation is 
not in effect, elevators shall conform to 2.27.3. 

2.27.5.2 When operated by a designated attendant 
in the car, except hospital service: 

(a) elevators parked at a floor shall conform to 
2.27.3.1.6(h). At the completion of a time delay of not 
less than 10 s and not more than 30 s, elevators shall 
conform to 2.27.3. 

(b) A moving car shall conform to 2.27.3. 

2.27.5.3 When an elevator that is provided with 
firefighters' emergency operation is on hospital service, 
a visual signal as shown in Fig. 2.27.3.1.6(h) shall illumi- 
nate and a continuous audible signal, audible within 
the car, shall sound when the "FIRE RECALL" switch(es) 
(see 2.27.3.1) is in the "ON" position, or when a fire 
alarm initiating device (see 2.27.3.2) is activated to alert 



the operator of an emergency. A means located in the 
car shall be permitted for manually silencing the audible 
signal, after the signal has been active for at least 5 s. 
The signal shall be automatically reactivated when the 
doors open. 

The car shall remain under control of the operator 
until removed from hospital service. An elevator on 
firefighters' emergency operation shall not be placed on 
hospital service. 

2.27.6 Firefighters' Emergency Operation: Inspection 
Operation 

When an elevator that is provided with firefighters' 
service is on inspection operation (see 2.26.1.4 and 
2.26.1.5) or when the hoistway access switch(es) has been 
enabled [see 2.12.7.3.3(a)], a continuous audible signal, 
audible at the location where the operation is activated 
shall sound when the "FIRE RECALL" switch(es) (see 
2.27.3.1) is in the "ON" position or when the fire alarm 
initiating device (see 2.27.3.2) is activated to alert the 
operator of an emergency. The car shall remain under 
the control of the operator until removed from inspection 
operation or hoistway access operation. Inspection oper- 
ation or hoistway access operation shall take precedence 
over Phase I Emergency Recall Operation and Phase II 
Emergency In-Car Operation. 

2.27.7 Firefighters' Emergency Operation: Operating 
Procedures 

2.27.7.1 Instructions for operation of elevators 
under Phase I Emergency Recall Operation shall be 
incorporated with or adjacent to the "FIRE RECALL" 
switch at the designated level. The instructions shall 
include only the wording shown in Fig. 2.27.7.1. 

2.27.7.2 A sign containing instructions for operation 
of elevators under Phase II Emergency In-Car Operation 
shall be incorporated with or adjacent to the switch 
in each car and shall be visible only when the cover 
(2.27.3.3.7) is open. The sign shall include only the word- 
ing and graphics shown in Fig. 2.27.7.2, except 

(a) for elevators with manually operated doors, the 
instructions for opening and closing the doors shall be 
permitted to be replaced with short phrases such as 
"PUSH DOOR" or "PULL DOOR UP" 



98 



2.27.7.2-2.27.9 



ASME A17.1S-2005 





FIRE OPERATION 


When / 


> \ flashing, exit elevator 


To operate car 


Insert fire key and turn to "ON." 




Enter floor selection. 


To cancel 


Press "CALL CANCEL" button. 


floor selection 




To close door 


Press and hold "CLOSE" button. 


To open door 


Press and hold "OPEN" button. 


To hold car 


With doors open, turn key to "HOLD." 


at floor 




For emergency stop 


Use "STOP" switch. 


To automatically return 


Turn key to "OFF." 


to recall floor 





Fig. 2.27.7.2 Phase II Emergency In-Car Operation 



(b) for elevators with vertically sliding doors, the 
instructions for returning the car to the recall floor shall 
be permitted to be expanded to include instructions for 
closing the door 

2.27.7.3 Instructions shall be in letters not less than 
3 mm (0.125 in.) in height and shall be permanently 
installed and protected against removal or defacement. 

2.27.7.4 In jurisdictions that enforce the NBCC, a 
symbol showing a red firefighters' hat on a contrasting 
background, as shown in Fig. 2.27.3.1.6(h) (figure not to 
scale), shall be used exclusively to identify elevators that 
comply with 2.27.3 and additional NBCC requirements. 
This identification shall be located on the elevator 
entrance frame or adjacent to it at each emergency recall 
level. The identification on the entrance frame, or adja- 
cent to it, shall be a minimum of 50 mm (2 in.) in height. 

2.27.8 Switch Keys 

The key switches required by 2.27.2 through 2.27.5 for 
all elevators in a building shall be operable by the same 



key. The keys shall be Group 3 Security (see 8.1). There 
shall be a key for each switch provided. 

These keys shall be kept on the premises in a location 
readily accessible to firefighters and emergency person- 
nel, but not where they are available to the public. Where 
provided, a lock box, including its lock and other compo- 
nents, shall conform to the requirements of UL 1037 (see 
Part 9). 

NOTE (2.27.8): Local authorities may specify additional require- 
ments for a uniform keyed lock box and its location to contain the 
necessary keys. 

2.27.9 Elevator Corridor Call Station Pictograph 

When the building code requires a sign be posted 
adjacent to hall call fixtures instructing occupants not 
to use the elevator in case of fire, the sign shown in Fig. 
2.27.9 shall be provided. The sign shall include only the 
wording and graphics shown in Fig. 2.27.9. When the 
building code specifies a different design, 2.27.9 shall 
not apply. 



99 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



125 mm (5 in.) 



In Case Of Fire 
Elevators Are Out Of Service 




Use Exit 



Fig. 2.27.9 Elevator Corridor Call Station Pictograph 




White 




Black 




Red 



100 



SECTION 2.28-2.29.2 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



SECTION 2.28 
LAYOUT DRAWINGS 

2.28.1 Information Required on Layout Drawings 

Elevator layout drawings shall, in addition to other 
data, indicate the following: 

(a) the maximum bracket spacing (see 2.23) 

(b) the estimated maximum vertical forces on the 
guide rails on application of the safety or other retarding 
device (see 2.23 and 2.19.3) 

(c) in the case of freight elevators for Class B or C 
loading (see 2.16.2.2), the horizontal forces on the guide- 
rail faces during loading and unloading, and the esti- 
mated maximum horizontal forces in a post-wise direc- 
tion on the guide-rail faces on the application of the 
safety device (see 2.23) 

(d) the size and linear weight kg/m (lb /ft) of any rail 
reinforcement, where provided (see 2.23) 

(e) the total static and impact loads imposed on 
machinery and sheave beams, supports, and floors or 
foundations (see 2.9) 

(f) the impact load on buffer supports due to buffer 
engagement at the maximum permissible speed and 
load (see 8.2.3) 

(g) where compensation tie-down is applied (see 
2.21.4.2), the load on the compensation tie-down sup- 
ports 

(h) the total static and dynamic loads from the gover- 
nor, ropes, and tension system 



(i) the horizontal forces on the building structure stip- 
ulated by 2.11.11.8 and 2.11.11.9 

SECTION 2.29 
IDENTIFICATION 

2.29.1 Identification of Equipment 

In buildings with more than one elevator, each eleva- 
tor in the building shall be assigned a unique alphabeti- 
cal or numerical identification, a minimum of 50 mm 
(2 in.) in height unless otherwise specified. The identifi- 
cation shall be painted on, engraved, or securely 
attached to 

(a) the driving machine 

(b) MG set 
controller 
selector 



(c) 
(d) 
(e) 
(f) 



governor 

main line disconnect switch 
(g) the crosshead, or where there is no crosshead, the 
car frame, such that it is visible from the top of the car 
(h) the car operating panel, minimum of 13 mm 
(0.5 in.) in height 

(i) adjacent to or on every elevator entrance at the 
designated level, minimum of 75 mm (3 in.) in height 

2.29.2 Identification of Floors 

Hoistways shall have floor numbers, not less than 
100 mm (4 in.) in height, on the hoistway side of the 
enclosure or hoistway doors. 



101 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



SCOPE-3.4.1.5 



Part 3 
Hydraulic Elevators 



SCOPE 

Part 3 applies to direct-acting hydraulic elevators and 
the roped-hydraulic types. 

NOTE: See also Part 8 for additional requirements that apply to 
hydraulic elevators. 



SECTION 3.1 

CONSTRUCTION OF HOISTWAYS AND HOISTWAY 

ENCLOSURES 

Hoistways, hoistway enclosures, and related construc- 
tion shall conform to 2.1.1 through 2.1.6 and 2.29.2, 
except 2.1.2.3 and 2.1.3.1.2. 

3.1.1 Strength of Pit Floor 

The pit equipment, beams, floor, and their supports 
shall be designed and constructed to meet the applicable 
building code requirements and to withstand the follow- 
ing loads in the manner in which they occur: 

(a) the impact load due to car buffer engagement (see 
8.2.3 and 3.22.2) 

(b) where a plunger gripper, or car, or counterweight 
safety is furnished, the part of the load transmitted by 
the application of such gripper(s) or safety(s) 

(c) loads imposed by the hydraulic jack 

(1) to the cylinder during normal operation 

(2) to the buffer when resting on the buffer or dur- 
ing conditions described in 3.1.1(a) 

(d) hoist rope up-pull, where applicable, for indirect 
roped-hydraulic elevators 

3.1.2 Floors Over Hoistways 

The floor shall be located entirely above the horizontal 
plane required for hydraulic elevator top car clearance. 

When a hydraulic pump unit and /or control equip- 
ment is located on a floor over the hoistway, access shall 
comply with 2.7.3. 

SECTION 3.2 
PITS 

Pits shall conform to 2.2, except 2.2.7. 

3.2.1 Minimum Pit Depths Required 

The pit depth shall not be less than is required for the 
installation of the buffers, hydraulic jack, platform guard 
(apron), and all other elevator equipment located 



therein, and to provide the minimum bottom clearance 
and runby required by 3.4.1 and 3.4.2, respectively. 

SECTION 3.3 
LOCATION AND GUARDING OF COUNTERWEIGHTS 

The location and guarding of counterweights, where 
provided, shall conform to 2.3. 

SECTION 3.4 

BOTTOM AND TOP CLEARANCES AND RUNBYS FOR 

CARS AND COUNTERWEIGHTS 

Requirement 2.4 does not apply to hydraulic elevators. 

3.4.1 Bottom Car Clearance 

3.4.1.1 When the car rests on its fully compressed 
buffers or bumpers, there shall be a vertical clearance 
of not less than 600 mm (24 in.) between the pit floor 
and the lowest structural or mechanical part, equipment, 
or device installed beneath the car platform, including 
a plunger-follower guide, if provided, except as specified 
in 3.4.1.2. 

3.4.1.2 The 600 mm (24 in.) clearance does not apply 
to the following: 

(a) any equipment on the car within 300 mm (12 in.) 
horizontally from any side of the car platform 

(b) any equipment located on or traveling with the 
car located within 300 mm (12 in.) horizontally from 
either side of the car frame centerline parallel to the 
guide rails 

(c) any equipment mounted in or on the pit floor 
located within 300 mm (12 in.) horizontally from either 
side of the car frame centerline parallel to the guide rails 

3.4.1.3 In no case shall the available refuge space be 
less than either of the following: 

(a) a horizontal area 600 mm x 1 200 mm (24 in. x 
47 in.), with a height of 600 mm (24 in.) 

(b) a horizontal area 450 mm x 900 mm (18 in. x 
35 in.), with a height of 1 070 mm (42 in.) 

3.4.1.4 Trenches and depressions or foundation 
encroachments permitted by 2.2.2 shall not be consid- 
ered in determining these clearances. 

3.4.1.5 When the car is resting on its fully com- 
pressed buffers or bumpers, no equipment traveling 



102 



3.4.1.5-3.4.8 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



with the car, including a plunger-follower guide, if pro- 
vided, shall strike any part of the pit or any equipment 
mounted therein. 

3.4.1.6 Where the vertical clearance outside the ref- 
uge space is less than 600 mm (24 in.), that area shall 
be clearly marked on the pit floor. Markings shall not 
be required in the area under the apron and guiding 
means. The marking shall consist of alternating 100 mm 
(4 in.) diagonal red and white stripes. In addition, a sign 
with the words "DANGER LOW CLEARANCE" shall 
be prominently posted on the hoistway enclosure and 
shall be visible from within the pit and at the entrance 
to the pit. The sign shall conform to ANSI Z535.2 or 
CAN/CSA-Z321, whichever is applicable (see Part 9). 
The sign shall be of such material and construction that 
the letters and figures stamped, etched, cast, or other- 
wise applied to the face remain permanently and readily 
legible. 

3.4.2 Minimum Bottom and Top Car Runby 

3.4.2.1 Bottom Car Runby. The bottom car runby 
shall be 

(a) not less than 75 mm (3 in.) for operating speed(s) 
in the down direction up to 0.50 m/s (100 ft/min) 

(b) increased from 75 mm (3 in.) to 150 mm (6 in.) in 
proportion to the increase in operating speed(s) in the 
down direction from 0.50 m/s (100 ft/min) to 1 m/s 
(200 ft/min) 

(c) a minimum of 150 mm (6 in.) for operating 
speed(s) in the down direction exceeding 1 m/s 
(200 ft/min) 

3.4.2.2 Car Top Minimum Runby. The top runby of 
the car shall be 

(a) not less than 75 mm (3 in.) for rated speeds up to 
0.50 m/s (100 ft/min) 

(b) increased from 75 mm (3 in.) to 150 mm (6 in.) in 
proportion to the increase in rated speed from 0.50 m/s 
(100 ft/min) to 1 m/s (200 ft/min) 

(c) a minimum of 150 mm (6 in.) for rated speeds 
exceeding 1 m/s (200 ft/min) 

3.4.3 Car Top and Bottom Maximum Runby 

Neither the top nor the bottom runby of the car shall 
be more than 600 mm (24 in.). 

3.4.4 Top Car Clearance 

The top car clearance shall be not less than the sum 
of the following two items (see Nonmandatory Appen- 
dix G): 

(a) the top car runby 

(b) the height of the refuge space on top of the car (see 
3.4.7) or the clearance required for equipment projecting 
above the car top or crosshead (see 3.4.5), whichever is 
greater 



3.4.5 Equipment Projecting Above the Car Top 

When the car reaches its maximum upward movement 

(a) all equipment attached to and projecting above 
the car top, other than equipment mentioned in 3.4.5(b) 
shall be at least 150 mm (6 in.) from striking any part 
of the overhead structure or any equipment located in 
the hoistway 

(b) guide-shoe assemblies or gate posts for vertically 
sliding gates shall not strike any part of the overhead 
structure 

(c) the car crosshead shall have a minimum of 300 mm 
(12 in.) vertical clearance to the horizontal plane 
described by the lowest point of the overhead structure 
(see 1.3) 

3.4.6 Top Clearance and Bottom Runby of 
Counterweight 

Where a counterweight is provided, the top clearance 
and the bottom runby of the counterweight shall con- 
form to 3.4.6.1 and 3.4.6.2. 

3.4.6.1 Top Clearance. The top clearance shall be not 
less than the sum of the following: 

(a) the bottom car runby 

(b) the stroke of the car buffers used 

(c) 150 mm (6 in.) 

3.4.6.2 Bottom Runby. The bottom runby shall be not 
less than the sum of the following: 

(a) the distance the car can travel above its top termi- 
nal landing until the plunger strikes its mechanical stop 

(b) 150 mm (6 in.) 

The minimum runby specified shall not be reduced 
by rope stretch (see 3.22.2 prohibiting counterweight 
buffers). 

3.4.7 Refuge Space on Top of Car Enclosure 

An unobstructed horizontal area of not less than 
0.51 m 2 (5.49 ft 2 ) shall be provided on top of the car 
enclosure for refuge space. It shall measure not less than 
600 mm (24 in.) on any side. The area shall be permitted 
to include the space utilized for top emergency exit 
[see 2.14.1.5.1(f)]. The minimum vertical distance in the 
refuge area between the top of the car enclosure and 
the horizontal plane described by the lowest point of 
the overhead structure or other obstruction shall be not 
less than 1 100 mm (43 in.) when the car has reached its 
maximum upward movement. 

3.4.8 Vertical Clearances With Underslung Car 
Frames 

Where an underslung car frame is used, the clearances 
between the overhead car rope dead-end hitch, or over- 
head car sheave, and the portions of the car structure 



103 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



3.4.8-3.7.1.8 



vertically below them, when the car floor is level with the 
top terminal landing, shall be not less than the following: 

(a) where no counterweight is used, the sum of the 
following items: 

(1) the car top runby 

(2) 200 mm (8 in.) 

(b) where a counterweight is used, the sum of the 
following items: 

(1) the bottom counterweight runby (see 3.4.6.2) 

(2) 150 mm (6 in.) 



SECTION 3.5 

HORIZONTAL CAR AND COUNTERWEIGHT 

CLEARANCES 

The horizontal car and counterweight clearances shall 
conform to 2.5. 



SECTION 3.6 
PROTECTION OF SPACES BELOW HOISTWAY 

Requirement 2.6 does not apply to hydraulic elevators. 

Where there is space below the hoistway that is acces- 
sible to persons, requirements of 3.6.1 through 3.6.4 shall 
be conformed to. 

3.6.1 jack-Supporting Structure 

The hydraulic jack shall be supported by a structure 
of sufficient strength to support the entire static load at 
rated capacity that is capable of being imposed upon it. 
The design factor of safety shall be not less than 5, based 
on ultimate strength for static loads transmitted. 

3.6.2 Counterweight Safety Actuation 

Where the space referred to in 3.6 falls underneath 
the counterweight and /or its guides, the counterweight 
shall be provided with a safety device that functions as a 
result of the breaking or slackening of the counterweight 
suspension ropes. 

3.6.3 Buffer Types 

The car shall be provided with buffers of either of the 
following types: 

(a) oil buffers conforming to 3.22.1 

(b) spring buffers of a design that will not be fully 
compressed when struck by a car with rated load at the 
operating speed in the down direction (see 3.22.1) 

3.6.4 Buffer Supports 

Car buffer supports shall be provided that will with- 
stand, without permanent deformation, the impact 
resulting from buffer engagement by a car with rated 
load at the operating speed in the down direction. The 
design factor of safety shall conform to 2.22.4.3. 



SECTION 3.7 

MACHINERY SPACES, MACHINE ROOMS, CONTROL 

SPACES, AND CONTROL ROOMS 

A machinery space outside the hoistway containing 
a hydraulic machine and a motor controller shall be a 
machine room. 

3.7.1 

Machinery spaces, machine rooms, control spaces, and 
control rooms shall conform to the requirements of 2.7.1 
through 2.7.7 and 2.7.9. 

3.7.1.1 This paragraph shall conform to the require- 
ments of 2.7.5.1.1, 2.7.5.2, and 2.7.5.2.4, except the words 
"elevator driving machine brake or an emergency brake" 
shall be replaced with the words "hydraulic machine." 

3.7.1.2 This paragraph shall conform to the require- 
ments of 2.7.5.1.1 and 2.7.5.1.2(a), except the words "ele- 
vator driving machine brake, emergency brake" shall be 
replaced with the words "hydraulic machine." 

3.7.1.3 This paragraph shall conform to the require- 
ments of 2.7.5.1.2(b), except 3.7.1.3 shall be worded as 
follows: "for a roped-hydraulic elevator support not less 
than twice the unbalanced weight of the system with 
no load and up to rated load in the car and all suspension 
ropes in place; and for a direct-acting hydraulic elevator 
support not less than twice the weight of the car with 
rated load." 

3.7.1.4 This paragraph shall conform to the require- 
ments of 2.7.5.1.2(c), 2.7.5.3.1, and 2.7.5.5(a), except the 
words "elevator driving machine motor and brake" shall 
be replaced with the words "hydraulic machine." 

3.7.1.5 This paragraph shall conform to the require- 
ments of 2.7.5.1.2(e) and 2.7.5.2.1(b)(4), except the words 
"before maintaining or inspecting brake, emergency 
brake" shall be replaced with the words "before main- 
taining or inspecting the hydraulic machine." 

3.7.1.6 This paragraph shall conform to the require- 
ments of 2.7.5.2.1(b)(1) and 2.7.5.5(d), except the words 
"115% of rated speed" shall be replaced with the words 
"operating speed in the down direction." 

3.7.1.7 This paragraph shall conform to the require- 
ments of 2.7.6.3.1, except the words "electric driving 
machine" shall be replaced with the words "hydraulic 
machine." 

3.7.1.8 This paragraph shall conform to the require- 
ments of 2.7.6.4, except it shall be worded as follows: 
"Where hydraulic machine, or an elevator motion con- 
troller or motor controller is located in the hoistway or 
pit, means necessary for tests that require movement of 
the car, shall be provided and arranged so that they 
can be operated from outside the hoistway and shall 
conform to 2.7.6.4.1 through 2.7.6.4.2. These means are 



104 



3.7.1.8-3.15.1.1.6 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



• 



also permitted to be used by elevator personnel for pas- 
senger rescue." 

3.7.1.9 This paragraph shall conform to the require- 
ments of 2.7.6.4.1, except the first paragraph shall be 
worded as follows: "Where direct observation of the 
elevator or ropes in the case of a roped-hydraulic eleva- 
tor is not possible from the location of the means neces- 
sary for tests that require movement of the car, display 
devices or the equivalent shall be provided. They shall 
be visible from the location of the means and shall con- 
vey the following information about the elevator simul- 
taneously." 

3.7.1.10 Requirement 2.7.6.4.3 does not apply to 
hydraulic elevators. 

SECTION 3.8 

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, WIRING, PIPES, AND 

DUCTS IN HOISTWAY, MACHINERY SPACES, 

MACHINE ROOMS, CONTROL SPACES, AND 

CONTROL ROOMS 

Electrical equipment, wiring, pipes, and ducts shall 
conform to 2.8. 

SECTION 3.9 

MACHINERY AND SHEAVE BEAMS, SUPPORTS, AND 

FOUNDATIONS 

Machinery and sheave beams, supports, and founda- 
tions shall conform to 2.9. 

SECTION 3.10 
GUARDING OF EXPOSED AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 

Guarding of exposed auxiliary equipment shall con- 
form to 2.10. 

SECTION 3.11 
PROTECTION OF HOISTWAY LANDING OPENINGS 

Protection of hoistway landing openings shall con- 
form to 2.11, except as excluded by 3.11.1. 

3.11.1 Emergency Doors 

Emergency doors, where required by 2.11.1, are 
required only when car safeties are provided. 

SECTION 3.12 

HOISTWAY DOOR LOCKING DEVICES, CAR DOOR 

OR GATE ELECTRIC CONTACTS, AND HOISTWAY 

ACCESS SWITCHES 

3.12.1 Hoistway Door Locking Devices and Electric 
Contacts, and Hoistway Access Switches 

Hoistway door locking devices and electric contacts, 
and hoistway access switches shall conform to 2.12. 



3.12.2 Car Door or Gate Electric Contacts and Car 
Door Interlocks 

Car door or gate electric contacts and car door inter- 
locks shall conform to 2.14.4.2. 

SECTION 3.13 

POWER OPERATION, POWER OPENING, AND 

POWER CLOSING OF HOISTWAY DOORS AND CAR 

DOORS OR GATES 

Power operation, power opening, and power closing 
of hoistway doors and car doors or gates shall conform 
to 2.13. 

SECTION 3.14 

CAR ENCLOSURES, CAR DOORS AND GATES, AND 

CAR ILLUMINATION 

Car enclosures, car doors and gates, and car illumina- 
tion shall conform to 2.14. 

SECTION 3.15 
CAR FRAMES AND PLATFORMS 

3.15.1 Requirements 

3.15.1.1 Direct-acting hydraulic elevators shall be 
provided with car frames and platforms conforming to 
2.15, subject to the modification hereinafter specified. 
(See 3.18.2.3 for connection between plunger and plat- 
form or car frame.) 

A car frame shall not be required, provided 3.15.1.1.1 
through 3.15.1.1.6 are conformed to. 

3.15.1.1.1 The platform frame shall be of such 
design and construction that all eccentric loads are car- 
ried through the structure and plunger attachment into 
the hydraulic jack (see 3.18.2.3). 

3.15.1.1.2 The platform frame shall be guided on 
each guide rail by single-guiding members attached to 
the frame. 

3.15.1.1.3 The platform frame shall be designed 
to withstand the forces resulting from the class of load- 
ing for which the elevator is designed without exceeding 
the stresses and deflections in 2.15.10 and 2.15.11 (see 
8.2.2.6). 

3.15.1.1.4 The hydraulic jack connection to the 
car shall be designed to transmit the full eccentric 
moment into the plunger with a factor of safety of not 
less than 4 (see 3.18.2.3). 

3.15.1.1.5 The hydraulic jack shall be designed to 
withstand the stresses due to bending during the loading 
and unloading of the platform based on the type of 
loading for which the elevator is designed (see 8.2.8.1.2). 

3.15.1.1.6 Car safeties shall not be provided. 



105 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



3.15.1.2-3.17.1.2 



3.15.1.2 Roped-hydraulic elevators shall be pro- 
vided with car frames and platforms conforming to 2.15. 

3.15.2 Maximum Allowable Stresses and Deflections 
in Car Frame and Platform Members 

3.15.2.1 Direct-Acting Hydraulic Elevators. The 

stresses and deflections in car frame and platform mem- 
bers and their connections, based on the static load 
imposed upon them, shall be not more than those per- 
mitted by 2.15, provided that the maximum stresses 
in the car frame uprights that are normally subject to 
compression shall conform to 8.2.9.1.1. 

3.15.2.2 Roped-Hydraulic Elevators. The stresses and 
deflection in car frame and platform members and their 
connections, based on the static load imposed upon 
them, shall be not more than those permitted by 2.15, 
and shall conform to 8.2.2. 

3.15.3 Calculations of Stresses and Deflections in 
Car Frame and Platform Members 

3.15.3.1 Direct-Acting Hydraulic Elevators. The calcu- 
lations of the stresses and deflections in side-post car 
frame and platform members shall be based on the for- 
mulas and data in 8.2.9. 

For cars with corner-post or sub-post car frames, the 
formulas and specified methods of calculations do not 
generally apply and shall be modified to suit the specific 
conditions and requirements in each case. 

3.15.3.2 Roped-Hydraulic Elevators. The calculations 
of the stresses and deflections in side-post car frame and 
platform members shall be based on the formulas and 
data in 8.2.2. 

For cars with corner-post or sub-post car frames, or 
where the rope hitches are not on the crosshead, the 
formulas and specified methods of calculations do not 
generally apply and shall be modified to suit the specific 
conditions and requirements in each case. 

SECTION 3.16 
CAPACITY AND LOADING 

3.16.1 Minimum Rated Load for Passenger Elevators 

The requirements of 2.16.1 shall apply. 

3.16.2 Minimum Rated Load for Freight Elevators 

The requirements of 2.16.2 shall apply, except, in 
2.16.2.2.4(c) the wording "hydraulic jack, hydraulic 
machine, pressure piping and fittings" shall be substi- 
tuted for the wording "driving-machine motor, brake 
and traction relation." 

3.16.3 Capacity and Data Plates 

The requirements of 2.16.3 shall apply, except: 
(a) requirement 2.16.3.2.1(a) shall not apply to 
hydraulic elevators. 



(b) on data plates (see 2.16.3.2.2), the weight of the 
plunger is not to be included in the weight of the com- 
plete car, even though it is attached. The plunger weight 
is to be indicated independently. The operating speed 
in the down direction shall also be indicated. 

3.16.4 Carrying of Passengers on Freight Elevators 

The requirements of 2.16.4 shall apply, except 2.16.4.3 
shall not apply to hydraulic elevators. 

3.16.5 Signs Required in Freight Elevators 

The requirements of 2.16.5 shall apply. 

3.16.6 Overloading of Freight Elevators 

The requirements of 2.16.6 shall apply, except 2.16.6(b) 
shall not apply to hydraulic elevators. 

3.16.7 One-Piece Loads Exceeding the Rated Load 

Requirement 2.16.7 shall not apply. One-piece loads 
exceeding rated load shall not be carried on hydraulic 
elevators. 

3.16.8 Additional Requirements for Passenger 
Overload 

Requirement 2.16.8 shall not apply. Hydraulic passen- 
ger elevators shall be designed based on 100% of 
rated load. 

3.16.9 Special Loading Means 

The requirements of 2.16.9 shall apply. 

SECTION 3.17 

CAR AND COUNTERWEIGHT SAFETIES AND 

PLUNGER GRIPPER 

3.17.1 Cair Safeties 

Car safeties shall be provided for roped-hydraulic ele- 
vators and shall be permitted to be provided for direct- 
acting hydraulic elevators. When provided, car safeties 
shall conform to 2.17, and to 3.17.1.1 through 3.17.1.3. 

3.17.1.1 The slack-rope device required by 3.18.1.2 
shall be permitted to be an additional means of activat- 
ing the car safety on roped-hydraulic elevators using 
hydraulic jacks equipped with plungers. The slack-rope 
device required by 3.18.1.2.7 shall be an additional 
means of activating the car safety on roped-hydraulic 
elevators using hydraulic jacks equipped with pistons. 

3.17.1.2 The safety shall be of a type that can be 
released only by moving the car in the up direction. To 
return a car to normal operation after a safety set, the 
car shall be moved hydraulically in the up direction. 
For repairs of obvious or suspected malfunction, the car 
shall be permitted to be raised by other means capable 
of holding the entire car weight. Prior to releasing the 



106 



3.17.1.2-3.17.3.6.3 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



• 



other means, the car shall be run hydraulically in the 
up direction. 

If an auxiliary pump is used to move the car in the 
up direction to release the safeties, it shall 

(a) have a relief valve that limits the pressure to not 
more than 2.3 times the working pressure 

(b) be connected between the check valve or control 
valve and the shutoff valve 

3.17.13 The switches required by 2.18.4.1 shall, 
when operated, remove power from the hydraulic 
machine motor and control valves before or at the time 
of application of the safety. 

3.17.2 Counterweight Safeties 

Counterweight safeties, where provided in accor- 
dance with 3.6.2, shall conform to 2.17, provided that 
safeties shall be operated as a result of the breaking 
or slackening of the counterweight suspension ropes, 
irrespective of the rated speed of the elevator. 

3.173 Plunger Grippes 

A plunger gripper shall be permitted to be provided 
for direct-acting hydraulic elevators using hydraulic 
jacks equipped with plungers. A plunger gripper shall 
be capable of stopping and holding the car with its rated 
load from the actual measured tripping speed per Table 
2.18.2.1 and shall conform to 3.17.3.1 through 3.17.3.9. 
In Table 2.18.2.1 the words "rated speed" shall be 
replaced by "operating speed in the down direction." 

3.173.1 Limits of Application. A plunger gripper 
shall be permitted, provided that 

(a) the external pressure applied to the plunger by 
the device is symmetrically distributed at locations 
around the circumference of the plunger. The resulting 
stress in the plunger shall not exceed 67% of the yield 
strength at any point of the plunger. 

(b) the external pressure applied to the plunger by 
the device does not exceed 67% of the value that will 
cause local buckling. Where the external pressure is 
applied over substantially the full circumference of the 
plunger, the maximum value shall be permitted to be 
determined by 8.2.8.6. 

(c) during the application, the plunger and the 
plunger gripper are capable of withstanding any vertical 
forces imposed upon them, and transfer such forces to 
the supporting structure. During the application of the 
device, any loading on the plunger shall not damage 
the cylinder. 

(d) power is removed from the hydraulic machine 
before or at the time of application. 

3.17.3.2 Means of Application. A plunger gripper 
shall mechanically grip the plunger. 

3.17.3.2.1 Hydraulic means are permitted to be 
used to hold the gripper in the retracted position. A 



loss of hydraulic pressure or fluid causing uncontrolled 
downward motion is permitted to be used to apply the 
plunger gripper. 

3.1 7.3.2.2 When electrical means are used to actu- 
ate the gripper, the following shall apply: 

(a) The plunger gripper shall be fully operational dur- 
ing a primary electrical system power failure. 

(b) In the event of the failure of any single mechani- 
cally operated switch, contactor, relay, solenoid, or any 
single solid-state device, or a software system failure, 
or the occurrence of a single ground, the elevator shall 
not be permitted to restart after a normal stop. 

3.173.3 Release 

3.1733.1 The plunger gripper shall be released 
by establishing at least no-load static pressure on the 
hydraulic system, or by other means capable of holding 
the entire car weight. 

3.1733.2 The elevator shall not be permitted to 
be restarted without establishing at least no-load static 
pressure on the hydraulic system. 

3. 1 73.4 Clearance. In the normally retracted position 
of the plunger gripper, any contact between the gripping 
surface and the plunger shall not cause degradation of 
the plunger or premature degradation of the gripping 
surface. 

3.173.5 Deceleration. The deceleration of the eleva- 
tor upon actuation of the plunger gripper shall comply 
with the following criteria: 

(a) The average deceleration rate at rated load shall 
be not less than 0.1 gravity nor more than 1.0 gravity. 
(See Nonmandatory Appendix P for minimum and max- 
imum stopping distances.) 

(b) Any peak deceleration rate in excess of 2.0 gravity 
shall have a duration of not greater than 0.04 s. 

3.173.6 Minimum Factors of Safety and Stresses of 
Safety Parts and Rope Connections 

3.173.6.1 Compliance with 2.17.12.1 and 2.17.12.6 
is required. Springs shall be permitted in the operation 
of the plunger gripper. The maximum fiber stress in the 
spring shall not exceed 85% of the elastic limit in the 
material at any time. The factor of safety of wire ropes, 
if provided in the construction of the plunger gripper, 
shall not be less than 5. Tiller-rope construction shall 
not be used. 

3.173.6.2 Leaf and roller chains, if provided in 
the construction of the plunger gripper, shall conform 
to ASME B29. 

3.1 7.3.63 The factors of safety shall be based upon 
the maximum stresses developed in the parts during 
operation of the gripper when stopping rated load from 
the tripping speed (see 3.17.3) of the speed-measuring 
device. 



107 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



3.17.3.6.4-3.18.2.2 



3.17.3.6.4 Rope or tape used to drive an electrical 
encoder is not required to comply with the requirements 
for governor rope. 

3.17.3.6.5 If a governor is used, it must comply 
with 2.18.5.1, except lang-lay construction is permitted 
and the diameter is permitted to be less than 9.5 mm 
(0.375 in.). 

3.17.3.7 Corrosion-Resistant Bearings in Plunger 
Gripper and Gripper Operating Mechanisms. Compliance 
with 2.17.13 is required. 

3.17.3.8 Marking Plates for a Plunger Gripper. A per- 
manent marking plate shall be securely attached to each 
plunger gripper so as to be readily visible, and shall be 
marked in a legible and permanent manner with letters 
and symbols not less than 6 mm (0.25 in.) in height, 
indicating 

(a) that it is a plunger gripper. 

(b) the maximum operating speed in the down direc- 
tion in m/s (ft/min) for which the plunger gripper shall 
be permitted to be used. 

(c) the maximum load in Newtons (pounds) for which 
the gripper is designed and installed to stop and sustain. 

(d) the manufacturer's name or trademark and identi- 
fication number of the device. 

(e) space for date of acceptance test. Date to be perma- 
nently marked following test. 

(f) the diameter and minimum wall thickness of the 
plunger for which the device is applicable. 

3.17.3.9 Flexible Hoses. Flexible hoses used for the 
operation of a plunger gripper shall be permitted, pro- 
vided that their failure does not cause an uncontrolled 
descent. These flexible hoses are not required to meet 
the requirements of 3.19.3.3. 



SECTION 3.18 
HYDRAULIC JACKS 

3.18.1 Hydraulic Jack and Connections 

Where multiple hydraulic jacks are used, they shall 
be hydraulically connected to form a single hydraulic 
system. 

3.18.1.1 Direct-Acting Hydraulic Elevators. The driv- 
ing member of the hydraulic jack shall be attached to 
the car frame or car platform with fastenings of sufficient 
strength to support that member with a factor of safety 
of not less than 4 and shall be capable of withstanding, 
without damage, any forces resulting from a plunger 
stop as described in 3.18.4.2. 

Any plunger or cylinder head mechanical connector 
or connection shall conform to 3.18.2.1, 3.18.2.4, 3.18.4, 
and 3.18.5. 



3.18.1.2 Roped-Hydraulic Elevator 

3.18.1.2.1 The driving member of the hydraulic 
jack shall be vertical. Cars shall be suspended with not 
less than two wire ropes per hydraulic jack in confor- 
mance with 2.15.13 and 2.20. 

3.18.1.2.2 Where three or more hydraulic jacks 
are utilized, one rope per hydraulic jack shall be permit- 
ted to be used. Should one hydraulic jack become discon- 
nected, the remaining hydraulic jacks shall be capable 
of supporting the load without exceeding allowable car 
frame stresses or hydraulic jack stress. The ropes shall 
conform to 2.15.13 and 2.20. 

3.18.1.2.3 Ropes passing through seals fixed in 
cylinder heads shall be permitted to have a clear plastic 
coating applied in order to seal properly and facilitate 
rope inspection. 

3.18.1.2.4 The roping ratio that relates the driving 
member of the hydraulic jack speed to the car speed 
shall not exceed 1:2. 

3.18.1.2.5 Sheaves used to transfer load from the 
hydraulic jack to the car frame through wire ropes shall 
conform to 2.24.2, 2.24.3, and 2.24.5. 

3.18.1.2.6 Means shall be provided to prevent the 
ropes, if slack, from leaving the sheave grooves. 

3.18.1.2.7 A slack-rope device with an enclosed 
manually reset switch shall be provided that shall cause 
the electric power to be removed from the hydraulic 
machine pump motor and the control valves should any 
rope become slack. 

3.18.1.2.8 The traveling sheave shall be attached 
with fastenings having a minimum factor of safety of 
4, based upon the ultimate strength of the material used. 
The load to be used in determining the factor of safety 
shall be the resultant of the maximum tensions in the 
ropes leading from the sheave with the elevator at rest 
and with rated load in the car. 

3.18.2 Plungers 

3.18.2.1 Material. The plunger and connecting cou- 
plings for the plunger shall be of materials in accordance 
with 3.18.2.1.1 and 3.18.2.1.2. 

3.18.2.1.1 Tensile, compressive, bending, and tor- 
sional loading shall have a factor of safety of not less 
than 5, based on ultimate strength. 

3.18.2.1.2 Pressure loadings shall have a factor of 
safety not less than that calculated per 8.2.8.5. 

3.18.2.2 Plunger Design. Plungers made of steel shall 
be designed and constructed in compliance with the 
applicable formula in 8.2.8.1 for calculation of elastic 
stability, bending, and external pressure. For other mate- 
rials, the appropriate modulus of elasticity must be uti- 
lized. 



108 



3.18.2.2-3.18.3.6 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



Plungers subject to internal pressure shall also be 
designed and constructed in accordance with cylinder 
design formula in 8.2.8.2. 

3.18.2.3 Plunger Connection 

3.18.2.3.1 When the hydraulic jack is not sub- 
jected to eccentric loading, it shall 

(a) carry in tension the weight of the plunger with a 
factor of safety not less than 4 

(b) restrict total vertical movement to less than 20% 
of the buffer stroke, where vibration damping means 
are provided 

3.18.2.3.2 In addition, when the hydraulic jack is 
subjected to eccentric loading, the following shall also 
apply: 

(a) The plunger connection to the car shall also be so 
designed and constructed as to transmit the full eccentric 
moment into the plunger with a factor of safety not less 
than 4. 

(b) The plunger and the plunger connection to the 
car shall also be so designed and constructed that the 
total vertical deflection of the loading edge of the car 
platform due to eccentric loading of the car shall not 
exceed 19 mm (0.75 in.). 

3.18.2.4 Plunger Joints. Plungers composed of more 
than one section shall have joints designed and con- 
structed to 

(a) carry in tension the weight of all plunger sections 
below the joint with a factor of safety of not less than 4 

(b) transmit in compression the gross load on the 
plunger with a factor of safety of not less than 5, based 
on ultimate strength 

(c) withstand without damage any forces resulting 
from a plunger stop as described in 3.18.4.2 

(d) for eccentric loading, the joints shall conform to 
3.18.2.2 and 3.18.2.3 

3.18.2.5 Plungers Subject to External Pressure. For 

plungers subjected to external pressure, the working 
pressure shall be not greater than indicated by the for- 
mula in 8.2.8.1.3. 

3.18.2.6 Plunger Heads Subject to Fluid Pressure. 

Heads of plungers subject to fluid pressure shall con- 
form to 3.18.3.6. 

3.18.2.7 Plunger-Follower Guide 

3.18.2.7.1 A plunger-follower guide shall be per- 
mitted to be used, provided it is arranged so that the 
elevator is always in a position where the unsupported 
length of the plunger conforms to the "maximum free 
length" as defined in 8.2.8.1. If this length is exceeded, 
upward movement of the car shall immediately stop, 
and it shall be permitted to allow the car to return non- 
stop to the lowest landing; power-operated doors shall 
open, and electric power shall be removed from the 



motor and the control valve. After not less than 15 s nor 
more than 60 s, the doors shall close in compliance with 
2.11.3. A manual reset of the means shall be required 
before the elevator is returned to service. The in-car door 
open button shall remain operative. 

Plunger-follower guides shall be designed and con- 
structed to comply with all applicable requirements of 
2.15. 

3.18.2.7.2 Telescopic plungers shall have each 
plunger section internally guided. If more than two 
movable sections are used, external guides shall be pro- 
vided for each plunger section. External guides shall be 
designed and constructed to comply with all applicable 
requirements of 2.15. 

3.18.3 Cylinders 

3.18.3.1 Material. The cylinder and connecting cou- 
plings for the cylinder shall be made of materials in 
compliance with 3.18.3.1.1 and 3.18.3.1.2. 

3.18.3.1.1 For tensile, compressive, bending, and 
torsional loading, the cylinder and connecting couplings 
shall have a factor of safety of not less than 5, based on 
ultimate strength. 

3.18.3.1.2 For pressure calculations, the cylinder 
and connecting coupling shall have a factor of safety 
not less than that calculated as specified in 8.2.8.5. 

3.18.3.2 Cylinder Design. Cylinders shall be designed 
and constructed in accordance with the formula in 
8.2.8.2. 

3.18.3.3 Clearance at Bottom of Cylinder. Clearance 
shall be provided at the bottom of the cylinder so that 
the bottom of the plunger will not strike the safety bulk- 
head of the cylinder when the car is resting on its fully 
compressed buffer (see 3.22.1). 

3.18.3.4 Safety Bulkhead. Cylinders buried in the 
ground shall be provided with a safety bulkhead having 
an orifice of a size that would permit the car to descend 
at a speed not greater than 0.075 m/s (15 ft/min), nor 
less than 0.025 m/s (5 ft/min). A space of not less than 
25 mm (1 in.) shall be left between the welds of the 
safety bulkhead and the cylinder head. Safety bulkheads 
shall conform to 3.18.3.6. 

A safety bulkhead shall not be required where a dou- 
ble cylinder is used and where both inner and outer 
cylinders conform to 3.18.3. 

3.18.3.5 Cylinder Packing Heads. Cylinder packing 
heads shall conform to appropriate requirements of 

3.18.4 and 8.2.8.3. 

3.18.3.6 Closed Cylinder and Plunger Heads. Closed 
heads of cylinders, and heads of plungers subject to fluid 
pressure, shall conform to 3.18.3.6.1 through 3.18.3.6.3. 



109 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



3.18.3.6.1-3.19.1.4 



3.18.3.6.1 Closed Cylinder Heads. Closed heads of 
cylinders shall be only of dished seamless construction, 
concave to pressure, except if the bottom of the cylinder 
is supported, and if the cylinder is not buried. 

3.18.3.6.2 Design Formulas. They shall be designed 
and constructed in accordance with the applicable for- 
mulas in 8.2.8.3, provided that steel heads shall in no 
case have a thickness less than that required for the 
adjoining shell. 

3.18.3.6.3 Dished Seamless Heads, Convex to Pres- 
sure. Dished seamless heads, convex to pressure, if used 
on plungers, shall have a maximum allowable working 
pressure of not more than 60% of that for heads of the 
same dimensions with pressure on the concave side. 

3.18.3.7 Collection of Oil Leakage. Means shall be 
provided to collect for removal any oil leakage from 
the cylinder head seals or packing gland. The amount 
collected before removal shall not exceed 19 L (5 gal). 

3.18.3.8 Cylinders Buried in the Ground 

3.18.3.8.1 Cylinders buried in the ground shall be 
protected from corrosion due to galvanic or electrolytic 
action, salt water, or other underground conditions. 

3.18.3.8.2 The methods specified in 3.18.3.8.3 shall 
be considered as acceptable, provided that they 

(a) are designed and installed with means for moni- 
toring and mamtaining them in accordance with recog- 
nized industry standards applicable to the methods 

(b) are effective for specific conditions where the cyl- 
inder is installed 

(c) provide means for checking ongoing compliance 
with 3.18.3.8.1 

3.18.3.8.3 The following are the specified 
methods: 

(a) the cylinder shall be constructed of a material that 
is immune to the stated conditions; or 

(b) the cylinder shall be completely covered or 
encased in a material that completely surrounds the 
exterior surface and is immune to the stated conditions. 
If the space between the protective casing and the cylin- 
der is empty, the casing must be designed to withstand 
a static head of water from ground level to the bottom 
of the cylinder, based on the manufacturer's rating of 
the material used; or 

(c) the cylinder shall be protected by a monitored 
cathodic protection system; or 

(d) the cylinder shall be protected by a means that will 
provide an immunity level not less than that provided by 
the above methods for the stated conditions. 

3.18.3.9 Means for Relief of Air or Gas. Cylinders 
shall be provided with a means to release air or other gas. 



3.18.4 Plunger Stops 

3.18.4.1 Metal Stops and/or Other Means. Metal 
stops and /or other means shall be provided at one end 
of the plunger and at the packing head end of the cylin- 
der to prevent the plunger from traveling beyond the 
limits of the cylinder. 

The metal stops and/or other means shall be so 
designed and constructed as to stop the plunger travel- 
ing in the up direction at maximum speed under full 
load pressure, should the normal terminal stopping 
device (see 3.25.1) fail to operate, or at a reduced speed 
when a terminal speed-reducing device is provided as 
required by 3.25.2. No ninning test onto the stop ring 
is required [see 8.10.3.2.2(s)]. 

3.18.4.2 Hydraulic System. The connections to the 
hydraulic machine, plunger, plunger connection, cou- 
plings, plunger joints, cylinder, cylinder connecting cou- 
plings, or any other parts of the hydraulic system shall 
be designed and constructed to withstand, without dam- 
age, a plunger stop in accordance with 3.18.4.1. 

3.18.5 Welding 

All welding of hydraulic jack components shall con- 
form to 8.8. 

SECTION 3.19 
VALVES, PRESSURE PIPING, AND FITTINGS 

3.19.1 Materials and Working Pressures 

3.19.1.1 Materials. Pressure piping, valves, fittings, 
and mufflers shall be designed and made of materials 
having properties such that a factor of safety not less 
than that calculated per 8.2.8.5 is achieved. 

Piping and fittings of a grade not subjected to listed/ 
certified testing (ASTM or equivalent) shall not be used 
for hydraulic pressure piping and fittings. 

NOTE (3.19.1.1): Examples of two acceptable pipe standards are 
ASTM A106 and ASTM A 53, Type E or S. 

3.19.1.2 Working Pressures. The working pressure 
(see 1.3) shall not exceed the component rated pressure 
(see 1.3) of the pipes, valves, mufflers, and fittings used 
on the pressure side of the hydraulic system. 

3.19.1.3 Component Proof Test. For elongations 
greater than or equal to 10%, the component design shall 
be substantiated either in accordance with 8.2.8.5 or by 
an unrestrained proof test of 5 times the component 
rated pressure without resulting in fracture. For elonga- 
tions of less than 10%, the test value shall be 1.5 times the 
value indicated by 8.2.8.5 multiplied by the component 
rated pressure. 

3.19.1.4 Component Markings. Valves, fittings, and 
mufflers shall be pressure rated, and shall bear the man- 
ufacturer 's name or trademark by which the organiza- 
tion that manufactured the product can be identified, 



110 



3.19.1.4-3.19.4.1 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



and identification symbols to indicate the materials and 
service designations for which the manufacturer's rating 
applies. 

NOTE: Valves and fittings rated for a different system may be 
used in hydraulic elevator systems when substantiated in accor- 
dance with the elevator code. 

3.19.2 Pressure Piping 

3.19.2.1 Wall Thickness. The minimum wall thick- 
ness shall conform to 8.2.8.4. 

3.19.2.2 Threading. Pipe lighter than Schedule 40 
shall not be threaded. 

3.19.2.3 Pipe Supports. Piping shall be so supported 
as to eliminate undue stresses at joints and fittings, par- 
ticularly at any section of the line subject to vibration. 

3.19.2.4 Pipe, Tubing, or Fittings. Pipe, tubing, or 
fittings shall be permitted to be used for instrument 
or control purposes and shall conform to ASME B31.1, 
para. 122.3. 

3.19.2.5 Hydraulic Pipeline Identification. A marking 
shall be applied, to accessible piping that is located out- 
side the elevator machine room or hoistway, stating "Ele- 
vator Hydraulic Line" in letters that are at least 19 mm 
(0.75 in.) high in a contrasting color. The marking shall 
be visible after installation and applied at intervals not 
greater than 3 000 mm (120 in.). 

3.19.2.6 Where the hydraulic machine is located in 
the hoistway and any piping, tubing, or fitting permitted 
by 3.19.2.4 is located outside the hoistway, means shall 
be provided to 

(a) protect the specified piping, tubing, or fittings 
from damage, which would cause unsafe elevator opera- 
tion; or 

(b) prevent uncontrolled movement of the elevator in 
the event of failure of the specified piping, tubing, or 
fittings. 

3.19.3 Connections and Fittings 

3.19.3.1 Connections. All piping connections shall be 
of the welded, grooved, threaded, or bolted flange type. 
Threads of valves, piping, and fittings shall conform to 
the requirements of ASME Bl.20.1, ASME Bl.20.3, or 
ASME Bl.20.4. Hydraulic tube fittings shall conform to 
SAE J514. 

3.19.3.2 Grooved Pipe Fittings 

3.19.3.2.1 Grooved pipe fitting assemblies shall 
be permitted to be used for hydraulic connections. They 
shall be installed in conformance with the manufactur- 
er's specifications. They shall be installed in locations 
that will permit disassembly and inspection of all of 
their component parts. 



3.19.3.2.2 Grooved pipe fittings shall be so 
designed and constructed that failure of a sealing ele- 
ment will not permit separation of the parts connected. 
The devices or means used for preventing the separation 
of the parts connected shall be removable only with the 
use of tools. Devices or means removable with hand- 
operated quick-release levers or toggles are prohibited. 

3.19.33 Flexible Hydraulic Connections. Flexible 
hose and fitting assemblies, and flexible couplings, shall 
be permitted to be used for hydraulic connections. 
Where installed between the check valve or control valve 
and the cylinder, they shall conform to 3.19.3.3.1 and 
3.19.3.3.2. 

3.19.3.3.1 Flexible hose and fitting assemblies 
shall 

(a) not be installed within the hoistway, nor project 
into or through any wall. Installation shall be accom- 
plished without introducing any twist in the hose, and 
shall conform with the minimum bending radius of SAE 
100, R2 type, high pressure, steel wire reinforced, rubber- 
covered hydraulic hose specified in SAE J517. 

(b) have a bursting strength sufficient to withstand 
not less than 10 times working pressure (see 1.3). They 
shall be tested in the factory or in the field prior to 
installation at a pressure of not less than 5 times working 
pressure and shall be marked with date and pressure 
of test. 

(c) conform to the requirements of SAE 100, R2 type 
hose specified in SAE J517 and be compatible with the 
fluid used. 

(d) be of nonreusable-type fittings. 

(e) be permanently labeled/marked, indicating 

(1) the name or trademark by which the manufac- 
turer of the hose and fittings can be identified 

(2) the type of hose and fitting 

(3) the minimum factory test pressure 

(4) the minimum bending radius of hose 

(5) the date of installation 

(6) the inspection procedure 

(7) the name of elevator contractor 

(f) have a line overspeed valve conforming to 3.19.4.7. 

3.19.3.3.2 Flexible couplings are permitted for 
hydraulic connections. Such couplings shall be so 
designed and constructed that failure of the sealing ele- 
ment will not permit separation of the connected parts. 
The devices or means used to prevent the separation of 
the connected parts shall be removable only with the 
use of tools. Any devices or means that are removable 
with hand-operated quick-released levers are pro- 
hibited. 

3.19.4 Valves 

3.19.4.1 ShutofF Valve. A manually operated shutoff 
valve shall be provided between the hydraulic machines 



111 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



3.19.4.1-3.19.4.7.3 



and the hydraulic jack and shall be located outside the 
hoistway and adjacent to the hydraulic machine. 

Where the hydraulic machine is located in the 
hoistway, the manually operated shutoff valve shall be 
permitted to be located inside the hoistway, provided 
that it is accessible from outside the hoistway to elevator 
personnel only (see 8.1). 

3.19.4.2 Pump Relief Valve 

3.19.4.2.1 Each pump or group of pumps shall be 
equipped with one or more relief valve(s) conforming 
to the following requirements: 

(a) Type and Location. The relief valve shall be located 
between the pump and the check valve and shall be of 
such a type and so installed in the bypass connection 
that the valve cannot be shut off from the hydraulic 
system. 

(b) Size. The size of the relief valve and bypass shall 
be sufficient to pass the maximum rated capacity of the 
pump without raising the pressure more than 50% above 
the working pressure. Two or more relief valves shall 
be permitted to be used to obtain the required capacity. 

(c) Sealing. Relief valves shall be sealed after being 
set to the correct pressure. 

3.19.4.2.2 No relief valve is required for centrifu- 
gal pumps driven by induction motors, provided the 
shut-off, or maximum pressure that the pump can 
develop, is not greater than 135% of the working pres- 
sure at the pump. 

3.19.4.3 Check Valve. A check valve shall be provided 
and shall be so installed that it will hold the elevator 
car with rated load at any point when the pump stops 
and the down valves are closed or the maintained pres- 
sure drops below the minimuni operating pressure. 

3.19.4.4 Manual Lowering Valve. A manually oper- 
ated valve, located on or adjacent to the control valves, 
shall be provided and identified, which permits low- 
ering the car at a speed not exceeding 0.10 m/s 
(20 ft/min). This valve shall be so marked to indicate 
the lowering position. Where the hydraulic machine is 
located in the hoistway, the manual lowering valve shall 
only be accessible to elevator personnel from outside 
the hoistway (see 8.1). 

3.19.4.5 Pressure Gauge Fittings. A pressure gauge 
fitting with shutoff valve shall be provided on jack side 
of the check valve or immediately adjacent to the 
hydraulic control valve. Where the hydraulic machine 
is located in the hoistway, the pressure gauge fittings 
shall only be accessible to elevator personnel from out- 
side the hoistway (see 8.1). 

3.19.4.6 Type Tests, Certification, and Marking Plates 
for Control Valves 



3.19.4.6.1 Each type or model and make of 
hydraulic control valve shall be subjected to the engi- 
neering tests and to the certification process as specified 
in 8.3.5. 

3.19.4.6.2 Hydraulic control valves shall be 
plainly marked in a permanent manner with the follow- 
ing information: 

(a) certifying organization's name or identifying 
symbol 

(b) the name, trademark, or file number by which 
the organization that manufactured the product can be 
identified 

(c) statement of compliance with ASME A17.1 or 
CSAB44 

(d) type designation 

(e) component rated pressure 
(/) electrical coil data 

3.19.4.7 Overspeed Valves. When provided, 
overspeed valves and their connections and attachments 
shall conform to 3.19.4.7.1 through 3.19.4.7.6. 

3.19.4.7.1 Overspeed Valve Tests. Each type or 
model of overspeed valve shall be subjected to the engi- 
neering tests specified in 8.3.9. 

3.19.4.7.2 Marking of Overspeed Valves. The 

overspeed valves shall be plainly marked in a permanent 
manner with the following: 

(a) the name or trademark by which the organization 
that manufactured the product can be identified 

(b) type designation 

(c) component rated pressure 

(d) maximum and minimum rated flow 

3.19.4.7.3 Installation of Overspeed Valves. 

Overspeed valves shall be installed and mounted as 
follows: 

(a) Single Jack Arrangements. Where a single valve is 
used, it shall be located in the pressure piping within 
300 mm (12 in.) of the hydraulic jack. Multiple parallel 
valves are permitted in lieu of a single valve. These shall 
be located so as to minimize the distance from the valves 
to the hydraulic jack. 

(b) Multiple Jack Arrangements. Multiple jack arrange- 
ments shall conform with one of the following: 

(DA single overspeed valve shall be located in the 
pressure piping within 300 mm (12 in.) of each hydraulic 
jack. Multiple parallel valves are permitted in lieu of 
single valves at each hydraulic jack. These shall be 
located so as to minimize the distance from the valves 
to each hydraulic jack. 

(2) A single overspeed valve shall be located in the 
pressure piping on the hydraulic machine side of, and 
immediately before, the tee junction, wye junction, or 
branch junction that connects the branch pressure pipes 
to the jacks. Multiple parallel valves are permitted in 
lieu of a single valve at the junction. For dual hydraulic 



112 



3.19.4.7.3-3.22.1.3 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



• 



• 



jack systems, the total length of branch pressure pipe 
between the tee or wye junction and the jacks shall 
not exceed the distance between the jacks, measured 
horizontally, plus 1 m (39 in.). For multiple jack systems, 
the length of branch pressure piping shall be minimized. 

3.19.4.7.4 Strength of Overspeed Valve Pressure 
Piping and Fittings Between the Overspeed Valve and the 
Jacks. The factor of safety of the overspeed valve pres- 
sure piping and fittings shall be not less than 1.5 times 
the value obtained using 8.2.8.5, provided that the mini- 
mum factor of safety is not less than 4.5, and the mini- 
mum percentage elongation is not less than 5 for the 
overspeed valve and fittings and not less than 20 for 
the pressure piping. 

3.19.4.7.5 Performance Requirements. The 

overspeed valve shall be constructed, installed, and 
adjusted to ensure that the elevator obtains the following 
performance: 

(a) The overspeed valve tripping speed shall be not 
less than 110% nor greater than 140% of the elevator 
operating speed in the down direction, but in no case 
shall exceed 0.3 m/s (60 ft/min) above the rated elevator 
speed. 

(b) The average deceleration rate shall be not less 
than 1.96 m/s 2 (6.44 ft/s 2 ) nor more than 9.81 m/s 2 
(32.2 ft/s 2 ). 

(c) Any peak deceleration rate in excess of 24.53 m/s 2 
(80.5 ft/s 2 ) shall have a duration of not greater than 
0.04 s. 

3.19.4.7.6 Sealing of the Overspeed Valve. Field- 
adjustable overspeed valves shall be sealed after field 
setting. 

3.19.5 Piping Buried in the Ground 

3.19.5.1 Protection. Piping buried in the ground shall 
be provided with protection from corrosion by one or 
more of the following methods: 

(a) monitored cathodic protection 

(b) a coating to protect the piping from corrosion that 
will withstand the installation process 

(c) a protective casing, immune to galvanic or electro- 
lytic action, salt water, and other known underground 
conditions, completely surrounding the exterior sur- 
faces of the piping 

3.19.5.2 Seals. Piping buried in the ground shall not 
include seals or other elements potentially requiring ser- 
vice or replacement. 

3.19.6 Welding 

3.19.6.1 All welding of valves, pressure piping, and 
fittings shall conform to 8.8. 

3.19.6.2 Field welding of pressure piping and fit- 
tings shall also be permitted to be performed by welders 



certified to the requirements pertaining to pressure 
systems. 

3.19.7 Electrical Requirements 

Hydraulic control valves shall conform to the electrical 
requirements in Clause 4 of CSA C22.2 No. 139. 

SECTION 3.20 
ROPES AND ROPE CONNECTIONS 

Where a counterweight is provided, the counter- 
weight shall be connected to the car by not less than 
two steel wire ropes. 

The wire ropes and their connections shall conform 
to 2.20, except that the factor of safety of the wire ropes 
shall be not less than 7. 

SECTION 3.21 
COUNTERWEIGHTS 

3.21.1 Counterweights 

Counterweights, where provided, shall conform to 
2.21. In the event of the separation of the counterweight 
from the car, the static pressure shall be not more than 
140% of the working pressure. 

3.21.2 Counterweight Sheaves 

Sheaves for counterweight ropes shall conform to 
2.24.2, 2.24.3, and 2.24.5. 

SECTION 3.22 
BUFFERS AND BUMPERS 

3.22.1 Car Buffers or Bumpers 

Car buffers or bumpers shall be provided and shall 
conform to 2.22, provided that in applying the require- 
ments of 2.22 to hydraulic elevators 3.22.1.1 through 
3.22.1.5 are complied with. 

3.22.1.1 The term "operating speed in the down 
direction with rated load" shall be substituted for the 
words "rated speed" wherever these words appear. 

3.22.1.2 In place of 2.22.3.2, the requirements speci- 
fied in 3.22.1.2.1 and 3.22.1.2.2 shall be substituted. 

3.22.1 .2.1 Buffers shall be capable of withstanding 
without being compressed solid the loading per 8.2.3.2. 

3.22.1.2.2 Buffers shall be compressed solid with 
a loading of 2 times that described in 8.2.3.2. 

3.22.1.3 Requirement 2.22.4.1.2 shall not apply. 
Reduced stroke buffers shall not be provided on hydrau- 
lic elevators. Car buffers or bumpers shall be so located 
that the car will come to rest on the bumper or fully 
compressed buffer, or to a fixed stop, before the plunger 
reaches its down limit of travel. 



113 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



3.22.1.4-3.25.1.3 



3.22.1 .4 When multiple buffers are used, each shall 
be identical and designed for an equal proportion of the 
loading described in 3.22,1.2. 

3.22.1.5 Plunger weight, less buoyant effects of the 
plungers at the buffer strike point, shall be added, if 
applicable, and used in buffer calculations. 

3.22.1.6 Solid bumpers are permitted on hydraulic 
elevators having an operating speed in the down direc- 
tion of 0.25 m/s (50 ft/min) or less. See 2.22.2 for solid 
bumper material. 

3.22.2 Counterweight Buffers 

Where counterweights are provided, counterweight 
buffers shall not be provided. (See 3.4.6 for required 
counterweight runby.) 

SECTION 3.23 

GUIDE RAILS, GUIDE-RAIL SUPPORTS, AND 

FASTENINGS 

3.23.1 Direct-Acting Hydraulic Elevators 

Guide rails, guide-rail supports, and their fastenings 
shall conform to 2.23, with the exceptions specified in 
3.23.1.1 through 3.23.1.4. 

3.23.1.1 Requirement 2.23.4.1 shall apply only where 
car safeties are used and the maximum load on the car 
side for direct-acting hydraulic elevators is the maxi- 
mum weight of the car and its rated load plus the weight 
of the plunger or cylinder as applicable. 

3.23.1 .2 Requirement 2.23.4.2 shall apply only where 
safeties are used. 

3.23.1.3 Requirement 2.23.9.1.1(a) shall apply only 
where safeties are used. 

3.23.1.4 Requirement 2.28 shall not apply. 

3.23.2 Roped-Hydraulic Elevators 

3.23.2.1 Car and counterweight guide rails, guide- 
rail supports, and their fastenings shall conform to 2.23. 

3.23.2.2 The traveling sheave, if provided, shall be 
guided by means of suitable guide shoes and guide rails 
adequately mounted and supported. 

SECTION 3.24 
HYDRAULIC MACHINES AND TANKS 

3.24.1 Hydraulic Machines (Power Units) 

3.24.1.1 Marking Plates. The working pressure that 
is developed in the system shall be measured at the 
acceptance inspection and test. This pressure shall be 
legibly and permanently labeled /marked on a data plate 
that shall be mounted on the hydraulic machine. 



3.24.2 Tanks 

3.24.2.1 Capacity. Tanks shall be of sufficient capacity 
to provide for an adequate liquid reserve in order to 
prevent the entrance of air or other gas into the system. 

3.24.2.2 Minimum Level Indication. The permissible 
minimum liquid level shall be clearly indicated. 

3.24.3 Atmosphere Storage and Discharge Tanks 

3.24.3.1 Covers and Venting. Tanks shall be covered 
and suitably vented to the atmosphere. Where tanks are 
located in the hoistway, they shall be vented to prevent 
accumulation of fumes in the hoistway and their covers 
shall be of sufficient strength to resist falling objects. 

3.24.3.2 Factor of Safety. Tanks shall be so designed 
and constructed that when completely filled, the factor 
of safety shall be not less than 4, based on the ultimate 
strength of the material. 

3.24.3.3 Means for Checking Liquid Level. Tanks shall 
be provided with means for checking the liquid level. 
Such means shall be accessible without the removal of 
any cover or other part. 

3.24.4 Welding 

All welding of hydraulic machine components shall 
conform to 8.8. 



SECTION 3.25 
TERMINAL STOPPING DEVICES 

3.25.1 Normal Terminal Stopping Devices 

3.25.1.1 Where Required and Function. Upper and 
lower normal terminal stopping devices shall be pro- 
vided and arranged to slow down and stop the car 
automatically, at or near the top and bottom terminal 
landings, with any load up to and including rated load 
in the car from any speed attained in normal operation. 
Such devices shall function independently of the opera- 
tion of the normal stopping means and the terminal 
speed reducing device, where provided. The device shall 
be so designed and installed that it will continue to 
function until the car reaches its extreme limits of travel. 

The device shall be permitted to be rendered inopera- 
tive during recycling operation (see 3.26.7). 

3.25.1.2 Location of Stopping Devices. Stopping 
devices shall be located on the car, in the hoistway, in 
the machine room or control room, or in overhead 
spaces, and shall be operated by movement of the car. 

3.25.1.3 Requirements for Stopping Devices on the 
Car or in the Hoistway. Stopping devices located on the 
car or in the hoistway and operated by cams on the car 
or in the hoistway shall conform to 2.25.1. 



114 



3.25.1.4-3.26.3.1.4 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



• 



3.25.1.4 Requirements for Stopping Devices in a 
Machine Room, Control Room, or Overhead Space. Stop- 
ping devices located in a machine room, control room, 
or in an overhead space shall conform to 2.25.2.3, except 
that the device required by 2.25.2.3.2 shall cause the 
electric power to be removed from the main control 
valve or from its control switch operating magnets and, 
in the case of electrohydraulic elevators, where stopping 
the car is effected by stopping the pump motor, from 
the pump motor and associated valves. 

3.25.2 Terminal Speed Reducing Devices 

3.25.2.1 Where Required. Terminal speed reducing 
devices shall be installed for the up direction where the 
car speed exceeds 0.25 m/s (50 ft/min), to ensure that 
the plunger does not strike its solid limit of travel at a 
speed in excess of 0.25 m/s (50 ft/min) (see 3.18.4.1). 

3.25.2.2 Requirements. Terminal speed reducing 
devices shall conform to 3.25.2.2.1 through 3.25.2.2.5. 

3.25.2.2.1 They shall operate independently of the 
normal terminal-stopping device and shall function to 
reduce the speed of the car if the normal terminal stop- 
ping device fails to slow down the car at the terminals 
as intended. 

3.25.2.2.2 They shall provide retardation not in 
excess of 9.81 m/s 2 (32.2 ft/s 2 ). 

3.25.2.2.3 They shall be so designed and installed 
that a single short circuit caused by a combination of 
grounds or by other conditions shall not render the 
device ineffective. 

3.25.2.2.4 Control means for electrohydraulic ele- 
vators shall conform to the following: 

(a) For the up direction of travel, at least two control 
means are required; one or both to be controlled by the 
terminal speed reducing device and the other or both 
by the normal terminal stopping device. 

If, in the up direction, the pump motor is the only 
control means, the pump motor control shall conform 
to the following: 

(1) Two devices shall be provided to remove power 
independently from the pump motor. At least one device 
shall be an electromechanical contactor. 

(2) The contactor shall be arranged to open each 
time the car stops. 

(3) The electrical protective devices shall control 
both devices [see 3.25.2.2.4(b)(1)] in accordance with 
3.26.4. 

If, however, the pump motor is one control means, 
and there is a second control means (e.g., a valve), at 
least one of the means shall be directly controlled by an 
electromechanical contactor or relay. 

(b) For the down direction, the terminal speed reduc- 
ing and normal terminal stopping devices shall each 
directly, or through separate switches, affect the control 



valve. Where two devices are used, the terminal speed 
reducing and normal terminal stopping devices each 
shall be permitted to control one or both. 

3.25.2.2.5 Where magnetically operated, optical 
or solid-state devices are used for position sensing, a 
single short circuit caused by a combination of grounds 
or by other conditions, or the failure of any single mag- 
netically operated, optical, or solid-state device, shall not 

(a) render the terminal speed reducing device inoper- 
ative; or 

(b) permit the car to restart after a normal stop. 

3.25.3 Final Terminal Stopping Devices 

Final terminal stopping devices are not required. 

SECTION 3.26 
OPERATING DEVICES AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT 

3.26.1 Operating Devices and Control Equipment 

Operating devices and control equipment shall con- 
form to 2.26, except as modified by the following: 

(a) Requirement 2.26.1.3 does not apply. 

(b) Requirement 2.26.1 .4 applies as specified by 3.26.2. 

(c) Requirement 2.26.1.6 applies as specified by 3.26.3. 

(d) Requirement 2.26.2 applies as specified by 3.26.4. 

(e) Requirement 2.26.6 does not apply. 

(f) Requirement 2.26.8 does not apply. 

(g) Requirements 2.26.9.1, 2.26.9.2, 2.26.9.5, 2.26.9.6, 
and 2.26.9.7 do not apply. 

(h) Requirement 2.26.10 does not apply. 

3.26.2 Inspection Operation 

Top-of-car operating devices shall be provided and 
shall conform to 2.26.1.4. In-car and those inspection 
operations conforming to 2.26.1.4.4 shall be permitted. 

The bottom normal terminal stopping device shall be 
permitted to be made ineffective while the elevator is 
under the control of the inspection operation device. 

3.26.3 Anticreep and Leveling Operation 

3.26.3.1 Anticreep Operation. Each elevator shall be 
provided with an anticreep operation to correct automat- 
ically a change in car level. It shall conform to 2.26.1.6.2 
and 2.26.1.6.3, and 3.26.3.1.1 through 3.26.3.1.5. 

3.26.3.1.1 The anticreep device shall operate the 
car at a speed not exceeding 0.125 m/s (25 ft/min). 

3.26.3.1.2 The anticreep device shall maintain the 
car within 25 mm (1 in.) of the landing, irrespective of 
the position of the hoistway door. 

3.26.3.1.3 For electrohydraulic elevators, the 
anticreep device shall be required to operate the car only 
in the up direction. 

3.26.3.1.4 Operation dependent on the availability 
of the electric power supply is permitted, provided that 



115 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



3.26.3.1.4-3.26.9.1 



(a) the mainline power disconnecting means is kept 
in the closed position at all times except during mainte- 
nance, repairs, and inspection 

(b) a sign is placed on the switch stating, "KEEP 
SWITCH CLOSED EXCEPT DURING MAINTE- 
NANCE, REPAIRS, AND INSPECTIONS" 

(c) the sign shall be made of durable material and 
securely fastened and have letters with a height of not 
less than 6 mm (0.25 in.) 

3.26.3.1.5 Only the following, when activated, 
shall prevent operation of the anticreep device: 

(a) the electrical protective devices listed in 3.26.4.1 

(b) recycling operation (see 3.26.7) 

(c) inspection transfer switch 

(d) hoistway access switch 

(e) low oil protection means 

(f) oil tank temperature shutdown devices 

3.26.3.2 Operation in Leveling or Truck Zone. Opera- 
tion of an elevator in a leveling or truck zone at any 
landing by a car-leveling or truck-zoning device, when 
the hoistway doors, or the car doors or gates, or any 
combination thereof, are not in the closed position, is 
permissible, subject to the requirements of 2.26.1.6.1 
through 2.26.1.6.5. A leveling or truck-zoning device 
shall operate the car at a speed not exceeding 0.125 m/s 
(25 ft/min). 

3.26.4 Electrical Protective Devices 

Electrical protective devices shall be provided in con- 
formance with 2.26.2, and the following requirements, 
except the words "driving machine motor and brake" 
in 2.26.2 shall be replaced with "hydraulic machine," 
and shall conform to 3.26.4.1 and 3.26.4.2. 

3.26.4.1 When in the open position, the electrical 
protective devices shall prevent operation by all 
operating means, except as specified in 3.26.4.2. 

3.26.4.2 When in the open position, the following 
devices shall initiate removal of power from the hydrau- 
lic machine in such a manner as to produce an average 
deceleration rate not greater than 9.8 m/s 2 (32.2 ft/s 2 ) 
and shall prevent operation by all operating means 
except the anticreep device: 

(a) emergency stop switches, where required by 
2.26.2.5 

(b) broken rope, tape, or chain switches provided in 
connection with normal stopping devices, when such 
devices are located in the machine room, control room, 
or overhead space 

(c) hoistway door interlocks or hoistway door con- 
tacts 

(d) car door or gate electric contacts; or car door inter- 
locks 

(e) hinged car platform sill electric contacts 

(/) in-car stop switch, where required by 2.26.2.21 



3.26.5 Phase Reversal and Failure Protection 

Hydraulic elevators powered by a polyphase AC 
motor shall be provided with the means to prevent over- 
heating of the drive system (pump and motor) due to 
phase rotation reversals or failure. 

3.26.6 Control and Operating Circuits 

The design and installation of the control and 
operating circuits shall conform to 3.26.6.1 and 3.26.6.2. 

3.26.6.1 Springs, where used to actuate switches, 
contactors, or relays to stop an elevator at the terminals 
or to actuate electrically operated valves, shall be of the 
compression type. 

3.26.6.2 The completion or maintenance of an elec- 
tric circuit shall not be used to interrupt the power to 
the control valve operating magnets, or to the pump 
driving motor of electrohydraulic elevators, or both 
under the following conditions: 

(a) to stop the car at the terminals 

(b) to stop the car when the emergency stop switch 
or any of the electrical protective devices operate 

3.26.7 Recycling Operation for Multiple or 
Telescopic Plungers 

Recycling operation shall permit the car to be lowered 
more than 25 mm (1 in.) below the bottom landing, 
but not require lowering in order to restore the relative 
vertical position of the multiple plunger sections, pro- 
vided that 

(a) the car is at rest at bottom landing 

(b) the doors and gates are closed and locked 

(c) no car calls are registered 

(d) the speed during recycling does not exceed normal 
down leveling speed but in no case shall be more than 
0.10 m/s (20 ft/min) 

(e) normal operation cannot be resumed until car is 
returned to bottom landing and normal terminal stop- 
ping devices are restored to normal operation 

3.26.8 Pressure Switch 

When cylinders are installed with the top of the cylin- 
der above the top of the storage tank, a pressure switch 
shall be provided in the line between the cylinder and 
the valve, which shall be activated by the loss of positive 
pressure at the top of the cylinder. The switch shall 
prevent automatic door opening and the operation of 
the lowering valve or valves. The door(s) shall be permit- 
ted to open by operation of the in-car open button, when 
the car is within the unlocking zone. 

3.26.9 Low Oil Protection 

3.26.9.1 A means shall be provided to render the 
elevator on normal operation inoperative if for any rea- 
son the liquid level in the tank falls below the permissible 



116 



3.26.9.1-3.27.3 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



irurdmiim. Suitable means include, but are not limited 
to, the following: 

(a) direct sensing of liquid level 

(b) a pump-run timer 

Actuation of the means shall automatically bring the 
car down to the lowest landing, when the doors are 
closed. 

3.26.9.2 When at the lowest landing, the doors shall 
comply with the following: 

(a) For elevators with power-operated doors that 
automatically close, the door(s) shall open and shall 
initiate automatic closing within 15 s. 

(b) For elevators with manual doors or with doors 
that do not automatically close, they shall be provided 
with a signal system to alert an operator to close the 
doors. 

3.26.9.3 The car shall then shut down. The means 
shall require manual reset before returning the car to 
service. For elevators with power-operated doors, the 
in-car door open button(s) shall remain operative, but 
the doors shall not be able to be power-opened from 
the landing. 

3.26.10 Auxiliary Power Lowering Operation 

Where the auxiliary power supply is provided solely 
for the purpose of lowering the car, in the case of main 
power supply failure, the auxiliary lowering operation 
shall conform to 3.26.10.1 through 3.26.10.3. 

3.26.10.1 Auxiliary lowering shall be permitted to 
be initiated, provided that all operating and control 
devices, including door open and close buttons, function 
as with normal power supply, except that the following 
devices shall be permitted to be bypassed or made inop- 
erative: 

(a) landing and car floor registration devices (or call 
buttons) 

(b) devices enabling operation by designated atten- 
dant (hospital service, attendant operation) 

(c) devices initiating emergency recall operation to 
the recall level, unless otherwise specified in 3.27 

(d) "FIRE OPERATION" switch, unless otherwise 
specified in 3.27 

3.26.10.2 When the auxiliary lowering operation has 
been initiated, the car shall descend directly to the lowest 
landing, except that the operating system shall be per- 
mitted to allow one or more intermediate stops, and 
then, after a predetermined interval, the car shall pro- 
ceed to the lowest landing, provided the auxiliary power 
supply is of sufficient capacity to open and close doors 
at each intermediate stop. 

3.26.10.3 If the car and landing doors are power 
operated, and if the auxiliary power supply is of ade- 
quate capacity, the doors shall open when the car stops at 



the lowest landing and shall close after a predetermined 
interval. 

NOTE (3.26.10): For the main disconnect switch auxiliary contact, 
see ANSI/NFPA 70 and CSA C22.1 requirements, where applicable 
(see Part 9). 



SECTION 3.27 
EMERGENCY OPERATION AND SIGNALING DEVICES 

Emergency operation and signaling devices shall con- 
form to 2.27, except as modified by the following: The 
requirements of 3.26.9 and 3.18.2.7 shall be modified 
when Phase I Emergency Recall Operation and Phase 
II Emergency In-Car Operation are in effect, as specified 
in 3.27.1 through 3.27.4. 

3.27.1 Phase I Emergency Recall Operation After 
Device Actuation 

If Phase I Emergency Recall Operation is activated 
while the elevator is responding to any of the following 
devices, the car shall return to the recall level: 

(a) low oil protection (see 3.26.9) 

(b) plunger follower guide protection, provided the 
car is capable of being moved (see 3.18.2.7) 

(c) auxiliary power lowering device (see 3.26.10) 

If the elevator is incapable of returning to the recall 
level, the car shall descend to an available floor. Upon 
arrival, automatic power-operated doors shall open, and 
then reclose within 15 s. The door open button shall 
remain operative. 

3.27.2 Phase I Emergency Recall Operation Prior to 
Device Actuation 

If any of the devices specified in 3.27.1(a), (b), or (c) 
is activated, while Phase I Emergency Recall Operation 
is in effect, but before the car reaches the recall level, 
the car shall 

(a) complete Phase I Emergency Recall Operation, if 
the car is above the recall level; or 

(b) descend to an available floor, if the car is below 
the recall level. 

Upon arrival, automatic power-operated doors shall 
open, and then reclose within 15 s. The door open button 
shall remain operative. 

3.27.3 Device Actuation at Recall Level 

If either of the devices specified in 3.27.1(a) or (c) is 
activated while the car is stationary at the recall level 
and Phase I Emergency Recall Operation is in effect, the 
following shall apply: 

(a) automatic power-operated doors shall close 
within 15 s 

(b) the door open button shall remain operational 

(c) the visual signal [see Fig. 2.27.3.1.6(h)] shall illumi- 
nate intermittantly 



117 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



3.27.4-SECTION 3.29 



3.27.4 Device Actuation With Phase II Emergency In- 
Car Operation in Effect 

If any of the devices specified in 3.27.1(a), (b), or (c) 
activate while the elevator is on Phase II Emergency In- 
Car Operation, a traveling car shall stop and all calls 
shall be canceled. The visual signal [see Fig. 2.27.3.1.6(h)] 
shall illuminate intermittently. The elevator shall accept 
calls only to landings below its location and respond in 
compliance with the requirements for Phase II Emer- 
gency In-Car Operation. 



SECTION 3.28 
LAYOUT DATA 

3.28.1 Information Required on Layout Drawing 

Elevator layout drawings shall, in addition to other 
data, indicate the following: 

(a) required clearances and basic dimensions 

(b) the bracket spacing (see 3.23) 

(c) the estimated maximum vertical forces on the 
guide rails on application of the safety, where provided 
(see 3.23) 

(d) in the case of freight elevators for Class B or Class 
C loading (see 2.16.2.2), the horizontal forces on the 
guide-rail faces during loading and unloading, and the 
estimated maximum horizontal forces in a post-wise 
direction on the guide-rail faces on the application of 
the safety device, where provided (see 3.23) 

(e) the size and weight per meter (foot) of any rail 
reinforcement, where provided (see 3.23) 



(/) the impact loads imposed on machinery and 
sheave beams, supports, and floors or foundations 
(see 2.9) 

(g) the impact load on buffer supports due to buffer 
engagement at the maximum permissible load and 
operating speed in the down direction (see 8.2.3) 

(h) the net vertical load from the elevator system, 
which includes the total car weight and rated load; 
plunger, cylinder, and oil; and any structural supports 

(i) the outside diameter and wall thickness of the cyl- 
inder, plunger, and piping, and the working pressure 

(/') the total static and dynamic loads from the gover- 
nor, ropes, and tension system 

(k) rated speed and operating speed in the down 
direction 

(I) the irtinimum "grade" of pipe (ASTM or recog- 
nized standard) required to fulfill the installation 
requirements for pressure piping, or in lieu of a specific 
"grade" of pipe, the minimum tensile strength of pipe 
to be used for the installation (see 3.19) 

(m) the horizontal forces on the building structure 
stipulated by 2.11.11.8 

(n) the length of the plunger and cylinder 

(o) the clearance between the bottom of the plunger 
and the bottom head of the cylinder as required by 
3.18.3.3 

SECTION 3.29 
IDENTIFICATION 

Identification of equipment and floors shall conform 
to 2.29, as applicable. 



118 



SECTION 8.1-8.6.1.6.5 



ASftflE A17.1S-2005 



Part 8 
General Requirements 



• 



<D 







See A17.1-2004 and A17.1a-2005 for any additional 
requirements that apply. 

SECTION 8.1 
SECURITY 

8.1.2 Group 1: Restricted 

Group 1 covers access or operation of equipment 
restricted to elevator personnel. This key shall not be 
part of a master key system. 

NOTE: See the following: 

(a) Requirement 2.2.4.4(e), pit access doors. 

(b) Requirement 2.7.3.4.6(c), hoistway access doors. 

(c) Requirement 2.7.5.1.4, equipment access panels. 

id) Requirement 2.7.6.3.2(b), motor controller cabinet door(s) or 
panel(s). 

(e) Requirement 2.7.6.4.3(b), access to the means to move the car 
from outside the hoistway. 

(f) Requirement 2.7.6.4.3(d), access to removable means to move 
the car from outside the hoistway. 

(g) Requirement 2.7.6.5.2(b), inspection and test panel enclosure. 
(h) Requirement 3.19.4.4, access to a manual lowering valve. 
(i) Requirement 3.19.4.5, access to pressure gauge fittings. 

(j) Requirement 2.11.1.2(h), emergency access doors. (Shall also 
be made available to emergency personnel during an emergency.) 

(k) Requirement 2.12.6.2.4, hoistway door unlocking device 
operating means. (Shall also be made available to emergency per- 
sonnel during an emergency.) 

(/) Requirement 2.12.7.2.2, hoistway access switch. 

(m) Requirement 2.12.7.3.3, hoistway access enabling switch. 

(n) Requirement 2.26.1.4.3(b), in-car inspection operation trans- 
fer switch. 

(o) Requirement 2.26.2.21, in-car stop switch. 

(p) Requirement 4.2.5.2, screw machine controllers located away 
from hoistway, machine room, or machinery space. 

(q) Requirement 4.2.5.5, screw machine access panels. 

(r) Requirement 5.1.10.1(b), inclined elevator hoistway access 
switch. 

(s) Requirement 5.1.11.1.2(d), inclined elevator uphill end emer- 
gency exit. 

(t) Requirement 5.7.8.3, special-purpose personnel elevator 
access to hoistways for emergency and inspection purposes. 

(u) Requirement 7.1.12.4, power and hand dumbwaiters without 
automatic transfer devices hoistway access switch. 

(v) Requirement 7.9.2.15, electric material lifts with automatic 
transfer devices car-mounted operating devices. 

8.1.3 Group 2: Authorized Personnel 

Group 2 covers access or operation of equipment by 
authorized personnel. 

NOTE: See the following: 



(a) Requirement 2.7.3.4.2, machine room and control room 
access doors. 

(b) Requirements 2.7.3.4.3 and 2.7.3.4.4, machinery spaces and 
control spaces as specified. 

(c) Requirement 2.11.1.4, access openings for cleaning of car and 
hoistway enclosures. 

(d) Requirement 2.14.2.6(b), access openings for cleaning of car 
and hoistway enclosure. 

(e) Requirement 2.14.7.2.1(b), car light control switch. 

(f) Requirement 3.19.4.1, access to manually operated shutoff 
valve. 

(g) Requirement 5.6.1.25.2(b), rooftop elevator keyed operation 
switch. 

(h) Requirement 6.1.6.2.1(d), escalator starting switch. 
(i) Requirement 6.1.7.3.3, escalator side access door to interior. 
(j) Requirement 6.2.6.2.1(d), moving walk starting switch. 
(k) Requirement 6.2.7.3.3, moving walk side access door to 
interior. 



SECTION 3.6 
MAINTENANCE, REPAIR, AND REPLACEMENT 

8.6.1.6.3 Controllers, Wiring, and Wiring Diagrams 

(a) Up-to-date wiring diagrams detailing circuits of 
all electrical protective devices (see 2.26.2) and critical 
operating circuits (see 2.26.3) shall be available in the 
machinery space, machine room, control space, or con- 
trol room as appropriate to the installation. 

(b) The interiors of controllers and their components 
shall be cleaned when necessary to rmnimize the accu- 
mulation of foreign matter that can interfere with the 
operation of the equipment. 

(c) Temporary wiring and insulators or blocks in the 
armatures or poles of magnetically operated switches, 
contactors, or relays on equipment in service are pro- 
hibited. 

(d) When jumpers are used during maintenance, 
repairs, or testing, all jumpers shall be removed and the 
equipment tested prior to returning it to service. Jumpers 
shall not be stored in machine rooms, hoistways, 
machinery spaces, control spaces, escalator /moving 
walk wellways, or pits (see also 8.6.1.6.1). 

(e) Control and operating circuits and devices shall 
be maintained in compliance with applicable Code 
requirements (see 8.6.1.1.2). 

8.6.1.6.5 Fire Extinguishers. In jurisdictions not 
enforcing the NBCC, Class "ABC" fire extinguishers 
shall be provided in elevator machine rooms, control 
rooms, and control spaces outside the hoistway intended 



119 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



8.6.1.6.5-8.6.11.8 



for full bodily entry, and walk-in machinery and control 
rooms for escalators and moving walks; and they shall 
be located convenient to the access door. 

8.6.4 Maintenance of Electric Elevators 

8.6.4.8 Machinery Spaces, Machine Rooms, Control 
Spaces, and Control Rooms 

8.6.4.8.1 Floors and machinery and control spaces 
shall be kept free of water, dirt, rubbish, oil, and grease. 

8.6.4.8.2 Articles or materials not necessary for 
the maintenance or operation of the elevator shall not 
be stored in machinery spaces, machine rooms, control 
spaces, and control rooms. 

8.6.4.8.3 Flammable liquids having a flashpoint 
of less than 44°C (110°F) shall not be kept in such rooms 
or spaces. 

8.6.4.8.4 Access doors shall be kept closed and 
locked. 



8.6.8.4.5 Machinery spaces and control spaces 
located in the hoistway shall not be used for storage 
purposes (see also 8.6.4.7.1). 

8.6.11 Special Provisions 

8.6.11.6 Operating Instructions for Means Specified 
in 2.7.5.1.1 or 2.7.5.2.1. A written procedure for 
operating the means shall be provided and kept on the 
premises where the elevator is located (see 2.7.5.1.2 or 
2.7.5.2.1). 

8.6.11.7 Egress and Reentry Procedure From Working 
Areas in 2.7.5.1.3 or 2.7.5.2.3. A written procedure to 
outline the method for egress and reentry shall be pro- 
vided and kept on the premises where the elevator is 
located (see 2.7.5.1.3 or 2.7.5.2.3). 

8.6.11.8 Operating Instructions for Retractable Plat- 
forms. A written procedure to outline the method for 
the use of retractable platforms shall be provided and 
kept on the premises where the elevator is located (see 
2.7.5.3.1). 



120 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



• 



• 



NONMANDATORY APPENDIX Q 

EXPLANATORY FIGURES FOR THE DEFINITIONS OF ELEVATOR 

MACHINERY SPACE, MACHINE ROOM, CONTROL SPACE, 

CONTROL ROOM, REMOTE MACHINE ROOM, OR REMOTE 

CONTROL ROOM 

Table Q-l 





Location 


Entry into 

the Space, 

Full or 

Partial 


Equipment Used Directly in 

Connection With the Elevator, 

Dumbwaiter, or Material Lift 


Equipment 
Contained Within 




Inside or 
Outside 

the 
Hoistway 


Attached 

to or 

Within the 

Hoistway 


Mechanical 

Other Than 

Electric 

Driving 

Machine 

or 
Hydraulic 
Machine 


Electrical 
Other Than 

Motor 
Controller 


Electric Driving 
Machine 

or 
Hydraulic 
Machine 


Motor 
Controller 


Machinery Space 
[Note (1)] 


Either 


Either 


Either 


Permitted 


Permitted 


Permitted 


Permitted 


Control Sapce 


Not permitted 


Required 


Machine Room 
[Note (1)] 


Outside 

the 
hoistway 


Attached 

to but not 

within 


Full bodily 

entry 
required 


Required 


Permitted 




Not permitted 




Control Room 


Required 




Required 




Machine Room, 
Remote 


No 


Permitted 




Not permitted 




Control Room, 
Remote 


Required 


Machinery Sapce, 
Remote 


Either 


Permitted 


Permitted 


Control Space, 
Remote 


Either 


Not permitted 


Required 



NOTE: 

(1) A machinery space outside the hoistway containing an electric driving machine and a motor controller or a hydraulic 
machine and a motor controller is a machine room. 



121 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



NONMANDATORY APPENDIX Q 



Hoistway 



Machinery 
Space 




Machine 



Landing doors 



Control 
Room 



Fig. Q-l 



Motor 
controller 



Access 



Hoistway 



Machinery 
Space 




Landing doors 



Machine 

1 



Access 



Control Space, 
Remote 



Motor 
' controller 



Fig. Q-3 



Hoistway 



Machinery 
Space 




Machine 



Landing doors 



Control Space 
Fig. Q-2 



Motor 
" controller 



■Access 



Hoistway 



Machinery 
Space 




Machine 



k ' 

Landing doors 



Control Room, 
Remote 



Motor 
controller 




Fig. Q-4 



122 



NONMANDATORY APPENDIX Q 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



Machine 



\ 




Machine 
Room 



Motor controller 



Access 



Hoistway 
located 
below 



Fig. Q-5 




Overhead sheave 



Hoistway 
located 
below 




Machine 



Motor controller 



Machine Room, Remote 




Access 



Fig. Q-6 



123 



ASME A17.1S-2005 



NONMANDATORY APPENDIX R 
INSPECTION OPERATION AND HOISTWAY ACCESS SWITCH 

OPERATION HIERARCHY 

See Table R-l on the following page. 



124 



Table R-l Inspection Operation and Hoistway Access Switch Operation Hierarchy 










BYPASS Operation, 
2.26.1.5 




Operation Modes 
Activated 


Top-of-Car, 
2.26.1.4.2 


In-Car, 
2.26.1.4.3 


Hoistway 

Access, 

2.12.7.3 


Machine 

Room, 

2.26.1.4.4 


Control 

Room, 

2.26.1.4.4 


Machinery 

Space 

Outside 

Hoistway, 

2.26.1.4.4 


Control 

Space 

Outside 

Hoistway, 

2.26.1.4.4 


Landing, 
2.26.1.4.4 


Pit, 
2.26.1.4.4 


Working 
Platform, 
2.26.1.4.4 


Top-of-Car 


In-Car 


Operation Modes 
Activated 


Top-of-Car 


Top-of-Car 


Top-of-Car 


Top-of-Car 


Top-of-Car 


Top-of-Car 


Top-of-Car 


Top-of-Car 


Top-of-Car 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


Top-of-Car 


Top-of-Car 


Top-of-Car 


In-Car 


Top-of-Car 


In-Car 


In-Car 


In-Car 


In-Car 


In-Car 


In-Car 


In-Car 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


Top-of-Car 


In-Car 


In-Car 


Hoistway 
Access 


Top-of-Car 


In-Car 


Hoistway 
Access 


Hoistway 
Access 


Hoistway 
Access 


Hoistway 
Access 


Hoistway 
Access 


Hoistway 
Access 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


Top-of-Car 


In-Car 


Hoistway 
Access 


Machine 
Room 


Top-of-Car 


In-Car 


Hoistway 
Access 


Machine 
Room 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


Top-of-Car 


In-Car 


Machine 
Room 


Control 
Room 


Top-of-Car 


In-Car 


Hoistway 
Access 


No 
Operation 


Control 
Room 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


Top-of-Car 


In-Car 


Control 
Room 


Machinery Space 
Outside Hoistway 


Top-of-Car 


In-Car 


Hoistway 
Access 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


Machinery 
Space 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


Top-of-Car 


In-Car 


Machinery Space 
Outside Hoistway 


Control Space 
Outside Hoistway 


Top-of-Car 


In-Car 


Hoistway 
Access 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


Control 
Space 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


Top-of-Car 


In-Car 


Control Space 
Outside Hoistway 


Landing 


Top-of-Car 


In-Car 


Hoistway 
Access 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


Landing 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


Top-of-Car 


In-Car 


Landing 


Pit 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


Pit 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


Pit 


Working Platform 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


Working 
Platform 


No 
Operation 


No 
Operation 


Working Platform 



ASMEA17.1S-2005 




A9604S 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



Addenda to 

ASME A17. 1-2004 

Safety Code for 
Elevators and Escalators 



AN AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD 



Date of Issuance: April 29, 2005 



ASME is the registered trademark of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. 

This code or standard was developed under procedures accredited as meeting the criteria for American National 
Standards. The Standards Committee that approved the code or standard was balanced to assure that individuals from 
competent and concerned interests have had an opportunity to participate. The proposed manual was made available 
for public review and comment that provides an opportunity for additional public input from industry, academia, 
regulatory agencies, and the public-at-large. 

ASME does not "approve," "rate," or "endorse" any item, construction, proprietary device, or activity. 

ASME does not take any position with respect to the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any 
items mentioned in this document, and does not undertake to insure anyone utilizing a standard against liability for 
infringement of any applicable letters patent, nor assume any such liability. Users are expressly advised that determination 
of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, is entirely their own responsibility. 

Participation by federal agency representative(s) or person(s) affiliated with industry is not to be interpreted as 
government or industry endorsement of this code or standard. 

ASME accepts responsibility for only those interpretations of this document issued in accordance with the established 
ASME procedures and policies, which precludes the issuance of interpretations by individuals. 



No part of this document may be reproduced in any form 

in an electronic retrieval system or otherwise, 

without the prior written permission of the publisher. 



The American Society of Mechanical Engineers 
Three Park Avenue, New York, NY 10016-5990 



Copyright © 2005 by 

THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS 

All rights reserved 

Printed in U.S.A. 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



Following approval by the ASME A17 Elevator and Escalator Committee, and after public review, 
ASME A17.1a-2005 was approved by the American National Standards Institute on March 18, 
2005. 

This is the first Addenda to the 2004 edition of the Code. It was issued on April 29, 2005 and is 
effective as of October 29, 2005. 

The pages included in this Addenda replace the pages in ASME A17.1-2004 that have the 
corresponding page numbers. Where the length of the change necessitated the inclusion of 
additional pages, the additional pages are numbered sequentially following a decimal point (e.g., 
page 10.1 should be inserted following page 10). Revisions are incorporated directly into the 
affected pages. It is advisable, however, that this page, the Addenda title and copyright pages, 
and all replaced pages be retained for reference. 

SUMMARY OF CHANGES 

Revisions being made in this Addenda are identified by a margin note, (05a). Changes made to 
correct errors in Al 7. 1-2004, as well as other new editorial changes, are identified by (ED). 
Revision designators will remain on the pages up to the publication of the next edition of the 
Code. The (ED) designators will appear only when the editorial changes are introduced. The 
following is a summary of the latest revisions and changes: 

Change 

Updated to reflect Addenda changes 

Editorially revised and updated 

Revised 

Editorially revised 

Definition of building code revised 

Definitions of door, vertically sliding 
sequence operation; landing, lower, 
escalator; landing, lower, moving walk; 
landing, upper, escalator; landing, upper, 
moving walk; left, right convention; lower 
landing, escalator; lower landing, moving 
walk; sequence operation; upper landing, 
esclator; and upper landing, moving walk 
added 

Added 

Revised 

Editorially revised 

Editorially revised 

Revised 

Added 

Revised in its entirety 



Page 






Location 


iii, v, vii 






Contents 


xi 






Foreword, List of Editions 
and Supplements 


1 






1.1.2(e) 
1.1.2(v) 


3 






Section 1.3 


6, 10, 10.1, 


14, 


15 


Section 1.3 



20, 20.1 


2.3.2.3 


23 


2.5.1.4 




2.5.1.5.2 




2.5.1.6 


27, 27.1 


2.8.2.3.2 




2.8.6 


29 


2.10.2 



(c) 



Page 


Location 


Change 


30 


2.11.1.3 


Revised 




2.11.3.1 


Editorially revised 


31, 31.1 


2.11.6.3 


Revised 


34 


2.11.12.2 


Revised in its entirety 


35 


2.11.13.3.3 


Revised 


37 


2.12.2.4.1 


Editorially revised 


38 


2.12.3.1(a) 


Editorially revised 


39 


2.12.4.1(b) 


Revised 


44 


2.14.1.5.1(b)(2) 


Editorially revised 


45 


2.14.1.7.1 


Revised 


46 


2.14.2.3.1(a) 


First line corrected by errata 


50,51 


2.14.5.8.2(a) 


Revised 




2.14.7.1.3 


Revised in its entirety 


65 


2.18.6.5 


Revised 


87 


2.24.8.4 


Revised 




2.24.9.3 


Revised 


92 


2.26.2.5(d) 


Revised 


95 


2.26.12.3 


Note editorially revised 


97 


2.27.1.1.5 


Revised 


100 


2.27.3.2.4(a) 


Revised 




2.27.3.2.5 


Revised 


102 


2.27.3.3.7 


Last paragraph editorially revised 


103 


2.27.5.3 


Revised 


104 


2.27.7.2 


Revised 




2.27.9 


Added 


105 


Fig. 2.27.7.2 


Revised 


105.1 


Fig. 2.27.9 


Added 


110 


3.17.1.2 


Revised 


116 


Section 3.21 


Revised 


117 


3.23.1.3 


Editorially revised 




3.24.5 


Deleted 


120, 120.1 


3.26.9 


Revised in its entirety 


133 


5.1.11.4 


Added 


137 


5.1.23 


Added 


140 


5.2.1.18 


Subparagraph (d) deleted 


141 


5.2.1.31 


Added 


142 


5.2.2.12 


Revised 



(d) 



Page 


Location 


Change 




5.2.2.14 


Revised 




5.2.2.15 


Revised 




5.2.2.17 


Added 


143 


5.3.1.1.4 


Deleted 


143 


5.3.1.7.1 


Editorially revised 


144, 145 


5.3.1.9.2(b)(1) 


Editorially revised 




5.3.1.11.5 


Editorially revised 


146, 147 


5.3.1.16.2(b)(1) 


Editorially revised 




5.3.1.16.2(d) 


Editorially revised 




5.3.1.16.2(e) 


Editorially revised 


168 


5.9.2.2 


Revised 




5.9.8 


(1) Editorially revised 

(2) Requirement 5.9.8.3 editorially 
redesignated as Note (5.9.8) 


169 


5.9.15.1 


Revised 


170 


5.9.26 


Revised 


178 


6.1.3.3.10(a) 


Subparagraphs (2) and (3) editorially 
revised 


182 


6.1.5.3.1(d)(5) 


Revised 


193 


6.2.5.3.1(d)(5) 


Added 




6.2.6.2.1(a)(3) 


Revised 


201 


7.1.9.1 


Revised 




7.1.9.3 


Added 


209 


7.3.5 


Revised 


213 


7.4.13.2.2(e) 


Added 


215 


7.5.3.3 


Revised 




7.5.3.5 


Added 


219 


7.6.4.1 


Revised 




7.6.5.2 


Revised 


271 


8.6.1.6.3(d) 


Revised 


276 


8.6.5.8 


Revised 


277-279.1 


8.6.8 


Revised in its entirety 




8.6.9 


New 8.6.9 added 




8.6.10 


Former 8.6.9 redesignated 




8.6.11 


Former 8.6.10 redesignated 




8.6.11.3 


Former 8.6.10.3 revised in its entirety 




8.6.11.4 


Former 8.6.10.4 revised in its entirety 




8.6.11.5 


Former 8.6.10.5 revised in its entirety 



(e) 



Page 


Location 


Change 


281 


8.7.2.10.2 


First paragraph revised 




8.7.2.10.3 


First paragraph revised 




8.7.2.10.4 


First paragraph revised 


286, 286.1 


8.7.2.27.5 


Revised in its entirety 


288 


8.7.3.20 


Revised 




8.7.3.21 


Revised 




8.7.3.22.2(i) 


Revised 


289 


8.7.3.26 


Revised 


291 


8.7.5.9 


Added 




8.7.6.1.5 


Revised 


292 


8.7.6.1.16 


Added 


293, 293.1 


8.7.6.2.15 


Added 




8.7.7.1 


Revised 




8.7.7.1.1 


Revised 




8.7.7.3.1 


Revised 


301 


8.10.3.2.3(u) 


Revised 




8.10.3.2.3(bb) 


Revised 


302, 302.1 


8.10.3.2.5(n) 


Added 


306, 306.1 


8.10.4.2.2(i) 


Added 


308 


8.11.1.6 


Editorially revised 


313 


8.11.3.2.2 


Revised 


314 


8.11.3.4 


(1) Note editorially relocated 

(2) 8.11.3.4.4 Added 


316 


8.11.4.2.22 


Added 


317 


Section 8.12 


Added 


319, 322, 323 


Section 9.1 


Revised 


325, 326 


Section 9.2 


Revised 


356 


Nonmandatory 
Appendix O 


Deleted 


377 


Index, Sheave 


Reference to car frame editori; 


SPECIAL NOTE 







The interpretations to ASME A17.1 issued between July 2003 and June 2004 follow the last page 
of this Addenda as a separate supplement, Interpretations No. 27. 



(fl 



CONTENTS 



(05a) 



Foreword viii 

Committee Roster xii 

Preface xvi 

Summary of Changes xix 

Part 1 General 1 

1.1 Scope 1 

1.2 Purpose and Exceptions 2 

1.3 Definitions 2 

Part 2 Electric Elevators 16 

2.1 Construction of Hoistways and Hoistway Enclosures 16 

2.2 Pits 18 

2.3 Location and Guarding of Counterweights 19 

2.4 Vertical Clearances and Runbys for Cars and Counterweights 20 

2.5 Horizontal Car and Counterweight Clearances 23 

2.6 Protection of Space Below Hoistways 23 

2.7 Machine Rooms and Machinery Spaces 24 

2.8 Equipment in Hoistways and Machine Rooms 26 

2.9 Machinery and Sheave Beams, Supports, and Foundations 27 

2.10 Guarding of Equipment and Standard Railing 29 

2.11 Protection of Hoistway Openings 29 

2.12 Hoistway Door Locking Devices and Electric Contacts, and Hoistway 

Access Switches 37 

2.13 Power Operation of Hoistway Doors and Car Doors 41 

2.14 Car Enclosures, Car Doors and Gates, and Car Illumination 43 

2.15 Car Frames and Platforms 51 

2.16 Capacity and Loading 54 

2.17 Car and Counterweight Safeties 59 

2.18 Speed Governors 62 

2.19 Ascending Car Overspeed and Unintended Car Movement 

Protection 65 

2.20 Suspension Ropes and Their Connections 67 

2.21 Counterweights 73 

2.22 Buffers and Bumpers 74 

2.23 Car and Counterweight Guide Rails, Guide-Rail Supports, and 

Fastenings 77 

2.24 Driving Machines and Sheaves 85 

2.25 Terminal Stopping Devices 87 

2.26 Operating Devices and Control Equipment 90 

2.27 Emergency Operation and Signaling Devices 97 

2.28 Layout Drawings 104 

2.29 Identification 105 

Part 3 Hydraulic Elevators 106 

3.1 Construction of Hoistways and Hoistway Enclosures 106 

3.2 Pits 106 

3.3 Location and Guarding of Counterweights 106 

3.4 Bottom and Top Clearances and Runbys for Cars and 

Counterweights 106 

3.5 Horizontal Car and Counterweight Clearances 108 



3.6 Protection of Spaces Below Hoistway 108 

3.7 Machine Rooms and Machinery Spaces 108 

3.8 Electrical Equipment, Wiring, Pipes, and Ducts in Hoistway and Machine 

Rooms 108 

3.9 Machinery and Sheave Beams, Supports, and Foundations 108 

3.10 Guarding of Exposed Auxiliary Equipment 108 

3.11 Protection of Hoistway Landing Openings 108 

3.12 Hoistway Door Locking Devices, Car Door or Gate Electric Contacts, 

and Hoistway Access Switches 108 

3.13 Power Operation, Power Opening, and Power Closing of Hoistway Doors 

and Car Doors or Gates 109 

3.14 Car Enclosures, Car Doors and Gates, and Car Illumination 109 

3.15 Car Frames and Platforms 109 

3.16 Capacity and Loading 109 

3.17 Car and Counterweight Safeties and Plunger Gripper 110 

3.18 Hydraulic Jacks Ill 

3.19 Valves, Pressure Piping, and Fittings 114 

3.20 Ropes and Rope Connections 116 

3.21 Counterweights 116 

3.22 Buffers and Bumpers 116 

3.23 Guide Rails, Guide-Rail Supports, and Fastenings 117 

3.24 Hydraulic Machines and Tanks 117 

3.25 Terminal Stopping Devices 117 

3.26 Operating Devices and Control Equipment 118 

3.27 Emergency Operation and Signaling Devices 120 

3.28 Layout Data 121 

3.29 Identification 121 

Part 4 Elevators With Other Types of Driving Machines 122 

4.1 Rack and Pinion Elevators 122 

4.2 Screw-Column Elevators 124 

4.3 Hand Elevators 128 

Part 5 Special Application Elevators 131 

5.1 Inclined Elevators 131 

5.2 Limited-Use /Limited- Application Elevators 137 

5.3 Private Residence Elevators 142 

5.4 Private Residence Inclined Elevators 149 

5.5 Power Sidewalk Elevators 153 

5.6 Rooftop Elevators 157 

5.7 Special Purpose Personnel Elevators 161 

5.8 Shipboard Elevators 166 

5.9 Mine Elevators 167 

5.10 Elevators Used for Construction 170 

Part 6 Escalators and Moving Walks 176 

6.1 Escalators 176 

6.2 Moving Walks 188 

Part 7 Dumbwaiters and Material Lifts 199 

7.1 Power and Hand Dumbwaiters Without Automatic Transfer Devices .... 199 

7.2 Electric and Hand Dumbwaiters Without Automatic Transfer 

Devices 203 

7.3 Hydraulic Dumbwaiters Without Automatic Transfer Devices 209 

7.4 Material Lifts Without Automatic Transfer Devices 210 

7.5 Electric Material Lifts Without Automatic Transfer Devices 214 

7.6 Hydraulic Material Lifts Without Automatic Transfer Devices 219 

7.7 Automatic Transfer Devices 219 

7.8 Power Dumbwaiters With Automatic Transfer Devices 220 

iv 



7.9 Electric Material Lifts With Automatic Transfer Devices 220 

7.10 Hydraulic Material Lifts With Automatic Transfer Devices 222 

7.11 Material Lifts With Obscured Transfer Devices 222 

Part 8 General Requirements 223 

8.1 Security 223 

8.2 Design Data and Formulas 223 

8.3 Engineering Tests, Type Tests, and Certification 241 

8.4 Elevator Safety Requirements for Seismic Risk Zone 2 or Greater 248 

8.5 Escalator and Moving Walk Safety Requirement for Seismic Risk Zone 2 

or Greater 269 

8.6 Maintenance, Repair, and Replacement 270 

8.7 Alterations 279.1 

8.8 Welding 293 

8.9 Code Data Plate 293 

8.10 Acceptance Inspections and Tests 293.1 

8.11 Periodic Inspections and Tests 307 

8.12 Flood Resistances 317 

Part 9 Reference Codes, Standards, and Specifications 318 

9.1 Reference Documents 319 

9.2 Procurement Information 325 

Figures 

2.16.1.1 Inside Net Platform Areas for Passenger Elevators 55 

2.20.9.4 Tapered Rope Sockets 70 

2.20.9.5 Wedge Rope Sockets 70 

2.23.3 Elevator Guide Rails 77 

2.23.4.1-1 Maximum Weight of a Car With Rated Load or of Counterweight With 

Safety Device for a Pair of Guide Rails as Specified 

in 2.23.4.1 79 

2.23.4.1-2 Minimum Moment of Inertia About x-x Axis for a Single Guide Rail 

With Its Reinforcement 80 

2.27.3.1.6(h) Visual Signal 100 

2.27.3.3.7 Panel Layout 102 

2.27.7.1 Phase I Emergency Recall Operation Instructions 104 

2.27.7.2 Phase II Emergency In-Car Operation 105 

2.27.9 Elevator Corridor Call Station Pictograph 105.1 

5.1.17.3 Vertical and Horizontal Components of Velocity 135 

6.1.3.3.10 Dimensions 178 

6.1.6.9.1 Caution Sign 186 

8.2.1.2 Minimum Rated Load for Passenger Elevators 225 

8.2.2.5.1 Turning Moment Based on Class of Loading 226 

8.2.4 Gravity Stopping Distances 229 

8.2.5 Maximum Governor Tripping Speeds 230 

8.2.6 Stopping Distances for Type B Car and Counterweight Safeties 232 

8.2.7 Minimum Factors of Safety of Suspension Wire Ropes of Power 

Passenger and Freight Elevators 235 

8.2.8.1.1 Allowable Gross Loads 236 

8.2.9.1.3 Load Distribution 239 

8.4.3.1.3 Arc of Contact 249 

8.4.8.2-1 12 kg/m (8 lb/ft) Guide-Rail Bracket Spacing 252 

8.4.8.2-2 16.5 kg/m (11 lb /ft) Guide-Rail Bracket Spacing 253 

8.4.8.2-3 18 kg/m (12 lb/ft) Guide-Rail Bracket Spacing 254 

8.4.8.2-4 22.5 kg/m (15 lb /ft) Guide-Rail Bracket Spacing 255 

8.4.8.2-5 27.5 kg/m (18.5 lb/ft) Guide-Rail Bracket Spacing 256 

8.4.8.2-6 33.5 kg/m (22.5 lb/ft) Guide-Rail Bracket Spacing 257 

8.4.8.2-7 44.5 kg/m (30 lb /ft) Guide-Rail Bracket Spacing 258 

8.4.8.2-8 Car and Counterweight Load Factor 259 

8.4.8.9 Guide-Rail Axes 262 



8.4.10.1.1 Earthquake Elevator Equipment Requirements Diagrammatic 

Representation 263 

8.4.10.1.3 Earthquake Emergency Operation Diagrammatic Representation 265 

8.11.4.2.19(e) 315 

Tables 

2.4.2.2 Minimum Bottom Runby for Counterweight Elevators With Spring 

Buffers or Solid Bumpers and Rheostatic Control or Single-Speed 

AC Control 21 

2.15.10.1 Maximum Allowable Stresses in Car Frame and Platform Members 

and Connections, for Steels Specified in 2.15.6.2.1 and 2.15.6.2.2 54 

2.16.1.1 Maximum Inside Net Platform Areas for the Various Rated Loads 55 

2.17.3 Maximum and Minimum Stopping Distances for Type B Car Safeties 

With Rated Load and Type B Counterweight Safeties 60 

2.18.2.1 Maximum Car Speeds at Which Speed Governor Trips and Governor 

Overspeed Switch Operates 63 

2.18.7.4 Multiplier for Determining Governor Sheave Pitch Diameter 65 

2.20.3 Minimum Factors of Safety for Suspension Wire Ropes 68 

2.20.9.4.5 Relation of Rope Diameter to Diameter of the Small Socket Hole 70 

2.22.3.1 Minimum Spring Buffer Stroke 75 

2.22.4.1 Minimum Oil Buffer Strokes 76 

2.23.3 T-Section Guide-Rail Dimensions 78 

2.23.4.2 Load Multiplying Factor for Duplex Safeties 83 

2.23.4.3.1 Guide Rails for Counterweight Without Safeties 84 

2.23.4.3.3 Intermediate Tie Brackets 84 

2.23.7.2.1 Minimum Thickness of Fishplates and Minimum Diameter of 

Fastening Bolts 85 

2.23.10.2 Minimum Size of Rail-Fastening Bolts 85 

2.26.12.1 Symbol Identification 96 

4.1.9.1 Maximum and Minimum Stopping Distances for Rack-and-Pinion 

Safeties With Rated Load 124 

5.1.14.2 Minimum and Maximum Stopping Distances at Given Angles From 

Horizontal 134 

5.1.17.2 Spring Buffer Stroke 135 

5.1.17.4.4 Minimum Oil Buffer Strokes at Given Angle From Horizontal 136 

6.2.3.7 Treadway Width 191 

6.2.4 Treadway Speed 193 

7.2.6.4 Factors of Safety for Wire Rope and Chains 206 

7.2.8.1 Minimum Spring Buffer Strokes 207 

7.2.8.2 Minimum Oil Buffer Strokes 207 

7.4.3 Type B Material Lifts 211 

7.9.2.13 Minimum Spring Buffer Strokes 221 

7.9.2.14 Minimum Oil Buffer Strokes 222 

8.4.8.7 Stresses and Deflections of Guide-Rail Brackets and Supports 261 

8.4.11.3 Pipe Support Spacing 266 

8.4.12.2.2 Maximum Allowable Deflection 269 

8.11.2.1.3(cc)(l) Wire Suspension and Compensation Ropes 309 

8.11.2.1.3(cc)(3) 310 

8.11.2.3.4 Brake Test Loads 312 

Non mandatory Appendices 

A Control System 327 

B Door Landing and Unlocking Zones 329 

C Location of Top Emergency Exit 330 

D Rated Load and Capacity Plates for Passenger Elevators 331 

E CSA B44 Elevator Requirements for Persons With Physical 

Disabilities 332 



F Ascending Car Overspeed and Unintended Car Movement 

Protection 333 

G Top of Car Clearance (3.4.4) 337 

H Private Residence Elevator Guarding (5.3.1.6.2) 339 

I Escalator and Moving Walk Diagrams 340 

J CSA B44 Maintenance Requirements and Intervals for Elevators, 

Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving Walks 346 

K Beveling and Clearance Requirements (7.4.7.4) 347 

L Index of Alteration Requirements for Electric Elevators, Hydraulic 

Elevators, Escalators, and Moving Walks 348 

M Inertia Application for Type A Safety Device Location of Test Weight 

[8.10.2.2.2(bb)(2)] 353 

N Recommended Inspection and Test Intervals in "Months" 354 

P Plunger Gripper Stopping Distances 357 

Index 358 



vn 



(04) 



FOREWORD 



The first edition of this Code was published in January 
1921. It was prepared by an American Society of 
Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Committee on Protection 
of Industrial Workers with the assistance of representa- 
tives of a number of interests including manufacturers, 
insurance carriers, regulatory bodies, and technical soci- 
eties. 

Subsequently, ASME requested the American Engi- 
neering Standards Committee (AESC) to authorize the 
organization of a Sectional Committee to undertake this 
revision. They acted favorably on this request, and in 
January 1922, assigned sponsorship for the project 
jointly to the American Institute of Architects, the 
National Bureau of Standards, and ASME, all three of 
whom had taken an active part in the preparation of 
the first edition of the Code. 

The organization meeting of the Sectional Committee 
A17 was held in November 1922. A number of meetings 
of the Committee were held during the next two years 
and in July 1925, a revision of the 1921 Code was com- 
pleted, approved by the AESC, and published as an 
American Standard. 

Subsequent to the publication of the 1925 revision of 
the Code, the necessity for development research on the 
design and construction of car safeties and oil buffers 
and for the development of test specifications for various 
parts of elevator equipment was realized. 

As a result, a Subcommittee on Research, Recommen- 
dations, and Interpretations was appointed in 1926. This 
subcommittee held regular meetings thereafter until 
interrupted by the war in 1940, and carried on an exten- 
sive test program at the National Bureau of Standards 
in connection with oil buffers and car safeties. Subse- 
quent to the war, the name of this subcommittee was 
changed to "Executive Committee for the Elevator 
Safety Code." 

The information gained as a result of these tests, 
together with the developments that had occurred in 
the design of the equipment as a result of installations 
made in very tall buildings, prompted the Sectional 
Committee to prepare and issue the third edition of the 
Code in 1931. The third edition was approved by the 
Sectional Committee in February 1931, and subse- 
quently by the sponsors and by the American Standards 
Association (formerly the AESC) in July 1931. 

Further experience and developments in the design 
of elevator equipment, led the Sectional Committee, in 
line with its policy of revising the Code periodically to 
prepare the fourth edition in 1937, which was approved 



by the sponsors and by the American Standards Associa- 
tion (ASA) in July 1937. 

A fifth edition of the Code was well under way in 
1940 when it was necessary to suspend the work due 
to the Second World War. However, a number of the 
revisions already agreed upon by the Sectional Commit- 
tee and approved by the sponsors and by the ASA in 
April 1942, were issued as a supplement to the 1937 
edition. They were subsequently incorporated in a 
reprint of the 1937 edition in 1945. In response to public 
demand, requirements for private residence elevators 
were also issued in a separate supplement, ASA Al 7.1.5- 
1953, and incorporated into the Code as Part V in the 
1955 edition. 

The Sectional Committee reinitiated consideration of 
the fifth edition of the Code in 1946. Due to the consider- 
able period which had elapsed since the fourth revision 
in 1937, and to the very extensive developments in the 
elevator art, the committee decided that the Code should 
be completely rewritten and brought up to date. 

Special subcommittees were appointed to prepare the 
revisions of the various requirements. The membership 
of each subcommittee consisted of persons especially 
familiar with the requirements to be covered by that 
subcommittee. Fifteen subcommittees were set up with 
a total membership of over 150 persons. The member- 
ship of these subcommittees was not confined to mem- 
bers of the Sectional Committee. It also included other 
persons having expert knowledge of the subjects under 
consideration by the subcommittees. These subcommit- 
tees and their personnel were listed in the 1955 edition 
of the Code. 

The drafts prepared by these subcommittees were 
widely circulated to interested groups for comment. 
After review of the comments and correlation of the 
drafts, the fifth edition of the Code was approved by 
the Sectional Committee, subsequently by the sponsors, 
and by the ASA in June 1955. 

In December 1957, a Supplement to the Code listing 
a number of revisions was approved by the ASA and 
published by ASME. 

A sixth edition was published in 1960 which incorpo- 
rated the revisions contained in the 1957 Supplement as 
well as approximately 96 revisions which were approved 
by the Sectional Committee in March 1960. 

In 1958 the scope of the A17 Code was enlarged to 
include moving walks. The membership of the Sectional 
Committee was expanded to include manufacturers 
whose primary interest in the Committee was the devel- 
opment of rules and regulations on moving walks. A 



Editions and Supplements 


Approved 


Issued 


Effective 


Ninth Edition 


ANSI A17.1-1978 


May 4, 1978 


June 15, 1978 


September 15, 1978 


Supplements 


ANSI A17.1a-1979 


February 5, 1979 


March 30, 1979 


June 30, 1979 




ANSI A17.1b-1980 


March 20, 1980 


May 15, 1980 


August 15, 1980 


Tenth Edition 


ANSI/ASME A17.1-1981 


September 8, 1981 


October 22, 1981 


April 22, 1982 


Supplements 


ANSI/ASME A17.1a-1982 


October 5, 1982 


November 30, 1982 


May 30, 1983 




ANSI/ASME A17.1b-1983 


October 24, 1983 


December 23, 1983 


June 23, 1984 


Eleventh Edition 


ANSI/ASME A17.1-1984 


August 16, 1984 


September 16, 1984 


March 16, 1985 


Supplements 


ANSI/ASME A17.1a-1985 


February 27, 1985 


April 15, 1985 


October 15, 1985 




ANSI/ASME A17.1b-1985 


August 6, 1985 


October 15, 1985 


April 15, 1986 




ANSI/ASME A17.1c-1986 


March 5, 1986 


April 30, 1986 


October 31, 1986 




ANSI/ASME A17.1d-1986 


September 8, 1986 


November 30, 1986 


May 31, 1987 




ANSI/ASME A17.1e-1987 


February 18, 1987 


April 30, 1987 


October 30, 1987 


Twelfth Edition 


ASME/ANSI A17.1-1987 


October 20, 1987 


January 15, 1988 


July 16,1988 


Supplements 


ASME/ANSI A17.1a-1988 


October 6, 1988 


November 15, 1988 


May 16, 1989 




ASME/ANSI A17.1b-1989 


November 10, 1989 


November 30, 1989 


May 31, 1990 


Thirteenth Edition 


ASME A17.1-1990 


October 8, 1990 


February 8, 1991 


August 9, 1991 


Supplements 


ASME A17.1a-1991 


October 21, 1991 


February 28, 1992 


August 29, 1992 




ASME A17.1b-1992 


October 28, 1992 


December 29, 1992 


June 30, 1993 


Fourteenth Edition 


ASME A17.1-1993 


October 18, 1993 


December 31, 1993 


July 1, 1994 


Supplements 


ASME A17.1a-1994 


August 17, 1994 


December 31, 1994 


July 1, 1995 




ASME A17.1b-1995 


October 5, 1995 


January 31, 1996 


August 1, 1996 


Fifteenth Edition 


ASME A17.1-1996 


October 3, 1996 


December 31, 1996 


July 1, 1997 


Supplements 


ASME A17.1a-1997 


January 8, 1998 


February 27, 1998 


August 28, 1998 




ASME A17.1b-1998 


November 13, 1998 


February 19, 1999 


August 20, 1999 




ASME A17.1c-1999 


May 13, 1999 


June 30, 1999 


December 31, 1999 




ASME A17.1d-2000 


October 12, 2000 


November 30, 2000 


January 31, 2001 


Sixteenth Edition 


ASME A17.1-2000 


October 16, 2000 


March 23, 2001 


March 23, 2002 


Supplements 


ASME A17.1a-2002 


February 26, 2002 


April 4, 2002 


October 4, 2002 




ASME A17.1b-2003 


April 10, 2003 


May 30, 2003 


November 30, 2003 


Seventeenth Edition 


ASME A17.1-2004 


January 14, 2004 


April 30, 2004 


October 31, 2004 


Supplements 


ASME A17.1a-2005 


March 18, 2005 


April 29, 2005 


October 29, 2005 



(ED) 



ASME A17 ELEVATOR 
AND ESCALATOR COMMITTEE 



(December 2003) 



STANDARDS COMMITTEE 

R. L. Seymour, Chair 

H. E. Peelle III, Vice Chair 

D. L. Steel, Vice Chair 

G. A. Burdeshaw, Secretary 

L. Bialy, Otis Elevator Co. 

N. Marchitto, Alternate, Otis Elevator Co. 

W. C. Burklund, Montgomery Kone, Inc. 

D. J. Camp, Thyssen Krupp Elevator 

H. Simpkins, Alternate, Thyssen Krupp Elevator 
J. W. Coaker, Coaker & Co., PC 

E. A. Donoghue, Edward A. Donoghue Associates, Inc. 
R. E. Droste, Consultant 

J. A. Filippone, Port Authority of New York and New Jersey 
J. H. Humphrey, Alternate, Port Authority of New York and New 
Jersey 

C. C. Fox, Rainbow Security Control Ltd. 

G. W. Gibson, George W. Gibson and Associates, Inc. 

H. E. Godwin, Jr., The Godwin Co. 

R. A. Gregory, Vertex Corp. 

A. P. Juhasz, Kone, Inc. 

L. C. Kanicki, Elevator Subcode Official Township of Burlington NJ 

G. A. Kappenhagen, Schindler Elevator Corp. 

M. P. Lamb, Alternate, Schindler Elevator Corp. 

K. S. Lloyd, Abell Elevator International 

S. K. Lloyd, Alternate, Abell Elevator International 

N. B. Martin, Chief Elevator Insp. State of Ohio 

Z. R. McCain, jr., McCain Engineering Associates, Inc. 

M. V. Farinola, Alternate, MV Farinola, Inc. 

D. A. McColl, Otis Canada, Inc. 

J. L. Meyer, State of California, Division of Occupational Safety and 

Health 
H. E. Peelle III, The Peelle Co., Ltd. 
S. P. Reynolds, Alternate, The Peelle Co., Ltd. 
R. L. Phillips, Georgia Department of Labor 
V. P. Robibero, Schindler Elevator Corp. 
A. Rehman, Alternate, Schindler Elevator Corp. 
R. L. Seymour, Robert L. Seymour and Associates, Inc. 
R. S. Seymour, Alternate, Robert L. Seymour and Associates, Inc. 

C. F. Starmer, GAL Manufacturing 

D. L. Steel, David L. Steel Escalators 

D. L. Turner, Davis L. Turner & Associates 
R. S. Caporale, Alternate, Elevator World, Inc. 
A. H. Verschell, Consulting Engineer 

C. E. Vlahovic, TSSA 

R. Haddaller, Alternate, TSSA 

D. M. Winkle, IUEC Local #14 

E. V. Baker, Alternate, NEIEP 

D. A. Witham, GAL Manufacturing 





Honorary Members 


L. J. Blaiotta 


J. McAulay, Jr. 


W. E. Chamberlain 


H. E. Peelle, Jr. 


B. J. Fanguy 


E. M. Philpot 


W. J. Figiel 


R. L. Rogers 


C. E. Hempel 


R. W. Young 


C. L. Kort 


L. E. White 


A. A. Mascone 





Regulatory Advisory Council 



L. C. Kanicki, Chair 
N. B. Martin, Vice Chair 
G. A. Burdeshaw, Staff 

Secretary 
J. R. Runyan, Secretary 
G. Antona 
J. R. Brooks 
J. H. Burpee 
P. Caploon 
N. C. Dimitruck 
A. N. Griffin 
R. F. Hadaller 



S. J. Hickory 
I. D. Jay 
M. J. Mellon, Jr. 
J. L. Meyer 
K. P. Morse 
J. S. Nicksic 
C. W. Rogler 
R. W. Steele 
S. F. Stout 
W. C. Watson 
W. J. Witt 
C. D. Wagner 



NATIONAL INTEREST REVIEW COMMITTEE 



J. P. Andrew 
L. C. Arnold 
R. Barker 
R. J. Blatz 
J. E. Brannon 
T. A. Bremer 
J. A. Caluori 
M. A. Chavez 
H. J. Clifford 
R. F. Dieter 
S. M. Eisenman 
B. Faerber 
J. J. Faup 
S. E. Fisher 
P. A. Fleming 
J. G. Gerk 
L. A. Giovannetti 
J. M. Gould 
J. E. Herwig 
J. Inglis 
M. A. Jacobs 
D. J. Jolly 
F. A. Kilian 
j. W. Koshak 
M. L. Lane 
M. R. Liberatore 



M. A. Malek 
J. J. Mancuso 

C. C. Mann 

N. E. Marchitto 
J. M. McKhley 
R. A. Molinari 
N. J. Montesano 
T. S. Mowrey 
J. Murphy 
F. G. Newman 
J. J. O'Donoghue 

D. J. O'Keefe Ml 

E. J. Orrico III 
M. S. Peck 
B. Y. Peyton 
M. J. Pfeiffer 

R. B. Pohlman, Jr. 
M. Poulin 
J. Powell 
P. M. Puno 
L. S. Rigby 
R. D. Schloss 
S. Shanes 
M. Shipley 
M. L. Smith 
J. L. Stabler 



SECTION 1.1-1.1.4 



ASMEA17.1a-2005 



SAFETY CODE FOR ELEVATORS AND ESCALATORS 

Part 1 
General 



(05a) 



SECTION 1.1 
SCOPE 

1.1.1 Equipment Covered by This Code 

This Code covers the design, construction, operation, 
inspection, testing, maintenance, alteration, and repair 
of the following equipment, its associated parts, and its 
hoistways, where located in or adjacent to a building or 
structure (except as modified by 1.2): 

(a) hoisting and lowering mechanisms, equipped 
with a car or platform, which move between two or more 
landings. This equipment includes, but is not limited to 
elevators (see 1.3). 

(b) power-driven stairways and walkways for car- 
rying persons between landings. This equipment 
includes, but is not limited to escalators and moving 
walks (see 1.3). 

(c) hoisting and lowering mechanisms equipped with 
a car that serves two or more landings and is restricted 
to the carrying of material by its limited size or limited 
access to the car. This equipment includes, but is not 
limited to dumbwaiters and material lifts (see 1.3). 

1.1.2 Equipment Not Covered by This Code 

Equipment not covered by this Code includes, but is 
not limited to, the following: 

(a) personnel hoists within the scope of ANSI A10.4 
and CSA-Z185 

(b) material hoists within the scope of ANSI A10.5 
and CSA-Z256 

(c) platform lifts and stairway chairlifts within the 
scope of ASME A18.1, CSA B355, and CSA B613 

(d) manlifts within the scope of ASME A90.1 and 
CSA B311 

(e) mobile scaffolds and towers; platforms within the 
scope of ANSI/SIA A92 and CSA-B354 

(f) powered platform and equipment for exterior and 
interior building maintenance within the scope of ASME 
A120.1 and CSA-Z271 

(g) conveyors and related equipment within the scope 
of ASMEB20.1 



(h) cranes, derricks, hoists, hooks, jacks, and slings 
within the scope of ASME B30, CSA Z150, CSA B167, 
CSA Z202, and CSA Z248 

(i) industrial trucks within the scope of ASME B56 
and CSA B335 

(j) portable equipment, except for portable escalators, 
which are covered by 6.1 

(k) tiering or piling machines used to move material 
to and from storage located and operating entirely 
within one story 

(I) equipment for feeding or positioning material at 
machine tools, printing presses, etc. 

(m) skip or furnace hoists 

(n) wharf ramps 

(o) amusement devices 

(p) stage and orchestra lifts 

(q) lift bridges 

(r) railroad car lifts and dumpers 

(s) mechanized parking garage equipment 

(t) line jacks, false cars, shatters, moving platforms, 
and similar equipment used for installing an elevator 

(u) platform elevators installed in a ship or offshore 
drilling rig and used for the purpose of loading and 
unloading cargo, equipment, and personnel 

(v) dock levelers (freight platform lifts) having a travel 
of 500 mm (20 in.) or less 

(w) in Canadian jurisdictions, devices having a travel 
of 2 000 mm (79 in.) or less and used only for the transfer 
of materials or equipment 

1.1.3 Application of Parts 

This Code applies to new installations only, except 
Part 1, and 5.10, 8.1, 8.6, 8.7, 8.8, 8.9, 8.10, and 8.11, 
which apply to both new and existing installations. 

1.1.4 Effective Date 

The requirements of this edition and subsequent 
addenda to the Code are effective as of the date noted 
on the copyright page of this document. The authority 
having jurisdiction will establish the effective date for 
their local regulations. 



(ED) 



(04) 



(04) 



ASA/IE A17.1a-2005 



SECTION 1.2-SECTION 1.3 



SECTION 1.2 
PURPOSE AND EXCEPTIONS 

The purpose of this Code is to provide for the safety 
of life and limb, and to promote the public welfare. 

The provisions of this Code are not intended to pre- 
vent the use of systems, methods, or devices of equiva- 
lent or superior quality, strength, fire resistance, 
effectiveness, durability, and safety to those prescribed 
by this Code, provided that there is technical documen- 
tation to demonstrate the equivalency of the system, 
method, or device. 

The specific requirements of this Code may be modi- 
fied by the authority having jurisdiction based upon 
technical documentation or physical performance verifi- 
cation to allow alternative arrangements that will assure 
safety equivalent to that which would be provided by 
conformance to the corresponding requirements of this 
Code. 

This Code contains requirements that are also covered 
in the National Building Code of Canada (NBCC). Refer- 
ence to the NBCC is recognition that said requirements 
are not within the scope of this Code in Canada. 

In jurisdictions not enforcing the NBCC, the use of 
the NBCC is not intended. Exceptions shall be based on 
the requirements of the above paragraphs. 

(04) SECTION 1.3 

DEFINITIONS 

Section 1.3 defines various terms used in this Code. 
In addition, some nomenclature and terminology used 
in the elevator industry and other ASME publications 
are defined. 

access switch: see hoistway access switch. 

alteration: any change to equipment, including its parts, 
components, and /or subsystems, other than mainte- 
nance, repair, or replacement. 

alternate level: a floor level identified by the building 
code or fire authority, other than the designated level. 

annunciator, car: an electrical device in the car that indi- 
cates visually the landings at which an elevator landing 
signal registering device has been actuated. 

applied frame entrance: a wraparound or partial addi- 
tion to an existing entrance frame used to improve the 
appearance or to provide the required clearances. 

approved: acceptable to the authority having juris- 
diction. 

authority having jurisdiction: the organization, office, 
or individual responsible for enforcement of this Code. 
Where compliance with this Code has been mandated 
by legislation or regulation, the "authority having juris- 
diction" is the regulatory authority (see regulatory 
authority). 



authorized personnel: persons who have been 
instructed in the operation of the equipment and desig- 
nated by the owner to use the equipment. 

automatic transfer device: a power-operated mecha- 
nism that automatically moves a load consisting of a 
cart, tote box, pallet, wheeled vehicle, box, or other simi- 
lar object from and /or to the car. 

auxiliary power lowering device: an alternatively pow- 
ered auxiliary control system that will, upon failure of 
the main power supply, allow a hydraulic elevator to 
descend to a lower landing. 

brake, driving machine, elevator, dumbwaiter, or mate- 
rial lift: an electromechanically or electrohydraulically 
released spring, or gravity applied device, which is part 
of the electric driving machine of the elevator, dumb- 
waiter, or material lift used to apply a controlled force 
at a braking surface to hold or retard the elevator, dumb- 
waiter, or material lift. See Nonmandatory Appendix F. 

electrohydraulically released: a means of release in which 
an electric current applied to a solenoid valve or the 
motor of a hydraulic pump directs pressurized hydraulic 
fluid to an actuator (such as a hydraulic jack) that over- 
comes a resisting force (such as a spring) as long as the 
electric current flows. 

electromechanically released: a means of release in which 
an electric current applied to an actuator (such as a 
solenoid) causes an electromagnetic force that over- 
comes a resisting force (such as a spring) as long as the 
electric current flows. 

brake, driving machine, escalator, or moving walk: an 

electromechanical device that is part of the electric driv- 
ing machine of the escalator or moving walk, used to 
apply a controlled force to a braking surface to stop and 
hold the escalator /moving walk system. 

braking, electrically assisted: retardation of the eleva- 
tor, assisted by energy generated by the driving-machine 
motor. See Nonmandatory Appendix F. 

brake, emergency: a mechanical device independent of 
the braking system used to retard or stop an elevator 
should the car overspeed or move in an unintended 
manner. Such devices include, but are not limited to, 
those that apply braking force on one or more of the 
following: 

(a) car rails 

(b) counterweight rails 

(c) suspension or compensation ropes 
id) drive sheaves 

(e) brake drums 

For further information, see Nonmandatory Appen- 
dix F. 

brake, main drive shaft, escalator and moving walk: a 

device located on the main drive shaft of the escalator 
or moving walk used to apply a controlled force to the 



SECTION 1.3 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



braking surface to stop and hold the escalator or moving 
walk system. 

braking system: driving-machine brake alone, or in 
combination with electrically assisted braking, which 
operates to slow down and stop the elevator. See Non- 
mandatory Appendix F. 

buffer: a device designed to stop a descending car or 
counterweight beyond its normal limit of travel by stor- 
ing or by absorbing and dissipating the kinetic energy 
of the car or counterweight. 

oil buffer: a buffer using oil as a medium, which absorbs 
and dissipates the kinetic energy of the descending car 
of counterweight. 

gas spring-return oil buffer: an oil buffer utilizing the 
pressure of a compressed gas to return the buffer plunger 
or piston to its fully extended position. 

mechanical spring-return oil buffer: an oil buffer utiliz- 
ing the force of the compressed mechanical spring or 
springs to return the buffer plunger or piston to its fully 
extended position. 

oil buffer stroke: the oil-displacing movement of the 
buffer plunger or piston, excluding the travel of the 
buffer plunger accelerating device. 

spring buffer: a buffer utilizing one or more springs 
to cushion the impact force of the descending car or 
counterweight. 

spring buffer load rating: the load required to com- 
press the spring buffer an amount equal to its stroke. 

spring buffer stroke: the distance the contact end of 
the spring can move under a compressive load until all 
coils are essentially in contact or until a fixed stop is 
reached. 

(05a) building code: an ordinance that sets forth requirements 
for building design and construction, or where such an 
ordinance has not been enacted, one of the following 
model codes: 

(a) International Building Code (IBC) 

(b) Building Construction and Safety Code 
(NFPA 5000) 

(c) National Building Code of Canada (NBCC) 

NOTE: Local regulations or laws take precedence. In the absence 
of local regulation a model building code is applicable. 

bumper: a device, other than an oil or spring buffer, 
designed to stop a descending car or counterweight 
beyond its normal limit of travel by absorbing the 
impact. 

cable, traveling: see traveling cable. 

capacity: see rated load. 

car door interlock: a device having two related and 
interdependent functions, which are: 

(a) to prevent the operation of the driving machine 
by the normal operating device unless the car door is 
locked in the closed position 



(b) to prevent the opening of the car door from inside 
the car unless the car is within the landing zone and is 
either stopped or being stopped 

car door or gate, power-closed: a door or gate that is 
closed by a door or gate power operator. 

car door or gate electric contact: an electrical device, 
the function of which is to prevent operation of the 
driving machine by the normal operating device unless 
the car door or gate is in the closed position. 

car door or gate power closer: a device or assembly of 
devices that closes a manually opened car door or gate 
by power other than hand, gravity, springs, or the move- 
ment of the car. 

car, dumbwaiter, material lift: the load-carrying unit 
that includes a platform or transfer device and may 
include an enclosure and /or car frame. 

car, elevator: the load-carrying unit including its plat- 
form, car frame, enclosure, and car door or gate. 

car enclosure: the top and the walls of the car resting 
on and attached to the car platform. 

car frame: the supporting frame to which the car plat- 
form, upper and lower sets of guide shoes, car safety, 
and the hoisting ropes or hoisting rope sheaves, or the 
plunger or cylinder of a direct-acting elevator, are 
attached. 

car frame, overslung: a car frame to which the hoisting 
rope fastenings or hoisting rope sheaves are attached to 
the crosshead or top member of the car frame. 

car frame, sub-post: a car frame all of whose members 
are located below the car platform. 

car frame, underslung: a car frame to which the hoisting- 
rope fastenings or hoisting-rope sheaves are attached at 
or below the car platform. 

car platform: the structure that forms the floor of the 
car and that directly supports the load. 

car platform, laminated: a self-supporting platform con- 
structed of plywood, with a bonded steel sheet facing 
on both top and bottom surfaces. 

car platform frame: a structural frame, composed of 
interconnecting members, that supports the car plat- 
form floor. 

car top access panel: a car top access panel is similar in 
design to a car top emergency exit panel. Used on mine 
elevators to permit frequent inspection of mine elevator 
hoistways for damage caused by environmental condi- 
tions. Such panels are openable without the use of tools 
or keys. 

NOTE: Subject to the modifications specified in 5.9.14.1(c). 

ceramic permanent magnet: a magnet of the type which 
has a force that does not deteriorate with time. 

certified: see listed/certified. 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



SECTION 1.3 



certifying organization: an approved or accredited, 
independent organization concerned with product eval- 
uation that maintains periodic inspection of production 
of listed /certified equipment or material and whose list- 
ing/certification states whether that equipment meets 
appropriate standards or has been tested and found 
suitable for use in a specified manner. 

NOTE: For the purpose of this definition, accredited means that an 
organization has been evaluated and approved by an Authorized 
Agency to operate a Certification/Listing program, and is desig- 
nated as such in a publication of the Authorized Agency. 

chain, suspension (hoisting): chain used to raise and 
lower a dumbwaiter or material lift car or its counter- 
weight. 

chassis: that portion of an inclined elevator that serves 
as a car frame with weight-bearing guide rollers. 

clearance, bottom car: the clear vertical distance from 
the pit floor to the lowest structural or mechanical part, 
equipment, or device installed beneath the car platform, 
except guide shoes or rollers, safety jaw assemblies, and 
platform or guards, when the car rests on its fully com- 
pressed buffers. 

clearance, top car, electric elevators: the shortest vertical 
distance between the top of the car crosshead, or 
between the top of the car where no crosshead is pro- 
vided, and the nearest part of the overhead structure of 
any other obstruction when the car floor is level with 
the top terminal landing. 

clearance, top car, hydraulic elevators: the shortest ver- 
tical distance within the hoistway between the hori- 
zontal plane described by the top of the car enclosure 
and the horizontal plane described by the lowest part 
of the overhead structure or other obstruction when the 
car floor is level with the top terminal landing. 

clearance, top car, inclined elevators: the shortest dis- 
tance in the direction of travel between the upwardmost 
portion of the chassis (car frame) and the nearest 
obstruction when the car is level with the top terminal 
landing. 

clearance, top counterweight: the shortest vertical dis- 
tance between any part of the counterweight structure 
and the nearest part of the overhead structure or any 
other obstruction when the car floor is level with the 
bottom terminal landing. 

comb, escalator and moving walk: the toothed portion 
of a combplate designed to mesh with a grooved step, 
pallet, or treadway surface. 

combplate, escalator and moving walk: that portion of 
the landing adjacent to the step, pallet, or treadway 
consisting of one or more plates to which the combs are 
fastened. 

compensating rope sheave switch: a device that auto- 
matically causes the electric power to be removed from 



the elevator, dumbwaiter, or material lift driving- 
machine motor and brake when the compensating 
sheave approaches its upper or lower limit of travel. 

compensation means: wire rope, chain, or other 
mechanical means used to counterbalance, or partially 
counterbalance, the weight of the suspension ropes. 

component rated pressure: the pressure to which a 
hydraulic component can be subjected. 

control, motion: that portion of a control system that 
governs the acceleration, speed, retardation, and stop- 
ping of the moving member. 

control, AC motor: a motion control that uses an alter- 
nating current motor to drive the machine. 

control, AC motor, DC injection: a motion control for 
an AC motor that produces retardation torque by 
injecting a DC current into either a stator winding of 
the motor or a separate eddy-current brake. 

control, single speed AC: a motion control for an AC 
motor that has a single synchronous speed. 

control, two speed AC: a motion control for an AC 
motor that has two different synchronous speeds by 
connecting the motor windings so as to obtain a different 
number of poles. 

control, variable voltage, variable frequency (VVVF): 
a motion control that changes the magnitude and fre- 
quency of the voltage applied to the motor. 

control, variable voltage AC (VVAC): a motion control 
for an AC motor that varies the amount and direction 
of output torque by controlling the magnitude and phase 
sequence of the voltage to the motor. 

control, DC motor: a motion control that uses a DC 
motor to drive the machine. 

control, dual bridge thyristor converter: a motion con- 
trol for a DC motor that supplies the armature with 
variable voltage of either polarity, and is capable of cur- 
rent flow in both directions. 

control, generator field: a motion control that is accom- 
plished by the use of an individual generator for each 
driving-machine motor wherein the voltage applied to 
the motor armature is adjusted by varying the strength 
and direction of the generator field current. 

control, multivoltage: a motion control that is accom- 
plished by impressing successively on the armature of 
the driving-machine motor a number of substantially 
fixed voltages such as may be obtained from multi- 
commutator generators common to a group of elevators. 

control, rheostatic: a motion control that is accom- 
plished by varying resistance and /or reactance in the 
armature and /or field circuit of the driving-machine 
motor. 

control, single bridge thyristor converter: a motion con- 
trol for a DC motor that supplies the armature with 
variable voltage of fixed polarity. The field is reversed 
to control direction and to cause regeneration. 



SECTION 1.3 



ASMEA17.1a-2005 



control, electrohydraulic: a motion control in which the 
acceleration, speed, retardation, and stopping are gov- 
erned by varying fluid flow to the hydraulic jack. 

control, static: a motion control in which control func- 
tions are performed by solid-state devices. 

control, operation: that portion of a control s)rstem that 
initiates the starting, stopping, and direction of motion, 
in response to a signal from an operating device. 

operation, automatic: operation control wherein the 
starting of the elevator, dumbwaiter, or material lift car 
is effected in response to the momentary actuation of 
operating devices at the landing, and /or of operating 
devices in the car identified with the landings, and /or 
in response to an automatic starting mechanism, and 
wherein the car is stopped automatically at the landings. 

operation, group automatic: automatic operation of 
two or more nonattendant elevators equipped with 
power-operated car and hoistway doors. The operation 
of the cars is coordinated by a supervisory control sys- 
tem including automatic dispatching means whereby 
selected cars at designated dispatching points automati- 
cally close their doors and proceed on their trips in a 
regulated manner. It includes one button in each car for 
each floor served and "UP" and "DOWN" buttons at 
each landing (single buttons at terminal landings). The 
stops set up by the momentary actuation of the car 
buttons are made automatically in succession as a car 
reaches the corresponding landing, irrespective of its 
direction of travel or the sequence in which the buttons 
are actuated. The stops set up by the momentary actua- 
tion of the landing buttons may be accomplished by any 
elevator in the group, and are made automatically by 
the first available car that approaches the landing in the 
corresponding direction. 

operation, nonselective collective automatic: automatic 
operation by means of one button in the car for each 
landing served and one button at each landing, wherein 
all stops registered by the momentary actuation of land- 
ing or car buttons are made irrespective of the number 
of buttons actuated or of the sequence in which the 
buttons are actuated. With this type of operation, the 
car stops at all landings for which buttons have been 
actuated, making the stops in the order in which the 
landings are reached after the buttons have been actu- 
ated, but irrespective of its direction of travel. 

operation, selective collective automatic: automatic 
operation by means of one button in the car for each 
landing served and by "UP" and "DOWN" buttons at 
the landings, wherein all stops registered by the momen- 
tary actuation of the car buttons are made as defined 
under nonselective collective automatic operation, but 
wherein the stops registered by the momentary actua- 
tion of the landing buttons are made in the order in 
which the landings are reached in each direction of travel 
after the buttons have been actuated. With this type of 
operation, all "UP" landing calls are answered when the 



car is traveling in the up direction and all "DOWN" 
landing calls are answered when the car is traveling in 
the down direction, except in the case of the uppermost 
or lowermost calls, which are answered as soon as they 
are reached, irrespective of the direction of travel of 
the car. 

operation, single automatic: automatic operation by 
means of one button in the car for each landing served 
and one button at each landing, so arranged that if any 
car or landing button has been actuated the actuation 
of any other car or landing operating button will have 
no effect on the operation of the car until the response 
to the first button has been completed. 

operation, car switch: operation control wherein the 
movement and direction of travel of the car are directly 
and solely under the control of the attendant by means 
of a manually operated car switch or of continuous- 
pressure buttons in the car. 

operation, car switch automatic floor-stop: operation in 
which the stop is initiated by the attendant from within 
the car with a definite reference to the landing at which 
it is desired to stop, after which the slowing down and 
stopping of the elevator is effected automatically. 

operation, continuous-pressure: operation control by 
means of buttons or switches in the car and at the land- 
ings, any one of which may be used to control the move- 
ment of the car as long as the button or switch is 
manually maintained in the actuating position. 

operation, preregister: operation control in which signals 
to stop are registered in advance by buttons in the car 
and at the landings. At the proper point in the car travel, 
the attendant in the car is notified by a signal, visual, 
audible, or otherwise, to initiate the stop, after which 
the landing stop is automatic. 

operation, signal: operation control by means of single 
buttons or switches (or both) in the car, and "UP" or 
"DOWN" direction buttons (or both) at the landings, 
by which predetermined landing stops may be set up 
or registered for an elevator or for a group of elevators. 
The stops set up by the momentary actuation of the car 
buttons are made automatically in succession as the car 
reaches those landings, irrespective of its direction of 
travel or the sequence in which the buttons are actuated. 
The stops set up by the momentary actuation of the 
"UP" and "DOWN" buttons at the landing are made 
automatically by the first available car in the group 
approaching the landings in the corresponding direc- 
tion, irrespective of the sequence in which the buttons 
are actuated. With this type of operation, the car can be 
started only by means of a starting switch or button in 
the car. 

control system: the overall system governing the start- 
ing, stopping direction of motion, acceleration, speed, 
and retardation of the moving member. See Nonmanda- 
tory Appendix A. 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



SECTION 1.3 



controller: a device or group of devices that serves to 
control in a predetermined manner the apparatus to 
which it is connected. 

controller, motion: an operative unit comprising a 
device or group of devices for actuating the moving 
member. 

controller, motor: the operative units of a motion control 
system comprising the starter devices and power con- 
version equipment required to drive an electric motor. 

controller, operation: an operative unit comprising a 
device or group of devices for actuating the motion 
control. 

deck, escalator: see escalator deck. 

designated attendant: where elevator operation is con- 
trolled solely by authorized personnel (attendant ser- 
vice, independent, hospital service, and other similar 
operations). 

designated level: the main floor or other floor level 
that best serves the needs of emergency personnel for 
firefighting or rescue purposes identified by the building 
code or fire authority. 

dispatching device, elevator automatic: a device, the 
principal function of which is to either: 

(a) operate a signal in the car to indicate when the 
car should leave a designated landing, or 

(b) actuate its starting mechanism when the car is at 
a designated landing 

displacement switch: a device actuated by the displace- 
ment of the counterweight, at any point in the hoistway 
to provide a signal that the counterweight has moved 
from its normal lane of travel or has left its guide rails. 

door: the movable portion(s) of an entrance that closes 
the openings. It consists of one or more solid face panels 
which are permitted to be equipped with a vision panel. 

door, folding: a hinged door consisting of two or more 
panels that fold and move horizontally. 

door, horizontally sliding: a door that moves horizon- 
tally. 

center-opening: a horizontally sliding door con- 
sisting of two panels, so arranged to open away from 
each other. 

center-opening, multiple-speed: a horizontally sliding 
door consisting of more than two panels, so arranged 
that the panels or groups of panels open away from 
each other. 

multiple-speed: a horizontally sliding door with two 

or more panels, so arranged to open away from one side. 

single-speed: a one-panel horizontally sliding door. 

door or gate, manually operated: a door or gate that is 
opened and closed by hand. 

door or gate, power-operated: a door or gate that is 
opened and closed by a door or gate power-operator. 



door or gate, self-closing: a manually opened door or 
gate that closes when released. 

door, swinging: a door that pivots around a vertical axis. 

door, vertically sliding: a counterweighted or counter- 
balanced door consisting of one or more panels that 
move vertically to open or close. 

door, vertically sliding sequence operation: where the (05a) 
opening and closing relationship of the car and hoistway 
doors do not occur simultaneously. 

door, biparting: a vertically sliding door consisting 
of two or more sections, so arranged that the sections 
or groups of sections open away from each other. 

door, wrap-around: a horizontally sliding door that 
bends around a car enclosure. 

door locked out of service: a hoistway entrance in which 
the door is mechanically locked by means other than 
the interlock to prevent the door being opened from the 
car side without keys or special equipment. 
door or gate closer: a device that closes a door or gate 
by means of a spring or gravity. 
door or gate electric contact: an electrical device, the 
function of which is to prevent operation of the driving 
machine by the normal operating device unless the door 
or gate is in the closed position. 
door or gate power operator: a device or assembly of 
devices that opens a hoistway door(s) and /or a car door 
or car gate by power other than hand, gravity, springs, 
or the movement of the car; and that closes them by 
power other than hand, gravity, or the movement of 
the car. 

driving machine: see machine, driving. 
dumbwaiter: a hoisting and lowering mechanism 
equipped with a car of limited size which moves in 
guide rails and serves two or more landings that is used 
exclusively for carrying materials, and is classified by 
the following types. 

dumbwaiter, hand: a dumbwaiter utilizing manual 
energy to move the car. 

dumbwaiter, power: a dumbwaiter utilizing energy 
other than gravitational or manual to move the car. 

dumbwaiter, electric: a power dumbwaiter where the 
energy is applied by means of an electric driving 
machine. 

dumbwaiter, hydraulic: a power dumbwaiter where 
the energy is applied, by means of a liquid under pres- 
sure, in a cylinder equipped with a plunger or piston. 
dumbwaiter, direct-plunger hydraulic: a hydraulic 
dumbwaiter having a plunger or cylinder directly 
attached to the car frame or platform. 

dumbwaiter, electrohydraulic: a direct-plunger 
dumbwaiter where liquid is pumped under pressure 
directly into the cylinder by a pump driven by an electric 
motor. 

dumbwaiter, maintained-pressure hydraulic: a direct- 
plunger dumbwaiter where liquid under pressure is 
available at all times for transfer into the cylinder. 



SECTION 1.3 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



governor rope retarding means: a mechanical means of 
developing a sufficient force in the governor rope to 
activate the car or counterweight safeties or to trip the 
governor rope releasing carrier, where used. Such 
mechanical means include, but are not limited to, rope- 
gripping jaws, clutch mechanisms, and traction arrange- 
ments. 

handrail stand: the uppermost portion of the balustrade 
that supports and guides the handrail. 

hoistway (shaft), elevator, dumbwaiter, or material lift: 

an opening through a building or structure for the travel 
of elevators, dumbwaiters, or material lifts, extending 
from the pit floor to the roof or floor above. 

hoistway, blind: the portion of a hoistway where 
hoistway entrances are not provided. 

hoistway, multiple: a hoistway with more than one ele- 
vator, dumbwaiter, or material lift. 

hoistway, single: a hoistway with a single elevator, 
dumbwaiter, or material lift. 

hoistway, mine: The area within a mine shaft, and its 
above ground structure required for the elevator equip- 
ment, associated supports, and operations, including a 
minimum of 450 mm (18 in.) around same. 

hoistway access switch: a switch, located at a landing, 
the function of which is to permit operation of the car 
with the hoistway door at this landing and the car door 
or gate open, in order to permit access to the top of the 
car or to the pit. 

hoistway door: see door. 

hoistway door electric contact: see door or gate electric 
contact. 

hoistway door or gate locking device: a device that 
secures a hoistway door or gate in the closed position 
and prevents it from being opened from the landing 
side except under certain specified conditions. 

hoistway door combination mechanical lock and electric 
contact: a combination mechanical and electrical device 
with two related, but entirely independent functions, 
which are: 

(a) to prevent operation of the driving machine by 
the normal operating device unless the hoistway door 
is in the closed position 

(b) to lock the hoistway door in the closed position 
and prevent it from being opened from the landing side 
unless the car is within the landing zone 

NOTE: As there is no positive mechanical connection between 
the electric contact and the door locking mechanism, this device 
ensures only that the door will be closed, but not necessarily locked, 
when the car leaves the landing. Should the lock mechanism fail 
to operate as intended when released by a stationary or retiring 
car-cam device, the door can be opened from the landing side even 
though the car is not at the landing. If operated by a stationary 
car-cam device, it does not prevent opening the door from the 
landing side as the car passes the floor. 



hoistway door interlock: a device having two related 
and interdependent functions, which are: 

(a) to prevent the operation of the driving machine 
by the normal operating device unless the hoistway door 
is locked in the closed position 

(b) to prevent the opening of the hoistway door from 
the landing side unless the car is within the landing 
zone and is either stopped or being stopped 

hoistway door interlock retiring cam device: a device 
that consists of a retractable cam and its actuating mech- 
anism and that is entirely independent of the car door 
or hoistway door power operator. 

hoistway gate separate mechanical lock: a mechanical 
device the function of which is to lock a hoistway gate 
in the closed position after the car leaves a landing and 
prevent the gate from being opened from the landing 
side unless the car is within the landing zone. 

hoistway enclosure: the fixed structure, consisting of 
vertical walls or partitions, that isolates the hoistway 
from all other areas or from an adjacent hoistway and 
in which entrances are installed. 

hoistway gate: usually a counterweighted (counterbal- 
anced) assembly, consisting of one or more sections that 
are guided in the vertical direction to open or close. The 
gate may be of wood or metal construction. Wood gates 
may consist of either horizontal or vertical slats. Metal 
gates are usually constructed of perforated or expanded 
metal. 

hospital service: a special case of operation by a desig- 
nated attendant used only for medical emergencies. 

hydraulic jack: a unit consisting of a cylinder equipped 
with a plunger (ram) or piston, which applies the energy 
provided by a liquid under pressure. 

hydraulic machine: a unit consisting of pump, motor, 
valves, and associated internal piping, which converts 
electrical energy and supplies it as a liquid under 
pressure. 

in-car stop switch: a device located in the car and acces- 
sible for operation by elevator personnel only, which, 
when manually operated, causes the electric power to 
be removed from the driving-machine motor and brake 
of an electric elevator or from the electrically operated 
valves and pump motor of a hydraulic elevator. 

inclined elevator: see elevator, inclined. 

installation: a complete elevator, dumbwaiter, escalator, 
material lift, or moving walk, including its hoistway, 
hoistway enclosures and related construction, and all 
machinery and equipment necessary for its operation. 

installation, existing: an installation that has been com- 
pleted or is under construction prior to the effective date 
of this Code. 

installation, new: any installation not classified as an 
existing installation by definition, or an existing elevator, 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



SECTION 1.3 



dumbwaiter, escalator, material lift, inclined lift, or mov- 
ing walk moved to a new location subsequent to the 
effective date of this Code. 

interlock: see car door interlock and hoistway door interlock. 

labeled/marked: equipment or material to which has 
been attached a label, symbol, or other identifying mark 
of an approved or accredited independent certifying 
organization, concerned with product evaluation, that 
maintains periodic inspection of production of labeled/ 
marked equipment or material, and by whose labeling/ 
marking the manufacturer indicates compliance with 
appropriate standards or performance in a specified 
manner. 

NOTE: For the purpose of this definition, accredited means that an 
organization has been evaluated and approved by an Authorized 
Agency to operate a Certification/ Listing program, and is desig- 
nated as such in a publication of the Authorized Agency. 

landing, dumbwaiter: that portion of a floor, balcony, 
platform, or landing door used to discharge and receive 
materials. 

landing, elevator or material lift: that portion of a floor, 
balcony, or platform used to receive and discharge pas- 
sengers or freight. 

landing, bottom terminal: the lowest landing served by 
the elevator or material lift that is equipped with a 
hoistway entrance. 

landing, top terminal: the highest landing served by the 
elevator or material lift that is equipped with a hoistway 
entrance. 

landing, escalator or moving walk: the stationary area 
at the entrance to or exit from an escalator, a moving 
walk, or moving walk system. 

(05a) landing, lower, escalator: that landing of least elevation 
of the two landings. 

(05a) landing, lower, moving walk: that landing of least eleva- 
tion of the two landings. On moving walks where the 
two landings are of equal elevation, the lower landing 
is that landing designated by the manufacturer. 

(05a) landing, upper, escalator: that landing of greatest eleva- 
tion of the two landings. 

(05a) landing, upper, moving walk: that landing of greatest 
elevation of the two landings. On moving walks where 
the two landings are of equal elevation the upper land- 
ing is that landing designated by the manufacturer. 

landing, next available: the first landing in the direction 
of travel that the elevator is electrically and mechanically 
capable of serving with a normal slowdown and stop. 

landing zone: a zone extending from a point 450 mm 
(18 in.) below a landing to a point 450 mm (18 in.) above 
the landing. 

(05a) left, right convention: left and right designations of 
escalator and moving walk components are determined 
by facing the equipment at the lower landing. 



leveling: controlled car movement toward the landing, 
within the leveling zone, by means of a leveling device, 
which vertically aligns the car platform sill relative to the 
hoistway landing sill to attain a predetermined accuracy. 

leveling device, elevator, dumbwaiter, or material lift 
car: any mechanism that will either, automatically or 
under control of the operator, move the car within the 
leveling zone toward the landing only, and automati- 
cally stop it at the landing. 

leveling device, anticreep: a leveling device used on 
hydraulic elevators to correct automatically a change in 
car level caused by leakage or contraction of fluid in the 
hydraulic system. 

leveling device, inching: a leveling device that is con- 
trolled by the operator by means of continuous-pressure 
switches. 

leveling device, one-way automatic: a device that corrects 
the car level only in case of under-run of the car, but will 
not maintain the level during loading and unloading. 

leveling device, two-way automatic maintaining: a device 
that corrects the car level on both under-run and over- 
run, and maintains the level during loading and 
unloading. 

leveling device, two-way automatic nonmaintaining: a 
device that corrects the car level on both under-run and 
over-run, but will not maintain the level during loading 
and unloading. 

leveling zone: the limited distance above or below an 
elevator, dumbwaiter, or material lift landing within 
which the leveling device is permitted to cause move- 
ment of the car toward the landing. 

listed/certified: equipment or materials accepted for 
inclusion in a publication by a certifying organization. 

NOTE: The means for identifying listed/certified equipment may 
vary for each organization concerned with product evaluation, 
some of which do not recognize equipment as listed/certified 
unless it is also labeled /marked. The authority having jurisdiction 
utilizes the system employed by the listing /certifying organization 
to identify a listed /certified product. 

load, dynamic: the load applied as a result of accelera- 
tion or deceleration. 

load, impact: a suddenly applied load. 

load, static: the load applied as a result of the weight. 

lower landing, escalator: see landing, lower, escalator. (05a) 

lower landing, moving walk: see landing, lower, mov- (05a) 
ing walk. 

machine, driving: the power unit that applies the energy 
necessary to drive an elevator or other equipment cov- 
ered by the scope of this Code. 

driving machine, electric: a driving machine in which 
the energy is applied by an electric motor. It includes the 
motor, driving-machine brake, and the driving sheave or 
drum, together with its connecting gearing, belt, or 



10 



SECTION 1.3 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



chain, if any. See Nonmandatory Appendix F. 

driving machine, direct: an electric driving machine, 
the motor of which is directly connected mechanically 
to the driving sheave, drum, or shaft without the use 
of belts or chains, either with or without intermediate 
gears. 

geared driving machine: a direct driving machine 
in which the energy is transmitted from the motor to 
the driving sheave, drum, or shaft through gearing. 



winding drum machine: a geared driving 
machine in which the suspension ropes are fastened to 
and wind on a drum. 

traction machine: a direct driving machine in 
which the motion of a car is obtained through friction 
between the suspension ropes and a traction sheave. 

geared traction machine: a geared-drive traction 
machine. 

gearless traction machine: a traction machine, 
without intermediate gearing, that has the traction 



10.1 



SECTION 1.3 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



or remove obstacles or resort to portable ladders, 
chairs, etc. 

recall level: the designated or alternate level that cars are 
returned to when Phase I Emergency Recall Operation is 
activated. 

recycling operation, telescope plunger: an operation for 
restoring the relative vertical positions of the multiple 
plungers in a telescoping plunger arrangement. 

regulatory authority: the person or organization respon- 
sible for the administration and enforcement of the 
applicable legislation or regulation governing the 
design, construction, installation, operation, inspection, 
testing, maintenance, or alteration of equipment covered 
by this Code. (See als6 authority having jurisdiction.) 

rehabilitation: see alteration; maintenance; repair; and 
replacement. 

releasing carrier, governor rope: a mechanical device 
to which the governor rope may be fastened, calibrated 
to control the activation of a safety at a predetermined 
tripping force. 

remote machine and control rooms: rooms that do not 
share a common wall, floor, or ceiling with the hoistway. 

repair: reconditioning or renewal of parts, components, 
and /or subsystems necessary to keep equipment in 
compliance with applicable Code requirements. (See 
also replacement and maintenance.) 

replacement: the substitution of a device or component 
and /or subsystems, in its entirety, with a unit that is 
basically the same as the original for the purpose of 
ensuring performance in accordance with applicable 
Code requirements. (See also repair and maintenance.) 

restricted area: (applicable to Part 7) an area accessible 
only to authorized personnel who have been instructed 
in the use and operation of the equipment. 

rise: the vertical distance between the bottom terminal 
landing and the top terminal landing of an elevator, 
dumbwaiter, or material lift. 

rise, escalator and moving walk: the vertical distance 
between the top and bottom landings of the escalator 
or moving walk. 

rope, aircraft cable: a wire rope built for a special pur- 
pose having special flexibility properties, zinc-coating, 
high breaking strength, and antirust qualities. Designed 
originally for use with aircraft controls. 

rope, car counterweight: wire rope used to connect the 
car and counterweight that does not pass over the driv- 
ing means. 

rope, counterweight: wire rope used to raise and lower 
the counterweight on an electric elevator, dumbwaiter, 
or material lift having a winding drum machine. 

rope, governor: wire rope with at least one end fastened 
to the safety activating means or governor rope releasing 



carrier, passing over and driving the governor sheave, 
and providing continuous information on the speed and 
direction of the car or counterweight. 

rope, safety drum (also known as "Tail rope" and 
"Minne Line"): a corrosion-resistant wire rope used to 
connect the governor rope to the safety. Primarily used 
with wedge clamp safeties. 

rope, suspension (hoisting): wire rope used to raise and 
lower an elevator, dumbwaiter, or material lift car or its 
counterweight, or both. 

rope equalizer, suspension: a device installed on an 
elevator, dumbwaiter, or material lift car or counter- 
weight to equalize automatically the tensions in the sus- 
pension wire ropes. 

rope-fastening device, auxiliary: a device attached to 
the car or counterweight or to the overhead dead-end 
rope-hitch support that will function automatically to 
support the car or counterweight in case the regular 
wire rope fastening fails at the point of connection to the 
car or counterweight or at the overhead dead-end hitch. 

rope sprocket drive: a driving means consisting of wire 
rope with fixed links at constant intervals throughout 
its length. The links engage in slots on a grooved drive 
cog to provide a positive drive force. 

ranby, bottom, elevator car: the distance between the 
car buffer striker plate and the striking surface of the 
car buffer when the car floor is level with the bottom 
terminal landing. 

ranby, bottom, elevator counterweight: the distance 
between the counterweight buffer striker plate and the 
striking surface of the counterweight buffer when the 
car floor is level with the top terminal landing. 

runby, top, direct-plunger hydraulic elevator: the dis- 
tance the elevator car can run above its top terminal 
landing before the plunger strikes its mechanical stop. 

running gear, escalator: all the components of an escala- 
tor moving along the tracks. 

running gear, moving walk: all the components of a 
moving walk moving along the tracks. 

safety, car or counterweight: a mechanical device 
attached to the car, car frame, or to an auxiliary frame; 
or to the counterweight or counterweight frame; to stop 
and hold the car or counterweight under one or more 
of the following conditions: predetermined overspeed, 
free fall, or if the suspension ropes slacken. 

safety, self-resetting: a car or counterweight safety 
released and reset by movement in the up direction. 

safety bulkhead: a closure at the bottom of the cylinder 
located above the cylinder head and provided with an 
orifice for controlling the loss of fluid in the event of 
cylinder head failure. 



13 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



SECTION 1.3 



screw column: a vertical structural member provided 
with screw threads that support the car of a screw col- 
umn elevator, dumbwaiter, or material lift. The screw 
column may be either in tension or compression. 

seismic switch: a device activated by ground movement 
to provide a signal that a potentially damaging earth- 
quake is imminent. 

(05a) sequence operation: see door, vertically sliding sequence 
operation. 

shaft: see hoistway. 

shall: indicates a mandatory requirement. 

should: indicates a recommendation, not a mandatory 
requirement. 

sight guard: a vertical member mounted on the hoistway 
side of the leading edge of the hoistway door. It is used 
to reduce the opening between the leading edges of the 
hoistway door and the car door. 

signal device, elevator car flash: one providing a signal 
light in the car, which is illuminated when the car 
approaches the landings at which a landing signal regis- 
tering device has been actuated. 

signal registering device, elevator landing: a button or 
other device located at the elevator landing, which, 
when actuated by a waiting passenger, causes a stop 
signal to be registered in the car. 

signal system, elevator separate: one consisting of but- 
tons or other devices located at the landings, which, 
when actuated by a waiting passenger, illuminates a 
flash signal or operates an annunciator in the car indicat- 
ing floors at which stops are to be made. 

signal transfer device, elevator automatic: a device by 
means of which a signal to be registered in a car is 
automatically transferred to the next car following, in 
case the first car passes a floor for which a signal has 
been registered without making a stop. 

signal transfer switch, elevator: a manually operated 
switch, located in the car, by means of which the operator 
can transfer a signal to the next car approaching in the 
same direction, when the operator desires to pass a floor 
at which a signal has been registered in the car. 

skirt, escalator: see escalator skirt. 

skirt panel, dynamic: the moving vertical panels, with 
a positive mechanical connection to the running gear, 
adjacent to, and moving with the steps. 

slack-rope switch: a device that automatically causes the 
electric power to be removed from the elevator driving 
machine motor and brake when the suspension ropes 
of a winding drum machine become slack. 

sleeving (liner): the insertion of a smaller diameter cyl- 
inder inside the existing cylinder of a hydraulic jack. 

sling: see car frame. 



slope, moving walk: the angle that the centerline of the 
treadway makes with the horizontal. 

software system failure: a behavior of the software, 
including its support (host) hardware, that is not in 
accordance with the intended function. 

solid-state device: an element that can control current 
flow without moving parts. 

speed governor: a continuously operating speed moni- 
toring and detection device that, at predetermined 
speeds, provides signals to the controller and imparts 
a retarding force to activate the car or counterweight 
safety. 

speed governor, escalator and moving walk: a continu- 
ously operating speed monitoring and detection device 
that, at predetermined speeds, provides signals to the 
controller to stop the escalator or moving walk. 

starters control panel, elevator: an assembly of devices 
by means of which the starter may control the manner 
in which an elevator or group of elevators function. 

static switching: switching of circuits by means of solid- 
state devices. 

tandem operation escalators: see escalators, tandem oper- 
ation. 

terminal landing: see landing, elevator or material lift. 

terminal speed-limiting device, emergency: a device 
that automatically reduces the car and counterweight 
speed to within the rated buffer striking speed prior to 
buffer engagement. 

terminal speed reducing device, hydraulic: a device on 
hydraulic elevators that will reduce the speed prior to 
contacting the stop ring in the up direction. 

terminal stopping device, emergency: a device that 
automatically causes the power to be removed from the 
driving machine motor and brake if the car fails to slow 
down as intended when approaching the terminal 
landing. 

terminal stopping device, final: a device that automati- 
cally causes the power to be removed from a driving- 
machine motor and brake, or from a hydraulic machine, 
independent of the functioning of the normal stopping 
means, normal terminal stopping device, and any emer- 
gency terminal speed-limiting device, after the car has 
passed a terminal landing. 

terminal stopping device, machine final (stop-motion 
switch): final terminal stopping device operated directly 
by the driving machine. 

terminal stopping device, normal: device(s) to slow 
down and stop an elevator, dumbwaiter, or material lift 
car automatically at or near a terminal landing, indepen- 
dently of the functioning of the normal stopping means. 

threshold comb, moving walk: see comb, escalator and 
moving walk. 



14 



SECTION 1.3 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



threshold plate, moving walk: see combplate, escalator 
and moving walk. 

transom: a panel or panels used to close a hoistway 
enclosure opening above a hoistway entrance. 

travel: distance measured along the center of the path 
of motion between the bottom terminal landing and the 
top terminal landing. 

traveling cable: a cable made up of electric conductors, 
which provides electrical connection between an eleva- 
tor, dumbwaiter, material lift car, or counterweight, and 
a fixed outlet in the hoistway or machine room. 

treadway, moving walk: the passenger-carrying mem- 
ber of a moving walk. 

truck zone, elevator: the limited distance above an ele- 
vator landing within which the truck zoning device per- 
mits movement of the elevator car. 

truck zoning device, elevator: a device that will permit 
the operator in the car to move a freight elevator within 
the truck zone with the car door or gate and a hoistway 
door open. 

type test: a test carried out by or witnessed by a certi- 
fying organization concerned with product evaluation 
and the issuing of certificates to ensure conformance to 
Code requirements. 

unlocking device, hoistway door: a mechanical device, 
the function of which is to unlock and permit the open- 
ing of a hoistway door from a landing irrespective of 
the position of the car. 

unlocking zone: a zone extending from the landing floor 
level to a point not less than 75 mm (3 in.) nor more 
than 450 mm (18 in.) above and below the landing. 

(05a) upper landing, escalator: see landing, upper, escalator. 

(05a) upper landing, moving walk: see landing, upper, mov- 
ing walk. 



valley break: a broken wire in a wire rope in which the 
outside wire of a strand breaks in the immediate vicinity 
of the point where it contacts a wire or wires of an 
adjacent strand, generally at a point not visible when 
the wire rope is examined externally. One end of the 
broken wire is long enough to reach from one valley to 
the next one and the other end of the broken wire gener- 
ally cannot be seen. 

valve, overspeed: a device installed in the pressure pip- 
ing of a hydraulic elevator, between the hydraulic 
machine and the hydraulic jack, which restricts and 
ceases oil flow from the hydraulic jack through the pres- 
sure piping when such flow exceeds a preset value. 

volatile memory: memory lost when operating power 
is removed. 

waiting-passenger indicator: an indicator that shows at 
which landings and for which direction elevator hall 
stop-or-signal calls have been registered and are unan- 
swered. 

weatherproof: so constructed or protected that exposure 
to the weather will not interfere with successful oper- 
ation. 

width, moving walk: the exposed width of the treadway. 

window: an assembly consisting of a surrounding frame 
and one or more sashes, ventilators, or fixed lights, or 
a combination of these, designed to be installed in a 
wall opening for the purpose of admitting light or air, 
or both. 

working pressure: the pressure measured at the hydrau- 
lic machine when lifting car and its rated load at rated 
speed, or with Class C2 loading when leveling up with 
maximum static load. 

yield strength: the tensile stress that is sufficient to pro- 
duce a permanent deformation of 0.2%. 



15 



ASMEA17.1a-2005 



SCOPE-2.1.2.2 



Part 2 
Electric Elevators 



SCOPE 

Part 2 applies to electric elevators installed at an angle 
greater than 70 deg from the horizontal. It applies to 
other equipment only as referenced in the applicable 
Part. 

NOTE: See also Part 8 for additional requirements that apply to 
electric elevators. 



SECTION 2.1 

CONSTRUCTION OF HOISTWAYS AND HOISTWAY 

ENCLOSURES 

2.1.1 Hoistway Enclosures 

Hoistway enclosures shall conform to 2.1.1.1, 2.1.1.2, 
or 2.1.1.3. 

2.1.1.1 Fire-Resistive Construction 

2.1.1.1.1 Where fire-resistive construction is 
required, hoistways shall be enclosed in conformance 
with the requirements of the building code (see 1.3). 

2.1.1.1.2 Partitions between hoistways and 
machine rooms having fire-resistive enclosures shall be 
of noncombustible solid or openwork construction that 
meets the requirements of 2.1.1.2.2(c)(1), (2), and (3). 
Openwork construction shall reject a ball 25 mm (1 in.) 
in diameter, except where there are openings essential 
for ropes, drums, sheaves, and other elevator equipment. 

2.1.1.1.3 Hoistway enclosure openings shall be 
protected with entrances or access doors having a fire- 
protection rating conforming to the requirements of the 
building code. 

2.1.1.2 Non-Fire-Resistive Construction 

2.1.1.2.1 Where fire-resistive construction is not 
required by the building code, hoistway construction 
shall conform to 2.1.1.2.2 or 2.1.1.3. 

2.1.1.2.2 The hoistway shall be fully enclosed con- 
forming to 2.1.1.2.2(a), (b), and (c), or 2.1.1.22(a) and (d). 

(a) Enclosures and doors shall be imperforated to a 
height of 2 000 mm (79 in.) above each floor or landing 
and above the treads of adjacent stairways. The enclo- 
sure shall be imperforated, adjacent to, and for 150 mm 
(6 in.) on either side of any moving equipment that is 
within 100 mm (4 in.) of the enclosure. 



(b) Openwork enclosures, where used above the 
2 000 mm (79 in.) level, shall reject a ball 25 mm (1 in.) 
in diameter. 

(c) Openwork enclosures shall be 

(1) at least 2.2 mm (0.087 in.) thick wire, if of steel 
wire grille 

(2) at least 2.2 mm (0.087 in.) thick, if of 
expanded metal 

(3) so supported and braced as to deflect not over 
15 mm (0.6 in.) when subjected to a force of 450 N 
(100 lbf) applied horizontally at any point 

(d) Enclosures shall be permitted to be glass, provided 
it is laminated glass conforming to ANSI Z97.1, 16 CFR 
Part 1201, or CAN/CGSB-12.1, whichever is applicable 
(see Part 9). Markings as specified in the applicable stan- 
dard shall be on each separate piece of glass and shall 
remain visible after installation. 

2.1.1.2.3 Entrances shall be in conformance with 
2.11, except 2.11.14, 2.11.15, 2.11.16, and 2.11.18. 

2.1.1.3 Partially Enclosed Hoistways. For elevators 
that are not fully enclosed, protection at least 2 400 mm 
(94.5 in.) high shall be provided on the hoistway sides 
that are located 1 500 mm (59 in.) or less from elevator 
equipment to areas accessible to other than elevator per- 
sonnel. Such protection shall comply with 2.1.1.2. 

2.1.1.4 Multiple Hoistways. The number of elevators 
permissible in a hoistway shall be in conformance with 
the building code. 

2.1.1.5 Strength of Enclosure. The hoistway enclo- 
sure adjacent to a landing opening shall be of sufficient 
strength to maintain, in true lateral alignment, the 
hoistway entrances. Operating mechanisms and locking 
devices shall be supported by the building wall, if load- 
bearing, or by other building structure. Adequate con- 
sideration shall be given to pressure exerted on hoistway 
enclosures as a result of windage and elevator operation. 

2.1.2 Construction at Top and Bottom of the 
Hoistway 

2.1.2.1 Construction at Top of the Hoistway. The top 

of the hoistway shall be enclosed as required by the 
building code. 

2.1.2.2 Construction at Bottom of Hoistway. Pits 
extending to the ground shall have noncombustible 
floors, and shall be designed to prevent entry of ground 



16 



2.2.4.2-2.3.2.1 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



object in back of the ladder shall be provided. When 
unavoidable obstructions are encountered, the distance 
shall be permitted to be reduced to 115 mm (4.5 in.). 
Siderails, if provided, shall have a clear distance of not 
less than 115 mm (4.5 in.) from their centerline to the 
nearest permanent object. The nearest point of the ladder 
shall be within 1 000 mm (39 in.), measured horizontally 
from the means to unlock the egress door from the pit. 
Pit access by a ladder shall not be permitted when 
the pit floor is more than 3 000 mm (120 in.) below the 
sill of the access door, except where there is no building 
floor below the bottom terminal landing, this height 
shall be permitted to be greater but not more than 
4 200 mm (165 in.). 

2.2.43 Pits shall be accessible only to elevator per- 
sonnel. 

2.2.4.4 Separate pit door, when provided, shall be 
subject to the following requirements: 

(a) If the door swings into the pit, it shall be located 
so that it does not interfere with moving equipment. 

(b) If the door swings out, and the lowest structural 
or mechanical part, equipment, or device installed 
beneath the car platform, except guide shoes or rollers 
or safety jaw assemblies, projects below the top of the 
separate pit access door opening when the car is level 
with the bottom terminal landing 

(1) an electric contact conforming to 2.26.2.26 shall 
be provided to prevent operation of the elevator when 
the door is open 

(2) the door shall be provided with a vision panel(s) 
that is glazed with clear wired glass not less than 6 mm 
(0.25 in.) thick, will reject a ball 150 mm (6 in.) in diame- 
ter, and have an area of not more than 0.03 m 2 (47 in. 2 ) 

(c) The door shall provide a minimum opening of 
750 mm (29.5 in.) in width and 1 825 mm (72 in.) in 
height. 

(d) The door shall be equipped with a barrier con- 
forming to 2.11.1.2(i), where the door sill is located more 
than 300 mm (12 in.) above the pit floor. 

(e) The door shall be self-closing and provided with 
a spring-type lock arranged to permit the door to be 
opened from inside of the pit without a key. Such doors 
shall be kept closed and locked. The key shall be of 
Group 1 Security (see 8.1). 

2.2.5 illumination of Pits 

A permanent lighting fixture shall be provided and 
shall conform to 2.2.5.1 through 2.2.5.3. 

2.2.5.1 The lighting shall provide an illumination of 
not less than 100 lx (10 fc) at the pit floor and at a pit 
platform, when provided. 

2.2.5.2 The light bulb(s) shall be externally guarded 
to prevent contact and accidental breakage. 



2.2.5.3 The light switch shall be so located as to be 
accessible from the pit access door. 

2.2.6 Stop Switch in Pits 

An enclosed stop switch(es), meeting the require- 
ments of 2.26.2.7 and 2.2.6.1 through 2.2.6.3, shall be 
installed in the pit of each elevator. 

2.2.6.1 The stop switch shall be so located as to be 
accessible from the pit access door. Where access to the 
pits of elevators in a multiple hoistway is by means of 
a single access door, the stop switch for each elevator 
shall be located adjacent to the nearest point of access 
to its pit from the access door. 

2.2.6.2 In elevators where access to the pit is through 
the lowest landing hoistway door, a stop switch shall 
be located approximately 450 mm (18 in.) above the 
floor level of the landing, within reach from this access 
floor and adjacent to the pit ladder, if provided. When 
the pit exceeds 1 700 mm (67 in.) in depth, an additional 
stop switch is required adjacent to the pit ladder and 
approximately 1 200 mm (47 in.) above the pit floor. 

2.2.6.3 Where more than one switch is provided, 
they shall be wired in series. 

2.2.7 Minimum Pit Depths Required 

The pit depth shall be not less than is required for the 
installation of the buffers, compensating sheaves, if any, 
and all other elevator equipment located therein and to 
provide the minimum bottom car clearance and runby 
required by 2.4.1. 

2.2.8 Access to Underside of Car 

Where the distance from the pit floor to the underside 
of the plank channels or slings exceeds 2 100 mm (83 in.), 
with the car at the lowest landing, a means shall be 
permanently installed or permanently stored in the pit 
to provide access to the equipment on the underside of 
the car. 

SECTION 2.3 
LOCATION AND GUARDING OF COUNTERWEIGHTS 

2.3.1 Location of Counterweights 

Counterweights shall be located in the hoistway of 
the elevator that they serve, or in a remote hoistway 
subject to the limitations and requirements of 2.3.3. 

2.3.2 Counterweight Guards 

2.3.2.1 Metal guards shall be installed in the pit 
and /or machine room located underneath the hoistway 
on all open sides of the counterweight runway, except 
that 

(a) the guard, or portion thereof, is not required on 
the side facing the car where there is no space greater 



19 



ASMEA17.1a-2005 



2.3.2.1-2.4.1.1 



than 500 mm (20 in.) between compensating ropes 
(chains), or between compensating ropes (chains) and 
counterweight rails, or between compensating ropes 
(chains) and guards 

(b) where pit-mounted buffers are used, the guard is 
not required where the bottom of the counterweight 
resting on its compressed buffer is 2 130 mm (84 in.) or 
more above the pit floor, or above the machine or control 
room floor if located underneath the hoistway 

2.3.2.2 Guards shall 

(a) extend from the lowest part of the counterweight 
assembly when the counterweight is resting on the fully 
compressed buffer to a point not less than 2 100 mm 
(83 in.) and not more than 2 450 mm (96 in.) above the 
pit floor 

(b) be the full width of the area being guarded 

(c) not prevent determination of the counterweight 
runby 

(d) be fastened to a metal frame reinforced and braced 
to be at least equal in strength and stiffness to 2 mm 
(0.074 in.) thick sheet steel 

(e) if perforated, reject a ball 25 mm (1 in.) in diameter 

(05a) 2.3.2.3 Guarding of Counterweights in a Multiple-Ele- 
vator Hoistway. Where a counterweight is located 
between elevators, the counterweight runway shall be 
guarded on the side next to the adjacent elevator. The 
guard shall be of noncombustible material. The guard, 
if of openwork material, shall reject a ball 25 mm (1 in.) 
in diameter and be made from material equal to or 
stronger than 1.110 mm (0.0437 in.) diameter wire. The 
guard shall be so supported that when subjected to a 
force of 450 N (100 lbf) applied over an area of 100 mm 
x 100 mm (4 in. x 4 in.) at any location, the deflection 
shall not reduce the clearance between the guard and 
the counterweight below 25 mm (1 in.). 

2.3.3 Remote Counterweight Hoistways 

Where elevators are not provided with either compen- 
sating means or counterweight safeties, the counter- 
weights shall be permitted to be located in a remote 
hoistway conforming to 2.3.3.1 through 2.3.3.6. 

2.3.3.1 The hoistway shall be fully enclosed and shall 
be fire resistive, conforming to 2.1.1.1 if it penetrates 
separate fire-resistive areas of the structure. 

2.3.3.2 Construction at the top and bottom of the 
hoistway shall conform to 2.1.2. 

2.3.3.3 Permanent means shall be provided for 
inspection, repair, and maintenance of the counter- 
weight, deflecting and secondary sheaves, hoistway, 
ropes, counterweight guide rails, and counterweight 
buffers or bumpers. Entry doors into the separate coun- 
terweight hoistway shall be provided at top, bottom, 
and center of counterweight hoistway, but in no case 



shall the entry doors be more than 11 m (36 ft) from sill to 
sill. Doors shall be located and of such width to provide 
unobstructed access to the space between the counter- 
weight guides. The height of the door shall be at least 
1 975 mm (78 in.). Doors shall conform to 2.11.1.2(b) 
through (e), inclusive. An enclosed stop switch, meeting 
the requirements of 2.26.2.5(a), (b), and (c), a permanent 
electric light switch, outlet, and light shall be provided 
in the hoistway immediately inside the entry door. 

2.3.3.4 Ropes and sheaves leading to the separate 
counterweight hoistways shall be protected against 
unauthorized access. 

2.3.3.5 Not more than four counterweights shall be 
located in a single separate counterweight hoistway. 
Multiple counterweights located in a single hoistway 
shall be separated by means of an unperforated metal 
guard at the top, bottom, and center of the hoistway. 
Guards shall extend a minimum of 2 450 mm (96 in.) in 
length opposite the entry door. Doors and all other 
means described in 2.3.3.3 shall be provided for each 
counterweight. 

2.3.3.6 There shall be a clearance of not less than 
600 mm (24 in.) between the weight in the counterweight 
frame and the wall containing the entry door. 

2.3.4 Counterweight Runway Enclosures 

Where a counterweight is located in the same 
hoistway as the car, the runway for the counterweight 
shall be permitted to be separated from the runway for 
the car, provided it conforms to 2.3.4.1 and 2.3.4.2. 

2.3.4.1 The partition shall be noncombustible. 
Unperforated metal partitions shall be equal to or 
stronger than 1.2 mm (0.047 in.) thick sheet steel. Open- 
work partitions shall be either wire grille at least 2.2 mm 
(0.087 in.) in diameter or expanded metal at least 2.2 mm 
(0.087 in.) in thickness. 

2.3.4.2 The counterweight runway shall be permit- 
ted to be fully enclosed for the full height, provided that 
the partitions are removable in sections weighing not 
more than 25 kg (55 lb), which permit inspection and 
maintenance of the entire counterweight assembly and 
the inspection of the counterweight guide rails and 
guide-rail brackets. 

SECTION 2.4 

VERTICAL CLEARANCES AND RUNBYS FOR CARS 

AND COUNTERWEIGHTS 

2.4.1 Bottom Car Clearances 

2.4.1.1 When the car rests on its fully compressed 
buffers or bumpers, there shall be a vertical clearance 
of not less than 600 mm (24 in.) between the pit floor 



20 



2.4.1.1-2.4.1.3 AS/ME A17.1a-2005 



and the lowest structural or mechanical part, equipment, either side of the car frame centerline parallel to the 

or device installed beneath the car platform, except as plane of the guide rails 

specified in 2.4.1.2. ( c ) anv equipment mounted in or on the pit floor 

2.4.1.2 The 600 mm (24 in.) clearance does not located within 300 mm (12 in.) horizontally from either 

apply to side of the car frame centerline parallel to the guide rail 

(a) any equipment on the car within 300 mm (12 in.) 

horizontally from any side of the car platform 2.4.1.3 In no case shall the available refuge space be 

(b) any equipment located on or traveling with the less than either of the following: 
car located within 300 mm (12 in.) horizontally from 



20.1 



2.4.12.2-2.6.2 



ASfVIE A17.1a-2005 



(05a) 



2.4.12.2 In any area outside the refuge space where 
the vertical clearance between the top of the car enclo- 
sure and the overhead structure or other obstructions is 
less than specified in 2.4.12.1, the top of the car enclosure 
shall be clearly marked. The marking shall consist of 
alternating 100 mm (4 in.) diagonal red and white 
stripes. In addition, a sign with the words "DANGER 
LOW CLEARANCE" shall be prominently posted on 
the crosshead and be visible from the entrance. The 
sign shall conform to ANSI Z535.2 or CAN/CSA-Z321, 
whichever is applicable (see Part 9). The sign shall be 
of such material and construction that the letters and 
figures stamped, etched, cast, or otherwise applied to 
the face shall remain permanently and readily legible. 

SECTION 2.5 

HORIZONTAL CAR AND COUNTERWEIGHT 

CLEARANCES 

2.5.1 Clearances Between Cars, Counterweights, and 
Hoistway Enclosures 

2.5.1.1 Between Car and Hoistway Enclosures. The 
clearance between the car and the hoistway enclosure 
shall be not less than 20 mm (0.8 in.), except on the sides 
used for loading and unloading. 

2.5.1.2 Between Car and Counterweight and Counter- 
weight Guard. The clearance between the car and the 
counterweight shall be not less than 25 mm (1 in.). The 
clearance between the car and the counterweight guard, 
counterweight and the counterweight guard, and 
between the counterweight and the hoistway enclosure 
shall be not less than 20 mm (0.8 in.). 

2.5.13 Between Cars in Multiple Hoistways. The run- 
ning clearance between the cars and any equipment 
attached thereto, of elevators operating in a multiple 
hoistway, shall be not less than 50 mm (2 in.). 

2.5.1.4 Between Car and Landing Sills. The clearance 
between the car platform sill and the hoistway edge of 
any landing sill, or the hoistway side of any vertically 
sliding counterweighted or counterbalanced hoistway 
door, or of any vertically sliding counterbalanced bipart- 
ing hoistway door, shall be not less than 

(a) where car side guides are used: 

(1) 13 mm (0.5 in.) for all elevators except freight 
elevators 

(2) 20 mm (0.8 in.) for freight elevators 

(b) where car corner guides are used, 20 mm (0.8 in.) 
The maximum clearance shall be not more than 32 mm 

(1.25 in.). 

2.5.1.5 Clearance Between Loading Side of Car Plat- 
forms and Hoistway Enclosures 

2.5.1.5.1 The clearance between the edge of the 
car platform sill and the hoistway enclosure or fascia 



plate for the full width of the clear hoistway door open- 
ing shall be not more than 

(a) 190 mm (7.5 in.) for vertically sliding doors 

(b) 125 mm (5 in.) for other doors 

2.5.1.5.2 This clearance shall be maintained until 
the car is resting on its fully compressed buffer. 

2.5.1.53 The clearance is not limited on passenger 
elevators, provided that 

(a) a car door interlock conforming to 2.14.4.2 is pro- 
vided to prevent a door from being opened unless the 
car is within the unlocking zone 

(b) the strength of the door complies with 2.11.11.2, 
2.11.11.4, 2.11.11.6, 2.11.11.7, and 2.11.11.8 

2.5.1.6 Clearance Between Car Platform Apron and Pit 
Enclosure. Where the lowest landing sill projects into 
the hoistway, the clearance between the car platform 
apron and the pit enclosure or fascia plate shall be not 
more than 32 mm (1.25 in.). This clearance shall be main- 
tained until the car is resting on its fully compressed 
buffer. 

2.5.1.7 Measurement of Clearances. The clearances 
specified in 2.5.1 shall be measured with no load on the 
car platform. 

SECTION 2.6 
PROTECTION OF SPACE BELOW HOISTWAYS 

Where a hoistway does not extend to the lowest floor 
of the building and there is space below the hoistway 
that is accessible, requirements of 2.6.1 and 2.6.2 shall 
be complied with. 

2.6.1 Where the Space §s Underneath the 
Counterweight and/or Sts Guides 

Where the space is underneath the counterweight 
and /or its guides 

(a) the counterweight shall be provided with a coun- 
terweight safety conforming to 2.17.4 

(b) spring buffers, if used, shall conform to 2.22, 
except that they shall not be fully compressed when 
struck by the counterweight at the following speeds (see 
2.1.2.3): 

(1) at governor tripping speed where the counter- 
weight safety is governor operated, or 

(2) 125% of the rated speed where the counter- 
weight safety is not governor operated 



Vhere the Space is Underneath the Car and/or 

ts Guides 



2.6.2 



Where the space is underneath the car and /or its 
guides and if spring buffers are used, they shall be so 
designed and installed that they will not be fully com- 
pressed solid or to a fixed stop when struck by the car 
with its rated load at the governor tripping speed (see 
2.1.2.3). 



(ED) 



23 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



SECTION 2.7-2.7.3.3.4 



SECTION 2.7 
MACHINE ROOMS AND MACHINERY SPACES 

2.7.1 Enclosure of Machine Rooms and Machinery 
Spaces 

Machines, control equipment, sheaves, and other 
machinery shall not be exposed to the weather. Machine 
room and machinery space enclosures shall conform to 
2.7.1.1 or 2.7.1.2. 

2.7.1.1 Fire-Resistive Construction. Where fire- 
resistive construction is required by the building code, 
the requirements of 2.7.1.1.1 and 2.7.1.1.2 shall be con- 
formed to. 

2.7.1.1.1 Spaces containing machines, control 
equipment, sheaves, and other machinery shall be sepa- 
rated from the remainder of the building by a fire- 
resistive enclosure conforming to the requirements of 
the building code. 

2.7.1.1.2 Openings in the machine room enclosure 
shall be protected with access doors having a fire protec- 
tion rating conforming to the requirements of the build- 
ing code. 

NOTES (2.7.1.1): 

(1) See 2.1.3 for floors of machine rooms and machinery spaces 
over the hoistways. 

(2) See 2.7.2.1 for separating elevator machinery from building 
machinery. 

(3) See 2.1.1.1.2 for partitions between machine rooms and 
hoistways. 

2.7.1.2 Non-Fire-Resistive Construction. Where fire- 
resistive construction is not required by the building 
code, the requirements of 2.7.1.2.1 and 2.7.1.2.2 shall be 
conformed to. 

2.7.1.2.1 Machine rooms and machinery spaces 
shall be enclosed with noncombustible material 
extending to a height of not less than 2 000 mm (79 in.). 

2.7.1.2.2 The enclosure, if of openwork material, 
shall reject a ball 50 mm (2 in.) in diameter. 

2.7.2 Equipment in Machine Rooms 

2.7.2.1 Equipment Permitted. Only machinery and 
equipment used in conjunction with the function or use 
of the elevator shall be permitted in the elevator machine 
room. 

2.7.2.2 Maintenance Clearance 

2.7.2.2.1 A clear path of not less than 450 mm 
(18 in.) shall be provided to all components that require 
maintenance. 

2.7.2.2.2 A clearance of not less than 450 mm 
(18 in.) shall be provided in the direction(s) required for 
maintenance access. 



2.7.3 Access to Machine Rooms and Machinery 
Spaces 

2.7.3.1 General Requirements. A permanent and 
unobstructed means of access to elevator machine rooms 
and overhead machinery spaces shall be provided. 

2.7.3.2 Access Across Roofs. Where passage over 
roofs is necessary to reach the means of access to machine 
rooms or machinery spaces, the requirements of 2.7.3.2.1 
and 2.7.3.2.2 shall be conformed to. 

2.7.3.2.1 A stairway with a swinging door and 
platform at the top level, conforming to 2.7.3.3, shall be 
provided from the top floor of the building to the roof 
level. Hatch covers, as a means of access to roofs, shall 
not be permitted. 

2.7.3.2.2 Where the passage is over a roof having 
a slope exceeding 15 deg from the horizontal, or over a 
roof where there is no parapet or guard rail at least 
1 070 mm (42 in.) high around the roof or passageway, 
a permanent, unobstructed and substantial walkway not 
less than 600 mm (24 in.) wide, equipped on the side 
sloping away from the walk with a railing conforming 
to 2.10.2.1, 2.10.2.2, and 2.10.2.3, shall be provided from 
the building exit door at the roof level to the means of 
access to the machine room or machinery spaces. 

2.7.3.3 Means of Access. The means of access to 
machine rooms, machinery spaces, and different floor 
levels in machine rooms shall conform to 2.7.3.3.1 
through 2.7.3.3.5. 

2.7.3.3.1 A permanent, fixed, noncombustible lad- 
der or stair shall be provided where the floor of the 
machine room or the machinery space above or below 
the floor or roof from which the means of access leads, 
or where the distance between the machine room floor 
levels, is more than 200 mm (8 in.). 

2.7.3.3.2 A permanent, noncombustible stair shall 
be provided where the floor of the machine room or the 
machinery space above or below the floor or roof from 
which the means of access leads, or where the distance 
between the machine room floor levels, is 900 mm (35 in.) 
or more. Vertical ladders with handgrips shall be permit- 
ted to be used in lieu of stairs for access from building 
floors or machine rooms to machinery spaces containing 
overhead sheaves, secondary and deflecting sheaves, 
governors, and auxiliary equipment, not including con- 
trollers and motor generators. 

2.7.3.3.3 Permanent, fixed, noncombustible lad- 
ders shall conform to ANSI A14.3. 

2.7.3.3.4 Permanent, noncombustible stairs shall 
have a maximum angle of 60 deg from the horizontal, 
and shall be equipped with a noncombustible railing 
conforming to 2.10.2.1, 2.10.2.2, and 2.10.2.3. 



24 



2.8.2.2-2.9.1.1 



ASAAE A17.1a-2005 



2.8.2.2 Ducts shall be permitted to be installed in 
the hoistway, machine room, and machinery space for 
the purpose of heating, cooling, ventilating, and venting 
these areas only and shall not encroach upon the 
required clearances. 

2.8.2.3 Sprinkler systems conforming to NFPA 13 
or the NBCC, whichever is applicable (see Part 9), shall 
be permitted to be installed in the hoistway, machine 
room, and machinery spaces, subject to the requirements 
of 2.8.2.3.1 through 2.8.2.3.4. 

2.8.2.3.1 All risers and returns shall be located 
outside these spaces. Branch lines in the hoistway shall 
supply sprinklers at not more than one floor level. When 
the machine room is located above the roof of the build- 
ing, risers, return pipes, and branch lines for the machine 
room sprinkler(s) shall be permitted to be located in the 
hoistway between the top floor and the machine room. 

(05a) 2.8.2.3.2 In jurisdictions not enforcing the NBCC, 

means shall be provided to automatically disconnect the 
main line power supply to the affected elevator upon 
or prior to the application of water from sprinklers 
located in the machine room or in the hoistway more 
than 600 mm (24 in.) above the pit floor. 

(a) This means shall be independent of the elevator 
control and shall not be self-resetting. 

(b) Heat detectors and sprinkler flow switches used to 
initiate main line elevator power shutdown shall comply 
with the requirements of NFPA 72. 

(c) The activation of sprinklers outside of the 
hoistway or machine room shall not disconnect the main 
line elevator power supply. 

2.8.2.3.3 Smoke detectors shall not be used to 
activate sprinklers in these spaces or to disconnect the 
main line power supply. 

2.8.2.3.4 In jurisdictions not enforcing the NBCC, 
when sprinklers are installed in the hoistway, all electri- 
cal equipment, except earthquake protective devices 
conforming to 8.4.10.1.2(d), located less than 1 225 mm 
(48 in.) above the pit floor, shall be 

(a) weatherproof (NEMA4) 

(b) wiring shall be identified for use in wet locations 
in accordance with the requirements in NFPA 70 

2.8.2.4 Other pipes or ducts conveying gases, 
vapors, or liquid and not used in connection with the 
operation of the elevator shall not be installed in any 
hoistway, machine room, or machinery space. Where a 
machine room or hoistway, or both, extend above the 
roof of a building, pipes shall be permitted from roof 
drains to the closest point where they can be diverted out 
of this space. Pipes shall be covered to prevent leakage or 
condensate from entering the machine room or hoistway. 

2.8.2.5 Where permitted and provided, pipes, 
drains, and tanks, or similar equipment that contains 



liquids, shall not be located directly above the elevator 
equipment and shall not encroach upon the required 
clearances in the hoistway, machine room, or machinery 
spaces. 

2.8.3 Electrical Heaters 

Listed /certified electrical heaters shall be permitted. 

2.8.4 Air Conditioning 

Air conditioning equipment is permitted to be 
installed in machine rooms or machinery spaces for the 
purpose of cooling these areas only, subject to the 
requirements of 2.8.4.1 through 2.8.4.5. 

2.8.4.1 Air conditioning equipment shall not be 
located directly above elevator equipment. 

2.8.4.2 The clear headroom below suspended air 
conditioning equipment shall conform to 2.7.4. 

2.8.4.3 Means shall be provided to collect and drain 
condensation water from these spaces. Condensation 
drains shall not be located directly above elevator equip- 
ment. Drains connected directly to sewers shall not be 
installed. 

2.8.4.4 Safe and convenient access within the eleva- 
tor machine room shall be provided to the air-condition- 
ing equipment for servicing and maintaining. 

2.8.4.5 There shall be no exposed gears, sprockets, 
belts, pulleys, or chains. 

NOTES (2.8.4): 

(1) See 2.8.2.2 for requirements for duct work. 

(2) These requirements do not pertain to air-conditioning equip- 
ment used to cool selective elevator equipment. 

2.8.6 Miscellaneous Equipment (05a) 

Enclosed moving, rotating, hanging machinery, 
equipment, stationary decorative lighting, stationary 
signage or other stationary special effects devices, 
securely attached to either one or more of the car, coun- 
terweight, or hoistway shall be permitted, provided that 
the elevator, including the equipment and devices, con- 
forms to 2.4, 2.5, 2.8.1, 2.14.2.1.1, 2.15.7, 8.2.2.1, and 
8.2.9.1. Any unenclosed moving, rotating, or hanging 
machinery or equipment, attached to the exterior of the 
car or counterweight, interior of the hoistway, exterior 
of the car, or any other elevator equipment in the 
hoistway is prohibited unless it is used in conjunction 
with the designed use of the elevator. 

SECTION 2.9 

MACHINERY AND SHEAVE BEAMS, SUPPORTS, AND 

FOUNDATIONS 

2.9.1 Beams and Supports Required 

2.9.1.1 Machines, machinery, and sheaves shall be 
so supported and maintained in place as to prevent 



27 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



2.9.1.1-2.9.2.1 



any part from becoming loose or displaced under the 
conditions imposed in service. 

2.9.1.2 Supporting beams, if used, shall be of steel 
or reinforced concrete. 

2.9.1.3 Beams are not required under machine(s), 
sheave(s), and machinery or control equipment that is 
supported on floors, provided such floors are designed 
and installed to support the load imposed thereon. 



2.9.2 Loads on Machinery and Sheave Beams, 
Floors, or Foundations and Their Supports 

2.9.2.1 Overhead Beams, Floors, and Their Supports. 

Overhead beams, floors, and their supports shall be 
designed for not less than the sum of the following 
loads: 

(a) the load resting on the beams and supports, which 
shall include the complete weight of the machine, 
sheaves, controller, governor, and any other equipment, 



27.1 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



2.9.2.1-2.9.3.4 



together with that portion, if any, of the machine room 
floor supported thereon 

(b) two times the sum of the tensions in all wire ropes 
supported by the beams with rated load in the car 

NOTE [2.9.2.1(b)]: These tensions are doubled to take care of accel- 
erations and decelerations. 

2.9.2.2 Foundations, Beams, and Floors for Machinery 
and Sheaves Not Located Directly Over the Hoistway. 

The supports for machines and sheaves located below 
or at the sides of the hoistway shall meet the require- 
ments of 2.9.2.2.1 through 2.9.2.2.4. 

2.9.2.2.1 The foundation shall support the total 
weight of the machine, sheaves, and other equipment, 
and the floor, if any. 

2.9.2.2.2 The sheave beams and the foundation 
bolts shall withstand two times the vertical force compo- 
nent acting thereon as a result of the tension in all the 
suspension ropes, less the weight of the machine or 
sheaves. 

2.9.2.2.3 The sheave beams and the foundation 
bolts shall withstand two times the horizontal force com- 
ponent, if any, acting thereon as a result of the tension 
in all the suspension ropes. 

2.9.2.2.4 The foundation shall withstand two 
times the overturning moment, if any, acting thereon as 
a result of the tension in all the suspension ropes. 

2.9.3 Securing of Machinery and Equipment to 
Beams, Foundations, or Floors 

2.9.3.1 Overhead Beams and Floors 

2.9.3.1 .1 Machinery or equipment shall be secured 
to and supported on or from the top of overhead beams 
or floors, except for the following equipment: 

(a) secondary or deflecting sheaves of traction ele- 
vators 

(b) devices and their accessories for limiting or 
retarding car speed 

2.9.3.1.2 Securing bolts or fastenings are not 
required where sound isolation is used between bases 
of machinery or equipment and supporting beams or 
floors. 

2.9.3.2 Beams or Foundations Supporting Machinery 
and Sheaves Not Located Directly Over the Hoistway 

2.9.3.2.1 Machines and sheaves located below or 
at one side of a hoistway shall be anchored to beams, 
foundations, or floors with bolts, conforming to ASTM 
A 307, of sufficient size and number to withstand the 
applicable load conditions specified in 2.9.2.2. Based on 
these initial loads, total tension in anchor bolts shall not 
exceed 85 MPa (12,000 psi) of net section, and the total 
shear shall not exceed 60 MPa (9,000 psi) of actual area 
in the shear plane. 



2.9.3.2.2 Bolts made of steel having a greater 
strength than specified by ASTM A 307 shall be permit- 
ted to be used, and the maximum allowable stresses 
increased proportionally based on the ratio of the ulti- 
mate strengths. Elongation shall conform to the require- 
ments of the corresponding ASTM specification. 

2.9.3.2.3 Where bolts are used through greater 
than 5 deg sloping flanges of structural shapes, the bolt 
heads shall be of the tipped or beveled head type or 
shall be fitted with beveled steel washers, and nuts on 
greater than 5 deg sloping flanges shall seat on beveled 
steel washers. 



2.93.3 Overhead Hoisting Rope Hitches 

2.9.3.3.1 Where hoisting ropes are secured to the 
structure above a hoistway, the hitch plates and hitch- 
plate blocking beams, where used, shall be secured to 
and mounted on top of overhead beams, machine beams, 
or on top of auxiliary beams connected to the webs of 
overhead beams. 

2.9.3.3.2 Hitch plates, blocking, or auxiliary 
beams shall be secured by bolts conforming to ASTM 
A 307, rivets conforming to ASTM A 502, or welding 
conforming to 8.8, and shall be so located that the tension 
in the hoisting ropes will not develop direct tensions in 
the bolts or rivets. Where bolts and rivets are subjected 
to shearing stresses due to tension in the hoisting ropes, 
the total shear shall not exceed 60 MPa (9,000 psi) of 
actual area in the shear plane. The stresses in welds due 
to tensions in the hoisting ropes shall not exceed 55 MPa 
(8,000 psi) on the throat area of the welds. 

2.9.3.3.3 Bolts made of steel having greater 
strength than specified by ASTM A 307 shall be permit- 
ted to be used, and the maximum allowable stresses 
increased proportionally based on the ratio of the ulti- 
mate strengths. 

2.9.3.3.4 Elongation shall conform to the require- 
ments of the corresponding ASTM specification. 

2.9.3.3.5 The hitch plate supporting beams shall 
be designed to withstand two times the sum of the 
tensions in all hoisting ropes attached to the hitch plates. 
(See also 2.15.13.) 

2.9.3.3.6 Total stresses in hitch plates and hitch- 
plate shapes shall not exceed 85 MPa (12,000 psi). 

2.9.3.4 Cast Metals in Tension ©r Bending. Cast met- 
als having an elongation of less than 20% in a length of 
50 mm (2 in.), when measured in accordance with ASTM 
E 8, which are subject to tension or bending, shall not 
be used to support machinery or equipment from the 
underside of overhead beams or floors. 



28 



2.9.4-2.11.1.2 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



2.9.4 Allowable Stresses for Machinery and Sheave 

Beams ©r Floors and Their Supports 

2.9.4.1 The unit stresses for all machinery and 
sheave beams and floors and their supports, based on 
the loads computed as specified in 2.9.2 or 2.9.6, which- 
ever is greater, shall not exceed 80% of those permitted 
for static loads by the following standards: 

(a) Structural Steel. A1SC Book No. S326 or CAN/ 
CSA-S16.1, whichever is applicable (see Part 9). 

(b) Reinforced Concrete. ANS1/AC1 318 or CAN3- 
A23.3, whichever is applicable (see Part 9). 

2.9.4.2 Where stresses due to loads, other than eleva- 
tor loads supported on the beams or floor, exceed those 
due to the elevator loads, 100% of the permitted stresses 
are permitted. 

2.9.5 Allowable Deflections of Machinery and 
Sheave Beams and Their Supports 

The allowable deflections of machinery and sheave 
beams and their immediate supports under static load 
shall not exceed V{ 6 66 of the span. 

2.9.6 Allowable Stresses Due to Emergency Braking 

Machinery and sheave beams, supports, and their fas- 
tenings subject to forces due to the application of the 
emergency brake (see 2.19.4) shall be designed to with- 
stand the maximum forces developed during the retar- 
dation phase of the emergency braking so that the 
resulting stresses due to the emergency braking and all 
other loading acting simultaneously, if applicable, shall 
not exceed those specified in 2.9.4. 

SECTION 2.10 

GUARDING OF EQUIPMENT AND STANDARD 

RAILING 

2.10.1 Guarding of Equipment 

In machine rooms and secondary machinery spaces, 
the following shall be guarded to protect against acci- 
dental contact: 

(a) driving machine sheaves and ropes whose vertical 
projection upon a horizontal plane extends beyond the 
base of the machine 

(b) sheaves 

(c) exposed gears, sprockets, tape or rope sheaves, or 
drums of selectors, floor controllers, or signal machines, 
and their driving ropes, chains, or tapes 

(d) keys, keyways, and screws in projecting shafts 
Handwinding wheels and flywheels that are not 

guarded shall have yellow markings. 

(osa) 2.10.2 Standard Railing 

A standard railing shall be substantially constructed 
of metal and shall consist of a top rail, intermediate rail 



or equivalent structural member or solid panel, and toe- 
board. 

2.10.2.1 Top Rail The top rail shall have a smooth 
surface, and the upper surface shall be located at a verti- 
cal height of 1 070 mm (42 in.) from the working surface. 

2.10.2.2 intermediate Rail, Member, or Panel. The 
intermediate rail or equivalent structural member or 
solid panel shall be located approximately centered 
between the top rail and the working surface. 

2.10.2.3 Toe-Board. The toe-board shall be securely 
fastened and have a height not less than 100 mm (4 in.) 
above the working surface. 

2.10.2.4 Strength of Standard Railing. A standard 
railing shall be capable of resisting anywhere along its 
length the following forces when applied separately, 
without deflecting more than 75 mm (3 in.) and without 
permanent deformation: 

(a) a force of at least 890 N (200 lbf ) applied in any 
lateral or downward vertical direction, at any point 
along the top rail. 

(b) a force of at least 666 N (150 lbf) applied in any 
lateral or downward vertical direction at any point along 
the center of the intermediate rail, member, or panel. If 
the standard railing is a solid panel extending from the 
top rail to the toe-board, the application of the force 
specified in 2.10.2.4(a) shall be considered to meet the 
requirements of 2.10.2.4(b). 

(c) a force of 225 N (50 lbf) applied in a lateral direc- 
tion to the toe-board. 



SECTION 2.11 
PROTECTION OF HOISTWAY OPENINGS 

2.11.1 Entrances and Emergency Doors Required 

2.11.1.1 Hoistway Landing Entrances. All elevator 
hoistway landing openings shall be provided with 
entrances that shall guard the full height and width of 
the openings. Entrances shall be at least 2 030 mm (80 in.) 
in height and 800 mm (31.5 in.) in width. 

2.11.1.2 Emergency Doors in Blind Hoistways. Where 
an elevator is installed in a single blind hoistway, there 
shall be installed in the blind portion of the hoistway 
an emergency door at every third floor, but not more 
than 11 m (36 ft) from sill to sill, conforming to the 
following: 

(a) The clear opening shall be at least 700 mm (28 in.) 
wide and 2 030 mm (80 in.) high. 

(b) It shall be easily accessible and free from fixed 
obstructions. 

(c) It shall be either of the horizontally sliding or 
swinging single-section type, irrespective of the type of 
door installed at other landings. 



29 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



2.11.1.2-2.11.4.1 



(d) It shall be self-closing and self-locking and shall 
be marked, in letters not less than 50 mm (2 in.) high, 
"DANGER, ELEVATOR HOISTWAY." 

(e) It shall be provided with an electromechanical 
device that will prevent the operation of the driving 
machine unless the door is closed and locked (see 
2.26.2.25). 

(f) It shall be unlocked from the landing side only 
through the use of a cylinder-type lock, having not less 
than five pins or five discs. The cylinder lock shall 

(1) not be unlocked by any key that will open any 
other lock or device used for any purpose in the building 

(2) be so designed that the key shall be removable 
only in the locked position 

(g) It shall be openable from the hoistway side with- 
out the use of a key. 

(h) The key shall be of Group 1 Security (see 8.1). This 
key shall also be made available to emergency personnel 
during an emergency. 

(i) A hinged self-closing barrier independent of the 
door shall be installed horizontally across the entrance 
on the hoistway side at a height of 1 070 mm (42 in.). 
The barrier shall not open into the hoistway. 

(05a) 2.11.1.3 Telephone as Alternative to Emergency 
Doors. Where an elevator is installed in a single blind 
hoistway, and there are no landings from which to gain 
access through an emergency door, a means of two-way 
conversation conforming to 2.27.1.1 shall be provided. 

NOTE: Examples are pulp mills, grain elevators, dams, or similar 
locations. 

2.11.1.4 Access Openings for Cleaning of Car and 
Hoistway Enclosures. Nonremovable sliding or swing 
panels or doors in the hoistway conforming to 
2.11.1.2(d), (f), (g), and (i) shall be permitted for access 
to car or hoistway transparent enclosures for cleaning 
purposes. An electromechanical device shall be pro- 
vided that will prevent the operation of the driving 
machine unless the access panels or doors are closed 
and locked (see 2.26.2.32). Key shall be Group 2 Security 
(see 8.1). 

2.11.2 Types of Entrances 

2.11.2.1 Passenger Elevators. For passenger eleva- 
tors, entrances shall be one of the following types: 

(a) horizontally sliding; 

(b) horizontally swinging, single-section; 

(c) combination horizontally sliding and swinging; or 

(d) hand- or power-operated vertically sliding that 
slide up to open. 

2.11.2.2 Freight Elevators. For freight elevators, 
entrances shall be one of the following types: 

(a) horizontally sliding 

(b) swinging, single-section 

(c) combination horizontally sliding and swinging 



(d) center-opening, two-section horizontally swing- 
ing, subject to restrictions of 2.11.2.3 

(e) vertically sliding biparting counterbalanced (see 
2.16.4) 

(f) vertically sliding counterweighted, single or 
multisection 

2.11 .2.3 Limitations of Use of Center-Opening Swing- 
ing Entrances. Center-opening swinging entrances shall 
be permitted only 

(a) for freight elevators which can be operated only 
from the car; or 

(b) for freight elevators not accessible to the general 
public that can be operated from outside the hoistway, 
and that are located in factories, warehouses, garages, 
and similar industrial buildings. 

2.11.3 Closing of Hoistway Doors 

2.11.3.1 Horizontally sliding or single-section (ED) 
swinging doors of automatic-operation elevators shall 

be provided with door closers arranged to close an open 
door automatically if the car, for any reason, leaves the 
landing zone. 

2.11.3.2 Horizontally sliding doors shall be closed 
when the car is at a landing, except when 

(a) the car is operated by a designated attendant in 
the car; 

(b) loading or unloading; 

(c) the elevator conforms to 2.27.3.2.1 and 2.27.3.2.3 
through 2.27.3.2.6, Phase I Emergency Recall Operation 
by fire alarm initiating device; or 

(d) the car is at the recall level when Phase I is in 
effect [see 2.27.3.1.6(a)]. 

2.11 .3.3 On center-opening doors, if there is an inter- 
lock on only one panel, the door closer required by 
2.11.3.1 shall be provided on the leading panel that oper- 
ates in the opposite direction (see 2.11.11.7). 

2.11.4 Location of Horizontally Sliding or Swinging 
Hoistway Doors 

Horizontally sliding or swinging doors shall be so 
located that the distance from the hoistway face of the 
doors to the edge of the hoistway landing sill, measured 
from the face of the door section nearest to the car, shall 
be not more than the requirements specified in 2.11.4.1 
and 2.11.4.2. 

2.11.4.1 For elevators that can be operated only from 
the car, 100 mm (4 in.), except that where new elevators 
are installed in existing multiple hoistways or where 
alterations involving replacement of the doors are made 
to existing elevators in multiple hoistways, and the loca- 
tion of the door openings is such that the 100 mm (4 in.) 
dimension specified cannot be maintained, the distance 
specified is permitted to be increased to not more than 
125 mm (5 in.) where horizontally sliding doors are used. 



30 



2.11.4.2-2.11.7.2 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



2.11 .4.2 For elevators with automatic or continuous- 
pressure operation, 19 mm (0.75 in.) for swinging doors 
and 57 mm (2.25 in.) for sliding doors, except that 

(a) freight elevators not accessible to the general pub- 
lic, and which are located in factories, warehouses, gar- 
ages, and similar industrial buildings are permitted to 
have single-section or center-opening two-section hori- 
zontally swinging doors conforming to 2.11.4.1; or 

(b) for swinging doors used on elevators with auto- 
matic and continuous-pressure operation, the distance 
shall be permitted to be increased from 19 mm to 57 mm 
(0.75 in. to 2.25 in.) if such doors are emergency doors 
conforming to 2.11.1. (See also 2.14.4.5.) 

2.11.5 Projection of Entrances and Other Equipment 
Beyond the Landing Sills 

Entrances and equipment shall not project into an 
elevator hoistway beyond the line of the landing sill, 
except for 

(a) equipment required for interlocking, indicator and 
signal devices, and door operating devices 

(b) vertical slide entrances 

2.11.6 Opening of Hoistway Doors 

2.11.6.1 When the car is within the unlocking zone, 
the hoistway doors shall be openable by hand from 
within the car without the use of tools. 

2.11 .6.2 Means shall not be provided for locking out 
of service the doors at 

(a) the top terminal landing 

(b) the bottom terminal landing 

(c) the designated and alternate landings for elevators 
equipped with Phase I Emergency Recall Operation, 
when Phase I is effective 

id) no landing for elevators equipped with Phase II 
Emergency In-Car Operation when Phase II is effective 

(05a) 2.11.6.3 Egress from the interior of the car to any 
elevator landing by means of the car and hoistway doors 
shall be unrestricted once the car and hoistway doors 
are open. 

2.11 .6.4 Handles or other means provided for opera- 
tion of manually operated doors shall be so located that 
it is not necessary to reach the back of any panel, jamb, 
or sash to operate them. 

2.11.7 Glass in Hoistway Doors 

Glass in hoistway doors shall conform to 2.11.7.1 and 
2.11.7.2. 

2.11.7.1 Vision Panels. Manually operated or self- 
closing hoistway doors of the vertically or horizontally 
sliding type, for elevators with automatic or continuous- 
pressure operation, shall be provided with a vision 
panel. Vision panels shall not be required at landings 
of automatic operation elevators where a hall position 



indicator is provided. In multisection doors, the vision 
panel is required in one section only, but is permitted 
to be placed in all sections. All horizontally swinging 
elevator doors shall be provided with vision panels. 
Vision panels are permitted for any type of hoistway 
door. 

Where required or used, vision panels shall conform 
to 2.11.7.1.1 through 2.11.7.1.7. 

2.11.7.1.1 The area of any single vision panel shall 
be not less than 0.015 m 2 (24 in. 2 ), and the total area of 
one or more vision panels in any hoistway door shall 
be not more than 0.055 m 2 (85 in. 2 ). 

2.11.7.1.2 Each clear panel opening shall reject a 
ball 150 mm (6 in.) in diameter. 

2.11.7.1.3 Muntins used between panel sections 
shall be of noncombustible material and of substantial 
construction. 

2.11.7.1.4 Panel opening shall be glazed with 
either of the following: 

(a) clear wire glass not less than 6 mm (0.25 in.) 

(b) other transparent glazing material not less than 
6 mm (0.25 in.) thick that meets the impact safety stan- 
dard 16 CFR Part 1201 or CAN/CGSB-12.1, CAN/ 
CGSB-12.11, or CAN/CGSB-12.12, whichever is applica- 
ble (see Part 9) 

2.11.7.1.5 The center of the panel shall be located 
not less than 1 300 mm (51 in.) and not more than 
1 700 mm (67 in.) above the landing, except that for 
vertically sliding biparting counterbalanced doors, it 
shall be located to conform to the dimensions specified 
insofar as the door design will permit. 

2.11.7.1.6 Vision panels in power-operated doors 
shall be substantially flush with the surface of the land- 
ing side of the door. 

2.11.7.1.7 Vision panels shall be protected by pro- 
tective grilles made of steel not less than 1.4 mm 
(0.055 in.) thick, in accordance with the following specifi- 
cations: 

(a) Grilles shall be sized to fit within or over the vision 
panel frame and completely cover the vision panel open- 
ing in the hoistway door. 

(b) Grilles shall be secured by means that deter 
removal by common tools. 

(c) Grilles shall contain openings that shall be not 
larger than 19 mm x 19 mm (0.75 in. x 0.75 in.) in 
diameter. Such openings shall be spaced at 25 mm (1 in.) 
center-to-center. 

id) Grille edges shall be free of burrs and beveled. 
(e) Grilles shall be installed on the hoistway side of 
the door. 

2.11.7.2 Glass Doors. Where provided, glass 
hoistway doors shall conform to 2.11.7.2.1 through 
2.11.7.2.5. 



31 



ASME A17.1a-2005 2.11.7.2.1-2.11.7.2.3 



2.11.7.2.1 The glass shall be laminated glass con- the landing side of the doors. Door lap shall not be used 

forming to 16 CFR Part 1201 or CAN/CGSB-12.1. Mark- in calculating glass size. 

ines as specified in the applicable standard shall be on «^^,«- T ,, ,, 

, r . c i j u ii • ui 2.11.7.2.3 In power-operated doors, the glass 

each separate piece of glass and shall remam visible , , ... , .„«, . i i r r.i 

^ • L ii L - panel shall be substantially flush with the surface of the 

after installation. f ,. . i <■ ^ , 

landmg side of the door. 

2.11.7.2.2 The glass shall be not less than 60% of 
the total visible door panel surface area as seen from 



31.1 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



2.11.7.2.4-2.11.11.5.1 



2.11.7.2.4 A nonglass edge shall be provided on 
the leading edge of the door panel. 

2.11.7.2.5 The glass door shall conform to 
2.11.11.5.7 for horizontally sliding type entrances, 
2.11.12.4 for vertically sliding type entrances, or 2.11.13.3 
for swinging entrances. 

2.11.8 Weights for Closing or Balancing Doors 

Hoistway door weights, where used for closing or 
balancing doors, shall be guided or restrained to prevent 
them from coming out of their runway. The bottom of 
the guides or other restraining means shall be so con- 
structed as to retain the weights if the weight suspension 
means breaks. 

2.11.9 Hoistway Door Locking Devices and Power 
Operation 

2.11.9.1 Locking Devices. Doors shall be provided 
with door locking devices conforming to 2.12. 

2.11.9.2 Power Operation. Where hoistway doors are 
power operated or are opened or closed by power, their 
operation shall conform to 2.13. 

2.11.10 Landing-Sill Guards, Landing-Sill 
Illumination, Hinged Landing Sills, and 
Tracks on Landings 

2.11.10.1 Landing-Sill Guards 

2.11.10.1.1 Landing sills shall be guarded on the 
underside with guard plates of smooth metal not less 
than 1.4 mm (0.055 in.) thick, extending the full width of 
the car sill exposed to the landing entrance, and securely 
fastened in place. Landing sill guards are not required 
for 

(a) vertically sliding biparting counterbalanced doors 

(b) vertically sliding counterweighted doors that slide 
down to open 

(c) elevators where the landing sills do not project 
into the hoistway 

2.11.10.1.2 Where a car leveling device is pro- 
vided and the hoistway edge of the sill is either flush 
with or projects into the hoistway, the guard shall have 
a straight vertical face extending below the sill not less 
than the depth of the leveling zone plus 75 mm (3 in.). 
Where the sill projects inward from the hoistway enclo- 
sure, the bottom of the guard shall also be beveled at 
an angle of not less than 60 deg and not more than 75 deg 
from the horizontal, or the guard shall be extended from 
the hoistway edge of the landing sill to the top of door 
hanger pocket of the entrance next below. 

2.11.10.13 Where no car leveling device is pro- 
vided and the sill projects inward from the general line 
of the hoistway, the guard shall be either beveled at an 
angle of not less than 60 deg and not more than 75 deg 
from the horizontal, or have a straight vertical face 



extending from the hoistway edge of the landing sill to 
the top of door hanger pocket of the entrance below. 

2.11.10.2 Illumination at Landing Sills. The building 
corridors shall be so lighted that the illumination at the 
landing sills, when an elevator is in service, shall be not 
less than 100 lx (10 fc). 

2.11.10.3 Hinged Hoistway Landing Sills. Hinged 
hoistway landing sills provided in connection with verti- 
cally sliding, biparting, counterbalanced doors of freight 
elevators shall be hinged on the landing side so that 
they can be lowered only when the landing doors are 
in the fully opened position. 

2.11.11 Entrances, Horizontal Slide Type 

2.11.11.1 Landing Sills. Landing sills shall 

(a) be of metal and of sufficient strength to support 
the loads to be carried by the sills when loading and 
unloading the car, and be secured in place 

(b) be substantially flush with the floor surface of the 
elevator landings 

(c) be so designed and maintained as to provide a 
secure foothold over the entire width of the door opening 

2.11.11.2 Hangers, Tracks, and Track Supports. 

Hangers, tracks, and their supports and fastenings for 
doors shall be constructed to withstand, without dam- 
age or appreciable deflection, an imposed static load 
equal to four times the weight of each panel as applied 
successively downward and upward at the vertical cen- 
terline of the panel. (See 2.11.11.5.7 and 2.11.11.5.8.) 

2.11.113 Entrance Frames 

2.11.11.3.1 Where used, entrance frames shall be 
anchored to the sills and to the building structure or the 
track supports. The head of the entrance frame shall not 
be used to support the weight of the wall over the frame. 

2.11.113.2 Where decorative material is applied 
to listed /certified frames, it shall conform to the require- 
ments of the certifying organization. 

2.11.11.4 Hangers. Hangers shall conform to 
2.11.11.4.1 and 2.11.11.4.2. 

2.11.11.4.1 Means shall be provided to prevent 
the hangers from jumping the track. 

2.11.11.4.2 Stops shall be provided in the entrance 
assembly to prevent hangers from overrunning the end 
of the track. 

2.11.11.5 Panels. Panels shall conform to 2.11.11.5.1 
through 2.11.11.5.8. 

2.11.11.5.1 The panels shall overlap the top and 

sides of the opening, and each other, in the case of 

multispeed entrances, by not less than 13 mm (0.5 in.). 

Where entrances without frames are used, the overlap 

shall extend the thickness of the facing used to finish 



32 



2.11.11.5.1-2.11.11.10 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



the opening plus 13 mm (0.5 in.) or more. 

2.11.11.5.2 The clearance shall not exceed 10 mm 
(0.375 in.) between 

(a) the panel and the frame 

(b) the panel and the wall, where entrances without 
frames are used in masonry or concrete 

(c) related panels of multispeed entrances 

(d) the panel and the sill measured vertically 

2.11.11.5.3 The leading panel edge of side-open- 
ing entrances shall not close into pockets in the strike 
jamb and shall be smooth and free of sharp projections. 

2.11.11.5.4 The meeting panel edges of center- 
opening entrances shall be smooth and free of sharp 
projection. 

The meeting panel edges of center-opening entrances 
shall be protected with not less than one resilient male 
member extending the full height of the panel. The resil- 
ient members shall be permitted to interlock by not more 
than 10 mm (0.375 in.). 

When in the closed position, the distance between the 
metal parts of the meeting panels shall not exceed 13 mm 
(0.5 in.). 

2.11.11.5.5 No areas shall be depressed or raised 
more than 3 mm (0.125 in.) from the adjacent area and 
edges shall be beveled at not more than 30 deg to the 
panel surface. 

2.11.11.5.6 Where decorative material is applied 
to listed /certified panels, it shall conform to the require- 
ments of the certifying organization. 

2.11.11.5.7 The entrance assembly shall be capa- 
ble of withstanding a force of 2 500 N (560 lbf ) applied 
on the landing side at right angles to and approximately 
at the center of a panel. This force shall be distributed 
over an area of approximately 100 mm x 100 mm (4 in. 
x 4 in.). There shall be no appreciable permanent dis- 
placement or deformation of any parts of the entrance 
assembly resulting from this test. 

2.11.11.5.8 Means shall be provided to prevent 
opening of locked doors more than 20 mm (0.8 in.) per 
panel at the farthest point from the interlock when a 
force of 135 N (30 lbf) is applied in the opening direction 
at the leading edge of the door at the farthest point from 
the interlock. 

2.11.11.6 Bottom Guides. Bottom guides shall con- 
form to the following: 

(a) The bottom of each panel shall be guided by one 
or more members. 

(b) Guide members shall be securely fastened. 

(c) The guide members and any reinforcements or 
guards shall engage the corresponding member by not 
less than 6 mm (0.25 in.). (See 2.11.11.5.7.) 



2.11.11.7 Multipanel Entrances. Panels of multipanel 
doors shall conform to either 2.11.11.7.1 or 2.11.11.7.2. 
Multiple-speed and center-opening multiple-speed 
doors shall also conform to 2.11.11.7.3. 

2.11.11.7.1 Panels shall be interconnected directly 
or through their hangers so as to assure simultaneous 
movement of all panels. The factor of safety of the inter- 
connecting means shall not be less than 10 for cast iron 
or 5 for other materials. 

2.11.11.7.2 Panels shall be equipped with 
hoistway door interlocks on each driven panel and pro- 
vided with a door closer(s) installed to comply with 
2.11.3.1. All panels shall move simultaneously when the 
car is at the landing. 

2.11.11.73 Multiple speed and center-opening 
multiple-speed panels shall be provided with secondary 
mechanical interconnecting means to ensure that indi- 
vidual panels of multiple panel doors moving in the 
same direction cannot become separated from the panel 
that is locked by the interlock in the event that the normal 
interconnecting means fails. 

2.11.11.7.4 Where cable and pulleys are used to 
connect panels of multisection sliding doors, each pulley 
shall be equipped with a guard to prevent the cable 
from leaving the pulley. 

2.11.11.8 Hoistway Door Safety Retainers. The top 
and bottom of horizontally sliding doors shall be pro- 
vided with a means of retaining the closed door panel 
in position if the primary guiding means fail, and pre- 
venting displacement of the door panel top and bottom 
by more than 20 mm (0.8 in.) when the door panel is 
subjected to a force of 5 000 N (1,125 lbf) in the direction 
of the hoistway applied at right angles to the panel over 
an area of 300 mm x 300 mm (12 in. x 12 in.) at the 
approximate center of the panel. 

The retaining means shall also withstand, without 
detachment or permanent deformation, a force of 
1 000 N (225 lbf) applied upward at any point along 
the width of the door panel and, while this force is 
maintained, an additional force of 1 100 N (250 lbf) 
applied at right angles to the door at the center of the 
panel. This force shall be distributed over an area of 
300 mm x 300 mm (12 in. x 12 in.). 

The retaining means shall not be subjected to wear 
or stress during normal door operation or maintenance. 

2.11.11.9 Beams, Walls, Floors, and Supports. The 

building structural supports of the entrance, such as 
building beams, walls, and floors, shall be designed to 
withstand the horizontal forces stipulated in 2.11.11.8. 

2.11.11.10 Hoistway Door to Sill Clearance. The hori- 
zontal distance from the hoistway side of the leading 
edge of the hoistway door, or sight guard, if provided, 
to the edge of the landing sill, shall not exceed 13 mm 



33 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



2.11.11.10-2.11.12.5.2 



(0.5 in.). The vertical clearance between the sight guard, 
if provided, and the landing sill shall not exceed 13 mm 
(0.5 in.). 

2.11.12 Entrances, Vertical Slide Type 
2.11.12.1 Landing Sills 

2.11.12.1.1 Landing sills shall be of metal and of 
sufficient strength to support the loads to be carried by 
the sills when loading and unloading the car, and be 
secured in place (see 2.16.2.2 for classes of loading); the 
load on the sill during loading and unloading shall be 
considered to be the same as that on the platform mem- 
bers specified in 8.2.2.6. 

2.11.12.1.2 Landing sills shall be secured to the 
building structure in substantially the same plane as the 
elevator landing floor. 

(05a) 2.11.12.2 Entrance Frames. Where used, frames shall 
conform to 2.11.12.2.1 through 2.11.12.2.4. 

2.11.12.2.1 Entrance frames shall be anchored to 
the sills and to the building structure or track supports. 

2.11.12.2.2 The weight of the wall above the frame 
shall be supported by either of the following: 

(a) lintel 

(b) the head of the frames when designed to support 
the load 

2.11.12.2.3 In gypsum board (dry wall) construc- 
tion, the frame side jambs shall be extended and securely 
fastened to the building structure above the frame. 

2.11.12.2.4 Where decorative material is applied 
to listed /certified frames, it shall conform to the require- 
ments of the certifying organization. 

2.11.12.3 Rails. The panel guide rails shall be 
securely fastened to the building structure and the 
entrance frame, at intervals, throughout their entire 
length. 

Rails and their supports shall withstand the forces 
specified in 2.11.12.4.6. Where truckable sills are pro- 
vided as specified in 2.11.12.4.2, the rails shall withstand 
any reactions that could be transmitted to the rails as a 
result of loading and unloading operations. 

2.11.12.4 Panels. Panels shall conform to 2.11.12.4.1 
through 2.11.12.4.8. 

2.11.12.4.1 The panels shall be constructed of non- 
combustible material, or of a structural core made of 
combustible material if covered with not less than 
0.45 mm (0.0175 in.) sheet metal. 

2.11.12.4.2 The lower panel of biparting entrances 
and the top of the panel of vertical slide entrances that 
slide down to open shall be provided with a truckable sill 
designed for the loads specified in 2.11.12.1.1. Provisions 
shall be made to transmit the panel sill load to the build- 
ing structure. 



2.11.12.4.3 Panels of biparting counterbalanced 
entrances shall conform to the following: 

(a) They shall be provided with means to stop the 
closing panels when the distance between the closing 
rigid members of the panel is not less than 20 mm (0.8 in.) 
and not more than 50 mm (2 in.). 

(b) A fire-resistive, nonshearing, and noncrushing 
member of either the meeting or overlapping type shall 
be provided on the upper panel to close the distance 
between the rigid door sections when in contact with the 
stops. This member shall allow a minimum compressible 
clearance of 20 mm (0.8 in.). 

(c) Rigid members that overlap the meeting edge, and 
center-latching devices, are prohibited. 

2.11.12.4.4 The panels, with their attachments for 
doors that slide up to open, shall overlap the sides and 
top of the entrance opening by at least 50 mm (2 in.) 
when in the closed position. Other vertically sliding 
panels and their attachments shall overlap their entrance 
openings and sills by at least 50 mm (2 in.) when in the 
closed position. The overlap shall extend at least 50 mm 
(2 in.) beyond the thickness of any facing used to finish 
the opening. 

2.1 1.12.4.5 The clearance between a panel and the 
frame lintel, between a panel and the sill, and between 
related panels of multispeed entrances, shall not exceed 
25 mm (1 in.). 

2.11.12.4.6 Panels, rails, and door guides shall 
conform to the strength requirements of 2.11.11.5.7. 
Hangers, guides, and guide shoes shall not be perma- 
nently displaced or deformed by more than 20 mm 
(0.8 in.) when their panel is subjected to a force of 5 000 N 
(1,125 Ibf) in the direction of the hoist way applied at 
right angles to the panel over an area of 300 mm x 
300 mm (12 in. x 12 in.) at the approximate center of 
the panel. 

2.11.12.4.7 Means shall be provided to close the 
opening between the upper panel of pass-type entrances 
and the entrance frame lintel. The sum of the clearance 
between the panel, the device used to close the opening, 
and the entrance lintel shall not exceed 25 mm (1 in.). 

2.11.12.4.8 Means shall be provided to prevent 
the opening of locked doors more than 25 mm (1 in.) 
per panel at the farthest point from the interlock when 
a force of 135 N (30 lbf) is applied in the opening direc- 
tion at the leading edge of the door at the farthest point 
from the interlock. 

2.11.12.5 Guides. Panel guides shall conform to 
2.11.12.5.1 through 2.11.12.5.3. 

2.11.12.5.1 Each panel shall be equipped with not 
less than four guide members or with continuous guides. 

2.11.12.5.2 Guide members shall be securely fas- 
tened to the panels. 



34 



2.11.12.5.3-2.11.14.1 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



2.11.12.5.3 Guide members shall be designed to 
withstand the forces specified in 2.11.12.4.6. 

2.11.12.6 Counterweighing or Counterbalancing. 

Single or multisection vertically sliding panels shall be 
so counterweighted, and vertically sliding biparting 
panels shall be so counterbalanced, that they will not 
open or close by gravity. 

Fastenings shall be provided to prevent the fall of a 
counterweight and the detachment or dislodgment of 
counterweight parts or of balancing weights. Suspension 
means and their connections, for vertically sliding 
biparting counterbalanced doors and for the counter- 
weights of vertically sliding counterweighted doors, 
shall have a factor of safety of not less than 5. 

2.11.12.7 Sill Guards. Where the panel sill or other 
structural member projects more than 13 mm (0.5 in.) 
into the hoistway or beyond the panel surface below it, 
the projection shall be provided with a metal guard not 
less than 1.4 mm (0.055 in.) thick and beveled at an angle 
of not less than 50 deg and not more than 75 deg from 
the horizontal. 

2.11.12.8 Pull Straps. Manually operated vertically 
sliding biparting entrances shall be provided with pull 
straps on the inside and outside of the door. 

The length of the pull straps shall conform to 
2.11.12.8.1 and 2.11.12.8.2. 

2.11.12.8.1 The bottom of the strap shall be not 
more than 2 000 mm (79 in.) above the landing when 
the panel is in the fully opened position. 

2.11.12.8.2 The length of the strap shall not be 
extended by means of ropes or other materials. 

2.11.13 Entrances, Swinging Type 

2.11.13.1 Landing Sills. Landing sills shall 

(a) be of metal and of sufficient strength to support 
the loads to be carried by the sills when loading and 
unloading the car, and be secured in place 

(b) be substantially flush with the floor surface of the 
elevator landings 

(c) be so designed and maintained as to provide a 
secure foothold over the entire width of the door opening 

2.11.13.2 Entrance Frames. Frames shall conform to 
2.11.13.2.1 and 2.11.13.2.2. 

2.11.13.2.1 They shall be designed to support in 
place the panels with their hinges or pivots, closer if 
attached to the frame and interlock. They shall with- 
stand the forces referred to in 2.11.13.3.5, and the forces 
resulting from the normal opening of the door or normal 
attempts to open it when locked in the closed position. 

2.11.13.2.2 Where decorative material is applied 
to listed /certified panels, it shall conform to the require- 
ments of the certifying organization. 

2.11.13.3 Panels. Panels shall conform to 2.11.13.3.1 
through 2.11.13.3.7. 



2.11.13.3.1 The panels shall overlap the part of 
the frame against which they close by not less than 
13 mm (0.5 in.). 

2.1 1.13.3.2 The clearance between a panel and its 
sill shall not exceed 10 mm (0.375 in.). 

2.11.13.3.3 Handles or knobs on the hoistway side (05a) 
of door panels are not permitted. Unlatching devices 

that do not project beyond the face of the door panel 
on the hoistway side shall be permitted. 

2.11.13.3.4 Where decorative material is applied 
to listed /certified panels, it shall conform to the require- 
ments of the certifying organization. 

2.11.13.3.5 Panels and their assembled accesso- 
ries shall 

(a) be capable of withstanding a force on the handle 
of not less than 450 N (100 lbf ) in the opening direction 
of a closed and locked door. There shall be no permanent 
displacement or deformation of the handle or the door 
panel resulting from this force. 

(b) conform to 2.11.11.5.7. 

(c) not be permanently displaced or deformed by 
more than 20 mm (0.75 in.) when the panel is subjected 
to a force of 5 000 N (1,125 lbf) in the direction of the 
hoistway, applied at right angles to the panel over an 
area of 300 mm x 300 mm (12 in. x 12 in.) at the approxi- 
mate center of the panel. 

2.11.13.3.6 Center-opening horizontally swinging 
doors shall have one door section provided with an 
overlapping astragal on its vertical edge, except where 
each door section is provided with a landing door inter- 
lock [see 2.12.2.4.4(c)]. 

2.1 1 .13.3.7 Center-opening horizontally swinging 
doors shall have door stops provided at the top entrances 
that will stop each door panel when closed and that will 
meet the requirements specified in 2.11.13.3.5. 

2.11.13.4 Hinges. Hinges of the mortise and surface (04) 
type shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 80, Table 
2-4.3.1. 

2.11.13.5 Entrances With Combination Horizontally 
Sliding and Swinging Panels. Where both the sliding 
and swinging panels are not equipped with hoistway 
door interlocks or locks and contacts conforming to 2.12, 
the horizontally sliding and swinging panels forming a 
part of the entrance shall be so interconnected that 

(a) the swinging panel can be opened only when the 
sliding panel is in the open position 

(b) both panels swing as a unit 

2.11.14 Fire Tests 

2.11.14.1 In jurisdictions enforcing the NBCC 

(a) the fire protection rating of entrances and doors 
shall be determined in accordance with the requirements 
specified in the NBCC (CAN4-S104) 

(b) where required, the hoistway door interlock mech- 
anism and associated wiring shall remain operational 



35 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



2.11.14.1-2.11.17 



for a period of 1 h when subjected to the standard fire 
exposure test described in CAN4-S104 

NOTE (2.11.14.1): Requirements 2.11.14.2 through 2.11.18 do not 
apply in jurisdictions enforcing the NBCC. 

(04) 2.11.14.2 In jurisdictions not enforcing the NBCC, 
2.11.15 through 2.11.18, and 2.11.14.2.1 through 
2.11.14.2.3 apply where fire-resistive construction is 
required by 2.1.1.1.3. 

2.11.14.2.1 Entrances shall be subjected to the 
type tests specified in 8.3.4. 

2.11.14.2.2 The following basic types of entrances 
shall be tested: 

(a) Horizontally Sliding Type. Test a side-sliding and a 
center-opening assembly. 

(b) Swinging Type. Test a single swinging assembly. 

(c) Vertically Sliding Type. Test a biparting assembly. 

2.11.14.2.3 When an entrance assembly has been 
tested for one type of wall construction, i.e., masonry 
or drywall, only the frame-to-wall interface shall be 
acceptable to the certifying organization for other types 
of construction. 

2.11.15 Marking 

(04) 2.11.15.1 Labeling of Tested Assembly. In jurisdic- 
tions not enforcing the NBCC, 2.11.15.1.1 and 2.11.15.1.2 
apply where fire-resistive construction is required by 
2.1.1.1.3. 

2.11.15.1.1 Each entrance shall be labeled. Each 
label shall be permanently attached to the equipment 
and shall be readily visible after installation. The follow- 
ing data shall be on the label: 

(a) certifying organization's name or identifying 
symbol 

(b) the name, trademark, or file number by which 
the organization that manufactured the product can be 
identified 

(c) statement of compliance with 8.3.4 

2.11.15.1.2 Labels shall be provided for each 
entrance as follows: 

(a) One label shall be provided for the door panels. 

(b) One label shall be provided for the frame, except 
that no label is required where frames are installed in 
masonry or concrete and the panel overlaps the wall in 
conformance with 2.11.11.5.1 and 2.11.11.5.2, or 
2.11.12.4.4. 

(c) One label shall be provided for the transom panel. 
One label shall be permitted to be provided for the 
frame and transom, provided that the label states that 
it includes both the frame and the transom. 

(d) Where entrance hardware components have not all 
been tested in complete assembly, individually labeled 
hardware components that are designed to be compati- 
ble with the entrance assembly shall be provided. A 



single label shall be permitted to be provided for the 
entrance hardware where the entrance hardware compo- 
nents are equivalent to those tested in a complete 
assembly. 

(e) A single label shall be permitted to be provided 
for the entire entrance assembly where components are 
equivalent to those tested as a complete assembly. 

2.11.15.2 Other Assemblies. In jurisdictions not 
enforcing the NBCC, the following shall apply. Other 
assemblies of the three basic types (see 2.11.14) shall 
qualify for labeling or listing/certification: 

(a) when composed of panel(s), frame, and hardware 
of the same type as tested and not exceeding the overall 
height and width of any panel and frame of the largest 
size tested; or 

(b) when such panel(s), frame, and hardware are mod- 
ified, and test or technical data demonstrates that the 
modifications will meet the performance requirements 
of the test procedure in 8.3.3. 

All other elements of the assembly shall conform to 
all other applicable requirements of this Code. 

2.11.15.3 Entrances Larger Than Tested Assemblies. 

In jurisdictions not enforcing the NBCC, the following 
shall apply. When the entrance is too large for the regu- 
larly available test facilities, the certifying organization 
shall be permitted to issue oversize certificates or over- 
size labels, or such entrances shall be permitted to be 
used subject to approval by the authority having juris- 
diction. 

2.11.16 Factory Inspections 

In jurisdictions not enforcing the NBCC, the following 
shall apply. The manufacturing facilities for the produc- 
tion of entrances or components thereof shall be 
inspected by the certifying organization at random at 
least quarterly, or if they are not manufactured on a 
continuous basis, at the time they are being produced, 
to assure that production methods are such that 
entrances or components thereof similar to those tested 
are being produced. 

2.11.17 Transoms and Fixed Side Panels 

In jurisdictions not enforcing the NBCC, the following 
shall apply. Transoms and fixed side panels shall be 
permitted to close openings above and beside the hori- 
zontally sliding or horizontally swinging type entrances, 
provided that 

(a) the opening closed by the transom and fixed side 
panel does not exceed in width or height the dimensions 
of the entrance in which it is installed 

(b) the transom panels and fixed side panels are 

(1) constructed in a manner equivalent to the con- 
struction of the entrance panels 

(2) secured 



36 



2.11.18-2.12.2.4.1 



ASMEA17.1a-2005 



2.11.18 Installation Instructions 

In jurisdictions not enforcing the NBCC, the following 
shall apply: 

(a) Instructions detailing the application and installa- 
tion of door listed/certified panels and entrance hard- 
ware shall be provided. 

(b) Where frames are used, instructions detailing the 
listed/certified frame-to-wall interface shall be pro- 
vided. 

2.11.19 Gasketing of Hoistway Entrances 

Where gasketing material is applied to fire-resistive 
entrances, it shall conform to 2.11.19.1 through 2.11.19.4. 

2.11.19.1 The gasketing material shall be subjected 
to the tests specified in UL 10B, NFPA 252, or CAN4- 
S104, whichever is applicable (see Part 9). 

2.11.19.2 The gasketing material shall withstand the 
maximum elevated temperature tests as defined by UL 
1784 standard without deterioration. 

2.1 1.193 Each section of the gasketing material shall 
be labeled. Each label shall bear the name of the manu- 
facturer and a statement indicating conformance with 
2.11.19.1 and 2.11.19.2. The label shall be visible after 
installation 

2.11.19.4 Labeled gasketing material shall conform 
to 2.11.16 or the NBCC, whichever is applicable. 

NOTES (2.11.19): 

(1) See also 2.1.1.5, 2.11.3, and 2.13.4 for additional requirements to 
be considered when gasketing material is applied to a hoistway 
entrance. 

(2) These requirements do not evaluate the air and /or smoke leak- 
age performance of the gasketing material. 



SECTION 2.12 

HOISTWAY DOOR LOCKING DEVICES AND ELECTRIC 

CONTACTS, AND HOISTWAY ACCESS SWITCHES 

2.12.1 General 

2.12.1.1 When the car is stopped within the 
unlocking zone, the hoistway doors shall be unlocked, 
or locked but openable from the landing side either 
manually or by power. 

2.12.1.2 When the car is outside the unlocking zone, 
the hoistway doors shall be openable from the landing 
side only by a hoistway door unlocking device (see 
2.12.6, 2.12.7, and Nonmandatory Appendix B). 

2.12.13 For security purposes, hoistway doors shall 
be permitted to be locked out of service, subject to the 
requirements of 2.11.6. 

2.12.1.4 Passenger elevator hoistway doors shall be 
equipped with interlocks conforming to 2.12.2. 



2.12.1.5 Freight elevator hoistway doors shall be 
equipped with interlocks conforming to 2.12.2 or combi- 
nation mechanical locks and electric contacts conform- 
ing to, and where permitted by, 2.12.3. 

2.12.2 Interlocks 

2.12.2.1 General. Each entrance at a landing to an 
elevator used for passengers or freight and not conform- 
ing to 2.12.3.1 shall be equipped with one or more inter- 
locks meeting the design requirements of 2.12.2.4. 

2.12.2.2 Closed Position of Hoistway Doors. 

Hoistway doors shall be considered to be in the closed 
position under the following conditions. These dimen- 
sions apply to the doors in their normal operating condi- 
tion (see 2.14.4.11): 

(a) for horizontally sliding or swinging doors, when 
the leading edge of the door is within 10 mm (0.375 in.) 
of the nearest face of the jamb or when the panels of 
center-opening doors are within 10 mm (0.375 in.) of 
contact with each other 

(b) for vertically sliding counterweighted doors, 
when the leading edge of the door is within 10 mm 
(0.375 in.) of the sill for doors which slide up to open, 
or 10 mm (0.375 in.) of the lintel for doors that slide 
down to open 

(c) for vertically sliding biparting counterbalanced 
doors, when the astragal on the upper panel is within 
19 mm (0.75 in.) of the lower panel 

2.12.23 Operation of the Driving Machine With a 
Hoistway Door Unlocked or Not in the Closed Position. 

Operation of the driving machine when a hoistway door 
is unlocked or not in the closed position (see 2.12.2.2) 
shall be permitted under one of the following conditions: 

(a) by a car leveling or truck zoning device (see 
2.26.1.6) 

(b) when a hoistway access switch is operated (see 
2.12.7) 

(c) when a bypass switch is activated (see 2.26.1.5) 

2.12.2.4 General Design Requirements. Interlocks 
shall conform to 2.12.2.4.1 through 2.12.2.4.7. 

2.12.2.4.1 Interlock contacts shall be positively (ED) 
opened by the locking member or by a member con- 
nected to and mechanically operated by the locking 
member, and the contacts shall be maintained in the 
open position by the action of gravity, or by a restrained 
compression spring, or by both, or by means of the 
opening member (see 2.26.2.14). Contacts shall be open 
when the hoistway door interlock is unlocked. If the 
contacts are maintained in the open position by other 
than the locking member, the interlock shall be located 
such that the contacts cannot be closed by hand from 
the car or landing when the doors are open. 

The electrical contact bridging means shall withstand 
a separating force of 200 N (45 lbf ) in any direction from 
the locking member. 



37 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



2.12.2.4.2-2.12.3.2 



2.12.2.4.2 The locking member of the interlock 
shall hold the door in the locked position by means of 
gravity, or by a restrained compression spring, or by 
both, or by means of a positive linkage. 

2.12.2.4.3 The interlock shall lock the door in the 
closed position with a minimum engagement of 7 mm 
(0.28 in.) of the locking members before the interlock 
contacts are closed and before the driving machine can 
be operated, except as permitted in 2.12.2.3. 

Devices that permit operation of the driving machine 
by the normal operating device when the door is closed 
but before it is locked are not interlocks and are not 
permitted where interlocks are required by this Code. 

2.12.2.4.4 Interlocks, used with multisection 
doors, shall conform to the following requirements: 

(a) They shall lock all sections of the door, but shall 
be permitted to be applied to only one section of the 
door, provided the device used to interconnect the door 
sections is so arranged that locking one section will 
prevent the opening of all sections. 

(b) Where used with vertically sliding biparting coun- 
terbalanced doors, they shall be so arranged that the 
interlock contacts are mechanically held in the open 
position by the door or devices attached thereto, unless 
the door is in the closed position. 

(c) Where used with center-opening horizontally 
swinging doors, either 

(1) both door panels shall be equipped with inter- 
locks; or 

(2) where the door panels are so arranged that one 
panel can be opened only after the other panel has been 
opened, the interlock is not required on the section that 
opens last, if that door panel is provided with a door 
electric contact conforming to 2.14.4.2.3, 2.14.4.2.5, and 
2.26.2.15, except that terms "door or gate" and "car door 
or gate" shall be replaced with the "hoistway door" or 
"hoistway door section" and the term "accessible from 
inside the car panel" with the term "accessible from the 
landing side when the hoistway doors are closed." 

(d) Where used with combination horizontally sliding 
and swinging doors, either 

(1) the sliding and swinging panels shall both be 
equipped with interlocks; or 

(2) where the sliding and swinging panels are inter- 
connected in conformity with the requirements of 
2.11.13.5, the interlock is not required on the swinging 
panel, provided that the interlock on the sliding panel is 
so designed and installed that the car cannot be operated 
unless the sliding and swinging panels are both locked 
in the closed position, as defined in 2.12.2.2. 

(e) Where a door closer, used with a combination slid- 
ing and swinging door, is arranged to be disconnected 
to allow the sliding panel to swing, it shall be so designed 
and installed that it shall not make the interlock contact 
when disconnected and released. 



2.12.2.4.5 Interlock systems employing a single 
master switch for more than one door are prohibited. 

2.12.2.4.6 The locking member shall not disen- 
gage when the door is subjected to a repetitive force of 
450 N (100 lbf ) in the direction of opening and at a right 
angle. 

2.12.2.4.7 Mercury tube switches shall not be 
used. 

2.12.2.5 Interlock Retiring Cam Device. Retiring cams 
used to actuate an interlock shall exert a force at least 
double the average force required to operate the inter- 
lock and shall have a movement at least 13 mm (0.5 in.) 
more than the average movement required to operate 
the interlock. 

An interlock retiring cam device shall be permanently 
marked by the manufacturer with its rated horizontal 
force and rated horizontal movement. 

The rated horizontal force shall be the static force 
exerted by a retiring cam device in the horizontal direc- 
tion when extended a distance equal to 75% of its rated 
horizontal movement. The rated horizontal movement 
shall be the horizontal distance traveled by the retiring 
cam device from the fully retired position to the fully 
extended position. 

2.12.2.6 Location. Interlocks shall be so located that 
they are not accessible from the landing side when the 
hoistway doors are closed. 

2.12.3 Hoistway Door Combination Mechanical Locks 
and Electric Contacts 

2.12.3.1 Where Permitted. Hoistway door combina- 
tion mechanical locks and electric contacts shall be per- 
mitted only on freight elevators equipped with manually 
operated vertically sliding doors and only at the follow- 
ing landings: 

(a) the top terminal landing and the landing whose (ED) 
sill is located not more than 1 225 mm (48 in.) below 

the top terminal landing sill, provided that the elevator 
travel does not exceed 4 570 mm (15 ft) 

(b) any landing whose sill is within 1 525 mm (60 in.) 
of the pit floor, regardless of the elevator travel 

2.12.3.2 Closed Position of Hoistway Doors. 

Hoistway doors shall be considered to be in the closed 
position under the following conditions. These dimen- 
sions apply to the doors in their normal operating condi- 
tion (see also 2.14.4.11): 

(a) for vertically sliding counterweighted doors, 
when the leading edge of the door is within 10 mm 
(0.375 in.) of the sill for doors that slide up to open, or 
10 mm (0.375 in.) of the lintel for doors that slide down 
to open 

(b) for vertically sliding biparting counterbalanced 
doors, when the astragal on the upper panel is within 
19 mm (0.75 in.) of the lower panel 



38 



2.12.3.3-2.12.5 



ASME A17.1a-20Q5 



2.1233 Operation of the Driving Machine With a 
Hoistway Door Not in the Closed Position. Operation of 
the driving machine when a hoistway door is not in 
the closed position shall be permitted under one of the 
following conditions: 

(a) by a car leveling or truck zoning device (see 
2.12.2.2 and 2.26.1.6) 

(b) when a hoistway access switch is operated (see 
2.12.7) 

(c) when bypass switch is activated (see 2.26.1.5) 

2.12.3.4 General Design Requirements. Combination 
mechanical locks and electric contacts shall conform to 
2.12.3.4.1 through 2.12.3.4.6. 

2.123.4.1 They shall be so designed that the lock- 
ing member and the electric contact are mounted on 
and attached to a common base, in such a manner that 
there is a fixed relation between the location of the con- 
tact and the location of the locking member. 

They shall be so installed and adjusted that the electric 
contact cannot close until the door is in the closed posi- 
tion as specified in 2.12.3.2, and so that the locking mem- 
ber is in a position to lock the door when or before the 
contact closes. In order to prevent motion of the door 
from opening the electric contact while the door is locked 
in the closed position, multiple-locking points shall, 
where necessary, be provided on the locking mechanism. 

2.123.4.2 The electric contact shall be positively 
opened by the locking bar of the mechanical lock or by 
a lever or other device attached to and operated by the 
door, and the electric contact shall be maintained in the 
open position by the action of gravity or by a restrained 
compression spring, or by both, or by positive mechani- 
cal means. (See 2.26.2.14.) 

2.123.43 The mechanical lock shall hold the door 
in the locked position by means of gravity or by a 
restrained compression spring, or by both. 

2.12.3.4.4 Combination mechanical locks and 
electric contacts used with vertical-slide multiple-panel 
doors shall conform to the following requirements: 

(a) They shall lock all panels of the door, but shall be 
permitted to be applied to only one section of the door, 
provided the device used to interconnect the door sec- 
tions is so arranged that locking one panel will prevent 
the opening of all panels. 

(b) Where used with vertically sliding biparting coun- 
terbalanced doors, the electric contact shall be so 
arranged that it is mechanically held in the open position 
by the door or a device attached thereto, unless the door 
is in the closed position. 

2.123.4.5 The locking member shall not disen- 
gage when the door is subjected to a repetitive force of 
450 N (100 lbf ) in the direction of opening and at a right 
angle. 



2.123.4.6 Mercury tube switches shall not be 
used. 

2.123.5 Location. Combination mechanical locks 
and electric contacts shall be so located that they are 
not accessible from the landing side when the hoistway 
doors are closed. 

2.12.4 Listing/Certification Door Locking Devices and 

Door or Gate Electric Contacts 

2.12.4.1 Type Tests. Each type and make of hoistway 
door interlock, hoistway door combination mechanical 
lock and electric contact, and door or gate electric con- 
tact, shall conform to the type tests specified in 8.3.3, 
unless tested prior to 

(a) August 1, 1996, and shall have been subjected to 
the tests specified in A17.1a-1994, Section 1101; or 

(b) March 23, 2002 in jurisdictions enforcing CSA B44 (05a) 
and shall have been subjected to the tests specified in 
CSA B44S1-97, Clause 11.5. 

The tests shall be done by or under the supervision 
of a certifying organization. 

2.12.4.2 Listing/Certification. Each type and make of 
hoistway door interlock, hoistway door combination 
mechanical lock and electric contact, and door or gate 
electric contact shall conform to the general require- 
ments for tests and certification specified in 8.3.1. 

2.12.43 Identification Marking. Each listed /certified 
device shall be labeled. It shall be permanently attached 
to the device, and shall be so located as to be readily 
visible when the device is installed in its operating 
position. 

The labels shall include the following data: 

(a) the name, trademark, or certifying organization 
file number by which the organization that manufac- 
tured the product can be identified 

(b) the certifying organization name or identifying 
symbol 

(c) statement of compliance with ASME A17.1 or 
CSA B44 

(d) a distinctive type, model, or style letter or number 

(e) rated voltage and current, and whether AC or DC 

(f) rated test force and rated test movement when the 
device is of a type released by an interlock retiring cam 
(see 8.3.3.4.7) 

(g) date (month and year) devices subjected to type 
test specified in 2.12.4.1 

(h) if the device has only been type tested and listed/ 
certified for use on a private residence elevator, the label 
shall indicate the restricted use 

2.12.5 Restricted Opening of Hoistway or Car Doors 

Hoistway and car doors of passenger elevators shall 
conform to 2.12.5.1 through 2.12.5.3. 



39 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



2.12.5.1-2.12.7.3.6 



2.12.5.1 When a car is outside the unlocking zone, 
the hoistway doors or car doors shall be so arranged 
that the hoistway doors or car doors cannot be opened 
more than 100 mm (4 in.) from inside the car. 

2.12.5.2 When the car doors are so arranged that 
they cannot be opened when the car is outside the 
unlocking zone, the car doors shall be openable from 
outside the car without the use of a special tool(s). 

2.12.5.3 The doors shall be openable from within 
the car (see 2.14.5.7) when the car is within the 
unlocking zone. 

NOTE (2.12.5): See also 2.12.1 and Nonmandatory Appendix B, 
Unlocking Zone. 

2.12.6 Hoistway Door Unlocking Devices 

2.12.6.1 General. Except in jurisdictions that limit the 
use of hoistway door unlocking devices, they shall be 
provided for use by elevator and emergency personnel 
for each elevator at every landing where there is an 
entrance. 

2.12.6.2 Location and Design. Hoistway door 
unlocking devices shall conform to 2.12.6.2.1 through 
2.12.6.2.5. 

2.12.6.2.1 The device shall unlock and permit the 
opening of a hoistway door from a landing irrespective 
of the position of the car. 

2.12.6.2.2 The device shall be designed to prevent 
unlocking the door with common tools. 

2.12.6.2.3 Where a hoistway unlocking device 
consists of an arrangement whereby a releasing chain, 
permanently attached to a door locking mechanism, is 
kept under a locked panel adjacent to the landing door, 
such a panel shall be self-closing and self-locking and 
shall not have identifying markings on its face. 

2.12.6.2.4 The operating means for unlocking the 
door shall be Group 1 Security (see 8.1). The operating 
means shall also be made available to emergency person- 
nel during an emergency. 

2.12.6.2.5 The unlocking device keyway and 
locked panel (see 2.12.6.2.3), if provided, shall be located 
at a height not greater than 2 100 mm (83 in.) above the 
landing. 

2.12.7 Hoistway Access Switches 

2.12.7.1 General 

2.12.7.1.1 Hoistway access switches shall be pro- 
vided when the rated speed is greater than 0.75 m/s 
(150 ft/min) at 

(a) the lowest landing for access to the pit, when a 
separate pit access door is not provided 

(b) the top landing for access to the top of the car 



2.12.7.1.2 For elevators with a speed of 0.75 m/s 
(150 ft/min) or less, hoistway access switches shall be 
provided at the top landing when the distance from the 
top of the car to the landing sill exceeds 900 mm (35 in.) 
when the car platform is level with the landing immedi- 
ately below the top landing. 

2.12.7.2 Location and Design. Hoistway access 
switches shall conform to 2.12.7.2.1 through 2.12.7.2.3. 

2.12.7.2.1 The switch shall be installed adjacent 
to the hoistway entrance at the landing with which it is 
identified. 

2.12.7.2.2 The switch shall be of the continuous- 
pressure spring-return type, and shall be operated by a 
cylinder-type lock having not less than a five-pin or five- 
disk combination, with the key removable only when 
the switch is in the "OFF" position. The key shall be 
Group 1 Security (see 8.1). 

2.12.7.2.3 The electric contacts in the switch shall 
be positively opened mechanically; their openings shall 
not be solely dependent on springs. 

2.12.7.3 Operating Requirements. The operation of 
the switch shall permit movement of the car with the 
hoistway door at this landing unlocked or not in the 
closed position, and with the car door or gate not in the 
closed position, subject to the requirements of 2.12.7.3.1 
through 2.12.7.3.8. 

2.12.7.3.1 The operation of the switch shall not 
render ineffective the hoistway-door interlock or electric 
contact at any other landing, nor shall the car move if 
any other hoistway door is unlocked. 

2.12.7.3.2 The car cannot be operated at a speed 
greater than 0.75 m/s (150 ft/min). 

2.12.7.3.3 For automatic and continuous-pressure 
operation elevators, provided that 

(a) car and landing operating devices are first made 
inoperative by means within the car. This means shall 
enable the hoistway access switches and shall be key 
operated or behind a locked cover. The key shall be 
Group 1 Security (see 8.1). 

(b) power operation of the hoistway door and /or car 
door or gate is inoperative. 

2.12.7.3.4 Automatic operation by a car-leveling 
device is inoperative. 

2.12.7.3.5 Both top-of-car inspection operation 
(see 2.26.1.4.2) and in-car inspection operation (see 
2.26.1.4.3) are not in effect. 

2.12.7.3.6 The movement of the car initiated and 
maintained by the access switch at the lowest landing, 
if this landing is the normal means of access to the pit, 
shall be limited in the up direction to the point where 



40 



2.13.4.2.2-2.14.1.2.3 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



(c) The average closing speed shall be determined by 
measuring the time required for the leading edge of the 
door to travel the Code zone distance. 

2.13.4.2.3 Door Force. The force necessary to pre- 
vent closing of the hoistway door (or the car door or 
gate if power operated) from rest shall not exceed 135 N 
(30 lbf) (see 2.13.3.1). This force shall be measured on 
the leading edge of the door with the door at any point 
between one third and two thirds of its travel. 

2.13.4.2.4 Data Plate. A data plate conforming to 
2.16.3.3 shall be attached to the power door operator or 
to the car crosshead and shall contain the following 
information: 

(a) minimum door closing time in seconds for the 
doors to travel the Code zone distance as specified in 
2.13.4.2.2 corresponding to the kinetic energy limits 
specified in 2.13.4.2.1(b)(2) 

(b) minimum door closing time in seconds for the 
doors to travel the Code zone distance as specified in 
2.13.4.2.2 corresponding to the kinetic energy limits 
specified in 2.13.4.2.1(c)(2), if applicable [see 
2.27.3.1.6(e)] 

(c) where heavier hoistway doors are used at certain 
floors, the minimum door closing time in seconds corres- 
ponding to the kinetic energy limits specified in 
2.13.4.2.1(b)(2) and 2.13.4.2.1(c)(2), if applicable, for the 
corresponding floors shall be included on the data plate 

2.13.5 Reopening Device for Power-Operated Car 
Doors or Gates 

2.13.5.1 Where required by 2.13.3.4 or 2.13.4, a 
power-operated car door shall be provided with a 
reopening device that will function to stop and reopen 
a car door and the adjacent landing door sufficiently to 
permit passenger transfer in the event that the car door 
or gate is obstructed while closing. If the closing kinetic 
energy is reduced to 3.5 J (2.5 ft-lb) or less, the reopening 
device shall be permitted to be rendered inoperative. 
The reopening device used shall be effective for substan- 
tially the full vertical opening of the door (see 2.13.4.2). 

2.13.5.2 For center-opening doors, the reopening 
device shall be so designed and installed that the 
obstruction of either door panel when closing will cause 
the reopening device to function. 

2.13.5.3 For vertically sliding doors or gates, 
reopening devices shall respond to any obstruction 
within the width of the opening to a point 125 mm (5 in.) 
maximum from each side of the opening. 

2.13.5.4 Where Phase I Emergency Recall Operation 
by a fire alarm initiating device (see 2.27.3.2.3) is not 
provided, door reopening devices that can be affected 
by smoke or flame shall be rendered inoperative after 
the doors have been held open for 20 s. Door closing 
for power-operated doors shall conform to 2.13.5. 



2.13.6 Sequence Operation for Power-Operated 
Hoistway Doors With Car Doors or Gates 

2.13.6.1 Where Required 

2.13.6.1.1 Sequence opening and closing shall be 
provided between hoistway doors and car doors or gates 
on passenger elevators and freight elevators permitted 
to carry passengers (see 2.16.4) when the elevator is 
equipped with power-operated vertically sliding slide- 
up-to-open type car doors or gates and 

(a) power-operated vertically sliding biparting coun- 
terbalanced hoistway doors; or 

(b) power-operated vertically sliding counter- 
weighted hoistway doors that slide down to open. 

2.13.6.1.2 Sequence opening and/or closing shall 
be permitted for vertically sliding power-operated 
hoistway doors and car doors or gates that are closed 
by continuous pressure means. 

2.13.6.2 Operating Requirements. The sequence 
operation of a hoistway door and adjacent power-oper- 
ated vertically sliding car door or gate shall conform to 
2.13.6.2.1 and 2.13.6.2.2. 

2.13.6.2.1 In opening, the hoistway door shall be 
opened at least two-thirds of its travel before the car 
door or gate can start to open. 

2.13.6.2.2 In closing, the car door or gate shall be 
closed at least two-thirds of its travel before the hoistway 
door can start to close. 



SECTION 2.14 

CAR ENCLOSURES, CAR DOORS AND GATES, AND 

CAR ILLUMINATION 

2.14.1 Passenger and Freight Enclosures, General 

2.14.1.1 Enclosure Required. Elevators shall be 
equipped with a car enclosure. 

2.14.1.2 Securing of Enclosures 

2.14.1.2.1 The enclosure shall be securely fastened 
to the car platform and so supported that it cannot loosen 
or become displaced in ordinary service, on the applica- 
tion of the car safety, on buffer engagement, or the appli- 
cation of the emergency brake (see 2.19). 

2.14.1.2.2 The car enclosure shall be so con- 
structed that removable portions cannot be dismantled 
from within the car. 

2.14.1.2.3 Enclosure linings, decorative panels, 
light fixtures, suspended ceilings, and other apparatus 
or equipment attached within the car enclosure shall be 
securely fastened and so supported that they will not 
loosen or become displaced in ordinary service, on car 
safety application, or on buffer engagement. 



43 



ASMEA17.1a-2005 



2.14.1.2.4-2.14.1.5.1 



2.14.1.2.4 Panels attached to the car enclosure for 
decorative or other purposes shall either 

(a) not be unfastened from inside the car by the use 
of common tools; or 

(b) be permitted to be removed from inside the car 
when perforations, exceeding that which would reject 
a ball 13 mm (0.5 in.) in diameter, in the enclosure used 
for panel hanging or support have permanent means to 
prevent straight through passage beyond the running 
clearance. 

2.14.1.3 Strength and Deflection of Enclosure Walls. 

The enclosure walls shall be designed and installed to 
withstand a force of 330 N (75 lbf ) applied horizontally 
at any point on the walls of the enclosure without perma- 
nent deformation and so that the deflection will not 
reduce the running clearance below the minimum speci- 
fied in 2.5.1, nor cause the deflection to exceed 25 mm 
(1 in.). 

2.14.1.4 Number of Compartments in Passenger and 
Freight Elevator Cars. Cars shall not have more than two 
compartments. Where elevators have two compart- 
ments, one shall be located above the other, and the 
elevator shall conform to 2.14.1.4.1 through 2.14.1.4.6. 

2.14.1.4.1 The elevator shall be used exclusively 
for passengers or exclusively for freight at any one time. 
If freight is to be carried in only one compartment, means 
shall be provided to lock the other compartment out of 
service. 

2.14.1.4.2 Each compartment shall conform to the 
requirements of this Section, except that a trap door in 
the floor of the upper compartment shall provide access 
to the top emergency exit for the lower compartment. 

2.14.1 .4.3 Where either or both compartments are 
intended for passenger service, the minimum rated load 
for each compartment shall conform to 2.16.1. 

Where one compartment is intended for freight use, 
its minimum rated load shall conform to 2.16.1 or shall 
be based on the freight loads to be handled, if greater 
than the minimum rated load required by 2.16.1. 

Where both compartments are used exclusively for 
freight, the minimum rated load of each compartment 
shall conform to 2.16.2. 

The rated load of the elevator shall be the sum of the 
rated loads of the individual compartments. 

2.14.1.4.4 An emergency stop switch, where 
required by 2.26.2.5, shall be provided in each compart- 
ment, and these emergency stop switches shall be so 
connected that the car cannot run unless both are in the 
run position. 

2.14.1.4.5 An in-car stop switch, where required 
by 2.26.2.21, shall be provided in each compartment, 
and these switches shall be so connected that the car 
cannot run unless both are in the run position. 



2.14.1.4.6 All hoistway doors shall be closed and 
locked and the car doors for each compartment closed 
before the car can be operated. 

2.14.1.5 Top Emergency Exits. An emergency exit 
with a cover shall be provided in the top of all elevator 
cars, except cars in partially enclosed hoistways (see 
2.14.1.5.2). 

2.14.1.5.1 Top emergency exits shall conform to 
the following requirements: 

(a) The top emergency exit opening shall have an area 
of not less than 0.26 m 2 (400 in. 2 ) and shall measure not 
less than 400 mm (16 in.) on any side. 

(b) The top emergency exit and suspended ceiling 
opening, if any, shall be so located as to provide a clear 
passageway, unobstructed by fixed equipment located 
in or on top of the car. Equipment is permitted directly 
above the exit opening, provided that 

(1) it is not less than 1 070 mm (42 in.) above the 
top of the car; or 

(2) the exit is located to allow unobstructed passage (ED) 
of a parallelpiped volume measuring 300 mm x 500 mm 

by 1 500 mm (12 in. x 20 in. x 59 in.) at an angle not 
less than 60 deg from the horizontal (see Nonmandatory 
Appendix C). 

(c) The top emergency exit cover shall open outward. 
It shall be hinged or securely attached with a chain when 
in both the open and closed positions. If a chain is used, 
it shall be not more than 300 mm (12 in.) in length and 
have a factor of safety of not less than 5. The exit cover 
shall only be openable from the top of the car, where it 
shall be openable without the use of special tools. The 
exit cover of the lower compartment of a multideck 
elevator shall be openable from both compartments. On 
elevators with two compartments, if the emergency exit 
of the lower compartment does not open directly into 
the upper compartment, a guarded passageway shall be 
provided between the lower compartment roof and the 
upper compartment floor. 

(d) The movable portion (exit panel) of the suspended 
ceiling that is below the top exit opening shall be 
restrained from falling. It shall be permitted to be hinged 
upward or downward, provided that the exit permits a 
clear opening with the top exit opening. 

(1) A minimum clear headroom of 2 030 mm (80 in.) 
above the car floor shall be maintained when down- 
ward-swinging suspended ceiling exit panels are used. 

(2) Upward-opening suspended ceiling exit panels 
shall be restrained from closing when in use and shall 
not diminish the clear opening area of the corresponding 
top exit opening. 

(3) The movable portion and the fixed portion of 
a suspended ceiling shall not contain lamps that could 
be shattered by the rescue operation using the top emer- 
gency exit. The movable portion of the suspended ceiling 
shall be permitted to contain light fixtures connected to 



44 



2.14.1.5.1-2.14.1.9.1 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



the stationary portion of the suspended ceiling wiring 
by means of a plug and socket or by flexible armored 
wiring. Flexible wiring shall not be used to support or 
restrain the exit opening in the suspended ceiling in the 
open position. 

(e) Where elevators installed in enclosed hoistways 
are provided with special car top treatments such as 
domed or shrouded canopies, the exit shall be made 
accessible, including the car top refuge space as specified 
in 2.4.12. 

(f) Immediately adjacent to the top emergency exit 
there shall be a space available for standing when the 
emergency exit cover is open. This space shall be permit- 
ted to include a portion of the refuge area (see 2.4.12). 
All exit covers shall be provided with a car top emer- 
gency exit electrical device (see 2.26.2.18) that will pre- 
vent operation of the elevator car if the exit cover is 
open more than 50 mm (2 in.), and the device shall be 
so designed that it 

(1) is positively opened 

(2) cannot be closed accidentally when the cover is 
removed 

(3) must be manually reset from the top of the car 
and only after the cover is within 50 mm (2 in.) of the 
fully closed position 

(4) shall be protected against mechanical damage 

2.14.1.5.2 On elevators in partially enclosed 
hoistways, means shall be provided to facilitate emer- 
gency evacuation of passengers. Such means shall not 
require a top emergency exit. A top emergency exit shall 
be permitted. 

2.14.1.6 Car Enclosure Tops. Tops of car enclosures 
shall be so designed and installed as to be capable of 
sustaining a load of 135 kg (300 lb) on any area 600 mm 
x 600 mm (24 in. x 24 in.), or 45 kg (100 lb) applied to any 
point, without permanent deformation. The resulting 
deflection under these loads shall be limited to prevent 
damage to any equipment, devices, or lighting assem- 
blies fastened to or adjacent to the car enclosure top. 

2.14.1.7 Railing and Equipment on Top of Cars 

(05a) 2.14.1.7.1 A standard railing conforming to 2.10.2 

shall be provided on the outside perimeter of the car 
top on all sides where the perpendicular distance 
between the edges of the car top and the adjacent 
hoistway enclosure exceeds 300 mm (12 in.) horizontal 
clearance. The forces specified in 2.10.2.4 shall not deflect 
the railing beyond the perimeter of the car top. 

The top of car enclosure, or other surface specified 
by the elevator installer, shall be the working surface 
referred to in 2.10.2. 

2.14.1.7.2 A working platform or equipment that 
is not required for the operation of the elevator or its 
appliances, except where specifically provided herein, 
shall not be located above the top of an elevator car. 



2.14.1.73 Devices that detect unauthorized access 
to the top of the car shall be permitted. These devices 
shall only be permitted to initiate an alarm. Audible 
alarms shall not exceed 90 dBA measured 1 m from the 
source. 

2.14.1.8 Glass in Elevator Cars 

2.14.1.8.1 Where enclosures include panels of 
glass, or transparent or translucent plastic, the panels 
shall 

(a) be constructed of laminated glass that complies 
with the requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201, Sections 
1201.1 and 1201.2; or be constructed of laminated glass, 
safety glass, or safety plastic that comply with CAN/ 
CGSB-12.1, CAN/CGSB-12.11, or CAN/CGSB-12.12; 
whichever is applicable (see Part 9) 

(b) be provided with a handrail or framing designed 
to guard the opening should the panel become detached, 
where wall panels are wider than 300 mm (12 in.) 

(c) be mounted in the structure so that the assembly 
shall withstand the required elevator tests without dam- 
age (see 2.14.1.2) 

2.14.1.8.2 Glass used for lining walls or ceilings 
shall conform to 2.14.1.8.1(a) and (c), except that tem- 
pered glass shall be permitted, provided that 

(a) it conforms to ANSI Z97.1, 16 CFR Part 1201, Sec- 
tions 1201.1 and 1201.2, or CAN/CGSB-12.1; whichever 
is applicable (see Part 9) 

(b) the glass is not subjected to further treatment such 
as sandblasting, etching, heat treatment, painting, etc., 
that could alter the original properties of the glass 

(c) the glass is bonded to a nonpolymeric coating, 
sheeting, or film backing having a physical integrity to 
hold the fragments when the glass breaks 

(d) the glass is tested and conforms to the acceptance 
criteria for laminated glass as specified in ANSI 737.1, 
or 16 CFR Part 1201, Section 1201.4, or CAN/CGSB- 
12.11, whichever is applicable (see Part 9) 

2.14.1.83 In jurisdictions enforcing the NBCC, 
type 3C film reinforced silvered mirror glass that con- 
forms to CAN/CGSB-12.5 shall be permitted for lining 
walls or ceilings. 

2.14.1.8.4 Markings as specified in the applicable 
glazing standard shall be on each separate piece, and 
shall remain visible after installation. 

2.14.1.9 Equipment isussde Cars 

2.14.1.9.1 Apparatus or equipment not used in 
connection with the function or use of the elevator shall 
not be installed inside of any elevator car, except as 
follows: 

(a) Support rails (handrails) are permitted. 

(b) Fastening devices for padded protective linings 
are permitted. 

(c) Lift hooks, conveyor tracks, and support beams 
for freight handling, mounted in the ceiling of passenger 
elevator, shall clear the car floor to a height of 2 450 mm 
(96 in.) (see 2.16.9). 



45 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



2.14.1.9.1-2.14.2.3.3 



(d) Picture frames, graphic display boards, plaques, 
and other similar visual displays shall be mounted to 
withstand the required elevator tests without damage. 
All edges shall be beveled or rounded. The material 
shall conform to 2.14.1.2 and 2.14.2.1. When attached to 
the car wall less than 2 130 mm (84 in.) above the floor, 
projections from the car wall, excluding support rails, 
shall not be greater than 38 mm (1.5 in.). 

(e) Conveyor tracks shall be permitted in freight ele- 
vators cars. 

(f) Heating equipment, ventilating fans, and air-con- 
ditioning equipment, if used, shall be securely fastened 
in place and located above the car ceiling or outside the 
enclosure. 

2.14.1.9.2 Passenger car floors shall have no pro- 
jections or depressions greater than 6 mm (0.25 in.). 

2.14.1.10 Side Emergency Exits. Side emergency exits 
are prohibited. 

2.14.2 Passenger-Car Enclosures 

2.14.2.1 Material for Car Enclosures, Enclosure Lin- 
ings, and Floor Coverings. All materials exposed to the 
car interior and the hoistway shall be metal, glass, or 
shall conform to 2.14.2.1.1 through 2.14.2.1.6. 

2.14.2.1.1 Materials in their end-use configura- 
tion, other than those covered by 2.14.2.1.2 through 
2.14.2.1.6 shall conform to the following requirements, 
based on the tests conducted in accordance with the 
requirements of ASTM E 84, UL 723, NFPA 252 or CAN/ 
ULC-S102.2, whichever is applicable: 

(a) flame spread rating of to 75 

(b) smoke development of to 450 

2.14.2.1.2 In jursidictions enforcing the NBCC 
materials in their end-use configuration, where the ele- 
vator is designed as a firefighters' elevator, shall have 

(a) a flame spread rating for walls and ceiling of to 
25 with smoke development of to 100 based on the 
test conducted in accordance with the requirements of 
CAN/ULC-S102 

(b) a flame spread rating for floor surfaces of to 300 
with smoke development of to 300, based on the test 
conducted in accordance with the requirements of 
CAN/ULC-S102.2 

2.14.2.1.3 Napped, tufted, woven, looped, and 
similar materials in their end-use configuration on car 
enclosure walls shall conform to 8.3.7 or the NBCC and 
National Fire Code of Canada, whichever is applicable. 
The enclosure walls to which this material is attached 
shall conform to 2.14.2.1.1. 

2.14.2.1.4 Padded protective linings, for tempo- 
rary use in passenger cars during the handling of freight, 
shall be of materials conforming to either 2.14.2.1.1 or 
2.14.2.1.3, whichever is applicable. The protective lining 



shall clear the floor by not less than 100 mm (4 in.). 

2.14.2.1.5 Floor covering, underlayment, and its 
adhesive shall have a critical radiant flux of not less than 
0.45 W/cm 2 , as measured by ASTM E 648 or conform 
to the requirements of the NBCC and ULC standard 
CAN/ULC-S102.2, whichever is applicable. 

2.14.2.1.6 Handrails, operating devices, ventilat- 
ing devices, signal fixtures, audio and visual communi- 
cation devices, and their housings are not required to 
conform to 2.14.2.1.1 through 2.14.2.1.4. 

2.14.2.2 Openings Prohibited. Openings or hinged or 
removable panels in an enclosure are prohibited, other 
than as required for the following: 

(a) signal, operating, and communication equipment 

(b) entrances 

(c) vision panels 

id) top emergency exit 

(e) ventilation 

(f) access panels for maintenance of equipment or 
cleaning glass on observation elevators (see 2.14.2.6) 

Such panels, where provided, shall conform to 
2.14.1.10.2(b), (c), (f), (g), and (h), except that they are 
not required to be openable from the outside. 

2.14.2.3 Ventilation 

2.14.2.3.1 Natural ventilation openings conform- 
ing to the following shall be provided in car enclosures: 

(a) Openings exposed to the inside of the car shall not (05a) 
be located in the portion of the enclosure walls extending 
from a point 300 mm (12 in.) above the floor to a point 

1 825 mm (72 in.) above the floor. 

(b) Openings less than 300 mm (12 in.) above the floor 
shall reject a ball 25 mm (1 in.) in diameter and be 
guarded to prevent straight-through passage. 

(c) Openings above the 1 825 mm (72 in.) level shall 
reject a ball 50 mm (2 in.) in diameter and be guarded 
to prevent straight-through passage. 

(d) Openings in the car ceiling shall be protected and 
shall conform to 2.14.1.6. 

(e) The total area of natural ventilation openings shall 
be not less than 3.5% of the inside car floor area divided 
equally between the bottom and top of the car enclosure. 

(f) The total unrestricted opening in or around the 
car doors or gates shall be permitted to be included as 
part of the total natural ventilation required. 

(g) The unrestricted opening provided by forced ven- 
tilation systems shall be permitted to be part of the 
natural ventilation area on the part of the car in which 
it is located. 

2.14.2.3.2 Ventilating fans or blowers, if used, 
shall be located above the car ceiling or outside the 
enclosure and shall be securely fastened in place. 

2.14.2.3.3 Forced ventilation conforming to the 
following shall be provided on observation elevators 



46 



2.14.4.8-2.14.5.7 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



guided or restrained to prevent them from coming out 
of their runway. 

The bottom of the guides or other restraining means 
shall be so constructed as to retain the weights if the 
weight suspension means breaks. 

Weights that extend beyond the hoistway side of the 
car door or gate guide rail shall be guarded to prevent 
accidental contact. 

2.14.4.9 Factor of Safety for Suspension Members. 

Suspension members of vertically sliding car doors or 
gates, and of weights used with car doors or gates, shall 
have a factor of safety of not less than 5. At least two 
independent suspension means shall be provided so that 
the failure of one suspension means shall not permit the 
car doors or gates to fall; or a safety device shall be 
provided to prevent the doors or gates from falling, if 
the suspension means fails. 

2.14.4.10 Power-Operated and Power-Opened or 
Power-Closed Doors or Gates. The operation of power- 
operated and power-opened or power-closed doors or 
gates shall conform to 2.13. 

2.14.4.11 Closed Position of Car Doors or Gates. Car 

doors or gates shall be considered to be in the closed 
position under the following conditions: 

(a) for horizontally sliding doors or gates, when the 
clear open space between the leading edge of the door 
or gate and the nearest face of the jamb does not exceed 
50 mm (2 in.) except where car doors are provided with 
a car door interlock(s), 10 mm (0.375 in.) 

(b) for vertically sliding counterweighted doors or 
gates, when the clear open space between the leading 
edge of the door or gate and the car platform sill does 
not exceed 50 mm (2 in.) 

(c) for horizontally sliding center-opening doors, or 
vertically sliding biparting counterbalanced doors, 
when the door panels are within 50 mm (2 in.) of contact 
with each other, except where horizontally sliding cen- 
ter-opening car doors are provided with a car door inter- 
lock^), 10 mm (0.375 in.) 

2.14.5 Passenger Car Doors 

2.14.5.1 Number of Entrances Permitted. There shall 
be not more than two entrances to the car, except in 
existing buildings where structural conditions make 
additional entrances necessary. 

2.14.5.2 Type Required. Horizontally or vertically 
sliding doors subject to the restrictions of 2.14.5.3 shall 
be provided at each car entrance. 

2.14.5.3 Vertically Sliding Doors. Vertically sliding 
doors shall be 

(a) of the balanced counterweighted type that slide 
in the up direction to open 



(b) power operated where facing a power-operated 
vertically sliding counterbalanced or a vertically sliding- 
down-to-open hoistway door 

2.14.5.4 Dimensions ©f Doors. Doors, when in the 
fully closed position, shall protect the full width and 
height of the car entrance opening. 

2.14.5.5 Openings in Doors. There shall be no open- 
ings in doors, except where vision panels are used. 

2.14.5.6 Door Panels 

2.14.5.6.1 Door panels shall have a flush surface 
on the side exposed to the car interior. The panels shall 
have no area or molding depressed or raised more than 
3 mm (0.125 in.) and areas raised or depressed shall be 
beveled at not more than 30 deg to the panel surface. 

2.14.5.6.2 Panels shall overlap the top and sides 
of the car entrance opening by not less than 13 mm 
(0.5 in.) when in the closed position. 

2.14.5.63 The vertical clearance between a panel 
and the sill, or in the case of a vertically sliding door 
the vertical clearance between the leading edge and the 
sill, shall not exceed 10 mm (0.375 in.) when in the fully 
closed position. 

2.14.5.6.4 The horizontal clearance shall not 
exceed 13 mm (0.5 in.) for horizontally sliding panels 
and 25 mm (1 in.) for vertically sliding panels between 

(a) the car side of a panel and the related car 
entrance jamb 

(b) related panels of multispeed entrances 

(c) the car side of the panel and the related car 
head jamb 

2.14.5.6.5 The leading edges of doors shall be free 
of sharp projections. 

2.14.5.6.6 The meeting panel edges of center- 
opening entrances shall be protected with not less than 
one resilient male member extending the full height 
of the panel. The meeting edges shall be permitted to 
interlock by not more than 10 mm (0.375 in.). When in 
the closed position, the distance between the metal parts 
of the meeting panels shall not exceed 13 mm (0.5 in.). 

2.14.5.6.7 The clearance between the leading edge 
of the trailing panel of multiple-speed panels and the 
jamb shall not exceed 

(a) 13 mm (0.5 in.) for horizontal slide 

(b) 25 mm (1 in.) for vertical slide 

2.14.5.7 Manual Opening of Car Doors. Car doors 
shall be so arranged that when the car is stopped within 
the unlocking zone (see 2.12.5.3) and power to the door 
operator is cut off, they and the mechanically related 
hoistway door, if any, shall be movable by hand from 
inside the car. The force required at the edge of sliding 
doors to move them shall not exceed 330 N (75 lbf). 



49 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



2.14.5.8-2.14.7.1.3 



2.14.5.8 Glass in Car Doors 

2.14.5.8.1 Vision panels, where provided, shall 
conform to 2.14.2.5. 

2.14.5.8.2 Glass doors, where provided, shall con- 
form to the following requirements: 

(05a) (a) The glass shall be laminated glass conforming to 
the requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201, or be laminated 
glass, safety glass, or safety plastic conforming to the 
requirements of CAN/CGSB-12.1, whichever is applica- 
ble (see Part 9). Markings as specified shall be on each 
separate piece, and shall remain visible after installation. 

(b) The glass shall be not less than 60% of the total 
visible door panel surface area as seen from the car side 
of the doors. Door lap shall not be used in calculating 
glass size. 

(c) In power-operated doors, the glass panel shall be 
substantially flush with the surface of the car side of 
the door. 

(d) The glass shall conform to the applicable strength 
requirements of 2.14.4.6. 

(e) The glass shall be so mounted that it, and its 
mounting structure, will withstand the required elevator 
tests without becoming damaged or dislodged. 

(f) A nonglass edge shall be provided on the leading 
edge of the door panel. 

2.14.6 Freight Elevator Car Doors and Gates 

2.14.6.1 Type of Gates 

2.14.6.1.1 For elevators designed for Class A load- 
ing (see 2.16.2.2), car gates shall be either of the vertically 
sliding type (see 2.14.6.2) or the horizontally sliding col- 
lapsible type (see 2.14.6.3). 

2.14.6.1.2 For elevators designed for Class B or 
Class C loading (see 2.16.2.2), car gates shall be of the 
vertically sliding type (see 2.14.6.2). 

2.14.6.2 Vertically Sliding Doors and Gates 

2.14.6.2.1 On elevators used exclusively for 
freight, car doors and gates shall be either of the balanced 
counterweighted type that slide up or down to open, 
or of the biparting counterbalanced type. They shall be 
manually operated or power operated. 

2.14.6.2.2 Where used on freight elevators permit- 
ted to carry passengers (see 2.16.4), car doors shall con- 
form to 2.14.5. 

2.14.6.2.3 Car doors and gates shall protect the 
full width of the car entrance opening, and their height 
shall be determined as follows: 

(a) car doors and gates shall extend from a point not 
more than 25 mm (1 in.) above the car floor to a point 
not less than 1 825 mm (72 in.) above the car floor 

(b) where a vertically sliding car gate with a door 
reopening device is provided, the 25 mm (1 in.) maxi- 
mum dimension specified shall be measured from the 
car floor to the bottom of the leading member 



2.14.6.2.4 The horizontal clearance between the 
car side of a panel and the related car entrance jamb or 
between related panels of multispeed doors or gates 
shall not exceed 25 mm (1 in.). 

2.14.6.3 Collapsible-Type Gates 

2.14.6.3.1 Collapsible-type gates shall protect the 
full width of the car entrance opening, and they shall 
extend from the car floor to a height of not less than 
1 825 mm (72 in.) when fully closed. 

2.14.6.3.2 When in the fully closed (extended) 
position, the opening between vertical members shall 
not be more than 115 mm (4.5 in.). 

2.14.6.3.3 Every vertical member shall be 
restricted from moving perpendicular to the direction 
of travel more than 13 mm (0.5 in.). 

2.14.6.3.4 They shall not be power opened, except 
as permitted by 2.13.2.1.2. 

2.14.6.3.5 When in the fully opened (collapsed) 
position, collapsible gates shall be permitted to be 
arranged to swing inward. 

2.14.6.3.6 Handles of manually operated collaps- 
ible gates nearest the car operating device on elevators 
operated from the car only shall be so located that the 
nearest handle is not more than 1 225 mm (48 in.) from 
the car operating device when the gate is closed 
(extended position), and not more than 1 225 mm (48 in.) 
above the car floor. Gate handles shall be provided with 
finger guards. 

2.14.7 llllumination of Cars and Lighting Fixtures 

2.14.7.1 Illumination and Outlets Required. Cars shall 
be provided with an electric light or lights conforming 
to 2.14.7.1.1 through 2.14.7.1.4. 

2.14.7.1.1 Not less than two lamps shall be pro- 
vided. 

2.14.7.1.2 The minimum illumination at the car 
threshold, with the door closed, shall be not less than 

(a) 50 lx (5 fc) for passenger elevators 

(b) 25 lx (2.5 fc) for freight elevators 

2.14.7.1.3 Each elevator shall be provided with (05a) 
auxiliary lighting having its power source located on 

the car. It shall conform to the following: 

(a) The intensity of auxiliary lighting illumination 
shall be not less than 2 lx (0.2 fc), measured approxi- 
mately 1 225 mm (48 in.) above the car floor and 300 mm 
(12 in.) centered horizontally in front of a car operating 
panel containing any of the following: 

(1) car operating device(s) 

(2) door open button 

(3) rear or side door open button 

(4) door close button 

(5) rear or side door close button 

(6) "HELP" button and operating instructions 

(7) "ALARM" switch 



50 



2.14.7.1.3-2.15.5.4 



ASfVJE A17.1a-2005 



(b) Illumination is not required in front of additional 
car operating panels where the devices listed in 
2.14.7.1.3(a) are duplicated. 

(c) Auxiliary lights shall be automatically turned on 
in all elevators in service after normal car lighting 
power fails. 

(d) The power system shall be capable of maintaining 
the light intensity specified in 2.14.7.1.3(a) for a period 
of at least 4 h. 

(e) Not less than two lamps of approximately equal 
wattage shall be used. 

(f) Battery-operated units, where provided, shall 

(V comply with CSA C22.2 No. 141 (see Section 4) 

(2) have a 4 h rating minimum 

(3) be permanently connected to the car light 
branch circuit 

(4) have an output rating that includes the auxiliary 
lights and if connected, the emergency signaling device 
(see 2.27.1.1.3) 

2.14.7.1.4 Each elevator shall be provided with 
an electric light and convenience outlet fixture on the 
car top. 

2.14.7.2 Light Control Switches 

2.14.7.2.1 Light control switches for in-car light- 
ing shall be permitted. When provided, they shall 

(a) be located in or adjacent to the operating device 
in the car. 

(b) in elevators having automatic operation, be of the 
key-operated type or located in a fixture with a locked 
cover. The key shall be Group 2 Security (see 8.1). 

2.14.7.2.2 Automatic operation of the car lights 
shall be permitted. When provided, the operating circuit 
shall be arranged to turn off the lights onfy when the 
following conditions exist for not less than 5 min: 

(a) the car is at a floor 

(b) the doors are closed 

(c) there is no demand for service 

(d) the car is on automatic operation 
Momentary interruption of any of the above condi- 
tions shall cause the car lights to turn on. 

2.14.7.3 Car Lighting Devices 

2.14.7.3.1 Glass used for lighting fixtures shall 
conform to 2.14.1.8. 

2.14.7.3.2 Suspended glass used in lighting fix- 
tures shall be supported by a metal frame secured at 
not less than three points. 

2.14.7.3.3 Fastening devices shall not be remov- 
able from the fixture. 

2.14.7.3.4 Glass shall not be drilled for 
attachment. 

2.14.7.3.5 Light troughs supporting wiring race- 
ways and other auxiliary lighting equipment, where 
used, shall be of metal, except where lined with noncom- 
bustible materials. 



2.14.7.3.6 Materials for light diffusion or trans- 
mission shall be of metal, glass, or materials conforming 
to 2.14.2.1.1 and shall not come in contact with light 
bulbs and tubes. 

2.14.7.4 Protection of Light Bulbs and Tubes. Light 
bulbs and tubes within the car shall 

(a) be equipped with guards, be recessed, or be 
mounted above a drop ceiling to prevent accidental 
breakage. Cars that operate with the drop ceiling 
removed shall have a permanent separate guard for the 
light bulb or tube. 

(b) be so mounted in the structure that the structure 
and the bulb or tube will withstand the required elevator 
tests without being damaged or becoming dislodged. 

SECTION 2.15 
CAR FRAMES AND PLATFORMS 

2.15.1 Car Frames Required 

Every elevator shall have a car frame (see 1.3). 

2.15.2 Guiding Members 

Car frames shall be guided on each guide rail by upper 
and lower guiding members attached to the frame. 

Retention means shall be provided to prevent the car 
from being displaced by more than 13 mm (0.5 in.) from 
its normal running position should any part of the guid- 
ing means fail, excluding the guiding member base and 
its attachment to the frame. The retention means shall 
be permitted to be integral with the base. 

2.15.3 Design of Car Frames and Guiding Members 
The frame and its guiding members shall be designed 

to withstand the forces resulting under the loading con- 
ditions for which the elevator is designed and installed 
(see 2.16). 

2.15.4 Underslung ©r Sub-Post Frames 

The vertical distance between the centerlines of the 
top and bottom guide shoes of an elevator car having 
a sub-post car frame or having an underslung car frame 
located entirely below the car platform shall be not less 
than 40% of the distance between guide rails. 

2.15.5 Car Platforms 

2.15.5.1 Every elevator car shall have a platform 
consisting of a nonperforated floor attached to a plat- 
form frame supported by the car frame, and extending 
over the entire area within the car enclosure. 

2.15.5.2 The platform frame members and the floor 
shall be designed to withstand the forces developed 
under the loading conditions for which the elevator is 
designed and installed. 

2.15.5.3 Platform frames are not required where 
laminated platforms are provided. 

2.15.5.4 Laminated platforms shall be permitted to 
be used for passenger elevators having a rated load of 
2 300 kg (5,000 lb) or less. 



51 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



2.15.5.5-2.15.9 



2.15.5.5 The deflection at any point of a laminated 
platform, when uniformly loaded to rated capacity, shall 
not exceed V 960 of the span. The stresses in the steel 
facing shall not exceed one-fifth of its ultimate strength, 
and the stresses in the plywood core shall not exceed 60% 
of the allowable stresses in Section 3.14 of the American 
Plywood Association Plywood Design Specification or 
CSA 086.1, as applicable (see Part 9). 

2.15.6 Materials for Car Frames and Platform Frames 

2.15.6.1 Materials Permitted. Materials used in the 
construction of car frames and platforms shall conform 
to 2.15.6.1.1 through 2.15.6.1.4. 

2.15.6.1.1 Car frames and outside members of 
platform frames shall be made of steel or other metals. 

2.15.6.1.2 Platform stringers of freight elevators 
designed for Class B or Class C loading shall be of steel 
or other metals. 

2.15.6.1.3 Platform stringers of passenger eleva- 
tors and of freight elevators designed for Class A loading 
shall be made of steel or other metals, or of wood. 

2.15.6.1.4 Cast iron shall not be used for any part 
subject to tension, torsion, or bending, except for guiding 
supports and guide shoes. 

2.15.6.2 Requirements for Steel. Steel used in the 
construction of car frames and platforms shall conform 
to 2.15.6.2.1 through 2.15.6.2.3. 

2.15.6.2.1 Car-Frame and Platform-Frame Members. 

Steel shall be rolled, formed, forged, or cast, conforming 
to the requirements of the following specifications: 

(a) Rolled and Formed Steel. ASTM A 36 or ASTM A 
283 Grade D or CAN/CSA-G40.21. 

(b) Forged Steel. ASTM A 668 Class B. 

(c) Cast Steel ASTM A 27 Grade 60/30. 

2.15.6.2.2 Rivets, Bolts, and Rods. Steel used for 
rivets, bolts, and rods shall conform to the following 
specifications: 

(a) ASTM A 502, Rivets 

(b) ASTM A 307, Bolts and Rods 

2.15.6.2.3 Steels of Other Strength. Steels of 
greater or lesser strength than those specified by 
2.15.6.2.1 shall be permitted to be used, provided they 
have an elongation of not less than 20% in a length of 
50 mm (2 in.) when tested in accordance with ASTM 
E8, and provided that the stresses and deflections con- 
form to 2.15.10 and 2.15.11, respectively. 

Rivets, bolts, and rods made of steel having greater 
strength than specified by ASTM A 307 and ASTM A 
502 shall be permitted to be used and the maximum 
allowable stresses increased proportionally, based on the 
ratio of the ultimate strengths. Elongation shall conform 
to the requirements of the corresponding ASTM specifi- 
cations. 



2.15.6.3 Requirements for Metals Other Than Steel. 

Metals other than steel shall be permitted to be used in 
the construction of car frames and platforms, provided 
the metal used has the essential properties to meet all 
the requirements for the purpose in accordance with 
good engineering practice, and provided the stresses 
and deflections conform to 2.15.10 and 2.15.11, respec- 
tively. 

2.15.6.4 Requirements for Wood Used for Platform 
Floors and Stringers. Wood used for platform stringers 
and platform floors and sub-floors shall be of structural 
quality lumber or exterior-type plywood conforming to 
the requirements of the following: 

(a) ASTM D 245, Structural Grades of Lumber 

(b) ASTM D 198, Static Tests of Structural Timbers 

(c) ANSI Voluntary Product Standard PS 1-74 or CSA 
0151, Softwood Plywood, Construction and Industrial 

2.15.7 Car Frame and Platform Connections 

2.15.7.1 Internal Connections. Connections between 
members of car frames and platforms shall be riveted, 
bolted, or welded, and shall conform to 2.15.7.3. 

2.15.7.2 Connection Between Car Frame and Platform. 

The attachment of the platform to the car frame shall 
be done in accordance with good engineering practice 
and shall develop the required strength to transmit the 
forces safely from the platform to the car frame in accor- 
dance with 2.15.10. Bolts, nuts, and welding, where used, 
shall conform to 2.15.7.3. 

2.15.7.3 Bolts, Nuts, and Welding 

2.15.7.3.1 Bolts, where used through greater than 
5 deg sloping flanges of structural members, shall have 
bolt heads of the tipped-head type or shall be fitted with 
bevelled washers. 

2.1 5.7.3.2 Nuts used on greater than 5 deg sloping 
flanges of structural members shall sit on beveled 
washers. 

2.15.7.3.3 All welding shall conform to 8.8. 

2.15.8 Protection of Platforms Against Fire 

All platform materials exposed to the hoistway shall 
be either of the following: 

(a) metal 

(b) other materials that, in their end-use configura- 
tion, conform to the following requirements, based on 
the tests conducted in accordance with the requirements 
of ASTM E 84, UL 723, NFPA 255, or CAN/ULC-S102.2, 
whichever is applicable (see Part 9): 

(1) flame spread rating of to 75 

(2) smoke development of to 450 

2.15.9 Platform Guards (Aprons) 

The entrance side of the platform of passenger and 
freight elevators shall be provided with smooth metal 



52 



2.18.6.2-2.19.1.2 



ASMEA17.1a-20Q5 



2.18.6.2 The means shall be set to allow the governor 
rope to slip through the speed governor at a rope tension 
(the governor pull-through tension) higher than 
required to activate the safety or to trip the releasing 
carrier as specified in 2.17.15. The maximum tension in 
the rope shall not exceed one-fifth of the rated ultimate 
strength of the rope. 

2.18.63 The means shall be designed to prevent 
appreciable damage to, or deformation of, the governor 
rope resulting from its application (stopping action). 

2.18.6.4 The means shall provide a continuous ten- 
sion in the governor rope as required to operate the 
safety during the entire stopping interval in accordance 
with 2.17.5.2. 

(05a) 2.18.6.5 The governor shall be arranged to be 
tripped by hand to facilitate the tests specified in 8.10 
and 8.11. 

2.18.7 Design of Speed-Governor Sheaves and 
Traction Between Speed-Governor Rope and 
Sheave 

2.18.7.1 The arc of contact between the governor 
rope and the governor sheave shall, in conjunction with 
a governor-rope tension device, provide sufficient trac- 
tion to cause proper functioning of the governor. 

2.18.7.2 Where the rope force imparted to the gover- 
nor rope (see 2.18.6.1) necessary to activate the safety, 
or to trip the releasing carrier, if used, is dependent 
upon the tension in the governor rope prior to governor 
tripping, a switch or switches mechanically opened by 
the governor tension sheave before the sheave reaches 
its upper or lower limit of travel shall be provided. This 
switch shall be of the manually reset type and shall 
conform to 2.26.4.3. Subsequent to the first stop of the 
car following the opening of the switch, the car shall 
remain inoperative until the switch is manually reset. 

2.18.73 Governor sheave grooves shall have 
machine-finished surfaces. Governor tension sheaves 
shall have machine-finished grooves for rated car speeds 
of more than 0.75 m/s (150 ft/min). Machined governor 
sheave grooves shall have a groove diameter of not more 
than 1.15 times the diameter of the governor rope. 

2.18.7.4 The pitch diameter of governor sheaves and 
governor tension sheaves shall be not less than the prod- 
uct of the diameter of the rope and the applicable multi- 
plier listed in Table 2.18.7.4, based on the rated speed 
and the number of strands in the rope. 

2.18.8 Factors of Safety in Load-Bearing Parts of 
Speed Governor 

2.18.8.1 Material, except cast iron, used in load- 
bearing parts of speed governors shall have a factor of 
safety of not less than 3.5, and the materials used shall 
have an elongation of not less than 15% in a length of 



Table 2.18.7.4 Multiplier for Determining 
Governor Sheave Pitch Diameter 



Rated Speed, 
m/s (ft/min) 



Number of Strands 



Multiplier 



1.00 or less (200 or less) 


6 


42 


1.00 or less (200 or less) 


8 


30 


Over 1.00 (over 200) 


6 


46 


Over 1.00 (over 200) 


8 


32 



50 mm (2 in.) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 
8. Forged, cast, or welded parts shall be stress relieved. 
Cast iron shall have a factor of safety of not less than 10. 

2.18.8.2 The factors of safety shall be based upon 
the maximum stresses developed in the parts during 
normal or governor tripping operation. 

2.18.9 Speed-Governor Marking Plate 

A metal plate shall be securely attached to each speed 
governor and shall be marked in a legible and permanent 
manner with letters and figures not less than 6 mm 
(0.25 in.) in height indicating the following: 

(a) the speed in m/s (ft/min) at which the governor 
is set and sealed to trip the governor-rope retarding 
means 

(b) the size, material, and construction of the governor 
rope on which the governor-rope retarding means were 
designed to operate 

(c) the governor pull-through tension (force) in N (lbf ) 
(see 2.18.6.2) 

(d) manufacturer's name or trademark 

(e) statement "DO NOT LUBRICATE GOVERNOR 
ROPE" 



SECTION 2.19 

ASCENDING CAR OVERSPEED AND UNINTENDED 

CAR MOVEMENT PROTECTION 

2.19.1 Ascending Car Overspeed Protection 

2.19.1.1 Purpose. Ascending car overspeed protec- 
tion shall be provided to prevent the car from striking 
the hoistway overhead structure as a result of a failure in 

(a) the electric driving-machine motor, brake, cou- 
pling, shaft, or gearing 

(b) the control system 

(c) any other component upon which the speed of the 
car depends, except the suspension ropes and the drive 
sheave of the traction machine 

2.19.1.2 Where Required and Function. All electric 
traction elevators, except those whose empty car weight 
exceeds the total weight of the suspension ropes and 
counterweight, shall be provided with a device to pre- 
vent an ascending elevator from striking the hoistway 
overhead structure. This device (see 2.26.2.29) shall 



65 



ASMEA17.1a-2005 



2.19.1.2-2.19.3.2 



(a) detect an ascending car overspeed condition at a 
speed not greater than 10% higher than the speed at 
which the car governor is set to trip (see 2.18.2.1). 

(1) If the overspeed detection means requires elec- 
trical power for its functioning 

(a) a loss of electrical power to the ascending car 
overspeed detection and control means shall cause the 
immediate activation of the emergency brake as required 
in 2.19.1.2(b) 

(b) the occurrence of a single ground, or the fail- 
ure of any mechanically operated switch that does not 
meet the requirements of 2.26.4.3, any single magneti- 
cally operated switch, contactor, or relay, or any single 
solid-state device, or a software system failure, shall not 
render the detection means inoperative 

(2) The failure of any single mechanically operated 
switch that does not meet the requirements of 2.26.4.3 
shall not render the detection means inoperative. 

(3) When a fault specified in 2.19.1.2(a)(1)(b) or 
2.19.1.2(a)(2) is detected, the car shall stop at or before 
the next landing for which a demand was registered, 
and shall not be permitted to restart. 

(4) Once actuated by overspeed, the overspeed 
detection means shall remain actuated until manually 
reset, and the car shall not start or run unless the detec- 
tion means is reset. 

(b) decelerate the car when loaded with any load up 
to its rated load [see 2.16.8(h)] by applying an emergency 
brake conforming to 2.19.3. The car shall not start or 
run unless the emergency brake is reset. 

2.19.2 Protection Against Unintended Car Movement 

2.19.2.1 Purpose. Protection shall be provided with 
a device to prevent unintended car movement away 
from the landing with the hoistway door not in the 
locked position and the car door not in the closed posi- 
tion, as a result of failure in 

(a) the electric driving-machine motor, brake, cou- 
pling, shaft, or gearing 

(b) the control system 

(c) any other component upon which the speed of the 
car depends, except the suspension ropes and the drive 
sheave of the traction machine 

2.19.2.2 Where Required and Function. All electric 
traction elevators shall be provided with a device (see 
2.26.2.30) that shall 

(a) detect unintended car movement away from the 
landing with the hoistway door not in the locked posi- 
tion and the car door not in the closed position. 

NOTE: Freight elevators provided with combination mechanical 
locks and contacts on the hoistway door shall detect the closed 
position of the hoistway door and the closed position of the car 
door. 

(1 ) If the detection means requires electrical power 
for its functioning 



(a) a loss of electrical power to the unintended 
movement detection and control means shall cause the 
immediate activation of the emergency brake as required 
in 2.19.2.2(b) 

(b) the occurrence of a single ground, or the fail- 
ure of any mechanically operated switch that does not 
meet the requirements of 2.26.4.3, any single magneti- 
cally operated switch, contactor, or relay, or any single 
solid-state device, or software system failure, shall not 
render the detection means inoperative 

(2) The failure of any single mechanically operated 
switch that does not meet the requirements of 2.26.4.3, 
shall not render the detection means inoperative. 

(3) When a fault specified in 2.19.2.2(a)(1)(b) or 
2.19.2.2(a)(2) is detected, the car shall stop at or before 
the next landing for which a demand was registered, 
and shall not be permitted to restart. 

(4) Once actuated by unintended movement, the 
detection means shall remain actuated until manually 
reset, and the car shall not start or run unless the detec- 
tion means is reset. 

(b) upon detection of unintended car movement, stop 
and hold the car, with any load up to rated load [see 
also 2.16.8(h)], by applying an emergency brake con- 
forming to 2.19.3, with the car movement limited in both 
directions, to a maximum of 1 220 mm (48 in.). The 
car shall not start or run unless the emergency brake 
provided for the unintended movement protection is 
reset. 

2.19.3 Emergency Brake (See Nonmandatory 
Appendix F) 

2.19.3.1 Where Required 

2.19.3.1.1 When required by 2.19.1 for protection 
against ascending car overspeed, an emergency brake 
(see 1.3) conforming to 2.19.3.2 shall be provided. 

2.19.3.1.2 When required by 2.19.2 for protection 
against unintended car movement, an emergency brake 
(see 1.3) conforming to 2.19.3.2 shall be provided. 

2.19.3.1.3 A single device shall be permitted to 
meet the requirements of both 2.19.3.1.1 and 2.19.3.1.2, 
or separate devices shall be provided. 

2.19.3.2 Requirements. The emergency brake is per- 
mitted to consist of one or more devices and shall 

(a) function to decelerate the car by acting on one or 
more of the following (see also 2.19.4): 

(1) counterweight [e.g., counterweight safety (see 

2.17.4 and 2.17.7)]. 

(2) car. 

(3) suspension or compensation rope system. 

(4) drive sheave of a traction machine. 

(5) brake drum or braking surface of the driving- 
machine brake, provided that the driving-machine brake 
surface is integral (cast or welded) with or directly 



66 



2.24.8.2-2.25.1.1 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



2.24.5.2 Braking System 

2.24.8.2.1 The braking system shall consist of a 
driving machine brake and in addition shall be permit- 
ted to include other braking means, such as electrically 
assisted braking. 

2.24.8.2.2 The braking system shall be capable of 
decelerating the car from its rated speed when it is 
carrying its rated load (see 2.16.8) in the down direction, 
or empty car in the up direction from the speed at which 
the governor overspeed switch is set. Any deceleration 
not exceeding 9.8 m/s 2 (32.2 ft/s 2 ) is acceptable, pro- 
vided that all factors such as, but not limited to, system 
heat dissipation and allowable buffer striking speeds 
are considered. The loss of main line power shall not 
reduce the braking system capacity below the require- 
ments stated here. 

2.24.8.3 Driving-Machine Brake. The driving- 
machine shall be equipped with a friction brake applied 
by a spring or springs, or by gravity, and released electro- 
mechanically or electrohydraulically (see 1.3) in confor- 
mance with 2.26.8. The driving-machine brake, on its 
own, shall be capable of 

(a) holding the car at rest with its rated load (see 

2.16.8 and 2.26.8). 

(b) holding the empty car at rest. 

(c) decelerating the empty car traveling in the up 
direction from the speed at which the governor 
overspeed switch is set. Any deceleration not exceeding 
9.8 m/s 2 (32.2 ft/s 2 ) is acceptable provided that all fac- 
tors such as, but not limited to, system heat dissipation 
and allowable buffer striking speeds are considered. 

(05a) 2.24.8.4 Means for Manual Release. Means shall be 
permitted for manual release of the driving-machine 
brake. The means shall permit car movement in a grad- 
ual, controllable manner. Provision shall be made to 
prevent unintended actuation of the device. The manual 
release device shall be designed to be hand applied only 
with continuous effort. The brake shall reapply at its 
fully adjusted capacity in the absence of the hand- 
applied effort. Devices required in accordance with Sec- 
tion 2.19 are permitted to be temporarily disabled when 
the manual release device is in use. 

2.24.8.5 Marking Plates for Brakes. The brake setting 
and method of measurement shall be permanently and 
legibly marked on the driving machine. 

2.24.8.6 Driving-Machine Brake Design. The driving- 
machine brake design shall ensure contact of the friction 
material on the braking surface consistent with good 
engineering practice. Means shall be provided to protect 
the braking surfaces from contamination caused by any 
driving-machine fluid leak. 

2.24.9 Indirect Driving Machines 

2.24.9.1 Belt and Chain Drives. Indirect driving 
machines, utilizing V-belt drives, tooth drive belts, or 



drive chains, shall include not less than three belts or 
chains operating together in parallel as a set. Belt and 
chain drive sets shall be preloaded and matched for 
length in sets. 

2.24.9.2 General Requirements 

2.24.9.2.1 Belt sets shall be selected on the basis 
of the manufacturer's rated breaking strength and a fac- 
tor of safety of 10. Chain and sprocket sets shall be 
selected on the basis of recommendations set forth in the 
Supplementary Information section of ASME B29.1M, 
using a service factor of 2. Offset links in chain are not 
permitted. 

2.24.9.2.2 Sprockets in a chain drive set and also 
a driven set shall be assembled onto a common hub, 
with teeth cut in-line after assembly to assure equal load 
distribution on all chains. Tooth sheaves for a belt drive 
shall be constructed in a manner to assure equal load 
distribution on each belt in the set. 

2.24.9.2.3 Load determination for both the belt 
and chain sets shall be based on the maximum static 
loading on the elevator car, which is the full load in the 
car at rest and at a position in the hoistway that creates 
the greatest load, including either the car or counter- 
weight resting on its buffer. 

2.24.9.2.4 Chain drives and belt drives shall be 
guarded to protect against accidental contact and to 
prevent foreign objects from interfering with the drives. 

2.24.9.3 Monitoring and Brake Location. Each belt or (05a) 
chain shall be continuously monitored by a broken belt 

or chain device, which shall function to stop the car at 
the next available landing and prevent it from running 
in the event that any belt or chain in the set breaks or 
becomes excessively slack. The driving-machine brake 
shall be located on the traction sheave or drum assembly 
side of the driving machine so as to be fully effective 
in the event that the entire belt set or chain set should 
break. 

2.24.10 Means for Inspection of Gears 

Each gear case of geared machines shall have access 
to permit inspection of the contact surfaces of the gears. 
Such access need not provide a direct view of all gears, 
but shall be located and sized adequately to allow access 
by fibre optic or similar visual inspection instrumen- 
tation. 



SECTION 2.25 
TERMINAL STOPPING DEVICES 

2.25.1 General Requirements 

2.25.1.1 Normal terminal stopping devices required 
by 2.25.2, emergency terminal stopping devices required 



87 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



2.25.1.1-2.25.3.3.2 



by 2.25.4.2, and emergency terminal speed-limiting 
devices required by 2.25.4.1 shall be permitted to use 
mechanically operated, magnetically operated, optical, 
or solid-state devices for determining car position and 
speed. 

2.25.1.2 Final terminal stopping devices required by 
2.25.3 shall use only mechanically operated switches for 
determining car position. 

2.25.1.3 Terminal stopping devices that are located 
on the car or in the hoistway shall be of the enclosed type 
and securely mounted in such a manner that horizontal 
movement of the car shall not affect the operation of 
the device. 

2.25.2 Normal Terminal Stopping Devices 

2.25.2.1 Where Required and Function. Normal ter- 
minal stopping devices shall conform to 2.25.2.1.1 
through 2.25.2.1.3. 

2.25.2.1.1 Normal terminal stopping devices shall 
be provided and arranged to slow down and stop the 
car automatically, at or near the top and bottom terminal 
landings, with any load up to and including rated load 
in the car and from any speed attained in normal opera- 
tion (see 2.16.8). 

2.25.2.1.2 Such devices shall function indepen- 
dently of the operation of the normal stopping means 
and of the final terminal stopping device, except that 
on elevators with a rated speed of 0.75 m/s (150 ft/min) 
or less, the normal terminal stopping device shall be 
permitted to be used as the normal stopping means. 

2.25.2.1.3 The device shall be so designed and 
installed that it will continue to function until the final 
terminal stopping device operates. 

2.25.2.2 Location of Stopping Devices. Normal termi- 
nal stopping devices shall be located as specified in 
2.25.2.2.1 and 2.25.2.2.2. 

2.25.2.2.1 Stopping devices for traction machines 
shall be located on the car, in the hoistway, or in the 
machine room, and shall be operated by the movement 
of the car. 

2.25.2.2.2 Stopping devices for winding drum 
machines shall be located on the car or in the hoistway, 
and shall be operated by the movement of the car. 

2.25.2.3 Indirectly Operated Normal Terminal Stop- 
ping Devices. Stopping devices that are not located on 
the car or in the hoistway shall conform to 2.25.2.3.1 
through 2.25.2.3.3. 

2.25.2.3.1 The stopping device shall be mounted 
on and operated by a stopping means mechanically con- 
nected to and driven by the car. 

Stopping means depending on friction or traction 
shall not be used. 



2.25.2.3.2 Tapes, chains, ropes, or similar devices 
mechanically connecting the stopping device to the car 
and used as a driving means shall be provided with a 
device that will cause the electric power to be removed 
from the elevator driving-machine motor and brake if 
the driving means fails (see 2.26.2.6). 

2.25.2.3.3 If mechanically operated switches are 
used, only one set of floor-stopping contacts is necessary 
for each terminal landing on floor controllers or other 
similar devices used to stop the car automatically at the 
landings (such as automatic operation, signal operation, 
etc.), provided these contacts and the means for 
operating them conform to 2.25.2.3.1 and 2.25.2.3.2. 
These contacts shall be permitted to serve also as the 
normal terminal stopping devices. 

2.25.3 Final Terminal Stopping Devices 

2.25.3.1 General Requirements. Final terminal stop- 
ping devices shall conform to 2.25.1 and the following: 

(a) They shall be mechanically operated. 

(b) Operating cams shall be of metal. 

(c) The switch contacts shall be directly opened 
mechanically. 

2.25.3.2 Where Required and Function. Final terminal 
stopping devices shall be provided and arranged to 
cause the electric power to be removed automatically 
from the elevator driving-machine motor and brake after 
the car has passed a terminal landing. 

The device shall be set to function as close to the 
terminal landing as practicable, but so that under normal 
operating conditions it will not function when the car 
is stopped by the normal terminal stopping device. 

Where spring buffers are provided, the device shall 
function before the buffer is engaged. 

The device shall be so designed and installed that it 
will continue to function 

(a) at the top terminal landing, until the car has trav- 
eled above this landing a distance equal to the counter- 
weight runby plus 1.5 times the buffer stroke, but in no 
case less than 0.6 m (2 ft) 

(b) at the bottom terminal landing, until the car rests 
on its fully compressed buffer 

The operation of final terminal stopping devices shall 
prevent movement of the car by the normal operating 
devices in both directions of travel. 

2.25.3.3 Location. Final terminal stopping devices 
shall be located as specified in 2.25.3.3.1 and 2.25.3.3.2. 

2.25.3.3.1 Traction machine elevators shall have 
final terminal stopping switches located in the hoistway 
and operated by cams attached to the car. 

2.25.3.3.2 Winding drum machine elevators shall 
have two sets of final terminal stopping switches, one 
located on and operated by the driving machine, and 



2.26.1.4.4-2.26.2.1 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



it shall conform to 2.26.1.4.1, and the transfer switch [see 
2.26.1.4.1(b)] shall be 

(a) located in the machine room 

(b) rendered ineffective if top-of-car inspection opera- 
tion, in-car inspection operation, or hoistway access 
operation is activated, or when a car door or hoistway 
door bypass switch is in the "BYPASS" postion 

2.26.1.5 Inspection Operation With Open Door Cir- 
cuits. The machine room elevator controller shall have 
switches marked "CAR DOOR BYPASS" and 
"HOISTWAY DOOR BYPASS" that will prepare the con- 
trol system so that, only when top-of-car or in-car inspec- 
tion operation is activated, the car shall be permitted to 
be moved with open door contacts. The switches shall 
conform to 2.26.1.5.1 through 2.26.1.5.8. 

2.26.1.5.1 They shall have contacts that are posi- 
tively opened mechanically, when switching to either 
"BYPASS" or "OFF" positions, and their opening shall 
not be solely dependent on springs. 

2.26.1.5.2 The positions of the "BYPASS" switches 
shall be clearly marked "BYPASS" and "OFF." 

2.26.1.5.3 The related circuits shall comply with 
2.26.9.3 and 2.26.9.4. 

2.26.1.5.4 When either or both of the switches are 
in the "BYPASS" position, all means of operation shall be 
made inoperative except top-of-car and in-car inspection 
operation. 

2.26.1.5.5 When the "CAR-DOOR BYPASS" 
switch is in the "BYPASS" position, it shall permit top- 
of-car and in-car inspection operation with open car 
door (or gate) contacts. 

2.26.1.5.6 When the "HOISTWAY DOOR 
BYPASS" switch is in the "BYPASS" position, it shall 
permit top-of-car and in-car inspection operation with 
open hoistway door interlocks or contacts. 

2.26.1.5.7 Each of the "BYPASS" switches shall 
be permitted to be replaced by a set of switches used 
to bypass individual groups of door contacts. Each 
switch in this set shall be marked to identify the specific 
door contacts bypassed. 

2.26.1.5.8 A warning sign shall be mounted adja- 
cent to the "BYPASS" switches stating, "Jumpers shall 
not be used to bypass hoistway door or car door electric 
contacts." 

2.26.1.6 Operation in Leveling or Truck lone. Opera- 
tion of an elevator in a leveling or truck zone at any 
landing by a car leveling or truck zoning device, when 
the hoistway doors, or the car doors or gates, or any 
combination thereof, are not in the closed position, is 
permissible, subject to the requirements of 2.26.1.6.1 
through 2.26.1.6.7. 



2.26.1.6.1 Operating devices of manually oper- 
ated car leveling devices or truck zoning devices shall 
be of the continuous-pressure type and located in the car. 

2.26.1.6.2 Car platform guards, conforming to 
2.15.9, shall be provided. Where a car leveling device is 
used, landing sill guards, conforming to 2.11.12.7, shall 
also be provided. 

2.26.1.6.3 The leveling zone at any landing shall 
not extend more than 450 mm (18 in.) above and below 
any landing where an automatic leveling device is used, 
and not more than 250 mm (10 in.) above and below 
any landing where a manually operated leveling device 
is used. 

2.26.1.6.4 The truck zone at any landing shall not 
extend more than 1 700 mm (67 in.) above the landing. 

2.26.1.6.5 Where a truck or leveling zone for one 
hoistway entrance extends into the door interlocking 
zone for a second entrance, the truck zoning or leveling 
operation shall be inoperative unless the hoistway door 
at the second entrance is in the closed position. 

Where a truck or leveling zone for one hoistway 
entrance extends into the leveling zone for a second 
entrance, the leveling operation for the second entrance 
shall be inoperative while the hoistway door at the first 
entrance is open. 

2.26.1.6.6 A leveling or truck-zoning device shall 
not move the car at a speed exceeding 0.75 m/s 
(150 ft/min). 

For elevators with static control, an independent 
means shall be provided to limit the leveling speed to 
a maximum of 0.75 m/s (150 ft/min) with the doors 
open, should the normal means to control this speed 
(mechanical, electrical, or solid state devices) fail to 
do so. 

2.26.1.6.7 For elevators with static control, an 
inner landing zone extending not more than 75 mm 
(3 in.) above and 75 mm (3 in.) below the landing shall 
be provided. A car shall not move if it stops outside of 
the inner landing zone unless the doors are fully closed. 

2.26.2 Electrical Protective Devices 

When an electrical protective device is activated 
(operated, opened), it shall cause the electric power to 
be removed from the elevator driving machine motor 
and brake. [See also 2.26.3, 2.26.4.3, 2.26.4.4, 2.26.7, 
2.26.8.3(c), 2.26.9.3, and 2.26.9.4]. Electrical protective 
devices shall be provided as specified in 2.26.2.1 through 
2.26.2.32. 

2.26.2.1 Slack-Rope Switch. Winding drum machines 
shall be provided with a slack-rope device equipped 
with a slack-rope switch of the enclosed manually reset 
type. This switch shall operate whenever the ropes 
are slack. 



91 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



2.26.2.2-2.26.2.21 



2.26.2.2 Motor-Generator Running Switch. Where 
generator-field control is used, means shall be provided 
to prevent the application of power to the elevator driv- 
ing machine motor and brake unless the motor generator 
set connections are properly switched for the running 
condition of the elevator. It is not required that the elec- 
trical connections between the elevator driving machine 
motor and the generator be opened in order to remove 
power from the elevator motor. 

2.26.2.3 Compensating-Rope Sheave Switch. Com- 
pensating-rope sheaves shall be provided with a com- 
pensating-rope sheave switch or switches mechanically 
opened by the compensating-rope sheave before the 
sheave reaches its upper or lower limit of travel. 

2.26.2.4 Motor Field Sensing Means. Where direct 
current is supplied to an armature and shunt field of an 
elevator driving-machine motor, a motor field current 
sensing means shall be provided, which shall cause the 
electric power to be removed from the driving-machine 
motor armature, and brake unless current is flowing in 
the shunt field of the motor, except for static control 
elevators provided with a device to detect an overspeed 
condition prior to, and independent of, the operation of 
the governor overspeed switch. This device shall cause 
power to be removed from the elevator driving-machine 
motor armature and machine brake. 

2.26.2.5 Emergency Stop Switch. An emergency stop 
switch shall not be provided on passenger elevators. On 
all freight elevators, an emergency stop switch shall be 
provided in the car, and located in or adjacent to each 
car operating panel. 

When open ("STOP" position), this switch shall cause 
the electric power to be removed from the elevator driv- 
ing-machine motor and brake. 

Emergency stop switches shall 

(a) be of the manually opened and closed type 

(b) have red operating handles or buttons 

(c) be conspicuously and permanently marked 
"STOP," and shall indicate the "STOP" and "RUN" posi- 
tions 

(05a) (d) while opened, cause the audible device to sound 
(see 2.27.1.2) 

NOTE (2.26.2.5): See 2.26.2.21 for in-car stop switch requirements 
for passenger elevators. 

2.26.2.6 Broken Rope, Tape, or Chain Switches. The 

switch or switches that shall be opened by a failure of 
a rope, tape, or chain, shall be provided when required 
by 2.25.2.3.2 or 2.25.4.1.8(b). 

2.26.2.7 Stop Switch in Pit. A stop switch conforming 
to 2.26.2.5(a), (b), (c) shall be provided in the pit of every 
elevator (see 2.2.6). 

2.26.2.8 Stop Switch on Top of Car. A stop switch 
conforming to 2.26.2.5(a), (b), and (c) shall be provided 
on the top of every elevator car. 



2.26.2.9 Car Safety Mechanism Switch. A switch, con- 
forming to 2.17.7 shall be required where a car safety is 
provided. 

2.26.2.10 Speed-Governor Overspeed Switch. A 

speed-governor overspeed switch shall be provided 
when required by 2.18.4.1 and shall conform to 2.18.4.1.2, 
2.18.4.2, and 2.18.4.3. 

2.26.2.11 Final Terminal Stopping Devices. Final ter- 
minal stopping devices, conforming to 2.25.3, shall be 
provided for every electric elevator. 

2.26.2.12 Emergency Terminal Speed Limiting 
Devices. Where reduced-stroke oil buffers are provided, 
as permitted by 2.22.4.1.2, emergency terminal speed- 
limiting devices conforming to 2.25.4.1 shall be pro- 
vided. 

2.26.2.13 Buffer Switches for Oil Buffers Used With 
Type C Car Safeties. Oil level and compression switches 
conforming to 2.17.8.2.7 and 2.17.8.2.8 shall be provided 
for all oil buffers used with Type C safeties (see 2.17.5.3). 

2.26.2.14 Hoistway Door Interlocks and Hoistway 
Door Electric Contacts. Hoistway door interlocks or 
hoistway door electric contacts conforming to 2.12 shall 
be provided for all elevators. 

2.26.2.15 Car Door and Gate Electric Contacts. Car 

door or gate electric contacts, conforming to 2.14.4.2, 
shall be provided for all elevators; except when car door 
interlock, conforming to 2.26.2.28 is provided. 

2.26.2.16 Emergency Terminal Stopping Devices. 

Emergency terminal stopping devices conforming to 
2.25.4.2 shall be provided for all elevators where static 
control is used, unless exempted by 2.25.4.2. 

2.26.2.18 Car Top Emergency Exit Electrical Device. 

An electrical device conforming to 2.14.1.5.1(f) shall be 
provided on the car top emergency exit cover. 

2.26.2.19 Motor-Generator Overspeed Protection. 

Means shall be provided to cause the electric power to 
be removed automatically from the elevator driving- 
machine motor and brake should a motor-generator set, 
driven by a DC motor, overspeed excessively. 

2.26.2.20 Electric Contacts for Hinged Car Platform 
Sills. Hinged car platform sills, where provided, shall 
be equipped with electric contacts conforming to 2.15.16. 

2.26.2.21 In-Car Stop Switch. On passenger elevators, 
a stop switch, either key operated or behind a locked 
cover, shall be provided in the car and located in or 
adjacent to the car operating panel. The key shall be 
Group 1 Security (see 8.1). 

The switch shall be clearly and permanently marked 
"STOP" and shall indicate the "STOP" and "RUN" posi- 
tions. 



92 



2.26.9.5-2.26.12.3 



ASftAEA17.1a-2005 



2.26.9.5 Except for elevators employing alternating- 
current hoist motors driven from a direct-current source 
through a static inverter (see 2.26.9.6), elevators with 
driving motors employing static control without motor- 
generator sets shall conform to 2.26.9.5.1 through 
2.26.9.5.6. 

2.26.9.5.1 Two devices shall be provided to 
remove power independently from the driving-machine 
motor. At least one device shall be an electromechanical 
contactor. 

2.26.9.5.2 The contactor shall be arranged to open 
each time the car stops. 

2.26.9.53 The contactor shall cause the driving- 
machine brake circuit to open. 

2.26.9.5.4 An additional contactor shall be pro- 
vided to also open the driving-machine brake circuit. 
This contactor is not required to have contacts in the 
driving-machine motor circuit. 

2.26.9.5.5 The electrical protective devices 
required by 2.26.2 shall control the solid state device 
and both contactors, except that leveling shall be permit- 
ted to take place with power opening of doors and gates 
in conformance with 2.13.2.1.1 and 2.13.2.2.1. 

2.26.9.5.6 After each elevator stop, the car shall 
not respond to a signal to start unless both contactors 
are in the de-energized position. 

2.26.9.6 Elevators employing alternating-current 
driving motors driven from a direct-current power 
source through a static inverter shall conform to 
2.26.9.6.1 through 2.26.9.6.6. 

2.26.9.6.1 Two separate means shall be provided 
to independently inhibit the flow of alternating-current 
through the solid state devices that connect the direct- 
current power source to the alternating-current driving 
motor. At least one of the means shall be an electrome- 
chanical relay. 

2.26.9.6.2 The relay shall be arranged to open each 
time the car stops. 

2.26.9.63 The relay shall cause the driving- 
machine brake circuit to open. 

2.26.9.6.4 An additional contactor shall be pro- 
vided to also open the driving-machine brake circuit. 
This contactor is not required to have contacts in the 
driving machine motor circuit. 

2.26.9.6.5 The electrical protective devices 
required by 2.26.2 shall control both the means that 
inhibit the flow of alternating current through the solid 
state devices and the contactors in the brake circuit, 
except that leveling shall be permitted to take place with 
power opening of the doors and gates as restricted by 
2.13.2.1.1 and 2.13.2.2.1. 



2.26.9.6.6 After each elevator stop, the car shall 
not respond to a signal to start unless the relay that 
inhibits the flow of alternating current through the solid- 
state devices, as well as the contactors in the brake cir- 
cuit, are in the de-energized position. 

2.26.9.7 Where generator-field control is used, 
means shall be provided to prevent the generator from 
building up and applying sufficient current to the eleva- 
tor driving-machine motor to move the car when the 
elevator motor control switches are in the "OFF" posi- 
tion. The means used shall not interfere with mainte- 
nance of an effective dynamic-braking circuit during 
stopping and standstill conditions. 

2.26.9.8 The control circuits shall be so designed 
and installed that the car speed in the down direction 
with rated load in the car, under normal operating condi- 
tions with the power supply on or off, shall not exceed 
governor tripping speed, or 125% of rated speed, which- 
ever is the lesser (see also 2.16.8). 

2.26.10 Absorption of Regenerated Power 

When a power source is used that, in itself, is incapable 
of absorbing the energy generated by an overhauling 
load, means for absorbing sufficient energy to prevent 
the elevator from attaining governor tripping speed or 
a speed in excess of 125% of rated speed, whichever is 
less, shall be provided on the load side of each elevator 
power supply line disconnecting means (see 2.16.8). 

2.26.11 Car Platform to Hoistway Door Sills Vertical 
Distance 

Where ANSI/ICC A117.1 or ADAAG is not applica- 
ble, the vertical distance between the car platform sill 
and the hoistway door sill on passenger elevators shall 
be in accordance with the following: 

(a) it shall not exceed 13 mm (0.5 in.) on initial stop 
at a landing 

(b) the car shall relevel if the vertical distance exceeds 
25 mm (1 in.) while loading or unloading 

2.26.12 Symbols 

2.26.12.1 Where reference is made requiring word- 
ing to designate a specific function, the symbols as 
shown in Table 2.26.12.1 shall be substituted for, or used 
in conjunction with, the required wording. 

2.26.12.2 The emergency stop switch shall have the 
"STOP" and "RUN" positions conspicuously and per- 
manently marked as required by 2.26.2.5(c). 

2.26.123 Where Braille is provided it shall conform (ED) 
to the requirements in Table 2.26.12.1. 

NOTE (2.26.12): See also ANSI/ICC A117.1, ADAAG, and B44 
Appendix E. 



95 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



Table 2.26.12.1 Symbol Identification 



Function 



Tactile Symbol 



Braille Message 
Where Provided 



Proportions 

(Open Circles Indicate Unused Dots Within 

Each Braille Cell) 



Door Open 



<!► 



• •• 

• • • 

• • • 

OP"EN" 



t 



2.0 mm 

■lh 



3.0 mm typical 
J between elements 



16.0 mm 



4.8 mm 



Rear/Side 
Door Open 



<► 



• •• 

• • • 

• • • 

REAR/SIDE OP"EN" 



■ 



Door Close 



►H 



•• • • • • 

• • • <§ 

• • • 

CLOSE 



•• ao ao oa ao 
oo ao o« ao oa 
oo ao ao ao oo 



Rear/Side 
Door Close 



M 



•• • • • • 

• • • <• 

• • • 

REAR/SIDE CLOSE 




•• ao ao oa ao 
00 *o o« »o o« 
oo «o *o *o oo 



Main 



• •• 

MA"IN" 



l\ 



!! 



li^il 



\\ 



•• *o oo 



Alarm 



± 



• • • •• 

• • • 
AL"AR"M 




•o «o o* •• 
oo ao o* oo 
oo »o »o ao 



Phone 



c 



• •• • 

• •• • • 

• • 

PH"0NE" 






•• ao oo ao 
ao »m oa oa 
ao oo oo ao 



Emergency 
Stop 



© 



• • •• 

• • • 
"STOP 




oa ao aa 



96 



2.26.12.4-2.27.1.2 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



2.26.12.4 Identify "HELP" button [see 2.27.1.1.3(b)] 
and visual indication [see 2.27.1.1.3(c)] with the phone 
symbol. 

SECTION 2.27 
EMERGENCY OPERATION AND SIGNALING DEVICES 

NOTE (2.27): Additional requirements may be found in the build- 
ing code. 

2.27.1 Car Emergency Signaling Devices 
2.27.1.1 Emergency Communications 

2.27.1.1.1 A two-way communications means 
between the car and a location in the building, that is 
readily accessible to authorized and emergency person- 
nel shall be provided. 

2.27.1.1.2 When the two-way communications 
location in the building is not staffed 24 h a day, by 
authorized personnel who can take appropriate action, 
the means of two-way communications shall automati- 
cally be directed within 30 s to an additional on- or off- 
site location, staffed by authorized personnel, where an 
appropriate response can be taken. 

2.27.1.13 The two-way communication means 
within the car shall comply with the following require- 
ments: 

(a) In jurisdictions enforcing NBCC, Appendix E of 
CAN/CSA B44, or in jurisdictions not enforcing NBCC, 
ICC/ANSI A117.1. 

(b) A push button to actuate the two-way communica- 
tion means shall be provided in or adjacent to a car 
operating panel. The push button shall be visible and 
permanently identified as "HELP." The identification 
shall be on or adjacent to the "HELP" button. When 
the push button is actuated, the emergency two-way 
communication means shall initiate a call for help and 
establish two-way communications. 

(c) A visual indication on the same panel as the 
"HELP" push button shall be provided, which is acti- 
vated by authorized personnel, to acknowledge that 
two-way communications link has been established. The 
visual indication shall be extinguished when the two- 
way communication link is terminated. 

(d) The two-way communication means shall provide 
on demand to authorized personnel, information that 
identifies the building location and elevator number and 
that assistance is required. 

(e) After the call acknowledgement signals are sent 
[2.27.1.1.3(c)], the two-way voice communications shall 
be available between the car and authorized personnel. 

(f) The two-way communications, once established, 
shall be disconnected only when authorized personnel 
outside the car terminate the call. 

(g) The two-way communication means shall not use 
a handset in the car. 



(h) The two-way communications shall not be trans- 
mitted to an automated answering system. The call for 
help shall be answered by authorized personnel. 

(i) Operating instructions shall be incorporated with 
or adjacent to the "HELP" button. 

2.27.1.1.4 Where the elevator travel is 18 m (60 ft) 
or more, a two-way voice communication means within 
the building shall be provided and comply with the 
following requirements: 

(a) The means shall enable emergency personnel 
within the building to establish two-way voice commu- 
nications to each car individually. Two-way voice com- 
munication shall be established without any intentional 
delay and shall not require intervention by a person 
within the car. The means shall override communica- 
tions to outside of the building. 

(b) Two-way voice communications, once established, 
shall be disconnected only when emergency personnel 
outside the car terminates the call. 

(c) Once the two-way voice communication has been 
established, the visual indication [see 2.27.1.1.3(c)] 
within the car shall illuminate. The visual indication 
shall be extinguished when the two-way communication 
is terminated. 

(d) Operating instructions shall be incorporated with 
or adjacent to the two-way voice communication outside 
the car. Instructions shall conform to 2.27.7.3. 

2.27.1.1.5 If the emergency communication (05a) 
means is normally connected to the building's main 
power supply, it shall automatically transfer to an alter- 
nate source(s) of power when normal power supply fails. 

The alternate source(s) of power (standby, emergency, 
etc.) shall be capable of providing power for illumination 
of the visual indication [see 2.27.1.1.3(c)] within the car, 
and the means of emergency communications for at least 
4 h; and the audible signaling device (see 2.27.1.2) for 
at least 1 h. 

2.27.1.2 Emergency Stop Switch Audible Signal. 

When an emergency stop switch (2.26.2.5) is provided, 
an audible signaling device shall be provided. The audi- 
ble signaling device shall 

(a) have a rated sound pressure rating of not less than 
80 dBA nor greater than 90 dBA at 3 m (10 ft) 

(b) respond without delay after the switch has been 
activated 

(c) be located inside the building and audible inside 
the car and outside the hoistway 

(d) for elevators with a travel greater than 30 m 
(100 ft), be duplicated as follows: 

(1) one device shall be mounted on the car 

(2) a second device shall be placed at the desig- 
nated level 



97 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



2.27.2-2.27.3.1.5 



2.27.2 Emergency or Standby Power System 

Where an emergency or standby power system is pro- 
vided to operate an elevator in the event of normal 
power supply failure, the requirements of 2.27.2.1 
through 2.27.2.5 shall be complied with. 

2.27.2.1 The emergency or standby power system 
shall be capable of operating the elevator(s) with rated 
load (see 2.16.8), at least one at a time, unless otherwise 
required by the building code. 

2.27.2.2 The transfer between the normal and the 
emergency or standby power system shall be automatic. 

2.27.2.3 An illuminated signal marked "ELEVATOR 
EMERGENCY POWER" shall be provided in the eleva- 
tor lobby at the designated level to indicate that the 
normal power supply has failed and the emergency or 
standby power is in effect. 

2.27.2.4 Where the emergency or standby power 
system is not capable of operating all elevators simulta- 
neously, requirements of 2.27.2.4.1 through 2.27.2.4.5 
shall be conformed to. 

2.27.2.4.1 A selector switch(es) marked "ELEVA- 
TOR EMERGENCY POWER" in red lettering a mini- 
mum of 5 mm (0.25 in.) in height, which is key-operated 
or under a locked cover (see 2.27.8), shall be provided 
to permit the selection of the elevator(s) to operate on 
the emergency or standby power system. The key shall 
be Group 3 Security (see 8.1). 

2.27.2.4.2 The selector switch(es) positions shall 
be marked to correspond with the elevator identification 
number (see 2.29) and a position marked "AUTO." 

2.27.2.4.3 The selector switch(es) shall be located 
at the designated level in view of all elevator entrances, 
or if located elsewhere means shall be provided adjacent 
to the selector switch(es) to indicate that the elevator is 
at the designated level with the doors in the normally 
open position. 

2.27.2.4.4 When the selector switch is in the 
"AUTO" position, automatic power selection shall be 
provided, which will return each elevator that is not on 
designated attendant operation, inspection operation or 
Phase II In-Car Emergency Operation, one or more at a 
time, to the recall level. Failure of the selected car to 
move shall cause power to be transferred to another car. 

2.27.2.4.5 The selector switch(es) positions corres- 
ponding to the elevator identification numbers (see 
2.29.1) shall override the automatic power selection. 
Operation of the selector switch(es) shall not cause 
power to be removed from any elevator until the elevator 
is stopped. 

NOTE (2.27.2.4): The selector switch(es) should normally be placed 
in the "AUTO" position. 



2.27.2.5 When the emergency or standby power sys- 
tem is designed to operate only one elevator at a time, 
the energy absorption means (if required) shall be per- 
mitted to be located on the supply side of the elevator 
power disconnecting means, provided all other require- 
ments of 2.26.10 are conformed to when operating any 
of the elevators the power might serve. Other building 
loads, such as power and lights that can be supplied by 
the emergency or standby power system, shall not be 
considered as a means of absorbing the regenerated 
energy for the purposes of conforming to 2.26.10, unless 
such loads are normally powered by the emergency or 
standby power system. 

2.27.3 Firefighters' Emergency Operation: Automatic 
Elevators 

Firefighters' Emergency Operation shall apply to all 
automatic elevators except 

(a) where the hoistway or a portion thereof is not 
required to be fire-resistive construction (see 2.1.1.1), the 
travel does not exceed 2 000 mm (80 in.), and the 
hoistway does not penetrate a floor 

(b) in jurisdictions enforcing the NBCC where the 
NBCC does not require Firefighters' Emergency Oper- 
ation 

Where Firefighters' Emergency Operation is provided 
voluntarily these requirements shall also apply. 

2.27.3.1 Phase I Emergency Recall Operation 

2.27.3.1.1 A three-position key-operated switch 
shall be 

(a) provided only at the designated level for each 
single elevator or for each group of elevators. 

(b) labeled "FIRE RECALL" and its positions marked 
"RESET," "OFF," and "ON" (in that order), with the 
"OFF" position as the center position. The "FIRE 
RECALL" letters shall be a minimum of 5 mm (0.25 in.) 
high in red or a color contrasting with a red background. 

(c) located in the lobby within sight of the elevator or 
all elevators in that group and shall be readily accessible. 

2.27.3.1.2 An additional key-operated "FIRE 
RECALL" switch, with two positions, marked "OFF" 
and "ON" (in that order), shall be permitted only at the 
building fire control station. 

2.27.3.1.3 The switch(es) shall be rotated clock- 
wise to go from the "RESET" (designated level switch 
only), to "OFF" to "ON" positions. Keys shall be remov- 
able only in the "OFF" and "ON" positions. 

2.27.3.1.4 Only the "FIRE RECALL" switch(es) or 
fire alarm initiating device located at floors that are 
served by the elevator, or in the hoistway, or in the 
elevator machine room (see 2.27.3.2) shall initiate Phase 
I Emergency Recall Operation. 

2.27.3.1.5 All "FIRE RECALL" switches shall be 
provided with an illuminated visual signal to indicate 



98 



2.27.3.1.5-2.27.3.2.1 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



when Phase I Emergency Recall Operation is in effect. 

2.273.1.6 When a "FIRE RECALL" switch is in 
the "ON" position all cars controlled by the switch shall 
operate as follows: 

(a) A car traveling towards the designated level shall 
continue nonstop to the designated level and power- 
operated doors shall open and remain open. 

On cars with two entrances, if both entrances can be 
opened at the designated level, only the doors serving 
the lobby where the "FIRE RECALL" switch is located 
shall open and remain open. 

(b) A car traveling away from the designated level 
shall reverse at or before the next available landing with- 
out opening its doors and proceed to designated level. 

(c) A stopped car shall have the in-car stop switch 
(see 2.26.2.21) and the emergency stop switch in the car 
(see 2.26.2.5) when provided, rendered inoperative as 
soon as the car moves away from the landing. A moving 
car shall have the in-car stop switch and the emergency 
stop switch in the car when provided, rendered inopera- 
tive without delay. Once the emergency stop switch in 
the car and the in-car stop switch have been rendered 
inoperative, they shall remain inoperative while the car 
is on Phase I Emergency Recall Operation. All other stop 
switches required by 2.26.2 shall remain operative. 

(d) A car standing at a landing other than the desig- 
nated level, with the doors open and the in-car stop 
switch and the emergency stop switch in the car when 
provided, in the run position, shall conform to the fol- 
lowing: 

(1) Elevators having automatic power-operated 
horizontally sliding doors shall close the doors without 
delay and proceed to the designated level. 

(2) Elevators having power-operated vertically 
sliding doors provided with automatic or momentary 
pressure closing operation per 2.13.3.4 shall have the 
closing sequence initiated without delay in accordance 
with 2.13.3.4.1, 2.13.3.4.2, 2.13.3.4.3, and 2.13.3.4.5, and 
the car shall proceed to the designated level. 

(3) Elevators having power-operated doors pro- 
vided with continuous pressure closing operation (see 
2.13.3.2), or elevators having manual doors, shall be pro- 
vided with a visual and audible signal system [see 
2.27.3.1.6(h)] to alert an operator to close the doors and 
shall, when the doors are closed, proceed to the desig- 
nated level. Sequence operation, if provided, shall 
remain effective. 

(e) Door reopening devices for power-operated doors 
that are sensitive to smoke or flame shall be rendered 
inoperative without delay. Door reopening devices not 
sensitive to smoke or flame (e.g., mechanically actuated 
devices) are permitted to remain operative. Door closing 
for power-operated doors shall conform to 2.13.5. 

(f) All car and corridor call buttons shall be rendered 
inoperative. All call-registered lights and directional lan- 
terns shall be extinguished and remain inoperative. Car 



position indicators, where provided, shall remain opera- 
tive. Where provided, landing position indicators shall 
be extinguished and remain inoperative, except at the 
designated level and the building fire control station, 
where they shall remain operative. 

(g) Where provided on elevators with vertically slid- 
ing doors, corridor door open and door close buttons 
shall remain operative. 

(h) An illuminated visual and audible signal system (04) 
shall be activated. The visual signal shall be one of the 
symbols shown in Fig. 2.27.3.1.6(h) and located on the 
car-operating panel. The entire circular or square area 
or the outline of the hat, or the outline of the area shown 
in Fig. 2.27.3.1.6(h) shall be illuminated. The visual sig- 
nal shall remain activated until the car is restored to 
automatic operation. When the door is open, the audible 
signal shall remain active until the door is closed. When 
the door is closed, the audible signal shall remain active 
for a minimum of 5 s. The audible signal shall not be 
active when the car is at the recall level. 

(/) A car stopped at a landing shall have the in-car 
door open button rendered inoperative as soon as the 
car moves away from the landing. The in-car door close 
button shall remain inoperative when a car stops to 
reverse direction. Once the in-car door open button has 
been rendered inoperative, it shall remain inoperative 
until the car has returned to the designated level. 

(j) Where an additional "FIRE RECALL" switch is 
provided, both "FIRE RECALL" switches shall be in the 
"ON" position to recall the elevator to the designated 
level if the elevator was recalled to the alternate level 
(see 2.27.3.2.4). 

(k) To remove the elevator(s) from Phase I Emergency 
Recall Operation, the "FIRE RECALL" switch shall be 
rotated first to the "RESET," and then to the "OFF" 
position, provided that 

(1) the additional two-position "FIRE RECALL" 
switch, where provided, is in the "OFF" position 

(2) no fire alarm initiating device is activated (see 
2.27.3.2). 

(I) Means used to remove elevators from normal oper- 
ation, other than as specified in this Code, shall not 
prevent Phase I Emergency Recall Operation. 

(m) No device, which measures load, shall prevent 
operation of the elevator at or below the capacity and 
loading required in 2.16. 

2.27.3.2 Phase I Emergency Recall Operation by Fire 
Alarm Initiating Devices 

2.27.3.2.1 In jurisdictions not enforcing the 
NBCC, fire alarm initiating devices used to initiate Phase 
I Emergency Recall Operation shall be installed in con- 
formance with the requirements of NFPA 72, and shall 
be located 

(a) at each floor served by the elevator 

(b) in the associated elevator machine room 



99 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



2.27.3.2.1-2.27.3.3 



ft 



^ 



:§*; 



-25 mm (1 in.) min. 



25 mm 
(1 in.) 
min. 




GENERAL NOTE: Grid is for scaling purposes only. 



Fig. 2.27.3.1.6(h) Visual Signal 



(c) in the elevator hoistway, when sprinklers are 
located in those hoistways 

2.27.3.2.2 In jurisdictions enforcing the NBCC, 
automatic Emergency Recall Operation shall be permit- 
ted when the following devices, complying with the 
requirements in the NBCC, initiate the operation: 

(a) smoke detectors installed in each elevator lobby, 
or the building fire alarm system 

(b) smoke detectors installed in the elevator lobby at 
the designated level, if that floor area is not sprinklered 
throughout 

(c) smoke detectors installed in the machine room if 
the machine room is sprinklered 

2.27.3.2.3 Phase I Emergency Recall Operation to 
the designated level shall conform to the following: 

(a) The activation of a fire alarm initiating device 
specified in 2.27.3.2.1 or 2.27.3.2.2(a) at any floor, other 
than at the designated level, shall cause all elevators 
that serve that floor, and any associated elevator of a 
group automatic operation, to be returned nonstop to 
the designated level. 

(b) The activation of a fire alarm initiating device 
specified in 2.27.3.2.1(b) or 2.27.3.2.2(c) shall cause all 
elevators having any equipment located in that machine 
room, and any associated elevators of a group automatic 
operation, to be returned nonstop to the designated 
level. If the machine room is located at the designated 
level, the elevator(s) shall be returned nonstop to the 
alternate level. 

(c) The activation of a fire alarm initiating device spec- 
ified in 2.27.3.2.1(c) shall cause all elevators having any 
equipment in that hoistway, and any associated elevators 
of a group automatic operation, to be returned nonstop 
to the designated level, except that initiating device(s) 
installed at or below the lowest landing of recall shall 
cause the car to be sent to the upper recall level. 

(d) The Phase I Emergency Recall Operation to the 
designated level shall conform to 2.27.3.1.6(a) through 
(m). 



2.27.3.2.4 Phase I Emergency Recall Operation to 
an alternate level (see 1.3) shall conform to the following: 

(a) the activation of a fire alarm initiating device spec- 
ified in 2.27.3.2.1(a) or 2.27.3.2.2(b) that is located at the 
designated level, shall cause all elevators serving that 
level to be recalled to an alternate level, unless Phase I 
Emergency Recall is in effect 

(b) the requirements of 2.27.3.1.6(f), (j), and (m) 

(c) the requirements of 2.27.3.1.6(a), (b), (c), (d), (e), 
(g), (h), (i), (k), and (1), except that all references to the 
"designated level" shall be replaced with "alternate 
level" 

2.27.3.2.5 The recall level shall be determined by 
the first activated fire alarm initiating device for that 
group [see 2.27.3.2.1 or 2.27.3.2.2]. 

If the car(s) is recalled to the designated level by the 
"FIRE RECALL" switch(es) [see also 2.27.3.1. 6(j)], the 
recall level shall remain the designated level. 

2.27.3.2.6 When a fire alarm initiating device in 
the machine room or hoistway initiates Phase I Emer- 
gency Recall Operation, as required by 2.27.3.2.3 or 
2.27.3.2.4, the visual signal [see 2.27.3.1.6(h) and Fig. 
2.27.3.1.6(h)] shall illuminate intermittently only in a 
car(s) with equipment in that machine room or hoistway. 
When activated, heat detector [2.27.3.2.1(d)] in the 
machine room shall cause the visual signal [see 
2.27.3.1.6(h) and Fig. 2.27.3.1.6(h)] to illuminate intermit- 
tently only in a car(s) with equipment in that machine 
room. 

2.27.3.3 Phase II Emergency In-Car Operation. A 

three-position ("OFF," "HOLD," and "ON," in that 
order) key-operated switch shall be labeled "FIRE 
OPERATION"; provided in an operating panel in each 
car; and shall be readily accessible. The label "FIRE 
OPERATION" lettering shall be a minimum of 5 mm 
(0.25 in.) high in red or a color contrasting with a red 



(05a) 



(05a) 



(04) 



100 



2.27.3.3-2.27.3.3.4 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



background. It shall become effective only when Phase 

I Emergency Recall Operation is in effect and the car 
has been returned to the recall level. The switch shall 
be rotated clockwise to go from "OFF" to "HOLD" to 
"ON." 

The key shall only be removable in the "OFF" and 
"HOLD" position. The "OFF/' "HOLD," and "ON" posi- 
tions shall not change the mode of operation within 
Phase II Emergency In-Car Operation until the car is at 
a landing with the doors in the normal open position, 
except as required by 2.27.3.3.4. 

(04) 2.273.3.1 When the "FIRE OPERATION" switch 

is in the "ON" position, the elevator shall be on Phase 

II Emergency In-Car Operation, for use by emergency 
personnel only, and the elevator shall operate as follows: 

(a) The elevator shall be operable only by a person 
in the car. 

(b) The car shall not respond to landing calls. Direc- 
tional lanterns, where provided, shall remain inopera- 
tive. Car position indicators, where provided, shall 
remain operative. Landing position indicators, where 
provided, shall remain inoperative, except at the desig- 
nated level and the building fire control station, where 
they shall remain operative. 

(c) Door open and close buttons shall be provided 
for power-operated doors and located as required by 
2.27.3.3.7. The door open and door close buttons shall 
be labeled "OPEN" and "CLOSE." 

(d) The opening of power-operated doors shall be 
controlled only by a continuous pressure door open but- 
ton. If the button is released prior to the doors reaching 
the normal open position, the doors shall automatically 
reclose. Requirements 2.13.3.3, 2.13.3.4, 2.13.4.2.1(b)(2), 
and 2.13.4.2.1(c) do not apply. 

On cars with multiple entrances, if more than one 
entrance can be opened at the same landing, separate 
door open buttons shall be provided for each entrance. 

(e) Open power-operated doors shall be closed only 
by continuous pressure on the door close button. If the 
button is released prior to the doors reaching the fully 
closed position, horizontally sliding doors shall auto- 
matically reopen, and vertically sliding doors shall auto- 
matically stop or stop and reopen. 

On cars with multiple entrances, if more than one 
entrance can be opened at the same landing, a separate 
door close button shall be provided for each entrance. 

(/) Opening and closing of power-operated car doors 
or gates that are opposite manual swing or manual slide 
hoistway doors shall conform to 2.27.3.3.1(d) and (e). 

(g) All door reopening devices, except the door open 
button, shall be rendered inoperative. Full speed closing 
shall be permitted. 

Landing door opening and closing buttons, where 
provided, shall be rendered inoperative. 

(h) Every car shall be provided with a button labeled 
"CALL CANCEL," located as required in 2.27.3.3.7, 



which shall be effective during Phase II Emergency In- 
Car Operation. When activated, all registered calls shall 
be canceled and a traveling car shall stop at or before 
the next available landing. 

(i) Floor selection buttons shall be provided in the car 
to permit travel to all landings served by the car, and 
they shall be operative at all times, except as in 2.27.3.3.2. 
Means to prevent the operation of the floor selection 
buttons or door-operating buttons shall be rendered 
inoperative. 

(j) A traveling car shall stop at the next available land- 
ing for which a car call was registered. When a car stops 
at a landing, all registered car calls shall be canceled. 

(k) Means used to remove elevators from normal 
operation, other than as specified in this Code, shall not 
prevent Phase II Emergency In-Car Operation. 

(/) No device, which measures load, shall prevent 
operation of the elevator at or below the capacity and 
loading required in 2.16. 

(m) Every car shall be provided with a switch, con- 
forming to the requirements of 2.26.2.33 and located as 
required in 2.27.3.3.7. When the switch is in the "STOP" 
position, all registered calls shall be canceled and power 
shall be removed from the elevator driving-machine 
motor and brake. When the switch is moved to the 
"RUN" position from the "STOP" position, the car shall 
not move, except for leveling, until a call is entered. 

2.27.3.3.2 When the car is at a landing, with the 
doors open, and the "FIRE OPERATION" switch is in 
the "HOLD" position, the car shall remain at the landing 
with the doors open. The door close buttons shall be 
inoperative, and car calls shall not be registered. 

2.27.3.3.3 When the car is at a landing other than 
the recall level, with the doors in the normal open posi- 
tion, and, the "FIRE OPERATION" switch is in the 
"OFF" position, power-operated doors shall operate as 
follows: 

(a) Horizontal sliding doors shall close automatically. 
All door reopening devices shall remain inoperative. 
Door open buttons shall remain operative. Full-speed 
closing is permitted. If the "FIRE OPERATION" switch 
is turned to the "ON" or "HOLD" position prior to the 
completion of door closing, the doors shall reopen. 

(b) Elevators having vertically sliding doors shall 
have corridor "DOOR OPEN" and "DOOR CLOSE" but- 
tons rendered operative. All door reopening devices 
shall remain inoperative. Door closing shall be in accor- 
dance with 2.27.3.3.1(e). Full-speed closing is permitted. 
If the "FIRE OPERATION" switch is turned to the "ON" 
or "HOLD" position prior to the completion of door 
closing, the doors shall reopen. 

2.27.3.3.4 When the car is stopped with the doors 
in the closed position, or in motion, and the "FIRE OPER- 
ATION" switch is in the "OFF" position, the elevator 
remains on Phase II Emergency In-Car Operation and 



101 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



2.27.3.3.4-2.27.4.1 



shall return to the designated level in conformance with 
2.27.3.1.6(a) through (m). 

2.27.3.3.5 Elevators shall be removed from Phase 
II Emergency In-Car Operation only when the "FIRE 
OPERATION" switch is in the "OFF" position and the 
car is at the designated level and the doors are in the 
normal open position. 

2.27.3.3.6 The occurrence of an accidental ground 
or short circuit in elevator electrical equipment located 
on the landing side of the hoistway enclosure, and in 
associated wiring, shall not disable Phase II Emergency 
In-Car Operation once it has been activated. 

(04) 2.27.3.3.7 The "FIRE OPERATION" switch 

(ED) (2.27.3.3), the "CALL CANCEL" button [2.27.3.3.1(h)], 
the "STOP" switch [2.27.3.3.1(m)], the door open but- 
ton^), the door close button(s), the additional visual 
signal (2.27.3.3.8), and the operating instructions shown 
in Fig. 2.27.7.2 shall be grouped together at the top of 
a main car operating panel behind a locked cover. 

The firefighters' operation panel cover shall be open- 
able by the same key that operates the "FIRE OPERA- 
TION" switch. The cover shall be permitted to open 
automatically when the car is on Phase I Emergency 
Recall Operation and at the recall level. When the key 
is in the "FIRE OPERATION" switch, the cover shall 
not be capable of being closed. When closed, the cover 
shall be self-locking. 

Where rear doors are provided, buttons for both the 
front and rear doors shall be provided in the firefighters' 
operation panel. The door open and door close buttons 
for the rear entrance shall be labeled "OPEN REAR" 
and "CLOSE REAR." 

All buttons and switches shall be readily accessible, 
located not more than 1 800 mm (72 in.) above the floor 
and shall be arranged as shown in Fig. 2.27.3.3.7. 
Requirement 2.26.12 does not apply to these buttons and 
switches. The front of the cover shall contain the words 
"FIREFIGHTERS' OPERATION" in red letters at least 
10 mm (0.4 in.) high. 

(04) 2.27.3.3.8 An additional visual signal shall be pro- 

vided and located as required by 2.27.3.3.7. The addi- 
tional visual signal shall be one of the symbols shown 
in Fig. 2.27.3.1.6(h). The entire circular or square area 
shown in Fig. 2.27.3.1.6(h) shall be illuminated. This 
additional visual signal shall be activated whenever the 
visual signal in 2.27.3.1.6(h) is activated. 

2.27.3.4 Interruption of Power. Upon the resumption 
of power (normal, emergency, or standby), the car shall 
be permitted to move to reestablish absolute car posi- 
tion. Restoration of electrical power following a power 
interruption shall not cause any elevator to be removed 
from Phase I Emergency Recall Operation or Phase II 
Emergency In-Car Operation. 



Call 



cancel 
button 



Door _^^ 
open 
button 




Additional 
visual signal 

4 



O O 



o © cr 



Door — 
open 
button 
(rear), 
when 
required 



-O 



O 



Stop 
switch 



Door 
close 
button 



Fire operation 
key switch 



Door 
close 
button 
(rear), 
when 
required 



GENERAL NOTES: 

(a) Switches and buttons show only the location not the labeling. 

(b) When manually operated doors are provided, door open and 
close buttons and instructions for their use are not required. 

(c) Not to scale. 

Fig. 2.27.3.3.7 Panel Layout 



2.27.3.5 Multicompartment Elevators. Multicompart- 
ment elevators shall also conform to 2.27.3.5.1 and 
2.27.3.5.2. 

2.27.3.5.1 The "FIRE RECALL" switch (2.27.3.1) 
shall be located at the designated level served by the 
upper compartment. 

2.27.3.5.2 The "FIRE OPERATION" switch (see 
2.27.3.3) shall be located in the upper compartment. The 
elevator shall be provided with a means for placing 
the lower compartment out of service, located in that 
compartment or adjacent to the entrance at the lower 
lobby landing. 

2.27.4 Firefighters' Emergency Operation: 
Nonautomatic Elevators 

Firefighters' Emergency Operation shall apply to all 
nonautomatic elevators, except as follows: 

(a) where the hoistway or a portion thereof is not 
required to be fire-resistive construction (see 2.1.1.1), the 
travel does not exceed 2 000 mm (80 in.), and the 
hoistway does not penetrate a floor 

(b) in jurisdictions enforcing the NBCC where the 
NBCC does not require Firefighters' Emergency Oper- 
ation 

(c) where Firefighters' Emergency Operation is pro- 
vided voluntarily these requirements shall also apply 

2.27.4.1 Phase I Emergency Recall Operation. A 

three-position key-operated switch shall be provided at 



(04) 



102 



2.27.4.1-2.27.5.3 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



the designated level for each single elevator or for each 
group of elevators. The three-position switch shall be 
labeled "FIRE RECALL" and its positions marked 
"RESET," "OFF," and "ON" (in that order), with the 
"OFF" position as the center position. The "FIRE 
RECALL" letters shall be a minimum of 5 mm (0.25 in.) 
high in red or a color contrasting with a red background. 
The three-position switch shall be located in the lobby 
within sight of the elevator or all elevators in that group 
and shall be readily accessible. 

An additional "FIRE RECALL" switch with two-posi- 
tions, "OFF" and "ON" (in that order), shall be permitted 
only at the building fire control station. 

The switch(es) shall be rotated clockwise to go from 
the "RESET" (designated level switch only), to the 
"OFF" and to the "ON" positions. All keys shall be 
removable only in the "OFF" and "ON" positions. 

Only the "FIRE RECALL" switch(es) or fire alarm 
initiating devices located at floors that are served by the 
elevator, or in the hoistway, or in the elevator machine 
room (see 2.27.3.2) shall initiate Phase I Emergency 
Recall Operation. All "FIRE RECALL" switches shall be 
provided with an illuminated visual signal to indicate 
when Phase I Emergency Recall Operation is in effect. 

When all switches are in the "OFF" position, normal 
elevator service shall be in effect and the fire alarm 
initiating devices required by 2.27.4.2 shall be operative. 

When a "FIRE RECALL" switch is in the "ON" posi- 
tion, a visual and audible signal shall be provided to 
alert the attendant to return nonstop to the designated 
or alternate level. The visual signal shall read "FIRE 

RECALL — RETURN TO " [insert level to which 

the car should be returned (the designated or alternate 
level)]. The signal system shall be activated when Phase 
I Emergency Recall Operation is in effect. 

Where an additional "FIRE RECALL" switch is pro- 
vided, both "FIRE RECALL" switches must be in the 
"ON" position to recall the elevator to the designated 
level if the elevator was recalled to the alternate level. 

Where an additional "FIRE RECALL" switch is pro- 
vided, it shall not affect the visual signal if the designated 
level fire alarm initiating device (see 2.27.3.2.4) has been 
activated. 

To extinguish the audible and visual signals, the "FIRE 
RECALL" switch shall be rotated first to the "RESET" 
and then to the "OFF" position, provided that: 

(a) the additional two-position "FIRE RECALL" 
switch, where provided, is in the "OFF" position 

(b) no fire alarm initiating device is activated (see also 
2.27.3.2.4) 

No device, which measures load, shall prevent opera- 
tion of the elevator at or below the capacity and loading 
required in 2.16. 

(04) 2.27.4.2 Phase I Emergency Recall Operation by Fire 
Alarm Initiating Devices. Fire alarm initiating devices 
shall be installed at each floor served by the elevator, and 



in the associated machine room and elevator hoistway, in 
compliance with the requirements in NFPA 72 or NBCC, 
whichever is applicable (see Part 9). In jurisdictions 
enforcing the NBCC, compliance with 2.27.4.2 is not 
required where the NBCC specifies manual Emergency 
Recall operations only. 

Phase I Emergency Recall Operation, conforming to 
2.27.4.1, shall be initiated when any Phase I Emergency 
Recall Operation fire alarm initiating device at the eleva- 
tor lobbies, machine room, or hoistway is activated. 

Phase I Emergency Recall Operation, when initiated 
by a Phase I Emergency Recall Operation fire alarm 
initiating device, shall be maintained until canceled by 
moving the "FIRE RECALL" switch to the "RESET" 
position. 

When a fire alarm initiating device in the machine 
room or hoistway initiates Phase I Emergency Recall 
Operation, as required by 2.27.3.2.3 or 2.27.3.2.4, the 
visual signal [see 2.27.3.1.6(h) and Fig. 2.27.3.1.6(h)] shall 
illuminate intermittently only in a car(s) with equipment 
in that machine room or hoistway. When activated, a 
heat detector [2.27.3.2.1(d)] in the machine room shall 
cause the visual signal [see 2.27.3.1.6(h) and Fig. 
2.27.3.1.6(h)] to illuminate intermittently only in a car(s) 
with equipment in that machine room. 

2.27.5 Firefighters* Emergency Operation: Automatic 
Elevators With Designated-Attendant 
Operation 

2.27.5.1 When designated-attendant operation is 
not in effect, elevators shall conform to 2.27.3. 

2.27.5.2 When operated by a designated attendant 
in the car, except hospital service: 

(a) elevators parked at a floor shall conform to 
2.27.3.1.6(h). At the completion of a time delay of not 
less than 10 s and not more than 30 s, elevators shall 
conform to 2.27.3. 

(b) A moving car shall conform to 2.27.3. 

2.27.5.3 When an elevator that is provided with (05a) 
firefighters' emergency operation is on hospital service, 

a visual signal as shown in Fig. 2.27.3.1.6(h) shall illumi- 
nate and a continuous audible signal, audible within 
the car, shall sound when the "FIRE RECALL" switch(es) 
(see 2.27.3.1) is in the "ON" position or when a fire 
alarm initiating device (see 2.27.3.2) is activated to alert 
the operator of an emergency. A means located in the 
car shall be permitted for manually silencing the audible 
signal, after the signal has been active for at least 5 s. 
The signal shall be automatically reactivated when the 
doors open. 

The car shall remain under control of the operator 
until removed from hospital service. An elevator on 
firefighters' emergency operation shall not be placed on 
hospital service. 



103 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



2.27.6-2.28.1 



(05a) 



FIREFIGHTERS' OPERATION 

To recall elevators 
Insert fire key and turn to "ON" 



Fig. 2.27.7.1 Phase I Emergency Recall Operation 
Instructions 



2.27.6 Firefighters' Emergency Operation: Inspection 
Operation 

When an elevator that is provided with firefighters' 
service is on inspection operation (see 2.26.1.4 and 
2.26.1 .5) or when the hoistway access switch(es) has been 
enabled [see 2.12.7.3.3(a)], a continuous audible signal, 
audible at the location where the operation is activated 
shall sound when the "FIRE RECALL" switch(es) (see 
2.27.3.1) is in the "ON" position or when the fire alarm 
initiating device (see 2.27.3.2) is activated to alert the 
operator of an emergency. The car shall remain under 
the control of the operator until removed from inspection 
operation or hoistway access operation. Inspection oper- 
ation or hoistway access operation shall take precedence 
over Phase I Emergency Recall Operation and Phase II 
Emergency In-Car Operation. 

2.27.7 Firefighters' Emergency Operation: Operating 
Procedures 

2.27.7.1 Instructions for operation of elevators 
under Phase I Emergency Recall Operation shall be 
incorporated with or adjacent to the "FIRE RECALL" 
switch at the designated level. The instructions shall 
include only the wording shown in Fig. 2.27.7.1. 

2.27.7.2 A sign containing instructions for operation 
of elevators under Phase II Emergency In-Car Operation 
shall be incorporated with or adjacent to the switch 
in each car and shall be visible only when the cover 
(2.27.3.3.7) is open. The sign shall include only the word- 
ing and graphics shown in Fig. 2.27.7.2, except the fol- 
lowing: 

(a) For elevators with manually operated doors, the 
instructions for opening and closing the doors shall be 
permitted to be replaced with short phrases such as 
"PUSH DOOR" or "PULL DOOR UP." 

(b) For elevators with vertically sliding doors, the 
instruction for returning the car to the recall floor shall 
be permitted to be expanded to include instructions for 
closing the door. 

2.27.7.3 Instructions shall be in letters not less than 
3 mm (0.125 in.) in height and shall be permanently 
installed and protected against removal or defacement. 



2.27.7.4 In jurisdictions that enforce the NBCC, a 
symbol showing a red firefighters' hat on a contrasting 
background, as shown in Fig. 2.27.3.1.6(h) (figure not to 
scale), shall be used exclusively to identify elevators that 
comply with 2.27.3 and additional NBCC requirements. 
This identification shall be located on the elevator 
entrance frame or adjacent to it at each emergency recall 
level. The identification on the entrance frame, or adja- 
cent to it, shall be a minimum of 50 mm (2 in.) in height. 

2.27.8 Switch Keys 

The key switches required by 2.27.2 through 2.27.5 for 
all elevators in a building shall be operable by the same 
key. The keys shall be Group 3 Security (see 8.1). There 
shall be a key for each switch provided. 

These keys shall be kept on the premises in a location 
readily accessible to firefighters and emergency person- 
nel, but not where they are available to the public. Where 
provided, a lock box, including its lock and other compo- 
nents, shall conform to the requirements of UL 1037 (see 
Part 9). 

NOTE (2.27.8): Local authorities may specify additional require- 
ments for a uniform keyed lock box and its location to contain the 
necessary keys. 

2.27.9 Elevator Corridor Call Station Pictograph 

When the building code requires a sign be posted 
adjacent to hall call fixtures instructing occupants not 
to use the elevator in case of fire, the sign shown in Fig. 
2.27.9 shall be provided. The sign shall include only the 
wording and graphics shown in Fig. 2.27.9. When the 
building code specifies a different design, 2.27.9 shall 
not apply. 

SECTION 2.28 
LAYOUT DRAWINGS 

2.28.1 Information Required on Layout Drawings 

Elevator layout drawings shall, in addition to other 
data, indicate the following: 

(a) the maximum bracket spacing (see 2.23) 

(b) the estimated maximum vertical forces on the 
guide rails on application of the safety or other retarding 
device (see 2.23 and 2.19.3) 

(c) in the case of freight elevators for Class B or C 
loading (see 2.16.2.2), the horizontal forces on the guide- 
rail faces during loading and unloading, and the esti- 
mated maximum horizontal forces in a post-wise direc- 
tion on the guide-rail faces on the application of the 
safety device (see 2.23) 

(d) the size and linear weight kg/m (lb /ft) of any rail 
reinforcement, where provided (see 2.23) 

(e) the impact loads imposed on machinery and 
sheave beams, supports, and floors or foundations 
(see 2.9) 



(05a) 



104 



2.28.1-2.29.2 



ASME A17.1a-2005 





FIRE OPERATION 




/ \ flashing, exit elevator 


To operate car 


Insert fire key and turn to "OIN." 




Enter floor selection. 


To cancel 
floor selection 


Press "CALL CANCEL" button. 


To close door 


Press and hold "CLOSE" button. 


To open door 


Press and hold "OPEN" button. 


To hold car 
at floor 


With doors open, turn key to "HOLD." 


For emergency stop 


Use "STOP" switch. 


To automatically return 
to recall floor 


Turn key to "OFF." 



Fig. 2.27.7.2 Phase II Emergency In-Car Operation 



(05a) 



(f) the impact load on buffer supports due to buffer 
engagement at the maximum permissible speed and 
load (see 8.2.3) 

(g) where compensation tie-down is applied (see 
2.21.4.2), the load on the compensation tie-down sup- 
ports 

(h) the total static and dynamic loads from the gover- 
nor, ropes, and tension system 

(i) the horizontal forces on the building structure stip- 
ulated by 2.11.11.8 and 2.11.11.9 



SECTION 2.29 
IDENTIFICATION 

2.29.1 Identification of Equipment 

In buildings with more than one elevator, each eleva- 
tor in the building shall be assigned a unique alphabeti- 
cal or numerical identification, a minimum of 50 mm 



(2 in.) in height unless otherwise specified. The identifi- 
cation shall be painted on, engraved, or securely 
attached to 

(a) the driving machine 

(b) MG set 

(c) controller 

(d) selector 

(e) governor 

(f) main line disconnect switch 

(g) the crosshead, or where there is no crosshead, the 
car frame, such that it is visible from the top of the car 

(h) the car operating panel, minimum of 13 mm 
(0.5 in.) in height 

(i) adjacent to or on every elevator entrance at the 
designated level, minimum of 75 mm (3 in.) in height 

2.29.2 Identification of Floors 

Hoistways shall have floor numbers, not less than 
100 mm (4 in.) in height, on the hoistway side of the 
enclosure or hoistway doors. 



105 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



125 mm (5 in.) 



In Case Of Fire 
Elevators Are Out Of Service 




Use Exit 




White 




Black 




Red 



(05a) 



Fig. 2.27.9 Elevator Corridor Call Station Pictograph 



105.1 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



SCOPE-3.4.1.5 



Part 3 
Hydraulic Elevators 



SCOPE 

Part 3 applies to direct-acting hydraulic elevators and 
the roped-hydraulic types. 

NOTE: See also Part 8 for additional requirements that apply to 
hydraulic elevators. 

SECTION 3.1 

CONSTRUCTION OF HOISTWAYS AND HOISTWAY 

ENCLOSURES 

Hoistways, hoistway enclosures, and related construc- 
tion shall conform to 2.1.1 through 2.1.6 and 2.29.2, 
except 2.1.2.3, 2.1.3.1.2, and 2.1.3.2. 

3.1.1 Strength of Pit Floor 

The pit equipment, beams, floor, and their supports 
shall be designed and constructed to meet the applicable 
building code requirements and to withstand the follow- 
ing loads in the manner in which they occur: 

(a) the impact load due to car buffer engagement (see 
8.2.3 and 3.22.2) 

(b) where a plunger gripper, or car, or counterweight 
safety is furnished, the part of the load transmitted by 
the application of such gripper(s) or safety(s) 

(c) loads imposed by the hydraulic jack 

(1) to the cylinder during normal operation 

(2 ) to the buffer when resting on the buffer or dur- 
ing conditions described in 3.1.1(a) 

(d) hoist rope up-pull, where applicable, for indirect 
roped-hydraulic elevators 

3.1.2 Floors Over Hoistways 

The floor shall be located entirely above the horizontal 
plane required for hydraulic elevator top car clearance. 

When a hydraulic pump unit and /or control equip- 
ment is located on a floor over the hoistway, access shall 
comply with 2.7.3. 

SECTION 3.2 
PITS 

Pits shall conform to 2.2, except 2.2.7. 

3.2.1 Minimum Pit Depths Required 

The pit depth shall not be less than is required for the 
installation of the buffers, hydraulic jack, platform guard 
(apron), and all other elevator equipment located 



therein, and to provide the minimum bottom clearance 
and runby required by 3.4.1 and 3.4.2, respectively. 

SECTION 3.3 
LOCATION AND GUARDING OF COUNTERWEIGHTS 

The location and guarding of counterweights, where 
provided, shall conform to 2.3. 

SECTION 3.4 

BOTTOM AND TOP CLEARANCES AND RUNBYS FOR 

CARS AND COUNTERWEIGHTS 

Requirement 2.4 does not apply to hydraulic elevators. 

3.4.1 Bottom Car Clearance 

3.4.1.1 When the car rests on its fully compressed 
buffers or bumpers, there shall be a vertical clearance 
of not less than 600 mm (24 in.) between the pit floor 
and the lowest structural or mechanical part, equipment, 
or device installed beneath the car platform, including 
a plunger-follower guide, if provided, except as specified 
in 3.4.1.2. 

3.4.1 .2 The 600 mm (24 in.) clearance does not apply 
to the following: 

(a) any equipment on the car within 300 mm (12 in.) 
horizontally from any side of the car platform 

(b) any equipment located on or traveling with the 
car located within 300 mm (12 in.) horizontally from 
either side of the car frame centerline parallel to the 
guide rails 

(c) any equipment mounted in or on the pit floor 
located within 300 mm (12 in.) horizontally from either 
side of the car frame centerline parallel to the guide rails 

3.4.13 In no case shall the available refuge space be 
less than either of the following: 

(a) a horizontal area 600 mm x 1 200 mm (24 in. x 
47 in.), with a height of 600 mm (24 in.) 

(b) a horizontal area 450 mm x 900 mm (18 in. x 
35 in.), with a height of 1 070 mm (42 in.) 

3.4.1.4 Trenches and depressions or foundation 
encroachments permitted by 2.2.2 shall not be consid- 
ered in determining these clearances. 

3.4.1.5 When the car is resting on its fully com- 
pressed buffers or bumpers, no equipment traveling 



106 



SECTION 3.13-3.16.3 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



SECTION 3.13 

POWER OPERATION, POWER OPENING, AND 

POWER CLOSING OF HOISTWAY DOORS AND CAR 

DOORS OR GATES 

Power operation, power opening, and power closing 
of hoistway doors and car doors or gates shall conform 
to 2.13. 



SECTION 3.14 

CAR ENCLOSURES, CAR DOORS AND GATES, AND 

CAR ILLUMINATION 

Car enclosures, car doors and gates, and car illumina- 
tion shall conform to 2.14. 



SECTION 3.15 
CAR FRAMES AND PLATFORMS 

3.15.1 Requirements 

3.15.1.1 Direct-acting hydraulic elevators shall be 
provided with car frames and platforms conforming to 
2.15, subject to the modification hereinafter specified. 
(See 3.18.2.3 for connection between plunger and plat- 
form or car frame.) 

A car frame shall not be required, provided 3.15.1.1.1 
through 3.15.1.1.6 are conformed to. 

3.15.1.1.1 The platform frame shall be of such 
design and construction that all eccentric loads are car- 
ried through the structure and plunger attachment into 
the hydraulic jack (see 3.18.2.3). 

3.15.1.1.2 The platform frame shall be guided on 
each guide rail by single-guiding members attached to 
the frame. 

3.15.1.1.3 The platform frame shall be designed 
to withstand the forces resulting from the class of load- 
ing for which the elevator is designed without exceeding 
the stresses and deflections in 2.15.10 and 2.15.11 (see 
8.2.2.6). 

3.15.1.1.4 The hydraulic jack connection to the 
car shall be designed to transmit the full eccentric 
moment into the plunger with a factor of safety of not 
less than 4 (see 3.18.2.3). 

3.15.1.1.5 The hydraulic jack shall be designed to 
withstand the stresses due to bending during the loading 
and unloading of the platform based on the type of 
loading for which the elevator is designed (see 8.2.8.1.2). 

3.15.1.1.6 Car safeties shall not be provided. 

3.15.1.2 Roped-hydraulic elevators shall be pro- 
vided with car frames and platforms conforming to 2.15. 



3.15.2 Maximum Allowable Stresses and Deflections 
in Car Frame and Platform Members 

3.15.2.1 Direct-Acting Hydraulic Elevators. The 

stresses and deflections in car frame and platform mem- 
bers and their connections, based on the static load 
imposed upon them, shall be not more than those per- 
mitted by 2.15, provided that the maximum stresses 
in the car frame uprights that are normally subject to 
compression shall conform to 8.2.9.1.1. 

3.15.2.2 Roped-Hydraulic Elevators. The stresses and 
deflection in car frame and platform members and their 
connections, based on the static load imposed upon 
them, shall be not more than those permitted by 2.15, 
and shall conform to 8.2.2. 

3.15.3 Calculations of Stresses and Deflections in 
Car Frame and Platform Members 

3.1 5.3.1 Direct-Acting Hydraulic Elevators. The calcu- 
lations of the stresses and deflections in side-post car 
frame and platform members shall be based on the for- 
mulas and data in 8.2.9. 

For cars with corner-post or sub-post car frames, the 
formulas and specified methods of calculations do not 
generally apply and shall be modified to suit the specific 
conditions and requirements in each case. 

3.15.3.2 Roped-Hydraulic Elevators. The calculations 
of the stresses and deflections in side-post car frame and 
platform members shall be based on the formulas and 
data in 8.2.2. 

For cars with corner-post or sub-post car frames, or 
where the rope hitches are not on the crosshead, the 
formulas and specified methods of calculations do not 
generally apply and shall be modified to suit the specific 
conditions and requirements in each case. 

SECTION 3.16 
CAPACITY AND LOADING 

3.16.1 Minimum Rated Load for Passenger Elevators 

The requirements of 2.16.1 shall apply. 

3.16.2 Minimum Rated Load for Freight Elevators 

The requirements of 2.16.2 shall apply, except, in 
2.16.2.2.4(c) the wording "hydraulic jack, hydraulic 
machine, pressure piping and fittings" shall be substi- 
tuted for the wording "driving-machine motor, brake 
and traction relation." 

3.16.3 Capacity and Data Plates 

The requirements of 2.16.3 shall apply, except: 

(a) requirement 2.16.3.2.1(a) shall not apply to 
hydraulic elevators. 

(b) on data plates (see 2.16.3.2.2), the weight of the 
plunger is not to be included in the weight of the com- 
plete car, even though it is attached. The plunger weight 



109 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



3.16.3-3.17.3.2.2 



is to be indicated independently. The operating speed 
in the down direction shall also be indicated. 

3.16.4 Carrying of Passengers on Freight Elevators 

The requirements of 2.16.4 shall apply, except 2.16.4.3 
shall not apply to hydraulic elevators. 

3.16.5 Signs Required in Freight Elevators 

The requirements of 2.16.5 shall apply. 

3.16.6 Overloading of Freight Elevators 

The requirements of 2.16.6 shall apply, except 2.16.6(b) 
shall not apply to hydraulic elevators. 

3.16.7 One-Piece Loads Exceeding the Rated Load 

Requirement 2.16.7 shall not apply. One-piece loads 
exceeding rated load shall not be carried on hydraulic 
elevators. 

3.16.8 Additional Requirements for Passenger 
Overload 

Requirement 2.16.8 shall not apply. Hydraulic passen- 
ger elevators shall be designed based on 100% of 
rated load. 

3.16.9 Special Loading Means 

The requirements of 2.16.9 shall apply. 

SECTION 3.17 

CAR AND COUNTERWEIGHT SAFETIES AND 

PLUNGER GRIPPER 

3.17.1 Car Safeties 

Car safeties shall be provided for roped-hydraulic ele- 
vators and shall be permitted to be provided for direct- 
acting hydraulic elevators. When provided, car safeties 
shall conform to 2.17, and to 3.17.1.1 through 3.17.1.3. 

3.17.1.1 The slack-rope device required by 3.18.1.2 
shall be permitted to be an additional means of activat- 
ing the car safety on roped-hydraulic elevators using 
hydraulic jacks equipped with plungers. The slack-rope 
device required by 3.18.1.2.7 shall be an additional 
means of activating the car safety on roped-hydraulic 
elevators using hydraulic jacks equipped with pistons. 

(05a) 3.17.1.2 The safety shall be of a type that can be 
released only by moving the car in the up direction. To 
return a car to normal operation after a safety set, the 
car shall be moved hydraulically in the up direction. 
For repairs of obvious or suspected malfunction, the car 
shall be permitted to be raised by other means capable 
of holding the entire car weight. Prior to releasing the 
other means, the car shall be run hydraulically in the 
up direction. 

If an auxiliary pump is used to move the car in the 
up direction to release the safeties, it shall 

(a) have a relief valve that limits the pressure to not 
more than 2.3 times the working pressure 

(b) be connected between the check valve or control 
valve and the shutoff valve 



3.17.1.3 The switches required by 2.18.4.1 shall, 
when operated, remove power from the hydraulic 
machine motor and control valves before or at the time 
of application of the safety. 

3.17.2 Counterweight Safeties 

Counterweight safeties, where provided in accor- 
dance with 3.6.2, shall conform to 2.17, provided that 
safeties shall be operated as a result of the breaking 
or slackening of the counterweight suspension ropes, 
irrespective of the rated speed of the elevator. 

3.17.3 Plunger Gripper 

A plunger gripper shall be permitted to be provided 
for direct-acting hydraulic elevators using hydraulic 
jacks equipped with plungers. A plunger gripper shall 
be capable of stopping and holding the car with its rated 
load from the actual measured tripping speed per Table 
2.18.2.1 and shall conform to 3.17.3.1 through 3.17.3.9. 
In Table 2.18.2.1 the words "rated speed" shall be 
replaced by "operating speed in the down direction." 

3.17.3.1 Limits of Application. A plunger gripper 
shall be permitted, provided that 

(a) the external pressure applied to the plunger by 
the device is symmetrically distributed at locations 
around the circumference of the plunger. The resulting 
stress in the plunger shall not exceed 67% of the yield 
strength at any point of the plunger. 

(b) the external pressure applied to the plunger by 
the device does not exceed 67% of the value that will 
cause local buckling. Where the external pressure is 
applied over substantially the full circumference of the 
plunger, the maximum value shall be permitted to be 
determined by 8.2.8.6. 

(c) during the application, the plunger and the 
plunger gripper are capable of withstanding any vertical 
forces imposed upon them, and transfer such forces to 
the supporting structure. During the application of the 
device, any loading on the plunger shall not damage 
the cylinder. 

(d) power is removed from the hydraulic machine 
before or at the time of application. 

3.17.3.2 Means of Application. A plunger gripper 
shall mechanically grip the plunger. 

3.17.3.2.1 Hydraulic means are permitted to be 
used to hold the gripper in the retracted position. A 
loss of hydraulic pressure or fluid causing uncontrolled 
downward motion is permitted to be used to apply the 
plunger gripper. 

3.1 7.3.2.2 When electrical means are used to actu- 
ate the gripper, the following shall apply: 

(a) The plunger gripper shall be fully operational dur- 
ing a primary electrical system power failure. 

(b) In the event of the failure of any single mechani- 
cally operated switch, contactor, relay, solenoid, or any 
single solid-state device, or a software system failure, 



110 



3.19.3.3.1-3.19.4.7.2 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



(b) have a bursting strength sufficient to withstand 
not less than 10 times working pressure (see 1.3). They 
shall be tested in the factory or in the field prior to 
installation at a pressure of not less than 5 times working 
pressure and shall be marked with date and pressure 
of test. 

(c) conform to the requirements of SAE 100, R2 type 
hose specified in SAE J517 and be compatible with the 
fluid used. 

(d) be of nonreusable-type fittings. 

(e) be permanently labeled /marked, indicating 

(1) the name or trademark by which the manufac- 
turer of the hose and fittings can be identified 

(2) the type of hose and fitting 

(3) the minimum factory test pressure 

(4) the minimum bending radius of hose 

(5) the date of installation 

(6) the inspection procedure 

(7) the name of elevator contractor 

(f) have a line overspeed valve conforming to 3.19.4.7. 

3.19.3.3.2 Flexible couplings are permitted for 
hydraulic connections. Such couplings shall be so 
designed and constructed that failure of the sealing ele- 
ment will not permit separation of the connected parts. 
The devices or means used to prevent the separation of 
the connected parts shall be removable only with the 
use of tools. Any devices or means that are removable 
with hand-operated quick-released levers are pro- 
hibited. 

3.19.4 Valves 

3.19.4.1 Shutoff Valve. A manually operated shutoff 
valve shall be provided between the hydraulic machines 
and the hydraulic jack and shall be located outside the 
hoistway and adjacent to the hydraulic machine on all 
hydraulic elevators. 

3.19.4.2 Pump Relief Valve 

3.19.4.2.1 Each pump or group of pumps shall be 
equipped with one or more relief valve(s) conforming 
to the following requirements: 

(a) Type and Location. The relief valve shall be located 
between the pump and the check valve and shall be of 
such a type and so installed in the bypass connection 
that the valve cannot be shut off from the hydraulic 
system. 

(b) Size. The size of the relief valve and bypass shall 
be sufficient to pass the maximum rated capacity of the 
pump without raising the pressure more than 50% above 
the working pressure. Two or more relief valves shall 
be permitted to be used to obtain the required capacity. 

(c) Sealing. Relief valves shall be sealed after being 
set to the correct pressure. 

3.19.4.2.2 No relief valve is required for centrifu- 
gal pumps driven by induction motors, provided the 



shut-off, or maximum pressure that the pump can 
develop, is not greater than 135% of the working pres- 
sure at the pump. 

3.19.4.3 Check Valve. A check valve shall be provided 
and shall be so installed that it will hold the elevator 
car with rated load at any point when the pump stops 
and the down valves are closed or the maintained pres- 
sure drops below the minimum operating pressure. 

3.19.4.4 Manual Lowering Valve. A manually oper- 
ated valve, located on or adjacent to the control valves, 
shall be provided and identified, which permits low- 
ering the car at a speed not exceeding 0.10 m/s 
(20 ft/min). This valve shall be so marked to indicate 
the lowering position. 

3.19.4.5 Pressure Gauge Fittings. A pressure gauge 
fitting with shutoff valve shall be provided on jack side 
of the check valve or immediately adjacent to the 
hydraulic control valve. 

3.19.4.6 Type Tests, Certification, and Marking Plates 
for Control Valves 

3.19.4.6.1 Each type or model and make of 
hydraulic control valve shall be subjected to the engi- 
neering tests and to the certification process as specified 
in 8.3.5. 

3.19.4.6.2 Hydraulic control valves shall be 
plainly marked in a permanent manner with the follow- 
ing information: 

(a) certifying organization's name or identifying 
symbol 

(b) the name, trademark, or file number by which 
the organization that manufactured the product can be 
identified 

(c) statement of compliance with ASME A17.1 or 
CSAB44 

(d) type designation 

(e) component rated pressure 

(f) electrical coil data 

3.19.4.7 Overspeed Valves. When provided, 
overspeed valves and their connections and attachments 
shall conform to 3.19.4.7.1 through 3.19.4.7.6. 

3.19.4.7.1 Overspeed Valve Tests. Each type or 
model of overspeed valve shall be subjected to the engi- 
neering tests specified in 8.3.9. 

3.19.4.7.2 Marking of Overspeed Valves. The 

overspeed valves shall be plainly marked in a permanent 
manner with the following: 

(a) the name or trademark by which the organization 
that manufactured the product can be identified 

(b) type designation 

(c) component rated pressure 

(d) maximum and minimum rated flow 



115 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



3.19.4.7.3-3.22.1.1 



3.19.4.7.3 Installation of Overspeed Valves. 

Overspeed valves shall be installed and mounted as 
follows: 

(a) Single Jack Arrangements. Where a single valve is 
used, it shall be located in the pressure piping within 
300 mm (12 in.) of the hydraulic jack. Multiple parallel 
valves are permitted in lieu of a single valve. These shall 
be located so as to minimize the distance from the valves 
to the hydraulic jack. 

(b) Multiple Jack Arrangements. Multiple jack arrange- 
ments shall conform with one of the following: 

(1) A single overspeed valve shall be located in the 
pressure piping within 300 mm (12 in.) of each hydraulic 
jack. Multiple parallel valves are permitted in lieu of 
single valves at each hydraulic jack. These shall be 
located so as to minimize the distance from the valves 
to each hydraulic jack. 

(2) A single overspeed valve shall be located in the 
pressure piping on the hydraulic machine side of, and 
immediately before, the tee junction, wye junction, or 
branch junction that connects the branch pressure pipes 
to the jacks. Multiple parallel valves are permitted in 
lieu of a single valve at the junction. For dual hydraulic 
jack systems, the total length of branch pressure pipe 
between the tee or wye junction and the jacks shall 
not exceed the distance between the jacks, measured 
horizontally, plus 1 m (39 in.). For multiple jack systems, 
the length of branch pressure piping shall be minimized. 

3.19.4.7.4 Strength of Overspeed Valve Pressure 
Piping and Fittings Between the Overspeed Valve and the 
Jacks. The factor of safety of the overspeed valve pres- 
sure piping and fittings shall be not less than 1.5 times 
the value obtained using 8.2.8.5, provided that the mini- 
mum factor of safety is not less than 4.5, and the mini- 
mum percentage elongation is not less than 5 for the 
overspeed valve and fittings and not less than 20 for 
the pressure piping. 

3.19.4.7.5 Performance Requirements. The 

overspeed valve shall be constructed, installed, and 
adjusted to ensure that the elevator obtains the following 
performance: 

(a) The overspeed valve tripping speed shall be not 
less than 110% nor greater than 140% of the elevator 
operating speed in the down direction, but in no case 
shall exceed 0.3 m/s (60 ft/min) above the rated elevator 
speed. 

(b) The average deceleration rate shall be not less 
than 1.96 m/s 2 (6.44 ft/s 2 ) nor more than 9.81 m/s 2 
(32.2 ft/s 2 ). 

(c) Any peak deceleration rate in excess of 24.53 m/s 2 
(80.5 ft/s 2 ) shall have a duration of not greater than 
0.04 s. 

3.19.4.7.6 Sealing of the Overspeed Valve. Field- 
adjustable overspeed valves shall be sealed after field 
setting. 



3.19.5 Piping Buried in the Ground 

3.19.5.1 Protection. Piping buried in the ground shall 
be provided with protection from corrosion by one or 
more of the following methods: 

(a) monitored cathodic protection 

(b) a coating to protect the piping from corrosion that 
will withstand the installation process 

(c) a protective casing, immune to galvanic or electro- 
lytic action, salt water, and other known underground 
conditions, completely surrounding the exterior sur- 
faces of the piping 

3.19.5.2 Seals. Piping buried in the ground shall not 
include seals or other elements potentially requiring ser- 
vice or replacement. 

3.19.6 Welding 

3.19.6.1 All welding of valves, pressure piping, and 
fittings shall conform to 8.8. 

3.19.6.2 Field welding of pressure piping and fit- 
tings shall also be permitted to be performed by welders 
certified to the requirements pertaining to pressure 
systems. 

3.19.7 Electrical Requirements 

Hydraulic control valves shall conform to the electrical 
requirements in Clause 4 of CSA C22.2 No. 139. 

SECTION 3.20 
ROPES AND ROPE CONNECTIONS 

Where a counterweight is provided, the counter- 
weight shall be connected to the car by not less than 
two steel wire ropes. 

The wire ropes and their connections shall conform 
to 2.20, except that the factor of safety of the wire ropes 
shall be not less than 7. 

SECTION 3.21 
COUNTERWEIGHTS 

3.21.1 Counterweights 

Counterweights, where provided, shall conform to 
2.21. In the event of the separation of the counterweight 
from the car, the static pressure shall be not more than 
140% of the working pressure. 

3.21.2 Counterweight Sheaves 

Sheaves for counterweight ropes shall conform to 
2.24.2, 2.24.3, and 2.24.5. 

SECTION 3.22 
BUFFERS AND BUMPERS 

3.22.1 Car Buffers or Bumpers 

Car buffers or bumpers shall be provided and shall 
conform to 2.22, provided that in applying the require- 
ments of 2.22 to hydraulic elevators 3.22.1.1 through 
3.22.1.5 are complied with. 

3.22.1.1 The term "operating speed in the down 
direction with rated load" shall be substituted for the 
words "rated speed" wherever these words appear. 



(05a) 



116 



3.22.1.2-3.25.1.1 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



3.22.1.2 In place of 2.22.3.2, the requirements speci- 
fied in 322.12.1 and 3.22.1.2.2 shall be substituted. 

3.22.1.2.1 Buffers shall be capable of withstanding 
without being compressed solid the loading per 8.2.3.2. 

3.22.1.2.2 Buffers shall be compressed solid with 
a loading of 2 times that described in 8.2.3.2. 

3.22.1.3 Requirement 2.22.4.1.2 shall not apply. 
Reduced stroke buffers shall not be provided on hydrau- 
lic elevators. Car buffers or bumpers shall be so located 
that the car will come to rest on the bumper or fully 
compressed buffer, or to a fixed stop, before the plunger 
reaches its down limit of travel. 

3.22.1.4 When multiple buffers are used, each shall 
be identical and designed for an equal proportion of the 
loading described in 3.22.1.2. 

3.22.1.5 Plunger weight, less buoyant effects of the 
plungers at the buffer strike point, shall be added, if 
applicable, and used in buffer calculations. 

3.22.1.6 Solid bumpers are permitted on hydraulic 
elevators having an operating speed in the down direc- 
tion of 0.25 m/s (50 ft/min) or less. See 2.22.2 for solid 
bumper material. 

3.22.2 Counterweight Buffers 

Where counterweights are provided, counterweight 
buffers shall not be provided. (See 3.4.6 for required 
counterweight runby.) 

SECTION 3.23 

GUIDE RAILS, GUIDE-RAIL SUPPORTS, AND 

FASTENINGS 

3.23.1 Direct-Acting Hydraulic Elevators 

Guide rails, guide-rail supports, and their fastenings 
shall conform to 2.23, with the exceptions specified in 
3.23.1.1 through 3.23.1.4. 

3.23.1.1 Requirement 2.23.4.1 shall apply only where 
car safeties are used and the maximum load on the car 
side for direct-acting hydraulic elevators is the maxi- 
mum weight of the car and its rated load plus the weight 
of the plunger or cylinder as applicable. 

3.23.1.2 Requirement 2.23.4.2 shall apply only where 
safeties are used. 

(ED) 3.23.1.3 Requirement 2.23.9.1.1(a) shall apply only 
where safeties are used. 

3.23.1.4 Requirement 2.28 shall not apply. 

3.23.2 Roped-Hydraulic Elevators 

3.23.2.1 Car and counterweight guide rails, guide- 
rail supports, and their fastenings shall conform to 2.23. 



3.23.2.2 The traveling sheave, if provided, shall be 
guided by means of suitable guide shoes and guide rails 
adequately mounted and supported. 

SECTION 3.24 
HYDRAULIC MACHINES AND TANKS 

3.24.1 Hydraulic Machines (Power Units) 

3.24.1.1 Marking Plates. The working pressure that 
is developed in the system shall be measured at the 
acceptance inspection and test. This pressure shall be 
legibly and permanently labeled /marked on a data plate 
that shall be mounted on the hydraulic machine. 

3.24.2 Tanks 

3.24.2.1 Capacity. Tanks shall be of sufficient capacity 
to provide for an adequate liquid reserve in order to 
prevent the entrance of air or other gas into the system. 

3.24.2.2 Minimum Level Indication. The permissible 
minimum liquid level shall be clearly indicated. 

3.24.3 Atmosphere Storage and Discharge Tanks 

3.24.3.1 Covers and Venting. Tanks shall be covered 
and suitably vented to the atmosphere. 

3.24.3.2 Factor of Safety. Tanks shall be so designed 
and constructed that when completely filled, the factor 
of safety shall be not less than 4, based on the ultimate 
strength of the material. 

3.24.3.3 Means for Checking Liquid Level. Tanks shall 
be provided with means for checking the liquid level. 
Such means shall be accessible without the removal of 
any cover or other part. 

3.24.4 Welding 

All welding of hydraulic machine components shall 
conform to 8.8. 



3.24.5 DELETED 



SECTION 3.25 
TERMINAL STOPPING DEVICES 

3.25.1 Normal Terminal Stopping Devices 

3.25.1.1 Where Required and Function. Upper and 
lower normal terminal stopping devices shall be pro- 
vided and arranged to slow down and stop the car 
automatically, at or near the top and bottom terminal 
landings, with any load up to and including rated load 
in the car from any speed attained in normal operation. 
Such devices shall function independently of the opera- 
tion of the normal stopping means and the terminal 
speed reducing device, where provided. The device shall 



(05a) 



117 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



3.25.1.1-3.26.2 



be so designed and installed that it will continue to 
function until the car reaches its extreme limits of travel. 
The device shall be permitted to be rendered inopera- 
tive during recycling operation (see 3.26.7). 

3.25.1.2 Location of Stopping Switches. Stopping 
switches shall be located on the car, in the hoistway, in 
the machine room, or in overhead spaces, and shall be 
operated by movement of the car. 

3.25.1.3 Requirements for Stopping Switches on the 
Car or in the Hoistway. Stopping switches located on the 
car or in the hoistway and operated by cams on the car 
or in the hoistway shall conform to 2.25.1. 

3.25.1.4 Requirements for Stopping Switches in a 
Machine Room or Overhead Space. Stopping switches 
located in a machine room or in an overhead space shall 
conform to 2.25.2.3, except that the device required by 
2.25.2.3.2 shall cause the electric power to be removed 
from the main control valve or from its control switch 
operating magnets and, in the case of electrohydraulic 
elevators, where stopping the car is effected by stopping 
the pump motor, from the pump motor and associated 
valves. 

3.25.2 Terminal Speed Reducing Devices 

3.25.2.1 Where Required. Terminal speed reducing 
devices shall be installed for the up direction where the 
car speed exceeds 0.25 m/s (50 ft/min), to ensure that 
the plunger does not strike its solid limit of travel at a 
speed in excess of 0.25 m/s (50 ft/min) (see 3.18.4.1). 

3.25.2.2 Requirements. Terminal speed reducing 
devices shall conform to 3.25.2.2.1 through 3.25.2.2.5. 

3.25.2.2.1 They shall operate independently of the 
normal terminal-stopping device and shall function to 
reduce the speed of the car if the normal terminal stop- 
ping device fails to slow down the car at the terminals 
as intended. 

3.25.2.2.2 They shall provide retardation not in 
excess of 9.81 m/s 2 (32.2 ft/s 2 ). 

3.25.2.2.3 They shall be so designed and installed 
that a single short circuit caused by a combination of 
grounds or by other conditions shall not render the 
device ineffective. 

3.25.2.2.4 Control means for electrohydraulic ele- 
vators shall conform to the following: 

(a) For the up direction of travel, at least two control 
means are required; one or both to be controlled by the 
terminal speed reducing device and the other or both 
by the normal terminal stopping device. 

If, in the up direction, the pump motor is the only 
control means, the pump motor control shall conform 
to the following: 



(1) Two devices shall be provided to remove power 
independently from the pump motor. At least one device 
shall be an electromechanical contactor. 

(2) The contactor shall be arranged to open each 
time the car stops. 

(3) The electrical protective devices shall control 
both devices [see 3.25.2.2.4(b)(1)] in accordance with 
3.26.4. 

If, however, the pump motor is one control means, 
and there is a second control means (e.g., a valve), at 
least one of the means shall be directly controlled by an 
electromechanical contactor or relay. 

(b) For the down direction, the terminal speed reduc- 
ing and normal terminal stopping devices shall each 
directly, or through separate switches, affect the control 
valve. Where two devices are used, the terminal speed 
reducing and normal terminal stopping devices each 
shall be permitted to control one or both. 

3.25.2.2.5 Where magnetically operated, optical 
or solid-state devices are used for position sensing, a 
single short circuit caused by a combination of grounds 
or by other conditions, or the failure of any single mag- 
netically operated, optical, or solid-state device, shall not 

(a) render the terminal speed reducing device inoper- 
ative; or 

(b) permit the car to restart after a normal stop. 

3.25.3 Final Terminal Stopping Devices 

Final terminal stopping devices are not required. 

SECTION 3.26 
OPERATING DEVICES AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT 

3.26.1 Operating Devices and Control Equipment 

Operating devices and control equipment shall con- 
form to 2.26, except as modified by the following: 

(a) Requirement 2.26.1.3 does not apply. 

(b) Requirement 2.26.1.4 applies as specified by 3.26.2. 

(c) Requirement 2.26.1.6 applies as specified by 3.26.3. 

(d) Requirement 2.26.2 applies as specified by 3.26.4. 

(e) Requirement 2.26.6 does not apply. 

(f) Requirement 2.26.8 does not apply. 

(g) Requirements 2.26.9.1, 2.26.9.2, 2.26.9.5, 2.26.9.6, 
and 2.26.9.7 do not apply. 

(h) Requirement 2.26.10 does not apply. 

3.26.2 Inspection Operation 

Top-of-car operating devices shall be provided and 
shall conform to 2.26.1.4. In-car and machine room 
inspection operation conforming to 2.26.1.4 shall be per- 
mitted. 

The bottom normal terminal stopping device shall be 
permitted to be made ineffective while the elevator is 
under the control of the inspection operation device. 



118 



3.26.3-3.26.7 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



car 



3.26.3 Anticreep and Leveling Operati 

3.26.3.1 Anticreep Operation. Each elevator shall be 
provided with an anticreep operation to correct automat- 
ically a change in car level. It shall conform to 2.26.1.6.2 
and 2.26.1.6.3, and 3.26.3.1.1 through 3.26.3.1.5. 

3.26.3.1.1 The anticreep device shall operate the 
at a speed not exceeding 0.125 m/s (25 ft/min). 

3.26.3.1.2 The anticreep device shall maintain the 
car within 25 mm (1 in.) of the landing, irrespective of 
the position of the hoistway door. 

3.26.3.1.3 For electrohydraulic elevators, the 
anticreep device shall be required to operate the car only 
in the up direction. 

3.26.3.1.4 Operation dependent on the availability 
of the electric power supply is permitted, provided that 

(a) the mainline power disconnecting means is kept 
in the closed position at all times except during mainte- 
nance, repairs, and inspection 

(b) a sign is placed on the switch stating, "KEEP 
SWITCH CLOSED EXCEPT DURING MAINTE- 
NANCE, REPAIRS, AND INSPECTIONS" 

(c) the sign shall be made of durable material and 
securely fastened and have letters with a height of not 
less than 6 mm (0.25 in.) 

3.26.3.1.5 Only the following, when activated, 
shall prevent operation of the anticreep device: 

(a) the electrical protective devices listed in 3.26.4.1 

(b) recycling operation (see 3.26.7) 

(c) inspection transfer switch 

(d) hoistway access switch 

(e) low oil protection means 

(f) oil tank temperature shutdown devices 

3.26.3.2 Operation in Leveling or Truck Zone. Opera- 
tion of an elevator in a leveling or truck zone at any 
landing by a car-leveling or truck-zoning device, when 
the hoistway doors, or the car doors or gates, or any 
combination thereof, are not in the closed position, is 
permissible, subject to the requirements of 2.26.1.6.1 
through 2.26.1.6.5. A leveling or truck-zoning device 
shall operate the car at a speed not exceeding 0.125 m/s 
(25 ft/min). 

3.26.4 Electrical Protective Devices 

Electrical protective devices shall be provided in con- 
formance with 2.26.2, and the following requirements, 
except the words "driving machine motor and brake" 
in 2.26.2 shall be replaced with "hydraulic machine," 
and shall conform to 3.26.4.1 and 3.26.4.2. 

3.26.4.1 When in the open position, the electrical 
protective devices shall prevent operation by all 
operating means, except as specified in 3.26.4.2. 



3.26.4.2 When in the open position, the following 
devices shall initiate removal of power from the hydrau- 
lic machine in such a manner as to produce an average 
deceleration rate not greater than 9.8 m/s 2 (32.2 ft/s 2 ) 
and shall prevent operation by all operating means 
except the anticreep device: 

(a) emergency stop switches, where required by 
2.26.2.5 

(b) broken rope, tape, or chain switches provided in 
connection with normal stopping devices, when such 
devices are located in the machine room or overhead 
space 

(c) hoistway door interlocks or hoistway door con- 
tacts 

(d) car door or gate electric contacts; or car door inter- 
locks 

(e) hinged car platform sill electric contacts 

(f) in-car stop switch, where required by 2.26.2.21 

3.26.5 Phase Reversal and Failure Protection 

Hydraulic elevators powered by a polyphase AC 
motor shall be provided with the means to prevent over- 
heating of the drive system (pump and motor) due to 
phase rotation reversals or failure. 

3.26.6 Control and Operating Circuits 

The design and installation of the control and 
operating circuits shall conform to 3.26.6.1 and 3.26.6.2. 

3.26.6.1 Springs, where used to actuate switches, 
contactors, or relays to stop an elevator at the terminals 
or to actuate electrically operated valves, shall be of the 
compression type. 

3.26.6.2 The completion or maintenance of an elec- 
tric circuit shall not be used to interrupt the power to 
the control valve operating magnets, or to the pump 
driving motor of electrohydraulic elevators, or both 
under the following conditions: 

(a) to stop the car at the terminals 

(b) to stop the car when the emergency stop switch 
or any of the electrical protective devices operate 

3.26.7 Recycling Operation for Multiple or 
Telescopic Plungers 

Recycling operation shall permit the car to be lowered 
more than 25 mm (1 in.) below the bottom landing, 
but not require lowering in order to restore the relative 
vertical position of the multiple plunger sections, pro- 
vided that 

(a) the car is at rest at bottom landing 

(b) the doors and gates are closed and locked 

(c) no car calls are registered 

(d) the speed during recycling does not exceed normal 
down leveling speed but in no case shall be more than 
0.10 m/s (20 ft/min) 



119 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



3.26.7-3.27.2 



(e) normal operation cannot be resumed until car is 
returned to bottom landing and normal terminal stop- 
ping devices are restored to normal operation 

3.26.8 Pressure Switch 

When cylinders are installed with the top of the cylin- 
der above the top of the storage tank, a pressure switch 
shall be provided in the line between the cylinder and 
the valve, which shall be activated by the loss of positive 
pressure at the top of the cylinder. The switch shall 
prevent automatic door opening and the operation of 
the lowering valve or valves. The door(s) shall be permit- 
ted to open by operation of the in-car open button, when 
the car is within the unlocking zone. 

(05a) 3.26.9 Low Oil Protection 

3.26.9.1 A means shall be provided to render the 
elevator on normal operation inoperative if for any rea- 
son the liquid level in the tank falls below the permissible 
minimum. Suitable means include, but are not limited 
to, the following: 

(a) direct sensing of liquid level 

(b) a pump-run timer 

Actuation of the means shall automatically bring the 
car down to the lowest landing, when the doors are 
closed. 

3.26.9.2 When at the lowest landing, the doors shall 
comply with the following: 

(a) For elevators with power-operated doors that 
automatically close, the door(s) shall open and shall 
initiate automatic closing within 15 s. 

(b) For elevators with manual doors or with doors 
that do not automatically close, they shall be provided 
with a signal system to alert an operator to close the 
doors. 

3.26.9.3 The car shall then shut down. The means 
shall require manual reset before returning the car to 
service. For elevators with power-operated doors, the 
in-car door open button(s) shall remain operative, but 
the doors shall not be able to be power-opened from 
the landing. 

3.26.10 Auxiliary Power Lowering Operation 

Where the auxiliary power supply is provided solely 
for the purpose of lowering the car, in the case of main 
power supply failure, the auxiliary lowering operation 
shall conform to 3.26.10.1 through 3.26.10.3. 

3.26.10.1 Auxiliary lowering shall be permitted to 
be initiated, provided that all operating and control 
devices, including door open and close buttons, function 
as with normal power supply, except that the following 
devices shall be permitted to be bypassed or made inop- 
erative: 

(a) landing and car floor registration devices (or call 
buttons) 



(b) devices enabling operation by designated atten- 
dant (hospital service, attendant operation) 

(c) devices initiating emergency recall operation to 
the recall level, unless otherwise specified in 3.27 

(d) "FIRE OPERATION" switch, unless otherwise 
specified in 3.27 

3.26.10.2 When the auxiliary lowering operation has 
been initiated, the car shall descend directly to the lowest 
landing, except that the operating system shall be per- 
mitted to allow one or more intermediate stops, and 
then, after a predetermined interval, the car shall pro- 
ceed to the lowest landing, provided the auxiliary power 
supply is of sufficient capacity to open and close doors 
at each intermediate stop. 

3.26.10.3 If the car and landing doors are power 
operated, and if the auxiliary power supply is of ade- 
quate capacity, the doors shall open when the car stops at 
the lowest landing and shall close after a predetermined 
interval. 

NOTE (3.26.10): For the main disconnect switch auxiliary contact, 
see ANSI/NFPA 70 and CSA C22.1 requirements, where applicable 
(see Part 9). 

SECTION 3.27 
EMERGENCY OPERATION AND SIGNALING DEVICES 

Emergency operation and signaling devices shall con- 
form to 2.27, except as modified by the following: The 
requirements of 3.26.9 and 3.18.2.7 shall be modified 
when Phase I Emergency Recall Operation and Phase 
II Emergency In-Car Operation are in effect, as specified 
in 3.27.1 through 3.27.4. 

3.27.1 Phase I Emergency Recall Operation After 
Device Actuation 

If Phase I Emergency Recall Operation is activated 
while the elevator is responding to any of the following 
devices, the car shall return to the recall level: 

(a) low oil protection (see 3.26.9) 

(b) plunger follower guide protection, provided the 
car is capable of being moved (see 3.18.2.7) 

(c) auxiliary power lowering device (see 3.26.10) 

If the elevator is incapable of returning to the recall 
level, the car shall descend to an available floor. Upon 
arrival, automatic power-operated doors shall open, and 
then reclose within 15 s. The door open button shall 
remain operative. 

3.27.2 Phase I Emergency Recall Operation Prior to 
Device Actuation 

If any of the devices specified in 3.27.1(a), (b), or (c) 
is activated, while Phase I Emergency Recall Operation 
is in effect, but before the car reaches the recall level, 
the car shall 

(a) complete Phase I Emergency Recall Operation, if 
the car is above the recall level; or 



120 



3.27.2-3.27.3 ASME A17.1a-2005 



(b) descend to an available floor, if the car is below and Phase I Emergency Recall Operation is in effect, the 

the recall level. following shall apply: 

Upon arrival, automatic power-operated doors shall (a) automatic power-operated doors shall close 

open, and then reclose within 15 s. The door open button within 15 s 
shall remain operative. (b) the door open button shall remain operational 

3.27.3 Device Actuation at Recall Level 



If either of the devices specified in 3.27.1(a) or (c) is 
activated while the car is stationary at the recall level 



120.1 



5.1.11.1.2-5.1.14.2 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



5.1.11.1.2 Uphill End Emergency Exit. If the installa- 
tion arrangement is such that the car door cannot be used 
for an emergency exit when the car is located between 
landings, the car shall be provided with an emergency 
exit located in the uphill end of the car. The emergency 
exit door shall 

(a) be of the hinged type. 

(b) open only into the car. 

(c) extend from the floor or base moulding to a clear 
height of not less than 1 524 mm (60 in.) and shall pro- 
vide a clear width of not less than 356 mm (14 in.) when 
the door is open. 

(d) be provided with a locking means with a nonre- 
movable handle that can be opened only from the exte- 
rior of the car. The device shall be permitted to be 
openable from the interior of the car by use of a special 
key, which shall be of Group 1 Security (see 8.1). 

(e) be provided with an electric contact, which shall 
not permit the car to start or run, except under inspection 
conditions as provided for in 5.1.10.1 and 5.1.10.3. The 
contact shall conform to the following: 

(1) it shall not be accessible from the inside of 
the car 

(2) it shall be positively opened by a lever or other 
device attached to and operated by the door 

(3) the contacts shall be maintained in the open 
position by the action of gravity or by a restrained com- 
pression spring, or both, or by positive mechanical 
means 

(/) be of the same material and construction as 
required for the car enclosure. 

5.1.11.13 Emergency Exit Unloading Platforms. An 

emergency exit unloading platform is not required. If 
provided, an emergency exit unloading platform shall 
be attached to the car and shall be retractable and opera- 
ble only from the exterior of the car. It shall be located 
only on the uphill end of the car and shall be provided 
with an electric contact conforming to 5.1.11.1.2(e) and 
shall only be made in the retracted position of the 
platform. 

5.1.11.2 Car Enclosure Tops. Requirement 2.14.1.6 
does not apply. However, if equipment is placed or 
installed on inclined elevators that will require servicing 
from the top of the car or a car top emergency exit 
is provided, the car top shall conform to 2.14.1.6 and 
2.14.1.7. 

5.1.113 Glass and Plastic for Cars and Doors. Glass 
and safety plastic used in car or for doors shall be lami- 
nated glass or safety plastic conforming to the require- 
ments of ANSI Z97.1 or 16 CFR Part 1201.1 or 1202.2; 
or, be laminated glass or safety glass or safety plastic 
conforming to the requirements of CAN/CGSB-12.1, 
CAN/CGSB-12.11, and CAN/CGSB-12.12, whichever is 
applicable. 



5.1.11.4 Collapsible Gates. Requirement 2.14.6.3 (05a) 
shall not apply. Collapsible-type gates are not permitted. 

5.1.12 Car Frames and Platforms 

5.1.12.1 Materials for Car Frames and Platform 
Frames. Car frames and platform frames shall conform 
to 2.15.6.1, except that cast iron shall not be used for 
guiding supports or guide shoes. 

5.1.12.2 Platform Guards (Aprons). The entrance side 
of the platform shall be provided with smooth metal 
guard plates of not less than 1.5 mm (0.059 in.) thick 
steel, or material of equivalent strength and stiffness, 
reinforced and braced to the car platform and conform- 
ing to 5.1.12.2.1 through 5.1.12.2.5. 

5.1.12.2.1 It shall extend not less than the full 
width of the widest hoistway door opening plus the 
leveling zone in each direction. 

5.1.12.2.2 It shall have a straight vertical face in 
the direction of travel throughout the length described 
in 5.1.12.2.1 plus 75 mm (3 in.). 

5.1.12.23 The ends of the guard in each direction 
of travel shall be bent back at an angle of not less than 
60 deg nor more than 75 deg from the face provided for 
in 5.1.12.2.2. 

5.1.12.2.4 The straight vertical facing wall shall 
extend a minimum of 25 mm (1 in.) below the landing 
sills at any position above or below the landing to the 
extent of the leveling zones. 

5.1.12.2.5 The guard plate shall be able to with- 
stand a constant force of not less than 667 N (150 lbf) 
applied at right angles to and at any position on its 
face without deflecting more than 6 mm (0.25 in.) and 
without permanent deformation. 

5.1.12.2.6 Platform Stringers. Platform stringers (04) 
made of wood are not permitted. 

5.1.13 Capacity and Loading 

5.1.13.1 Benches or Seats. The inside net platform 
area (see Table 2.16.1) shall be permitted to be increased 
by an amount not greater than 50% of the area of the 
bench or seat, when a permanently located and nonfold- 
ing bench or seat is installed. 

5.1.13.2 Data Plates. Data plates shall be located on 
the uphill member of the car chassis (frame). 

5.1.14 Car and Counterweight Safeties 

5.1.14.1 Requirements for Safeties. Car and counter- 
weight safeties shall meet the requirements of 2.17, 
except as modified by 5.1.14.2, 5.1.14.3, 5.1.15, and 
5.1.18.4. 

5.1.14.2 Functions and Stopping Distance of Safeties. 

The safety device, or the combined safety devices where 
furnished, shall be capable of stopping and sustaining 
the entire car with its rated load from governor tripping 



133 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



5.1.14.2-5.1.14.3.2 



Table 5.1.14.2 Minimum and Maximum Stopping Distances at Given Angles From Horizontal 

SI Units 

Minimum and Maximum Stopping Distance, mm, at Angle From Horizontal, deg 



Rated 
Speed, 


Governor 
Trip, 


30 


45 




60 


70 


m/s 


m/s 


Min. 


Max. 


Min. 


Max. 


Min. 


Max. 


Min. 


Max. 


0-0.63 


0.90 


139 


453 


114 


417 


81 


369 


55 


333 


0.75 


1.05 


201 


541 


164 


489 


116 


420 


79 


367 


0.87 


1.25 


285 


661 


232 


586 


164 


489 


113 


415 


1.00 


1.40 


357 


765 


292 


671 


206 


549 


141 


456 


1.12 


1.55 


432 


872 


353 


758 


249 


611 


171 


498 


1.25 


1.70 


517 


993 


422 


858 


299 


681 


204 


546 


1.50 


2.00 


711 


1 270 


580 


1 084 


410 


840 


281 


655 


1.75 


2.30 


930 


1 584 


760 


1 340 


537 


1 022 


368 


780 


2.00 


2.55 


1 185 


1 948 


967 


1 637 


684 


1 232 


468 


923 


2.25 


2.90 


1 469 


2 355 


1 200 


1 970 


848 


1 467 


580 


1084 


2.50 


3.15 


1 779 


2 798 


1 453 


2 331 


1 027 


1 723 


700 


1 259 


3.00 


3.70 


2 494 


3 820 


2 036 


3 166 


1 440 


2 313 


985 


1 663 


3.50 


4.30 


3 329 


5 015 


2 718 


4 141 


1 922 


3 003 


1 315 


2 134 


4.00 


4.85 


4 285 


6 382 


3 499 


5 257 


2 474 


3 792 


1 692 


2 674 










Imperial 


Units 












Governor 
Trip, 
ft/min 




Minimum 


and Maximum 


i Stopping Distance, in., at Angle From Horizontal, deg 




Rated 
Speed, 
ft/min 


30 




45 




60 


70 


Min. 


Max. 


Min. 


Max. 


Min. 


Max. 


Min. 


Max. 


0-125 


175 


5.5 


18.0 


4.5 


16.5 


3.5 


14.5 


2.5 


13.0 


150 


210 


8.0 


21.5 


6.5 


19.5 


5.0 


17.0 


3.5 


14.5 


175 


250 


11.5 


26.0 


9.5 


23.0 


6.5 


19.5 


4.5 


16.5 


200 


280 


14.5 


30.0 


11.5 


26.5 


8.5 


22.0 


6.0 


18.0 


225 


308 


17.5 


34.5 


14.0 


30.0 


10.0 


24.0 


7.0 


20.0 


250 


337 


20.5 


39.0 


17.0 


34.0 


12.0 


27.0 


8.5 


21.5 


300 


395 


28.0 


50.0 


23.0 


43.0 


16.5 


33.0 


11.5 


26.0 


350 


452 


37.0 


62.5 


30.0 


53.0 


21.5 


40.5 


14.5 


31.0 


400 


510 


47.0 


77.0 


38.5 


64.5 


27.0 


48.5 


18.5 


36.5 


450 


568 


58.0 


93.0 


47.5 


77.5 


33.5 


58.0 


23.0 


43.0 


500 


625 


70.5 


110.5 


57.5 


92.0 


40.5 


68.0 


28.0 


50.0 


600 


740 


98.5 


150.5 


80.5 


125.0 


57.0 


91.0 


39.0 


65.5 


700 


855 


131.5 


197.5 


107.5 


163.0 


76.0 


118.5 


52.0 


84.5 


800 


970 


169.0 


251.5 


138.0 


207.0 


97.5 


149.5 


67.0 


105.5 



speed (see also 2.16.8) with an average horizontal retar- 
dation, measured over the total retardation time, not 
exceeding 2.46 m/s 2 (8.05 ft/s 2 ). 

Type B safeties shall stop the car with its rated load 
from governor tripping speed within range of the mini- 
mum and maximum stopping distances as determined 
by the formulas in 8.2.11. Table 5.1.14.2 shows the mini- 
mum and maximum stopping distances for various gov- 
ernor tripping speeds, when tested in conformance with 
8.10 and 8.11. 

5.1.14.3 Limits of Use of Various Types of Safeties 



5.1.14.3.1 Type A (Instantaneous) Safeties 

(a) Type A safeties shall not be used on inclined eleva- 
tors having a rated speed in excess of 0.64 m/s 
(125 ft/min) or with a governor tripping speed in excess 
of 0.75 m/s (150 ft/min). 

(b) Type A safeties that develop horizontal retarda- 
tions exceeding 2.46 m/s 2 (8.05 ft/s 2 ) shall not be used 
on inclined elevators. 

5.1.14.3.2 Type C Safeties. Type C safeties shall 
conform to 2.17.8.2, except as modified by the following: 



134 



5.1.21.1-5.2.1.4.2 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



power supply, it shall be backed up by a manual or 
battery operated device. 

5.1.22 End-Loading Inclined Elevators 

5.1.22.1 Additional Requirements. Inclined elevators 
that load and unload passengers through car doors 
located at the uphill and downhill ends of the car shall 
conform to the following additional requirements of 
5.1.22. 

5.1.22.2 Speed. The rated speed shall not exceed 
0.50 m/s (100 ft/min). 

5.1.22.3 Buffers. The buffers shall be oil type only, 
installed at both terminals, conforming to 5.1.17.4. 

Requirement 2.22.4.8 does not apply to end-loading 
inclined elevators. The buffer shall be compressed to 
within the overtravel distance when the car is level with 
the terminal landing. Each buffer shall be provided with 
a switch that shall prevent operation of the elevator by 
means of the normal operating device in the direction 
of travel towards that buffer unless it has returned to at 
least 90% of its stroke. 

5.1.22.4 Final Terminal Stopping Devices. The final 
terminal stopping devices shall conform to 2.25.3.1 and 
2.25.3.2, except for 2.25.3.2(a) and shall be located to 
operate within the reduced runby of end-loading 
inclined elevators. 

5.1.22.5 Retractable Sills. End-loading inclined ele- 
vators shall be permitted to be equipped with retractable 
sill conforming to the following: 

(a) They shall be designed so as to function without 
creating any pinching or shearing hazards. 

(b) They shall be equipped with return switches con- 
forming to 2.25.2.1.1 and 2.25.2.1.3, which shall prevent 
the operation of the car in the direction of travel toward 
that terminal unless the retractable sill returns to its 
normal position. 

5.1.22.6 Locking Car Doors. Car door locking devices 
on end-loading inclined elevators shall conform to 
2.14.4.2. 

(05a) 5.1.23 Special Requirements for Inclined Elevator 
Layout Drawings 

The forces and loads covered by 2.28.1(b), (c), and (f) 
shall be calculated based on the angle of inclination from 
the horizontal. 

SECTION 5.2 
UMITED-USE/LIMITED-APPLICATION ELEVATORS 

This Section applies to limited-use /limited-applica- 
tion elevators (see 1.3). 

NOTE: See also Part 8 for additional requirements that apply to 
Hmited-useAimited-application elevators. 

5.2.1 Electric Limited-Use/Limited-Application 
Elevators 

5.2.1.1 Construction of Hoistway and Hoistway Enclo- 
sures. The construction of hoistway enclosures shall con- 
form to 2.1, except as modified by 5.2.1.1.1 and 5.2.1.1.2. 



5.2.1.1.1 Requirement 2.1.1.4 does not apply. Ele- 
vators shall be installed in a single hoistway. 

5.2.1.1.2 Requirement 2.1.3 applies only when a 
floor is provided at the top of hoistway. 

(a) Requirement 2.1.3.1. Elevator machines and sheaves 
shall be permitted to be located inside the hoistway 
enclosure at the top or bottom without intervening 
enclosures or platforms. If a floor is provided at the top 
of the hoistway, it shall comply with 5.2.1.1.2(c). If a 
floor is provided, it shall be permitted to be of wood. 

(b) Requirement 2.1.3.2 does not apply. 

(c) Requirement 2.1.3.3 does not apply. The floor shall 
be designed in accordance with other floors in the build- 
ing. Where the machine is to be supported by the 
machine room floor, the floor shall be designed in accor- 
dance with. 2.9.4 and 2.9.5. 

(d) Requirement 2.1.3.4. The floor shall be permitted 
to be of wood. 

5.2.1.2 Pits. Pits shall conform to 2.2. 

5.2.1.3 Location and Guarding of Counterweights. The 

location and guarding of counterweights shall conform 
to 2.3, except as follows: Where counterweight guards 
conforming to 2.3.2 are not provided, lightweight chains, 
approximately 600 mm (24 in.) in length shall be 
attached to the bottom of the counterweight. These 
chains shall be spaced at 150 mm (6 in.) intervals to 
provide a warning to a person in the path of the descend- 
ing counterweight. 

5.2.1.4 Vertical Clearances and Runbys for Cars and 
Counterweights. Bottom and top car clearances and run- 
bys for cars and counterweights shall conform to 2.4, 
except as specified in 5.2.1.4.1 through 5.2.1.4.4. 

5.2.1.4.1 Bottom Car Clearance. Elevators shall con- 
form to 2.4.1 or 5.2.1.4.2. 

5.2.1.4.2 Alternative to Bottom Car Clearance 
Requirements. When the car rests on its solid bumper 
or fully compressed buffer, no part of the car or any 
equipment attached thereto shall strike the pit or any 
part of the equipment located therein. 

Nonremovable means shall be provided to mechani- 
cally hold the car above the pit floor to provide an area 
in the pit for maintenance and inspection, conforming 
to the following: 

(a) It shall hold the car at a height of not less than 
900 mm (35 in.) nor more than 2 000 mm (79 in.) above 
the pit floor and not less than 300 mm (12 in.) above 
the bottom landing sill, as measured from the underside 
of the car platform. 

(b) The means shall be so designed and constructed 
as to stop and hold the car at governor tripping speed 
with rated load in the car. 

(c) It shall not cause the stresses and deflections in 
car frame and platform members and their connections 



137 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



5.2.1.4.2-5.2.1.7.11 



to exceed the limits specified in 2.15.10 and 2.15.11. 

(d) If the means does not automatically activate when 
the lowest hoistway door is opened with the car not at 
the landing 

(1) it shall be capable of being operated without 
complete bodily entry into the pit. 

(2) a sign conforming to ANSI Z35.1, or CAN/CSA- 
Z321, whichever is applicable (see Part 9), shall be con- 
spicuously displayed inside the hoistway, which shall 
include a warning that there is an insufficient bottom 
car clearance and instructions for operating the device. 
The letters shall be not less than 25 mm (1 in.) in height. 

5.2.1.4.3 Top Car Clearance Requirements. Top car 

clearance shall conform to 2.4 or 5.2.1.4.4. 

5.2.1.4.4 Alternative to Top Car Clearance Require- 
ments. In existing buildings where the top car clearance 
conforming to 5.2.1.4.3 cannot be provided, the follow- 
ing shall apply: 

(a) When the car has reached its maximum upper 
movement, no part of the car or any equipment attached 
thereto, other than as permitted by 5.2.1.4.4(b), shall 
strike the overhead structure or any part of the equip- 
ment located in the hoistway. 

(b) Nonremovable means shall be provided to 
mechanically and electrically prevent upward move- 
ment of the car to provide an area above the car for 
maintenance and inspection, conforming to the fol- 
lowing: 

(1) The means shall prevent upward movement of 
the car to provide a refuge space conforming to 2.4.12. 

(2) The means shall be so designed and constructed 
as to stop upward movement of the car at governor- 
tripping speed with and without rated load in the car. 

(3) The means shall not cause the stresses and 
deflections in car frame and platform members and their 
connections to exceed the limits specified in 2.15.10 and 
2.15.11. 

(4) A sign conforming to ANSI Z35.1, or CAN/ 
CSA-Z321, whichever is applicable (see Part 9), shall be 
conspicuously displayed inside the hoistway which shall 
include a warning that there is an insufficient top car 
clearance and instructions for operating the means. The 
letters shall be not less than 25 mm (1 in.) in height. 

(5) The means shall be capable of being operated 
without complete bodily entry into the hoistway. 

(6) The force to actuate the means shall not require 
more than 90 N (20 lbf). 

(7) The top of car operating device shall not allow 
car movement until the means is actuated. 

5.2.1.5 Horizontal Car and Counterweight Clearances. 

Horizontal car and counterweight clearances shall con- 
form to 2.5. 

5.2.1.6 Protection of Spaces Below Hoistways. The 

protection of spaces below hoistways shall conform to 
2.6. 



5.2.1.7 Machine Rooms and Machinery Spaces. 

Machine rooms and machinery spaces shall conform to 
2.7, except as modified by 5.2.1.7.1 through 5.2.1.7.12. 
Equipment shall be located in elevator machine rooms, 
rooms containing other equipment essential to the oper- 
ation of the building, or the hoistway. 

5.2.1.7.1 Requirement 2.7.1.1 applies only where 
a separate machinery space is provided. 

5.2.1.7.2 Requirement 2.7.1.2 applies only where 
a separate machinery space is provided. When provided, 
it shall be enclosed to a height of not less than 2 000 mm 
(79 in.). 

5.2.1.7.3 Elevator machine and control equipment 
shall be permitted to be located in a room or space 
containing other machinery and equipment essential to 
the operation of the building, provided that they are 
separated from the other machinery or equipment by a 
substantial metal grille enclosure not less than 2 000 mm 
(79 in.) high with a self-closing and self-locking door 
and openable from the inside without a key. The grille 
enclosure shall be of a design that will reject a ball 50 mm 
(2 in.) in diameter. 

5.2.1.7.4 Requirement 2.7.2 does not apply. Where 
a machine is located at the bottom of the hoistway, the 
control equipment shall be located outside the hoistway 
or in a cabinet on the inside surface of the access door. 

5.2.1.7.5 Requirement 2.7.3.3 applies only where 
a separate room is provided for machine and control 
equipment. A permanent stair or ladder is not required 
when the machinery space is within the hoistway. 

5.2.1.7.6 Requirement 2.7.3.4.1 applies only where 
a separate machine room is provided and complete 
bodily entry is necessary. 

5.2.1.7.7 Access openings in elevator hoistway 
enclosures shall be provided with an electric contact 
conforming to 2.12.4 and 2.14.4.2.1 through 2.14.4.2.3 
that will cause interruption of power to the motor and 
brake when the access door is open. 

5.2.1.7.8 Requirement 2.7.4.1 does not apply. The 
minimum headroom shall be 2 000 mm (79 in.). 

5.2.1.7.9 Requirement 2.7.5.2 applies only when 
a separate machine room is provided. 

5.2.1.7.10 Requirement 2.7.6 does not apply. 
Where the machine is located in the hoistway and access 
to the pit is required for maintenance, a permanent man- 
ual or automatic means shall be provided to stop the 
car from descending more than 2 000 mm (79 in.) above 
the pit floor. 

5.2.1.7.11 Requirement 2.7.7 does not apply to 
machine rooms in hoistways. 



138 



5.2.1.7.12-5.2.1.16.1 



ASftrtE A17.1a-2005 



5.2.1.7.12 Where elevator machines are located 
inside the hoistway and complete bodily entry is 
required for inspection or maintenance 

(a) a permanent metal, concrete, or wood platform 
below or level with the machine beams shall be provided 

(b) the platform shall extend the full width and depth 
of the hoistway 

(c) the strength of the platform shall conform to 2. 1 .3.3 

(d) if the platform is of openwork construction, the 
openings shall reject a ball 25 mm (1 in.) in diameter 

(e) a clear headroom of not less than 2 000 mm (79 in.) 
shall be provided from the top of the platform to the 
underside of the hoistway ceiling 

5.2.1.8 Electrical Equipment, Wiring, Pipes, and Ducts 
in Hoistways and Machine Rooms. Electrical equipment, 
wiring, pipes, and ducts in hoistways and machine 
rooms shall comply with 2.8. 

5.2.1.9 Machinery and Sheave Beams, Supports, and 
Foundations. Machinery and sheave beams, supports, 
and foundations shall conform to 2.9. 

5.2.1.10 Guarding. The guarding of exposed auxil- 
iary equipment shall conform to 2.10. 

5.2.1.11 Protection of Hoistway Landing Openings. 
The protection of hoistway landing openings shall con- 
form to 2.11, except as modified by the following: 

(a) Requirement 2.11.2. Entrances shall be of the hori- 
zontal slide or single section swing type. 

(b) Requirement 2.11.10.3 does not apply. 

(c) Requirement 2.11.12 does not apply. 

(d) Requirement 2.11.13.5 does not apply. 

(e) Requirement 2.11.15.3 does not apply. 

(04) 5.2.1.12 Hoistway Door Locking Devices and Electric 
Contacts, and Hoistway Access Switches. Hoistway door 
locking devices, hoistway door and car door or gate 
electric contacts, and hoistway access switches shall con- 
form to 2.12, except as modified by the following: 

(a) Requirement 2.12.1.5 does not apply. Combination 
mechanical locks and electric contacts are not permitted. 

(b) Requirement 2.12.2.3(a). Truck zoning devices are 
not permitted. 

(c) Requirement 2.12.3 does not apply. 

(d) Requirement 2.12.7.3.2. The car cannot be operated 
at a speed greater than 0.15 m/s (30 ft/min). 

(e) Requirement 2.12.5. The dimension for the 
unlocking zone shall be not more than the straight verti- 
cal face of the platform guard minus 75 mm (3 in.). 

5.2.1.13 Power Operation of Hoistway Doors and Car 

Doors and Gates. When provided, power operation, 
power opening, and power closing of hoistway doors 
and car doors and gates shall conform to 2.13, except 
as modified by 5.2.1.13. 



(a) Requirement 2.13.1(b) is modified as follows: 
Power-operated swing hoistway doors shall be permit- 
ted with power-operated horizontally operated car 
doors. 

(b) Requirement 2.13.2.2.3 does not apply. 

(c) Requirement 2.13.3.4 does not apply. 

(d) Requirement 2.13.6 does not apply. 

5.2.1.14 Car Enclosures, Car Doors, and Car Situmina- 
tion. Car enclosures, car doors, and car illumination shall 
conform to 2.14, except as modified by the following: 

(a) Requirement 2.14.1.4. Cars shall not have more than 
one compartment. 

(b) Requirement 2.14.1.5 applies only where manual 
operation (see 5.2.1.28) is not provided. If a top emer- 
gency exit is provided, it shall conform to 2.14.1.5. 

(c) Requirement 2.14.1.9.1(c) does not apply. Equip- 
ment mounted to the car for freight handling shall not 
be permitted. 

(d) Requirement 2.14.3 does not apply. 

(e) Requirement 2.14.4.1 does not apply. An imperfo- 
rated door shall be provided at each entrance to the car. 

(f) Requirement 2.14.4.3 does not apply. Doors shall 
be of the horizontally sliding, accordion, or bifold type 
and so arranged to reduce the possibility of pinching. 
Material shall conform to 2.14.2.1. 

(g) Requirement 2.14.4.4 does not apply. 
(h) Requirement 2.14.4.7 does not apply. 
(i) Requirement 2.14.4.9 does not apply. 

(j) Requirement 2.14.4.11(b) does not apply. 
(k) Requirement 2.14.5.1 does not apply. There shall 
not be more than two entrances to the car. 

(/) Requirements 2.14.5.2 and 2.14.5.3 do not apply. 
(m) Requirement 2.14.6 does not apply. 

5.2.1.15 Car Frames and Platforms. Car frames and 
platforms shall conform to 2.15, except as modified by 
5.2.1.15.1 and 5.2.1.15.2. 

5.2.1.15.1 Underslung or Sub-Post Frames. 
Requirement 2.15.4 applies, except the term "guiding 
surfaces" shall be substituted for the term "guide rails." 

5.2.1.15.2 Platform Guards. Requirement 2.15.9.2 
does not apply. The platform guard shall have a straight 
vertical face, extending below the floor surface of the 
platform of not less than the depth of the unlocking 
zone plus 75 mm (3 in.). 

5.2.1.16 Capacity, Loading, Speed, and Rise 

5.2.1.16.1 Rated Load and Platform Area. The mini- 
mum rated load shall conform to 2.16.1, except as 
follows: 

(a) The maximum rated load shall not exceed 635 kg 
(1,400 lb). 

(b) The inside net platform area shall not exceed 
1.67 m 2 (18 ft 2 ). 

(c) Requirements 2.16.1.2 and 2.16.1.3 do not apply. 



139 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



5.2.1.16.2-5.2.1.23.2 



5.2.1.16.2 Capacity and Data Plates 

(a) Capacity plates shall indicate the rated load of the 
elevator in kilograms (kg), pounds (lb), or both. 

(b) Data plates shall conform to 2.16.3.2.2. 

(c) The material and marking of plates shall conform 
to 2.16.3.3. 

5.2.1.16.3 Additional Requirements for Passenger 
Overload. Elevators shall conform to 2.16.8. 

5.2.1.16.4 Maximum Rated Speed. The rated speed 
shall not be more than 0.15 m/s (30 ft/min). 

5.2.1.16.5 Maximum Rise. The maximum rise shall 
not be more than 7.6 m (25 ft). 

5.2.1.17 Car and Counterweight. Car and counter- 
weight safeties shall conform to 2.17, except as modified 
by 5.2.1.17.1. 

5.2.1.17.1 Application of Safeties. The force pro- 
viding the stopping action shall conform to 2.17.9.4 or 
the following: Where guide-rail sections other than those 
specified in 2.23.3(a) are used, the application of safety 
stopping forces shall not cause deformation of the guide- 
rail section upon whose dimensional stability the stop- 
ping capability is dependent. 

(05a) 5.2.1.18 Speed Governors. Speed governors shall 
conform to 2.18, except as modified by the following: 

(a) Requirement 2.18.2.1(b) does not apply. The trip- 
ping speed shall not exceed 0.38 m/s (75 ft/min). On 
the breakage of the suspension means, the safety shall 
operate without delay and independently of the gover- 
nor's speed action. 

(b) Requirement 2.18.4 does not apply. 

(c) Requirement 2.18.5. Governor ropes shall be not 
less than 6 mm (0.25 in.) in diameter. 

5.2.1.19 Ascending Car Overspeed and Unintended 
Car Movement Protection. Ascending car overspeed and 
unintended car movement protection shall conform to 
2.19. 

5.2.1.20 Suspension Ropes and Their Connections. 

Suspension ropes and their connections shall conform 
to 2.20, except for 2.20.1 and 2.20.3. Suspension ropes 
and their connections shall also conform to 5.2.1.20.1 
and 5.2.1.20.2. 

5.2.1.20.1 Suspension Means. Cars shall be sus- 
pended by ropes attached to the car frame or passing 
around sheaves attached to the car frame specified in 
2.15.1. Ropes that have previously been installed and 
used on another installation shall not be reused. Only 
rope having the following classifications shall be used 
for the suspension of limited-use/limited-application 
elevator cars and for the suspension of counterweights: 
(a) Iron (low-carbon steel) or steel wire rope, having 
the commercial classification "Elevator Wire Rope," or 
wire rope specifically constructed for elevator use. The 



wire material for these wire ropes shall be manufactured 
by the open-hearth or electric furnace process or their 
equivalent. 

(b) Aircraft cable rope of 7 x 19 construction, classi- 
fied as Mil Spec 83420, shall be permitted in those appli- 
cations where aircraft cable rope is not subjected to 
crushing pressures, with the following exceptions per- 
mitted: 

(1) nonjacketed, carbon steel, tin- or zinc-coated 
(Type 1A) 7 x 19 construction (Section 3.2.4 of Mil Spec 
83420) 

(2) identifying color tracer filaments are not 
required (Section 3.5.2 of Mil Spec 83420) 

5.2.1.20.2 Factor of Safety. The factor of safety shall 
be specified in accordance with the following: 

(a) "Elevator Wire Rope" [see 5.2.1.20.1(a)] shall com- 
ply with 2.20.3. 

(b) "Aircraft Cable Rope" [see 5.2.1.20.1(b)] shall have 
a factor of safety of not less than 7.5. 

5.2.1.21 Counterweights. Counterweights shall con- 
form to 2.21, except as modified by 5.2.1.21.1. 

5.2.1.21.1 Independent Car Counterweights. 

Requirement 2.21.1.4 applies, except that the counter- 
weight shall be permitted to utilize the same guide rails 
as the car. 

5.2.1.22 Buffers and Bumpers. Buffers and bumpers 
shall conform to 2.22, except as modified by 5.2.1.22.1. 

5.2.1.22.1 Bumpers. Elastomeric bumpers capable 
of absorbing the energy of a fully loaded car shall be 
permitted to be used. The average deceleration shall be 
less than 9.81 m/s 2 (32.2 ft/s 2 ) with any load between 
61 kg (135 lb) and rated load. 

5.2.1.23 Car and Counterweight Guide Rails, Guide- 
Rail Supports, and Fastenings. Car and counterweight 
guide rails, guide-rail supports, and fastenings shall con- 
form to 2.23, except as modified by 5.2.1.23.1 and 
5.2.1.23.2. 

5.2.1.23.1 Use of Common Guide Rails. The same 
set of guide rails shall be permitted to be used for both 
the car and counterweight. 

5.2.1.23.2 Guide-Rail Sections. Requirements 
2.23.3(a) and 2.23.3(b)(1) do not apply. Guide rails, sup- 
ports, joints, fishplates, and fastenings that do not con- 
form to 2.23 are permitted, provided that the strengths 
and stresses are consistent with 2.23 for the loads 
imposed. 

Where guide-rail sections other than those specified 
in 2.23.3(a) are used 

(a) requirement 2.23.10.2 does not apply. 

(b) the rail joints shall be designed in accordance with 
2.23.5.1 and shall adequately maintain the accuracy of 
the rail alignment. 



140 



5.2.1.23.2-5.2.2.5 



ASMEA17.1a-2005 



(c) the deflections shall comply with 2.23. The allow- 
able deflection of the guide rail shall be limited to pre- 
vent the safety device from disengaging the rail during 
the application of the load. 

5.2.1.24 Driving Machine and Sheaves. Driving 
machines and sheaves shall conform to 2.24, except for 
2.24.1, 2.24.2.1, and 2.24.2.2. Driving machines and 
sheaves shall also conform to 5.2.1.24.1 through 
5.2.1.24.3. 

5.2.1.24.1 Type of Driving Machines. All driving 
machines shall be of the traction type, except that wind- 
ing-drum machines that do not have multiple cable lay- 
ers on the drum shall be permitted for elevators, subject 
to the following: They shall not be provided with coun- 
terweights. 

5.2.1.24.2 Material and Grooving. Sheave material 
and grooving shall be subject to the following: 

(a) Sheaves and drums used with "Elevator Wire 
Rope" [see 5.2.1.20.1(a)] shall be of metal and provided 
with finished grooves for ropes or shall be permitted to 
be lined with nonmetallic groove material. 

(b) Sheaves and drums used with "Aircraft Cable 
rope" [see 5.2.1.20.1(b)] shall be of metal and provided 
with finished "U" grooves that do not subject the aircraft 
cable rope to crushing pressure. 

5.2.1.24.3 Minimum Pitch Diameter. Sheaves and 
drums used with suspension and compensating ropes 
shall have a pitch diameter of not less than the following: 

(a) For all "Elevator Wire Rope/' the diameter shall 
not be less than 30 times the diameter of the rope, where 
used with suspension ropes. 

(b) For all "Elevator Wire Rope," the diameter shall 
not be less than 30 times the diameter of the rope, where 
used with compensating ropes. 

(c) For "7 x 19 Aircraft Cable Rope," the diameter 
shall not be less than 21 times the diameter of the rope, 
where used with either suspension ropes or compensat- 
ing ropes. 

5.2.1.25 Terminal Stopping Devices. Terminal stop- 
ping devices shall conform to 2.25, except as follows: 

(a) Requirement 2.25.4 does not apply. 

(b) If the driving machine is of the winding drum 
type, a lower final terminal stopping device shall be 
used in addition to the slack-rope switch, and two inde- 
pendent upper final terminal stopping devices shall be 
provided. A separate device shall be used to operate 
the lower final terminal and one upper final terminal 
stopping device. All final terminal stopping and slack- 
rope devices shall operate independently of one another. 
The power feed lines to the driving machine and brake 
shall be opened by one or both of the upper final termi- 
nal stopping devices and either the slack-rope switch or 
the lower terminal stopping device, or both. 



5.2.1.26 Operating Devices and Control Equipment. 
Operating devices and control equipment shall conform 
to 2.26, except as modified by the following: 

(a) Requirement 2.26.1.3 does not apply. 

(b) Requirement 2.26.2.5 does not apply. 

(c) Requirement 2.26.2.10 does not apply. 

(d) Requirement 2.26.2.12 does not apply. 

(e) Requirement 2.26.2.16 does not apply. 

5.2.1.27 Emergency Operations and Signaling 

Devices. Emergency operation and signaling devices 
shall conform to 2.27, except 2.27.3 through 2.27.8 do 
not apply. However, if firefighters' service is provided, 
it shall conform to 2.27. 

5.2.1.28 Manual Operation. Elevators shall be permit- 
ted to be arranged for manual operation in case of power 
failure. The manual operating device shall conform to 
the following: 

(a) It shall not be accessible from inside the car. 

(b) It shall not release the brake. 

(c) Upon removal of the device, the car shall not move. 

(d) It shall be actuated by mechanical means only. 

(e) Instructions shall be posted at or near the manual 
operating device. 

5.2.1.29 Layout Data. The information provided on 
layout data shall conform to 2.28. 

5.2.130 Welding. Welding shall conform to 8.8. 

5.2.131 identification. Identification shall conform (05a) 
to 2.29. 



5.2.2 Hydraulic limited-Use/Limited-Application 
Elevators 



5.2.2.1 Hoistways amdl Related Construction. 
Hoistways and related construction shall conform to 
5.2.1, except as modified by 5.2.2.2. 

5.2.2.2 Bottom and Top Clearances and Runbys. Bot- 
tom and top clearances and runbys for cars and counter- 
weights shall conform to 3.4, except as follows: 

(a) Bottom car clearances shall conform to 3.4.1 or 
5.2.1.4.2. 

(b) Requirement 3.4.2.1 does not apply. The bottom 
car runby shall not be less than 50 mm (2 in.). 

(c) The top car clearances shall conform to 3.4.4 or 
5.2.1.4.4. 

5.2.2.3 Mechanical Equipment Mechanical equip- 
ment shall conform to 3.14 through 3.17 and 3.21 through 
3.23, except as modified by 5.2.2.4, 5.2.2.5, 5.2.2.6, 5.2.2.9, 
and 5.2.2.10. 

5.2.2.4 Car Enclosures, Car Doors and Gates, and Car 
Illumination. Car enclosures, car doors and gates, and 
car illumination shall conform to 5.2.1.14. 

5.2.2.5 Platform Guards. The platform guard shall 
have a straight vertical face, extending below the floor 
surface of the platform of not less than the depth of the 
unlocking zone plus 75 mm (3 in.). 



(04) 



141 



ASME A17.1a-2005 



5.2.2.6-5.3.1.1.3 



5.2.2.6 Capacity, Loading, Speed, and Rise. The 

capacity, loading, speed, and rise shall conform to 
5.2.1.16. 

5.2.2.7 Alternative to Speed Governor for Roped- 
Hydraulic Elevators 

5.2.2.7.1 The safeties on roped-hydraulic eleva- 
tors shall be operated by a speed gove